cuteQM Piping User Management 1.1 Login To login into the cuteQM app, Open your web browser. Type the URL provided by your administrator, in the address bar of your web browser. The login page appears. In the login page, enter your user name and password in the respective boxes. Note: If you forgot your password, click “I can’t access my account”. You will be redirected into a new web page. Enter your username to receive your password. In the Module section, select Piping. Click Login. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM app, the home page of the cuteQM app opens.                                           Figure 4.1 Home page of cuteQM app Note: The user name you have entered, the project you have been assigned, and the module you have selected are displayed in the upper right corner of the home page. 1.2 My Profile If you want to upload digital signature , Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. Click My Profile option 3.Click Edit button placed at the right top corner as shown above fig 4.Click file upload icon as shown below 5.Upload the signature from device 7.Click Update button. My profile updated successfully. 1.3 Change Password If you want to change your current password, Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. Click the Change Password option. The Change Password page opens. Note: Before changing your password read the conditions specified in the Change Password page. In the Password box, enter your current password. In the New Password box, enter your new password. In the Confirm New Password box, enter your new password again. Click Change Password. Your password will be successfully changed. 1.4 Log Out If you want to log out from the app, Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. Click Log out. Your current session ends now. The home page appears.Home 2.0 The home menu in the cuteQM app used to view a dashboard and a switch board of a project. This menu helps you to change project and module. 2.1 Dashboard The Dashboard tab in the Home menu displays graphs, charts, and tables, which helps you to monitor and track the summary reports of various inspection and welding progress in the piping module. Note: The dashboard displayed on the app is linked to a database that allows the report to be constantly updated. The Dashboard page shows the following graphs, charts, and tables: Piping – Weld Rejection Rate (Cumulative) Piping Drawing Status Piping – Weekly Weld Rejection Rate Piping Dia Inch Piping Status by System Piping Welding Progress by Date NDT Progress Status NDT Number of Joint Status 2.2 Switch Board The Switch Board tab in the Home menu show the consolidated view of various tabs listed in multiple menus in the menu bar. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM app, you can view the Home Page. In the Home Page, the menu bar appears with multiple menus, otherwise you can select the Switch Board tab to view all the menus. To select the Switch Board tab, Navigate to Home. Click Switch Board. The Switch Board tab includes multiple options such as Project Data, Materials, Inspection, Piping, Test Pack, Punch List, and Documentation. 2.3  Switch Project The Switch Project tab in the Home menu helps you to add a new project/module and switch between various projects and modules added in the app. 2.3.1 Switch between Various Projects and Modules Navigate to the Home menu. Click Switch Project. The switch project window opens with a list of projects and modules that are already added in the web.                                                                  Figure 5.1: Switch project window 3. If you want to switch between various projects and modules, Select a project you want from multiple projects listed in the left side of the window. Once you have selected the project, a list of modules related to the project is displayed. Select a module you want from multiple modules listed in the right side of the window. 4. Click Select. 2.3.2 Add a New Project If you want to add a new project, do the following If you want to add a new project, you must have been assigned as an administrator or a power user otherwise you cannot add any new project. Click New Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.1.    The add project/module page opens with two options such as Projects and Skid/ Module.                                                          Figure 2.2: Add project/module page 2. Click Projects. The Projects page opens.                                                           Figure 2.3: Projects page 3. Click (ADD button) in the upper side of the Projects page. A new window opens to add a new project. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Project Number box, enter the project number. In the Project Name box, enter a project name. In the End User box, select an end user from a drop-down list. In the Client box, select a client from a drop-down list. In the AI/ Third Party box, select an AI or a third party from a drop-down list.   Note: If you want to add multiple third parties, add third parties by clicking (Add TP button) in the Third party column of the Projects page. In the Purchase Order (PO) Number box, enter the PO number. In the Manufacturer Job Code box, enter the manufacturer job code number. In the Client Project box, enter the client project code. In the Client Job Code box, enter the client job code. In the Owner Project box, enter the owner project code. In the Owner Job Code box, enter the owner job code. In the Delivery Date box, choose the delivery date. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) Weld Length Limit box, enter the length limit of NDE welding. If you need an external qualified welder, click the check box provided with the External Qualified Welder option. In the Weld Repair Allowance box, enter the amount for weld repair. 4. Click Save. A new project is added successfully. 2.3.3 Edit a Project If you want to edit any existing project details from the list of projects in the Projects page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective project. See Fig 2.3. A new window opens to edit the project. 2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box in the Projects page. 3. Click Save. 2.3.4 Delete a Project. If you want to delete any specific project from the list of projects, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Projects page, See Fig 2.3. 1. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding project. You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete this row?”. 2. Click OK. 2.3.5 Export Projects List You can export a list of projects in the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the projects list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button). See Fig 2.3. The project list will be downloaded in the pdf format. If you want to export the projects list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The project list will be downloaded in the excel format. 2.3.6 Add a New Module If you want to add a new module, do the following If you want to add a new module, you must have been assigned as an administrator or a power user otherwise you cannot add any new module. Click New Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.1. The add project/module page opens with two options such as Projects and Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.2. Click Skid/Module. The Skid/Module page opens.                                                         Figure 5.3.1: Skid/Module page Click  (ADD button) in the upper side of the Skid/Module page. The skid/module box opens to add a new module. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Master Project Name box, enter the master project name from a drop-down list. In the Skid/Module box, enter a module name. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added module. In the Report Prefix box, the report prefix will be entered automatically. If you want change, you can edit the report prefix. In the Piping Class box, enter the piping class name. In the Delivery Date box, choose the delivery date. In the Project Type box, select the type of project from a drop-down list. If you want to show this module in the cuteQM mobile app, click the check box provided with the Show in Apps option. In the Shift Start Time (24hr)box, enter the shift starting time. In the Shift End Time (24hr)box, enter the shift ending time. In the Break Time (mins)box, enter the break time duration. If you want to enable the repair project flow option, select the check box provided with the Repair Project Flow column. If you want to enable the welder qualification restriction option, select the check box provided with the Welder Qualification Restriction column. Click Save. A new module is added successfully. 2.3.7 Add a Surveyor, a Client or Other Role for Module If you want to add a surveyor, a client or other role for any added module, Click a respective (Add icon) provided in the Add Surveyor/Client column.                                                            The Add Surveyor/Client/Others window opens. Click (ADD button).                                                                                                                                             A new window opens to enter the name and type of a role. In the Name box, enter the name of the person to whom you want to add a role. In the Type box, select the type of role from a drop-down list. Click Save. 2.3.8 Edit a Module If you want to edit any existing module details from the list of modules in the Skid/Module page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective module. See Fig 2.3.1. A new window opens to edit the module. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box in the Skid/Module page. Click Save. 2.3.9 Delete a Module If you want to delete any specific module from the list of modules, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Skid/Module page, See Fig 2.3.1. Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding module. You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete?”. Click OK. 2.3.10 Export Modules List You can export a list of modules added in the Skid/Module page in the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the modules list in the pdf format, click (PDF button). See Fig 2.3.1. The modules list will be downloaded in the pdf format. If you want to export the modules list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The modules list will be downloaded in the excel format. 2.3.11 Close a Project If you want to close any project from the app, do the following Make sure that once you have closed any project, you cannot even open or access the closed project. Click Close Project in the Close Project column for the corresponding module and project type. See Fig 2.3.1. You receive a notification message “Are you sure want to close this project? You will not be able to access/reopen this project again”. Click OK to close the project. Project Data 3.0 Project Data The Project Data menu in the cuteQM app helps you to add the master data and the personal data for the piping project. Once you click the Project Data menu, the following tabs open, 3.1 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) P&ID is a schematic diagram which shows the functional relationship of piping, instrumentation, and system equipment components.  The P&ID includes mechanical equipment with names and numbers, Process piping, sizes and identification, Flow directions, and so on. The P&ID tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add a P&ID. If you want to navigate to P&ID, do the following, Click P&ID in the Project Data menu. The P&ID page opens.                                                          Figure 3.1: P&ID page 3.1.1 Add a P&ID If you want to add a new P&ID, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the P&ID page. See Fig 3.1. A new window opens to add a new P&ID. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the P&ID box, enter the P&ID number. In the Revision Number box, enter the revision number for the P&ID. Click Save. The P&ID is successfully added and listed in the P&ID page. 3.1.2 Edit a P&ID If you want to edit any existing P&ID in the P&ID page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective P&ID. See Fig 3.1. The P&ID page shows the details of the P&ID. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.1.3 Delete a P&ID If you want to delete any existing P&ID in the P&ID page, Click (Delete icon) of the respective P&ID. See Fig 3.1. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK. The selected P&ID will be deleted from the P&ID page. 3.1.4 Export P&ID list You can export a list of P&IDs added in the P&ID page in both the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the P&ID list in the pdf format, click (PDF button). The P&ID list will be downloaded as a pdf file. If you want to export the P&ID list in the excel format, click (Excel button). The P&ID list will be downloaded as an excel file. 3.1.5 Filter a P&ID If you want to filter any specific P&ID in the P&ID page, do the following, Click  (FILTER button) located on the P&ID  See Fig 3.1. Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the P&ID and Revision Number columns. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter any P&ID. 3.1.6 Import Multiple P&IDs If you want to import multiple P&IDs together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.1. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of P&IDs. Enter the required P&ID details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the P&ID details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.1. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the P&IDs that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the P&IDs in the worksheet will be displayed in the P&ID page. 3.1.7 Attach a File into a P&ID If you want to attach a file for example drawing, with any existing P&ID listed in the P&ID page, Click  (Attach icon) provided against the respective P&ID in the P&ID page. The File Upload (P&ID - Drawings) page opens. Note: Before uploading any file, read the instructions given in the File Upload (P&ID - Drawings) page. Click (Browse button). Select a file which you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to attach the file. The uploaded file will be displayed in the File Upload table. 3.2 System You can add the details of systems to be used in the piping project by using the Systems tab in the Project Data menu. If you want to navigate to Systems, Click Systems in the Project Data menu. The System page opens.                                                                  Figure 3.2: System page 3.2.1 Add a System If you want to add a new system, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the System See Fig 3.2. A new window opens to add a new system. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the System box, enter the system name. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the system name. In the System Number box, enter the system number. Click Save. The system is successfully added and listed in the System page. Note: If you want to map cover page for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Cover Page column and add the cover pages. If you want to map certificates for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Certificates column and add the cover pages. If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS) for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column and add the cover pages. 3.2.2 Edit a System If you want to edit any existing system in the System page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective System. See Fig 3.2. The System page shows the details of the selected system. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.2.3 Delete a System If you want to delete any existing system in the System page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the System page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.2.4 Export System List You can export a list of systems added in the System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.2.5 Filter a System If you want to filter any specific system in the System page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the System page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.2.6 Import Multiple Systems If you want to import multiple systems together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.2. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of systems. Enter the required system details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.2. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the systems that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the systems in the worksheet will be displayed in the System page. 3.2.7 Attach a File into a System If you want to attach any file with any system listed in the System page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 3.3 Sub System The Sub Systems tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of sub systems to be in used in the piping project. If you want to navigate to Sub Systems, Click Sub Systems in the Project Data menu. The Sub Systems page opens.                                                       Figure 6.3: Sub System page 3.3.1 Add a Sub System If you want to add a new sub system, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Sub System See Fig 3.3. A new window opens to add a new sub system. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub System box, select a sub system from a drop-down list. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the sub system. In the Sub System Number box, enter the sub system number. If the added subsystem needs to be flushed, select Yes in the Flushing option otherwise select No. If there is need to perform the leakage test for the added subsystem, select Yes in the Leak Test option otherwise select No. In the Description box, enter the description for the added sub system. Click Save. The sub system is successfully added and listed in the Sub System page. 3.3.2 Edit a Sub System If you want to edit any existing sub system in the Sub System page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective sub system. See Fig 3.3. The Sub System page shows the details of the selected sub system. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.3.3 Delete a Sub System If you want to delete any existing sub system in the Sub System page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Sub System page. To know how to delete, see the topic, 3.3.4 Export Sub System List You can export a list of sub systems added in the Sub System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.3.5 Filter a Sub System If you want to filter any specific sub system in the Sub System page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Sub System page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.3.6 Import Multiple Sub Systems If you want to import multiple sub systems together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.3. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of sub systems. Enter the required sub system details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the sub system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.3. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button)to export the sub systems that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the sub systems in the worksheet will be displayed in the Sub System page. 3.3.7 Attach a File into a Sub System If you want to attach any file with any sub system listed in the Sub System page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic. “Attach a file into P&ID”. 3.4 Lines The Lines tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of lines to be in used in the piping project. If you want to add Lines, Click Lines in the Project Data menu, The Lines page opens.                                                          Figure 3.4: Lines page 3.4.1 Add a Line If you want to add a line, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Lines page. See Fig 3.4. A new window opens to add new lines. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Sub System box, select a sub system from a drop-down list. In the Line Number box, enter the line number. In the Size box, select the size of the line. In the Piping Class box, enter the piping class name. In the Line Code box, enter the line code. In the Sheet Number box, enter the sheet number. In the RT Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of RT. In the UT Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of UT. In the MT Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of MT. In the PT Req. %box, enter the requirement percentage of PT. In the PWHT Req. %box, enter the requirement percentage of PWHT. In the PMI Req. %box, enter the requirement percentage of PMI. Note: The RT, UT, MT, PT, PWHT, and PMI Requirements (%) should be filled with valid numerical numbers. The joint testing will be performed based on the value given by you, for example, if you enter 100 % of requirement, which means 100 % of the joints will be tested. If you enter 0 %, none of joints will be tested. Click Save. The line is successfully added and listed in the Lines page. 3.4.2 Edit a Line If you want to edit any existing line in the Lines page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective sub system. See Fig 3.4. The Lines page shows the details of the selected line. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.4.3 Delete a Line If you want to delete any existing line in the Lines page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Lines page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.4.4 Export Line List You can export a list of lines added in the Lines page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic “Export P&ID list”. 3.4.5 Filter a Line If you want to filter any specific line in the Lines page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Lines page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.4.6 Import Multiple Lines If you want to import multiple lines together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.4. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of lines. Enter the required line details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the line details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.4. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the lines that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the lines in the worksheet will be displayed in the Lines page. 3.4.7 Attach a File into a Line If you want to attach any file with a line listed in the Lines page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 3.5 Isometric (ISO) Drawings An isometric drawing is a detailed orthographic drawing that represents the details of 3D structure of the piping system in a 2D format for fabrication of the pipe. If you want to navigate to ISO, Click ISO Drawings in the Project Data menu. The ISO page opens.                                                        Figure 3.5: ISO page 3.5.1 Add an ISO Drawing If you want to add a new ISO drawing, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the ISO page. See Fig 3.5. A new window opens to add a new ISO drawing. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Line Number box, select the line number from a drop-down list. In the P&ID box, select the P&ID from a drop-down list. In the ISO Drawing Number box, enter the number for an ISO drawing you want to add. In the Revision Number box, enter the revision number for the ISO drawing. In the Internal Drawing No box, enter the internal drawing number of the isometric drawing. In the Internal Drawing Rev. No box, enter the revision number for the internal drawing. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number. In the Sheet Rev. No box, enter the sheet revision number. In the Master Sheet No box, enter the master sheet number. In the Line Size box, select the line size from a drop-down list. In the Location box, select the location from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the RT Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of RT. In the UT Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of UT. In the MT Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of MT. In the PT Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of PT. In the PWHT Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of PWHT. In the PMI Req. % box, enter the requirement percentage of PMI. Note: The RT, UT, MT, PT, PWHT, and PMI Requirements (%) should be filled with valid numerical numbers. The joint testing will be performed based on the value given by you, for example, if you enter 100 % of requirement, which means 100 % of the joints will be tested. If you enter 0 %, none of joints will be tested. Click Save. The ISO drawing is successfully added and listed in the ISO page. 3.5.2 Add Revision for ISO Drawing Once you have added the ISO drawing, the ISO page shows  (Revision icon) for the added ISO drawing. You can add multiple revisions for the added ISO by using this revision icon. Click  (Revision icon) of the respective ISO drawing. The Add Revision box opens. In the Revision Number box, enter the revision number. Click Add. The revision for the ISO drawing will be added and listed in the ISO page. 3.5.3 Edit an ISO Drawing If you want to edit any existing ISO drawing in the ISO page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective sub system. See Fig 3.5. The ISO page shows the details of the selected ISO drawing. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.5.4 Delete an ISO Drawing If you want to delete any existing ISO drawing in the ISO page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the ISO page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.5.5 Export ISO Drawings List You can export a list of ISO drawings added in the ISO page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.5.6 Filter an ISO Drawing If you want to filter any specific ISO drawing in the ISO page, you can use (FILTER button) provided on the ISO page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.5.7 Import Multiple ISO Drawings If you want to import multiple ISO drawings together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.5. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of ISO drawings. Enter the required ISO drawing details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the ISO drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.5. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click   (Upload button) to export the ISO drawings that are added in the excel worksheet. The details of the ISO drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the ISO page. 3.5.8 Attach a File into an ISO Drawing If you want to attach any file with an ISO drawing listed in the ISO page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 3.6 Spools A spool refers to a section of a piping system that is pre-fabricated as smaller segments with flanges and fittings. If you want to navigate to Spools, Click Spools in the Project Data. The Spools page opens.                                                         Figure 3.6: Spools page 3.6.1 Add a Spool If you want to add a new spool, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Spools See Fig 3.6. A new window opens to add a new spool. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the ISO Drawing Number box, select the ISO drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Spool Number box, enter the spool number for a spool you want to add. In the Tag Id box, enter the tag id number of the spool. In the Location box, select the location from a drop-down list. In the Contractor Name box, enter the contractor name. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The spool is successfully added and listed in the Spools page. 3.6.2 Edit a Spool If you want to edit any existing spool in the Spools page, Click (Edit icon)of the respective spool. See Fig 3.6. The Spools page shows the details of the selected spool. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.6.3 Delete a Spool If you want to delete any existing spool in the Spools page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Spools page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.6.4 Export Spool List You can export a list of spools added in the Spools page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.6.5 Filter a Spool If you want to filter any spool in the Spools page, you can use  (FILTER button) provided on the Spools page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.6.6 Import Multiple Spools If you want to import multiple spools together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.6. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of spools. Enter the required spool details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the spool details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.6. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the spool details that are added in the excel worksheet. The details of the spools in the worksheet will be displayed in the Spools page. 3.7 Joints A variety of joints are used in the assembly of pipes. Joints are the points where two or more pieces of materials for example pipes, are joined by welding. The Joints tab in the Project Data menu helps you add the joint details including joint number, material specification, welding type, and so on. If you want to navigate to Joints, Click Joints in the Project Data menu. The Joints page opens. Due to insufficient space, the captured figure of the Joints page is split as four.                                                         Figure 3.7: Joints page 3.7.1 Add a Joint If you want to add a new joint, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Joints See Fig 3.7. A new window opens to add a new joint. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the ISO Drawing Number box, select the ISO drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Spools box, select the spool from a drop-down list. In the Component (I) box, select the first component which you want to join. In the Material box, select the material of the first component. Enter the details of first component such as Material Spec, Material Grade, Material Desc, Diameter (MM), Thickness (MM), Rating, Diameter2, and Thickness2. In the Component (II) box, select the second component which you want joint. In the Material box, select the material of the second component. Enter the details of second component such as Material Spec, Material Grade, Material Desc, Diameter (MM), Thickness (MM), Rating, Diameter2, and Thickness2. If the component is other than pipe, enter the dimensions in Others In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure value. In the Paint System box, enter the paint system name. In the Design Temp box, enter the design temperature value. In the Insulation System box, enter the insulation system name. In the Joint Number box, enter the joint number. In the Joint Size box, enter the joint size range. In the Joint Thickness box, enter the joint thickness range. In the Weld Type box, select the welding type from a drop-down list. In the Joint Category box, select the joint category from a drop-down list. In the Fixing Type box, select the fixing type from a drop-down list. In the WPS Number box, select the WPS number from a drop-down list. In the Electrode box, enter the electrode name. In the Filler Rod box, enter the filler rod name. If the NDT inspection is not required for the added joint, select the checkbox of the NDT Not Required option. If the NDT inspection is required for the added joint, select the checkbox of the respective NDT types given for example RT Required, UT Required, and so on. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The joint is successfully added. If you want view the added joint, select the respective drawing number from a drop-down list of the Select Drawing Number box in the upper side of the Joints page. and listed in the Joints page. The joint for the selected drawing number will be displayed in the Joints page. 6.7.2 Clone a Joint The Clone option provided in the Joints page used to add a new joint from previously added joint. If a joint to be added is having the same specifications of any joint already listed in the Joints page, you can add the new joint by using (Clone icon). In the Joints page, find out the joint you want to clone. Click(Clone icon) of the respective joint. The Joints page shows the details of selected joint except joint number in the Joint Number box. See the below figure. If you want to change any details, you can change in the respective boxes. In the Joint Number box, enter the joint number for the new joint you want to add. Click Save. The new joint is successfully added and listed in the Joints page. 3.7.3 Swap Clone Joint The Swap Clone option provided in the Joints page used to add a new joint from previously added joint. When you do swap clone of any joint, the first and second components in the joint will be swapped each other. In the Joints page, find out the joint you want to swap clone. Click  (Swap Clone icon) of the respective joint. The Joints page shows the details of selected joint except joint number in the Joint Number box. The Component (I) and Component (II) will be swapped each other. See the below figure. If you want to change any details, you can change in the respective boxes. In the Joint Number box, enter the joint number for the new joint you want to add. Click Save. The new joint is successfully added and listed in the Joints page. 3.7.4 Edit a Joint If you want to edit any existing joint in the Joints page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective joint. See Fig 3.7. The Joints page shows the details of the selected joint. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.7.5 Delete a Joint If you want to delete any existing joint in the Joints page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Joints page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.7.6 Export Joints List You can export a list of joints added in the Joints page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.7.7 Filter a Joint If you want to filter any joint in the Joints page, you can use (FILTER button) provided on the Joints page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.7.8 Import Multiple Joints If you want to import multiple joints together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.7. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of joints. Enter the required joint details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the joint details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.7. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the joint details that are added in the excel worksheet. The details of the joints in the worksheet will be displayed in the Joints page. 3.8 Drawing Bulk Edit The Drawing Bulk Edit tab in the Project Data menu helps you to make changes in all the added ISO drawings together, where the ISO drawings are added using the ISO Drawings tab. This feature avoids the need to open each ISO drawing individually for making changes in the ISO drawings because you can make changes in all the ISO drawings together. If you want to make changes in the ISO drawings together, do the following steps, Click Drawing Bulk Edit in the Project Data menu. The Drawing Bulk Edit page opens with a list ISO drawing added in the ISO Drawings page.                                           Figure 3.8: Drawing Bulk Edit page If you want make changes in any ISO drawing details, click on the respective detail, and edit. Click Save Changes. The changes you have made here will be reflected in the respective ISO drawing in the ISO page. Note: You can also add a new ISO drawing by using  (ADD Button) provided in the upper side of the Drawing Bulk Edit page. 3.8.1 Export Drawings After Editing After making changes in the ISO drawings, you can export a list of drawings in the Drawing Bulk Edit page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.8.2 Filter a Drawing If you want to filter any ISO drawing in the Drawing Bulk Edit page, you can use  (FILTER button) provided on the Drawing Bulk Edit page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.9 Joints Bulk Edit The Joints Bulk Edit tab in the Project Data menu helps you to make changes in all the added joints together, where the joints are added using the Joints tab. This feature avoids the need to open each joint individually for making changes in the joint because you can make changes in all the joints together. If you want to make changes in the joints together, do the following steps, Click Joints Bulk Edit in the Project Data menu. The Joints page opens with a list joints added in the Joints page.                                              Figure 3.9: Joints page In the Sheet No/Drawing No/Revision box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. The joints corresponding to the selected drawing number will be displayed in the Joints page. If you want make changes in any joint, click on the respective joint detail, and edit. Click Save Changes. The changes you have made here will be reflected in the respective joints in the Joints page. Note: You can also add a new joint by using  provided in the upper right corner of the Joints Bulk Edit page. 3.9.1 Export Joints After Editing After making changes in the joints, you can export a list of joints in the Joints page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.9.2 Filter a Joint If you want to filter any joint in the Joints page, you can use  (FILTER button) provided in the Joints page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.9.3 View Material Traceability Record (MTR) You can view the MTR for added joints by using (MTR button) provided in the Joints page. Once you click the MTR button, the page redirects you into the Material Traceability Record page. 3.10 Import from Excel - Masters The Import from Excel – Masters tab helps you to upload master data for all fields instead of uploading data for each field individually. If you want to import master data for different fields, do the following, Click Import from Excel – Masters in the Project Data The File Upload page opens.                                                Figure 3.10: File Upload page Download a template by using (TEMPLATE button) to enter the details of master data. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a pre-defined template to the details. Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet. Click (Choose File button). Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded” Click (Get Columns button). The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field. Note:  Make sure that the Excel Column field must have all the columns as in the System Column field. To map the columns in the System Column and Excel Column fields, do one of the following, If you want to map the columns Automatically, click (AutoMap button). The columns will be mapped automatically and displayed in the Mapped Columns field. If you want to map each column manually, select the respective columns in both the System Columns and Each Excel Column fields and then click   (Map button). To un-map the columns in the Mapped Columns field, select the respective column and then click (UnMap button). Once you have completed the mapping and un-mapping of columns, you must enter the range for uploading the data from the excel worksheet. Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet. Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns. In the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet. Click (Populate Values button). Click  (Process button). The system processes all the uploaded data and displays in the Excel Import page. Click  (Update button) to import the uploaded data. The data will be successfully imported. 3.11 NDT Procedures The NDT procedures tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add an NDT procedure. Once you have added the NDT procedure details you can add revision for the added NDT procedure. If you want to add an NDT procedure, do the following steps, Click NDT Procedures in the Project Data menu. The NDT Procedure page opens.                                          Figure 3.11: NDT Procedure page 3.11.1 Add an NDT procedure If you want to add an NDT procedure, Click (ADD button) in the NDT Procedure page. See Fig 3.11. A new window opens to add an NDT procedure. In the NDT Procedure box, select the NDT procedure from a drop-down list. In the NDT Procedure Title box, enter the NDT procedure title. Click Save. The NDT procedure is successfully added. 3.11.2 Add Details of NDT Procedure Once you have added the NDT procedure, you must add the details of the added NDT procedure. Click(Edit icon) of the respective NDT procedure in the NDT Procedure See Fig 3.11. The NDT Procedure Revision window opens. Click (ADD button) in the NDT Procedure Revision window. A new window opens to add the NDT procedure details. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for the revision will be updated automatically in the Report Number/ Revision box. In the Description box, enter the description for the NDT procedure. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the NDT procedure. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the NDT procedure. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the NDT procedure. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the NDT procedure. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the NDT procedure. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the NDT procedure. Click Save. The NDT procedure details are successfully saved and listed in the NDT Procedure Revision window. 3.11.3 Add Revision for NDT Procedure Once you have added the NDT procedure details, you can add revision for the added NDT procedures. You can add multiple revisions for one NDT procedure. To add revision, Click(Revision icon) of the respective NDT procedure. A new window opens with the details of existing NDT procedure. Click Save. The revision for the selected NDT procedure is added. 3.11.4 View an NDT Procedure Report If you want to view an NDT procedure report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the NDT Procedure page. See Fig 3.11. 3.11.5 Attach a File into an NDT Procedure If you want to attach any file with a NDT procedure listed in the NDT Procedure page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 3.12 WPS in Project WPS is a written instruction that specifies materials, consumables and edge preparations for a given joint. The WPS lists the pre- and post-weld operations including heat treatments; machining, grinding, and dressing of the weld. The WPS in Project tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add a WPS report and assign the WPS to a project. Click WPS in Project tab in the Project Data menu. The WPS by projects page opens with two fields such as WPS Summary and Assign WPS to Project.                                                Figure 3.12: WPS in projects page 3.12.1 Add a WPS Summary Report If you want to add a new WPS summary  report, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the WPS Summary field. See Fig 3.12. A new window opens to add a WPS report. Tip: A report number for a new WPS report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the WPS report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the WPS report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the WPS report. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the WPS report. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the WPS report. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the WPS report. Click Save. The WPS summary report is successfully added. 3.12.2 View a WPS Summary Report If you want to view a WPS summary report, click  (Print icon) provided in the WPS Summary Report column. 3.12.3 View a WPS Summary Report with PQR If you want to view a WPS summary report with PQR, click  (Print icon) provided in the WPS Summary with PQR column. 3.12.4 Attach a File into a WPS Summary Report If you want to attach any file with any WPS summary report listed in the WPS Summary page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective WPS summary report. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 3.12.5 Export WPS Summary Reports List You can export a list of added WPS reports in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.12.6 Assign a WPS to a Project The Assign WPS to Project field in the WPS in projects page allows you to assign the WPS to the project. If you want to assign any WPS to the project, do the following, In the Assign WPS to Project field, the All WPS box displays a list of available WPS. The WPS in Project box displays a list of WPS that has been already assigned for the project. If you want to assign any WPS for the project, select the respective WPS in the ALL WPS box, and then click   (Assign welder button). The selected WPS will be assigned to the project. If you want to reject any WPS that has been assigned for the project, select the respective WPS in the WPS in Project box, and then click   (Reject welder button). 3.13 Welders in Projects The Welders in Projects tab in the Project Data menu helps you to assign welders for a project. You can add a welder report by using this tab. This tab also helps you to view a welder list and WPQ details. Click Welders in Projects tab in Project Data menu. The welders in projects page opens with four fields such as Welder Report, Assign Welder to Project, Welder List, and WPQ Details.                                           Figure 3.13: Welders in project page 3.13.1 Add a Welder Report If you want to add a welder report, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Welder Report See Fig 3.13. A new window opens to add a welder report. Tip: A report number for a new welder report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of welder who has prepared the welder report. In the Received By box, enter the name of welder who has received the welder report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of welder who has approved the welder report. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the welder report. In the Received Date box, choose the received date of the welder report. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the welder report. Click Save. The welder report is successfully added. 3.13.2 View a Welder Report If you want to view a welder report, click(Print icon) provided in the Report column. 3.13.3 Attach a File into a Welder Report If you want to attach any file with any welder report listed in the Welder Report window, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective welder report. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 3.13.4 Export Welder Reports List You can export a list of welder reports in the Welder Report field in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.13.5 Assign a Welder to a Project The Assign Welder to Project field in the welders in projects page allows you to assign any welder to the particular project. If you want to assign any welder to the project, do the following, In the All Welders box, if you want to view all the welders, click ALL otherwise select the respective company’s welder group from a drop-down list to view their welders list. Once you have selected the company’s welder group, the left-side box shows a list of welders. The right-side box shows a list of welders who has been already assigned for the project. If you want to assign any welder for the project, select the respective welder in the left-side box, and then click (Assign welder button). The selected welder will be assigned to the project. If you want to reject any welder who has been assigned for the project, select the respective welder in the right-side box, and then click (Reject welder button). 3.13.6 Welder List The Welder List field in the welders in projects page shows the welder details such as welder name, welder number, NRIC, date of birth, and nationality. This field also helps you to assign the WPQs of welders to the project, and remove any WPQs from the project. If you click(Expand Icon) of the respective welder, the All WPQ box shows the details of all WPQs of the welder, and the Assigned to Project box shows any WPQ that has been assigned to a project. If you want to assign any WPQ for the project, select the respective WPQ in the All WPQ box, and then click (Assign WPQ button). The selected welder will be assigned to the project. If you want to reject any WPQ that has been assigned for the project, select the respective WPQ in the Assigned to Project box, and then click (Reject WPQ button). 3.13.7 WPQ Details The WPQ details field in the welders in projects page shows the WPQ details of each welder including welder’s name, welder number, welding process name, weld metal thickness, position, and so on. If you want to take a print of any WPQ details, click the checkbox provided in the Print Column. 3.14 Inspectors in Projects The Inspectors in Projects tab in the Project Data menu helps you to map inspectors for the specific project. Click the Inspectors in Projects tab. The Project Mapping – Inspectors page opens                                   Figure 3.14: Project Mapping – Inspectors page The Project Mapping – Inspectors page shows a list of inspectors, which is added in the Master Data. If you want to map any inspectors for a specific project, do the following, Select a project you want from the Projects box. A list of available inspectors will be displayed. Select the check box of the respective inspector which you want to map for the selected project. Click  (Map icon). The selected inspectors are mapped for the selected project. The Inspector List window shows the inspector’s name, login name, NRIC, and Date of birth. 3.15 WPQ Search The WPQ Search tab in the Project Data menu used to filter the specific WPQ result. To perform the WPQ search, Click WPQ Search in the Project Data menu. The WPQ Search page opens with the WPQ Results window.                                                 Figure 3.15: WPQ Search page In the Welding Process box, select a welding process from the given welding processes. In the Welder Name box, enter the name of a welder. In the Backing box, enter the backing details. In the Weld Metal Thk Max. in mm box, enter the minimum and maximum thickness of the weld metal. Click  (Search button). The WPQ Results window shows the WPQ details based on the given data. 3.15.1 Export WPQ Results You can export the WPQ results in the WPQ Results window in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.15.2 Filter WPQ Results If you want to filter any WPQ in the WPQ Results page, you can use  (FILTER button) provided on the WPQ Results page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.16 Bill of Material Bill of Material is a comprehensive inventory of the raw materials, assembles, sub assembles, parts and components, as well as the quantity of each, needed to the piping fabrication. The Bill of Material tab in the Project Data menu used to add a new bill of material. Click Bill of Material in the Project Data menu. The Bill of Material page opens.                                           Figure 3.16: Bill of Material page 3.16.1 Add a Bill of Material If you want to add a bill of material, In the ISO/Drawing No box, select the ISO drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Material Type box, select a material type from a drop-down list. Click  (Add button). A new window opens to add the material details. In the Stock Code box, enter the stock code. In the Quantity box, enter the quantity of the material. In the Component Details box, enter the component details. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. If the materials are need to be fabricated, enable the checkbox of the Required to fabricate option. Click Submit. The bill of material is added. 3.17 Spools Location – Masters The Spools Location – Masters tab in the Project Data menu used to add the details of the spool location. Click Spools Location – Masters in the Project Data menu. The Spools Location page opens.                                         Figure 3.17: Spools Location page 3.17.1 Add a Spool Location If you want to add a spool location, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Spools Location page. See Fig 3.17. A new window opens to add a new spool location. In the Location Name box, enter the location name. In the Location Code box, enter the location code. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The spool location is successfully added. 3.17.2 Edit a Spool Location If you want to edit any existing spool location detail in the Spools Location page, Click (Edit icon)of the respective spool location. See Fig 3.17. The Spools Location page shows the details of the selected location. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.17.3 Delete a Spool Location If you want to delete any existing spool location in the Spools Location page, you can use  (Delete icon). To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.17.4 Export Spool Location List You can export a list of spool location added in the Spools Location page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.17.5 Filter a Spool Location If you want to filter any spool location in the Spools Location page, you can use (FILTER button) provided on the Spools Location page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.18 Workflow Settings The Workflow Settings tab in the Project Data menu used to set a workflow in the Piping project. Click Workflow Settings in the Project Data menu. The Workflow page opens.                                                     Figure 3.18: Workflow page 3.18.1 Add a Workflow If you want to add a workflow, Click (ADD button) in the Workflow See Fig 3.18. The page shows a new window to add the category. In the Category box, select a category from a drop-down list. Click Save. The added category will be listed in the Workflow page. See Fig 3.18. Click (Add icon) of the respective category. The Workflow Details window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Workflow Details window. In the Role Name box, select a role name from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the role name. Click Save. 3.18.2 Edit a Workflow If you want to edit any existing workflow in the Workflow page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective workflow. See Fig 3.18. The Workflow page shows the details of the selected workflow. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.18.3 Delete a Workflow If you want to delete any existing workflow in the Workflow page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Workflow page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.18.4 Export Workflow List You can export a list of workflows added in the Workflow page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.18.5 Filter a Workflow If you want to filter any specific workflow, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Workflow page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.19 Inspection Requirements The Inspection Requirements tab in the Project Data menu used to add the requirement details for the inspection. Click Inspection Requirements in the Project Data menu. The Inspection Requirements page opens.                                      Figure 3.19: Inspection Requirements page 3.19.1 Add an Inspection Requirement If you want to add an inspection requirement, do the following steps, Click Add Inspection Requirement. The Add New Inspection Requirement window opens. In the Inspection Type box, select an inspection type. If you want to add the system detail, select the System option and choose a system from a drop-down list. If you want to add the line number detail, select the Line Number option and choose a line number from a drop-down list. In the Requirement box, enter the inspection requirement percentage. In the Pressure Rating From and To box, enter the pressure rating range. Click Create. The inspection requirement details will be added and listed in the Inspection Requirements page. 3.19.2 Edit an Inspection Requirement If you want to edit any added inspection requirement details, Click(Edit icon) of the respective inspection requirement. See Fig 3.19. The added inspection requirement details open. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.19.3 Delete an Inspection Requirement If you want to delete any existing inspection requirement, you can use (Delete icon). To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.20 Template Check Sheets The Template Check Sheets tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add MC/SC – Check Record (CR)/Check Sheet (CS) templates. To navigate to the templates adding page, Click Template Check Sheets in the Project Data menu. The MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page opens.                                 Figure 3.20: MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page 3.20.1 Add a CR/CS Template If you want to add a CR/CS template, Click (ADD button) in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. See Fig 3.20. The page opens a new window to add the details of a template. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the CR/CS Name box, enter the name for CR/CS. In the Template Type box, select a template whether CR or CS. In the Description box, enter the description for CR/CS. Click Save. The template is successfully added and listed in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. Once you have added the template details, you must import the respective template. 3.20.2 Import a CR/CS Template If you want to import CR/CS template, Click (Add icon) of the respective CR/CS name in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. The Check Records window opens. Click (ADD button) in the Check Records In Items box, enter the details of items. Browse and attach a CS/CR template you want to import. Click Save. 3.20.3 Edit a CR/CS Template If you want to edit any added CR/CS template in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page, Click(Edit icon) of the respective CR/CS template. See Fig 3.20 The MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page shows the details of the selected CR/CS template. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.20.4 Delete a CR/CS Template If you want to delete any existing CR/CS template in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.20.5 Export CR/CS Template list You can export a list of CR/CS templates added in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.20.6 Filter a CR/CS Template If you want to filter any specific CR/CS template in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.20.7 Import Multiple CR/CS Templates If you want to import multiple CR/CS templates together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.20. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of CR/CS templates. Enter the required CR/CS template details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the CR/CS template details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.20. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the CR/CS template details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the CR/CS templates in the worksheet will be displayed in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. 3.21 Certificate Template Check Sheets The Certificate Template Check Sheets tab in the Project Data menu used to add the details included in a certificate. Click Certificate Template Check Sheets in the Project Data. The Certificates page opens.                                             Figure 3.21: Certificates page 3.21.1 Add a Certificate If you want to add a certificate, Click (ADD button) in the Certificates See Fig 3.21. The page opens a new window to add the details of a certificate. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Certificate box, enter the name of the certificate. In the Status box, select the status of the certificate. In the Certificate Type box, enter the description for CR/CS. In the Certificate Created Date box, select the created date of the certificate. In the Sign off Date box, select the sign off date of the certificate. Click Save. The certificate is successfully added and listed in the Certificates page. Once you have added the certificate details, you must import the respective certificate. 3.21.2 Import a Certificate If you want to import a copy of the certificate, Click (Import icon) of the respective certificate in the Certificates page. Attach the copy of the certificate. 3.21.3 Edit a Certificate If you want to edit any added certificate in the Certificates page, Click(Edit icon) of the respective certificate. See Fig 3.21. The Certificates page shows the details of the selected certificate. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.21.4 Delete a Certificate If you want to delete any existing certificate in the Certificates page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Certificates page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.21.5 Export Certificate list You can export a list of certificates added in the Certificates page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.21.6 Filter a Certificate If you want to filter any specific certificate in the Certificates page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Certificates page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.21.7 Import Multiple Certificates If you want to import multiple certificates together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.21. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of certificates. Enter the required certificate details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the certificate details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.21. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the certificate details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the certificates in the worksheet will be displayed in the Certificates page. 3.22 Welder Qualification Test Coupon The Welder Qualification Test Coupon tab in the Project Data menu used to add the welder qualification test coupon details. If you want to add a welder qualification test coupon, do the following steps, Click Welder Qualification Test Coupon in the Project Data menu. The Welder Qualification Test Coupon page opens.                                 Figure 3.22: Welder Qualification Test Coupon page 3.22.1 Add a Welder Qualification Test Coupon If you want to add a welder qualification test coupon report, Click  (ADD button) in the Welder Qualification Test Coupon page. See Fig 3.22. A new window opens to add the welder qualification test coupon. Tip: A report number for a new welder qualification test coupon will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Test Date box, select the welder qualification test date. In the Work Order box, enter the work order name. Click Save. The welder qualification test coupon will be added and listed in the Welder Qualification Test Coupon. 3.22.2 Add Welder Qualification Test Coupon Details To add the welder qualification test coupon details, Click(Add icon) of the respective test coupon. See Fig 3.22. The WQTC Details window opens. Click (ADD button) in the WQTC Details window. A new window opens to enter the WQTC details. In the Welder Name box, enter the welder name. In the Position box, enter the position detail. In the Welder No box, enter the welder number. In the RT Report No box, enter the RT report number. In the Work Permit box, enter the work permit detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the FIN No box, enter the FIN number. In the Department box, enter the department name. In the Weld Type box, enter the welding type. In the Process box, select the welding process. In the Size box, enter the welding size. In the Visual Result box, select the visual result. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness of the welding. In the RT Result box, select the RT result. Click Save. 3.22.3 View a Welder Qualification Test Coupon Report To view a welder qualification test coupon report, click(Print icon) of the respective test coupon, which is provided in the Report column of the Welder Qualification Test Coupon page. 3.22.4 Approve a Welder Qualification Test Coupon Once you have added the welder qualification test coupon details, you must approve the test coupon. To approve the test coupon, Click (Submit icon) in the Action column. 3.33.5 Export Welder Qualification Test Coupon List You can export a list of test coupons added in the Welder Qualification Test Coupon page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.33.6 Filter a Welder Qualification Test Coupon If you want to filter any specific test coupon in the Welder Qualification Test Coupon page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.23 Valve List The Valve List tab in the Project Data menu helps you add the valve details. If you want to navigate to Valve List, Click Valve List in the Project Data menu. The Valve List page opens.                                                  Figure 3.23: Valve List page 3.23.1 Add a Valve If you want to add a new valve, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Valve List page. See Fig 3.23. A new window opens to add a new valve. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Tag Number box, select the tag number of the valve. In the Description box, enter the description for the valve. In the Function box, enter the function name. In the Sequence Number box, enter the sequence number of the valve. In the Site Number box, enter the site number. In the System box, select a system. In the Area box, enter the area name. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the PID box, enter the PID number. In the Vendor PID box, enter the vendor PID number. In the Layout box, enter the layout detail. In the Parent tag box, enter the parent tag number. In the Parent type box, enter the parent type. In the Skid Number box, enter the skid number. In the PO Number box, enter the PO number. In the Manufacturer box, enter the manufacturer name. In the Supplier box, enter the supplier name. In the Model Number box, enter the model number of the valve. In the Data Sheet box, enter the data sheet detail. In the Procurement Status box, enter the procurement status detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The valve is successfully added. 3.23.2 Clone a Valve The Clone option provided in the Valve List page used to add a new valve from previously added valve. If a valve to be added is having the same specifications of any valve already listed in the Valve List page, you can add the new valve by using (Clone icon). In the Valve List page, find out the valve you want to clone. Click (Clone icon) of the respective valve. The Valve List page shows the details of selected valve. See the below figure. If you want to change any details, you can change in the respective boxes. Click Save. The new valve is successfully added and listed in the Valve List page. 3.23.3 Edit a Valve If you want to edit any existing valve in the Valve List page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective valve. See Fig 3.23. The Valve List page shows the details of the selected valve. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.23.4 Delete a Valve If you want to delete any existing valve in the Valve List page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Valve List page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 3.23.5 Export Valve List You can export a list of valves added in the Valve List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 3.23.6 Filter a Valve If you want to filter any valve in the Valve List page, you can use  (FILTER button) provided on the Valve List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 3.23.7 Import Multiple Valves If you want to import multiple valves together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.23. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of joints. Enter the required valve details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the valve details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.23. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button)to export the valve details that are added in the excel worksheet. The details of the valves in the worksheet will be displayed in the Valve List page. 3.24 Special Component The Special Component tab in the Project Data menu used to add any special component to be used in the Piping project. To add the details of special component, follow the same procedure given in the topic, “Valve List”. Materials 4.0 Materials The Materials menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add the material details such as material certificates, material inspection details, material import details, and material summary and traceability record. Once you click the Materials menu, the following tabs open, The Materials menu appears with four options such as Material Certificates, Material Import, Material Inspection, and Reports. The Material Certificates option helps you to add certificates details of the materials to be in the piping project. The Material Import option helps you to add the bulk materials. The Material Inspection option helps you to add material receiving and inspection report, and material summary by heat number. The Reports option used to add material traceability record. 4.1 Material Certificates Material certificate (Mill certificate) is a certificate document used to certify that the product is produced by manufacturing standards of the mill. The material certificate contains the following information: component name, manufacturer name, certification ID, component dimension and heat numbers. Once you have received the materials from the manufacturer, you must enter the details of material certificates. The Mill Certificates tab used to add the received material certificate details. If you want to add material certificate details, do the following, Click Material Certificates in the Materials  menu. The Mill Certificates page opens.                                           Figure 4.1: Mill Certificates page 4.1.1 Add a Material Certificate If you want to add a material certificate, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Mill Certificates See Fig 4.1. A new window opens to add a material certificate. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Component box, select the received component from a drop-down list. In the Certification box, enter the certification number of the component. In the Manufacturer box, enter the name of the manufacturer. In the Mill Certificate Date box, choose the mill certificate date. In the Delivery Order (DO) Number box, enter the delivery order number of the component. In the Purchase Order (PO) Number box, enter the purchase order number of the component. In the Size box, select the size of the received component. In the Thickness box, select the thickness of the received component. In the Class box, enter the class of the received component. In the Material box, select the type of material where the component is made from. In the Rating box, enter the rating of the component. In the Expiry Date box, choose the expiry date of the component. Click Save. The material certificate is successfully added. Once you have added the mill certificate, you must add heat numbers for the added component. 4.1.2 Add Heat Numbers of Material If you want to add heat numbers, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) of the respective mill certificate. The Heat Numbers box opens.                                               Figure 4.1.1: Heat Numbers page Click (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers box. A new window opens to add the heat number. In the planned Project box, select a project you want from a drop-down list. In the Heat Number box, enter the heat number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The heat number is successfully added for the specific component. Note:  You can edit and delete the added heat numbers by using the respective (Edit icon) and (Delete icon). 4.1.3 Edit a Mill Certificate If you want to edit any existing mill certificate in the Mill Certificates page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective mill certificate. See Fig 4.1. A new window opens including the added mill certificate details. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.1.4 Delete a Mill Certificate If you want to delete any existing mill certificate in the Mill Certificates page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Mill Certificates page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 4.1.5 Export Mill Certificates List You can export a list of mill certificates added in the Mill Certificates page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.1.6 Filter a Mill Certificate If you want to filter any specific mill certificate in the Mill Certificates page, you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the Mill Certificates  To filter the mill certificate, enter the certification or heat number in the box and click Search. you can also use (FILTER button) located on the Mill Certificates  To know how to filter using the Filter button, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 4.1.7 Import Multiple Mill Certificates If you want to import multiple mill certificates together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Mill Certificates See Fig 4.1 A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet with a pre-defined template to enter the details of multiple mill certificates. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the mill certificates details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 4.1. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the mill certificates that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the mill certificates in the worksheet will be displayed in the Mill Certificates page. 4.1.8 Attach a File into a Mill Certificate If you want to attach any file with a mill certificate listed in the Mill Certificates page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 4.2 Test Equipments The Test Equipments tab in the Materials menu used to add the details of a test equipment to be used in the piping project. To add a test equipment, Click Test Equipments in the Materials  menu. The Testing Equipments page opens.                                           Figure 4.2: Testing Equipments page 4.2.1 Add a Test Equipment If you want to add a test equipment, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Testing Equipments See Fig 4.2. A new window opens to add a test equipment. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Category box, enter the category of the test equipment. In the Test Equipment box, enter the name of the test equipment. In the Manufacturer box, enter the name of the manufacturer. In the Asset Tag Number box, enter the asset tag number of the test equipment. In the Serial Number box, enter the serial number of the test equipment. In the Recommended Range box, enter the recommended range of test equipment. In the Range box, enter the actual range of test equipment. In the Least Count box, enter the least count of the test equipment. In the Purpose box, enter the purpose of the test equipment. In the Calibration Frequency (in Months) box, the calibration frequency duration will be updated automatically. If you want to change the duration you can change. In the Alert Frequency(in Days) box, the alert frequency duration will be updated automatically. If you want to change the duration you can change. In the Acceptance Criteria box, enter the acceptance criteria. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Status box, select the status of the test equipment. In the Location of Equipment box, enter the equipment location detail. In the Description box, enter the description for the test equipment. Click Save. The test equipment is successfully saved. 4.2.2 Update Calibration Details Once you have added the test equipment, you must add the details of calibration, where the calibration is comparison between a standard measurement and the measurement using the test equipment. To add the calibration details, Click (Add icon) of the respective test equipment. The Calibration window opens. Click (ADD button) in the Calibration window. A new window opens to add the calibration details. In the Calibration Report Number box, enter the calibration report number. In the Calibration Date box, select the calibration date. In the Calibration By box, enter the name of a person who has calculated the calibration. In the Calibration Due Date box, select the due date of calibration. In the Preparation By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the calibration report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the calibration report. Click Update. The calibration details will be updated. If you want to add additional data, click Additional Data option in the Calibration window. The Additional Parameter window opens. Click (ADD button) in the Additional Parameter In the Nominal Value column, enter the nominal value. In the Measured Value column, enter the measured value. Click Save Changes. If you want to add pressure data, click Pressure Data option in the Calibration window. The Pressure Recorder Data window opens. In the Additional Recorder Data field, enter the details of additional recorder data. Click (ADD button) in the Pressure Recorder Data window. In the Input and Output columns, enter the input and output values. In the Error column, enter the error value. Click Save Changes. If you want to add temperature data, click Temperature Data option in the Calibration window. The Temperature Recorder Data window opens. In the Additional Recorder Data field, enter the details of additional recorder data. Click (ADD button) in the Temperature Recorder Data window. In the 0 Degrees C column, enter the calibration value at 0 degree. In the Ambient column, enter the ambience value. In the 40 Degrees C column, enter the calibration value at 40 degree. Click Save Changes. 4.2.3 Edit a Test Equipment If you want to edit any existing test equipment in the Testing Equipments page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective test equipment. See Fig 4.2. The Testing Equipment page shows the details of the selected test equipment. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 4.2.4 Delete a Test Equipment If you want to delete any existing test equipment in the Testing Equipment page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Testing Equipment page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 4.2.5 Export Test Equipment list You can export a list of test equipments added in the Test Equipment page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.2.6 Filter a Test Equipment If you want to filter any specific test equipment in the Testing Equipment page, you can use the category wise filter box provided in the upper side of the Testing Equipment  To filter the testing equipment, select the category from the drop-down list. you can also use (FILTER button) located on the Testing Equipment  To know how to filter using the Filter button, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 4.2.7 Import Multiple Test Equipments If you want to import multiple test equipments together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 4.2. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of test equipments. Enter the required test equipment details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the test equipment details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 4.2. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the test equipment details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the test equipments in the worksheet will be displayed in the Testing Equipment page. 4.2.8 Attach a File into a Test Equipment If you want to attach any file with any existing test equipment listed in the Testing Equipment page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 4.2.9 View a Calibration History Card To view a calibration history card, click  (Print icon) of the respective test equipment, which is provided in the Report column of the Testing Equipment page. 4.3 Material Receiving and Inspection (Heat Numbers) Material Receiving Inspection validates quality of purchased raw materials based on set acceptance criteria before the materials are used for the piping project. The Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an incoming material inspection report (MIR). Incoming MIR includes material name, material size, material specification, heat numbers, and material type. If you want to add an incoming MIR, do the following, Click the Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials The Incoming Material Inspection Report page opens.                                  Figure 4.3: Incoming Material Inspection Report page 4.3.1 Add an Incoming MIR If you want to add an incoming MIR, Click  (ADD button) in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. A new window opens to add an incoming MIR. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number and a Request for Inspection (RFI) number for a new MIR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Delivery Order Number box, enter the material’s delivery order number. If the materials are received from a client, select the SAN Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the P.O. No box, enter the purchase order number. In the Dated box, choose the date of the purchase order. In the Received On box, select the received date of materials. If the materials are purchased from outside, select the FREE Issued Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the Packing List No box, enter the packing list number. In the Dated box, choose the date of packing. In the Received On box, choose the received date of materials. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Vendor Name box, enter the vendor name. In the Request Description box, enter the request description. In the ITP Number box, select an ITP number. In the Delivery Note box, enter the delivery note. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Sub Contractor box, select the subcontractor name from a drop-down list. Click Save. The incoming MIR is successfully added. Once you have added the MIR, you must add the material details for the added MIR. 4.3.2 Add Materials for an Incoming MIR If you want to add the details of materials for the added incoming MIR, do the following steps, Click(Edit icon) in the Edit MIR column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 4.3. The Add/Edit - Materials window opens.                                      Figure 4.3.1: Add/Edit – Materials window Click (ADD button) in the Add/Edit - Materials window, A new window opens to add the material details. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Material Description box, enter the material description. In the Material Size box, select the size of the material. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Type box, enter the type of the material. In the Quantity Required box, enter the required quantity of the material. In the Item No box, enter the item number. In the Weight box, enter the weight of the material. In the Component box, select a component. Click Update. Once you have added the material details, you must add the heat numbers for the added materials. 4.3.3 Add Heat Numbers Click(Add icon) of the respective material in the Add/Edit - Materials window. See Fig 4.3.1. The Heat Numbers window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers window. A new window opens to add a heat number. In the Heat Number/Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. In the Plate Number/Coil Number/ Tag Number box, enter the plate number or coil number or tag number of the material. In the Delivery Quantity (Total) box, enter the total delivery quantity of the material including UOM. In the Delivery Quantity (Partial) box, enter the partial delivery quantity of the material including UOM. In the Dimensions option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Visual option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Mill Test Certificates (MTC) option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. If the heat treatment is required for the material, select YES in the Heat Treatment Otherwise select NO. In the NDE is required for the material, select YES in the NDE Otherwise select NO. Click Update. Note: If you want to manage the review material TC, click (Add icon). The Review Material TC window opens to add the material checklist detail. 4.3.4 Add MIR Details If you want to add the details of MIR, Click(Add icon) in the Add See Fig 4.3. The MIR Details window opens. In the Manufacturer Name box, enter the manufacturer name. In the Supplier box, enter the supplier name. In the Unloaded box, enter the unloaded detail. In the Date box, select the date of MIR. In the Truck/Trailer No box, enter the truck/trailer number. In the Defect Report No box, enter the defect report number. In the Storage Area box, enter the storage area name. In the Defect box, enter the defect detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 4.3.5 Print an Incoming MIR Report If you want to print an incoming MIR report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. 4.3.6 Print a Report with MTC If you want to print an incoming MIR report including MTC, click (print icon) provided in the Report with MTC column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. 4.3.7 Print a Report Raw Material Offer List If you want to print a report raw material offer list, click  (print icon) provided in the Report Raw Material Offer List column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. 4.3.8 Print a MIR Summary Report If you want to print a MIR summary report, click  (print icon) provided in the upper side of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. 4.3.9 Attach a File into an Added Incoming MIR If you want to attach any file with any incoming MIR listed in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 4.3.10 Edit an Incoming MIR If you want to edit any existing incoming MIR in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon)in the Edit column for the respective MIR. See Fig 4.3. A new window opens to edit the added incoming MIR. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.3.11 Delete an Incoming MIR If you want to delete any specific incoming MIR from the list of MIRs, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 4.3.12 Filter an incoming MIR If you want to filter any incoming MIR from the list of MIRs in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, you can use the request status wise filter box provided in the upper side of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. you can also use (FILTER button) located on the Incoming Material Inspection Report  To know how to filter using the Filter button, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 4.3.13 Export incoming MIR list You can export a list of MIR added in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.4 MVR Inspection Request (Heat Numbers) MVR will be used while go for material inspection. The Material Verification Report tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an MVR inspection request.  If you want to add an MVR inspection request, do the following steps, Click Material Verification Report in the Materials menu. The MVR Inspection Request page opens.                                        Figure 4.4: MVR Inspection Request page 4.4.1 Add an MVR Inspection Request If you want to add an MVR inspection request, Click  (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.4. A new window opens to add an MVR inspection request. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number and an RFI report number for a new MVR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Description box, enter the description for the MVR. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. Click Save. The MVR is successfully added. Once you have added the MVR, you must add the RFI data for the added MVR. 4.4.2 Add RFI Data for an Added MVR Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added MVR inspection request, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.4. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. Once you have added the RFI data, you must add the result for the added MVR inspection request. 4.4.3 View an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click  (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.4. 4.4.4 Add Result for an Added MVR Inspection Request Click (Add icon) of the respective report number. The MVR Inspection Request Details window opens. Click (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request Details window. A new window opens to add result. In the Spool No box, select the spool number from a drop-down list. In the Heat Number / Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. In the Size box, enter the size of the material. In the Type of Material box, enter the type of material. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. Once you have added the result for the MVR inspection request, you must submit and approve the MVR inspection request. 4.4.5 Submit and Approve an MVR Inspection Report Once you have added the result, the Submission column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with   (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the MVR inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the MVR inspection request, the Request Status column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with  (Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the MVR inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 4.4.6 Print an MVR Inspection Report If you want to print an MVR inspection report, click (print icon) in the Report column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.4. 4.4.7 Attach a File into an MVR Inspection Request If you want to attach any file with an existing MVR inspection request listed in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 4.4.8 Edit an MVR inspection request If you want to edit any existing MVR inspection request in the MVR Inspection Request page, do the following, Click(Edit icon)in the Edit column for the respective MVR inspection request. See Fig 4.4. A new window opens to edit the MVR inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.4.9 Filter an MVR inspection request If you want to filter any MVR request from the list of requests in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can use  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 4.4.10 Export MVR inspection request list You can export a list of MVR inspection requests added in the MVR Inspection Request page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.5 Material Summary The Material Summary tab in the Materials menu used to track the material summary details. If you want to track the summary details of the material, do the following steps, Click the Material Summary tab in the Materials menu. The Material Summary Details page opens.                                               Figure 4.5: Material Summary Details page In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the From and To boxes, choose the from and to dates to get the material summary details. Click Search. The summary details of the added material specification will be displayed for the selected period. 4.5.1 Export Material Summary Details You can export the material summary details in the Material Summary Details page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.6 Material Summary by Heat Number The Summary by Heat Number tab in the Materials menu used to track the material summary details by using the respective heat numbers. If you want to track the summary details of the material, do the following steps, Click the Summary by Heat Number tab in the Materials menu. The Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page opens.                      Fig 4.6: Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page In the Heat Number box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. Click Search. The material summary details corresponding to the selected heat number will be displayed. 4.6.1 Export Material Summary Details (by Heat Number) You can export the material summary details in the Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.7 Heat Number – Receiving vs Used You can view the history of received and used heat numbers of materials by using this Heat Number – Receiving vs Used tab in the Materials menu. Click Heat Number – Receiving vs Used in the Materials menu. The Material Heat Number – Receiving vs Used page opens.                     Figure 4.7: Material Heat Number – Receiving vs Used page This page shows the details of component names, heat numbers, and number of quantities received and used. 4.7.1 Export Material Heat Number Received vs Used History You can export the material heat number history in the Material Heat Number – Receiving vs Used page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.7.2 Filter Material Heat Number Received vs Used History If you want to view the received vs used history of any specific heat number, you can use the filter box provided in each column of the Material Heat Number – Receiving vs Used page. Enter the relevant detail in the respective column to view the received vs used history of heat number you want. 4.8 Welding Consumable Welding Consumables are products used to create strong joints between two or more parts while welding. Welding Consumable are segmented based on welding technique, welding consumable type, end-use industry, and region. The Welding Consumable tab in the Materials menu used to add a weld consumable. If you want to add a welding consumable, do the following, Click Welding Consumable in the Materials menu. The Welding Consumable page opens.                                              Figure 4.8: Welding Consumable page 4.8.1 Add a Welding Consumable If you want to add a welding consumable, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Welding Consumable page. See Fig 4.8. A new window opens to add a welding consumable. Note:  A report number for a new welding consumable list will be updated automatically in the Report Number / Rev box. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Supplier box, enter the name of a supplier of welding consumables. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the welding consumable. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the welding consumable. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the welding consumable. In the Requested Date box, choose the prepared date of the welding consumable. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the welding consumable. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the welding consumable list. Click Save. The welding consumable is successfully added. Once you have added the welding consumable, you must add the details of welding consumable. 4.8.2 Add Welding Consumable Details for Added Consumable If you want to add the details of welding consumables for the added consumable, do the following, Click (Add icon) for the respective welding consumable. See Fig 4.8. A new window opens to add the welding consumable details. In the Date box, select the date. In the Product Description box, enter the product description detail. In the Brand box, enter the brand name of welding consumable. In the Type box, enter the type of the welding consumable. In the Diameter box, enter the diameter of the welding consumable. In the Batch No box, enter the batch number of the welding consumable. In the Certificate No box, enter the certificate number. In the Report No box, enter the report number. In the Qty in Kg box, enter the quantity of the welding consumable. Click Save. 4.8.3 Print a Welding Consumable Report If you want to print a welding consumable report, click (print icon) in the Report column of the Welding Consumable page. See Fig 4.8. 4.8.4 Attach a File into a Welding Consumable If you want to attach any file with an existing MVR inspection request listed in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 4.8.5 Edit a Welding Consumable If you want to edit any existing welding consumable in the Welding Consumable page, do the following, Click (Edit icon)in the Edit column for the respective welding consumable. See Fig 4.8. A new window opens and shows the added details of the welding consumable. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.8.6 Delete a Welding Consumable If you want to delete any specific welding consumable, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Welding Consumable page, See Fig 7.8. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 4.8.7 Export Welding Consumable You can export a list of welding consumable added in the Welding consumable page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.9 Import from Excel – Materials The Import from Excel – Materials tab helps you to upload various date related to materials for all fields included in the Materials menu instead of uploading data for each field individually. If you want to import material data for different fields, do the following, Click the Import from Excel – Materials tab in the Materials menu. The File Upload page opens. Download a template by using the (TEMPLATE button) to enter the details of data. An excel worksheet will be downloaded. Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet based on the columns listed in the System Column field. Click  (Choose File button). Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded" Click  (Get Columns button). The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field. The system automatically maps the Required Columns to Import field and the Excel Column field and displays in the Mapped Columns field. If you want to map any columns or to un-map any mapped columns, select the respective columns and then click  (Map button) and (UnMap button) accordingly. If you want to upload the data for specific MIR, select the respective MIR from the drop-down list otherwise select BULK IMPORT. Once you have completed the mapping and un-mapping of columns, in the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet. Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet. Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns. Click  (Populate Value button). The data added in the excel worksheet will be populated. Click  (Process button). Once you have clicked the Process button, the system processes the columns and displays in the Excel Import page. Click  (Import button) to import the data added in the excel worksheet. The data will be successfully imported. 4.10 Material Traceability Record (MTR) The Material Traceability Record tab in the Materials menu helps you to view the MTR for the piping project. The MTR lists material specification, material size, joint number, unique number, and MIR number. To view the MTR, Click Material Traceability Record in the Materials menu. The Piping Material Traceability Record page opens. In the ISO Drawing Number box, select an ISO drawing from a drop-down list. The Piping Material Traceability Record page shows the material details based on the selected ISO drawing number. 4.10.1 Print an MTR If you want to print an MTR, use  and   (print icons) provided in the Piping Material Traceability Record page. If you want to print the current page of the MTR, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the MTR, click (print icon). 4.10.2 Export an MTR You can export the MTR report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Piping Material Traceability Record page. 4.11 Purchase Order (PO) Summary Report The PO Summary Report tab in the Material menu used to view the purchase order summary report. To view the PO summary report, Click PO Summary Report in the Material menu. The PO Summary Report page opens.                                               Figure 7.11: PO Summary Report page In the PO No box, select the PO number. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates to view the PO summary report. Click Search. The page shows the summary report for the purchase order. 4.11.1 Print a PO Summary Report If you want to print the PO summary report, use  and (print icons) provided in the DPWR page. See Fig 4.11. If you want to print the current page of the PO summary report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the PO summary report, click  (print icon). 4.11.2 Export a PO Summary Report You can export the PO Summary Report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the page. 4.12 MVR Summary by Drawing The MVR Summary by Drawing tab in the Materials menu used to view the MVR summary report. To view an MVR summary report, Click MVR Summary by Drawing in the Materials menu. The MVR Summary (Piping) page opens.                                          Figure 4.12: MVR Summary (Piping) page In the ISO Drawing box, select an ISO drawing from a drop-down list. Click Show Report. The page shows the summary details for the MVR. 4.12.1 Print an MVR Summary Report If you want to print the MVR summary report, use and  (print icons) provided in the MVR Summary (Piping) page. See Fig 4.12. If you want to print the current page of the MVR summary report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the MVR summary report, click  (print icon). 4.12.2 Export an MVR Summary Report You can export the MVR summary report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the MVR Summary (Piping) page. 4.13 Unique Number Usage Details The Unique Number Usage Details tab in the Materials menu used to view the usage details of the particular unique number. Click Unique Number Usage Details in the Materials menu. The Unique Number Usage Details page opens.                                  Figure 4.13: Unique Number Usage Details page In the MIR Report Number box, enter the MIR report number. In the Component Name box, enter the component name. In the Heat Number box, enter the heat number. In the Unique Number box, enter the unique number. Click Get Details. 4.14 RFI Material Substitution An RFI could be issued requesting for material substitutions if certain material is not available or cost exorbitantly high. Various subcontractors could be provided with these requests to find who has the best quality materials for the project. You can add an RFI for material substitution by using the RFI Material Substitution tab in the Materials menu. 4.14.1 Add an RFI Material Substitution Request If you want to add an RFI material substitution request, do the following steps, Click RFI Material Substitution in the Materials menu. The RFI Material Substitution page opens.                                        Figure 7.14: RFI Material Substitution page In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the material substitution. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Center box, enter the center name. In the Details of Work box, enter the work details. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. Before saving the added material substitution request, you must add the material substitution detail. Click (ADD button) in the Material Substitution Detail In the Type box, select the type of material substitution. In the Material box, enter the name of the material. In the DWG.  Ref box, enter the drawing reference number. In the Original Size box, enter the original size of the material. In the Original Grade box, enter the original grade of the material. In the Item box, select an item. In the QTY box, enter the quantity of the material. Click Save. The material substitution details will be added and listed in the Material Substitution Detail window. If you want to add the proposed material substitution detail, Click (Add icon) in the Material Substitution Detail window. Click  (ADD button). Enter the details of proposed material substitution. Click Save. The request for material substitution will be added and listed in the View RFI Material Substitution page. 4.15 View RFI Material Substitution The View RFI Material Substitution tab helps you to view and edit the material substitution request, which is added by using the RFI Material Substitution tab. This tab also allows you to add a new material substitution request. Click View RFI Material Substitution in the Materials menu. The View RFI Material Substitution page opens with a list of added material substitution requests.                                   Figure 4.15: View RFI Material Substitution page 4.15.1 Add an RFI Material Substitution Request If you want to add a material substitution request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the View RFI Material Substitution page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new material substitution request. To know how to add a material substitution request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Material Substitution”. Once you have added the material substitution request, you must submit the added request to perform material substitution inspection. 4.15.2 Edit an RFI Material Substitution Request If you want to edit any existing material substitution inspection request in the View RFI Material Substitution page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective material substitution inspection request. See Fig 4.15. The RFI Material Substitution page opens with the details of the selected material substitution inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.15.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Material Substitution Request Once you have added the material substitution inspection request, the Submission column in the View RFI Material Substitution page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the material substitution inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the material substitution inspection request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Material Substitution page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the material substitution inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. 4.15.4 Add Results of Material Substitution Inspection After completing the material inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click(Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens with the details of proposed and original materials. In the Result column, select the result of each material from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Approve All & Save. 4.15.5 View a Material Substitution Report If you want to view a material substitution report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Material Substitution page. See Fig 7.15. 4.15.6 Attach a File into an RFI Material Substitution Request If you want to attach a file with any existing material substitution inspection request listed in the View RFI Material Substitution page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 4.15.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the material substitution inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the View RFI Material Substitution page. 4.15.8 Export an RFI Material Substitution List You can export a list of material substitution requests added in the View RFI Material Substitution page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.15.9 Filter an RFI Material Substitution Request If you want to filter any specific material substitution inspection request in the View RFI Material Substitution page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Material Substitution page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 4.16 Material Verification Report (MVR) (Unique Numbers) Material Inspection is nothing but validating the quality of purchased raw materials based on the set acceptance criteria before the materials are used in the piping project. Material Inspection is nothing but validating the quality of purchased raw materials based on the set acceptance criteria before the materials are used in the piping project. If you want to add a MIR request, do the following, Click Material Receiving and Inspection in the Materials menu. The Material Verification Report page opens.                                              Figure 4.16: Material Verification Report page 4.16.1 Add a MIR Request If you want to add a MIR request, Click (ADD button) in the Material Verification Report See Fig 4.16. A new window opens to add a MIR request. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number and a Request for Inspection (RFI) number for a new MIR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Delivery Order Number box, enter the material’s delivery order number. If the materials are received from a client, select the SAN Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the O. No/Material ID/M. R box, enter the purchase order/material id number/ material receiving number. In the Dated box, choose the date of the purchase order. In the Received On box, select the received date of materials. If the materials are purchased from outside, select the FREE Issued Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the Packing List No box, enter the packing list number. In the Dated box, choose the date of packing. In the Received On box, choose the received date of materials. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the MIR. In the Vendor Name box, enter the vendor name. In the Delivery Note box, enter the delivery note. In the Drawing Reference box, enter the reference drawing detail. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Sub System box, select a sub system from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the MIR. In the Bar Code box, enter the bar code of the material. Click Save. The MIR request is successfully added. Once you have added the MIR request, you must add the material details for the added MIR. 4.16.2 Add Materials for MIR To add the details of materials for the added MIR request, do the following steps, Click(Edit icon) of the respective MIR. See Fig 4.16. The Add/Edit - Materials window opens.                                           Figure 4.16.1: Add/Edit – Materials window Click  (ADD button) in the Add/Edit - Materials window. A new window opens to add the material details. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Material Description box, select the material from a drop-down list and enter the component details. In the Material Size box, select the size of the material from a drop-down list. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Type box, select the type of material. In the Quantity Required box, enter the required quantity of the material. In the Unit of Measurement (UOM) box, enter the UOM detail. In the Item No box, enter the item number. In the Material Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Update. The added material will be listed in the Add/Edit – Materials window. Note: If Add/Edit – Materials window shows the added material in the in red color means that the added component is not matched with the component list. See Fig 4.16.1. Once you have added the material details, you must add the heat numbers for the added materials. 4.16.3 Add Heat/Unique numbers for materials To add heat numbers, Click (Add icon) of the respective material in the Add/Edit - Materials See Fig 4.16.1. The Heat Numbers window opens. Click (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers window. A new window opens to add a heat number. In the Heat Number box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. In the Certificates box, enter the certificate name. In the Plate Number/Equipment Tag Number box, enter the plate number or equipment tag number of the material. In the Delivery Quantity (Total) box, enter the total delivery quantity of the material. In the Unique Number box, enter the unique number of the material. In the Dimensions option, update the dimensions result by selecting Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Visual option, update the visual result by selecting Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Mill Test Certificates (MTC) option, update the mill test certificates result by selecting Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Remarks option, enter your remarks if any. Click Update. The heat numbers are updated. Once you have added the MIR request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 4.16.4 Submit and Approve an MIR Request Once you have added the MIR request, the Submission column in the Material Verification Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the MIR request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise  click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the MIR request, the Request Status column in the Material Verification Report page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the MIR request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The MIR request will be moved for MIR inspection. 4.16.5 Edit an MIR Request If you want to edit any existing MIR request in the Material Verification Report page, Click(Edit icon) of the respective MIR request. See Fig 4.16. The Material Verification Report page shows the details of the selected MIR request. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 4.16.6 Delete an MIR Request If you want to delete any existing MIR request in the Material Verification Report page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Material Verification Report page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 4.16.7 Export MIR List You can export a list of MIR requests added in the Material Verification Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 4.16.8 Filter an MIR Request If you want to filter any specific test equipment in the Material Verification Report page, you can use the request status wise filter box provided in the upper side of the Material Verification Report page. You can also use (FILTER button) located on the Material Verification Report To know how to filter using the Filter button, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 4.16.9 View a Material Receiving Inspection Report To view a material receiving inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column of the Material Verification Report page. 4.16.10 View a Material Test Certificate (MTC) Report To view an MTC report, click  (Print icon) provided in the Report with MTC column of the Material Verification Report page. 4.16.11 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the MIR inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the Material Verification Report page. 4.17 Material Receiving and Inspection (Unique Numbers) The Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an incoming material inspection report (MIR). Incoming MIR includes material name, material size, material specification, and material type. If you want to add an incoming MIR, do the following, Click the Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu. The Incoming Material Inspection Report page opens.                               Figure 4.17: Incoming Material Inspection Report page 4.17.1 Add an Incoming MIR If you want to add an incoming MIR, Click (ADD button) in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.17. A new window opens to add an incoming MIR. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number and an Request for Inspection (RFI) number for a new MIR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Delivery Order Number box, enter the material’s delivery order number. If the materials are received from a client, select the DM Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the P.O. No box, enter the purchase order number. In the Dated box, choose the date of the purchase order. In the Received On box, select the received date of materials. If the materials are purchased from outside, select the FREE Issued Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the Packing List No box, enter the packing list number. In the Dated box, choose the date of packing. In the Received On box, choose the received date of materials. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Vendor Name box, enter the vendor name. In the Delivery Note box, enter the delivery note. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Sub Contractor box, select the subcontractor name from a drop-down list. Click Save. The incoming MIR is successfully added. Once you have added the MIR, you must add the material details for the added MIR. 4.17.2 Add materials for an incoming MIR If you want to add the details of materials for the added incoming MIR, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit MIR column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.17. The Add/Edit - Materials window opens.                                            Figure 4.17.1: Add/Edit – Materials window Click (ADD button) in the Add/Edit - Materials window. A new window opens to add the material details. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Material box, select the name of the material from a drop-down list. In the Quantity Required box, enter the required quantity of the material. In the Certificate Number box, enter the certificate number. In the PO No box, enter the purchase order number. In the Non-Conformance Report (NCR) No box, enter the NCR number. In the Size/Thickness box, select the size/thickness of the received material from a drop-down list. In the Heat Number box, enter the heat number of the material. In the CEQ box, enter the CEQ number. In the DO box, enter the deliver order number. In the TQ No box, enter the TQ number. In the Length box, select the length of the material from a drop-down list. In the Plate Number box, enter the plate number of the material. In the Material Type box, enter the type of the material. In the CD Number box, enter the CD number. In the Status box, select the status of the received material. In the Material Type box, select the type of material from a drop-down list. In the Grade box, select the grade of the material. In the Unique No box, enter the unique number of the material. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Client Item No box, enter the client item number. In the Supply Condition box, enter the supply condition details of the material. In the Material Description box, enter the material description. Click Update. Once you have added the material details, you must add the heat numbers for the added materials. 4.17.3 Add Heat Numbers Click(Add icon) of the respective material in the Add/Edit - Materials See Fig 4.17.1. The Heat Numbers window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers window. A new window opens to add a heat number. In the Heat Number/Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. In the Plate Number/Coil Number/ Tag Number box, enter the plate number or coil number or tag number of the material. In the Delivery Quantity (Total) box, enter the total delivery quantity of the material. In the Delivery Quantity (Partial) box, enter the partial delivery quantity of the material. In the CEQ box, enter the CEQ number. In the CD Number box, enter the CD number. In the Unique Number box, enter the unique number of the material. In the Client Item Number box, enter the client item number. In the Dimensions option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Visual option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Mill Test Certificates (MTC) option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Remarks option, enter your remarks if any. If the heat treatment is required for the material, select YES in the Heat Treatment option. Otherwise select NO. In the NDE is required for the material, select YES in the NDE Otherwise select NO. Click Update. Once you have added the heat numbers, you must add unique numbers for the material. 4.17.4 Add Unique Numbers Click (Add icon) of the respective heat number in the Heat Numbers box. The Unique Numbers box opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Unique Numbers window. A new window opens to add a unique number. In the Unique Number box, enter a unique number for the respective heat number. In the Original Number box, enter the original number of the material. In the Size box, enter the size of the material. Click Update. 4.17.5 Print an Incoming MIR If you want to print an incoming MIR report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.17. 4.17.6 Print a Report with MTC If you want to print an incoming MIR report including MTC, click(print icon) provided in the Report with MTC column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.17. 4.17.7 Attach a File into an Added Incoming MIR If you want to attach any file with any incoming MIR listed in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 4.17.8 Edit an Incoming MIR If you want to edit any existing incoming MIR in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon)in the Edit column for the respective MIR. See Fig 4.17. A new window opens to edit the added incoming MIR. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.17.9 Delete an Incoming MIR If you want to delete any specific incoming MIR from the list of MIRs, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 4.17.10 Filter an Incoming MIR If you want to filter any incoming MIR from the list of MIRs in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, you can use the request status wise filter box  provided in the upper side of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. You can also use (FILTER button) located on the Incoming Material Inspection Report  To know how to filter using the Filter button, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 4.17.11 Export Incoming MIR List You can export a list of MIR added in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. Inspection 5.0 Inspection The Inspection menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used add a Request for Inspection (RFI) fit up request, an RFI weld VI request, an NDT inspection request, a spool release request, a dimensional inspection request, an RFI painting and blasting work, and other AFI requests. 5.1 RFI Fit up Request (Heat Numbers) The RFI Fit up Request tab allows you add an RFI fit up request to check the fit-up quality of pipes and joints used in the piping project by a sub-contractor. To navigate to the RFI fit up request adding page, Click RFI Fit up Request in the Inspection menu. The RFI Fit up Request page opens.                                              Figure 5.1: RFI Fit up Request page 5.1.1 Add an RFI Fit up Request If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. Note: The inspection date should be as current date or upcoming dates. The system will not accept if you have given the previous dates. The fit up inspection date should not be later than the RFI weld visual inspection date. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. Before saving the added fit up request, you must add joints for the fit-up request. Note: You can add multiple joints for one request. The RFI Fit up Request page shows a list of joints for the corresponding line and drawing numbers including the component details. If you want to add joints for the RFI Fit up request, do the following, Before adding joints, click the respective (Add component details icon) of the joints which you want to add. The Component – I & II box opens. Check and edit the details of first and second components. Check the first and second components name. If you want to change the component, you can change the component by using a drop-down list. In the Material box, select the material that is the components is made with. Check the material specifications and grade. In the Diameter (MM) and Thickness (MM) boxes, select the diameter and thickness of the components from the given values. Click Save. The component details will be saved successfully. Click (Add icon) of the respective joints you want to add. The added joints will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. In the Heat No 1 box, enter the heat number of the first component if you know. In the Heat No 2 box, enter the heat number of the second component if you know. In the Fitter box, select the fitter from a drop-down list. In the WPS box, select the WPS from a drop-down list. Tip: If you want to remove any added joint, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description/Note box, enter the description for the added RFI fit up request. Click Save. The RFI fit up request is successfully added. If you want to view the added request, navigate to View RFI Fit up. 5.2 View RFI Fit up (Heat Numbers) The View RFI Fit up tab helps you to view and edit the RFI fit up requests, which are added by using the RFI Fit up Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI fit up request. Click the View RFI Fit up tab in the Inspection menu. The RFI Fit up Request List page opens with a list of added RFI fit up requests.                                            Figure 5.2: RFI Fit up Request List page 5.2.1 Add an RFI Fit up Request If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following, Click   (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Request List page. The system redirects you into RFI Fit up Request page. To know how to add an RFI fit up request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Fit up Request”. Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 5.2.2 Add Representative for Added RFI Fit up Request If you want to add a representative for any added RFI fit up request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI fit up request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.2.3 Edit an RFI Fit up Request If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request in the RFI Fit up Request page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request. See Fig 5.2. The RFI Fit up Visual Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI fit up request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.2.4 Submit and Approve an RFI Fit up Request Once you have added the RFI fit up request, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up Request Lists page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.2. If you want to submit the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the RFI Fit up Requests List page is appeared with(Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 5.2.5 Add Results of RFI Fit up Inspection After completing the RFI fit up inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The RFI Fit up Request List window opens with a list of joints. If you want to update the heat numbers for both the components, click (Edit icon) of the respective component. The Heat Number window opens with a list of heat numbers and MIR numbers. Select the heat numbers you want to update. Click Save & Close. The heat numbers will be updated successfully. If you want to update the WPS number in the WPS Number column, you can change the WPS number from a drop-down list. Update the result for root gap by selecting Accepted or Rejected in the Root Gap column based on the inspection. Update the result for straight/ alignment by selecting Accepted or Rejected in the Strgt/Align column based on the inspection. In the Edge Prep column, select the type of the edge preparation from a drop-down list. In the Result column, update the RFI fit up inspection result by selecting Pending, Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks column, enter you remarks if any. Note: If you want to attach any document to add more information about the inspection results, click (Attach icon) and attach your document. 5.2.6 View an RFI Fit up Report If you want to view an RFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fit up Requests List page. See Fig 5.2. 5.2.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the RFI fit up inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click(Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Fit up Requests List page. 5.2.8 Bulk Print the RFI Fit up Reports If you want to print all the RFI fit up reports added in the RFI Fit up Requests List page together, click (Bulk Print button). The Report page shows all the RFI fit up reports together. 5.2.9 Attach a File into an RFI Fit up Request If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI fit up request listed in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.2.10 Export RFI Fit up Request List You can export a list of RFI fit up requests added in the RFI Fit up Requests List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.2.11 Filter an RFI Fit up Request If you want to filter any specific RFI fit up request in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, you can use the filter box  provided in the upper side of the RFI Fit up Requests List  To filter the any specific RFI fit up request, select the Drawing Number and Date in the boxes and click Search. you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Fit up Requests List  To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.3 RFI Weld VI Request (Heat Numbers) The RFI Weld VI Request tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add an RFI weld VI request to perform visual inspection of welded pipes and joints used in the piping project. To navigate to the RFI weld VI request adding page, Click RFI Weld VI Request in the Inspection menu. The RFI Weld Visual Request page opens.                                                Figure 5.3: RFI Weld Visual Request page 5.3.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor Name box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. Note: The inspection date should be as current date or upcoming dates. The system will not accept if you have given the previous dates. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. Before saving the added weld VI request, you must add joints for the weld VI request. Note: You can add multiple joints for one request. The RFI Weld Visual Request page shows a list of joints for the corresponding line and drawing numbers including the spool number. If you want to add joints for the RFI weld VI request, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) of the respective joints you want to add. The added joints will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Update the welder details by using(Add icon) provided in the Welder Details Click (Add icon) of the respective joint number. The Welder- Weld Layer- Weld Process window opens. In the Date box, select the date. In the Group Name box, select the group name from a drop-down list. In the Weld Process field, select a weld process. In the Weld Position field, select the welding position. In the Weld Layers field, select the weld layers you want add. In the Welder Number/ Name field, select the welders you want to add. Click Add. The selected welders will be added and listed in the below table. See the above figure. In the Weld Consumable box, select the weld consumable from a drop-down list. In the WPS Number box, select the WPS number from a drop-down list. Click Save. Tip: If you want to remove any added joint, click  (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI weld VI request. Click Save. The RFI weld VI request is successfully added. If you want to view the added request, navigate to View RFI Weld VI. 5.4 View RFI Weld VI (Heat Numbers) The View RFI Weld VI tab helps you to view and edit the RFI weld VI request, which is added by using the RFI Weld VI Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI weld VI request. Click the View RFI Weld VI tab in the Inspection menu. The RFI Weld Visual Requests List page opens with a list of added RFI weld VI requests.                                            Figure 5.4: RFI Weld Visual Requests List page 5.4.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. The system redirects you into RFI Weld Visual Request page. To know how to add an RFI weld VI request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Weld VI Request”. Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, you must submit the added request for weld visual inspection. 5.4.2 Add Representative for Added RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add a representative for any added RFI weld VI request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI weld VI request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.4.3 Edit an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI request in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page, do the following, Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.4. The RFI Weld Visual Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI weld VI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.4.4 Submit an RFI Weld VI Request Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.4. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click   (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for RFI weld visual inspection. 5.4.5 Add Results of RFI weld Visual Inspection After completing the RFI weld visual inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The RFI Weld Visual Request List window opens with a list of joints added for the particular request. If you want to update the welder details, click (Add icon) of the respective joint. The Welder-Weld Layer-Weld Process window opens. Note: If you want to delete any added weld, click (Delete icon) of the respective welder. In the Date box, select the date. In the Group Name box, select the group name from a drop-down list. In the Weld Process field, select a weld process. In the Weld Position field, select the welding position. In the Weld Layers field, select the weld layers you want add. In the Welder Number/ Name field, select the welders you want to add. Click Add. The selected welders will be added and listed in the below table. See the above figure. In the Weld Consumable box, select the weld consumable from a drop-down list. In the WPS Number box, select the WPS number from a drop-down list. Click Save. In the Result column, select the result for each joint from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.4.6 View an RFI Weld VI Report If you want to view an RFI weld VI report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. See Fig 5.4. 5.4.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the RFI weld visual inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. 5.4.8 Bulk Print RFI Weld VI Reports If you want to print all the RFI weld VI reports added in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page together, click (Bulk Print button). The Report page shows all the RFI weld VI reports together. 5.4.9 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI weld VI request listed in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.4.10 Export RFI Weld VI Request List You can export a list of RFI weld VI requests added in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.4.11 Filter an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to filter any specific RFI weld VI request in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page, you can use the filter box  provided in the upper side of the RFI Weld Visual Requests List  To filter the any specific RFI weld VI request, select the Drawing Number and Date in the boxes and click Search. you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.5 NDT Inspection Request The NDT Inspection Request tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an NDT inspection request to perform an NDT inspection. To navigate to the NDT inspection request adding page, Click NDT Inspection Request in the Inspection menu. The NDT Inspection Request page opens.                                                     Figure 5.5: NDT Inspection Request page 5.5.1 Add an NDT inspection request If you want to add an NDT inspection request, do the following Click (ADD button) in the NDT Inspection Request page. A new page opens to add an NDT inspection request.                                         Figure 5.5: NDT Inspection Request page Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Requested By box, enter the name of person who has requested for the NDT inspection. In the To box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Description/ Spec. Ref. No box, enter the description for the request. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Requisition box, enter the requisition detail. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail In the PWHT Request Type box, select the PWHT request type from a drop-down list. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the NDT Type box, select the type of NDT you want to add. Before saving the added NDT request, you must add joints. You can add multiple joints for one NDT inspection request. Note: The page shows a list of added joints. If you want to view the joints for the specific ISO drawing, select the respective ISO drawing from a drop-down list. Click (Add icon) of the respective joint which you want to add. The added joints will be moved to the right side of the page. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save NDT Request. The added NDT inspection request will be listed in the NDT Inspection Request page. 5.5.2 Edit an NDT Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing NDT inspection request in the NDT Inspection Request page, do the following steps, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT request. See Fig 5.5. The NDT Inspection Request page opens with the details of the selected NDT inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.5.3 Submit and Approve an NDT Inspection Request Once you have added the NDT inspection request, the Submission column in the NDT Inspection Request page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.5. If you want to submit the NDT inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the NDT inspection request has been submitted, the Request Status column in the NDT Inspection Request page is appeared with   (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to accept the NDT inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved request will be moved to NDT inspection. 5.5.4 View an NDT Inspection Report If you want to view an NDT inspection report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the NDT Inspection Request page. See Fig 5.5. 5.5.5 Attach a File into an NDT Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing NDT inspection request listed in the NDT Inspection Request page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.5.6 Export NDT Inspection Request List You can export a list of NDT inspection requests added in the NDT Inspection Request page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.5.7 Filter an NDT Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific NDT inspection request in the NDT Inspection Request page, you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the NDT Inspection Request page.  To filter the any specific NDT inspection request, select the request status in the Request Status box. you can use   (FILTER button) located on the NDT Inspection Request  To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.5.8 Import Multiple NDT Inspection Requests If you want to import multiple NDT inspection requests together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 5.5. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of NDT inspection requests. Enter the required NDT inspection request details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the NDT inspection request details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 5.5. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the NDT inspection request that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the NDT inspection request in the worksheet will be displayed in the NDT Inspection Request page. 5.6 NDT Job Order The NDT Job Order tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add a job order for a specific NDT-contractor to carry out the NDT inspection. Once you have added the job order, you can add the NDT request including the quantity and schedule date to complete the NDT inspection. Click NDT Job Order in the Inspection menu. The Job Order page opens.                                                    Figure 5.6: Job Order page 5.6.1 Add an NDT Job Order If you want to add an NDT job order, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Job Order page. See Fig 5.6. A new window opens to add an NDT job order. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new job order will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT Contractor box, select the name of an NDT contractor from a drop-down list. In the Attention box, enter any note if you want for attention. In the Date box, select the date of adding an NDT job order. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested for an NDT job order. In the Requested Date box, select the requested date of an NDT job order. In the Supported By boxes, enter the name of a project lead and a HOD, respectively. In the Supported Date box, select the supported date of an NDT job order. Click Save. The NDT job order is successfully added. 5.6.2 Add an NDT Job Request To add an NDT job request, Click (Add icon) of the respective job order in the Add NDT Request column of the Job Order See Fig 5.6. A new window shows a list of added NDT request. If you want to add any request, click (Add icon) of the respective request. The added NDT request will be assigned under the respective job order. If you want to delete any request, click (Delete icon) of the respective request. 5.6.3 Attach a File into an NDT Job Order If you want to attach any file with any NDT job order listed in the Job Order page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.6.4 View an NDT Job Order Report If you want to view an NDT job order report, click   (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Job Order page. See Fig 5.6. 5.6.5 Edit an NDT Job Order If you want to edit any existing NDT job order in the Job Order page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT job order. See Fig 5.6. A new window opens with the added details of NDT job order to edit the job order. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.6.6 Delete an NDT Job Order If you want to delete any specific NDT job order, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Job Order page, See Fig 8.6. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 5.6.7 Export NDT Job Order List You can export a list of NDT job order added in the Job Order page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.7 Spool Release Inspection Request The Spool Release Request tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a spool release request. To navigate to the spool release inspection request adding page, Click Spool Release Request in the Inspection menu. The Spool Release Inspection Request page opens.                                  Figure 5.7: Spool Release Inspection Request page 5.7.1 Add a Spool Release Inspection Request If you want to add a spool release inspection request, do the following steps in the Spool Release Inspection Request page, See Fig 5.7. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of spool inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the spool inspection to be performed. Before saving the added spool release inspection request, you must add spools. You can add multiple spools for one spool release inspection request. Note: The page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the specific spools, use the filter options provided in the System, Line Number, Drawing Number, and Spool Number columns. Click  (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of inspection items. In the Subject Coverage box, enter the details of subject coverage. Click Save. The spool release request will be added and listed in the View Spool Release page. 5.8 View Spool Release The View Spool Release tab helps you to view and edit the spool release inspection request, which is added by using the Spool Release Inspection Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new spool release request. Click View Spool Release in the Inspection menu. The Spool Release List page opens with a list of added spool release requests.                                      Figure 5.8: Spool Release List page 5.8.1 Add a Spool Release Inspection Request If you want to add a spool release request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Spool Release List page. The system redirects you into Spool Release Inspection Request page. To know how to add a spool release inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Spool Release Inspection Request”. Once you have added the spool release request, you must submit the added request to perform inspection in the piping spool. 5.8.2 Add Representative for Added Spool Release Inspection Request If you want to add a representative for any added spool release request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective spool release request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.8.3 Edit a Spool Release Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing spool release request in the Spool Release List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective spool release request. See Fig 5.8. The Spool Release Inspection Request page opens with the details of the selected spool release request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.8.4 Submit a Spool Release Inspection Request Once you have added the spool release request, the Request Status column in the Spool Release List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.8. If you want to submit the spool release request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for spool inspection. 5.8.5 Add Results of Spool Release Inspection After completing the spool release inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Spool Release List window opens with a list of spools added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result for each spool from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.8.6 View a Piping Spool Release Report If you want to view a piping spool release report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Spool Release List page. See Fig 5.8. 5.8.7 Attach a File into a Spool Release Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing spool release request listed in the Spool Release List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.8.8 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the spool release inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the Spool Release List page. 5.8.9 Export Spool Release Inspection Request List You can export a list of spool release requests added in the Spool Release List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.8.10 Filter a Spool Release Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific spool release request in the Spool Release List page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Spool Release List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.9 Inspection Release Note The Inspection Release Note tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an inspection release note. To navigate to the inspection release note adding page, Click Inspection Release Note in the Inspection menu. The Inspection Release Note page opens.                                         Figure 5.9: Inspection Release Note page 5.9.1 Add an Inspection Release Note If you want to add an inspection release note, do the following steps, In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. See Fig 5.9. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Location box, select a location where the inspection to be held. In the System/Area box, enter the name of area/system. In the Sub System No box, enter the sub system number. In the Item to be Released field, select the detail of the item to be released that is whether Piping or Structural. If another item means select the checkbox of Others and enter the item detail. In the Item to be Released for field, select the reason of the item to be released for that is whether for Pressure Test or Blasting & Painting. If any other reason means select the checkbox of Others and enter the reason. Before saving the added inspection release note, you must add spools. You can add multiple spools for one inspection release note. Note: The page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the specific spools, use the filter options provided in the System, Line Number, Drawing Number, Sheet No & Rev No and Spool Number columns. Click (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of inspection items. In the Subject Coverage box, enter the detail of subject coverage. Click Save. The inspection release note will be added and listed in the View Inspection Release Note page. 5.10 View Inspection Release Note The View Inspection Release Note tab helps you to view and edit the inspection release note, which is added by using the Inspection Release Note tab. This tab also allows you to add a new inspection release note. Click View Inspection Release Note in the Inspection menu. The Inspection Release Note page opens with a list of added inspection release notes.                                              Figure 5.10: Inspection Release Note page 5.10.1 Add an Inspection Release Note If you want to add an inspection release note, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Inspection Release Note page. The system redirects you into Inspection Release Note page. To know how to add an inspection release note, See the topic, “Add an Inspection Release Note”. Once you have added the inspection release note, you must submit the added note to perform the release note inspection. 5.10.2 Add a Representative for Added Inspection Release Note If you want to add a representative for any added inspection release note, Click  (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective inspection release note. The Edit Form window opens. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.10.3 Edit an Inspection Release Note If you want to edit any existing inspection release note in the Inspection Release Note page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective inspection release note. See Fig 5.10. The Inspection Release Note page opens with the details of the selected inspection release note. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.10.4 Submit an Inspection Release Note Once you have added the inspection release note, the Request Status column in the Inspection Release Note page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.10. If you want to submit the inspection release note, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click   Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for release note inspection. 5.10.5 Add RFI Data for an Inspection Release Note If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added inspection release note, do the following steps, Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Inspection Release Note page. See Fig 5.10. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data for the inspection release note is added successfully. 5.10.6 Add Results of Inspection Release Note After completing the inspection for the added release note, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The INR List window opens with a list of spools added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result for each spool from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.10.7 View an RFI Report If you want to view an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Inspection Release Note page. See Fig 5.10. 5.10.8 View an Inspection Release Note Report If you want to view an inspection release note report, click(print icon) provided in the Print column of the Inspection Release Note page. See Fig 5.10. 5.10.9 Attach a File into an Inspection Release Note If you want to attach a file with any existing inspection release note listed in the Inspection Release Note page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.10.10 View a Pipe Spool Release Summary If you want to view a pipe spool release summary report, click (print icon) provided in the upper side of the Inspection Release Note page. See Fig 5.10. 5.10.11 Export Inspection Release Note List You can export a list of inspection release notes added in the Inspection Release Note page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.10.12 Filter an Inspection Release Note If you want to filter any specific inspection release note in the Inspection Release Note page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Inspection Release Note page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.11 Dimensional Inspection Request The Dimensional Inspection Request tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a dimensional inspection request. To navigate to the dimensional inspection request adding page, Click Dimensional Inspection Request in the Inspection menu. The Dimensional Inspection Request page opens.                              Figure 5.11: Dimensional Inspection Request page 5.11.1 Add a Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to add a new dimensional inspection request, do the following steps. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of dimensional inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the dimensional inspection to be performed. Before saving the added dimensional inspection request, you must add spools. You can add multiple spools for one dimensional inspection request. Note: The page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the specific spools, use the filter options provided in the System, Line Number, Drawing Number, and Spool Number columns. Click  (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of inspection items. Click Save. The dimensional inspection request will be added and listed in the Dimensional Inspection List page. 5.12 Dimensional Inspection List The Dimensional Inspection List tab helps you to view and edit the dimensional inspection request, which is added by using the Dimensional Inspection Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new dimensional inspection request. Click Dimensional Inspection List in the Inspection menu. The Dimensional Inspection List page opens with a list of added dimensional inspection requests.                                    Figure 5.12: Dimensional Inspection List page 5.12.1 Add a Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to add a dimensional inspection request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Dimensional Inspection List page. The system redirects you into the Dimensional Inspection Request page. To know how to add a dimensional inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Dimensional Inspection Request”. Once you have added the dimensional inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the dimensional inspection. 5.12.2 Add Representative for Added Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to add a representative for any added dimensional inspection request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective spool release request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.12.3 Edit a Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing dimensional inspection request in the Dimensional Inspection List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective dimensional inspection request. See Fig 5.12. The page opens with the details of the selected dimensional inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.12.4 Submit a Dimensional Inspection Request Once you have added the dimensional inspection request, the Request Status column in the Dimensional Inspection List page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.12. If you want to submit the dimensional inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the dimensional inspection. 5.12.5 Add Results of Dimensional Inspection After completing the dimensional inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Dimensional Inspection List window opens with a list of added spools. In the Result column, select the result for each spool from the given result options. In the Pipe Size column, select the result of pipe size. In the Dimension column, select the result of pipe dimension. In the Flange column, select the result of flange. In the Orientation column, select the result of orientation. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.12.6 View a Dimensional Inspection Report If you want to view a dimensional inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Dimensional Inspection List page. See Fig 5.12. 5.12.7 Attach a File into a Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with an existing dimensional inspection request listed in the Dimensional Inspection List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID” 5.12.8 Export Dimensional Inspection Request List You can export a list of dimensional inspection requests added in the Dimensional Inspection List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.12.9 Filter a Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to filter any dimensional inspection request in the Dimensional Inspection List page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Dimensional Inspection List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.13 RFI Hydro Pressure Hydro Pressure Inspection is the technique in which pipes are tested at required design pressure of the pipes to check the leak and strength. You can add a request for hydro pressure inspection by using the RFI Hydro Pressure tab in the Inspection menu. 5.13.1 Add an RFI Hydro Pressure Request If you want to add an RFI hydro pressure request, do the following steps, Click RFI Hydro Pressure in the Inspection menu. The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens.                                         Figure 5.13: RFI Hydro Pressure page In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Code box, enter the acceptance code detail. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Test Temperature box, enter the test temperature value. In the Test Medium box, select the test medium from the drop-down list. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the hydro pressure inspection. In the Classification box, enter the classification detail. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time range. In the Pressure Gauge No box, enter the pressure gauge number. In the Location box, select the location where the inspection to be performed. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Procedure No box, enter the procedure number. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure range. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure range. In the Instrument box, enter the instrument name. In the P&ID No box, enter the P&ID number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the hydro pressure inspection. Before saving the added NDT request, you must add spools. Note: You can add multiple spools for one request. The RFI Hydro Pressure page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the spools for the specific ISO drawing, select the respective ISO drawing from a drop-down list. Click  (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. Click Save Request. The hydro pressure inspection request will be added and listed in the RFI Hydro Pressure page. 5.14 View RFI Hydro Pressure The View RFI Hydro Pressure tab helps you to view and edit the hydro pressure inspection request, which is added by using the RFI Hydro Pressure tab. This tab also allows you to add a new hydro pressure request. Click View RFI Hydro Pressure in the Inspection menu. The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens with a list of added hydro pressure requests.                                         Figure 5.14: RFI Hydro Pressure page 5.14.1 Add a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request If you want to add a hydro pressure inspection request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Hydro Pressure page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new hydro pressure inspection request. To know how to add a hydro pressure inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request”. Once you have added the hydro pressure inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform hydro pressure inspection. 5.14.2 Add Representative for Hydro Pressure Inspection Request If you want to add a representative for any added hydro pressure inspection request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective hydro pressure inspection request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.14.3 Edit a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing hydro pressure inspection request in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective hydro pressure inspection See Fig 5.14. The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens with the details of the selected hydro pressure inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.14.4 Submit and Approve a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request Once you have added the hydro pressure inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the hydro pressure inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the hydro pressure inspection request, the Request Status column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the hydro pressure inspection request, click  (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The hydro pressure inspection request will be moved for hydro pressure inspection. 5.14.5 Add Results of Hydro Pressure Inspection After completing the hydro pressure inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of spools added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each spool from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Temperature column, enter the temperature value of each spool. In the Start Time and End Time columns, enter the start and end times. In the Hydrostatic Test Pressure column, enter the hydrostatic test pressure value. In the Holding Time Duration column, enter the holding time duration. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. In the Attachment column, you want to attach any document. Click Save. 5.14.6 View a Hydro Pressure Inspection Report If you want to view a hydro pressure inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the RFI Hydro Pressure page. See Fig 5.14. 5.14.7 Attach a File into a hydro pressure inspection Request If you want  o attach a file with any existing hydro pressure inspection request listed in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.14.8 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the hydro pressure inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page. 5.14.9 Export Hydro Pressure Inspection Request List You can export a list of hydro pressure requests added in the RFI Hydro Pressure page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.14.10 Filter a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific hydro pressure inspection request in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Hydro Pressure page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.15 RFI Painting and Blasting The RFI Painting and Blasting tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an inspection request for painting and blasting in the piping project. To navigate to the painting and blasting inspection request adding page, Click RFI Painting and Blasting in the Inspection menu. The Blasting and Painting Inspection Record page opens.                      Figure 5.15: Painting and blasting Inspection Request page 5.15.1 Add a Painting and Blasting Inspection Request If you want to add a new painting and blasting inspection request, do the following steps. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the date and time of painting and blasting inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the painting and blasting inspection to be performed. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. In the NDT Procedure box, select an NDT procedure from a drop-down list. In the Coating P.O No box, enter the purchase order number of coating. In the Shift box, enter the shit detail. Before saving the added painting and blasting request, you must add spools. You can add multiple spools for one painting and blasting request. Note: The page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the specific spools, use the filter options provided in the Line Number, Drawing Number, and Spool Number columns. Select the checkbox of the respective spool which you want to add. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the painting and blasting request. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the painting and blasting request. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the painting and blasting request. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the painting and blasting request. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the painting and blasting request. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the painting and blasting request. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Send Request. The painting and blasting inspection request will be added and listed in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. 5.16 View Painting and Blasting The View Painting and Blasting tab helps you to view and edit the painting and blasting inspection request, which is added by using the RFI Painting and Blasting tab. This tab also allows you to add a new painting and blasting inspection request. Click View Painting and Blasting in the Inspection menu. The Blasting and Painting Inspection List page opens with a list of added painting and blasting requests.                            Figure 5.16: Blasting and Painting Inspection List page 5.16.1 Add a Painting and Blasting Inspection Request If you want to add a painting and blasting inspection request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. The system redirects you to the RFI Painting and Blasting page to add a new painting and blasting inspection request. To know how to add a painting and blasting inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Painting and Blasting Inspection Request”. Once you have added the painting and blasting inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the painting and blasting inspection. 5.16.2 Edit a Painting and Blasting Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing painting and blasting inspection request in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective painting and blasting inspection request. See Fig 5.16. The RFI Painting and Blasting page opens with the details of the selected painting and blasting inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.16.3 Submit and Approve a Painting and Blasting Inspection Request Once you have added the painting and blasting inspection request, the Submission column in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the painting and blasting inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the painting and blasting inspection request, the Request Status column in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the painting and blasting inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The painting and blasting inspection request will be moved for painting and blasting inspection. 5.16.4 Add RFI Data for Piping and Blasting Inspection If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added piping and blasting inspection request, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List See Fig 5.16. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data for the painting and blasting inspection is added successfully. 5.16.5 View a Painting and Blasting Inspection Report If you want to view a painting and blasting inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. See Fig 5.16. 5.16.6 Attach a File into a Painting and Blasting Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing painting and blasting inspection request listed in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.16.7 Export Painting and Blasting Inspection Request List You can export a list of painting and blasting requests added in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.16.8 Filter a Painting and Blasting Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific painting and blasting inspection request in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page, you can filter the request based on the Spool No filter box. 5.16.9 View a Painting and Blasting Summary Report If you want to view a painting and blasting summary report, Click (print icon) provided in the upper side of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. The Blasting & Painting Summary Report page opens. In the ISO Drawing No box, select the ISO drawing number. In the Spool No box, select the spool number. Click Go. The paining and blasting summary report detail opens. 5.17 Other Application for Inspection (AFI) Requests or RFI Request – PWHT/PMI/Hardness/Ferrite The Other AFI Requests tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add other AFI requests such as PWHT, PMI, Hardness and Ferrite requests. Click Other AFI Requests in the Inspection menu. The RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/Hardness/Ferrite page opens.                       Figure 5.17: RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/Hardness/Ferrite page 5.17 Add an AFI Request If you want to add an AFI request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/Hardness/Ferrite page. The page opens a new window to add the details of the AFI request. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the AFI inspection. In the To box, select the sub-contractor for the AFI inspection. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Requisition box, enter the requisition detail of the AFI inspection. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Type box, select the type of AFI for which you want to add request. In the Test Description box, enter the test description detail. Before saving the added request, you must add joints. You can add multiple joints for one request. Note: The page shows a list of added joints. If you want to view the joints for the specific isometric drawing, use the filter option. Click  (Add icon) of the respective joint which you want to add. The added joints will be moved to the right side of the page. Click Save. The AFI inspection request will be added and listed in the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page. Once you have added the AFI inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the respective inspection. 5.17.2 Edit an AFI Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing AFI inspection request in the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective AFI request. See Fig 5.17. The page shows the details of the selected AFI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.17.3 Submit and Approve an AFI Inspection Request Once you have added the AFI inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the AFI inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the AFI inspection request, the Request Status column in the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the AFI inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The AFI inspection request will be moved for inspection. 5.17.4 Add RFI Data for an AFI Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added AFI inspection request, do the following steps, Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page. See Fig 5.17. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1st Inspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data for the AFI inspection is added successfully. 5.17.5 View an AFI Inspection Report If you want to view an AFI inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page. See Fig 5.17. 5.17.6 Export AFI Inspection Request List You can export a list of AFI requests added in the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.17.7 Filter an AFI Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific AFI inspection request in the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Request for PWHT/PMI/ Hardness /Ferrite page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.18 Painting & Coasting FIR The Painting Coasting FIR tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a painting & coasting FIR. To navigate to the painting and coating FIR adding page, Click Painting Coasting FIR in the Inspection menu. The Painting & Coasting FIR page opens.                                       Figure 5.18: Painting & Coasting FIR page 5.18.1 Add a Painting and Coasting FIR If you want to add a new painting and coasting FIR, do the following steps. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the date and time of painting and blasting inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the painting and coasting inspection to be performed. In the Reference Drawing box, select a reference drawing from a drop-down list. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the No of  Coat Applied box, enter the number of applied coating. In the Shift box, enter the shift detail. In the Specification box, enter the specification detail. In the Job/Item Description box, enter the description for the job/item. In the Painted Surface box, enter the painted surface detail. In the Client Paint Specification box, enter the client paint specification detail. In the Surface Preparation box, enter the surface preparation detail. In the Painting/Coating Type box, enter the painting/coating type. In the Visual Inspection box, enter the visual inspection detail. In the Top Coat D.F.T box, enter the top coat detail. In the Degree of Cured box, enter the degree of cured. In the Pinhole Testing box, enter the pinhole testing detail. In the Wet Sponge Method box, enter the wet sponge method detail. In the Holiday Detection box, enter the holiday detection detail. In the Brush Coil box, enter the brush coil detail. In the V Setting (For Pipeline)box, enter the K.V setting detail for pipeline. Before saving the added painting and coasting request, you must add spools. You can add multiple spools for one painting and coasting request. Note: The page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the specific spools, use the filter options provided in the Line Number, Drawing Number, and Spool Number columns. Select the checkbox of the respective spool which you want to add. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the painting and coasting request. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the painting and coasting request. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the painting and coasting request. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the painting and coasting request. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the painting and coasting request. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the painting and coasting request. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Send Request. The painting and coasting inspection request will be added and listed in the Panting and Coasting FIR page. 5.19 View Painting & Coasting FIR The View Painting and Coasting tab helps you to view and edit the painting and coasting FIR, which is added by using the Painting & Blasting FIR tab. This tab also allows you to add a new painting and coasting inspection request. Click View Painting and Coasting in the Inspection menu. The Painting Coasting FIR page opens with a list of added painting and coasting FIRs.                                        Figure 5.19: Painting Coasting FIR page 5.19.1 Add a Painting and Coasting FIR If you want to add a painting and coasting FIR, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Painting Coasting FIR page. The system redirects you to the Painting & Coasting FIR page to add a new painting and coasting request. To know how to add a painting and coasting inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Painting and Coasting FIR”. Once you have added the painting and coasting inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the painting and coasting inspection. 5.19.2 Edit a Painting and Coasting FIR If you want to edit any existing painting and coasting inspection request in the Painting Coasting FIR page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective painting and coasting inspection request. See Fig 5.19. The Painting and Coasting FIR page opens with the details of the selected painting and coasting inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.19.3 Submit and Approve a Painting and coasting FIR Once you have added the painting and coasting inspection request, the Submission column in the Painting Coasting FIR page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the painting and coasting inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the painting and coasting inspection request, the Request Status column in the Painting Coasting FIR page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the painting and coasting inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The painting and coasting inspection request will be moved for painting and coasting inspection. 5.19.4 Add RFI Data for Painting and Coasting Inspection If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added painting and coasting inspection request, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Painting Coasting FIR See Fig 5.19. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data for the painting and coasting inspection is added successfully. 5.19.5 View an RFI Report If you want to view an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Painting Coasting FIR page. See Fig 5.19. 5.19.6 View a Painting and Coasting FIR Report If you want to view a painting and coasting FIR report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Painting Coasting FIR page. See Fig 5.19. 5.19.7 Attach a File into a Painting and Coasting FIR If you want to attach a file with any existing painting and coasting inspection request listed in the Painting Coasting FIR page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.19.8 Export Painting and Coasting FIR List You can export a list of painting and coasting requests added in the Painting Coasting FIR page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.19.9 Filter a Painting and Coasting FIR If you want to filter any specific painting and coasting inspection request in the Painting Coasting FIR page, you can filter the request based on the Spool No filter box. 5.20 Final Inspection Report The Final Inspection Report tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a final inspection report. To navigate to the final inspection report adding page, Click Final Inspection Report in the Inspection menu. The Final Inspection Report page opens with a Weld Map Drawing Detail window.                                          Figure 5.20: Final Inspection Report page 5.20.1 Add a Final Inspection Report If you want to add a new final inspection report, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the date and time of final inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the final inspection to be performed. In the Paint System No box, enter the paint system number. In the System/Area box, enter the system/area name. In the Sub System No box, enter the sub system number. In the Shift box, enter the shift detail. In the Specification box, enter the specification detail. In the Job/Item Description box, enter the description for the job/item. In the Painted Surface box, enter the painted surface detail. In the Client Paint Specification box, enter the client paint specification detail. In the Surface Preparation box, enter the surface preparation detail. In the Painting/Coating Type box, enter the painting/coating type. In the Visual Inspection box, enter the visual inspection detail. In the Top Coat D.F.T box, enter the top coat detail. In the Degree of Cured box, enter the degree of cured. In the Pinhole Testing box, enter the pinhole testing detail. In the Wet Sponge Method box, enter the wet sponge method detail. In the Holiday Detection box, enter the holiday detection detail. In the Brush Coil box, enter the brush coil detail. In the V Setting (For Pipeline) box, enter the K.V setting detail for pipeline. In the No of Coat Applied box, enter the number of coats applied. Before saving the added final inspection request, you must add weld map drawing detail. Click  (ADD button) in the Weld Map Drawing Detail window. See Figure 5.19. The Edit Form window shows a new window to add the details of weld map drawing. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number. In the Revision box, enter the revision for the weld map drawing. In the Description box, enter the description for the weld map drawing. In the Quantity box, enter the quantity of the weld map drawing. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Update. The weld map drawing is updated. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the final inspection request. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the final inspection request. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the final inspection request. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the final inspection request. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the final inspection request. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the final inspection request. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Send Request. The final inspection request will be added and listed in the Final Inspection Report page. 5.21 View Final Inspection Report The View Final Inspection Report tab helps you to view and edit the final inspection request, which is added by using the Final Inspection Report tab. This tab also allows you to add a new final inspection request. Click View Final Inspection Report in the Inspection menu. The Final Inspection Report page opens with a list of added final inspection reports.                                                                  Figure 5.21: View Final Inspection Report page 5.21.1 Add a Final Inspection Report If you want to add a final inspection report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the View Final Inspection Report page. The system redirects you to the Final Inspection Report page to add a new final inspection report. To know how to add a final inspection report, See the topic, “Add a Final Inspection Report”. Once you have added the final inspection report, you must submit the added report to perform the final inspection. 5.21.2 Edit a Final Inspection Report If you want to edit any existing final inspection report in the Final Inspection Report page, do the following steps, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective final inspection report. See Fig 5.21. The Final Inspection Report page opens with the details of the selected final inspection report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.21.3 Submit and Approve a Final Inspection Report Once you have added the final inspection report, the Submission column in the Final Inspection Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the final inspection report, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the final inspection report, the Request Status column in the Final Inspection Report page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the final inspection report, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The final inspection report will be moved for final inspection. 5.21.4 Add RFI Data for a Final Inspection Report If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added final inspection report, do the following steps, Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Final Inspection Report See Fig 5.21. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data for the final inspection report is added successfully. 5.21.5 View an RFI Report If you want to view an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Final Inspection Report page. See Fig 5.21. 5.21.6 View a Final Inspection Report If you want to view a final inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Final Inspection Report page. See Fig 5.21. 5.21.7 Attach a File into a Final Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any existing final inspection report listed in the Final Inspection Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.21.8 Export Final Inspection Report List You can export a list of final inspection reports added in the Final Inspection Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.22 Generate Daily Pipe Welder Record (DPWR) The Generate Daily Pipe Welder Record tab in the Inspection menu helps you to generate a DPWR. Click Generate Daily Pipe Welder Record in the Inspection  menu. The Daily Pipe Welder Record page opens.                 Figure 5.22: Daily Pipe Welder Record page The Daily Pipe Welder Record page shows the list of welding completed on each day including the details of the welder, location, and report type. In this page, the welding completed details are grouped based on the respective date. Each group has a maximum of 20 number of welding. Each group is separated by different group number. You can generate a report for each group individually by using the respective report generating option provided in the Daily Pipe Welder Record page. 2. If you want to generate report of DPWR for any group or date, click (Generate Report button) of the   respective group or date. The generated reports will be moved to the Daily Pipe Welder Record page. To view the generated reports, navigate to the Daily Pipe Welder Record tab. 5.23 Daily Pipe Welder Record (DWPR) The Daily Pipe Welder Record tab in the Inspection menu helps you to view a DPWR report, which is generated using the Generate Daily Pipe Welder Record tab. To view the generated report, Click Daily Pipe Welder Record in the Inspection menu. The Daily Pipe Welder Record page opens including the generated DPWR reports.                               Figure 5.23: Daily Pipe Welder Record page The generated DPWR reports are listed based on the welding date. If you want to view the DPWR report for any particular date, click  (Expand icon) of the respective date. The Reports window opens including the report number and report type. Click (Print icon) in the Print  column. The Report will be opened. 5.24 Individual Pipe Welder Record The Individual Pipe Welder Record tab in the Inspection menu used to view the completed pipe welding details of each welder individually. Click Individual Pipe Welder Record in the Inspection menu. The Individual Pipe Welder Record page opens.                                  Figure 5.24: Individual Pipe Welder Record page In the Welder box, select a welder from a drop-down list. In the Joint Category box, select a joint category from the given option. The completed welding details of selected welder will be displayed. 5.25 Weekly Welders Performance Record If you want to view the performance record of welders on weekly basis, navigate to the Weekly Welders Performance Record tab in the Inspection menu. Click Weekly Welders Performance Record in the Inspection menu. The Weekly Welders Performance Record page opens.                   Figure 5.25: Weekly Welders Performance Record page If you want to view the performance record of welders for all the projects, select the checkbox of the All Project option. In the NDT Type box, select the NDT type from a drop-down list. In the Joint Category box, select the joint category of pipe whether Shop, Field, or All from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates. Click Show Report. The performance record of welders will be opened. 5.25.1 Print a Weekly Welders Performance Record If you want to print a weekly welders performance record, use  and  (print icons) provided in the Weekly Welders Performance Record page. If you want to print the current page of the weekly welder performance record, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weekly welder performance record, click (print icon). 5.25.2 Export a Weekly Welders Performance Record You can export the weekly welders performance record in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weekly Welders Performance Record page. 5.26 RFI and AFI Excel Import The RFI and AFI Excel Import tab in the Inspection menu helps you to upload various data related with RFI and AFI for different fields included in the Project Data menu instead of uploading data for each field individually.  If you want to import data for different fields, do the following, Click the RFI and AFI Excel Import tab in the Inspection menu. The File Upload page opens. Download a template by clicking  (TEMPLATE button) to enter the details of RFI and AFI data. An excel worksheet will be downloaded as a pre-defined template. Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet based on the columns listed in the System Column field. Click (Choose File button). Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded” Click  (Get Columns button). The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field. Click . The system automatically maps the System Column field and the Excel Column field and displays in the Mapped Columns field. If you want to map any columns or to unmap any mapped columns, select the respective columns and then click  (Map button) and  (UnMap button) accordingly. Note: If you want to unmap all columns, click . Once you have completed the mapping and un mapping of columns, in the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet. Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet. Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns. Click (Populate Value button). Click (Process button). Once you have clicked the Process button, the system processes the columns and displays in the Excel Import page. Click (Import button) to import the data added in the excel worksheet. 5.27 RFI and AFI Joint Status The RFI and AFI Joint Status tab in the Inspection menu used to view the RFI and AFI fit up and weld inspection completed status for the joints. Click RFI and AFI Joint Status in the Inspection. The RFI and AFI Joints Status page opens.                                    Figure 5.27: RFI and AFI Joints Status page You can view the status of the joints by selecting one of the below options given in the page. Joints – RFI Fit up completed & Ready for AFI Fit up Joints – AFI Fit up completed & Ready for RFI Weld VI Joints – RFI Weld VI completed & Ready for AFI Weld VI For example, if you select the Joints – AFI Fit up completed & Ready for RFI Weld VI option, then the system shows the list of joints which has completed the AFI fit up and are ready for RFI weld VI. 5.27.1 Export the RFI and AFI Joints Status You can export the joint status including a list of joints in the RFI and AFI Joints Status page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.28 RFI and AFI Status The RFI and AFI Status tab in the Inspection menu used to view and check the status of the RFI and AFI inspection status. Click RFI and AFI Status in the Inspection menu. The RFI and AFI Status page opens.                                      Figure 5.28: RFI and AFI Status page The page shows the total number of added RFI and AFI inspection requests, and also shows the number of completed and outstanding inspections. 5.28.1 Export the RFI and AFI Status You can export the RFI and AFI status in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.29 Threaded Joint Report The Threaded Joint Report tab in the Inspection menu used to view and update the completed status of the threaded joints. Click Threaded Joint Report in the Inspection menu. The Threaded Joints page opens.                                             Figure 5.29: Threaded Joints page In the Status column, select the status of the joints. If you select Pending, the page shows the details of the joints which are pending. Click Search. In the Complete column, if the particular joint has completed then enable the checkbox of the respective joint. In the Completed by box, enter the name of a person who has completed the joint work. In the Completed Date box, select the completed date of the joint work. 5.29.1 Export a Threaded Joint Report You can export the threaded joint report in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.30 Welder Performance Report The Welder Performance Report tab in the Inspection menu used to view the performance report of each welder for a particular project. Click Welder Performance Report in the Inspection menu. The Welder Performance Report page opens.                                 Figure 5.30: Welder Performance Report page In the Project box, select a project from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates. In the Joint Type box, select the joint type. Click Load Report.. The performance report for the selected project will be opened. 5.30.1 Print a Welder Performance Report If you want to print a welder performance report, use and (print icons) provided in the Welder Performance Report page. If you want to print the current page of the welder performance report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the welder performance report, click (print icon). 5.30.2 Export a Welder Performance Report You can export the welder performance report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Welder Performance Report page. 5.31 Create Auto Fit up and Visual Request If you want to create the new fit up and visual requests in both RFI and AFI automatically, you can create by using the Create Auto Fit up and Visual Request tab in the Inspection menu. Click Create Auto Fit up and Visual Request in the Inspection menu. The RFI and AFI Create page opens.                                             Figure 5.31: RFI and AFI Create page In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Location box, select the location. In the Select RFI/AFI box, if you want to create the fit up or visual request, select Fit up or Visual. If you want to create both fit up and visual, select Both. The page shows the list of drawing numbers, sheet numbers, and spool numbers. Select the checkbox of the respective drawing, sheet and spool number which you want to add for creating the request. Click Generate. The selected RFI and AFI request will be added and moved into the respective requests page. 5.32 Weld Rejection Statistics Record If you want to view the statistics report of weld rejection rate, navigate to the Weld Rejection Statistics Record tab in the Inspection menu. Click Weld Rejection Statistics Record in the Inspection menu. The Weld Rejection Statistics Report page opens.                              Figure 5.32: Weld Rejection Statistics Report page In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates. Click Load Report. The statistics report of the weld rejection rate will be displayed. 5.32.1 Print a Weld Rejection Statistics Record If you want to print the weld rejection statistics details, use and (print icons) provided in the Weld Rejection Statistics Report page. If you want to print the current page of the weld rejection statistics record, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weld rejection statistics record, click (print icon). 5.32.2 Export a Weld Rejection Statistics Record You can export the weld rejection statistics details in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Rejection Statistics Report page. 5.33 View Spool Contractor The View Spool Contractor tab in the Inspection menu used to view and add the details of the spool installation contractor. Click View Spool Contractor in the Inspection menu. The Spool Installation Contractor page opens.                                       Figure 5.33: Spool Installation Contractor page In the Sheet No/ Drawing No/ Revision box, select the respective sheet, drawing and revision numbers. The list of spools for the selected drawing number opens. Enter the contractor name for the respective spools in the Contractor Name Click Save Changes. 5.34 RFI Mechanical Completion Request Mechanical completion takes place through all phases of the piping project, starting at equipment supplier and continuing through fabrication up to commissioning phase. Mechanical completion encompasses all disciplines. If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request, Click RFI Mechanical Completion Request in the Inspection menu. The RFI Mechanical Completion Request page opens.                          Figure 5.34: RFI Mechanical Completion Request page 5.34.1 Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the name of the location. Before saving the added RFI mechanical completion request, you must add a system. You can add multiple system for one request. Note: The page shows a list of added systems. If you want to view the specific system, use the Search by Test Pack No filter box or use the filter options provided in the System, Sub System, Test Pack, and Check Records columns. Select the checkbox of the respective system which you want to add. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. Click Save. The RFI mechanical completion request will be added and listed in the View RFI Mechanical Completion page. 5.35 View RFI Mechanical Completion The View RFI Mechanical Completion tab helps you to view and edit the RFI mechanical completion request, which is added by using the RFI Mechanical Completion Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI mechanical completion request. Click View RFI Mechanical Completion in the Inspection menu. The View RFI Mechanical Completion List page opens with a list of added RFI mechanical completion requests.                           Figure 5.35: View RFI Mechanical Completion List page 5.35.1 Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new RFI mechanical completion request. To know how to add an RFI mechanical completion request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request”. Once you have added the RFI mechanical completion request, you must submit the added request to perform mechanical completion inspection. 5.35.2 Edit an RFI Mechanical Completion Request If you want to edit any existing mechanical completion request in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI mechanical completion request. See Fig 8.35. The RFI Mechanical Completion Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI mechanical completion request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.35.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Mechanical Completion Request Once you have added the RFI mechanical completion request, the Submission column in the RFI Mechanical Completion Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the mechanical completion request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the mechanical completion request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the mechanical completion request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The mechanical completion request will be moved for mechanical completion inspection. 5.35.4 Add Results of Mechanical Completion Inspection After completing the mechanical completion inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of test pack added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each test pack from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Approve All & Save. 5.35.5 View a Mechanical Completion Inspection Report If you want to view a mechanical completion inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. See Fig 5.35. 5.35.6 Attach a File into a Mechanical Completion inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing mechanical completion inspection request listed in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.35.7 Export Mechanical Completion Inspection Request List You can export a list of mechanical completion inspection requests added in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.35.8 Filter a Mechanical Completion Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific mechanical completion inspection request in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.36 RFI Static Commissioning Static Commissioning take place when Mechanical completion is completed for a system or part of a system. If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request, Click RFI Static Commissioning in the Inspection menu. The RFI Static Commissioning Request page opens.                               Figure 5.36: RFI Static Commissioning Request page 5.36.1 Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the name of the location. Before saving the added RFI static commissioning request, you must add a system. You can add multiple systems for one request. Note: The page shows a list of added systems. If you want to view the specific system, use the Search by Test Pack No filter box or use the filter options provided in the System, Sub System, Test Pack, and Check Records columns. Select the checkbox of the respective system which you want to add. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. Click Save. The RFI mechanical completion request will be added and listed in the View RFI Static Commissioning page. 5.37 View RFI Static Commissioning The View RFI Static Commissioning tab helps you to view and edit the RFI static commissioning request, which is added by using the RFI Static Commissioning tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI static commissioning request. Click View RFI Static Commissioning in the Inspection menu. The View RFI Static Commissioning List page opens with a list of added RFI static commissioning requests.                                   Figure 5.37: View RFI Static Commissioning List page 5.37.1 Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new RFI static commissioning request. To know how to add an RFI static commissioning request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request”. Once you have added the RFI static commissioning request, you must submit the added request to perform the static commissioning. 5.37.2 Edit an RFI Static Commissioning Request If you want to edit any existing static commissioning request in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI static commissioning request. See Fig 5.37. The RFI Static Commissioning Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.37.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Static Commissioning Request Once you have added the RFI static commissioning request, the Submission column in the RFI Static Commissioning Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the static commissioning request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the static commissioning request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the static commissioning request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The static commissioning request will be moved for static commissioning inspection. 5.37.4 Add Results of Static Commissioning Inspection After completing the static commissioning inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of system added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each system from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Approve All & Save. 5.37.5 View a Static Commissioning Inspection Report If you want to view a static commissioning inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Static Commissioning List page. See Fig 5.37. 5.37.6 Attach a File into a Static Commissioning Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing static commissioning inspection request listed in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.37.7 Export Static Commissioning Inspection Request List You can export a list of static commissioning inspection requests added in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.37.8 Filter a Static Commissioning Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific static commissioning inspection request in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Static Commissioning List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.38 RFI Fit up Generic The RFI Fit up Request Generic tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a generic RFI fit up request. Click RFI Fit up Request Generic in the Inspection menu. The RFI Fit up Request Generic page opens.                                        Figure 5.38: RFI Fit up Request Generic page 5.38.1 Add an RFI Fit up Request Generic If you want to add an RFI fit up request generic, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. A new window opens to add an RFI fit up request generic. Tip: A report number for a new RFI fit up request generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI fit up request generic. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The RFI fit up request generic is inserted successfully. Once you have added the RFI fit up request generic, you must add the RFI data for the added request. 8.38.2 Add RFI data for an Added RFI Fit up Request Generic If you want to add RFI data for the added RFI fit up request generic, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. See Fig 5.38. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1st Inspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.38.3 Clone an RFI Fit up Request Generic The Clone option in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page used to create a RFI weld VI generic request in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, as a copy of RFI fit up request generic, See Fig 5.39. If you click  (Clone icon) in the Clone column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, an RFI weld VI generic request is added in the RFI weld VI generic page. Tip: You can create multiple copies of RFI weld VI generic request for a single RFI fit up request generic. 5.38.4 Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. See Fig 5.38. 5.38.5 Submit an RFI Fit up Request Generic Once you have added the RFI fit up request generic, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the RFI fit up request generic, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.38.6 Print an RFI Fit up Request Generic Report If you want to print an RFI fit up request generic report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. See Fig 5.38. 5.38.7 Attach a File into an RFI Fit up Request Generic If you want to attach any file with any RFI fit up request generic added in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.38.8 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client Once the RFI fit up inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. 5.38.9 Edit an RFI Fit up Request Generic If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI generic in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, do the following, Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI generic. See Fig 5.39. A new window opens to edit the RFI weld VI generic. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.38.10 Export RFI Weld VI Generic List You can export a list of RFI weld VI generic added in the RFI Weld VI Generic page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.38.11 Filter an RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to filter any RFI weld VI generic from the list of RFI weld VI generic in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.39 RFI Weld VI Generic Once the RFI fit up inspection process has completed, the materials are moved for weld inspection process. The RFI Weld VI Generic tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a generic RFI weld VI request. Click RFI Weld VI Generic in the Inspection menu. The RFI Weld VI Generic page opens.                                       Figure 5.39: RFI Weld VI Generic page 5.39.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to add an RFI weld VI generic, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Weld VI Generic page. A new window opens to add an RFI weld VI generic. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new RFI weld VI generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI weld VI generic. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The RFI weld VI generic is added successfully. Once you have added the RFI weld VI generic, you must add the RFI data for the added request. 5.39.2 Add RFI data for RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to add RFI data for the added RFI weld VI generic, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page. See Fig 5.39. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.39.3 Clone an RFI Weld VI Generic The Clone option in the RFI Weld VI Generic page used to create a vacuum test request, an air test request, a hydrostatic test request, and an NDT request, as a copy of RFI weld VI generic request. Click  (Clone icon) in the Clone column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page. The Clone box opens. Select any test from the given list. Click (Add button). A new request for the selected test will be added in the respective pages. 5.39.4  Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page. See Fig 5.39. 5.39.5 Submit an RFI Weld VI Generic Once you have added the RFI weld VI generic, the Submission column in the RFI Weld VI Generic page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the RFI weld VI generic, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.39.6 Print an RFI Weld VI Generic Report If you want to print an RFI weld VI generic report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Weld VI Generic See Fig 5.39. 5.39.7 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client Once the weld VI inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using(Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Weld VI Generic page. 5.39.8 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to attach any file with any RFI weld VI generic added in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.39.9 Edit an RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI generic in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI generic. See Fig 5.39. A new window opens to edit the RFI weld VI generic. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.39.10 Export RFI Weld VI Generic List You can export a list of RFI weld VI generic added in the RFI Weld VI Generic page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.39.11 Filter an RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to filter any RFI weld VI generic from the list of RFI weld VI generic in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.40 NDT Inspection Generic NDT inspection used to find out welding defects of the materials. Once the fit up and welding process of the materials has completed, the materials will be moved for the NDT inspection. The currently following NDT inspection methods are RT, UT, MT, PT, Ultrasonic Thickness Gaging (UTG), Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI) after load test, UT/MT, and PT after load test. The NDT Inspection Generic tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an NDT inspection generic. If you want to navigate the NDT inspection generic, Click NDT Inspection Generic in the Inspection menu. The NDT Inspection Generic page opens.                                 Figure 5.40: NDT Inspection Generic page 5.40.1 Add an NDT Inspection Generic If you want to add an NDT inspection generic, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the NDT Inspection Generic page. A new window opens to add an NDT Inspection generic. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new NDT inspection generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the NDT inspection generic. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In the Requisition box, select the type of request from a drop-down list. In the Welding Position box, enter the position of welding. In the Weld Type box, enter the type of welding. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness of the welding. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Welder box, select the name of a welder from a drop-down list. In the WPS box, enter the WPS detail. In the Process box, select the welding process to be done from a specified category. In the NDT Type box, select the type of NDT to be done from a specified category. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The NDT inspection generic is added successfully. Once you have added the NDT inspection generic, you must add the RFI data for the added NDT inspection generic. 5.40.2 Add RFI Data for NDT Inspection Generic If you want to add RFI data for the added NDT inspection generic, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the NDT Inspection Generic See Fig 5.40. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.40.3 Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the NDT Inspection Generic page. See Fig 5.40. 5.40.4 Submit an NDT Inspection Generic Once you have added the NDT inspection generic, the Submission column in the NDT Inspection Generic page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the added NDT inspection generic, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.40.5 Print an NDT Inspection Generic Report If you want to print an NDT inspection generic report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the NDT Inspection Generic page. See Fig 5.40. 5.40.6 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client Once the NDT inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using  (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the NDT Inspection Generic page. 5.40.7 Attach a File into an NDT Inspection Generic If you want to attach any file with any NDT inspection generic added in the NDT Inspection Generic page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.40.8 Edit an NDT Inspection Generic If you want to edit any existing NDT inspection generic in the NDT Inspection Generic page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT inspection generic. See Fig 5.40. A new window opens to edit the NDT inspection generic. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.40.9 Export NDT Inspection Generic List You can export a list of NDT inspection generic added in the NDT Inspection Generic page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.40.10 Filter an NDT Inspection Generic If you want to filter any NDT inspection generic from the list of NDT inspection generic in the NDT Inspection Generic page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the NDT Inspection Generic page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.41 View RFI Fit up (Unique Numbers) The View RFI Fit up tab helps you to add a new RFI fit up request. This tab also allows you to view and edit the added RFI fit up request. Click View RFI Fit up in the Inspection menu. The RFI Fit up Requests List page opens.                                           Figure 5.41: RFI Fit up Requests List page 5.41.1 Add an RFI Fit up Request If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Requests List page. A new page opens to add an RFI fit up request.                           Figure 5.41.1: A page for adding an RFI fit up request Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new RFI fit up request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Sub Contractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. Note: The fit up inspection date should not be later than the RFI weld visual inspection date. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Note: Before saving the added RFI fit up request, you must add the joints. You can add multiple joints for any added fit up request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. Click Save. 5.41.2 Add Joints for an RFI Fit up Request If you want to add joints for any added RFI fit up request, do the following steps, Click the check box of the respective joints. Click  (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. If you want to update the unique numbers and WPS number for any joint, click the Unique No and WPS Number columns for the respective joints and then enter the unique numbers and select the WPS number from a drop-down list. Click Save. The selected joints are successfully added for the RFI fit up request. 5.41.3 Import Multiple Joints for an RFI Fit up Request If you want to import multiple joints together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Added Joints box. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of multiple joints. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the joint details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the joints that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the joints in the worksheet will be displayed in the page. The RFI fit up request is added successfully. Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 5.41.4 Submit an RFI Fit up Request Once you have added the RFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the RFI Fit up Requests List page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.41. If you want to submit the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.41.5 Change a Representative for Any RFI Fit up Request If you want to change a representative for any added RFI fit up request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI fit up request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.41.6 Print an RFI Fit up Report If you want to print an RFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fit up Requests List page. See Fig 5.41. 5.41.7 Add Result for an Added RFI Fit up Request Once you have fit up inspection, you can add the results. To add results, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the RFI Fit up Requests List page. The Result window opens. If you want to check and update the unique number details for both the components, click (Edit icon) in the Update Unique Number 1 and Update Unique Number 2 columns and update. If you want to update the WPS number, select the respective number in the WPS column and change the WPS number from a drop-down list. If you want to update the result, select the respective result in the Result column from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save changes. 5.41.8 Attach a File into an RFI Fit up Request If you want to attach any file with any RFI fit up request listed in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.41.9 Edit an RFI Fit up Request If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request. See Fig 5.41. A new page opens to edit the RFI fit up request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.41.10 Export RFI Fit up Request List You can export a list of RFI fit up request added in the RFI Fit up Requests List page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.41.11 Filter an RFI Fit Up Request If you want to filter any RFI fit up request from the list of RFI fit up requests in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, you can use  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.42 View RFI Weld VI (Unique Numbers) The View RFI Weld VI tab helps you to add a new RFI weld VI request. This tab also allows you to view and edit the added RFI weld VI request. Click View RFI Weld VI in the Inspection menu. The RFI Weld Visual Request List page opens.                                  Figure 5.42: RFI Weld Visual Request List page 8.42.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Weld Visual Request List Page. A new page opens to add an RFI weld VI request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new RFI weld VI request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Sub Contractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the location detail. Note: Before saving the added RFI weld VI request, you must add the joints. You can add multiple joints for any added RFI weld VI request by using a box provided in the left side of the RFI Weld Visual Request page. Click Save. 5.42.2 Add Joints for an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add joints for any added RFI weld VI request, do the following, In the RFI Report Number box, select an RFI report number from a drop-down list. A list of joints including the ISO drawing and spool numbers opens for the selected RFI report number. Click the check box of the respective joints. Click (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. If you want to update the WPS number for any joint, click the WPS Number column for the respective joints and then select the WPS number from a drop-down list. If you want to update the welder details, click (Add icon) in the Welder Details column. The Weld-Weld Layer- Weld Process window opens. In the Date box, select the date of adding welder details. In the Weld Process column, select a weld process. In the Weld Position column, select a weld position. In the Weld Layers column, select a weld layer. A list of welders will be displayed in the Welder Number/Name column for the selected criteria. Select a welder you want to add. Click (Add button). The selected welder details will be listed below. Note: If you want to add welder details for the next joint, click  (Next Joint button). Click Save. The selected joints are successfully added for the RFI weld VI request. 5.42.3 Import Multiple joints for an RFI Weld VI Request You can import multiple joints together by using a pre-defined excel template given in the application. If you want to import multiple joints together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Added Joints box. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of multiple joints. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the joint details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the joints that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the joints in the worksheet will be displayed in the page. The RFI weld VI request is added successfully. Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 5.42.4 Submit an RFI Weld VI Request Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the RFI Weld Visual Request List page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.42. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.42.5 Add a Representative for Any RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add a representative for any added RFI weld VI request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI weld VI request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.42.6 Add Result for an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add for the added RFI weld VI inspection request, do the following, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the RFI Weld Visual Request List page, for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.42. A new window opens including the line, drawing number, joint number and WPS number including welder details for the respective RFI weld VI request. If you want to update the welder details, click  (Add icon) in the Welder Details column and update the welder details. In the Visual OD column, select the result for visual OD. In the Visual ID column, select the result for visual ID. In the Debris column, select the result for debris. In the Drift column, select the result for drift. In the Result column, select the results from a drop-down list based on your inspection. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.42.7 Print an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to print an RFI weld VI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Weld Visual Request List page. See Fig 5.42. 5.42.8 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to attach any file with any RFI weld VI request listed in the RFI Weld Visual Request List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.42.9 Edit an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI request in the RFI Weld Visual Request List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.42. A new page opens to edit the RFI weld VI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.42.10 Export RFI Weld VI Request List You can export a list of RFI weld VI request added in the RFI Weld Visual Request List page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.42.11 Filter an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to filter any RFI weld VI request from the list of RFI weld VI requests in the RFI Weld Visual Request List page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.43 View AFI Fit up (Unique Numbers) The View AFI Fit up allows you to add a new AFI fit up request. This tab also helps you to view and edit the added AFI fit up request. Click View AFI Fit up in the Inspection menu. The AFI Fit up Request List page opens.                                     Figure 5.43: AFI Fit up Request List page 5.43.1 Add an AFI Fit up Request If you want to add an AFI fit up request, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the AFI Fit up Request List page. The AFI Fit up Inspection Request page opens to add an AFI fit up request. Tip: A report number and RFI number for a new AFI fit up request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and RFI Number boxes. In the Representative (AI) box, enter representative name for the application inspection and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Representative (Client) box, enter representative name from the client and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Representative (Contractor) box, enter representative name from the contractor and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of items to be inspected. In the Subject Coverage box, enter the subject coverage detail. Note: Before saving the added AFI fit up request, you must add the joints. You can add multiple joints for any added fit up request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. Click Save. Once you enter the details to add an AFI fit up request, a list of joints including the joint numbers, sheet numbers, and spool and drawing numbers opens. 5.43.2 Add Joints for an AFI Fit up Request If you want to add joints for any added AFI fit up request, do the following, Click the check box of the respective joints. Click  (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. The selected joints are successfully added for the AFI fit up request. Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 5.43.3 Submit an AFI Fit up Request Once you have added the AFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the AFI Fit up Request List page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.43. If you want to submit the AFI fit up request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.43.4 Change Representative for Any AFI Fit up Request If you want to change the added representative for any AFI fit up request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective AFI fit up request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, edit the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.43.5 Print an AFI Fit up Report If you want to print an AFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the AFI Fit up Request List page. See Fig 5.43. 5.43.6 Add Result of AFI Fit up Inspection If you want to update results for the AFI fit up inspection request, do the following, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the AFI Fit up Request List page. A new window opens. In the Result column, select the results of AFI inspection from a drop-down list, for the respective drawing and joint numbers. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.43.7 Attach a File into an AFI Fit up Request If you want to attach any file with any AFI fit up request listed in the AFI Fit up Request List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.43.8 Edit an AFI Fit up Request If you want to edit any existing AFI fit up request in the AFI Fit up Request List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective AFI fit up request. See Fig 5.43. A new page opens to edit the AFI fit up request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.43.9 Export AFI Fit up Request List You can export a list of AFI fit up request added in the AFI Fit up Request List page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 8.44 View AFI Weld VI (Unique Numbers) The View AFI Weld VI allows you to add a new AFI weld VI request. This tab also helps you to view and edit the added AFI weld VI request. Click View AFI Weld VI in the Inspection menu. The AFI Weld Visual Request List page opens.                                  Figure 5.44: AFI Weld Visual Request List page 8.44.1 Add an AFI Weld VI Request If you want to add an AFI weld VI request, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the AFI Weld Visual Request List page. The AFI Weld Visual Inspection Request page opens to add an AFI weld VI request. Tip: A report number and RFI number for a new AFI weld VI request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and RFI Number boxes. In the Representative (AI) box, enter representative name for the application inspection and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Representative (Client) box, enter representative name from the client and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Representative (Contractor) box, enter representative name from the contractor and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of items to be inspected. In the Subject Coverage box, enter the subject coverage detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Note: Before saving the added AFI weld VI request, you must add the joints. You can add multiple joints for any added weld VI request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. Click Save. 5.44.2 Add Joints for an AFI Weld VI Request If you want to add joints for any added AFI weld VI request, do the following, Click the check box of the respective joints. Click (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. Click Save. The selected joints are successfully added for the AFI weld VI request. The AFI weld VI request is successfully added. Once you have added the AFI weld VI request, you must submit the added weld VI request for inspection. 5.44.3 Submit an AFI Weld VI Request Once you have added the AFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the AFI Weld Visual Request List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.44. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.44.4 Change a Representative for Any AFI Weld VI Request If you want to change a representative for any added AFI weld VI request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective AFI weld VI request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.44.5 Add Result for an AFI Weld VI Inspection If you want to add result for the added AFI weld VI inspection, do the following, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the AFI Weld Visual Request List page, for the respective AFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.44. A new window opens including the line, drawing numbers and joint number for the respective AFI weld VI request. In the Result column, select the results from a drop-down list based on your inspection. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.44.6 Print an AFI Weld VI Report If you want to print an AFI weld VI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the AFI Weld Visual Request List page. See Fig 5.44. 5.44.7 Attach a file into an AFI weld VI request If you want to attach any file with any AFI weld VI request listed in the AFI Weld Visual Request List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.44.8 Edit an AFI Weld VI Request If you want to edit any existing AFI weld VI request in the AFI Weld Visual Request List page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective AFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.44. A new page opens to edit the AFI weld VI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.44.9 Export AFI Weld VI Request List You can export a list of AFI weld VI request added in the AFI Weld Visual Request List page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.44.10 Filter an AFI weld VI request If you want to filter any AFI weld VI request from the list of AFI weld VI requests in the AFI Weld Visual Request List page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.45 RFI Line Walk The RFI Line Walk tab in the Inspection menu is used to add a request for line walk inspection. 5.45.1 Add a Line Walk Inspection Request If you want to add a line walk inspection request, do the following steps, Click RFI Line Walk in the Inspection menu. The RFI Line Walk page opens.                                                    Figure 5.45: RFI Line Walk page In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the line walk inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the inspection to be performed. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Classification box, enter the classification detail. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Code box, enter the acceptance code detail. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Test Temperature box, enter the test temperature value. In the Test Medium box, select the test medium from the drop-down list. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In the Holding Timebox, enter the holding time range. In the Pressure Gauge No box, enter the pressure gauge number. In the Procedure No box, enter the procedure number. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure range. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure range. In the Instrument box, enter the instrument name. In the P&ID No box, enter the P&ID number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the line walk inspection. Before saving the added line walk inspection request, you must add spools. Note: You can add multiple spools for one request. The RFI Line Walk page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the spools for the specific ISO drawing, select the respective ISO drawing from a drop-down list. Click  (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. Click Save Request. The line walk inspection request will be added and listed in the RFI Line Walk Report page. 5.46 View RFI Line Walk The View RFI Line Walk tab helps you to view and edit the line walk inspection request, which is added by using the RFI Line Walk tab. This tab also allows you to add a new line walk inspection request. Click View RFI Line Walk in the Inspection menu. The RFI Line Walk Report page opens with a list of added line walk inspection requests.                                                  Figure 5.46: RFI Line Walk Report page 5.46.1 Add a Line Walk Inspection Request If you want to add a line walk inspection request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Line Walk Report page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new line walk inspection request. To know how to add a line walk inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Line Walk Inspection Request”. Once you have added the line walk inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the line walk inspection. 5.46.2 Add Representative for a Line Walk Inspection Request If you want to add a representative for any added line walk inspection request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective line walk inspection request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.46.3 Edit a Line Walk Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing line walk inspection request in the RFI Line Walk Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective line walk inspection request. See Fig 5.46. The RFI Line Walk Report page opens with the details of the selected line walk inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.46.4 Submit and Approve a Line Walk Inspection Request Once you have added the line walk inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Line Walk Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the line walk inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the line walk inspection request, the Request Status column in the RFI Line Walk Report page is appeared with(Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the line walk inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The line walk inspection request will be moved for line walk inspection. 5.46.5 Add RFI Data for a Line Walk Inspection Request If you want to add RFI data for the added line walk inspection request, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Line Walk Report See Fig 5.46. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1st Inspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.46.6 View an RFI Report If you want to view an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Line Walk Report page. See Fig 5.46. 5.46.7 Add Results of Line Walk Inspection After completing the line walk inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of spools added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each spool from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Temperature column, enter the temperature value of each spool. In the Start Time and End Time columns, enter the start and end times. Click Save. 5.46.8 Attach a File into a Line Walk Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing line walk inspection request listed in the RFI Line Walk Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.46.9 Export Line Walk Inspection Request List You can export a list of line walk inspection requests added in the RFI Line Walk Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.46.10 Filter a Line Walk Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific line walk inspection request in the RFI Line Walk Report page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Line Walk Report page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.47 RFI Flushing The RFI Flushing tab in the Inspection menu is used to add a request for pipe flushing inspection. 5.47.1 Add a Flushing Inspection Request If you want to add a flushing inspection request, do the following steps, Click RFI Flushing in the Inspection menu. The RFI Flushing page opens.                                                       Figure 5.47: RFI Flushing page In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the flushing inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the inspection to be performed. In the Inspection Date & Timebox, select the inspection date and time. In the Classification box, enter the classification detail. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Code box, enter the acceptance code detail. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Test Temperature box, enter the test temperature value. In the Test Medium box, select the test medium from the drop-down list. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time range. In the Pressure Gauge No box, enter the pressure gauge number. In the Procedure No box, enter the procedure number. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure range. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure range. In the Instrument box, enter the instrument name. In the P&ID No box, enter the P&ID number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the flushing inspection. Before saving the added flushing inspection request, you must add spools. Note: You can add multiple spools for one request. The RFI Flushing page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the spools for the specific ISO drawing, select the respective ISO drawing from a drop-down list. Click (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. Click Save Request. The flushing inspection request will be added and listed in the RFI Flushing Report page. 5.48 View RFI Flushing The View RFI Flushing tab helps you to view and edit the flushing inspection request, which is added by using the RFI Flushing tab. This tab also allows you to add a new flushing inspection request. Click View RFI Flushing in the Inspection menu. The RFI Flushing Report page opens with a list of added flushing inspection requests.                                         Figure 5.48: RFI Flushing Report page 5.48.1 Add a Flushing Inspection Request If you want to add a flushing inspection request, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Flushing Report page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new flushing inspection request. To know how to add a flushing inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Flushing Inspection Request”. Once you have added the flushing inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the flushing inspection. 5.48.2 Add Representative for a Flushing Inspection Request If you want to add a representative for any added flushing inspection request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective flushing inspection request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.48.3 Edit a Flushing Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing flushing inspection request in the RFI Flushing Report page, do the following, Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective flushing inspection See Fig 5.48. The RFI Flushing Report page opens with the details of the selected flushing inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.48.4 Submit and Approve a Flushing Inspection Request Once you have added the flushing inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Flushing Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the flushing inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the flushing inspection request, the Request Status column in the RFI Flushing Report page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the flushing inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The flushing inspection request will be moved for flushing inspection. 5.48.5 Add RFI Data for a Flushing Inspection Request If you want to add RFI data for the added flushing inspection request, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Flushing Report See Fig 5.48. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.48.6 View an RFI Report If you want to view an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Flushing Report page. See Fig 5.48. 5.48.7 Add Results of Flushing Inspection After completing the flushing inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of spools added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each spool from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Temperature column, enter the temperature value of each spool. In the Start Time and End Time columns, enter the start and end times. Click Save. 5.48.8 Attach a File into a Flushing Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing flushing inspection request listed in the RFI Flushing Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.48.9 Export Flushing Inspection Request List You can export a list of flushing inspection requests added in the RFI Flushing Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.48.10 Filter a Flushing Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific flushing inspection request in the RFI Flushing Report page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Flushing Report page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.49 RFI Chemical Cleaning The RFI Chemical Cleaning tab in the Inspection menu is used to add a request for the pipe chemical cleaning inspection. 5.49.1 Add a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request If you want to add a chemical cleaning inspection request, do the following steps, Click RFI Chemical Cleaning in the Inspection menu. The RFI Chemical Cleaning page opens.                                     Figure 5.49: RFI Chemical Cleaning page In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the chemical cleaning inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the inspection to be performed. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Classification box, enter the classification detail. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Code box, enter the acceptance code detail. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Test Temperature box, enter the test temperature value. In the Test Medium box, select the test medium from the drop-down list. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time range. In the Pressure Gauge No box, enter the pressure gauge number. In the Procedure No box, enter the procedure number. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure range. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure range. In the Instrument box, enter the instrument name. In the P&ID No box, enter the P&ID number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the chemical cleaning inspection. Before saving the added chemical cleaning inspection request, you must add spools. Note: You can add multiple spools for one request. The RFI Chemical Cleaning page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the spools for the specific ISO drawing, select the respective ISO drawing from a drop-down list. Click (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. Click Save Request. The chemical cleaning inspection request will be added and listed in the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page. 5.50 View RFI Chemical Cleaning The View RFI Chemical Cleaning tab helps you to view and edit the chemical cleaning inspection request, which is added by using the RFI Chemical Cleaning tab. This tab also allows you to add a new chemical cleaning inspection request. Click View RFI Chemical Cleaning in the Inspection menu. The RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page opens with a list of added chemical cleaning inspection requests.                            Figure 5.50: RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page 5.50.1 Add a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request If you want to add a chemical cleaning inspection request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new chemical cleaning inspection request. To know how to add a chemical cleaning inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request”. Once you have added the chemical cleaning inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the chemical cleaning inspection. 5.50.2 Add Representative for a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request If you want to add a representative for any added chemical cleaning inspection request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective chemical cleaning inspection request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.50.3 Edit a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing chemical cleaning inspection request in the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective chemical cleaning inspection See Fig 5.50. The RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page opens with the details of the selected chemical cleaning inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.50.4 Submit and Approve a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request Once you have added the chemical cleaning inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the chemical cleaning inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the chemical cleaning inspection request, the Request Status column in the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the chemical cleaning inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The chemical cleaning inspection request will be moved for chemical cleaning inspection. 5.50.5 Add RFI Data for a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request If you want to add RFI data for the added chemical cleaning inspection request, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report See Fig 5.50. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.50.6 View an RFI Report If you want to view an RFI report, click(print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page. See Fig 5.50. 5.50.7 Add Results of Chemical Cleaning Inspection After completing the chemical cleaning inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of spools added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each spool from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Temperature column, enter the temperature value of each spool. In the Start Time and End Time columns, enter the start and end times. Click Save. 5.50.8 Attach a File into a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing chemical cleaning inspection request listed in the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.50.9 Export Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request List You can export a list of chemical cleaning inspection requests added in the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.50.10 Filter a Chemical Cleaning Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific chemical cleaning inspection request in the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Chemical Cleaning Report page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.51 RFI Reinstatement The RFI Reinstatement tab in the Inspection menu is used to add a request for pipe reinstatement inspection. 5.51.1 Add a Reinstatement Inspection Request If you want to add a reinstatement inspection request, do the following steps, Click RFI Reinstatement in the Inspection menu. The RFI Reinstatement page opens.                                             Figure 5.51: RFI Reinstatement page In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the reinstatement inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the inspection to be performed. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Classification box, enter the classification detail. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Code box, enter the acceptance code detail. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Test Temperature box, enter the test temperature value. In the Test Medium box, select the test medium from the drop-down list. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time range. In the Pressure Gauge No box, enter the pressure gauge number. In the Procedure No box, enter the procedure number. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure range. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure range. In the Instrument box, enter the instrument name. In the P&ID No box, enter the P&ID number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the reinstatement inspection. Before saving the added reinstatement inspection request, you must add spools. Note: You can add multiple spools for one request. The RFI Reinstatement page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the spools for the specific ISO drawing, select the respective ISO drawing from a drop-down list. Click  (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. Click Save Request. The reinstatement inspection request will be added and listed in the RFI Reinstatement Report page. 5.52 View RFI Reinstatement The View RFI Reinstatement tab helps you to view and edit the reinstatement inspection request, which is added by using the RFI Reinstatement tab. This tab also allows you to add a new reinstatement inspection request. Click View RFI Reinstatement in the Inspection menu. The RFI Reinstatement Report page opens with a list of added reinstatement inspection requests.                                     Figure 5.52: RFI Reinstatement Report page 5.52.1 Add a Reinstatement Inspection Request If you want to add a reinstatement inspection request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Reinstatement Report page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new reinstatement inspection request. To know how to add a reinstatement inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Reinstatement Inspection Request”. Once you have added the reinstatement inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the reinstatement inspection. 5.52.2 Add Representative for a Reinstatement Inspection Request If you want to add a representative for any added reinstatement inspection request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective reinstatement inspection request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.52.3 Edit a Reinstatement Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing reinstatement inspection request in the RFI Reinstatement Report page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective reinstatement inspection See Fig 5.52. The RFI Reinstatement Report page opens with the details of the selected reinstatement inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.52.4 Submit and Approve a Reinstatement Inspection Request Once you have added the reinstatement inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Reinstatement Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the reinstatement inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the reinstatement inspection request, the Request Status column in the RFI Reinstatement Report page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the reinstatement inspection request, click  (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The reinstatement inspection request will be moved for reinstatement inspection. 5.52.5 Add RFI Data for a Reinstatement Inspection Request If you want to add RFI data for the added reinstatement inspection request, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Reinstatement Report See Fig 5.52. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.52.6 View an RFI Report If you want to view an RFI report, click  (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Reinstatement Report page. See Fig 5.52. 5.52.7 Add Results of Reinstatement Inspection After completing the reinstatement inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of spools added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each spool from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Temperature column, enter the temperature value of each spool. In the Start Time and End Time columns, enter the start and end times. Click Save. 5.52.8 Attach a File into a Reinstatement Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing reinstatement inspection request listed in the RFI Reinstatement Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 5.52.9 Export Reinstatement Inspection Request List You can export a list of reinstatement inspection requests added in the RFI Reinstatement Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 5.52.10 Filter a Reinstatement Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific reinstatement inspection request in the RFI Reinstatement Report page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Reinstatement Report page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 5.53 Inspection Requisition Summary Report The Inspection Requisition Summary tab in the Inspection menu used to view the inspection requisition summary report for a particular period. Click Inspection Requisition Summary in the Inspection menu. The Requisition Inspection Summary page opens.                                Figure 5.53: Requisition Inspection Summary page In the Start Date and End Date boxes, select the start and end dates. Click Get Report. The inspection requisition summary report for the selected period will be opened. 5.53.1 Print an Inspection Requisition Summary Report If you want to print an inspection requisition summary report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Requisition Inspection Summary page. If you want to print the current page of the inspection requisition summary report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the inspection requisition summary report, click (print icon). 5.53.2 Export an Inspection Requisition Summary Report You can export the inspection requisition summary report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Requisition Inspection Summary page. Piping 6.0 Piping The Piping menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add results after performing the piping related inspections. This menu also helps you to view the inspection reports. 6.1 Radiographic Testing (RT) RT inspection method is one of the types of NDT inspection used to conduct inspection in the piping project by using either x-rays or gamma rays. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of RT type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing RT inspection, you can add the RT inspection result details by using this RT tab. To navigate to Radiographic Testing (RT), Click Radiographic Testing (RT) in the Piping menu. The RT Report page opens.                                                   Figure 6.1: RT Report page 6.11 Add an RT Report If you want to add an RT report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1. The RT Report page opens a new window to add an RT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new RT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the report number, you can change. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the NDT Request No box, select an RT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the RT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the RT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the RT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the RT report. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the RT report. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the RT report. Click Save. The RT report is successfully added. Once you have added the RT report, you must add RT inspection results. 6.1.2 Add RT Inspection Results If you want to add the RT inspection results for the added RT report, do the following steps, Click the respective added RT report in the RT Report See Fig 6.1. The RT Report page shows RT Results, Joint Results, and Report Photos windows to add RT results.                                                  Figure 6.1.1: RT Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Image Quality Indicator (IQI) box, select IQI from a drop-down list. In the Source & Size (MM) box, select the RT source and their size from a drop-down list. In the Density box, enter the radiographic density range. In the Code box, select the code of the material from a drop-down list. In the Procedure Number box, select the procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Sensitivity (%)box, set the radiographic sensitivity by using up and down arrows. In the Developing Time (Mins)box, set the developing time by using up and down arrows. In the Film/ Type box, select the name of a film including type from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Source to Film Distance (SFD) box, enter the distance range between the source and the film. In the Focus Film Distance (FFD)box, enter the focus film distance range. In the Source box, select any one source option whether inside, outside, or other. In the Technique box, select the radiographic technique from a drop-down list. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, select the condition of the surface from the specified options. In the Placement of IQI box, select any one option from source side and film side. In the Source Strength (Ci)box, enter the source strength value. In the Exposure Time (Mins)box, set the exposure time by using up and down arrows. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save RT Details. The RT details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the RT details, you must add marker results of added joints. Note: Once you have added RT details, you can save the added RT details and reuse the saved details while you adding RT details for any other RT report. To save the added RT details, enter any name in the Set Default box and click . If you want to add the same RT details for any other RT report, select the name in the Get Default. The saved details will be automatically updated in the respective boxes. 6.1.2.1 Add Marker Results for Joints The RT Results window shows a list of joints added for the RT inspection. If you want to add marker results for the respective joints, Click  (Add icon) for the respective joint. The Marker Results window opens with a list of markers of the respective joint. If you want to add any additional markers, click  (ADD button). The Marker Results window shows a new window to add a new marker. In the Marker box, enter the marker number. In the Sensitivity box, enter the sensitivity range. In the Result box, select the marker result from the given result options. In the Defect box, select the defect type if any. In the Defect Length (MM)box, enter the defect length value. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                        The marker is added and listed in the Marker Results window. If you want to update marker results, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective marker results. A new window opens to edit the marker results. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and edit the marker results. Click Save. If you want delete any existing marker results, click(Delete icon) for the respective marker results. 9.1.2.2 Import Additional Joints If you want to import additional joints for the RT inspection, Click (Import Joints button) in the RT Results See Fig 6.1.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click  (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective RT inspection. Once you have imported the joints, you must perform the RT inspection and add the marker results for the added joints. 6.1.2.3 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated RT results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the RT Results See Fig 6.1.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.1.3 Attach a File into an RT Report If you want to attach any file with any RT report listed in the RT Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.1.4 View an NDT – RT Report If you want to view an NDT - RT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1. 6.1.5 Edit an RT Report If you want to edit any existing RT report in the RT Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RT report. See Fig 6.1. A new window opens to edit the RT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. If you want to edit the RT inspection results of any report, click the respective report and change the results. 6.1.6 Export RT Report List You can export a list of RT reports added in the RT Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.1.7 Filter an RT Report If you want to filter any RT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any RT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any RT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any RT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.2 Ultrasonic Testing (UT) The UT method is one of the NDT inspection methods used for performing inspection in the piping project by using high frequency sound waves. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of UT type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing UT inspection, you can add the UT inspection result details by using this UT tab. To navigate to Ultrasonic Testing (UT), Click the Ultrasonic Testing (UT) tab in the Piping menu. The UT Report page opens.                                                     Figure 6.2: UT Report page 6.2.1 Add an UT Report If you want to add an UT report, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2. A new window opens to add an UT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new UT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the requisition of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the NDT Request No box, select an UT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the UT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the UT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the UT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the UT report. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the UT report. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the UT report. In the Accept Date box, select the report accept date. Click Save. The UT report is successfully added. Once you have added the UT report, you must add UT results for the respective added UT report. 6.2.2 Add UT Results If you want to add the UT results for the respective UT report, do the following, Click the respective added UT report in the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2. The UT Report page shows UT Results, Probe & Cable Details, Reference Setting Details, UT Results, and Report Photos windows.                                                Figure 6.2.1: UT Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of UT inspection. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description about the UT inspection. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list. In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Couplant box, select the couplant material from a drop-down list. In the Test Procedure No box, select the test procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Simulation Blocks box, enter the detail of simulation blocks. In the Ref. Hole Diameter box, enter the diameter value of the reference hole. In the Sensitivity Setting box, enter the information about the sensitivity setting. In the Sides Scanned box, enter the details of the sides that are scanned. In the Special Equipment box, enter the name of the special equipment if any. In the Computerized Program Name box, enter the computerized program name. In the Surface Scanned box, the details of the surfaces that are scanned. In the Scan Limitation box, enter the limitation range of scanning. In the Code/Specification box, select the specification from a drop-down list. In the Calibration Block box, select the calibration block from a drop-down list. In the Technique box, select the technique from a drop-down list. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. In the Surface Condition box, select the surface condition from the specified options. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save UT Details. The UT details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the UT details, you must add the probe and cable details for the UT inspection. Note: Once you have added UT details, you can save the added UT details and reuse the saved details while you adding UT details for any other UT report. To save the added UT details, enter any name in the Set Default box and click . The added details will be saved in the given name. If you want to add the same UT details for any other UT report, select the name in the Get Default. The saved details will be automatically updated in the respective boxes. 6.2.2.1 Add Probe & Cable Details If you want to add probe and cable details for the updated UT results, Click (Add Probe/ Cable button) in the Probe& Cable Details See Fig 6.2.1. A new window opens to add the probe and cable details. In the Probe box, select a probe from a drop-down list. In the Cable box, select a cable from a drop-down list. In the dB box, enter the reference decibel range. In the Surf Comp dB box, enter the decibel range of the surface component. In the Test Range (MM) box, enter the test range in millimeters. In the Reference Level box, enter the reference level detail. In the Scanning dB box, enter the scanning decibel range. In the TR Loss box, enter the transmission loss detail. Click Save. The probe and cable details are successfully added. Once you have added the probe and cable details, you must add the reference setting details. 6.2.2.2 Add Reference Setting Details If you want to add the reference setting details for the updated UT results, Click  (Add Reference Setting button) in the Reference Setting Details window. See Fig 6.2.1. A new window opens to add the reference setting details. In the Reference Block box, select the reference block from a drop-down list. In the Probe Sr. No box, select the serial number of the probe from a drop-down list. In the Reference box, enter the reference detail. In the Eqpt Gain (dB) box, enter the equipment gain in decibels. In the Damping box, enter the damping ratio. In the Rejection box, enter the rejection detail. In the Amplitude Height box, enter the amplitude height range. In the Skip box, enter the skip detail. In the Beam Path box, enter the beam path detail. In the Range box, enter the range detail. Click Save. The reference setting details are successfully added. Once you have added the reference setting details, you must add the inspection results for added joints. 6.2.2.3 Add UT Results The UT Results window shows a list of joints added for the UT inspection. If you want to add UT results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective UT results listed in the UT Results window. The UT Results window opens with the added UT details. In the Result box, update your UT inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.2.2.4 Import Additional Joints If you want to add more joints, you can add by using the import joints option. To import joints, Click (Import Joints button) in the UT Results See Fig 6.2.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective UT and listed in the UT Results window. Once you have imported the joints, you must add the UT results for the imported joints. 6.2.2.5 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated UT results, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the UT Results See Fig 6.2.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. The UT results will be updated successfully. 6.2.3 Attach a File into an UT Report If you want to attach any file with any UT report listed in the UT Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.2.4 View an NDT – UT Report If you want to print an NDT - UT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2. 6.2.5 Edit an UT Report If you want to edit any existing UT report in the UT Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective UT report. See Fig 6.2. A new window opens to edit the UT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.2.6 Export UT Report List You can export a list of UT reports added in the UT Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.2.7 Filter an UT Report If you want to filter any UT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any UT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any UT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any UT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.3 Ultrasonic Thickness Testing (UTG) The UTG method is one of the NDT inspection methods used for performing inspection in the piping project. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of UTG type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing UTG inspection, you can add the UTG inspection result details by using this UTG tab. To navigate to Ultrasonic Testing (UTG), Click the Ultrasonic Testing (UTG) tab in the Piping menu. The UTG Report page opens.                                                       Figure 6.3: UTG Report page 6.3.1 Add an UTG Report If you want to add an UTG report, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the UTG Report page. See Fig 6.3. A new window opens to add an UTG report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new UTG report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the requisition of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the NDT Request No box, select an UTG request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the UTG report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the UTG report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the UTG report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the UTG report. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the UTG report. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the UTG report. In the Accept Date box, select the report accept date. Click Save. The UTG report is successfully added. Once you have added the UTG report, you must add UTG results for the respective added UTG report. 6.3.2 Add UTG Results If you want to add the UTG results for the respective UT report, do the following steps, Click the respective added UTG report in the UTG Report See Fig 6.3. The UT Report page shows UTG Details, Probe & Cable Details, Reference Setting Details, UTG Results, and Report Photos windows.                                                  Figure 6.3.1: UTG Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of UTG inspection. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description about the UTG inspection. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list. In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Couplant box, select the couplant material from a drop-down list. In the Test Procedure No box, select the test procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Simulation Blocks box, enter the detail of simulation blocks. In the Hole Diameter box, enter the diameter value of the reference hole. In the Sensitivity Setting box, enter the information about the sensitivity setting. In the Sides Scanned box, enter the details of the sides that are scanned. In the Special Equipment box, enter the name of the special equipment if any. In the Computerized Program Name box, enter the computerized program name. In the Surface Scanned box, the details of the surfaces that are scanned. In the Scan Limitation box, enter the limitation range of scanning. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save UTG Details. The UTG details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the UTG details, you must add the probe and cable details for the UTG inspection. Note: Once you have added UTG details, you can save the added UTG details and reuse the saved details while you adding UTG details for any other UTG report. To save the added UTG details, enter any name in the Set Default box and click . The added details will be saved in the given name. If you want to add the same UTG details for any other UTG report, select the name in the Get Default. The saved details will be automatically updated in the respective boxes. 6.3.2.1 Add Probe & Cable Details If you want to add probe and cable details for the updated UTG results, Click  (Add Probe/ Cable button) in the Probe& Cable Details See Fig 6.3.1. A new window opens to add the probe and cable details. In the Probe box, select a probe from a drop-down list. In the Cable box, select a cable from a drop-down list. In the Ref. dB box, enter the reference decibel range. In the Surf Comp dB box, enter the decibel range of the surface component. In the Test Range (MM) box, enter the test range in millimeters. In the Reference Level box, enter the reference level detail. In the Scanning dB box, enter the scanning decibel range. In the TR Loss box, enter the transmission loss detail. Click Save. The probe and cable details are successfully added. Once you have added the probe and cable details, you must add the reference setting details. 6.3.22 Add Reference Setting Details If you want to add the reference setting details for the updated UTG results, Click  (Add Reference Setting button) in the Reference Setting Details window. See Fig 6.3.1. A new window opens to add the reference setting details. In the Reference Block box, select the reference block from a drop-down list. In the Probe Sr. No box, select the serial number of the probe from a drop-down list. In the Reference box, enter the reference detail. In the Eqpt Gain (dB) box, enter the equipment gain in decibels. In the Damping box, enter the damping ratio. In the Rejection box, enter the rejection detail. In the Amplitude Height box, enter the amplitude height range. In the Skip box, enter the skip detail. In the Beam Path box, enter the beam path detail. In the Range box, enter the range detail. Click Save. The reference setting details are successfully added. Once you have added the reference setting details, you must add the inspection results for added joints. 6.3.2.3 Add UTG Results The UTG Results window shows a list of joints added for the UTG inspection. If you want to add UTG results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective UTG results listed in the UTG Results window. The UTG Results window opens with the added UTG details. In the Result box, update your UTG inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.3.2.4 Import Additional Joints If you want to add more joints, you can add by using the import joints option. To import joints, Click (Import Joints button) in the UTG Results See Fig 6.3.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective UTG and listed in the UTG Results window.                                                    Once you have imported the joints, you must add the UTG results for the imported joints. 6.3.2.5 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated UTG results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the UTG Results window. See Fig 6.3.1. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. The UTG results will be updated successfully. 6.3.3 Attach a File into an UTG Report If you want to attach any file with any UTG report listed in the UTG Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.3.4 View an NDT – UTG Report If you want to print an NDT - UTG report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the UTG Report page. See Fig 6.3. 6.3.5 Edit an UTG Report If you want to edit any existing UTG report in the UTG Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective UTG report. See Fig 6.3. A new window opens to edit the UTG report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.3.6 Export UTG Report List You can export a list of UTG reports added in the UTG Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.3.7 Filter an UTG Report If you want to filter any UTG report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any UTG report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the UTG Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any UTG report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the UTG Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any UTG report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the UTG Report page, and then Click Search. 6.4 Dye Penetrant Testing (PT) Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT) method is one of the oldest and simplest NDT inspection methods used for inspecting the materials in the piping project by using ultraviolet or white light, depending on the type of dye used - fluorescent or non fluorescent (visible). PT also called liquid penetrate inspection (LPI) or penetrant testing (PT). Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of PT type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing PT inspection, you can add the PT inspection result details by using this PT tab. To navigate to Dye Penetrant Testing (PT), Click Dye Penetrant Testing (PT) in the Piping menu. The PT Report page opens.                                                     Figure 6.4: PT Report page 6.4.1 Add a PT Report If you want to add a PT report, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the PT Report page. See Fig 6.4. The PT Report page opens a new window to add an PT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the NDT Request No box, select an NDT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PT report. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the PT report. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the PT report. Click Save. The PT report is successfully added and listed in the PT Report page. Once you have added the PT report, you must add PT results for the respective added PT report. 6.4.2 Add PT Results If you want to add the PT results for the respective PT report, do the following steps, Click the respective added PT report in the PT Report See Fig 6.4. The RT Report page shows the DPT Results and Report Photos windows.                                                      Figure 6.4.1: DPT Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of DPT inspection. In the Inspection By box, enter the name of a person who has done the DPT inspection. In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail. In the Description box, enter the description. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface. In the Dwell Time box, enter dwell time range. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value. In the Cleaner box, select the cleaner from a drop-down list. In the Penetrant box, select the penetrant from a drop-down list. In the Developer box, select the developer from a drop-down list. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value. In the Development Time box, enter the time for development. In the Extend of Scanning box, enter the details of scanning extend. In the PWHT box, enter the PWHT detail. In the Technique box, select the PT technique from a drop-down list. In the Light Intensity box, enter the light intensity value. In the Joint Preparation box, enter the joint preparation detail. In the Certification box, enter the certification detail. In the Reference Standard box, enter the reference standard detail. In the Reference No box, enter the reference number. In the Welding Process box, enter the type of welding process. In the Code box, enter the code detail. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. In the Item Tested box, select the tested items from the specified options. In the Inspection Method box, select the inspection method from the specified options. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list. In the Penetrant System box, select the type of penetrant system. In the Lighting box, select the type of lighting. In the Remarks/Drawing Title box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save DPT Details. The DPT details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the DPT details, you must add DPT inspection results for the added joints. Note: Once you have added DPT details, you can save the added DPT details and reuse the saved details while you adding DPT details for any other DPT report. To save the added DPT details, enter any name in the Set Default box and click . If you want to add the same DPT details for any other DPT report, select the name in the Get Default. The saved details will be automatically updated in the respective boxes. 6.4.2.1 Add PT Results for Joints The DPT Results window shows a list of joints added for the PT inspection. If you want to add PT results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective joint listed in the DPT Results window. The UT Results window opens with the added UT details. In the Result box, update your PT inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.4.2.2 Import Additional Joints If you want to add more joints, you can add by using the import joints option. To import joints, Click  (Import Joints button) in the DPT Results window. See Fig 6.4.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click  (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported and listed in the DPT Results window. Once you have added joints, you must update the DPT results for added joints. 6.4.2.3 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated DPT results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the DPT Results See Fig 6.4.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.4.3 Attach a File into a PT Report If you want to attach any file with any PT report listed in the PT Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.4.4 View an NDT – PT Report If you want to view an NDT - PT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the PT Report page. See Fig 6.4. 6.4.5 Edit a PT Report If you want to edit any existing PT report in the RT Report page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective DPT report. See Fig 6.4. The RT Report page shows the details of the selected PT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.4.6 Export PT Report List You can export a list of RT reports added in the RT Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.4.7 Filter a PT Report If you want to filter any PT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any DPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any DPT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any DPT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.5 Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) Magnetic Particle Testing also referred to as Magnetic Particle Inspection is one of the NDT inspection methods used to detect defects or discontinuities such as cracks, at or near the surface in ferromagnetic metals such as iron, steel, nickel, cobalt and so on, in the piping project. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of MT type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing the MT inspection, you can add the MT inspection result details by using this MT tab. To navigate to Magnetic Particle Testing (MT), Click Magnetic Particle Testing (MT)in the Piping menu. The MT Report page opens.                                                    Figure 6.5: MT Report page 6.5.1 Add an MT Report If you want to add an MT report, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5. The MT Report page shows a new window opens to add an MT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new MT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT inspection whether by third party or internal. In the NDT Request No box, select an NDT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the MT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the MT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the MT request. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the MT report. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the MT report. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the MT report. Click Save. The MT report is successfully added and listed in the MT Report page. Once you have added the MT report, you must add MT results for the respective MT report. 6.5.2 Add MT Results If you want to add the MT results for the respective MT report, do the following, Click the respective MT report in the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5. The MT Report page shows MPT Results and Report Photos window.                                                  Figure 6.5.1: MT Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Black Magnetic Ink box, select the type of black magnetic ink from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface. In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail. In the White Contrast Paint box, select the type of white contrast paint. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value. In the Type of Current box, enter the type of current. In the Lifting Capacity box, select the lifting capacity value. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Yoke/ Prod Space box, enter the relevant information. In the Particles Type box, select the type of particles from a drop-down list. In the Particles Make & model box, enter the model of the particle including made of materials. In the Background Contrast & Type box, enter the type of background including contrast range. In the Demagnetization box, if you want demagnetization select Yes otherwise select No. In the Magnetizing Technique box, enter the magnetizing technique. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value. In the Code box, enter the code detail. In the Color box, select any color from the specified options. In the Suspension box, select any suspension liquid from the specified options. In the Lighting box, select any lighting from the specified options. In the Method box, select any method from the specified options. In the Item Tested box, select the tested items from the specified options. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save MPT Details. The MT details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the MT details, you must add MT inspection results for the added joints. Note: Once you have added MT details, you can save the added MT details and reuse the saved details while you adding MT details for any other MT report. To save the added MT details, enter any name in the Set Default box and click. The added details will be saved in the given name. If you want to add the same MT details for any other MT report, select the name in the Get Default. The saved details will be automatically updated in the respective boxes. 6.5.2.1 Add MT Results for Joints The MPT Results window shows a list of joints added for the MT inspection. If you want to add MT results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective joint listed in the MPT Results window. The MPT Results window opens a new window with the added MT details. In the Result box, update your MT inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.5.2.2 Import Additional joints If you want to import joints for the updated MPT results, Click  (Import Joints button) in the MPT Results window. See Fig 6.5.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click  (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are added and listed in the MPT results window. You must add the MT inspection results for the added joints. 6.5.2.3 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated MT results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the MPT Results window. See Fig 6.5.1. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.5.3 Attach a File into an MT Report If you want to attach any file with any MT report listed in the MT Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.5.4 View an NDT – MT Report If you want to view an NDT - MT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5. 6.5.5 Edit a MT Report If you want to edit any existing MT report in the MT Report page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MT report. See Fig 6.5. A new window opens to edit the MT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.5.6 Export MT Report List You can export a list of RT reports added in the RT Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.5.7 Filter a MT Report If you want to filter any MT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any MT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any MT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any MT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.6 Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing (PAUT) Inspection PAUT is an advanced NDT inspection technique that utilizes multiple UT probes to inspect more complex geometries. PAUT used to inspect almost any material where traditional UT methods have been utilized for weld inspections and crack detection. The PAUT tab in the Piping menu helps you to add a PAUT report. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of PAUT type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing the PAUT inspection, you can add the PAUT inspection result details by using this PAUT tab. To navigate to PAUT, Click PAUT in the Piping menu. The PAUT Report page opens.                                                   Figure 6.6: PAUT Report page 6.6.1 Add a PAUT Report If you want to add a PAUT report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the PAUT Report page. See Fig 6.6. The PAUT Report page shows a new window to add the details of a PAUT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PAUT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT whether by third party or internal. In the NDT Request No box, select an NDT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PAUT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PAUT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PAUT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PAUT report. In the Accepted/ Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the PAUT report. In the Accepted/ Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PAUT report. Click Save. The PAUT report is successfully added and listed in the PAUT Report page. Once you have added the PAUT report, you must add PAUT inspection result details. 6.6.2 Add PAUT Inspection Results If you want to add the PAUT results for the respective PAUT report, do the following steps, Click the respective PAUT report in the PAUT Report page. See Fig 6.6. The PAUT Report page shows Joint Results, PAUT Results, and Report Photos windows.                                    Figure 6.6.1: PAUT Results adding page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Material Thickness box, enter the thickness of the material. In the Selection of IQI box, select an IQI from a drop-down list. In the Source and Size (MM) box, select a source from a drop-down list. In the Material box, enter the name of the material. In the Density box, enter the density value of the material. In the Acceptance Standard/Code box, select the acceptance standard/code from a drop-down list. In the Procedure Number box, select the procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Sensitivity box, set the sensitivity value of the material. In the Developing Time (Mins) box, set the developing time. In the Film Type box, select the type of film. In the Surface Condition box, enter the surface condition detail. In the Source to Object Distance (SOD) box, enter the distance value from source to object. In the Placement of IQI box, enter the placement detail of IQI. In the Lead Screens box, enter the lead screens detail. In the Density through IQI box, enter the density through IQI detail. In the Front and Back boxes, enter the front and back details. In the Location Marker box, enter the location marker detail. In the Densitometer Serial Number box, enter the densitometer serial number. In the Visible Wire/Hole box, enter the detail of visible wire/hole. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save PAUT Details. The PAUT details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the PAUT details, you must add the PAUT inspection results for joints in the Joint Results window. Note: Once you have added PAUT details, you can save the added PAUT details and reuse the saved details while you adding PAUT details for any other PAUT report. To save the added PAUT details, enter any name in the Set Default box and click . The added details will be saved in the given name. If you want to add the same PAUT details for any other PAUT report, select the name in the Get Default. The saved details will be automatically updated in the respective boxes. 6.6.2.1 Add PAUT Results for Joints The Joint Results window shows a list of joints added for the PAUT inspection. If you want to add PAUT results for joints, Click  (Edit icon) for the respective joint listed in the Joint Results window. The Joint Results window opens a new window with the added joint details. In the Result box, update your PWHT inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.6.2.2 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated PAUT results, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. See Fig 6.6.1. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.6.3 Attach a File into a PAUT Report If you want to attach any file with any PAUT report listed in the PAUT Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.6.4 View a PAUT Report If you want to view a PAUT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the PAUT Report page. See Fig 6.6. 6.6.5 Edit a PAUT Report If you want to edit any existing PAUT report in the PAUT Report page, do the following, Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PAUT report. See Fig 6.6. The PAUT Report page shows the details of the added PAUT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.6.6 Export PAUT Report List You can export a list of PAUT reports added in the PAUT Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.6.7 Filter a PAUT Report If you want to filter any PAUT report, If you want to filter any PAUT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PAUT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PAUT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the PAUT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PAUT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the PAUT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.7 Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD) Inspection TOFD is a reliable method of NDT- UT used to look for flaws in welds. TOFD uses the time of flight of an ultrasonic pulse to find the location of a reflector. TOFD can also be used for weld overlays in piping. The TOFD tab in the Piping menu helps you to add a TOFD report. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of TOFD type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing the TOFD inspection, you can add the TOFD inspection result details by using this TOFD tab. To navigate to TOFD, Click TOFD in the Piping menu. The TOFD Report page opens.                                            Figure 6.7: TOFD Report page 6.7.1 Add a TOFD Report If you want to add a TOFD report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the TOFD Report See Fig 6.7. The TOFD Report page shows a new window to add the details of a TOFD report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new TOFD report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT whether by third party or internal. In the NDT Request No box, select an NDT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the TOFD report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the TOFD report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the TOFD report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the TOFD report. In the Accepted/ Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the TOFD report. In the Accepted/ Approved Date box, select the approved date of the TOFD report. Click Save. The TOFD report is successfully added and listed in the TOFD Report page. Once you have added the TOFD report, you must add TOFD inspection result details. 6.7.2 Add TOFD Inspection Results If you want to add the TOFD results for the respective TOFD report, do the following steps, Click the respective TOFD report in the TOFD Report page. See Fig 6.7. The TOFD Report page shows Joint Results, TOFD Results, and Report Photos windows.                                        Figure 6.7.1: TOFD Results adding page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Material Thickness box, enter the thickness of the material. In the Selection of IQI box, select an IQI from a drop-down list. In the Source and Size (MM) box, select a source from a drop-down list. In the Material box, enter the name of the material. In the Density box, enter the density value of the material. In the Acceptance Standard/Code box, select the acceptance standard/code from a drop-down list. In the Procedure Number box, select the procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Sensitivity box, set the sensitivity value of the material. In the Developing Time (Mins) box, set the developing time. In the Film Type box, select the type of film. In the Surface Condition box, enter the surface condition detail. In the Source to Object Distance (SOD) box, enter the distance value from source to object. In the Placement of IQI box, enter the placement detail of IQI. In the Lead Screens box, enter the lead screens detail. In the Density through IQI box, enter the density through IQI detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save TOFD Details. The TOFD details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the TOFD details, you must add the TOFD inspection results for joints in the Joint Results window. Note: Once you have added TOFD details, you can save the added TOFD details and reuse the saved details while you adding TOFD details for any other TOFD report. To save the added TOFD details, enter any name in the Set Default box and click . The added details will be saved in the given name. If you want to add the same TOFD details for any other TOFD report, select the name in the Get Default. The saved details will be automatically updated in the respective boxes. 6.7.2.1 Add TOFD Results for Joints The Joint Results window shows a list of joints added for the TOFD inspection. If you want to add TOFD results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective joint listed in the Joint Results window. The Joint Results window opens a new window with the added joint details. In the Result box, update your PWHT inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.7.2.2 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated TOFD results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos See Fig 6.7.1. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.7.3 Attach a File into a TOFD Report If you want to attach any file with any TOFD report listed in the TOFD Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.7.4 View a TOFD Report If you want to view a TOFD report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the PAUT Report page. See Fig 6.7. 6.7.5 Edit a TOFD Report If you want to edit any existing TOFD report in the TOFD Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective TOFD report. See Fig 6.7. The TOFD Report page shows the details of the added TOFD report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.7.6 Export TOFD Report List You can export a list of TOFD reports added in the TOFD Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.7.7 Filter a TOFD Report If you want to filter any TOFD report, If you want to filter any TOFD report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the TOFD Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any TOFD report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the TOFD Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any TOFD report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the TOFD Report page, and then Click Search. 6.8 Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) The PWHT tab in the Piping menu helps you to add a PWHT report. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of PWHT type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing the PWHT inspection, you can add the PWHT inspection result details by using this PWHT tab. To navigate to PWHT, Click PWHT in the Piping menu. The PWHT Report page opens.                                              Figure 6.8: PWHT Report page 6.8.1 Add a PWHT Report If you want to add a PWHT report, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the PWHT Report See Fig 6.8. The PWHT Report page shows a new window to add a PWHT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PWHT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT whether by third party or internal. In the Request Number box, select an NDT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PWHT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PWHT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PWHT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PWHT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PWHT report. In the Accepted/ Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PWHT report. Click Save. The PWHT report is successfully added and listed in the PWHT Report page. Once you have added the PWHT report, you must add PWHT inspection result details. 6.8.2 Add PWHT Results If you want to add the PWHT results for the respective PWHT report, do the following steps, Click the respective PWHT report in the PWHT Report See Fig 6.8. The PWHT Report page shows PWHT Results, Joint Results, and Report Photos windows.                                                                                  Figure 9.8.1: PWHT Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. In the Material Specification box, enter the specification for the material. In the Governing Thickness box, enter the governing thickness value. In the Governing Code/Specification box, enter the governing code/specification. In the HT Procedure No box, select the HT procedure number. In the No. of Thermo Couple box, enter the number of thermo couple. In the Controlled Heating Rate box, enter the controlled heating rate value. In the Heating Rate From (Temperature) box, enter the heating rate starting range. In the Soaking Temperature box, enter the soaking temperature value. In the Soaking Time box, enter the soaking time value. In the Controlled Cooling Rate box, enter the range of controlled cooling rate. In the Cooling Rate Up to (Temperature) box, enter the cooling rate temperature range. In the Soaking Temperature box, enter the soaking temperature value. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Result box, enter your PWHT result. Click Save PWHT Details. The PWHT details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the PWHT details, you must add the PWHT inspection results for joints in the Joint Results window. Note: Once you have added PWHT details, you can save the added PWHT details and reuse the saved details while you adding PWHT details for any other PWHT report. To save the added PWHT details, enter any name in the Set Default box and click . The added details will be saved in the given name. If you want to add the same PWHT details for any other PWHT report, select the name in the Get Default. The saved details will be automatically updated in the respective boxes. 6.8.21 Add PWHT Results for Joints The Joint Results window shows a list of joints added for the PWHT inspection. If you want to add PWHT results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective joint listed in the Joint Results window. The Joint Results window opens a new window with the added joint details. In the Result box, update your PWHT inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.8.2.2 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated PWHT results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. See Fig 6.8.1. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.8.3 Attach a File into a PWHT Report If you want to attach any file with any PWHT report listed in the PWHT Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.8.4 View a PWHT Report If you want to view a PWHT report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the PWHT Report page. See Fig 6.8. 6.8.5 Edit a PWHT Report If you want to edit any existing PWHT report in the PWHT Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PWHT report. See Fig 6.8. The PWHT Report page shows the details of the added PWHT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.8.6 Export PWHT Report List You can export a list of PWHT reports added in the PWHT Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.8.7 Filter a PWHT Report If you want to filter any PWHT report, Use (FILTER button) in the PWHT Report page, See Fig 6.8. (OR) Do one of the following steps to filter the PWHT report, If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.9 Positive Material Identification (PMI) PMI is one of the more specialized NDT methods. With positive material identification, the alloy composition of materials can be determined. PMI is one of the more specialized NDT methods. With positive material identification, the alloy composition of materials can be determined. After completing the PMI inspection, you can add the PMI inspection result details by using this PMI tab. To navigate to PMI, Click PMI in the Piping menu. The PMI Report page opens.                                                           Figure 6.9: PMI Report page 6.9.1 Add a PMI Report If you want to add a PMI report, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the PMI Report page. See Fig 6.9. The PMI Report page shows a new window to add a new PMI report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PMI report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT whether by third party or internal. In the Request No box, select an NDT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PMI report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PMI report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PMI report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PMI report. In the Accepted/ Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the PMI report. In the Accepted/ Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PMI report. Click Save. The PMI report is successfully added and listed in the PMI Report page. Once you have added the PMI report, you must add PMI inspection result details. 6.6.2 Add PMI Results If you want to add the PMI results for the respective PMI report, do the following steps, Click the respective PMI report in the PMI Report See Fig 6.9. The PMI Report page shows PMI Results, PMI Elements, PMI Joint Details, and Report Photos windows.                                                    Figure 9.9.1: PMI Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list. In the Material Spec box, select the material specification from a drop-down list. In the Text Range box, enter the detail of text range. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the given options. Click Save PMI Details. The PMI details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the PMI details, you must add the PMI inspection results for the added elements. 6.9.2.1 Add PMI Results for Elements The PMI Elements window shows a list of elements added for the PMI inspection. If you want to add PMI results for elements, Click (Edit icon) for the respective element listed in the PMI Elements window. The PMI Elements window opens a new window on each column with the added element details. Enter the relevant details in each column. In the Result column, update your PMI inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. Click Save. 6.9.2.2 Add More Elements If you want to add more elements, do the following steps, Click Add Element in the PMI Elements window. A new window opens in each column of the PMI Elements window to add a new element. Enter the relevant details in the respective columns. Click Save. The element is successfully added. 6.9.2.3 Add PMI Results for Joints The PMI Joint Details window shows a list of joints added for the PMI inspection. If you want to add PMI results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective joint listed in the PMI Joint Details window. The PMI Joint Details window opens a new window with the added joint details. In the Result box, update your PMI inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.9.2.4 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated PMI results, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. See Fig 6.9.1. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.9.3 Attach a File into a PMI Report If you want to attach any file with any PMI report listed in the PMI Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.9.4 View a PMI Report If you want to view a PMI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the PMI Report page. See Fig 6.9. 6.9.5 Edit a PMI Report If you want to edit any existing PMI report in the PMI Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PMI report. See Fig 6.9. The PMI Report page shows the details of the added PMI report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.9.6 Export PMI Report List You can export a list of PMI reports added in the PMI Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.9.7 Filter a PMI Report If you want to filter any PMI report, Use (FILTER button) in the PMI Report page, See Fig 6.9. (OR) Do one of the following steps to filter the PMI report, If you want to filter any PMI report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PMI Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PMI report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the PMI Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PMI report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the PMI Report page, and then Click Search. 6.10 Ferrite Ferrite testing, also referred to as a ferrite scope test, is a rapid NDT method used to measure the amount of delta ferrite on materials used in the piping project. The Ferrite tab in the Piping menu helps you to add a ferrite report. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of ferrite type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. The Ferrite tab in the Piping menu helps you to add a ferrite report. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of ferrite type by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. Click Ferrite in the Piping menu. The Ferrite Report page opens.                                             Figure 6.10: Ferrite Report page 6.10.1 Add a Ferrite Report If you want to add a ferrite report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Ferrite Report page. See Fig 6.10. The Ferrite Report page shows a new window to add a new ferrite report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: The report number for a new ferrite report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT whether by third party or internal. In the Request No box, select an NDT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the ferrite report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the ferrite report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the ferrite report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the ferrite report. In the Accepted/ Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the ferrite report. In the Accepted/ Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PMI report. Click Save. The ferrite report is successfully added and listed in the Ferrite Report page. Once you have added the ferrite report, you must add ferrite inspection result details. 6.10.2 Add Ferrite Inspection Results If you want to add ferrite inspection results for the respective ferrite report, do the following steps, Click the respective ferrite report in the Ferrite Report See Fig 6.10. The Ferrite Report page shows Ferrite Results, Ferrite Inspection Details, Joint Results, and Report Photos windows.                                               Figure 6.10.1: Ferrite Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of ferrite inspection. In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list. In the Barcode box, enter the barcode of the material. In the Inspection Item box, enter the detail of inspection items. In the QCF No box, enter the QCF number. In the Line No box, enter the line number. Click Save Ferrite Details. The ferrite details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the ferrite details, you must add the ferrite inspection results. 6.10.2.1 Add Ferrite Inspection Details If you want to add ferrite inspection details, Click Add Ferrite Inspection in the Ferrite Inspection Details window. The Ferrite Inspection Details window opens a new window on each column. Enter the relevant details in each column. Click Save. 6.10.2.2 Add Joint Results The Joint Results window shows a list of joints added for the ferrite inspection. If you want to add ferrite inspection results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective joint listed in the Joint Results window. The Joint Results window opens a new window with the added joint details. In the Result box, update your ferrite inspection results whether Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.10.2.3 Import Joints If you want to import multiple joints, Click  (Import Joints button) in the Joint Results window. The Joints window opens. Select the checkbox of the joints you want to import. Click Import Selected Joints. The imported joints will be listed in the Joint Results window. 6.10.2.4 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated ferrite inspection results, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.10.3 Attach a File into a Ferrite Report If you want to attach any file with any ferrite report listed in the Ferrite Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.10.4 View a Ferrite Report If you want to view a ferrite report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Ferrite Report page. See Fig 6.10. 6.10.5 Edit a Ferrite Report If you want to edit any existing ferrite report in the Ferrite Report page, do the following steps, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective ferrite report. See Fig 6.10. The Ferrite Report page shows the details of the added ferrite report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.10.6 Export Ferrite Report List You can export a list of ferrite reports added in the Ferrite Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.10.7 Filter a Ferrite Report If you want to filter any ferrite report, Use  (FILTER button) in the Ferrite Report page, See Fig 9.10. (OR) Do one of the following steps to filter the ferrite report, If you want to filter any ferrite report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the Ferrite Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any ferrite report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the Ferrite Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any ferrite report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the Ferrite Report page, and then Click Search. 6.11 Hardness Harness testing is one of the NDT type of inspection. Hardness testing is performed to evaluate the mechanical properties metal joints and other materials thus helps to ensure that the material meets a particular specification. The Hardness tab in the Piping menu helps you to add a hardness report. Once the NDT inspection request is added with the selection of hardness type testing by using the NDT Inspection Request tab, the added inspection request will be moved here. After completing the hardness testing, you can add the hardness testing result details by using this Hardness tab. To navigate to Hardness, Click Hardness in the Piping menu. The Hardness Report page opens.                                        Figure 6.11: Hardness Report page 6.11.1 Add a Hardness Report If you want to add a hardness report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Hardness Report See Fig 6.11. The Hardness Report page shows a new window to add a new hardness report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new hardness report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the NDT By box, select the requisition detail of NDT whether by third party or internal. In the Request No box, select an NDT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the hardness report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the hardness report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the hardness report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the hardness report. In the Accepted/ Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the hardness report. In the Accepted/ Approved Date box, select the approved date of the hardness report. Click Save. The hardness report is successfully added and listed in the Hardness Report page. Once you have added the hardness report, you must add hardness testing result details. 6.11.2 Add Harness Results If you want to add the hardness testing results for the respective Hardness report, do the following steps, Click the respective hardness report in the Hardness Report See Fig 6.11. The Hardness Report page shows Hardness Results, Joint Results, and Report Photos windows.                                         Figure 6.11.1: Hardness Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the date of hardness testing. In the Part Description box, enter the description of a part to be tested for hardness. In the Weld Map No box, enter the weld map drawing number. In the Material Spec & Grade box, enter the grade and description for the material. In the Instrument box, enter the name of the instrument to be used for hardness testing. In the Instrument Make/ Model/ SL. No. box, enter the instrument model or serial number. In the Intender Type box, enter the type of intender. In the Result box, enter the result of hardness test. In the Procedure No box, select the procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save Hardness Details. The hardness details are successfully updated. Once you have updated the hardness details, you must add the hardness inspection results for the joints. 6.11.2.1 Add Hardness Testing Results of joints The Joint Results window shows a list of joints added for the hardness test. If you want to add hardness test results for joints, Click (Edit icon) for the respective joint listed in the Joint Results window. The Joint Results window opens a new window for each column with the added joint details. Update your hardness test details in all columns. Click Save. 6.11.2.2 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated hardness test results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.11.3 Attach a File into a Hardness Report If you want to attach any file with any hardness report listed in the Hardness Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.11.4 View a Hardness Report If you want to view a hardness report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Hardness Report page. See Fig 6.11. 6.11.5 Edit a Hardness Report If you want to edit any existing hardness report in the Hardness Report page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective hardness report. See Fig 6.11. The Hardness Report page shows the details of the added hardness report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.11.6 Export Hardness Report List You can export a list of hardness reports added in the Hardness Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.11.7 Filter a Hardness Report If you want to filter any hardness report, Use  (FILTER button) in the Hardness Report page, See Fig 6.11. (OR) Do one of the following steps to filter the hardness report, If you want to filter any hardness report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the Hardness Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any hardness report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the Hardness Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any hardness report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the Hardness Report page, and then Click Search. 6.12 RFI Hydro Pressure Report The RFI Hydro Pressure Report tab in the Piping menu helps you to add a hydro pressure report in piping project. To navigate to RFI Hydro Pressure Report, Click RFI Hydro Pressure Report in the Piping menu. The Pressure Report page opens.                                           Figure 6.12: Pressure Report page 6.12.1 Add a Hydro Pressure Report If you want to add a hydro pressure report, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Pressure Report page. See Fig 6.12. The Pressure Report page shows a new window to add details of a new hydro pressure report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new hydro pressure report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the Test Pack box, select the test pack from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the hydro pressure report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the hydro pressure report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the hydro pressure report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the hydro pressure report. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the hydro pressure report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the hydro pressure report. Click Save. The hydro pressure report is successfully added and listed in the Pressure Report page. Once you have added the hydro pressure report, you must add hydro pressure test details. 6.12.2 Add Hydro Pressure Test Details If you want to add the hydro pressure test details, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Pressure Report page. See Fig 6.12. The Pressure Report page shows Test Parameters, Equipment Details, and Pressure Raise & Reduce Records windows.                                           Figure 6.12.1: Pressure Report page In the Unit No box, enter the unit number. In the Sub Contractor box, enter the name of a sub-contractor. In the Test Zone box, enter the detail of test zone. In the Isometric Drawing No box, enter the isometric drawing number. In the Decision box, select your decision whether confirm or non-confirm. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 6.12.2.1 Add Test Parameters If you want to add test parameters for the hydro pressure test, enter the following details in the Test Parameters window, In the Type of Test box, select the test type from a drop-down list. In the Test Medium box, select the test medium from a drop-down list. In the Test Temperature box, enter the test temperature value. In the Procedure No box, enter the procedure number. In the Test Date box, select the test date. In the Start Time and End Time boxes, enter the start time and end time of test. In the Duration box, enter the duration of test. In the Operating Pressure box, enter the operating pressure value. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure value. In the Recorded Test Pressure box, enter the recorded test pressure value. In the Position box, enter the position detail. In the Holding Time (Hrs) box, enter the holding period in hours. In the Holding Time (Min) box, enter the holding period in minutes. In the Remarks/Observations box, enter your remarks/observations if any. Click Save. 6.12.2.2 Add Equipment Details If you want to add equipment details for the hydro pressure test, Click  (ADD button) in the Equipment Details window. In the Conducted By box, select the method of conducting hydro pressure test whether Internal or In the Equipment Details box, select an equipment from a drop-down list. Click Save. The equipment is successfully added and listed in the Equipment Details window. Once you have added the equipment, you must add the calibration detail for the added equipment. To add calibration detail, click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the equipment. The Equipment Details windows shows a new window with added equipment details. In the Manufacturer box, enter the name of the manufacturer. In the Last Calibration Date box, select the last calibration date. In the Calibration Due Date box, select the calibration due date. In the Calibration Report No box, enter the calibration report number. Click Save. 6.12.2.3 Add Pressure Raise and Reduce Records If you want to add pressure raise and reduce records, Click (ADD button) in the Pressure Raise & Reduce Records window. The Pressure Raise & Reduce Records window opens a new window to add the required details. In the Date box, select the pressure testing date. In the Time box, enter the time of pressure testing. In the Pressure box, enter the pressure value. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 6.12.3 Attach a File into a Hydro Pressure report If you want to attach any file with any hydro pressure report listed in the Pressure Report page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.12.4 View a Hydro Pressure Report If you want to view a hydro pressure report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Pressure Report page. See Fig 6.12. 6.12.5 Edit a Hydro Pressure Report If you want to edit any existing hydro pressure report in the Pressure Report page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective hydro pressure report. See Fig 6.12. The Pressure Report page shows the details of the added pressure report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.12.6 Export Hydro Pressure Report List You can export a list of hydro pressure reports added in the Pressure Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.12.7 Lock a Hydro Pressure Report If you want to lock any hydro pressure report, select the checkbox of the respective hydro pressure report. See Fig 6.12. 6.13 PMI/Hardness Summary Report The PMI/HARDNESS Summary Report tab in the Piping menu helps you to view the PMI and hardness summary report. To view the report, Click PMI/HARDNESS Summary Report in the Piping menu. The PMI and Hardness summary report page opens.                                        Figure 6.13: PMI/Hardness Summary Report page If you want to view the PMI summary report, click the PMI option. The PMI Summary Report opens. If you want to view the hardness summary report, click the HARDNESS option. The Hardness Summary Report opens. 6.13.1 Print a PMI and Hardness Summary Report If you want to print a PMI/Hardness summary report, use  and   (print icons) provided in the PMI and Hardness summary report page. If you want to print the current page of the PMI and Hardness summary report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the PMI and Hardness summary report, click(print icon). 6.13.2 View a PMI and Hardness Summary Report You can view the PMI and Hardness summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the PMI and Hardness summary report page. 6.14 Preheat/PWHT Summary Report The PREHEAT/PWHT Summary Report tab in the Piping menu helps you to view the Preheat and PWHT summary report. To view the report, Click PREHEAT/PWHT Summary Report in the Piping menu. The Preheat and PWHT summary report page opens.                                         Figure 6.14: Preheat/PWHT Summary Report page If you want to view the preheat summary report, click the PREHEAT option. The Preheat Summary Report opens. If you want to view the PWHT summary report, click the PWHT option. The PWHT Summary Report opens. 6.14.1 Print a Preheat and PWHT Summary Report If you want to print a Preheat/PWHT summary report, use and   (print icons) provided in the Preheat and PWHT summary report page. If you want to print the current page of the Preheat and PWHT summary report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the Preheat and PWHT summary report, click  (print icon). 6.14.2 View a Preheat and PWHT Summary Report You can view the preheat and PWHT summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Preheat and PWHT summary report page. 6.15 PAUT Summary Report The PAUT Summary Report tab in the Piping menu helps you to view the PAUT summary report. To view the report, Click PAUT Summary Report in the Piping menu. The PAUT summary report page opens.                                                 Figure 6.15: PAUT Summary Report page 6.15.1 Print a PAUT Summary Report If you want to print a PAUT summary report, use and   (print icons) provided in the PAUT summary report page. If you want to print the current page of the PAUT summary report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the PAUT summary report, click (print icon). 6.15.2 View a PAUT Summary Report You can view the PAUT summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the PAUT summary report page. 6.16 RT Summary Report The RT Summary Report tab in the Piping menu helps you to view the RT summary report. To view the report, Click RT Summary Report in the Piping menu. The RT summary report page opens.                                               Figure 6.16: RT Summary Report page 6.16.1 Print a RT Summary Report If you want to print a RT summary report, use and (print icons) provided in the RT summary report page. If you want to print the current page of the RT summary report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the RT summary report, click(print icon). 6.16.2 View a RT Summary Report You can view the RT summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the RT summary report page. 6.17 Welder Performance Record The Welder Performance Record tab in the Piping menu helps you to view a performance record of welders. To view the welder performance record, Click Welder Performance Record in the Piping menu. The Welder Performance Record page opens.                                Figure 6.17: Welder Performance Record page 6.17.1 Add a Welder Performance Record If you want to add a welder performance record, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Welder Performance Record page. The page opens a new window to add the details of the welder performance record. Tip: The report number for the welder performance record will be updated automatically. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the Start Date and End Date boxes, select the start and ending dates to view the welder performance record. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the welder performance record. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the welder performance record. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the welder performance record. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the welder performance record. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the welder performance record. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the welder performance record. Click Save. The welder performance record will be added and listed in the Welder Performance Record page. 6.17.2 Edit a Welder Performance Record If you want to edit any existing welder performance record in the Welder Performance Record page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective welder performance record. See Fig 6.17. The Welder Performance Record page shows the details of the added welder performance record. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.17.3 View a Welder Performance Record If you want to view a welder performance record, click(print icon) provided in the Welder Performance Record page. See Fig 6.17. 6.17.4 Attach a File into a Welder Performance Record If you want to attach any file with a welder performance record listed in the Welder Performance Record page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.17.5 Export a Welder Performance Record You can export the welder performance in the Welder Performance Record page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.18 Generate Weld Visual Report The Generate Weld Visual Report tab in the Piping menu helps you to generate a weld visual report. Click Generate Weld Visual Report in the Piping menu. The Daily Pipe Weld Visual Record page opens.                                      Figure 6.18: Daily Pipe Weld Visual Record page The Daily Pipe Weld Visual Record page shows the list of weld visual inspections completed on each day including the welding date, weld process name, location, pipe size, and drawing name. The Daily Pipe Weld Visual Record page shows the list of weld visual inspections completed on each day including the welding date, weld process name, location, pipe size, and drawing name. Each group has a maximum of 20 number of weld visual inspection. Each group is separated by different group number. You can generate a report for each group individually by using the respective report generating option provided in the Daily Pipe Weld Visual Record page. If you want to generate report of DPWR for any group or date, click (Generate Report button) of the respective group or date. The generated reports will be moved to the Weld Visual Report page. To view the generated reports, navigate to the Weld Visual Report tab. 6.19 Weld Visual Report The Weld Visual Report tab in the Piping menu helps you to view a weld visual report. Once you have generated the weld visual report, the generated report will be moved here. You can view the respective report by using this tab. To view the weld visual report, Click Weld Visual Report in the Piping menu. The Weld Visual Report page opens.                                              Figure 6.19: Weld Visual Report page Note: If you want to view the welded joints, select the checkbox of the Show Welded Joints option provided in the page. The page shows the list of welded joints. 6.19.1 Add Weld Visual Report If you want to add a weld visual report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Weld Visual Report page. The page opens a new window to add the details of the weld visual report. In the Drawing Number box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. The field report number and shop report number will be updated automatically in the respective boxes. Click Save. The weld visual report is successfully added and listed in the Weld Visual Report page. 6.19.2 Edit a Weld Visual Report If you want to edit any existing weld visual report in the Weld Visual Report page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld visual report. See Fig 6.19. The Weld Visual Report page shows the details of the added report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.19.3 Delete a Weld Visual Report If you want to delete any weld visual report in the Weld Visual Report page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Weld Visual Report page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 6.19.4 View a Weld Visual Report If you want to view a weld visual report related with the field inspection, click (print icon) provided in the Field column. See Fig 6.19. If you want to view a weld visual report related with the shop inspection, click  (print icon) provided in the Shop See Fig 6.19. 6.19.5 Filter a Weld Visual Report If you want to filter any weld visual report in the Weld Visual Report page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Weld Visual Report page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.19.6 Export a Weld Visual Report You can export the weld visual reports in the Weld Visual Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.20 Weld Joint Log Sheet The Weld Joint Log sheet tab in the Piping menu helps you to view a log sheet of pipe welding inspection. To view the log sheet, Click Weld Joint Log sheet in the Piping menu. The pipe welding inspection log sheet page opens.                                  Figure 6.20: Pipe welding inspection log sheet page In the Type box, select the type of joint. Do one of the following steps, In the ISO Drawing Number box, select the isometric drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Line Number box, select the line number from a drop-down list. In the System box, select the system from a drop-down list. Click Go. If you want to open the log sheet in a threaded joint template, click the checkbox of the Open in Threaded Joint Template option. If you want to open the log sheet in a threaded joint template, click the checkbox of the Open in Threaded Joint Template option. The pipe welding inspection log sheet opens for the selected option. 6.20.1 Print a Weld Joint Log sheet If you want to print the weld joint log sheet, use and (print icons) provided in the Weld Joint Log sheet page. If you want to print the current page of the Weld Joint Log sheet, click   (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the Weld Joint Log sheet, click (print icon). 6.20.2 View a Weld Joint Log sheet You can view the weld joint log sheet in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Joint Log sheet page. 6.21 Joint Summary Report The Joint Summary report tab in the Piping menu used to view a joint summary report. If you want to see a joint summary report, Click Joint Summary Report in the Piping menu. The Joint Summary Report page shows summary details of isometric drawing, joints, welders, components and so on.                                     Figure 9.21: Joint Summary Report page 6.21.1 Export a Joint Summary Report You can export the joint summary report in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button) in the Joint Summary Report page. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.21.2 View a Joint Summary Report If you want to view a joint summary report, click  (print icon) provided in the Joint Summary Report page. See Fig 6.21. 6.22 Welding Application Report The Welding Application Report tab in the Piping menu shows a welding application report. If you want to view a welding application report, Click Welding Application Report in the Piping menu. The welding application report page opens with the details of welding application.                                              Figure 6.22: Welding Application Report page 6.22.1 Print a Welding Application Report If you want to print a welding application report, use  and (print icons) provided in the Welding Application Report page. See Fig 6.22. If you want to print the current page of the welding application report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the welding application report, click (print icon). 6.22.2 Export a Welding Application Report You can export the welding application report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Welding Application Report page. 6.23 Weld Rejection Rate Weld Rejection Rate is the difference between the tested length and repair length of the welded material, which are calculated using RT and UT inspection. The Weld Rejection Rate is used to calculate the weld success rate. The Weld Rejection Rate tab in the Piping menu shows a weld rejection rate report including weekly and cumulative weld success rate summary details. If you want to view a weld rejection rate report, Click Weld Rejection Rate in the Piping menu. The weld rejection rate report page opens.                                          Figure 6.23: Weld Rejection Rate Report page In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a weld rejection rate report, from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Show Report. The weld rejection rate report opens for the selected project. 6.23.1  Print a Weld Rejection Rate Report If you want to print a weld rejection rate report, use  and    (print icons) provided in the Weld Rejection Rate Report page. See Fig 6.23. If you want to print the current page of the weld rejection rate report, click   (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weld rejection rate report, click  (print icon). 6.23.2 Export a Weld Rejection Rate Report You can export the weld rejection rate report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Rejection Rate Report page. 6.24 Weekly/Monthly DPWR The Weekly/Monthly DPWR tab in the Piping menu used to view a DPWR on a weekly or monthly basis. To view a DPWR, Click Weekly/Monthly DPWR in the Piping menu. The DPWR page opens. In the Category box, select the category from a drop-down list. In the Start Date and End Date boxes, select the starting and ending date to view the DPWR. Click Get Report. The DPWR page shows the welder details for the selected category and period. 6.24.1 Print a Weekly/Monthly DPWR If you want to print the DPWR, use and    (print icons) provided in the DPWR page. See Fig 6.24. If you want to print the current page of the DPWR, click   (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the DPWR, click (print icon). 6.24.2 Export a Weekly/Monthly DPWR You can export the DPWR in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the DPWR page. 6.25 Piping Inspection Completion Status by System The Status by System tab in the Piping menu used to view the completed status of the piping inspection based on the system data. To view the status, Click Status by System in the Piping menu. The Piping Inspection Completion Status by System page opens and shows the NDT inspection details.                    Figure 6.25: Piping Inspection Completion Status by System page 6.25.1 Export Piping Inspection Completion Status by System You can export the piping inspection completion status in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.25.2 Filter Piping Inspection Completion Status by System If you want to filter any piping inspection completion status, you can use (FILTER button) in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by System page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.26 Piping Inspection Completion Status by Sub System The Status by Sub System tab in the Piping menu used to view the completed status of the piping inspection based on the sub system data. To view the status, Click Status by Sub System in the Piping menu. The Piping Inspection Completion Status by Sub System page opens and shows the NDT inspection details.                     Figure 6.26: Piping Inspection Completion Status by Sub System page 6.26.1 Export Piping Inspection Completion Status by Sub System You can export the piping inspection completion status in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by Sub System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.26.2 Filter Piping Inspection Completion Status by Sub System If you want to filter any piping inspection completion status, you can use  (FILTER button) in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by Sub System page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.27 Piping Inspection Completion Status by Line The Status by Line tab in the Piping menu used to view the completed status of the piping inspection based on the Lines data. To view the status, Click Status by Line in the Piping menu. The Piping Inspection Completion Status by Line page opens and shows the NDT inspection details.               Figure 9.27: Piping Inspection Completion Status by Line page 6.27.1 Export Piping Inspection Completion Status by Line You can export the piping inspection completion status in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by Line page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.27.2 Filter Piping Inspection Completion Status by Line If you want to filter any piping inspection completion status, you can use  (FILTER button) in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by Line page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.28 Piping Inspection Completion Status by ISO The Status by ISO tab in the Piping menu used to view the completed status of piping inspection based on the isometric drawing data. To view the status, Click Status by ISO in the Piping menu. The Piping Inspection Completion Status by ISO page opens and shows the drawing status and NDT inspection details.                        Figure 6.28:  Piping Inspection Completion Status by ISO page 6.28.1 Export Piping Inspection Completion Status by ISO You can export the piping inspection completion status in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by ISO page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.28.2 Filter Piping Inspection Completion Status by ISO If you want to filter any piping inspection completion status, you can use (FILTER button) in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by ISO page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.29 Piping Inspection Completion Status by Spools The Status by Spools tab in the Piping menu used to view the completed status of piping inspection based on the spool data. To view the status, Click Status by Spools in the Piping menu. The Piping Inspection Completion Status by Spools page opens and shows the NDT inspection details.                      Figure 6.29: Piping Inspection Completion Status by Spools page 6.29.1 Export Piping Inspection Completion Status by Spools You can export the piping inspection completion status in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by Spools page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.29.2 Filter Piping Inspection Completion Status by Spools If you want to filter any piping inspection completion status, you can use  (FILTER button) in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by Spools page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.30 Piping Inspection Completion Status by Test Pack The Status by Test Pack tab in the Piping menu used to view the completed status of piping inspection based on the test pack data. To view the status, Click Status by Test Pack in the Piping menu. The Piping Inspection Completion Status by Test Pack page opens and shows the NDT inspection details.                      Figure 6.30: Piping Inspection Completion Status by Test Pack page 6.30.1 Export Piping Inspection Completion Status by Test Pack You can export the piping inspection completion status in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by Test Pack page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.30.2 Filter Piping Inspection Completion Status by Test Pack If you want to filter any piping inspection completion status, you can use (FILTER button) in the Piping Inspection Completion Status by Test Pack page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.31 Outstanding Joints The Outstanding Joints tab in the Piping menu used to view and track the details of outstanding joints. To view the outstanding joints, Click Outstanding Joints in the Piping menu. The Outstanding Joints page opens.                                 Figure 6.31: Outstanding Joints page Select the joint category from the given options such as All, Shop, and Field. The page shows the details of outstanding joints based on the selected category. 6.3.11 Export Outstanding Joints You can export the list of outstanding joints in the Outstanding Joints page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.3.12 Filter Outstanding Joints If you want to filter any specific outstanding, you can use the filter box provided in each column of the Outstanding Joints page. 6.32 Completed Drawings The Completed Drawings tab in the Piping menu used to view and track the details of completed drawings. To view the completed drawings details, Click Completed Drawings in the Piping menu. The Completed Drawings page opens.                                           Figure 6.32: Completed Drawings page Select the joint category from the given options such as All, Shop, and Field. The page shows the details of completed drawings based on the selected category. 6.32.1 Export Completed Drawings You can export the list of completed drawings in the Completed Drawings page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.33 Weld Progress by Date The Weld Progress by Date tab in the Piping menu helps you to view the graphical representation of welding progress on a day basis. To view the welding progress detail, Click Weld Progress by Date in the Piping menu. The Welding Progress page opens with a graphical representation. The chart shows the number of welding such as shop weld and field weld, performed on every day. If you want to view the progress detail of welding performed in the shop, click Shop Weld. The chart shows the shop welding progress details. If you want to view the progress detail of welding performed in the field, click Field Weld. The chart shows the field welding progress details. 6.33.1 Print a Welding Progress chart If you want to print the welding progress chart, Click  (menu icon) in the Weld Progress page. Click Print Chart. The chart will be printed. 6.33.2 Download a Welding Progress Chart You can download the welding progress chart in PNG image, JPEG image, SVG vector image, and PDF formats by using the respective options provided in the menu icon. 6.34 Inspection Request Summary Report The Inspection Request Summary tab in the Piping menu used to view the summary of inspection request. To view the inspection request summary report, Click Inspection Request Summary in the Piping menu. The Inspection Request Summary Report page opens.                               Figure 6.34: Inspection Request Summary Report page In the Start Date and End Date boxes, select the start and end dates. Click Search. The page shows the details of inspection request. 6.34.1 Export an Inspection Request Summary Report You can export the inspection request summary report in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.34.2 Filter an Inspection Request Summary If you want to filter any inspection request detail, you can use (FILTER button) in the Inspection Request Summary Report page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.35 Piping Progress Status Report The Piping Progress Status Report tab in the Piping menu used to view the piping progress status report. To view the piping progress status report, Click Piping Progress Status Report in the Piping menu. The Piping Progress Status Report page opens.                                                Figure 9.35: Piping Progress Status Report page In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates to view the piping progress status. Click Load Report. The page shows the details of piping progress status. 6.35.1 Print a Piping Progress Status Report If you want to print the piping progress status report, use  and (print icons) provided in the Piping Progress Status Report page. See Fig 6.35. If you want to print the current page of the piping progress status report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the piping progress status report, click (print icon). 6.35.2 Export a Piping Progress Status Report You can export the piping progress status report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Piping Progress Status Report page. 6.36 Welder Defect Analysis Report The Welder Defect Analysis Report tab in the Piping menu used to view the defect analysis report of the particular welder. To view the welder defect analysis report, Click Welder Defect Analysis Report in the Piping menu. The Welder Defect Analysis page opens.                                            Figure 9.36: Welder Defect Analysis page In the Select Welder box, select a welder from the list of welders. Click Generate Report. The page shows the defect analysis report of the selected welder. 6.36.1 Print a Welder Defect Analysis Report If you want to print the welder defect analysis report, use  and (print icons) provided in the Welder Defect Analysis page. See Fig 6.36. If you want to print the current page of the welder defect analysis report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the welder defect analysis report, click (print icon). 6.36.2 Export a Welder Defect Analysis Report You can export the welder defect analysis report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Welder Defect Analysis Report page. 6.37 Weld Traceability Record The Weld Traceability Record tab in the Piping menu used to add a weld traceability record and track welding records. If you want add a weld traceability record, do the following, Click Weld Traceability Record in the Piping menu. The Weld Traceability Record page opens.                                      Figure 6.37: Weld Traceability Record page 6.37.1 Add a Weld Traceability Record If you want to add a weld traceability record, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Weld Traceability Record page. See Fig 6.37. The page opens a new window to add the details of a weld traceability record. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new weld traceability record will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the Drawing Number box, select a drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Date box, enter the date of adding the weld traceability record. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the weld traceability record. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the weld traceability record. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the weld traceability record. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the weld traceability record. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the weld traceability record. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the weld traceability record. Click Save. The weld traceability record is successfully added. 6.37.2 View a Weld Traceability Report If you want to view a weld traceability report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column in the Weld Traceability Record page. See Fig 6.37. 6.37.3 Attach a File into a Weld Traceability Record If you want to attach any file with a weld traceability record listed in the Weld Traceability Record page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.37.4 Edit a Weld Traceability Record If you want to edit any existing weld traceability record in the Weld Traceability Record page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld traceability record. The page shows the added details of the weld traceability record. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.37.5 Delete a Weld Traceability Record If you want to delete any existing system in the System page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the System page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 6.38 Add Non-Conformance Report (NCR) NCR used to document the details of a non-conformance identified in a quality audit or other process review. The Add NCR tab in the Piping menu helps you to add an NCR in the Piping project. Do the following steps to add an NCR, Click Add NCR in the Piping menu. The NCR page opens.                                                       Figure 6.38: NCR page Tip: A report number for a new NCR will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the Type box, select the type of non-conformance from a drop-down list. In the Classification box, select whether minor classification or major classification from a drop-down list. In the Source/ Item box, select the source of NCR from a drop-down list. In the NCR box, enter the description for the identified deficiency of the selected non-conformance type. In the Reference Document box, enter the reference document detail. In the Owner Reference Document box, enter the owner reference document detail. In the Supplier Reference Document box, enter the supplier reference document detail. In the NCR originator box, enter the originator of NCR. In the Origin Date box, select the origin date of NCR. In the NCR Accepted By box, enter the name of a person who has accepted the NCR. In the NCR Accepted Date box, select the NCR accepted date. In the Agreed Closure Date box, select the agreed closure date. In the Issued By box, select the company who has issued the NCR. In the Issued To box, select the company for which the NCR has issued. In the Root Cause box, enter the root cause detail. If you want to add the corrective action detail, do the following, In the Action box, select any corrective action from the given options. In the Corrective Action box, enter the corrective action detail. In the Proposed by box, enter the name of a person who has proposed the corrective action. In the Target Close-out Date box, select the target close out date. In the Preventive Action box, enter the preventive actions. In the Probability box, select the probability percentage of non-conformance. In the consequences box, select the consequences level you have faced. If you want to add any remarks, click Remarks option and enter your remarks, otherwise click No Remarks option. In the Verification box, enter the verification detail on completion of corrective action/ preventive action. In the Inspected by QC Inspector, and Date boxes, enter the name of the QC inspector who has inspected the NCR, and date, respectively. In the Inspected by QC Inspector, and Date boxes, enter the name of the QC inspector who has inspected the NCR, and date, respectively. In the Supplier NCR Close out by, and Close Out Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has closed the supplier NCR, and close out date, respectively. In the Owner NCR Close out by, and Close Out Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has closed the owner NCR, and close out date, respectively. In the Approval Req box, if you need approval, click Yes, otherwise click If you have selected Yes, you must enter the reference detail in the If Yes, Then Reference In the Description box, enter the description of proposal. In the Proposal Accepted by, and Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted the proposal, and date, respectively. In the NCR Close Notes box, enter the NCR close notes. In the Disposition Completed by, and Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has completed the disposition, and date, respectively. Click Save. The NCR is successfully added. 6.39 View NCR The View NCR tab helps you to view and edit the details of added NCR. You can also add a new NCR by using the add option. To navigate to View NCR, Click View NCR in the NCR menu. The View NCR page opens with an added NCR.                                                     Figure 6.39: View NCR page 6.39.1 Add an NCR If you want to add a new NCR, follow the same procedure in the topic, “Add NCR”. 6.39.2 View an NCR Log Summary Report If you want to view an NCR log summary report, click provided in the upper side of the View NCR page. See Fig 6.39. 6.39.3 Attach a File into an NCR If you want to attach any file with an NCR listed in the View NCR page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.39.4 Update an NCR If you want to update any existing NCR in the View NCR page, click (Update icon) in the Update column for the respective NCR. Edit the details in the respective box you want. 6.39.5 Export an NCR You can export a list of NCRs added in the View NCR page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.39.6 Delete an NCR If you want to delete any existing NCR in the View NCR page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the View NCR page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 6.40 Spools Generate Barcode & QR Code By using the Spools Generate Barcode & QR Code tab in the Piping menu, you can generate the bar code and QR code for the spools for which you have added. Click Spools Generate Barcode & QR Code in the Piping menu. The Spools Generate Barcode page opens.                                 Figure 6.40: Spools Generate Barcode page Select the checkbox of the spool for which you want to generate barcode and QR code. If you want to generate the barcode, click (Print Barcode button). If you want to generate the QR code, click (Print QR code button). 6.41 RT Weekly Report The RT Weekly Report tab in the Piping menu used to view the week wise RT inspection status. To view the RT inspection status, Click RT Weekly Report in the Piping menu. The RT Weekly Report page opens and shows the RT inspection status. 6.42 Weld Summary Sheet The Weld Summary sheet tab in the Piping menu used you to view a summary report of pipe welding inspection. To view the summary report, Click Weld Summary sheet in the Piping menu. The Piping Weld Inspection Log Sheet page opens.                                Figure 9.42: Piping Weld Inspection Log Sheet page In the Type box, select the type of joint. Do one of the following steps, In the ISO Drawing Number box, select the isometric drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Line Number box, select the line number from a drop-down list. In the System box, select the system from a drop-down list. In the Joints box, select a joint from a list of joints loaded based on the selected ISO. Click Go. If you want to open the log sheet in a threaded joint template, click the checkbox of the Open in Threaded Joint Template If you want to open the log sheet for Vendor supply pre-fabricated PTFE, click the checkbox of the VENDOR SUPPLY PRE-FABRICATED PTFE The pipe welding inspection log sheet opens for the selected option. 6.42.1 Print a Weld Summary Sheet If you want to print the weld summary sheet, use and (print icons) provided in the Weld Summary Sheet page. If you want to print the current page of the weld summary sheet, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weld summary sheet, click (print icon). 6.42.2 View a Weld Summary Sheet You can view the weld summary sheet in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Summary Sheet page. 6.43 Inspection Status Report Inspection Status Report shows the overall inspection reports such as from fit-up inspection status to NDT inspection status. If you want to view an inspection status report, do the following steps, Click Inspection Status Report in the Piping menu. The Inspection Status Report page opens.                                             Figure 6.43: Inspection Status Report page In the Start Date and End Date boxes, select the start and end dates. In the Project box, select the project from a drop-down list. Click Show Report. The Inspection Status Report page shows the spool information, RFI fit-up, RFI weld VI, and NDT inspection status. 6.43.1 Print an Inspection Status Report If you want to print the inspection status report, use and   (print icons) provided in the Inspection Status Report page. See Fig 6.43. If you want to print the current page of the inspection status report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the inspection status report, click  (print icon). 6.43.2 Export an Inspection Status Report You can export the inspection status report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Inspection Status Report page. 6.44 Surveillance Entry The Surveillance Entry tab in the Piping menu helps you to add the observation details of various category, which is done by an inspector. If you want add a surveillance entry, do the following, Click Surveillance Entry in the Piping menu. The Surveillance page opens.                                                   Figure 6.44: Surveillance page 6.44.1 Add a Surveillance Entry If you want to add a surveillance entry, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Surveillance page. See Fig 6.44. A new window opens to add a surveillance entry. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Surveillance Date box, select the surveillance date. In the Category box, select a surveillance category from a drop-down list. In the Location box, select a location where the surveillance has done. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Observation By Inspector box, enter the name of the inspector who has done the observation. In the Action by (Supervisor) box, enter the name of the supervisor who has done the action. In the Target Date to Close out box, select the target date to close out the observation. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Observation box, enter the observation’s description. In the Action Taken To Close Observation box, enter the actions to close out the observation. In the Status box, select the status Open or Close based on the observation. Click Save. The surveillance entry is successfully added. 6.44.2 Attach a File into a Surveillance Entry If you want to attach any file with the surveillance entry listed in the Surveillance page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.44.3 Edit a Surveillance Entry If you want to edit any existing surveillance entry in the Surveillance page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective surveillance entry. See Fig 6.44. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.44.4 Delete a Surveillance Entry If you want to delete any from the list, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Surveillance page, See Fig 6.44.  To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 6.44.5 Export a Surveillance Entry You can export a list of surveillance entry added in the Surveillance page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.44.6 Filter a Surveillance Entry If you want to filter any surveillance entry from the list in the Surveillance page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Surveillance page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.45 Surveillance Report Once you have added the surveillance entry by using the Surveillance Entry tab, you can view a surveillance report by using the Surveillance Report tab in the Piping menu.  If you want to view a surveillance report, do the following steps, Click Surveillance Report in the Piping menu. The Surveillance Report page opens.                                                          Figure 6.45: Surveillance Report page In the Project box, select a project from a drop-down list. In the Subcontractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. In the Status box, select the status from a drop-down list. Click Preview Report. The surveillance report will be displayed for the selected dates and status. 6.45.1 Print a Surveillance Report If you want to print a surveillance report, use and (print icons) provided in the Surveillance Report page. See Fig 6.45. If you want to print the current page of the surveillance report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the surveillance report, click (print icon). 6.45.2 Export a Surveillance Report You can export the surveillance report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Surveillance Report page. 6.46 Surveillance Category Report The Surveillance Categories Report tab in the Piping menu shows the surveillance report based on the category wise status. Click Surveillance Categories Report in the Piping menu. The Surveillance Category Wise Status Report page opens.                                       Figure 6.46: Surveillance Report page In the Project box, select a project from a drop-down list. In the Subcontractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. In the Status box, select the status from a drop-down list. Click Preview Report. The surveillance report will be displayed based on the category wise status. 6.46.1 Print a Surveillance Category Wise Status Report If you want to print a surveillance report, use and (print icons) provided in the Surveillance Category Wise Status Report page. See Fig 6.46. If you want to print the current page of the surveillance report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the surveillance report, click (print icon). 6.46.2  Export a Surveillance Category Wise Status Report You can export the surveillance report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Surveillance Category Wise Status Report page. 6.47 Blasting and Painting View The Blasting and Painting View tab in the Piping menu used to add the blasting and painting inspection report. Click Blasting and Painting View in the Piping menu. The Blasting and Painting page opens.                                    Figure 6.47: Blasting and Painting page 6.47.1 Add a Blasting and Painting Report If you want to add a blasting and painting report, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Blasting and Painting page. See Fig 6.47. The page opens a new window to add the details of the blasting and painting report. In the Requested by box, enter the name of a person who has requested the blasting and painting report. In the Requested To box, enter the name of a person for whom you want to send the blasting and painting report. In the Description / Spec,Ref.No box, select the specification report number. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Location box, select the inspection location. In the Requisition box, enter the requisition detail. In the System box, select the system. In the Report Type field, select the report type which you want to create. Before saving the added request, you must add the spools. Note: You can add multiple spools for one request. The page shows a list of spools. If you want to add spools for the request, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) of the respective spools you want to add. The added spools will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Click Save NDT Request. The added report will be listed in the Blasting and Painting page. 6.47.2 Edit a Blasting and Painting Report If you want to edit any existing blasting and painting report in the Blasting and Painting page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective blasting and painting See Fig 6.47. The Blasting and Painting page opens with the details of the selected blasting and painting report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.47.3 Submit and Approve a Blasting and Painting Report Once you have added the blasting and painting report, the Submission column in the Blasting and Painting page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the blasting and painting report, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the blasting and painting report, the Request Status column in the Blasting and Painting page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the blasting and painting report, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 6.47.4 Attach a File into a Blasting and Painting Report If you want to attach a file with any existing blasting and painting report listed in the Blasting and Painting page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.48 NDT Summary Report The NDT Summary Report tab in the Piping menu shows the summary report of the NDT inspection. Click NDT Summary Report in the Piping menu. The NDT Summary Report page opens.                                           Figure 6.48: NDT Summary Report page 6.48.1 Print an NDT Summary Report If you want to print an NDT summary report, click  (print icon) provided in the upper side of the NDT Summary Report page. See Fig 6.48. 6.48.2 Export an NDT Summary Report You can export a list of NDT summary report added in the NDT Summary Report page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.49 Component Summary Report Component Summary Report shows the component summary details. If you want to view a component summary report, do the following steps, Click Component Summary Report in the Piping menu. The Component Summary Report page opens.                                         Figure 6.49: Component Summary Report page In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Show Report. The component summary report opens for the selected dates. 6.49.1 Print a Component Summary Report If you want to print a component summary report, use and   (print icons) provided in the Component Summary Report page. See Fig 6.49. If you want to print the current page of the component summary report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the component summary report, click (print icon). 6.49.2 Export a Component Summary Report You can export the component summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Component Summary Report page. 6.50 NDT Performance Report (RT & UT) NDT Performance Report shows the performance details of RT and UT. If you want to view an NDT performance report, do the following steps, Click NDT Performance Report in the Piping menu. The NDT Performance Report page opens.                                      Figure 6.50: NDT Performance Report page In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Show Report. The NDT performance report opens for the selected dates. 6.50.1 Print an NDT Performance Report If you want to print an NDT performance report, use and    (print icons) provided in the NDT Performance Report page. See Fig 6.50. If you want to print the current page of the NDT performance report, click    (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the NDT performance report, click (print icon). 6.50.2 Export NDT Performance Report You can export the NDT performance report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the NDT Performance Report page. 6.51 Pipe Flushing Check List The Pipe Flushing Check List tab in the Piping menu used to add the pipe flushing check list detail. Click Pipe Flushing Check List in the Piping menu. The Pipe Flushing Check List page opens.                                     Figure 6.51: Pipe Flushing Check List page 6.51.1 Add a Pipe Flushing Check List Click (ADD button) in the Pipe Flushing Check List See Fig 6.51. A new window opens to add a pipe flushing check list. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the User Report box, enter the user report number. In the Client Ref box, enter the client reference number. In the Survey Ref box, enter the survey reference number. In the Drawing box, select a drawing number. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for check list. In the Location box, enter the name of a location. In the Acceptance Code box, enter the acceptance code. In the Flushing Pressure box, enter the flushing pressure value. In the Flushing Temperature box, enter the flushing temperature value. In the Flushing Time box, select the flushing time. In the Flushing Medium box, enter the flushing medium name. In the Instrument Serial No box, enter the instrument serial number. Click Save. The pipe flushing checklist is successfully added. 6.51.2 Edit a Pipe Flushing Check List If you want to edit any existing pipe flushing check list in the Pipe Flushing Check List page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective pipe flushing check list. See Fig 6.51. A new window opens with the added details of the pipe flushing check list. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.51.3 Export a Pipe Flushing Check List You can export a list of pipe flushing check list added in the Pipe Flushing Check List page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.51.4 Filter a Pipe Flushing Check List If you want to filter any pipe flushing check list, you can use  (FILTER button) in the Pipe Flushing Check List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.51.5 Print a Pipe Flushing Check List If you want to print a pipe flushing check list, click  (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Pipe Flushing Check List page. See Fig 6.51. 6.52 Pipe Inspection Check List The Pipe Inspection Check List tab in the Piping menu used to add the pipe inspection check list detail. Click Pipe Inspection Check List in the Piping menu. The Pipe Inspection Check List page opens.                                 Figure 6.52: Pipe Inspection Check List page 6.52.1 Add a Pipe Inspection Check List Click (ADD button) in the Pipe Inspection Check List page. See Fig 6.52. A new window opens to add a pipe inspection check list. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the User Report Number box, enter the user report number. In the Drawing box, select a drawing number. In the Date box, select the inspection date. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Status field, select the status of the check list. In the Report Type box, select the report type of the check list. Click Save. The pipe inspection checklist is successfully added. 6.52.2 Edit a Pipe Inspection Check List If you want to edit any existing pipe inspection check list in the Pipe Inspection Check List page, do the following steps, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective pipe inspection check list. See Fig 6.52. A new window opens with the added details of the pipe inspection check list. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.52.3 Export a Pipe Inspection Check List You can export a list of pipe inspection check list added in the Pipe Inspection Check List page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.52.4 Filter a Pipe Inspection Check List If you want to filter any pipe inspection check list, you can use (FILTER button) in the Pipe Inspection Check List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.52.5 Print a Pipe Inspection Check List If you want to print a pipe Inspection check list, click(print icon) provided in the Print column of the Pipe Inspection Check List page. See Fig 6.52. 6.53 Warning Letter The Warning Letter Report tab in the Piping menu helps you to add a warning letter that addresses the performance issue of a worker. The warning letter explains about the mistakes done by the worker.  If you want to add a warning letter against any worker, do the following, Click Warning Letter in the Piping menu. The Warning Letter Report page opens.                                          Figure 6.53: Warning Letter Report page 6.53.1 Add a Warning Letter Report If you want to add a warning letter report, Click (ADD button) in the Warning Letter Report See Fig 6.53. A new window opens to add a warning letter report. Tip: A report number for a new warning letter report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the warning letter report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the warning letter report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the warning letter report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the warning letter report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the warning letter report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the warning letter report. Click Save. The warning letter report is successfully added. Once you have added the warning letter report, you must add the warning letter details. 6.53.2 Add Warning Letter Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Warning Letter Report page. See Fig 6.53. The Warning Letter Details window opens including a default warning letter template. In the Date box, select the date of issuing the warning letter. In the From box, enter the name of a person who issues the warning letter. In the To box, enter the name of a person who receives the warning letter. In the Attention box, enter the relevant detail. In the Subject box, enter the subject of this warning letter. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Content box, if you want to change any information given in the template, you can change. Click Save Details. 6.53.3 Print a Warning Letter Report If you want to print a warning letter report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Warning Letter Report page. See Fig 6.53. Tip: If you want to lock any warning letter report, click the check box provided in the Lock Report? column of the Warning Letter Report page. See Fig 6.53. 6.53.4 Attach a File into a Warning Letter Report If you want to attach any file with any warning letter report listed in the Warning Letter Report page. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.54 Welder Performance Summary The Welder Performance Summary tab in the Piping menu used to add welder performance record. To add the welder performance record, Click Welder Performance Summary in the Piping menu. The Welder Performance Record page opens.                                 Figure 6.54: Welder Performance Record page 6.54.1 Add a Welder Performance Record Click  (ADD button) in the Welder Performance Record See Fig 6.54. A new window opens to add a welder performance record. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Start Date and End Date boxes, select the start and end dates. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the welder performance record. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the welder performance record. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the welder performance record. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the welder performance record. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the welder performance record. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the welder performance record. Click Save. The welder performance record is successfully added. 6.54.2 Edit a Welder Performance Record If you want to edit any existing welder performance record in the Welder Performance Record page, do the following steps, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective welder performance record. See Fig 6.54. A new window opens with the added details of the welder performance record. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.54.3 Export a Welder Performance Record You can export a list of welder performance records added in the Welder Performance Record page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.54.4 Filter a Welder Performance Record If you want to filter any welder performance record, you can use (FILTER button) in the Welder Performance Record page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 6.54.5 Print a Welder Performance Record If you want to print a welder performance record, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Welder Performance Record page. See Fig 6.54. 6.54.5 Attach a File into a Welder Performance Record If you want to attach a file with any existing welder performance record listed in the Welder Performance Record page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 6.55 Weld Repair Log Report Weld Repair Log Report shows the weld repair log details. If you want to view a weld repair log report, do the following steps, Click Weld Repair Log Report in the Piping menu. The Weld Repair Log Report page opens.                                  Figure 6.55: Weld Repair Log Report page 6.55.1 Print a Weld Repair Log Report If you want to print a weld repair log report, use  and    (print icons) provided in the Weld Repair Log Report page. See Fig 6.55. If you want to print the current page of the weld repair log report, click    (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weld repair log report, click (print icon). 6.55.2 Export a Weld Repair Log Report You can export the weld repair log report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Repair Log Report page. 6.56 AFI Report Status The AFI Report Status tab in the Piping menu shows the AFI report status. Click AFI Report Status in the Piping menu. The AFI Report Status page opens.                                                   Figure 6.56: AFI Report Status page In the Project box, select a project from a drop-down list. In the Category box, select a category from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Show Report. The AFI report status will be displayed. 6.56.1 Print an AFI Report Status If you want to print an AFI report status, use and   (print icons) provided in the AFI Report Status page. See Fig 6.56. If you want to print the current page of the AFI report status, click   (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the AFI report status, click (print icon). 6.56.2  Export an AFI Report Status You can export the AFI report status in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the AFI Report Status page. 6.57 Status by ISO for NDT Requirement The Status by ISO for NDT Requirement tab in the Piping menu used to view the ISO status for NDT requirement. Click Status by ISO for NDT Requirement in the Piping menu. The page shows the status by ISO for NDT requirement.                                Figure 6.57: Status by ISO for NDT Requirement page 6.57.1 Export Status by ISO for NDT Requirement You can export the status in the Status by ISO for NDT Requirement page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.58 Piping Widget The Piping Widget tab in the Piping menu used to view overall summary of the piping NDT, NDT number of joint status, and overall welder rejected status. 6.59 Welder Not Welded List The Welder Not Welded List tab in the Piping menu used to view the list of welders who has not performing the welding work for more than 15 days. If you want to view the welder list, Click Welder Not Welded List in the Piping menu. The Welder Recently Not Welded List page shows a list of welders including their NRIC and welder numbers, last weld date, and no of days not performing welding.                               Figure 6.59: Welder Recently Not Welded List page 6.59.1 Export Welder Not Welded List You can export the welder list in the Welder Recently Not Welded List page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 6.60 Daily Piping Production Log Report The Daily Piping Production Log Report tab in the Piping menu used to view the production details in the piping project on a daily basis. If you want to view the production log report, Click Daily Piping Production Log Report in the Piping menu. The Daily Piping Production Log Report page shows production details in the piping project on a daily basis.                                   Figure 6.60: Daily Piping Production Log Report page 6.60.1 Print a Daily Piping Production Log Report If you want to print a daily piping production log report, use   and (print icons) provided in the Daily Piping Production Log Report page. See Fig 6.60. If you want to print the current page of the daily piping production log report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the daily piping production log report, click (print icon). 6.60.2 Export a Daily Piping Production Log Report You can export the daily piping production log report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Daily Piping Production Log Report page. 6.61 RFI Log Report 6.62 NDT Log Report The NDT Log Report tab in the Piping menu used to view the NDT log report. If you want to view the NDT log report, Click NDT Log Report in the Piping menu. The NDT Log Report page shows NDT log report. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates. Click Load Report.                                              Figure 6.62: NDT Log Report page 6.62.1 Print an NDT Log Report If you want to print an NDT log report, use  and  (print icons) provided in the NDT Log Report page. See Fig 6.62. If you want to print the current page of the NDT log report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the NDT log report, click (print icon). 6.62.2 Export an NDT Log Report You can export the NDT log report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the NDT Log Report page. 6.63 DB Summary Report The DB Summary Report tab in the Piping menu used to view the DB summary report. If you want to view the DB summary report, Click DB Summary Report in the Piping menu. The Total Piping DB Summary page shows the DB summary report.                                       Figure 6.63: Total Piping DB Summary page 6.63.1 Print a DB Summary Report If you want to print a DB summary report, use and (print icons) provided in the Total Piping DB Summary page. See Fig 6.63. If you want to print the current page of the DB summary report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the DB summary report, click (print icon). 6.63.2 Export a DB Summary Report You can export the DB summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Total Piping DB Summary page. 6.64 Weld Repair Report Weld Repair Report shows the weld repair details. If you want to view a weld repair report, do the following steps, Click Weld Repair Report in the Piping menu. The Weld Repair Report page opens. In the Repair No box, select the repair number. In the ISO/Drawing Number box, select the ISO drawing number. Click Go. The weld repair details open for the selected repair number.                                               Figure 6.64: Weld Repair Report page 6.64.1 Print a Weld Repair Report If you want to print a weld repair report, use and   (print icons) provided in the Weld Repair Report page. See Fig 6.64. If you want to print the current page of the weld repair report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weld repair report, click (print icon). 6.64.2 Export a Weld Repair Report You can export the weld repair report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Repair Report page. 6.65 Pending NDT Log Report Pending NDT Log Report shows the pending NDT log details. If you want to view the pending NDT log report, do the following steps, Click Pending NDT Log Report in the Piping menu. The Pending NDT Log page opens. In the ISO/Drawing Number box, select the ISO drawing number. Click Show Report. The pending NDT log details open for the selected ISO drawing number.                                                       Figure 6.65: Pending NDT Log page 6.65.1 Print a Pending NDT Log Report If you want to print a pending NDT log report, use  and  (print icons) provided in the Pending NDT Log page. See Fig 6.65. If you want to print the current page of the pending NDT log report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the pending NDT log report, click  (print icon). 6.65.2 Export a Pending NDT Log Report You can export the pending NDT log report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Pending NDT Log page. 6.66 RT Films Status Report The RT Film Status Report tab in the Piping menu used to view the RT film status. If you want to view the RT film status report, Click RT Film Status Report in the Piping menu. The RT Film Report page shows the RT film status.                                            Figure 6.66: RT Film Status Report page 6.66.1 Print an RT Film Status Report If you want to print an RT film status report, use and (print icons) provided in the RT Film Status Report page. See Fig 6.66. If you want to print the current page of the RT film status report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the RT film status report, click (print icon). 6.66.2 Export an RT Film Status Report You can export the RT film status report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the RT Film Status Report page. Test Pack (ISO) 7.1 Test Pack (ISO) The Test Pack (ISO) tab in the Test Pack menu helps you to add a test back (ISO). To navigate to the test pack adding page, Click Test Pack (ISO) in the Test Pack menu. The Test Pack page opens.                                                   Figure 7.1: Test Pack (ISO) page 7.1.1 Add a Test Pack If you want to add a test pack, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Test Pack page. See Fig 7.1. The page opens a new window to add the details of a test pack. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new test pack will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Name box, enter the name of the test pack. In the Sub System box, select a sub system from a drop-down list. In the Type of Test box, enter the type of test. In the Test Medium box, enter the name of a test medium. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure value. In the Test Area box, enter the name of a test area. In the Hot Oil Flush box, enter the detail of hot oil flush. In the Chem. Clean box, enter the detail of chemical cleaning. In the Test Duration (Hours) box, enter the duration of test. Click Save. The test pack is successfully added and listed in the Test Pack page. Once you have added a test pack, you can manage the checklist of MCR and map ISO drawings/spool for the added test pack. 7.1.2 Manage a Checklist If you want to manage the checklist of test pack, Click (Add icon) in the Manage Checklist See Fig 7.1. The page redirects you to the Checklist Name page. Click  (ADD button) in the Checklist Name page. The page opens a new window to add the details of the checklist. In the Checklist box, enter the checklist name. In the Status box, select the status of the checklist. In the Completed by box, enter the name of a person who has completed checklist. In the Completed Date box, select the completed date of the checklist. Click Save. The added checklist will be listed in the Checklist Name page. If you want to manage the added checklist, click (Add icon) in the Manage Checklist column of the Checklist Name  page. The MCR Checklist page opens for the selected checklist. In the Description box, enter the description for the checklist you want to add. In the Type box, select the checklist type and click . The added checklist will be listed in the MCR Checklist window. If you want to add the checklists from a template, in the Template box, select the template from a drop-down list and click . The checklists in the template will be listed in the MCR Checklist window. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks. Click . 7.1.3 Map ISO If you want to map ISO drawings/ spool for the added test pack, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Map ISO column of the respective test pack. The Map Drawings/Spool window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Map Drawings/Spool window. The window shows a list of drawing and their spools. Do one of the following steps to add spools, If you want to add a spool, click(Add icon) provided in the Add column. The added spools will be moved to right side of the window. If you want to add all spools in the drawing, click (Add icon) provided in the Drawing Number column. The added spools will be moved to right side of the window. Click Save. The added spools will be listed in the in the Map Drawings/Spool window. If you want to view a weld inspection summary report, click  (print icon) provided in the Welding Summary column. If you want to view a visual welding report, click (print icon) provided in the Visual Welding Report column. 7.1.4 Edit a Test Pack If you want to edit any added test pack in the Test Pack page, Click  (Edit icon) of the respective test pack. See Fig 7.1. The Test Pack page shows the details of the selected test pack. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 7.1.5 Delete a Test Pack If you want to delete any existing test pack in the Test Pack page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Test Pack page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 7.1.6 View a Test Pack Spool List Report If you want to view a test pack spool list report, click (print icon) provided in the Spool column. 7.1.7 View a Drawing List Report If you want to view a drawing list report, click(print icon) provided in the Drawing column. 7.1.8 View a Cover Page of Test Pack If you want to view a cover page of test pack, click (print icon) provided in the Cover Page column. 7.1.9 View a Test Pack Report If you want to view a test pack report, click (print icon) provided in the Test Pack column. 7.1.10 Export Test Pack list You can export a list of test packs added in the Test Pack page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.2 Test Pack (Spool) The Test Pack (Spool) tab in the Test Pack menu helps you to add a test back (Spool). To navigate to the test pack adding page, Click Test Pack (Spool) in the Test Pack menu. The Test Pack page opens.                                                        Figure 7.2: Test Pack page 7.2.1 Add a Test Pack If you want to add a test pack, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Test Pack See Fig 7.2. The page opens a new window to add the details of a test pack. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new test pack will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. In the System Name box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Name box, enter the name of the test pack. In the Sub System Name box, select a sub system from a drop-down list. In the Type of Test box, enter the type of test. In the Templates box, select a template from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Test Medium box, enter the name of a test medium. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure value. In the Test Area box, enter the name of a test area. In the Hot Oil Flush box, enter the detail of hot oil flush. In the Chem. Clean box, enter the detail of chemical cleaning. In the Test Duration (Hours) box, enter the duration of test. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the test pack. In the Test Pack Status box, enter the status of the test pack. Click Save. The test pack is successfully added and listed in the Test Pack page. Once you have added a test pack, you can manage the checklist and assign spools and components for the added test pack. Note: If you want to perform the above tasks, click (Add icon) in the Assign Spool/ Components column of the respective test pack. The page shows the Manage Checklist, Assign Spool, and Assign Component options. 7.2.2 Manage a Checklist If you want to manage the test pack checklist, Click the Manage Checklist option. The Test Pack Checklist window opens. If you want to edit any checklist, you can edit the checklist. 7.2.3 Assign a Spool If you want to assign spool for the added test pack, do the following steps, Select the Assign Spool option. The Assign Spool window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Assign Spool window. The window shows a list of spools. If you want to add a spool, click (Add icon) provided in the Add column. Click Save. The added spools will be listed in the in the Assign Spool window. 7.2.4 Assign a Component If you want to assign a component, click the Assign Component option. The Assign Component window opens. 7.2.5 Add Test Pack Result After completing the spool test for the added test pack request, you can add the result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Result column of the Test Pack See Fig 7.2. The Test Package window opens. The Test Package window contains the following options: Index, Pre-Pressure Checklist, Pressure Test, Final Review, Flushing Test, Content, Work instruction, Pre-Checklist, Punch List, Weld Inspection, Hydro Test Report, Flushing Check, BP Test, Instrument List, and Post Checklist. Index If you want to add index for the test pack, Click Index option. The Index window opens with a list of contents. Select the contents which you want to add in the Index. Pre-Pressure Checklist If you want to add pre-pressure checklist for the test pack, Click Pre-Pressure Checklist option. The Pre-Pressure Checklist window opens with a list of checklists. Select the checklists which you want to add. If you want to add the checklist, select the checkbox in the Yes column for the respect checklist. If the checklist is not applicable, select the checkbox in the N/A column. If you do not want to any checklist, select the checkbox in the No column for the respect checklist. Pressure Test If you want to add pressure test results, Click Pressure Test option. The Pressure Test window opens with the following boxes: ISO List, Test Description, and Test Equipment. In the Test Description box, click (ADD button). The Test Method box opens. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure value. In the Required Test Pressure box, enter the required test pressure value. In the Actual Test Pressure box, enter the actual test pressure value. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time range. In the Start Time box, enter the start time of the pressure test. In the End Time box, enter the end time of the pressure test. In the Test Medium box, enter the test medium name. In the Metal Temperature box, enter the metal temperature value. Click Save. In the Result field, select the result of the pressure test whether Acceptable or Not Acceptable. Click Save. Final Review If you want to view the final review of the test pack, Click Final Review option. The Final Review window opens with the final review report. If you want to view the final review report, click (print icon). Flushing Test If you want to add flushing test results, Click Flushing Test option. The Flushing Test window opens with the following boxes: Test Description (Pipe Spool), Test Description, and Test Equipment. In the Test Description (Others) box, click (ADD button). The General Information box opens. In the Installation Area box, enter the installation area value. In the Hydrotest Area box, enter the hydrotest area value. In the Start Time box, enter the start time of the flushing test In the Time Finished box, enter the finished time of the flushing test. In the Test Date box, select the date of flushing test. In the Test Medium box, enter the test medium name. Click Save. In the Test Result field, select the result of the pressure test whether Acceptable or Not Acceptable. Click Save. Content If you want to add content for the test pack, Click Content option. The Contents window opens with a list of contents. Select the contents which you want to add in the Content. Work Instruction Sheet If you want to add the work instruction, Click Work Instruction Sheet option. The Work Instruction Sheet window opens. In the Schedule field, enter the work schedule details. In the Design Condition field, enter the design condition details. In the Test Condition field, enter the test condition details. In the Judgement field, enter the judgement details. Click Save. Pre-Test Checklist If you want to add pre-test checklist for the test pack, Click Pre-Test Checklist option. The Pre-Test Checklist window opens with a list of checklists. Select the checklists which you want to add. If you want to add the checklist, select the checkbox in the Yes column for the respect checklist. If the checklist is not applicable, select the checkbox in the N/A column. If you do not want to any checklist, select the checkbox in the No column for the respect checklist. Welding Inspection Record If you want to view the welding inspection record, Click Welding Inspection Record option. The Welding Inspection Record window shows the welding inspection record. Hydro Test Report If you want to add the hydro test report, Click Hydro Test Report option. The Hydrostatic Test Report window shows a new window to add the hydrostatic test report details. In the Test Fluid box, enter the test fluid name. In the Type of Test box, enter the test type. In the Test Gauge Range box, enter the test gauge range. In the Test Gauge No box, enter the test gauge number. In the Duration Test Start box, enter the test starting time. In the Duration Test Finish box, enter the test finishing time. In the Date of Test box, select the test date. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure value. In the Actual Pressure box, enter the actual pressure value. Click Save. Flushing Check List If you want to add the flushing check list, Click Flushing Check List option. The Flushing Check List window shows a new window to add the flushing check list details. In the Flushing Circuit No box, enter the flushing circuit number. In the Origin box, enter the origin name. In the Termination box, enter the termination detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Select the appropriate checklist. Click Save. BP List If you want to add the BP list detail, Click BP List option. The BP List window shows a new window to add the BP list details. Click  (ADD button) in the BP List window. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Control No box, enter the control number. In the Size box, enter the size vale. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness value. In the Gasket box, enter the gasket detail. Click Save. Instrument List If you want to add the instrument list detail, Click Instrument List option. The Instrument List window shows a new window to add the instrument list details. Click (ADD button) in the Instrument List window. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number. In the P&I No box, enter the P&I number. In the Size box, enter the size vale. In the Gasket box, enter the gasket detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. Post-Test Checklist If you want to add post-test checklist for the test pack, Click Post-Test Checklist option. The Post-Test Checklist window opens with a list of checklists. Select the checklists which you want to add. If you want to add the checklist, select the checkbox in the Yes column for the respect checklist. If the checklist is not applicable, select the checkbox in the N/A column. If you do not want to any checklist, select the checkbox in the No column for the respect checklist. 7.2.6 Edit a Test Pack If you want to edit any added test pack in the Test Pack page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective test pack. See Fig 7.2. The Test Pack page shows the details of the selected test pack. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 7.2.7 Delete a Test Pack If you want to delete any existing test pack in the Test Pack page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Test Pack page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 7.2.8 View a Test Pack MDR Report If you want to view a test pack MDR report, click (print icon) provided in the Assign Spool/Components column. 7.2.9 Attach a File into a Test Pack If you want to attach any file with any test pack listed in the Test Pack page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 7.2.10 Export Test Pack list You can export a list of test packs added in the Test Pack page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.2.11 Filter a Test Pack If you want to filter any specific test pack in the Test Pack page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Test Pack page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 7.2.12 Import Multiple Test Packs If you want to import multiple test packs together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 7.2. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of systems. Enter the required test pack details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the test pack details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 7.2. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the test pack details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the test packs in the worksheet will be displayed in the Test Pack page. 7.2.13 View a Test Pack Summary Report If you want to view a test pack summary report, click  (Summary Report icon) provided in the Test Pack page. 7.3 Test Pack Checklist The Test Pack Checklist tab in the Test Pack menu helps you add the checklist items for the specific test pack. To add the checklist, Click Test Pack Checklist in the Test Pack menu. The MCR Checklist page opens. In the Test Pack Name box, select the test pack name from a drop-down list. In the Checklist Name box, select a checklist from a drop-down list. The Checklist Items and MCR Checklist windows open. In the Description box, enter the description for the checklist you want to add. In the Type box, select the checklist type and click . The added checklist will be listed in the MCR Checklist window. If you want to add the checklists from a template, in the Template box, select the template from a drop-down list and click . The checklists in the template will be listed in the MCR Checklist window. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks. Click . 7.4 MCR Checklist Template The MCR Checklist Template tab in the Test Pack menu helps you to add MC/SC – Check Record (CR)/Check Sheet (CS) templates. To navigate to the templates adding page, Click MCR Checklist Template in the Test Pack menu. The MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page opens.                                           Figure 7.4: MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page 7.4.1 Add a CR/CS Template If you want to add a CR/CS template, Click (ADD button) in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. See Fig 7.4. The page opens a new window to add the details of a test pack. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the CR/CS Name box, enter the name for CR/CS. In the Template Type box, select a template whether CR or CS. In the Description box, enter the description for CR/CS. Click Save. The template is successfully added and listed in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. Once you have added the template details, you must import the respective template. 7.4.2 Import a CR/CS Template If you want to import CR/CS template, Click (Add icon) of the respective CR/CS name in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. The Check Records window opens. Click (ADD button) in the Check Records window. In Items box, enter the details of items. Browse and attach a CS/CR template you want to import. Click Save. 7.4.3 Edit a CR/CS Template If you want to edit any added CR/CS template in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective CR/CS template. See Fig 7.4. The MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page shows the details of the selected CR/CS template. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 7.4.4 Delete a CR/CS Template If you want to delete any existing CR/CS template in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 7.4.5 Export CR/CS Template list You can export a list of CR/CS templates added in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page in both the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.4.6 Filter a CR/CS Template If you want to filter any specific CR/CS template in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Test Pack page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 7.4.7 Import Multiple CR/CS Templates If you want to import multiple CR/CS templates together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 7.4. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of CR/CS templates. Enter the required CR/CS template details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the CR/CS template details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 7.4. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the CR/CS template details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the CR/CS templates in the worksheet will be displayed in the MC/SC – CR/CS Templates page. 7.5 Test Pack Contents The Test Pack Contents page used to view a list of reports of the documents included in the Test Pack. To view the test pack content’s report, Click Test Pack Contents in the Test Pack menu. The Test Pack Contents page opens.                                           Figure 7.5: Test Pack Contents page In the Test Pack Name box, select a test pack from a drop-down list. The Test Pack Contents page shows a list of reports in the selected test pack. Note: If you want to view any specific report, click the respective  (Print icon) in the Print column. 7.6 Joints Not in Any Test Pack Report The Joints Not in Any Test Pack Report tab in the Test Pack menu shows a list of joints not added in any test pack report. To view of the details of joints, Click Joints Not in Any Test Pack Report in the Test Pack menu. The Joints Not in Any Test Pack Report page opens with a list of joints, which are not added in any test pack report. 7.7 Overall Status The Overall Status tab in the Test Pack menu helps you to view the overall status of NDT inspection, welding progress and piping. To view the overall status, Click Overall Status in the Test Pack menu. The page shows the overall status. 7.8 Acid Pickling Certificate Pickling is a metal surface treatment used to remove impurities such as stains, inorganic contaminants, rust or scale from ferrous metals, copper, precious metals and aluminum alloys. A solution called pickle liquor, which usually contains acid, is used to remove the surface impurities. The Acid Pickling Certificate tab in the Test Pack menu used to add the acid pickling certificate. To add the acid pickling certificate, do the following steps, Click Acid Pickling Certificate in the Test Pack menu. The View Acid Pickling Certificate page opens.                                         Figure 7.8: View Acid Pickling Certificate page 7.8.1 Add an Acid Pickling Certificate If you want to add an acid pickling certificate, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the View Acid Pickling Certificate page. The ACID PICKLING page opens. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Specification box, enter the specification. In the Pickling Material box, enter the name of the pickling material. In the System Material box, select the system material. In the Procedure No box, enter the procedure number. If you use the chloride content of water for the acid pickling testing, select Yes in the Chloride Content of Water option otherwise select No. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Before saving the added acid pickling certificate, you must add joints for the acid pickling certificate. Note: You can add multiple joints for one acid pickling certificate. The ACID PICKLING page shows a list of joints for the corresponding line and drawing numbers including the spool number. If you want to add joints for the acid pickling certificate, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) of the respective joints you want to add. The added joints will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Click Save. The acid pickling certificate will be added and listed in the View Acid Pickling Certificate page. 7.8.2 Edit an Acid Pickling Certificate If you want to edit any existing acid pickling certificate added in the View Acid Picking Certificate page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective acid pickling certificate. See Fig 10.8. The ACID PICKLING page opens with the details of the selected acid pickling certificate. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 7.8.3 Approve an Acid Pickling Certificate Once you have added the acid pickling certificate, the Request Status column in the View Acid Pickling Certificate page is appeared with(Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the acid pickling certificate, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the certificate. 7.8.4 Add RFI Data for an Acid Pickling Certificate If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added acid pickling certificate, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the View Acid Pickling Certificate See Fig 7.8. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data for the acid pickling certificate is added successfully. 7.8.5 View an RFI Report for Acid Pickling Certificate If you want to view an RFI report for the acid pickling certificate, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the View Acid Pickling Certificate page. See Fig 7.8. 7.8.6 View an Acid Pickling Report If you want to view the acid pickling report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View Acid Pickling Certificate page. See Fig 7.8. 7.8.7 Add Result for Acid Pickling Test After completing the acid pickling test for the added request, you can add the result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the View Acid Pickling Certificate page. The Result window opens a list of systems added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each system from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 7.8.8 Attach a File into an Acid Pickling Certificate If you want to attach a file with any acid pickling certificate listed in the View Acid Pickling Certificate page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 7.8.9 Export Acid Pickling Certificate List You can export a list of acid pickling certificates added in the View Acid Pickling Certificate page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.8.10 Filter an Acid Pickling Certificate If you want to filter any specific acid pickling certificate in the View Acid Pickling Certificate page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the View Acid Pickling Certificate page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 7.9 Valve Leak Test Record All valves are inspected and tested by the inspectors to ensure that they conform to the required valve leakage standards. Valve leakage is tested using either a hydrostatic test that is the test medium is a liquid, such as water or kerosene, or a pneumatic test that is the test medium is a gas, such as air or nitrogen. The Valve Leak Test Record tab in the Test Pack menu used to add the valve leak test report. To add the valve leak test report, do the following steps, Click Valve Leak Test Record in the Test Pack menu. The Valve Leak Test page opens.                                      Figure 7.9: Valve Leak Test page 7.9.1 Add a Valve Leak Test Report If you want to add a valve leak test report, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Valve Leak Test page. A new window opens to add the details of the valve leak test report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new valve leak test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the report number, you can change. In the Test Pack box, select a test pack from a drop-down list. In the Specification box, enter the specification. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the valve leak test report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the valve leak test report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the valve leak test report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the valve leak test report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the valve leak test report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the valve leak test report. Click Save. The valve leak test report will be added and listed in the Valve Leak Test page. 7.9.2 Edit a Valve Leak Test Report If you want to edit any existing valve leak test report added in the Valve Leak Test page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective valve leak test report. See Fig 7.9. The Valve Leak Test page opens with the details of the selected valve leak test report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 7.9.3 Add Result for Valve Leak Test After completing the valve leak test, you can add the test result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Valve Leak Test page. The Result window opens. Click  (Add button). In the Valve Type box, enter the type of the valve. In the Location box, enter the location of the valve. In the Size box, enter the size of the valve. In the Rating box, enter the rating of the valve. In the Tag Number box, enter the tag number of the valve. In the Serial No box, enter the serial number of the valve. In the Body Test (Hydro) box, enter the detail of hydrostatic valve body test. In the Seat Test (Hydro) box, enter the detail of the hydrostatic valve seat test. In the Body Test (Pneumatic) box, enter the detail of pneumatic valve body test. In the Seat Test (Pneumatic) box, enter the detail of the pneumatic valve seat test. In the Results box, select the results whether Accepted or Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 7.9.4 View a Valve Leak Test Report If you want to view the valve leak test report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Valve Leak Test page. See Fig 7.9. 7.9.5 Attach a File into a Valve Leak Test Report If you want to attach a file with any valve leak test report listed in the Valve Leak Test page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 7.9.6 Export Valve Leak Test Report List You can export a list of valve leak test reports added in the Valve Leak Test page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.10 ITR Register (Generic) The ITR Register (Generic) tab in the Test Pack menu used to add the ITR register. Click ITR Register (Generic) in the Test Pack menu. The ITR Register (Generic) page opens.                                      Figure 10.10: ITR Register (Generic) page 7.10.1 Add an ITR Register If you want to add an ITR Register, Click  (Add button) in the ITR Register (Generic) page. The ITR Register (Generic) page opens a new window to add the details of the ITR register. In the System box, enter the system name. In the Sub System box, enter the subsystem name. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number. In the Tag Type box, enter the tag type. In the Tag Description box, enter the tag description. The page shows three options such as ITR-A Check Sheet (Construction), ITR-B Check Sheet (Pre-Commissioning), ITR-C Check Sheet (Commissioning). You must add the following details for each option individually. In the ITR No box, enter the ITR number for each option. In the Prepared by MEB box, select the prepared date of ITR register for each option. In the Submitted to Client box, select the submitted date of ITR register for each option. In the Accepted to Client box, select the accepted date of ITR register for each option. Click Save. The ITR register will be saved and listed in the ITR Register (Generic) page. 7.10.2 Edit an ITR Register If you want to edit any existing ITR register in the ITR Register (Generic) page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective ITR register. See Fig 7.10. The ITR Register (Generic) page shows the details of the added ITR register. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 7.10.3 Delete an ITR Register If you want to delete any ITR register in the ITR Register (Generic) page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the ITR Register (Generic) page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete P&ID”. 7.10.4 View an ITR Register Report If you want to view the ITR register report, click (print icon) provided in the upper side of the ITR Register (Generic) page. See Fig 7.10. 7.10.5 Filter an ITR Register If you want to filter any ITR register in the ITR Register (Generic) page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the ITR Register (Generic) page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 7.10.6 Export an ITR Register You can export the ITR Register in the ITR Register (Generic) page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.10.7 Import Multiple ITR Register If you want to import multiple ITR register together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 7.10. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of ITR register. Enter the required ITR register details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the ITR register details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 7.10. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the ITR register details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the ITR register in the worksheet will be displayed in the ITR Register (Generic) page. 7.10 ITR Register Summary The ITR Register Summary tab in the Test Pack menu helps you to view the ITR register summary report. To view the report, Click ITR Register Summary in the Test Pack menu. The ITR Register (Generic) Summary Report page opens.                           Figure 10.11: ITR Register (Generic) Summary Report page 7.11.1 Print an ITR Register Summary Report If you want to print an ITR register summary report, use  and (print icons) provided in the ITR Register (Generic) Summary Report page. If you want to print the current page of the ITR register summary report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the ITR register summary report, click(print icon). 7.11.2 View an ITR Register Summary Report You can view the ITR register summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the ITR Register (Generic) Summary Report page. 7.12 Management of Change Management of change (MOC) is a systematic approach to organizational changes with the aim of ensuring the continued safety of the workforce throughout the process. These systematic processes ensure that the change is dealt with in a proactive fashion. The Management of Change tab in the Test Pack menu used to add the details of the management of change. Click Management of Change in the Test Pack menu. The Management of Change page opens.                                 Figure 7.12: Management of Change page 7.12.1 Add the Details of Management of Change If you want to add the details of the management of change, do the following steps, Click  (Add button) in the Management of Change page. The page shows a new window to add the details of the management of change. In the MOC Number box, enter the management of change number. In the Description box, enter the description for the management of change. In the Status box, enter the status of the management of change. In the Cleared by box, enter the name of a person who has cleared the management of change. In the Cleared Date box, select the cleared date of the management of change. In the Status Date box, select the status date of the management of change. In the Document File Name box, enter the document file name. Click Save. The management of change is added and listed in the Management of Change page. 7.12.2 Edit a Management of Change If you want to edit any existing management of change in the Management of Change page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective management of change. See Fig 7.12. The page opens with the details of the selected management of change. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 7.12.3 Attach a File into a Management of Change If you want to attach a file with any existing management of change listed in the Management of Change page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 7.12.4 Export Management of Change List You can export a list of management of change added in the Management of Change page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.12.5 Filter a Management of Change If you want to filter any specific management of change in the Management of Change page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Management of Change page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 7.12.6 Import Multiple Management of Change If you want to import multiple management of change together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 7.12. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of management of change. Enter the required management of change details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the management of change details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 7.12. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the management of change that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the management of change in the worksheet will be displayed in the Management of Change page. 7.13 Technical Queries Technical queries are used by companies and their contractors to ask each other questions or to gather more information. The Technical Queries tab in the Test Pack menu used to add the details of the technical query. Click Technical Queries in the Test Pack menu. The Technical Queries page opens.                                  Figure 7.13: Technical Queries page 7.13.1 Add the Details of Technical Query If you want to add the details of the technical query, do the following steps, Click (Add button) in the Technical Queries page. The page shows a new window to add the details of the technical query. In the Document Number box, enter the document number. In the Tag Number box, enter the tag number. In the System box, select a system. In the Unit box, enter the name of a unit. In the Area box, enter the name of an area. In the Department box, enter the department name. In the Priority box, enter the priority detail. In the Description box, enter the description of the technical query. In the Document File Name box, enter the document file name. In the Drawing box, enter the drawing number. In the Issued on box, enter the issued date of technical query. In the Status box, enter the status of the technical query. Click Save. The technical query is added and listed in the Technical Queries page. 7.13.2 Edit a Technical Query If you want to edit any existing technical query in the Technical Queries page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective technical query. See Fig 7.13. The page opens with the details of the selected technical query. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 7.13.3 Attach a File into a Technical Query If you want to attach a file with any existing technical query listed in the Technical Queries page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 7.13.4 Export Technical Queries List You can export a list of technical queries added in the Technical Queries page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.13.5 Filter a Technical Query If you want to filter any specific technical query in the Technical Queries page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Technical Queries page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 7.13.6 Import Multiple Technical Queries If you want to import multiple technical queries together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 7.13. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of technical query. Enter the required technical query details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the technical query details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 7.13. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the technical query that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the technical query in the worksheet will be displayed in the Technical Queries page. 7.14 Site Instructions A site instruction is a formal instruction sent from the head contractor that contains directives for contractors working on a piping project. The Site Instructions tab in the Test Pack menu used to add the details of the site instruction. Click Site Instructions in the Test Pack menu. The Site Instructions page opens. 7.14.1 Add the Details of Site Instructions If you want to add the details of the site instruction, do the following steps, Click (Add button) in the Site Instructions page. The page shows a new window to add the details of the site instruction. In the Item ID box, enter the item id number. In the Tag Number box, enter the tag number. In the System box, select a system. In the Unit box, enter the name of a unit. In the Area box, enter the name of an area. In the Department box, enter the department name. In the Priority box, enter the priority detail. In the Description box, enter the description of the technical query. In the Document File Name box, enter the document file name. In the Drawing box, enter the drawing number. In the Issued on box, enter the issued date of technical query. In the Status box, enter the status of the technical query. Click Save. The site instruction is added and listed in the Site Instructions page. 7.14.2 Edit a Site Instruction If you want to edit any existing site instruction in the Site Instructions page, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective site instruction. See Fig 7.14. The page opens with the details of the selected site instruction. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 7.14.3 Attach a File into a Site Instruction If you want to attach a file with any existing site instruction listed in the Site Instructions page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 7.14.4 Export Site Instructions List You can export a list of site instructions added in the Site Instructions page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 7.14.5 Filter a Site Instruction If you want to filter any specific site instruction in the Site Instructions page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Site Instructions page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 7.14.6 Import Multiple Site Instructions If you want to import multiple site instructions together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 7.14. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of site instruction. Enter the required site instruction details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the site instruction details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 7.14. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the site instruction that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the site instruction in the worksheet will be displayed in the Site Instructions page. 7.15 Test Pack Status Report Test Pack Status Report shows the status of test pack. If you want to view a test pack status report, do the following steps, Click Test Pack Status Report in the Piping menu. The Test Pack Status Report page opens.                                           Figure 7.15: Test Pack Status Report page In the ISO/Drawing Number box, select the ISO/drawing from a drop-down list. In the Spool Number box, select the spool number from a drop-down list. Click Go. The Test Pack Status Report page shows the test pack number, subcontractor name, system/service information, and test pack status. 7.15.1 Print a Test Pack Status Report If you want to print the test pack status report, use and   (print icons) provided in the Test Pack Status Report page. See Fig 7.15. If you want to print the current page of the test pack status report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the test pack status report, click (print icon). 7.15.2 Export a Test Pack Status Report You can export the test pack status report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Test Pack Status Report page. Punch Lists 8.0 Punch List A punch list is a list of items or tasks that need to be done before a piping project is completed. The Punch Lists menu in the home page of the cuteQM app helps to create and view the punch lists in Piping project. 8.1 Create a New Punch List If you want to create a punch list, do the following steps, Click Create New Punch List in the Punch lists menu. The Create Punch page opens.                                          Figure 8.1: Create Punch page In the Modules box, select a module from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub-Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. In the ITR No box, enter the ITR number. In the Drawing No box, enter the drawing number. In the Test Pack box, select a test pack from a drop-down list. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number. In the Reference Types box, select the reference type from the given options. In the Select Project box, select a project from a drop-down list. In the Category box, select any category from the given categories such as A, B, and C. A - Item to be cleared before hydrostatic test. B - Item to be cleared after hydrostatic test. C - Item which can be cleared after hydrostatic test but before final acceptance of the whole plant. In the Type box, select the type of punch such as whether internal or external. In the Item box, enter the item details. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. In the Description/ Punch box, enter the description for the punch list. In the Punch Raised From box, select the detail such as from where the punch has been raised. In the Date Raised box, select the date when the punch has been raised. In the Punch Raised By box, enter the name of a person who has raised the punch. In the Responsible Dept box, enter the department name, which is responsible for the punch. In the Responsible Person box, enter the name of a person who is responsible for the punch. In the Expected Clearance box, select the expected date of clearing the punch list. Click Save. The punch list is successfully added. 8.1.1 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the punch list, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos box. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 8.2 View Punch Lists The View Punch Lists tab helps you to view and edit the punch list, which is added by using the Create New Punch List tab. Click View Punch Lists in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List page opens with added punch lists.                                                        Figure 8.2: Punch List page Note: If you want to verify the added punch list item, click the checkbox provided in the Verify column.                If you want to clear the added punch list item, click the checkbox provided in the Clear column. 8.2.1 View a Punch List Report If you want to view a punch list report, click (Print button) provided in the upper side of the Punch List page. See Fig 11.2. 8.2.2 View a Punch List Register If you want to view a punch list register, click (Punch List Register button) provided in the upper side of the Punch List page. See Fig 8.2. 8.2.3 View a Punch List Summary If you want to view a punch list summary, click  (Punch List Summary button) provided in the upper side of the Punch List page. See Fig 8.2. 8.2.4 Attach a File into a Punch List If you want to attach any file with any punch list listed in the Punch List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 8.2.5 Edit a Punch List If you want to edit any existing punch list in the Punch List page, click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective punch list. See Fig 8.2. Edit the details in the respective box you want. 8.2.6 Export Punch Lists You can export a list of punch lists added in the Punch List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export P&ID list”. 8.2.7 Filter a Punch List If you want to filter any punch list in the Punch List page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Punch List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter P&ID”. 8.3 Punch List Detail Report The Punch List Detail Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a detailed report of the punch lists. To view the punch list detail report, Click Punch List Detail Report in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List Detail Report page opens.                                              Figure 11.3: Punch List Detail Report page In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. In the ITR No box, enter the ITR number. In the Drawing box, enter the drawing number. In the Category box, select a category from a list. In the Status box, select a status from a drop-down list. In the Punch Raised From box, select a person who has raised the punch list. In the Responsible Party box, select a responsible party from a drop-down list. In the Test Pack box, select a test pack from a drop-down list. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number. In the Raised Date box, select a raised date of the punch list. The punch list report opens based on the selected data. 8.3.1 Print a Punch List Detail Report If you want to print the punch list detail report, use  and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Detail Report page. If you want to print the current page of the punch list detail report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the punch list detail report, click (print icon). 8.3.2 View a Punch List Detail Report You can view the punch list detail report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list detail report page. 8.4 Punch List System Report The Punch List System Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list system report. To view the punch list system report, Click Punch List System Report in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List System Report page opens.                                        Figure 8.4: Punch List System Report page In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. The punch list system report opens based on the selected data. 8.4.1 Print a Punch List System Report If you want to print the punch list system report, use and   (print icons) provided in the Punch List system Report page. If you want to print the current page of the punch list system report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the punch list system report, click  (print icon). 8.4.2 View a Punch List System Report You can view the punch list system report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list system report page. 8.5 Punch List Sub System Report The Punch List Sub System Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list sub system report. To view the punch list sub system report, Click Punch List Sub System Report in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List Sub System Report page opens.                                        Figure 8.5: Punch List Sub System Report page In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. The punch list sub system report opens based on the selected data. 8.5.1 Print a Punch List Sub System Report If you want to print the punch list sub system report, use  and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Sub System Report page. If you want to print the current page of the punch list sub system report, click   (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the punch list sub system report, click (print icon). 8.5.2 View a Punch List Sub System Report You can view the punch list sub system report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list sub system report page. 8.6 Punch List Category Report The Punch List Category Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list category report. To view the punch list category report, Click Punch List Category Report in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List Category Report page opens.                                      Figure 8.6: Punch List Category Report page In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. The punch list category report opens based on the selected data. 8.6.1 Print a Punch List Category Report If you want to print the punch list category report, use  and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Category Report page. If you want to print the current page of the punch list category report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the punch list category report, click (print icon). 8.6.2 View a Punch List Category Report You can view the punch list category report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list category report page. Documentation 9.0 Documentation The Documentation menu used to combine the number of files, which are attached to every menu of this cuteQM app. The combined files will be shown as a pdf file. This menu also used to attach a new file to a module that is not provided with an attachment option to attach any file. 9.1 Document Category The Document Category tab in the Documentation menu used to attach a file to any module which has no attachment option to attach the file. Before attaching a file for any module, you must add the relevant category name of the module. 9.1.1 Add a Document Category Click Document Category in the Documentation menu. The Document Category page opens.                                            Figure 9.1: Document Category page Click (ADD button) in the Document Category page. A new window opens to add a document category. In the Category Name box, enter the relevant category name for the module for which you want to attach a file. In the Description box, enter the description for the added category. Click Save. (OR) If you want to import any document category from another vessel, Click Import from Another Vessel. The Import from Another Vessel window opens. In the Equipment box, select an equipment from a drop-down list. Click Save. The added category name will be listed in the Document Category page. Once you have added the document category, you can attach any file to the added category. 9.1.2 Attach a File into an Added Category If you want to attach any file with the added category listed in the Document Category page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into P&ID”. 9.1.3 Edit a Category If you want to edit any existing category in the Document Category page, click (Edit icon) for the respective category, and then edit the details in the respective box. 9.1.4 Delete a category If you want to delete any specific added category from the list, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Document Category page, See Fig 9.1. 9.2 Hierarchical Report The Hierarchical Report tab in the Documentation menu helps you to view a hierarchical report of a project. If you want to view the hierarchical report, Click Hierarchical Report in the Documentation menu. The hierarchical report page opens. In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view he hierarchical report. Select a category that is whether System, Sub-System, or Tag No. Click Search. The page shows the hierarchical report for the selected project and category. Note: If you want to export the hierarchical report as excel file, click Export to Excel. 9.3 Manufacture Data Report (MDR) Settings The MDR Settings tab in the Documentation menu helps you to do page setup for the pdf file which will be shown after combining the attached files. Click the MDR Settings tab. The MDR Settings page opens.                                               Figure 9.3: MDR Settings page In the Page Numbering box, select the page numbering option that is whether Section wise or Continuous. In the Page Number (Digits) box, select the page number displaying format from a drop-down list. If you want to append the section number with the page number, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Append Section number with Page number box. In the Page Number Template box, select the page number template from a drop-down list. If you want to add the starting page numbers from TOC, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Page Number Starting From TOC? box. If you want to add alphabet page numbers, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Alphabet Page number? box. In the Logo box, attach your logo by using  (Browse button). Click Save. 9.4 One Click Documentation The One Click Documentation tab used to combine the attached file of the various module. Click One Click Documentation in the Documentation menu. The One Click Documentation page opens.                  Figure 9.4: One Click Documentation page The One Click Documentation page shows a list of reports name of each module including the attachment file counts. This page also shows the list of document categories including their attachments, which are added using the Document Category tab. Note: If you want to edit any existing category in the Document Category page, click  (Edit icon) for the respective category, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click the check box of the respective reports which you want to combine. Click Generate MDR. The system combines the selected files and shows as the pdf file in the left side of the One Click Documentation page, See Fig 9.4. Tip: You can view the pdf file by clicking the respective pdf file. The file will be opened including the data in the combined files. 9.5 Document Upload The Document Upload tab in the Documentation menu used to upload documents for various process. Click Document Upload in the Documentation menu. The Upload Documents page opens.                                                Figure 9.5: Upload Documents page Select a file which you want to upload by click Select a file for upload. The selected file will be added in the File Upload window. Structural User Management 1.1 Login To login into the cuteQM app, Open your web browser. Type the URL provided by your administrator, in the address bar of your web browser. The login page appears. In the login page, enter your user name and password in the respective boxes. Note: If you forgot your password, click “I can’t access my account”. You will be redirected into a new web page. Enter your username to receive your password. In the Module section, select Structural. Click Login. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM app, the home page of the cuteQM app opens.                                       Figure 1.1 Home page of cuteQM app Note: The user name you have entered, the project you have been assigned, and the module you have selected are displayed in the upper right corner of the home page. 1.2 Change Password If you want to change your current password, Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. Click the Change Password option. The Change Password page opens. Note: Before changing your password read the conditions specified in the Change Password page. In the Password box, enter your current password. In the New Password box, enter your new password. In the Confirm New Password box, enter your new password again. Click Change Password. Your password will be successfully changed. 1.3 Log Out If you want to log out from the app, Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. Click Log out. Your current session ends now. The home page appears.Home 2.0 Home The home menu in the cuteQM app used to view a dashboard and a switch board of a project. This menu helps you to change project and module. 2.1 Dashboard The Dashboard tab in the Home menu displays graphs, charts, and tables, which helps you to monitor and track the summary reports of various inspection and welding progress in the structural module. Note: The dashboard displayed on the app is linked to a database that allows the report to be constantly updated. 2.2 Switch Board The Switch Board tab in the Home menu show the consolidated view of various tabs listed in multiple menus in the menu bar. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM app, you can view the Home Page. In the Home Page, the menu bar appears with multiple menus, otherwise you can select the Switch Board tab to view all the menus. To select the Switch Board tab, Navigate to Home. Click Switch Board. The Switch Board tab includes multiple options such as Project Data, Materials, Inspection, Structural, MCR, Punch List, and Documentation. 2.3 Switch Project The Switch Project tab in the Home menu helps you to add a new project/module and switch between various projects and modules added in the app. 2.3.1 Switch Between Various Projects and Modules Navigate to the Home menu. Click Switch Project. The switch project window opens with a list of projects and modules that are already added in the web.                                          Figure 2.1: Switch project window If you want to switch between various projects and modules, Select a project you want from multiple projects listed in the left side of the window. Once you have selected the project, a list of modules related to the project is displayed. Select a module you want from multiple modules listed in the right side of the window. Click Select. 2.3.2 Add a New Project If you want to add a new project, do the following If you want to add a new project, you must have been assigned as an administrator or a power user otherwise you cannot add any new project. Click New Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.1. The add project/module page opens with two options such as Projects and Skid/ Module.                                                    Figure 2.2: Add project/module page Click Projects. The Projects page opens.                                                             Figure 5.3: Projects page Click (ADD button) in the upper side of the Projects page. A new window opens to add a new project. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Project Number box, enter the project number. In the Project Name box, enter a project name. In the End User box, select an end user from a drop-down list. In the Client box, select a client from a drop-down list. In the AI/ Third Party box, select an AI or a third party from a drop-down list. Note: If you want to add multiple third parties, add third parties by clicking (Add TP button) in the Third party column of the Projects page. In the Purchase Order (PO) Number box, enter the PO number. In the Manufacturer Job Code box, enter the manufacturer job code number. In the Client Project box, enter the client project code. In the Client Job Code box, enter the client job code. In the Owner Project box, enter the owner project code. In the Owner Job Code box, enter the owner job code. In the Delivery Date box, choose the delivery date. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) Weld Length Limit box, enter the length limit of NDE welding. If you need an external qualified welder, click the check box provided with the External Qualified Welder In the Weld Repair Allowance box, enter the amount for weld repair. Click Save. A new project is added successfully. 2.3.3 Edit Any project If you want to edit any existing project details from the list of projects in the Projects page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective project. See Fig 2.3. A new window opens to edit the project. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box in the Projects page. Click Save. 2.3.4 Delete Any project If you want to delete any specific project from the list of projects, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Projects page, See Fig 2.3. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding project. You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete this row?”. Click OK. 2.3.5 Export Projects List You can export a list of projects in the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the projects list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button). See Fig 2.3. The project list will be downloaded in the pdf format. If you want to export the projects list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The project list will be downloaded in the excel format. 2.3.6 Add a New Module If you want to add a new module, do the following If you want to add a new module, you must have been assigned as an administrator or a power user otherwise you cannot add any new module. Click New Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.1. The add project/module page opens with two options such as Projects and Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.2. Click Skid/Module. The Skid/Module page opens.                                                      Figure 2.4: Skid/Module page Click  (ADD button) in the upper side of the Skid/Module page. The skid/module box opens to add a new module. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Master Project Name box, enter the master project name from a drop-down list. In the Skid/Module box, enter a module name. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added module. In the Report Prefix box, the report prefix will be entered automatically. If you want change, you can edit the report prefix. In the Piping Class box, enter the piping class name. In the Delivery Date box, choose the delivery date. In the Project Type box, select the type of project from a drop-down list. If you want to show this module in the cuteQMmobile app, click the check box provided with the Show in Apps option. In the Shift Start Time (24hr) box, enter the shift starting time. In the Shift End Time (24hr) box, enter the shift ending time. In the Break Time (mins) box, enter the break time duration. If you want to enable the repair project flow option, select the check box provided with the Repair Project Flow column. If you want to enable the welder qualification restriction option, select the check box provided with the Welder Qualification Restriction column. Click Save. A new module is added successfully. 2.3.7 Add a Surveyor, a Client or Other Role for Any Module If you want to add a surveyor, a client or other role for any added module, Click a respective (Add icon) provided in the Add Surveyor/Client column. The Add Surveyor/Client/Others window opens. Click  (ADD button). A new window opens to enter the name and type of a role. In the Name box, enter the name of the person to whom you want to add a role. In the Type box, select the type of role from a drop-down list. Click Save. 2.3.7 Edit Any Module If you want to edit any existing module details from the list of modules in the Skid/Module page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective module. See Fig 2.4. A new window opens to edit the module. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box in the Skid/Module page. Click Save. 2.3.8 Delete Any Module If you want to delete any specific module from the list of modules, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Skid/Module page, See Fig 2.4. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding module. You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete?”. Click OK. 2.3.9 Export Modules List You can export a list of modules added in the Skid/Module page in the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the modules list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button). See Fig 2.4. The modules list will be downloaded in the pdf format. If you want to export the modules list in the excel format, click (Excel button). The modules list will be downloaded in the excel format. 2.3.10 Close a Project If you want to close any project from the app, do the following Make sure that once you have closed any project, you cannot even open or access the closed project. Click Close Project in the Close Project column for the corresponding module and project type. See Fig 2.4. You receive a notification message “Are you sure want to close this project? You will not be able to access/reopen this project again”. Click OK to close the project. Project Data 3.0 Project Data The Project Data menu helps you to add the details of master data and personnel data when you started to do a project.  This menu explains all the basic works of structural master drawing, weld map drawing, cutting plan drawing and import joints. The Project Data menu appears with two options such as Masters and Personnels. The Masters option helps you to add master data for the structural project. The Personnels option helps you to add the details of persons for example welders and inspectors, who are all involved in the structural project. 3.1 Area The Area tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of area. If you want to add any area, do the following, Click Area in the Project Data menu. The Area page opens.                                                          Figure 3.1: Area page 3.1.1 Add an Area If you want to add an area, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Area page. See Fig 3.1. A new window opens to add an area. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Area box, enter the name of an area. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added area. In the Area No box, enter the area number. Click Save. The area is successfully added. 3.1.2 Edit Any Area If you want to edit any existing area in the Area page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective area. See Fig 3.1. A new window opens to edit the area. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.1.3 Delete Any Area If you want to delete any specific area from the list of areas, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Area page, See Fig 3.1. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete?”. Click OK. 3.1.4 Export Areas List You can export a list of areas added in the Area page in the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the areas list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button). The list will be downloaded in the pdf format. If you want to export the areas list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The list will be downloaded in the excel format. 3.1.5 Filter Any Area If you want to filter any area from the list of areas in the Area page, do the following, Click  (FILTER button) located on the Area page. See Fig 5.1. Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Area, Abbreviation, and Area No columns. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter any area. 3.1.6 Import Multiple Areas If you want to import multiple areas together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Area page. See Fig 3.1. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of multiple areas. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the area details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.1. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the areas that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the areas in the worksheet will be displayed in the Area page. 3.2 Client Master Drawings Master drawing is a layout drawing provided to explain about the material such as plate and beam, and the material’s parameters used in the structural project. The Client Master Drawings tab helps you to add the client master drawing details. If you want to add any client master drawing details, do the following, Click Client Master Drawings in the Project Data menu. The Client Master Drawings page opens.                                             Figure 3.2 Client Master Drawings page 3.2.1 Add a Client Master Drawing If you want to add a client master drawing, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Client Master Drawings page. See Fig 3.2. A new window opens to add a client master drawing. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Client Master Drawing No box, enter the client master drawing number. In the Revision box, enter the revision number. In the Level box, enter the level number of the client master drawing. If you want to enable the full traceability option, click the check box provided with the Full Traceability? column. In the Sub System box, select the system and sub system numbers from a drop-down list. In the Issued Date box, select the issued date of the client master drawing. In the Issued To box, select the purpose of issuing the client mater drawing. In the Sheet Number box, enter the sheet number of the client master drawing. Note: The sheet number is nothing but a page number of the master drawing sheet. If the master drawing is provided in single sheet, the Sheet No should be 1 of 1. If the drawing is stretched to two pages, then the Sheet No should be 1 of 2 and 2 of 2. In the Remarks/Description box, enter your remarks or description if any. Click Save. The client master drawing is successfully added. 3.2.2 Attach a File into a Client Master Drawing If you want to attach any file with any client master drawing listed in the Client Master Drawings page, Click  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective client master drawing in the Client Master Drawings page. The File Upload (Client Master Drawings) page opens. Note: Before uploading any file, read the instructions given in the File Upload (Client Master Drawings) page. Click  (Browse button) to select a file to be uploaded. Select any file which you want to upload, from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to attach the file. The uploaded file will be displayed in the File Upload table. 3.2.3 Edit Any Client Master Drawing If you want to edit any existing client master drawing in the Client Master Drawings page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective client master drawing. See Fig 3.2. A new window opens to edit the client master drawing. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.2.4 Delete Any Client Master Drawing If you want to delete any specific client master drawing from the list of client master drawings, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Client Master Drawings page, See Fig 6.2. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.2.5 Export Client Master Drawings List You can export a list of client master drawings added in the Client Master Drawings page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.2.6 Filter Any Client Master Drawing If you want to filter any client master drawing from the list of client master drawings in the Client Master Drawings page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.2.7 Import Multiple Client Master Drawings If you want to import multiple client master drawings together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Client Master Drawings See Fig 3.2. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of client master drawings. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the client master drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.2. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the client master drawings that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the client master drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the Client Master Drawings page. 3.3 Master Drawings The Master Drawings tab helps you to add the master drawing details. If you want to add any master drawing details, do the following, Click Master Drawings in the Project Data menu. The Master Drawings page opens.                                                   Figure 3.3 Master Drawings page 3.3.1 Add a Master Drawing If you want to add a master drawing, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Master Drawings page. See Fig 3.3. A new window opens to add a master drawing. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Master Drawing No box, enter the master drawing number. In the Client Master Drawing box, select the client master drawing from a drop-down list. In the Revision box, enter the revision number. In the Level box, enter the level number of the master drawing. In the Area box, select an area from a drop-down list. If you want to enable the full traceability option, click the check box provided with the Full Traceability? column. In the Sheet Number box, enter the sheet number of the master drawing. Note: The sheet number is nothing but a page number of the master drawing sheet. If the master drawing is provided in single sheet, the Sheet No should be 1 of 1. If the drawing is stretched to two pages, then the Sheet No should be 1 of 2 and 2 of 2. In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date of the master drawing. In the Remarks/Description box, enter your remarks or description if any. In the Issued To box, select the purpose of issuing the master drawing, from a drop-down list. Click Save. The master drawing is successfully added. 3.3.2 Attach a File into a Master Drawing If you want to attach any file with any master drawing listed in the Master Drawings page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 3.3.3 Edit Any Master Drawing If you want to edit any existing master drawing in the Master Drawings page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective master drawing. See Fig 3.3. A new window opens to edit the master drawing. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.3.4 Delete Any Master Drawing If you want to delete any specific master drawing from the list of master drawings, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Master Drawings page, See Fig 3.3. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding master drawing. You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete?”. Click OK. Note: If you receive a notification message “Delete failed! Please delete dependency records.”, you must delete the corresponding weld map drawing for the selected master drawing. To delete the corresponding weld map drawing, Navigate to the Weld Map Drawings tab. Find out the weld map drawing for the respective master drawing. Tip: one master drawing has either a single or multiple weld map drawing. Delete the corresponding weld map drawings. Navigate to the Master Drawing tab, and then repeat the steps 1 and 2 to delete the respective master drawing. 3.3.5 Export Master Drawings List You can export a list of master drawings added in the Master Drawings page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.3.6 Filter Any Master Drawing If you want to filter any master drawing from the list of master drawings in the Master Drawings page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.3.7 Import Multiple Master Drawings You can import multiple master drawing details together by using a pre-defined excel template given in the application. If you want to import multiple master drawings together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Master Drawings page. See Fig 3.3. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of master drawings. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the master drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.3. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the master drawings that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the master drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the Master Drawings page. 3.4 Weld Map Drawings Weld map drawing is an isometric drawing that assists in identifying weld joints in the structural project. This drawing also shows areas that will be used for NDT once welding is completed. By using the weld map drawing, the welding cycle and lead times will be reduced accordingly. If you want to add any weld map drawing details, do the following, Click Weld Map Drawings in the Project Data menu. The Weld Map Drawings page opens.                                                   Figure 3.4 Weld Map Drawings page 3.4.1 Add a Weld Map Drawing If you want to add a weld map drawing, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Weld Map Drawings page. See Fig 3.4. A new window opens to add a weld map drawing. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Master Drawing No box, select a master drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number. In the Revision box, enter the revision number. In the Drawing Prefix box, enter the drawing prefix. In the Radiographic Testing (RT) Requirement (%) box, enter the required percentage of RT. In the Ultrasonic Testing (UT) Requirement (%)box, enter the required percentage of UT. In the Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) Requirement (%) box, enter the required percentage of MT. In the Dye penetrant inspection(PT) Requirement (%) box, enter the required percentage of PT. The RT Requirement (%), UT Requirement (%), MT Requirement (%) and PT Requirement (%) should be filled with valid numerical numbers. The joint testing will be performed based on the value given by you for example, if you enter 100 % of requirement, which means 100 % of the joints will be tested. If you enter 0 %, none of joints will be tested. If you want to do the magnetic particle inspection after load test, click the check box provided with the Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI) After Load Test? If you want to do PT after test, click the check box provided with the PT After Test? option. In the code option, select any one from American Welding Society (AWS) or American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) or BOTH. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date of the weld map drawing. In the Issued To box, select the purpose of issuing the weld map drawing, from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the added weld map drawing. Click Save. The weld map drawing is successfully added. 3.4.2 Attach a File into a Weld Map Drawing If you want to attach any file with any weld map drawing listed in the Weld Map Drawings page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 3.4.3 Edit Any Weld Map Drawing If you want to edit any existing weld map drawing in the Weld Map Drawings page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld map drawing. See Fig 6.4. A new window opens to edit the weld map drawing. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.4.4 Delete Any Weld Map Drawing If you want to delete any specific weld map drawing from the list of weld map drawings, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Weld Map Drawings page, See Fig 6.4. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.4.5 Export Weld Map Drawings List You can export a list of weld map drawings added in the Weld Map Drawings page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.4.6 Filter Any Weld Map Drawing If you want to filter any weld map drawing from the list of weld map drawings in the Weld Map Drawings page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.4.7 Import Multiple Weld Map Drawings If you want to import multiple weld map drawings together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Weld Map Drawings page. See Fig 3.4. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of weld map drawings. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the weld map drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.4. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the weld map drawings that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the weld map drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the Weld Map Drawings page. 3.5 Sheet Number The Sheet No tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the sheet number for a weld map drawing. The sheet number is nothing but a page number of the weld map drawing. If the weld map drawing is provided in single sheet, the Sheet No should be 1 of 1. If the drawing is stretched to two pages, then the Sheet No should be 1 of 2 and 2 of 2. If you want to add the sheet number, do the following, Click Sheet No in the Project Data menu. The Sheet No page opens.                                                          Figure 3.5 Sheet No page 3.5.1 Add a Sheet Number If you want to add a sheet number, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Sheet No page. See Fig 3.5. A new window opens to add the sheet number for a weld map drawing. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, select the weld map drawing number from a drop-down list. Note: If you want to add the sheet number for any new weld map drawings. You must add the respective weld map drawing details by using the Weld Map Drawings tab. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number of the weld map drawing. Click Save. The sheet number for the corresponding weld map drawing is successfully added. 3.5.2 Edit Any Sheet Number If you want to edit any existing sheet number for the weld map drawing number in the Sheet No page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld map drawing number. See Fig 3.5. A new window opens to edit the sheet number for the weld map drawing number. Click a box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.5.3 Delete Any Sheet Number If you want to delete any specific sheet number of the weld map drawing number from the list of sheet numbers, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Sheet No page, See Fig 6.5. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.5.4 Export Sheet Number List You can export a list of sheet numbers of the weld map drawing numbers added in the Sheet No page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.5.5 Filter Any Sheet Number If you want to filter any sheet number from the list of sheet numbers in the Sheet No page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic ,”Filter Any Area”. 3.5.6 Import Multiple Sheet Numbers If you want to import multiple sheet numbers together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Sheet No page. See Fig 3.5. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of weld map drawing numbers including their sheet numbers. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the sheet number details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.5. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the sheet numbers that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the sheet numbers in the worksheet will be displayed in the Sheet No page. 3.6 Joints In structural project, joints are the points where two or more pieces of materials for example pipes, are joined by welding. The Joints tab in the Project Data helps you add the joint details including joint number, welding type, and piece mark number. If you want to add any joint details, do the following, Click Joints in the Project Data menu. The Joints page opens.                                                       Figure 3.6 Joints page 3.6.1 Add a Joint If you want to add a joint, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Joints page. See Fig 3.6. A new window opens to add a joint. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number. In the Sheet Number box, select a sheet number from a drop-down list. In the Joint Number box, select the joint number from a drop-down list. Note: If you want to enter the range for the joint number, click  and then enter the ranges in the From and To boxes, respectively. In the Weld Type box, select a weld type from a drop-down list. In the Thickness Material 1 box, enter the thickness of the first material. In the Thickness Material 2 box, enter the thickness of the second material. In the Weld Length box, enter the length of welding. In the Dia (INCH) box, enter the diameter of the joint. In the Size box, enter the size of the welding. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness of the welding. In the Category box, select the category from a drop-down list. In the Assembly Mark box, enter the assembly mark details. Select the NDT requirement from the following options such as RT Required, PT Required, MT Required, and UT Required. Click Save. The joint is successfully added. 3.6.2 Assign Piece Mark Number If you want to assign the piece mark number for any joint number. Click (Assign Piece Mark button) in the Joints page. The Joint Piece Mark window opens. In the Joint No box, select the joint number from a drop-down list. Once you have selected the joint number, the piece mark numbers related with the selected joint number appear. If you want to assign a new piece mark number for the selected joint number, in the Piece Mark No box, click and then select the piece mark number from a drop-down list. A new piece mark number will be listed along with the existing piece mark numbers. Select the new piece mark number. Once you have selected the new piece mark number, the selected piece mark number is assigned to the respective joint number. Note: If you want to delete any piece mark number, select the respective piece mark and click  (Delete Piece Mark button). Once you have deleted the piece mark number, the joints related with this piece mark number will also be deleted. 3.6.3 Edit Any Joint If you want to edit any existing joint in the Joints page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective joint. See Fig 3.6. A new window opens to edit the joint. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.6.4 Delete Any Joint If you want to delete any specific joint from the list of joints, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Joins page, See Fig 6.6. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.6.5 Export Joints List You can export a list of joints added in the Joints page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.6.6 Filter Any Joint If you want to filter any joint from the list of joints in the Joints page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.6.7 Import Multiple Joints You can import multiple joint details together by using a pre-defined excel template given in the application. If you want to import multiple joints together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Joints page. See Fig 3.6. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of joints. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the joint details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.6. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the joints that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the joints included in the worksheet will be displayed in the Joints page. 3.7 Cutting Plan Drawings Cutting plan drawing is provided for each master drawing. Usually the Cutting Plan Drawing is prepared in AutoCAD. The drawing portion of the cutting plan drawing will be screen captured. A cutting plan drawing report is generated for sending to the clients. If you want to add any cutting plan drawing details, do the following, Click Cutting Plan Drawings in the Project Data menu. The Cutting Plan Drawings page opens.                                          Figure 3.7 Cutting Plan Drawings page 3.7.1 Add a Cutting Plan Drawing If you want to add a cutting plan drawing, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Cutting Plan Drawings page. See Fig 3.7. A new window opens to add a cutting plan drawing. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Master Drawing No box, select a master drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Drawing Prefix box, enter the drawing prefix. In the Cutting Plan Drawing No box, enter a cutting plan drawing number. In the Revision box, enter the revision number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date of the cutting plan drawing. In the Issued To box, select the purpose of issuing the cutting plan drawing, from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the added cutting plan drawing. In the (Computer Numerical Control) CNC Program No box, enter the CNC program number. In the Assembly Mark box, enter the assembly mark. Click Save. The cutting plan drawing is successfully added. 3.7.2 Attach a File into a Cutting Plan Drawing If you want to attach any file with any cutting plan drawing listed in the Cutting Plan Drawings page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 3.7.3 Edit Any Cutting Plan Drawing If you want to edit any existing cutting plan drawing in the Cutting Plan Drawings page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective cutting plan drawing. See Fig 3.7. A new window opens to edit the cutting plan drawing. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.7.4 Delete Any Cutting Plan Drawing If you want to delete any specific cutting plan drawing from the list of cutting plan drawings, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Cutting Plan Drawings page, See Fig 6.7. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.7.5 Export Cutting Plan Drawings List You can export a list of cutting plan drawings added in the Cutting Plan Drawings page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.7.6 Filter Any Cutting Plan Drawing If you want to filter any cutting plan drawing from the list of cutting plan drawings in the Cutting Plan Drawings page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.7.7 Import Multiple Cutting Plan Drawings If you want to import multiple cutting plan drawings together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Cutting Plan Drawings See Fig 3.7. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of cutting plan drawings. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the weld map drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.7. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the cutting plan drawings that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the cutting plan drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the Cutting Plan Drawings page. 3.8 Piece Mark number The materials used in the Structural Project are cut into multiple pieces by using the cutting plan drawings, where each piece is provided with respective unique number also known as piece mark number. The piece mark number is manually added by a user, and mapped later with weld joints. The Piece Mark Number tab in the Project Data helps you add the piece mark number details including cutting plan drawing number. If you want to add any piece mark number details, do the following, Click Piece Mark Number in the Project Data menu. The Piece Mark Number page opens.                                               Figure 3.8 Piece Mark Number page The Master Drawing No box and Cutting Plan Drawing No boxes provided in the upper right-side of the Piece Mark Number page including a drop-down arrow to easily sort the specific master drawing number and cutting plan drawing number. See Fig 3.8. 3.8.1 Add a Piece Mark Number If you want to add a piece mark number, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Piece Mark Number page. See Fig 3.8. A new window opens to add a piece mark number. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Cutting Plan Drawing No box, select a cutting plan drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Piece Mark No box, enter a piece mark number from a drop-down list. In the Material Description box, select the material description from a drop-down list. In the Material Specification box, select the material specification from a drop-down list. In the Size/Thickness/Diameter box, enter the size/thickness/diameter of the material. In the Width box, enter the width of the material. In the Length box, enter the length of welding. In the Material Grade 1 box, enter the grade 1 material details. Click Save. The piece mark number is successfully added. 3.8.2 Edit Any Piece Mark Number If you want to edit any existing piece mark number in the Piece Mark Number page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective piece mark number. See Fig 3.8. A new window opens to edit the piece mark number. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.8.3 Delete Any Piece Mark Number If you want to delete any specific piece mark number from the list of piece mark numbers, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Piece Mark Number page, See Fig 6.8. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.8.4 Export Piece Mark Numbers List You can export a list of piece mark numbers added in the Piece Mark Number page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.8.5 Filter Any Piece Mark Number If you want to filter any piece mark number from the list of piece mark numbers in the Piece Mark Number page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.8.6 Import Multiple Piece Mark Numbers You can import multiple piece mark numbers together by using a pre-defined template given in the application. If you want to import multiple piece mark numbers together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Piece Mark Number See Fig 3.8. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of piece mark numbers. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the piece mark number details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.8. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the piece mark numbers that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the piece mark numbers included in the worksheet will be displayed in the Piece Mark Number page. 3.9 Import Joints The Import Joints tab helps you to upload various data for different fields included in the Project Data menu instead of uploading data for each field individually.  If you want to import data for different fields, do the following, Click the Import Joints tab in the Project Data menu. The Excel Import page opens. Download a template by clicking “Click here to Download Sample Template” to enter the details of data. An excel worksheet will be downloaded. Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet based on the columns listed in the Required Columns to Import field. Click (Choose File button). Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded” Click (Get Columns button). The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field. The system automatically maps the Required Columns to Import field and the Excel Column field and displays in the Mapped Columns field. If you want to map any columns or to u map any mapped columns, select the respective columns and then click (Map button) and (UnMap button) accordingly. Once you have completed the mapping and un mapping of columns, in the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet. Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet. Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns. Click (Populate Value button). Click (Process button). Once you have clicked the Process button, the system processes the columns and displays in the Excel Import page. Click  (Import button) to import the data added in the excel worksheet. 3.10 Joints Bulk Edit The Joints Bulk Edit tab in the Structural menu used to hide the specific joints, which are added using the Joints tab. Once the joints have been hidden, the joints will not be available while adding any fit-up request. If you want to hide any joints, do the following, Click the Joints Bulk Edit tab. The Joints Bulk Update page opens with a list of added joints. The Joints Bulk Update page shows the weld map drawing number, sheet number, and piece mark number for the corresponding joint number. If you want to hide any joints, select the checkbox of the respective joints, in the Hide Joint column of the Joints Bulk Update page. Click Save Changes. The selected joints will be hidden. 3.11 Assign Unique/ WPS No The Assign Unique/WPS No tab in the Project Data menu allows you to assign the unique and WPS numbers for the specific joint number, piece mark number, and weld map drawing number. 3.11.1 Assign Unique No If you want to assign a unique number for any joint number, piece mark number, and weld map drawing number, do the following, Click the Assign Unique/WPS No tab in the Project Data menu. The Assign Unique/WPS No page opens including a list of joint numbers, piece mark numbers, and weld map drawing numbers. Click the Assign Unique No option. A list of unique numbers appears below the Assign Unique No option. If you want to assign any unique number, select the respective unique number, and then select the respective check boxes of the joint numbers, piece mark numbers, and weld map drawing numbers provided in the Assign? Click Save. 3.11.2 Assign WPS No If you want to assign a WPS number for any joint number, piece mark number, and weld map drawing number, do the following, Click the Assign WPS No option in the Assign Unique No/WPS No page. A list of unique numbers appears below the Assign WPS No option. If you want to assign any WPS number, select the respective WPS number, and then select the respective check boxes of the joint numbers, piece mark numbers, and weld map drawing numbers provided in the Assign? column. Click Save. 3.12 Clone Project The Clone Project tab in the Project Data menu helps you to clone the items of any one project to another project. Once you have completed the project cloning, the items are copied into the selected project without need to uploading the items again. If you want to clone any project, do the following, Click the Clone Project tab in the Project Data menu. The CLONE PROJECT page opens.          Figure 3.12: Clone Project page In the From Project box, select a project from which you want to clone the items, from a drop-down list. In the To Project box, select a project to which you want to clone the items, from a drop-down list. In the Items to clone box, select the items you want to clone. Click Clone. 3.13 Welders in Projects The Welders in Projects tab in the Project Data menu helps you to assign welders for a project. You can add a welder report by using this tab. This tab also helps you to view a welder list and WPQ details. Click the Welders in Projects tab in the Project Data menu. The welders in projects page opens with four fields such as Welder Report, Assign Welder to Project, Welder List, and WPQ Details.                                              Figure 3.13: Welders in project page 3.13.1 Add a Welder Report If you want to add a welder report, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Welder Report See Fig 3.13. A new window opens to add a welder report. Tip: A report number for a new welder report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of welder who has prepared the welder report. In the Received By box, enter the name of welder who has received the welder report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of welder who has approved the welder report. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the welder report. In the Received Date box, choose the received date of the welder report. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the welder report. Click Save. The welder report is successfully added. 3.13.2 Export Welder Reports List You can export a list of welder reports in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.13.3 Assign Welder to Project The Assign Welder to Project field in the welders in projects page allows you to assign any welder to the project. If you want to assign any welder to the project, do the following, In the All Welders box, if you want to view all the welders, click ALL otherwise select the respective company’s welder group from a drop-down list to view their welders list. Once you have selected the company’s welder group, the left-side box shows a list of welders. The right-side box shows a list of welders who has been already assigned for the project. If you want to assign any welder for the project, select the respective welder in the left-side box, and then click  (Assign welder button). The selected welder will be assigned to the project. If you want to reject any welder who has been assigned for the project, select the respective welder in the right-side box, and then click (Reject welder button). 3.13.4 Welder List The Welder List field in the welders in projects page shows the welder details such as welder name, welder number, NRIC, date of birth, and nationality. This field also helps you to assign the WPQs of welders to the project, and remove any WPQs from the project. If you click (Expand icon) of the respective welder, the All WPQ box shows the details of all WPQs of the welder, and the Assigned to Project box shows any WPQ that has been assigned to a project. If you want to assign any WPQ for the project, select the respective WPQ in the All WPQ box, and then click (Assign WPQ button). The selected welder will be assigned to the project. If you want to reject any WPQ that has been assigned for the project, select the respective WPQ in the Assigned to Project box, and then click  (Reject WPQ button). 3.13.5 WPQ details The WPQ details field in the welders in projects page shows the WPQ details of each welder including welder’s name, welder number, welding process name, weld metal thickness, and position. If you want to take a print of any WPQ details, click the checkbox provided in the Print Column. 3.14 Inspectors in Projects The Inspectors in Projects tab in the Project Data menu helps you to map inspectors for the specific project. Click the Inspectors in Projects tab. The Project Mapping – Inspectors page opens.                                 Figure 3.14: Project Mapping – Inspectors page The Project Mapping – Inspectors page shows a list of inspectors, which is added in the Master Data. If you want to map any inspectors for a specific project, do the following, Select a project you want from the Projects box. A list of available inspectors will be displayed. Select the check box of the respective inspector which you want to map for the selected project. Click (Map icon). The selected inspectors are mapped for the selected project. The Inspector List window shows the inspector’s name, login name, NRIC, and Date of birth. 3.15 WPS by Projects WPS is a written instruction that specifies materials, consumables and edge preparations for a given joint. The WPS lists the pre- and post-weld operations including heat treatments; machining, grinding, and dressing of the weld. The WPS by Projects tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add a WPS report and assign the WPS to a project. Click the WPS by Projects tab in the Project Data menu. The WPS by projects page opens with two fields such as WPS Summary and Assign WPS to Project.                          Figure 3.15: WPS by projects page 3.15.1 Add a WPS Report If you want to add a new WPS report, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the WPS Summary field. See Fig 3.15. A new window opens to add a WPS report. Tip: A report number for a new WPS report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the WPS report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the WPS report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the WPS report. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the WPS report. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the WPS report. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the WPS report. Click Save. The WPS report is successfully added. 3.15.2 Export WPS Reports List You can export a list of added WPS reports in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.15.3 Assign WPS to Project The Assign WPS to Project field in the WPS in projects page allows you to assign the WPS to the project. If you want to assign any WPS to the project, do the following, In the Assign WPS to Project field, the All WPS box displays a list of available WPS. The WPS in Project box displays a list of WPS that has been already assigned for the project. If you want to assign any WPS for the project, select the respective WPS in the ALL WPS box, and then click (Assign welder button). The selected WPS will be assigned to the project. If you want to reject any WPS that has been assigned for the project, select the respective WPS in the WPS in Project box, and then click  (Reject welder button). 3.16 Master Equipment The Master Equipment tab in the Project Data menu used to add a master equipment. Click Master Equipment in the Project Data menu. The Master Equipment page opens.                                           Figure 3.16: Master Equipment 3.16.1 Add a Master Equipment If you want to add a master equipment, Click  (ADD button) in the Master Equipment page. See Fig 3.16. A new window opens to add a master equipment. In the Tag Number box, enter the tag number. In the Description box, enter the description for the master equipment. In the Sequence Number box, enter the sequence number. In the Sub System box, select a sub system. In the Area box, enter the area name. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Vendor PID box, enter the vendor PID number. In the Layout box, enter the layout detail. In the Parent Tag box, enter the parent tag number. In the PO Number box, enter the PO number. In the Manufacturer box, enter the manufacturer name. In the Supplier box, enter the supplier name. In the Length box, enter the length of the master equipment. In the Width box, enter the width of the master equipment. In the Height box, enter the height of the master equipment. In the Diameter box, enter the diameter of the master equipment. In the Dry Weight box, enter the dry weight of the master equipment. In the Operating Weight box, enter the operating weight of the master equipment. In the Insulation Type box, enter the insulation type. In the Serial Number box, enter the serial number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Engineering Status box, enter the engineering status. Click Save. The master equipment is successfully added. 3.16.2 Map CR/CS If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS) for any added master equipment, Click (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column. The Map CR/CS window opens. Select the checkbox of the CR/CS which you want to map. Click Save/Close. 3.16.3 Clone a Master Equipment The Clone option in the Clone column of the Master Equipment page used to add a master equipment as a copy of the previously added master equipment, See Fig 3.16. Click  (Clone icon) in the Clone column of the Master Equipment page. A new window opens to add the master equipment. Enter the details of the master equipment. The new master equipment will be added. 3.16.4 Edit Any Master Equipment If you want to edit any master equipment in the Master Equipment page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective master equipment. See Fig 3.16. The page shows the added details of the master equipment. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 3.16.5 Export Master Equipments List You can export a list of master equipment added in the Master Equipment page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.16.6 Filter Any Master Equipment If you want to filter any master equipment from the list of master equipments in the Master Equipment page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.16.7 Import Multiple Master Equipments You can import multiple master equipments together by using a pre-defined template given in the application. If you want to import multiple master equipments together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Master Equipment See Fig 3.16. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of master equipment. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the master equipment details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.16. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the piece mark numbers that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the master equipments included in the worksheet will be displayed in the Master Equipment page. 3.17 Systems You can add the details of systems to be used in the Structural project by using the Systems tab in the Project Data menu. If you want to navigate to Systems, Click Systems in the Project Data menu. The System page opens.                                                           Figure 3.17: System page 3.17.1 Add System If you want to add a new system, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the System page. See Fig 3.17. A new window opens to add a new system. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the System box, enter the system name. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the system name. In the System Number box, enter the system number. Click Save. The system is successfully added and listed in the System page. Note: If you want to map cover page for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Cover Page column and add the cover pages. If you want to map certificates for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Certificates column and add the cover pages. If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS) for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column and add the cover pages. 3.17.2 Edit System If you want to edit any existing system in the System page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective System. See Fig 3.17. The System page shows the details of the selected system. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.17.3 Delete System If you want to delete any existing system in the System page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the System page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.17.4 Export System List You can export a list of systems added in the System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.17.5 Filter System If you want to filter any specific system in the System page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the System page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.17.6 Import Multiple Systems If you want to import multiple systems together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.17. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of systems. Enter the required system details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.17. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the systems that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the systems in the worksheet will be displayed in the System page. 3.17.7 Attach a File into a System If you want to attach any file with any system listed in the System page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 3.18 Sub Systems The Sub Systems tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of sub systems to be in used in the Structural Project. If you want to navigate to Sub Systems, Click Sub Systems in the Project Data menu. The Sub Systems page opens.                                                      Figure 3.18: Sub System page 3.18.1 Add Sub System If you want to add a new sub system, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Sub System page. See Fig 3.18. A new window opens to add a new sub system. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub System box, select a sub system from a drop-down list. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the sub system. In the Sub System Number box, enter the sub system number. If the added subsystem needs to be flushed, select Yes in the Flushing option otherwise select No. If there is need to perform the leakage test for the added subsystem, select Yes in the Leak Test option otherwise select No. In the Description box, enter the description for the added sub system. Click Save. The sub system is successfully added and listed in the Sub System page. 3.18.2 Edit Sub System If you want to edit any existing sub system in the Sub System page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective sub system. See Fig 6.18. The Sub System page shows the details of the selected sub system. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.18.3 Delete Sub System If you want to delete any existing sub system in the Sub System page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Sub System page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.18.4 Export Sub System List You can export a list of sub systems added in the Sub System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.18.5 Filter Sub System If you want to filter any specific sub system in the Sub System page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Sub System page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.18.6 Import Multiple Sub Systems If you want to import multiple sub systems together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.18. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of sub systems. Enter the required sub system details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the sub system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.18. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the sub systems that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the sub systems in the worksheet will be displayed in the Sub System page. 3.18.7 Attach a File into a Sub System If you want to attach any file with any sub system listed in the Sub System page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 3.19 Import from Excel – Masters The Import from Excel – Masters tab helps you to upload master data for all fields instead of uploading data for each field individually. If you want to import master data for different fields, do the following, Click Import from Excel – Masters in the Project Data menu. The File Upload page opens.                                                 Figure 3.19: File Upload page Download a template by using  (TEMPLATE button) to enter the details of master data. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a pre-defined template to the details. Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet. Click (Choose File button). Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded” Click  (Get Columns button). The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field. Note:  Make sure that the Excel Column field must have all the columns as in the System Column field. To map the columns in the System Column and Excel Column fields, do one of the following, If you want to map the columns automatically, click (AutoMap button). The columns will be mapped automatically and displayed in the Mapped Columns field. If you want to map each column manually, select the respective columns in both the System Columnand Excel Column fields and then click   (Map button). The selected columns will be mapped and displayed in the Mapped Columns field. To un-map the columns in the Mapped Columns field, select the respective column and then click (UnMap button). Once you have completed the mapping and un-mapping of columns, you must enter the range for uploading the data from the excel worksheet. Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet. Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns. In the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet. Click (Populate Values button). The data are populated. Click  (Process button). The system processes all the uploaded data and displays in the Excel Import page. Click  (Update button) to import the uploaded data. The data will be successfully imported. 3.20 Workflow Settings The Workflow Settings tab in the Project Data menu used to set a workflow in the Structural project. Click Workflow Settings in the Project Data menu. The Workflow page opens.                                                   Figure 3.20: Workflow page 3.20.1 Add a Workflow If you want to add a workflow, Click  (ADD button) in the Workflow page. See Fig 3.20. The page shows a new window to add the category. In the Category box, select a category from a drop-down list. Click Save. The added category will be listed in the Workflow page. See Fig 3.20. Click  (Add icon) of the respective category. The Workflow Details window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Workflow Details window. In the Role Name box, select a role name from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the role name. Click Save. 3.20.2 Edit a Workflow If you want to edit any existing workflow in the Workflow page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective workflow. See Fig 3.20. The Workflow page shows the details of the selected workflow. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.20.3 Delete a Workflow If you want to delete any existing workflow in the Workflow page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Workflow page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.20.4 Export Workflow List You can export a list of workflows added in the Workflow page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.20.5 Filter Any Workflow If you want to filter any specific workflow, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Workflow page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.21 Job Code Job codes are individualized sets of numbers assigned to different jobs in order to identify which class a position belongs to. The Job Code tab in the Project Data menu used to add a job code. Click Job Code in the Project Data menu. The Job Code page opens.                                                   Figure 3.21: Job Code page 3.21.1 Add a Job Code If you want to add a new job code, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Job Code page. See Fig 3.21. A new window opens to add a new job code. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Description box, enter the description for a job code you want to add. In the Item No box, enter the item number. In the Job Code box, enter the job code. In the VO No box, enter the VO number. Click Save. The job code is added and listed in the Job Code page. 3.21.2 Edit Any Job Code If you want to edit any existing job code in the Job Code page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective job code. See Fig 3.21. The Job Code page shows the details of the selected job code. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 3.21.3 Delete Any Job Code If you want to delete any existing job code in the Job Code page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Job Code page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 3.21.4 Export Job Code List You can export a list of job codes added in the Job Code page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.21.5 Filter Any Job Code If you want to filter any specific job code in the Job Code page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Job Code page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 3.21.6 Import Multiple Job Codes If you want to import multiple job codes together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.21. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of job code. Enter the required job code details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the job code details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.21. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the sub systems that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the job codes in the worksheet will be displayed in the Job Code page. 3.22 Inspection Test Plan (ITP) ITP is a document or series of documents used for quality assurance purposes. ITP outlines how the quality of a particular material will be ensured both at beginning and throughout the service life. The Inspection Test Plan tab in the Project Data menu allows you to add the inspection test plan report. If you want to add the inspection test plan report, do the following, Click the Inspection Test Plan tab in the Project Data menu. The Inspection Test Plan (ITP) page opens.                                                    Figure 3.22: ITP page Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Template box, select a template from a drop-down list appears on the Select from Templates box or the Select from Equipments box. Tip: A report number for the ITP report will be updated automatically in the ITP Report Number box. In the ITP Status box, select the ITP status from a drop-down list. In the Date box, choose the date of status update. In the Non-Destructive Examination (NDE)box, enter the NDE details. In the Remarks box, enter your remark if any. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the ITP report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the ITP report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the ITP report. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the ITP report. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the ITP report. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the ITP report. Click Save. The ITP report is successfully added. 3.22.1 Export ITP reports list You can export a list of added ITP reports in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.23 Check List The Check List tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add a check list that will be used in adding a final visual test report. Click the Check List tab in the Project Data menu. The Check List page opens.                                                   Figure 3.23: Check List page 3.23.1 Add a Check List If you want to add a check list, Click  (ADD button) in the Check List page. See Fig 3.23. A new window opens to add a check list. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. In the Check List box, enter the check list number. In the Comments box, type your comments if any. Click Save. The check list is added successfully. 3.23.2 Export Check Lists You can export a list of added check lists in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 3.24 NDT Procedures The NDT procedures tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add an NDT procedure. If you want to add an NDT procedure, do the following, Click NDT Procedures in the Project Data menu. The NDT Procedure page opens.                                           Figure 3.24: NDT Procedure page 3.24.1 Add an NDT Procedure If you want to add an NDT procedure, Click  (ADD button) in the NDT Procedure page. See Fig 3.24. A new window opens to add an NDT procedure. In the NDT Procedure box, select the NDT procedure from a drop-down list. In the NDT Procedure Title box, enter the NDT procedure title. Click Save. The NDT procedure is successfully added. 3.24.2 Add NDT Procedure Revision Once you have added the NDT procedure, you must add the NDT procedure revision. You can add multiple revisions for one NDT procedure. Click (Edit icon) in the Revision column of the NDT Procedure See Fig 3.24. The NDT Procedure Revision window opens. Click (ADD button) in the NDT Procedure Revision window. A new window opens to add the NDT revision procedure. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for the revision will be updated automatically in the Report Number/ Revision box. In the Description box, enter the description for the NDT procedure revision. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the revision. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the revision. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the revision. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the revision. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the revision. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the revision. Click Save. 3.24.3 Print an NDT procedure report If you want to print an NDT procedure report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the NDT Procedure page. See Fig 3.24. 3.24.4  Attach a File into an NDT Procedure If you want to attach any file with the NDT procedure listed in the NDT Procedure page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. Materials 4.0 Materials The Materials menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add the material details such as material certificates, material inspection details, material import details, and material summary and traceability record. The Materials menu appears with four options such as Material Certificates, Material Import, Material Inspection, and Reports. The Material Certificates option helps you to add material certificates details for the structural project. The Material Import option helps you to bulk add the materials. The Material Inspection option helps you to add material receiving report, material inspection, and material verification report. The Reports option used to add material traceability record and material summary by using heat number. 4.1 Material Certificates Mill Certificate is a certificate document of the steel industry, which is used to certify the product is produced by manufacturing standards of the mill. Once you have received the materials from the manufacturer, you must enter the details of materials. The Material Certificates (Mill Certificates) tab used to add the received material details including mill certification ID and mill certification number. If you want to add material certificates, do the following, Click Material Certificates in the Materials menu. The Mill Certificates page opens.                                                        Figure 4.1: Mill Certificates page 4.1.1 Add a Material Certificate If you want to add a material certificate, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Mill Certificates page. See Fig 4.1. A new window opens to add a material certificate. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Component box, select a component from a drop-down list. In the Certification box, enter the certification number of the material. In the Manufacturer box, enter the name of the manufacturer. In the Mill Certificate Date box, choose the mill certificate date. In the Delivery Order (DO) Number box, enter the delivery order number of the component. In the Purchase Order (PO) Number box, enter the purchase order number of the component. In the Size box, select the size of the received component. In the Thickness box, select the thickness of the received component. In the Class box, enter the class of the received component. In the Material box, select the type of material the component is made from. In the Rating box, enter the rating of the component. In the Expiry Date box, choose the expiry date of the component. Click Save. The material certificate is successfully added. Once you have added the mill certificate, you must add heat numbers for the added component. 4.1.2 Add Heat Numbers If you want to add heat numbers, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) of the respective mill certificate. The Heat Numbers box opens.                                       Figure 4.1.1: Heat Numbers page Click  (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers box. A new window opens to add the heat number. In the planned Project box, select a project you want from a drop-down list. In the Heat Number box, enter the heat number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 4.1.3 Edit Any Heat Number If you want to edit any existing heat numbers, Click   (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective heat number. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.1.4 Delete Any Heat Number If you want to delete any heat number, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Heat Numbers page, See Fig 4.1.1. Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding heat number. You receive a notification message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK. 4.1.5 Print a Material Consumption Report If you want to print a material consumption report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column. See Fig 4.1.1. 4.1.6 Attach a File into a Mill Certificate If you want to attach any file with the mill certificates listed in the Mill Certificates page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 4.1.7 Edit Any Mill Certificates If you want to edit any existing mill certificate in the Mill Certificates page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective mill certificate. See Fig 4.1. A new window opens to edit the mill certificate. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.1.8 Delete Any Mill Certificate If you want to delete any specific mill certificate from the list of mill certificates, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Mill Certificates page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 4.1.9 Export Mill Certificates List You can export a list of mill certificates added in the Mill Certificates page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 4.1.10 Filter Any Mill Certificate If you want to filter any mill certificate from the list of mill certificates in the Mill Certificates page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 4.1.11 Import Multiple Mill Certificates If you want to import multiple mill certificates together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Mill Certificates page. See Fig 4.1. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of multiple mill certificates. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the mill certificates details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 4.1. A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the mill certificates that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the mill certificates in the worksheet will be displayed in the Mill Certificates 4.2 Material Take Off Material Take Off ((MTO) report refers to a list of a materials including quantities and grades that are required in the structural project. The Material Take Off tab helps you to add an MTO report. If you want to add an MTO report, do the following, Click the Material Take Off tab in the Materials menu. The MTO Report page opens.                                                Figure 4.2: MTO Report page 4.2.1 Add an MTO Report Click  (ADD button) in the MTO Report page. See Fig 4.2. A new window opens to add an MTO report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new MTO report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Customer Name box, select the name of a customer. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the MTO report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the MTO report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the MTO report. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the MTO report. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the MTO report. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the MTO report. Click Save. The MTO report is successfully added. Once you have added the MTO report, you must add the material details for the added report. 4.2.2 Add Material Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the MTO Report See Fig 4.2. The Report Parameters box opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Parameters box. A new window opens in the Material Type column. Enter the material name in the Material Type column. Enter the grade of the material in the Material Grade column. Enter the relevant details in the respective columns of the Report Parameters box. Click Save. Tip: If you want to delete the added material details, click  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Report Parameters box. 4.2.3 Edit Any MTO Reports If you want to edit any existing MTO report in the MTO Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MTO Report See Fig 4.2. A new window opens to edit the MTO report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.2.4 Attach a File into an MTO Report If you want to attach any file with the MTO reports listed in the MTO Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 4.2.5 Print an MTO Report If you want to print an MTO report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the MTO Report page. See Fig 4.2. 4.2.6 Export MTO Reports You can export a list of MTO reports added in the MTO Report page. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 4.3 Material Receiving and Inspection (Heat Numbers) Material Receiving Inspection validates quality of purchased raw materials based on set acceptance criteria before the materials are used for the Structural project. The Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an incoming material inspection report (MIR). Incoming MIR includes material name, material size, material specification, heat numbers, and material type. If you want to add an incoming MIR, do the following, Click Material Receiving and Inspection in the Materials menu. The Incoming Material Inspection Report page opens.                                Figure 4.3: Incoming Material Inspection Report page 4.3.1 Add an Incoming MIR If you want to add an incoming MIR, Click (ADD button) in the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 4.3. A new window opens to add an incoming MIR. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number and a Request for Inspection (RFI) number for a new MIR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Delivery Order Number box, enter the material’s delivery order number. If the materials are received from a client, select the MUHIBBAH Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the P.O. No box, enter the purchase order number. In the Dated box, choose the date of the purchase order. In the Received On box, select the received date of materials. If the materials are purchased from outside, select the FREE Issued Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the Packing List No box, enter the packing list number. In the Dated box, choose the date of packing. In the Received On box, choose the received date of materials. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Vendor Name box, enter the vendor name. In the Request Description box, enter the request description. In the ITP Number box, select an ITP number. In the Delivery Note box, enter the delivery note. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Sub Contractor box, select the subcontractor name from a drop-down list. Click Save. The incoming MIR is successfully added. Once you have added the MIR, you must add the material details for the added MIR. 4.3.2 Add Materials for an Incoming MIR If you want to add the details of materials for the added incoming MIR, do the following steps, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit MIR column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 4.3. The Add/Edit - Materials window opens.                                           Figure 4.3.1: Add/Edit – Materials window Click  (ADD button) in the Add/Edit - Materials window. A new window opens to add the material details. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Material Description box, enter the material description. In the Material Size box, select the size of the material. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Type box, enter the type of the material. In the Quantity Required box, enter the required quantity of the material. In the Item No box, enter the item number. In the Weight box, enter the weight of the material. In the Component box, select a component. Click Update. Once you have added the material details, you must add the heat numbers for the added materials. 4.3.3 Add Heat Numbers Click  (Add icon) of the respective material in the Add/Edit - Materials See Fig 4.3.1. The Heat Numbers window opens. Click (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers window. A new window opens to add a heat number. In the Heat Number/Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. In the Plate Number/Coil Number/ Tag Number box, enter the plate number or coil number or tag number of the material. In the Delivery Quantity (Total) box, enter the total delivery quantity of the material including UOM. In the Delivery Quantity (Partial) box, enter the partial delivery quantity of the material including UOM. In the Dimensions option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Visual option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Mill Test Certificates (MTC) option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. If the heat treatment is required for the material, select YES in the Heat Treatment Otherwise select NO. In the NDE is required for the material, select YES in the NDE option. Otherwise select NO. Click Update. Note: If you want to manage the review material TC, click  (Add icon). The Review Material TC window opens to add the material checklist detail. 4.3.4 Add MIR Details If you want to add the details of MIR, Click  (Add icon) in the Add See Fig 4.3. The MIR Details window opens. In the Manufacturer Name box, enter the manufacturer name. In the Supplier box, enter the supplier name. In the Unloaded box, enter the unloaded detail. In the Date box, select the date of MIR. In the Truck/Trailer No box, enter the truck/trailer number. In the Defect Report No box, enter the defect report number. In the Storage Area box, enter the storage area name. In the Defect box, enter the defect detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 4.3.5 Print an Incoming MIR Report If you want to print an incoming MIR report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. 4.3.6 Print a Report with MTC If you want to print an incoming MIR report including MTC, click (print icon) provided in the Report with MTC column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. 4.3.7 Print a Report Raw Material Offer List If you want to print a report raw material offer list, click  (print icon) provided in the Report Raw Material Offer List column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. 4.3.8 Print a MIR Summary Report If you want to print a MIR summary report, click  (print icon) provided in the upper side of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3. 4.3.9 Attach a File into an Added Incoming MIR If you want to attach any file with any incoming MIR listed in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 4.3.10 Edit Any Incoming MIR If you want to edit any existing incoming MIR in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MIR. See Fig 4.3. A new window opens to edit the added incoming MIR. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.3.11 Filter Any Incoming MIR If you want to filter any incoming MIR from the list of MIRs in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, you can use the request status wise filter box provided in the upper side of the Incoming Material Inspection Report You can also use  (FILTER button) located on the Incoming Material Inspection Report  To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 4.3.12 Export Incoming MIR list You can export a list of MIR added in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 4.4 Material Verification Report (MVR) (Heat Numbers) MVR will be used while go for material inspection. The Material Verification Report tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an MVR inspection request.  If you want to add an MVR inspection request, do the following steps, Click Material Verification Report in the Materials menu. The MVR Inspection Request page opens.                                                  Figure 4.4: MVR Inspection Request page 4.4.1 Add an MVR Inspection Request If you want to add an MVR inspection request, Click (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.4. A new window opens to add an MVR inspection request. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number and an RFI report number for a new MVR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Description box, enter the description for the MVR. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. Click Save. The MVR is successfully added. Once you have added the MVR, you must add the RFI data for the added MVR. 4.4.2 Add RFI Data for an Added MVR Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added MVR inspection request, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.4. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1st Inspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. Once you have added the RFI data, you must add the result for the added MVR inspection request. 4.4.3 View an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.4. 4.4.4 Add Result for an Added MVR Inspection Request Click (Add icon) of the respective report number. The MVR Inspection Request Details window opens. Click (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request Details window. A new window opens to add result. In the Piece Mark No box, select the piece mark number from a drop-down list. In the Heat Number / Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. In the Size box, enter the size of the material. In the Type of Material box, enter the type of material. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. Once you have added the result for the MVR inspection request, you must submit and approve the MVR inspection request. 4.4.5 Submit and Approve an MVR Inspection Report Once you have added the result, the Submission column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the MVR inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the MVR inspection request, the Request Status column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with  (Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the MVR inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click   (Reject icon) to reject the request. 4.4.6 Print an MVR Inspection Report If you want to print an MVR inspection report, click (print icon) in the Report column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.4. 4.4.7 Attach a File into an MVR Inspection Request If you want to attach any file with an existing MVR inspection request listed in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 4.4.8 Edit Any MVR Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing MVR inspection request in the MVR Inspection Request page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MVR inspection request. See Fig 4.4. A new window opens to edit the MVR inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.4.9 Filter Any MVR Inspection Request If you want to filter any MVR request from the list of requests in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 4.4.10 Export MVR Inspection Request List You can export a list of MVR inspection requests added in the MVR Inspection Request page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 4.5 Welding Consumable Register List Welding Consumables are products used to create strong joints between two or more parts while welding. Welding Consumable are segmented based on welding technique, welding consumable type, end-use industry, and region. The Welding Consumable Register List tab in the Materials menu used to add a weld consumable list. If you want to add a welding consumable list, do the following, Click the Welding Consumable Register List tab in the Materials menu. The Welding Consumable Register List page opens.                                     Figure 4.5: Welding Consumable Register List page 4.5.1 Add a Welding Consumable List If you want to add a welding consumable list, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Welding Consumable Register List See Fig 4.5. A new window opens to add a welding consumable list. Note:  The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. Tip: A report number for a new welding consumable list will be updated automatically in the Report Number / Rev box. In the Buyer Name box, enter the name of a buyer. In the Supplier box, enter the name of a supplier of welding consumables. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the welding consumable list. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the welding consumable list. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the welding consumable list. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the welding consumable list. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the welding consumable list. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the welding consumable list. Click Save. The welding consumable register list is successfully added. Once you have added the register list, you must add the consumable details for the added register list. Tip: If you want to add a copy of added welding consumable register list, click Revision in the Revision column of the Welding Consumable Register List page. 4.5.2 Add Welding Consumable Details for Added Consumable List If you want to add the details of welding consumables for the added list, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Welding Consumable Register List See Fig 4.5. A new window opens to add the welding consumable details. In the Welding Process box, enter the type of welding process. In the Class box, enter the class of welding consumable. In the Trade Name box, enter the trade name of welding consumable. In the Lot Number box, enter the lot number of the welding consumable. In the Number / Quantity (Kgs) box, enter the number or quantity of the welding consumable. In the Dia box, enter the diameter of the welding consumable. In the CIR Number box, enter the CIR number of the welding consumable. In the Date of CIR box, select the date of CIR. In the Certificate No box, enter the certificate number. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any In the Status box, select Accepted, Rejected or Hold from a drop-down list. Click Save. Once you have added the welding consumable details, you must add the result for the added consumable list. 4.5.3 Submit a Welding Consumable List Once you have added the welding consumable details, the Submission column in the Welding Consumable Register List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the welding consumable list, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 4.5.4 Print a Welding Consumable Report If you want to print a welding consumable report, click  (print icon) in the Report column of the Welding Consumable Register List page. See Fig 4.5. 4.5.5 Attach a File into a Welding Consumable Register List If you want to attach any file with any welding consumable register list in the Welding Consumable Register List page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 4.5.6 Edit Any Welding Consumable Register List If you want to edit any existing welding consumable register list in the Welding Consumable Register List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective welding consumable register list. See Fig 4.5. A new window opens to edit the welding consumable register list. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.5.7 Export Welding Consumable Register List You can export a list of welding consumable register list added in the Welding consumable Register List page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 4.6 Import Materials The Import from Excel - Materials tab helps you to upload various data related to materials for different fields included in the Materials menu instead of uploading data for each field individually. If you want to import data for different fields, do the following, Click the Import from Excel – Materials tab in the Materials menu. The File Upload page opens. Download a template by using the  (TEMPLATE button) to enter the details of data. An excel worksheet will be downloaded. Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet based on the columns listed in the System Column field. Click (Choose File button). Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded” Click (Get Columns button). The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field. The system automatically maps the Required Columns to Import field and the Excel Column field and displays in the Mapped Columns field. If you want to map any columns or to unmap any mapped columns, select the respective columns and then click (Map button) and  (UnMap button) accordingly. Once you have completed the mapping and unmapping of columns, in the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet. Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet. Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns. Click  (Populate Value button). Click  (Process button). Once you have clicked the Process button, the system processes the columns and displays in the Excel Import page. Click (Import button) to import the data added in the excel worksheet. 4.7 Material Traceability Record The Material Traceability Record tab in the Materials menu used to track a material traceability record (MTR). If you want to add an MTR, do the following, Click the Material Traceability Record tab in the Materials menu. The Material Traceability Record page opens.                                                             4.7: Material Traceability Record page Click (ADD button) in the Material Traceability Record page. See Fig 4.7. A new window opens to add an MTR. Tip: A report number for a new MTR will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Location box, enter the location detail. The MTR is added. Once you have added the MTR, you must add the cutting plan drawing details for the added MTR. 4.7.1 Add a Cutting Plan Drawing for an MTR If you want to add a cutting plan drawing for the added MTR, do the following, Click (Add icon) provided in the Add Cutting Plan Drawing column of the Material Traceability Record page. The Cutting Plan Drawing Details box opens. Click (ADD button) in the Cutting Plan Drawing Details box. A new window opens to add a master drawing number and a cutting plan drawing number. In the Cutting Plan Drawing Number box, select the mater drawing and cutting plan drawing numbers from a drop-down list. Click Save. 4.7.2 Print an MTR report If you want to print an MTR report, click (print icon) in the Report column of the Material Traceability Record page. See Fig 4.7. 4.7.3 Attach a File into an MTR If you want to attach any file with any MTR list in the Material Traceability Record page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 4.7.4 Edit Any MTR If you want to edit any existing MTR in the Material Traceability Record page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MTR. See Fig 4.7. A new window opens to edit the MTR. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.7.5 Export MTR List You can export a list of MTRs added in the Material Traceability Record page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 4.7.6 Filter Any MTR If you want to filter any MTR from the list of MTRs in the Material Traceability Record page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 4.8 Material Summary The Material Summary tab in the Materials menu used to track the material summary details. If you want to trach the summary details of the material, do the following, Click the Material Summary tab in the Materials menu. The Material Summary Details page opens.                                           Figure 7.8: Material Summary Details page In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the From and To boxes, choose the respective from and to dates to get the material summary details. Click Search. The summary details of the added material specification will be displayed for the selected period. 4.8.1 Export Material Summary Details You can export a list of MTRs added in the Material Summary Details page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 4.9 Material Summary by Heat Number The Summary by Heat Number tab in the Materials menu used to track the material summary details by using the respective heat numbers. If you want to track the summary details of the material, do the following, Click the Summary by Heat Number tab in the Materials menu. The Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page opens.                                     Fig 4.9: Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page In the Heat Number box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. Click Search. The material summary details corresponding to the selected heat number will be displayed. 4.9.1 Export Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) You can export the material summary details in the Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 4.10 Material Traceability Summary Report If you want to view the material traceability summary report, navigate to the Material Traceability Summary Report tab in the Materials menu. Click Material Traceability Summary Report in the Materials menu. The Material Traceability Summary Report page opens.                              Figure 4.10: Material Traceability Summary Report page In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates. Click Show Report. The summary report for the selected date will be opened. 4.10.1 Print Material Traceability Summary Report If you want to print a material traceability summary report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Material Traceability Summary Report page. If you want to print the current page of the summary report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the summary report, click (print icon). 4.10.2 Export Material Traceability Summary Report You can export the material traceability summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Material Traceability Summary Report page. 4.11 RFI Material Substitution An RFI could be issued requesting for material substitutions if certain material is not available or cost exorbitantly high. Various subcontractors could be provided with these requests to find who has the best quality materials for the project. You can add an RFI for material substitution by using the RFI Material Substitution tab in the Materials menu. 4.11.1 Add an RFI Material Substitution If you want to add an RFI material substitution, do the following steps, Click RFI Material Substitution in the Materials menu. The RFI Material Substitution page opens.                                        Figure 4.11: RFI Material Substitution page In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the material substitution. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Center box, enter the center name. In the Details of Work box, enter the work details. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. Before saving the added material substitution request, you must add the material substitution detail. Click (ADD button) in the Material Substitution Detail window. In the Type box, select the type of material substitution. In the Material box, enter the name of the material. In the DWG. Ref box, enter the drawing reference number. In the Original Size box, enter the original size of the material. In the Original Grade box, enter the original grade of the material. In the Item box, select an item. In the QTY box, enter the quantity of the material. Click Save. The material substitution details will be added and listed in the Material Substitution Detail window. If you want to add the proposed material substitution detail, Click (Add icon) in the Material Substitution Detail window. Click (ADD button). Enter the details of proposed material substitution. Click Save. The request for material substitution will be added and listed in the View RFI Material Substitution page. 4.12 View RFI Material Substitution The View RFI Material Substitution tab helps you to view and edit the material substitution request, which is added by using the RFI Material Substitution tab. This tab also allows you to add a new material substitution request. Click View RFI Material Substitution in the Materials menu. The View RFI Material Substitution page opens with a list of added material substitution requests.                                     Figure 4.12: View RFI Material Substitution page 4.12.1 Add an RFI Material Substitution If you want to add a material substitution request, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the View RFI Material Substitution page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new material substitution request. To know how to add a material substitution request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Material Substitution”. Once you have added the material substitution request, you must submit the added request to perform material substitution inspection. 4.12.2 Edit Any Material Substitution Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing material substitution inspection request in the View RFI Material Substitution page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective material substitution inspection request. See Fig 4.12. The RFI Material Substitution page opens with the details of the selected material substitution inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.12.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Material Substitution Once you have added the material substitution inspection request, the Submission column in the View RFI Material Substitution page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the material substitution inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the material substitution inspection request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Material Substitution page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the material substitution inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The material substitution inspection request will be moved for material substitution inspection. 4.12.4 Add Results of Material Substitution Inspection After completing the material inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens with the details of proposed and original materials. In the Result column, select the result of each material from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Approve All & Save. 4.12.5 View a Material Substitution Report If you want to view a material substitution report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Material Substitution page. See Fig 4.12. 4.12.6 Attach a File into an RFI Material Substitution If you want to attach a file with any existing material substitution inspection request listed in the View RFI Material Substitution page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 4.12.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the material substitution inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the View RFI Material Substitution page. 4.12.8 Export an RFI Material Substitution List You can export a list of material substitution requests added in the View RFI Material Substitution page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 4.12.9 Filter Any RFI Material Substitution If you want to filter any specific material substitution inspection request in the View RFI Material Substitution page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Material Substitution page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 4.13 Material Receiving and Inspection (Unique Numbers) Material Receiving Inspection validates quality of purchased raw materials based on set acceptance criteria before the materials are used for the structural project. The Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an incoming material inspection report (MIR). Incoming MIR includes material name, material size, material specification, and material type. If you want to add an incoming MIR, do the following, Click the Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu. The Incoming Material Inspection Report page opens.                             Figure 4.13: Incoming Material Inspection Report page 4.13.1 Add an Incoming MIR If you want to add an incoming MIR, Click (ADD button) in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.13. A new window opens to add an incoming MIR. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number and an Request for Inspection (RFI) number for a new MIR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Delivery Order Number box, enter the material’s delivery order number. If the materials are received from a client, select the DM Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the P.O. No box, enter the purchase order number. In the Dated box, choose the date of the purchase order. In the Received On box, select the received date of materials. If the materials are purchased from outside, select the FREE Issued Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. In the Packing List No box, enter the packing list number. In the Dated box, choose the date of packing. In the Received On box, choose the received date of materials. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Vendor Name box, enter the vendor name. In the Delivery Note box, enter the delivery note. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Sub Contractor box, select the subcontractor name from a drop-down list. Click Save. The incoming MIR is successfully added. Once you have added the MIR, you must add the material details for the added MIR. 4.13.2 Add Materials for an Incoming MIR If you want to add the details of materials for the added incoming MIR, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit MIR column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 4.13. The Add/Edit - Materials window opens.                                         Figure 4.13.1: Add/Edit – Materials window Click (ADD button) in the Add/Edit - Materials window. A new window opens to add the material details. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Material box, select the name of the material from a drop-down list. In the Quantity Required box, enter the required quantity of the material. In the Certificate Number box, enter the certificate number. In the PO No box, enter the purchase order number. In the Non-Conformance Report (NCR) No box, enter the NCR number. In the Size/Thickness box, select the size/thickness of the received material from a drop-down list. In the Heat Number box, enter the heat number of the material. In the CEQ box, enter the CEQ number. In the DO box, enter the deliver order number. In the TQ No box, enter the TQ number. In the Length box, select the length of the material from a drop-down list. In the Plate Number box, enter the plate number of the material. In the Material Type box, enter the type of the material. In the CD Number box, enter the CD number. In the Status box, select the status of the received material. In the Material Type box, select the type of material from a drop-down list. In the Grade box, select the grade of the material. In the Unique No box, enter the unique number of the material. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Client Item No box, enter the client item number. In the Supply Condition box, enter the supply condition details of the material. In the Material Description box, enter the material description. Click Update. Once you have added the material details, you must add the heat numbers for the added materials. 4.13.3 Add Heat Numbers Click (Add icon) of the respective material in the Add/Edit - Materials window. See Fig 4.13.1. The Heat Numbers window opens. Click (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers window. A new window opens to add a heat number. In the Heat Number/Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. In the Plate Number/Coil Number/ Tag Number box, enter the plate number or coil number or tag number of the material. In the Delivery Quantity (Total) box, enter the total delivery quantity of the material. In the Delivery Quantity (Partial) box, enter the partial delivery quantity of the material. In the CEQ box, enter the CEQ number. In the CD Number box, enter the CD number. In the Unique Number box, enter the unique number of the material. In the Client Item Number box, enter the client item number. In the Dimensions option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Visual option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Mill Test Certificates (MTC) option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail. In the Remarks option, enter your remarks if any. If the heat treatment is required for the material, select YES in the Heat Treatment Otherwise select NO. In the NDE is required for the material, select YES in the NDE option. Otherwise select NO. Click Update. Once you have added the heat numbers, you must add unique numbers for the material. 4.13.4 Add Unique Numbers Click (Add icon) of the respective heat number in the Heat Numbers box. The Unique Numbers box opens. Click (ADD button) in the Unique Numbers window. A new window opens to add a unique number. In the Unique Number box, enter a unique number for the respective heat number. In the Original Number box, enter the original number of the material. In the Size box, enter the size of the material. Click Update. 4.13.5 Print an Incoming MIR If you want to print an incoming MIR report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.13. 4.13.6 Print a Report with MTC If you want to print an incoming MIR report including MTC, click (print icon) provided in the Report with MTC column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.13. 4.13.7 Attach a File into an Added Incoming MIR If you want to attach any file with any incoming MIR listed in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page,  follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 4.13.7.1 Edit Any Incoming MIR If you want to edit any existing incoming MIR in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MIR. See Fig 4.13. A new window opens to edit the added incoming MIR. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.13.8 Filter Any Incoming MIR If you want to filter any incoming MIR from the list of MIRs in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. If you want to filter any MIR based on the approval status of the MIR, click the Request Status box provided in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page and then select the appropriate option from a drop-down list. If you click the All option, the system shows a list of all MIRs. If you click the Approved option, the system shows a list of approved MIRs. If you click Not Approved option, the system shows a list of not approved MIRs. 4.13.9 Export Incoming MIR List You can export a list of MIR added in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 4.14 Material Verification Report (MVR) (Unique Numbers) MVR will be used while go for material inspection. The Material Verification Report tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an MVR inspection request.  If you want to add an MVR inspection request, do the following, Click Material Verification Report in the Materials menu. The MVR Inspection Request page opens.                                        Figure 4.14: MVR Inspection Request page 4.14.1 Add an MVR Inspection Request If you want to add an MVR inspection request, Click (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.14. A new window opens to add an MVR inspection request. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number and an RFI report number for a new MVR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Description box, enter the description for the MVR. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. Click Save. The MVR is successfully added. Once you have added the MVR, you must add the RFI data for the added MVR. 4.14.2 Add RFI Data for an Added MVR Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added MVR inspection request, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.14. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. Once you have added the RFI data, you must add the result for the added MVR inspection request. 4.14.3 Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.14. 4.14.4 Add Result for an Added MVR Inspection Request Click  (Add icon) of the respective report number. The MVR Inspection Request Details window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request Details window. A new window opens to add result. In the Piece Mark No box, select the piece mark number from a drop-down list. In the Heat Number / Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list. In the Size box, enter the size of the material. In the Type of Material box, enter the type of material. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. Once you have added the result for the MVR inspection request, you must submit and approve the MVR inspection request. 4.14.5 Submit and Approve an MVR Inspection Report Once you have added the result, the Submission column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the MVR inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the MVR inspection request, the Request Status column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with(Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the MVR inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. 4.14.6 Print an MVR Inspection Report If you want to print an MVR inspection report, click (print icon) in the Report column of the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.14. 4.14.7 Attach a File into an MVR Inspection Request If you want to attach any file with any MVR inspection request listed in the MVR Inspection Request page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 4.14.8 Edit Any MVR Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing MVR inspection request in the MVR Inspection Request page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MVR inspection request. See Fig 4.14. A new window opens to edit the MVR inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 4.14.9 Filter Any MVR Inspection Request If you want to filter any MVR request from the list of requests in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 4.14.10 Export MVR Inspection Request List You can export a list of MVR inspection requests added in the MVR Inspection Request page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. Inspection 5.0 Inspection The Inspection menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add a Request for Inspection (RFI) fit up request, an RFI weld VI request, and an NDT inspection request. 5.1 RFI Fit Up Request Generic If you want to add an RFI fit up request generic, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. A new window opens to add an RFI fit up request generic. Tip: A report number for a new RFI fit up request generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI fit up request generic. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The RFI fit up request generic is inserted successfully. Once you have added the RFI fit up request generic, you must add the RFI data for the added request. 5.1.2 Add RFI Data for an Added RFI Fit Up Request Generic If you want to add RFI data for the added RFI fit up request generic, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic See Fig 5.1. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.1.3 Clone an RFI Fit Up Request Generic The Clone option in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page used to create a RFI weld VI generic request in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, as a copy of RFI fit up request generic, See Fig 5.4. If you click  (Clone icon) in the Clone column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, an RFI weld VI generic request is added in the RFI weld VI generic page. Tip: You can create multiple copies of RFI weld VI generic request for a single RFI fit up request generic. 5.1.4 Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. See Fig 5.1. 5.1.5 Submit an RFI Fit Up Request Generic Once you have added the RFI fit up request generic, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the RFI fit up request generic, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.1.6 Print an RFI Fit Up Request Generic Report If you want to print an RFI fit up request generic report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. See Fig 5.1. 5.1.7 Attach a File into an RFI Fit Up Request Generic If you want to attach any file with any RFI fit up request generic added in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.1.8 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client Once the RFI fit up inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. 5.1.9 Edit Any RFI Fit Up Request Generic If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request generic in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request generic. See Fig 5.1. A new window opens to edit the RFI fit up request generic. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.1.10 Export RFI Fit Up Request Generic List You can export a list of RFI fit up request generic added in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.1.11 Filter Any RFI Fit Up Request Generic If you want to filter any RFI fit up request generic from the list of RFI fit up request generic in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.2 RFI Fit up Request (Heat Numbers) The RFI Fit up Request tab allows you add an RFI fit up request to check the fit-up quality of pipes and joints used in the Structural project by a sub-contractor. To navigate to the RFI fit up request adding page, Click RFI Fit up Request in the Inspection menu. The RFI Fit up Inspection Request page opens.                                         Figure 4.2: RFI Fit up Inspection Request page 5.2.1 Add an RFI Fit Up Request If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. Note: The inspection date should be as current date or upcoming dates. The system will not accept if you have given the previous dates. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Drawing No box, select a drawing number. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI fit up request. Before saving the added fit up request, you must add joints for the fit-up request. Click (Add icon) of the respective joints you want to add. The added joints will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. In the Heat No 1 box, enter the heat number of the first component if you know. In the Heat No 2 box, enter the heat number of the second component if you know. Tip: If you want to remove any added joint, click(Remove icon) of the respective joint. Click Save. The RFI fit up request is successfully added. If you want to view the added request, navigate to t the View RFI Fit up page. 5.3 View RFI Fit up (Heat Numbers) The View RFI Fit up tab helps you to view and edit the RFI fit up requests, which are added by using the RFI Fit up Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI fit up request. Click View RFI Fit up in the Inspection menu. The Request for Inspection page opens with a list of added RFI fit up requests.                                            Figure 5.3: Request for Inspection page 5.3.1 Add an RFI Fit Up Request If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Request List page. The system redirects you into RFI Fit up Inspection Request page. To know how to add an RFI fit up request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Fit up Request”. Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 5.3.2 Add Representative for Added RFI Fit Up Request If you want to add a representative for any added RFI fit up request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI fit up request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.3.3 Edit Any RFI Fit Up Request If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request in the Request for Inspection page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request. See Fig 5.3. The RFI Fit up Inspection Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI fit up request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.3.4 Submit and Approve an RFI Fit Up Request Once you have added the RFI fit up request, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up Request Lists page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.3. If you want to submit the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the RFI Fit up Requests List page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the RFI fit up request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 5.3.5 Add Results of RFI Fit Up Inspection After completing the RFI fit up inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The RFI Fit up Request List window opens with a list of joints. If you want to update the heat numbers and piece mark details, click on the respective box and update. If you want to update the WPS number in the WPS Number column, you can change the WPS number from a drop-down list. Update the result for root gap by selecting Accepted or Rejected in the Root Gap column based on the inspection. Update the result for straight/ alignment by selecting Accepted or Rejected in the Strgt/Align column based on the inspection. In the Edge Prep column, select the type of the edge preparation from a drop-down list. In the Result column, update the RFI fit up inspection result by selecting Pending, Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled. In the Remarks column, enter you remarks if any. 5.3.6 View an RFI Fit Up Report If you want to view an RFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Request for Inspection page. See Fig 5.3. 5.3.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the RFI fit up inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the Request for Inspection page. 5.3.8 Attach a File into an RFI Fit up Request If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI fit up request listed in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, you can attach the file by using(Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.3.9 Export RFI Fit up Request List You can export a list of RFI fit up requests added in the RFI Fit up Requests List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 5.3.10 Filter RFI Fit up Request If you want to filter any specific RFI fit up request in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Fit up Requests List  To filter the any specific RFI fit up request, select the Drawing Number and Date in the boxes and click Search. you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Fit up Requests List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.4 RFI Weld VI Generic Once the RFI fit up inspection process has completed, the materials are moved for weld inspection process. The RFI Weld VI Generic tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an RFI weld VI generic. Click the RFI Weld VI Generic tab in the Inspection menu. The RFI Weld VI Generic page opens.                                          Figure 5.4: RFI Weld VI Generic page 5.4.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to add an RFI weld VI generic, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Weld VI Generic page. A new window opens to add an RFI weld VI generic. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new RFI weld VI generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI weld VI generic. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The RFI weld VI generic is added successfully. Once you have added the RFI weld VI generic, you must add the RFI data for the added request. 5.4.2 Add RFI Data for the Added RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to add RFI data for the added RFI weld VI generic, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Weld VI Generic See Fig 5.4. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1st Inspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.4.3 Clone an RFI Weld VI Generic The Clone option in the RFI Weld VI Generic page used to create a vacuum test request, an air test request, a hydrostatic test request, and an NDT request, as a copy of RFI weld VI generic request. Click (Clone icon) in the Clone column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page. The Clone box opens. Select any test from the given list. Click (Add button). A new request for the selected test will be added in the respective pages. 5.4.4 Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page. See Fig 5.4. 5.4.5 Submit an RFI Weld VI Generic Once you have added the RFI weld VI generic, the Submission column in the RFI Weld VI Generic page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the RFI weld VI generic, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.4.6 Print an RFI Weld VI Generic Report If you want to print an RFI weld VI generic report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page. See Fig 5.4. 5.4.7 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client Once the weld VI inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Weld VI Generic page. 5.4.8 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to attach any file with any RFI weld VI generic added in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.4.9 Edit Any RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI generic in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI generic. See Fig 5.4. A new window opens to edit the RFI weld VI generic. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.4.10 Export RFI Weld VI Generic List You can export a list of RFI weld VI generic added in the RFI Weld VI Generic page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.4.11 Filter Any RFI Weld VI Generic If you want to filter any RFI weld VI generic from the list of RFI weld VI generic in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.5 RFI Weld VI Request (Heat Numbers) The RFI Weld VI Request tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add an RFI weld VI request to perform visual inspection of welded pipes and joints used in the Structural project. To navigate to the RFI weld VI request adding page, Click RFI Weld VI Request in the Inspection menu. The RFI Weld Visual Request page opens.                                         Figure 5.5: RFI Weld Visual Request page 5.5.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. Note: The inspection date should be as current date or upcoming dates. The system will not accept if you have given the previous dates. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. Before saving the added weld VI request, you must add joints for the weld VI request. Note: You can add multiple joints for one request. The RFI Weld Visual Request page shows a list of joints including the corresponding sheet and piece mark numbers. If you want to add joints for the RFI weld VI request, do the following steps, Select the checkbox of the respective joints you want to add. The added joints will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Update the welder details by using (Add icon) provided in the Welder Details column. Click  (Add icon) of the respective joint number. The Welder- Weld Layer- Weld Process window opens. In the Date box, select the date. In the Group Name box, select the group name from a drop-down list. In the Weld Process field, select a weld process. In the Weld Position field, select the welding position. In the Weld Layers field, select the weld layers you want add. In the Welder Number/ Name field, select the welders you want to add. Click Add. The selected welders will be added and listed in the below table. See the above figure. In the Weld Consumable box, select the weld consumable from a drop-down list. In the WPS Number box, select the WPS number from a drop-down list. Click Save. Tip: If you want to remove any added joint, click  (Remove icon) of the respective joint. Click Save. The RFI weld VI request is successfully added. If you want to view the added request, navigate to View RFI Weld VI. 5.6 View RFI Weld VI (Heat Numbers) The View RFI Weld VI tab helps you to view and edit the RFI weld VI request, which is added by using the RFI Weld VI Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI weld VI request. Click View RFI Weld VI in the Inspection menu. The Request for Inspection page opens with a list of added RFI weld VI requests.                                  Figure 5.6: Request for Inspection page 5.6.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following, Click     (ADD button) in the Request for Inspection page. The system redirects you into Request for Inspection page. To know how to add an RFI weld VI request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Weld VI Request”. Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, you must submit the added request for weld visual inspection. 5.6.2 Add Representative for Added RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add a representative for any added RFI weld VI request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI weld VI request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.6.3 Edit Any RFI Weld VI Request If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI request in the Request for Inspection page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.6. The Request for Inspection page opens with the details of the selected RFI weld VI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.6.4 Submit and Approve an RFI Weld VI Request Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, the Submission column in the Requests for Inspection page is appeared with   (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.6. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click   (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the Request for Inspection page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the RFI weld VI request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 5.6.5 Add Results of RFI weld Visual Inspection After completing the RFI weld visual inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Request for Inspection window opens with a list of joints added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result for each joint from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.6.6 View an RFI Weld VI Report If you want to view an RFI weld VI report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. See Fig 5.6. 5.6.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the RFI weld visual inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. 5.6.8 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI weld VI request listed in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.6.9 Export RFI Weld VI Request List You can export a list of RFI weld VI requests added in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 5.6.10 Filter RFI Weld VI Request If you want to filter any specific RFI weld VI request in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page, you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Weld Visual Requests List  To filter the any specific RFI weld VI request, select the Drawing Number and Date in the boxes and click Search. you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. To know how to filter, see the topic ”Filter Any Area”. 5.7 NDT Inspection Generic NDT inspection used to find out welding defects of the materials. Once the fit up and welding process of the materials has completed, the materials will be moved for the NDT inspection. The currently following NDT inspection methods are RT, UT, MT, PT, Ultrasonic Thickness Gaging (UTG), Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI) after load test, UT/MT, and PT after load test. The NDT Inspection Generic tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an NDT inspection generic. If you want to navigate the NDT inspection generic, Click the NDT Inspection Generic in the Inspection menu. The NDT Inspection Generic page opens.                                      Figure 5.7: NDT Inspection Generic page 5.7.1 Add an NDT Inspection Generic If you want to add an NDT inspection generic, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the NDT Inspection Generic page. A new window opens to add an NDT Inspection generic. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new NDT inspection generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI weld VI generic. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In the Requisition box, select the type of request from a drop-down list. In the Welding Position box, enter the position of welding. In the Weld Type box, enter the type of welding. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness of the welding. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Welder box, select the name of a welder from a drop-down list. In the WPS box, enter the WPS detail. In the Process box, select the welding process to be done from a specified category. In the NDT Type box, select the type of NDT to be done from a specified category. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The NDT inspection generic is added successfully. Once you have added the NDT inspection generic, you must add the RFI data for the added NDT inspection generic. 5.7.2 Add RFI Data for the Added NDT Inspection Generic If you want to add RFI data for the added NDT inspection generic, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the NDT Inspection Generic See Fig 5.7. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1st Inspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.7.3 Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the NDT Inspection Generic page. See Fig 5.7. 5.7.4 Submit an NDT Inspection Generic Once you have added the NDT inspection generic, the Submission column in the NDT Inspection Generic page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the added NDT inspection generic, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.7.5 Print an NDT Inspection Generic Report If you want to print an NDT inspection generic report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the NDT Inspection Generic page. See Fig 5.7. 5.7.6 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client Once the NDT inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the NDT Inspection Generic page. 5.7.7 Attach a File into an NDT Inspection Generic If you want to attach any file with any NDT inspection generic added in the NDT Inspection Generic page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.7.8 Edit Any NDT Inspection Generic If you want to edit any existing NDT inspection generic in the NDT Inspection Generic page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT inspection generic. See Fig 5.7. A new window opens to edit the NDT inspection generic. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.7.9 Export NDT Inspection Generic List You can export a list of NDT inspection generic added in the NDT Inspection Generic page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.7.10 Filter Any NDT Inspection Generic If you want to filter any NDT inspection generic from the list of NDT inspection generic in the NDT Inspection Generic page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.8 NDT Inspection Request The NDT Inspection Request tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an NDT inspection request to perform the NDT inspection. 5.8.1 Add an NDT Inspection Request If you want to add an NDT inspection request, do the following Click the NDT Inspection Request tab in the Inspection menu. A new page opens to add an NDT inspection request.                                    Figure 5.8: NDT Inspection Request page Tip: A report number and the request adding date for a new NDT inspection request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the Date boxes, respectively. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Requested By box, enter the name of person who has requested for the inspection. In the To box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Attention box, enter any note if you want for attention. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail. In the Requisition box, select the type of request from a drop-down list. In the Welding Position box, enter the position of welding. In the Weld Type box, enter the type of welding. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness of the welding. In the NDT Procedure Number, select the NDT procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Criteria box, enter the detail of acceptance criteria. In the Test Specification box, enter the test specification detail. In the Construction Code box, enter the construction code. In the NDT Type box, select any type of NDT you want to add. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Note: Before saving the added NDT request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added NDT inspection request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an NDT inspection request”. Click Save. 5.8.2 Add Joints for an NDT Inspection Request If you want to add joints for any added NDT inspection request, do the following, Click the check box of the respective joints. Click (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. The selected joints are successfully added for the NDT inspection request. 5.9 View NDT Request The View NDT Request tab helps you to view and edit the added NDT inspection request, which is added by using the NDT Inspection Request tab. Click the View NDT Request tab in the Inspection menu. The View NDT Inspection List page opens with a list of added NDT inspection requests.                                        Figure 5.9: View NDT Inspection List page 5.9.1 Change the Inspection Date for Any Added NDT Inspection Request If you want to change the inspection date of any added NDT inspection request, Click (Edit icon) in the Inspection Date column for the respective NDT inspection request, See Fig 5.9. The Edit Form window opens. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. Click Save. 5.9.2 Print an NDT Inspection Request Report If you want to print an NDT inspection request report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the View NDT Inspection List page. See Fig 5.9. 5.9.3 Edit Any NDT Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing NDT Inspection request in the View NDT Inspection List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT inspection request. See Fig 5.9. The NDT Inspection Request page opens to edit the NDT Inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.9.4 Export NDT Inspection Request List You can export a list of NDT inspection request added in the View NDT Inspection List page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.9.5 Filter Any NDT Inspection Request If you want to filter any NDT inspection request from the list of NDT inspection requests in the View NDT Inspection List page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.10  RFI Request for Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) PWHT is defined as a heat treatment after welding performed to strengthen the weld metal and heat affected zone. Thus, decreasing hardness and improving toughness, and decreasing the residual stresses associated with welding. The RFI Request for PWHT tab in the Inspection menu used to add an RFI request for PWHT. Click the RFI Request for PWHT tab in the Inspection menu. The RFI Request for PWHT page opens.                                          Figure 5.10: RFI Request for PWHT page 5.10.1 Add an RFI Request for PWHT If you want to add an RFI request for PWHT, do the following, Click   (ADD button) in the RFI Request for PWHT page. See Fig 5.10. A new window opens to add an RFI request for PWHT. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Location box, enter a location where the inspection to be done. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the NDT Type box, select PWHT. In the Search Joints List by ISO/ Drawing No box, select a drawing number from a drop-down list. The Joint numbers and the piece mark numbers will be listed for the selected drawing number. If you want to add joints, click  (Add icon) of the respective joint number. The added joints will be moved into the left side window of the RFI Request for PWHT page. Click Save AFI Request. The RFI request for PWHT is successfully added. 5.10.2 Submit and Approve an RFI Request for PWHT Once you have added the RFI request for PWHT, the Request Status column in the RFI Request for PWHT page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the RFI request for PWHT, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI request for PWHT, the Completed Status column in the RFI Request for PWHT page is appeared with (Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the RFI request for PWHT, click  (Submit icon) in the Completed Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.10.3 Attach a File into an RFI Request for PWHT If you want to attach any file with any RFI request for PWHT listed in the RFI Request for PWHT page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.10.4 Print an RFI Request for PWHT Report If you want to print an RFI request for PWHT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Request for PWHT page. See Fig 5.12. 5.10.5 Edit Any RFI Request for PWHT If you want to edit any existing RFI request for PWHT in the RFI Request for PWHT page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI request for PWHT. See Fig 5.10. A new window opens to edit the RFI request for PWHT. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save AFI Request. 5.10.6 Export RFI Request for PWHT You can export a list of RFI request for PWHT added in the RFI Request for PWHT page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.11 NDT Job Order The NDT Job Order tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add a job order for a specific NDT-contractor to carry out the NDT inspection. Once you have added the job order, you can add the NDT request including the quantity and schedule date to complete the NDT inspection. If you want to navigate NDT Job Order, Click the NDT Job Order tab in the Inspection menu. The Job Order page opens.                                                          Figure 5.11: Job Order page 5.11.1 Add NDT Job Order If you want to add an NDT job order, do the following, Click    (ADD button) in the Job Order page. See Fig 5.11. A new window opens to add an NDT job order. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new job order will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT Contractor box, select the name of an NDT contractor from a drop-down list. In the Attention box, enter any note if you want for attention. In the Date box, select the date of adding an NDT job order. In the Job No box, enter the job number. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested for an NDT job order. In the Requested Date box, select requested date of an NDT job order. In the Supported By boxes, enter the name of a project lead and a HOD, respectively. Click Save. The NDT job order is successfully added. 5.11.2 Add an NDT request Click (Add icon) of the respective job order in the Add NDT Request column of the Job Order See Fig 5.13. A new window shows a list of added NDT request. If you want to add any request, click  (Add icon) of the respective request. The added NDT request will be assigned under the respective job order. If you want to delete any request, click  (Delete icon) of the respective request. 5.11.3 Attach a File into an NDT Job Order If you want to attach any file with any NDT job order listed in the Job Order page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.11.4 Print an NDT Job Order Report If you want to print an NDT job order report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Job Order page. See Fig 5.11. 5.11.5 Edit Any NDT Job Order If you want to edit any existing NDT job order in the Job Order page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT job order. See Fig 5.11. A new window opens to edit the job order. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.11.6 Export NDT Job Order List You can export a list of NDT job order added in the Job Order page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.12 NDT Job Verification The NDT Job Verification tab helps you to add an NDT job verification request. This tab helps the NDT contractor to verify the quantity of job done based on the request issued. If you want to navigate NDT Job Verification, Click the NDT Job Verification tab in the Inspection menu. The Job Verification page opens.                                                   Figure 5.12: Job Verification page 5.12.1 Add NDT Job Verification If you want to add an NDT job verification, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Job Verification page. See Fig 5.12. A new window opens to add an NDT job verification request. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new job verification will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT Contractor box, select the name of an NDT contractor from a drop-down list. In the Date box, select the date of adding an NDT job verification request. In the Job No box, enter the job number. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who prepared the NDT job verification request. In the Prepared Date box, select prepared date of the NDT job verification request. In the Checked By box, enter the name of a person who has checked the request. In the Checked Date box, select checked date of the request. In the Verified By box, enter the name of a person who has verified the request. Click Save. The NDT job verification request is successfully added. 5.12.2 Attach a File into an NDT Job Verification Request If you want to attach any file with any NDT job verification request listed in the Job Verification page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.12.3 Print an NDT Job Verification Report If you want to print an NDT job verification report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Job Verification page. See Fig 5.12. 5.12.4 Edit Any NDT Job Verification Request If you want to edit any existing NDT job verification request in the Job Verification page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT job verification request. See Fig 5.12. A new window opens to edit the job order. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.12.5 Export NDT Job Verification Request List You can export a list of NDT job verification request added in the Job Verification page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.13 Survey form The Survey form tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a survey form. To navigate the Survey form, Click the Survey form tab in the Inspection menu. The Survey form page opens.                                             Figure 5.13: Survey form page 5.13.1 Add a Survey Form If you want to add a survey form, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Survey form page. See Fig 5.13. A new window opens to add a survey form. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Report Number box, enter the report number of the survey form. In the Request Date box, select the request date of the survey form. In the Part Number box, enter the part number for the survey form. In the Part Description box, enter the description for the added part number. In the Inspection Request Date box, select the inspection request date. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done. In the Batch Number box, enter the batch number for the survey form. In the Drawing Number box, enter the drawing number for the survey form. In the Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) Document Number box, enter ITP document number. In the Section / Clause Number box, enter the section / clause number. In the Reference Number box, enter the reference number. In the Report Number box, enter the report number. In the Report Number box, enter the report number. In the Type of Inspection option, select the required inspection types from the given inspection type list. Click Save. The survey form is successfully added. 5.13.2 Attach a File into a Survey Form If you want to attach any file with any survey form added in the Survey form page,  follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.13.3 Submit and Approve a Survey Form Once you have added the surveyor, the Submission column in the Survey form page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the survey form, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the survey form. Once you have submitted the survey form, the Approval column in the Survey form page is appeared with  (Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the survey form, click (Submit icon) in the Approval Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the survey form. 5.13.4 Print a Structural Survey Report If you want to print a structural survey report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Survey form page. See Fig 5.13. 5.13.5 Edit Any Survey Form If you want to edit any existing survey form in the Survey form page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective survey form. See Fig 5.13. A new window opens to edit the survey form. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.13.6 Export Survey Form List You can export a list of survey forms added in the Survey Form page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.14 Dimensional Inspection Request The Dimensional Inspection Request tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a dimensional inspection request. To navigate to the dimensional inspection request adding page, Click Dimensional Inspection Request in the Inspection menu. The Dimensional Inspection Request page opens.                                Figure 5.14: Dimensional Inspection Request page 5.14.1 Add a Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to add a new dimensional inspection request, do the following steps. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of dimensional inspection. In the Location box, select the location where the dimensional inspection to be performed. Before saving the added dimensional inspection request, you must add spools. You can add multiple spools for one dimensional inspection request. Note: The page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the specific spools, use the filter options provided in the System, Line Number, Drawing Number, and Spool Number columns. Click  (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of inspection items. Click Save. The dimensional inspection request will be added and listed in the Dimensional Inspection List page. 5.15 Dimensional Inspection List The Dimensional Inspection List tab helps you to view and edit the dimensional inspection request, which is added by using the Dimensional Inspection Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new dimensional inspection request. Click Dimensional Inspection List in the Inspection menu. The Dimensional Inspection List page opens with a list of added dimensional inspection requests.                                     Figure 5.15: Dimensional Inspection List page 5.15.1 Add a Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to add a dimensional inspection request, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Dimensional Inspection List page. The system redirects you into the Dimensional Inspection Request page. To know how to add a dimensional inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Dimensional Inspection Request”. Once you have added the dimensional inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the dimensional inspection. 5.15.2 Add Representative for Added Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to add a representative for any added dimensional inspection request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective spool release request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.15.3 Edit Any Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing dimensional inspection request in the Dimensional Inspection List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective dimensional inspection request. See Fig 5.15. The page opens with the details of the selected dimensional inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.15.4 Submit a Dimensional Inspection Request Once you have added the dimensional inspection request, the Request Status column in the Dimensional Inspection List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.15. If you want to submit the dimensional inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the dimensional inspection. 5.15.5 Add Results of Dimensional Inspection After completing the dimensional inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Dimensional Inspection List window opens with a list of added spools. In the Result column, select the result for each spool from the given result options. In the Pipe Size column, select the result of pipe size. In the Dimension column, select the result of pipe dimension. In the Flange column, select the result of flange. In the Orientation column, select the result of orientation. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.15.6 View a Dimensional Inspection Report If you want to view a dimensional inspection report, click  (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Dimensional Inspection List page. See Fig 5.15. 5.15.7 Attach a File into a Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with an existing dimensional inspection request listed in the Dimensional Inspection List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.15.8 Export Dimensional Inspection Request List You can export a list of dimensional inspection requests added in the Dimensional Inspection List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 5.15.9 Filter Dimensional Inspection Request If you want to filter any dimensional inspection request in the Dimensional Inspection List page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Dimensional Inspection List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.16 Inspection Release Note The Inspection Release Note tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an inspection release note. If you want to navigate the inspection release note adding page, Click Inspection Release Note in the Inspection menu. The Inspection Release Note page opens.                                  Figure 5.16: Inspection Release Note page 5.16.1 Add an Inspection Release Note If you want to add an inspection release note, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Inspection Release Note page. A new window opens to add an Inspection release note. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date and time of inspection. In the Location box, select a location where the inspection to be held. In the System/Area box, enter the name of area/system. In the Sub System No box, enter the sub system number. In the Item to be Released field, select the detail of the item to be released that is whether Piping or Structural. If another item means select the checkbox of Others and enter the item detail. In the Item to be Released for field, select the reason of the item to be released for that is whether for Pressure Test or Blasting & Painting. If any other reason means select the checkbox of Others and enter the reason. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number. In the Revision box, enter the revision for the weld map drawing. In the Description box, enter the description for the weld map drawing. In the Quantity box, enter the quantity of the weld map drawing. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Update. The weld map drawing is updated. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the inspection release note. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the inspection release note. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the inspection release note. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the inspection release note. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the inspection release note. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the inspection release note. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Send Request. The inspection release will be added and listed in the Inspection Release Note page. 5.16.2 Add RFI Data for the Added Inspection Release Note If you want to add RFI data for the added inspection release note, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Inspection Release Note See Fig 5.16. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1st Inspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.16.3 Submit and Approve an NDT Inspection Generic Once you have added the inspection release note, the Submission column in the Inspection Release Note page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the inspection release note, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the inspection release note, the Request Status column in the Inspection Release Note page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the inspection release note, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.16.4 Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Inspection Release Note page. See Fig 5.16. 5.16.5 Print an Inspection Release Note If you want to print an inspection release note, click  (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Inspection Release Note page. See Fig 5.16. 5.16.6 Attach a File into an Inspection Release Note If you want to attach a file with an inspection release note added in the Inspection Release Note page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.16.7 Edit Any Inspection Release Note If you want to edit any existing inspection release note in the Inspection Release Note page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT inspection generic. See Fig 5.16. A new window opens to edit the inspection release note. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.16.8 Export Inspection Release Note List You can export a list of inspection release notes added in the Inspection Release Note page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.17 Blasting and Painting Inspection Report The Blasting and Painting Inspection Report tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a blasting and painting inspection report. If you want to navigate the blasting and painting inspection report adding page, Click Blasting and Painting Inspection Report in the Inspection menu. The Blasting and Painting Inspection List page opens.                               Figure 5.17: Blasting and Painting Inspection List page 5.17.1 Add a Blasting and Painting Inspection Report If you want to add a blasting and painting inspection report, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. A new window opens to add the blasting and painting inspection report details. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date and time of inspection. In the Location box, select a location where the inspection to be held. In the Paint System No box, enter the paint system number. In the System/Area box, enter the name of area/system. In the Sub System No box, enter the sub system number. Before saving the blasting and painting inspection report, you must add the weld map drawing detail. Click   (ADD button) in the Weld Map Drawing Detail window. The Edit Form window shows a new window to add the details of weld map drawing. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number. In the Revision box, enter the revision for the weld map drawing. In the Description box, enter the description for the weld map drawing. In the Quantity box, enter the quantity of the weld map drawing. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Update. The weld map drawing is updated. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the blasting and painting inspection report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the blasting and painting inspection report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the blasting and painting inspection report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the blasting and painting inspection report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the blasting and painting inspection report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the blasting and painting inspection report. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Send Request. The blasting and painting inspection report will be added and listed in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. 5.17.2 Add RFI Data for the Added Blasting and Painting Inspection Report If you want to add RFI data for the added blasting and painting inspection report, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List See Fig 5.17. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.17.3 The RFI data is successfully added. Once you have added the blasting and painting inspection report, the Submission column in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the blasting and painting inspection report, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the blasting and painting inspection report, the Request Status column in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the blasting and painting inspection report, click  (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have approved the blasting and painting inspection report, the Result column will be enabled with  (Add icon) to add the blasting and painting inspection results. 517.4 Add Blasting and Painting Inspection Results If you want to add the blasting and painting inspection results, Click (Add icon) in the Result column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. The page shows a new window. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column. The page shows the Surface Preparation, Paint Preparation, and Paint Application windows. In the Surface Profile Height box, enter the surface profile height value. In the Cleaning Method box, enter the cleaning method detail. In the Surface Cleanliness box, select the surface cleanliness level. In the Abrasive Manufacturer box, enter the abrasive manufacturer detail. In the Abrasive Type box, enter the type name of abrasive. In the Abrasive Grade box, enter the grade level of abrasive. In the Date & Time box, select the date and time. Click Save. In the Paint Preparation window, enter the detail of 1st coat, 2nd coat and 3rd coat in the respective columns. Click Save changes. In the Airless Spray box, enter the airless spray method detail. In the Conventional Spray box, enter the conventional spray method detail. In the Roller/Brush box, enter the roller/brush detail. Click Save. In the Paint Application window, enter the detail of 1st coat, 2nd coat and 3rd coat in the respective columns. Click Save changes. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. In the 1st Coat Date & Time box, select the date and time of 1st coat. In the 2nd Coat Date & Time box, select the date and time of 2nd coat. In the 3rd Coat Date & Time box, select the date and time of 3rd coat. Click Save. 5.17.5 Print an RFI Report If you want to print an RFI report, click  (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. See Fig 5.17. 5.17.6 Print a Blasting and Painting Inspection Report If you want to print a blasting and painting inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. See Fig 5.17. 5.17.7 Attach a File into a Blasting and Painting Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with a blasting and painting inspection report added in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.17.8 Edit Any Blasting and Painting Inspection Report If you want to edit any existing blasting and painting inspection report in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective blasting and painting inspection report. See Fig 5.17. A new window opens to edit the blasting and painting inspection report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.17.9 Export Blasting and Painting Inspection Report List You can export a list of blasting and painting inspection reports added in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.18 Painting and Coating Final Inspection Report The Painting and Coating FIR tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a painting and coating inspection report. If you want to navigate the painting and coating inspection report adding page, Click Painting and Coating FIR in the Inspection menu. The Painting and Coating FIR page opens.                                      Figure 5.18: Painting and Coating FIR page 5.18.1 Add a Painting and Coating FIR If you want to add a painting and coating FIR, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Painting and Coating FIR page. A new window opens to add the painting and coating inspection report details. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Location box, select the location where the painting and coating inspection to be performed. In the Reference Drawing box, select a reference drawing from a drop-down list. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the No of Coat Applied box, enter the number of applied coating. In the Shift box, enter the shift detail. In the Specification box, enter the specification detail. In the Job/Item Description box, enter the description for the job/item. In the Painted Surface box, enter the painted surface detail. In the Client Paint Specification box, enter the client paint specification detail. In the Surface Preparation box, enter the surface preparation detail. In the Painting/Coating Type box, enter the painting/coating type. In the Visual Inspection box, enter the visual inspection detail. In the Top Coat D.F.T box, enter the top coat detail. In the Degree of Cured box, enter the degree of cured. In the Pinhole Testing box, enter the pinhole testing detail. In the Wet Sponge Method box, enter the wet sponge method detail. In the Holiday Detection box, enter the holiday detection detail. In the Brush Coil box, enter the brush coil detail. In the K.V Setting (For Pipeline) box, enter the K.V setting detail for pipeline. Before saving the painting and coating inspection report, you must add the weld map drawing detail. Click (ADD button) in the Weld Map Drawing Detail The Edit Form window shows a new window to add the details of weld map drawing. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number. In the Revision box, enter the revision for the weld map drawing. In the Description box, enter the description for the weld map drawing. In the Quantity box, enter the quantity of the weld map drawing. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Update. The weld map drawing is updated. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the painting and coating inspection report. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the painting and coating inspection report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the painting and coating inspection report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the painting and coating inspection report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the painting and coating inspection report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the painting and coating inspection report. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Send Request. The painting and coating inspection report will be added and listed in the Painting and Coating FIR page. 5.18.2 Add RFI Data for the Added Painting and Coating FIR If you want to add RFI data for the added painting and coating inspection report, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Painting and Coating FIR page. See Fig 5.18. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. In the Inspection Details option, select 1stInspection, 2nd Inspection or 3rd Inspection according to the inspection details. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date. Click Save. The RFI data is successfully added. 5.18.3 Submit and Approve a Painting and Coating FIR Once you have added the painting and coating inspection report, the Submission column in the Painting and Coating FIR page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the painting and coating inspection report, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the painting and coating inspection report, the Request Status column in the Painting and Coating FIR page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the painting and coating inspection report, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.18.4 Print an RFI report If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Painting and Coating FIR page. See Fig 5.18. 5.18.5 Print a Painting and Coating FIR If you want to print a painting and coating inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Painting and Coating FIR page. See Fig 5.18. 5.18.6 Attach a File into a Painting and Coating Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with a painting and coating inspection report added in the Painting and Coating FIR page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.18.7 Edit Any Painting and Coating FIR If you want to edit any existing painting and coating inspection report in the Painting and Coating FIR page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective painting and coating inspection report. See Fig 5.18. A new window opens to edit the painting and coating inspection report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.18.8 Export Painting and Coating FIR list You can export a list of painting and coating inspection reports added in the Painting and Coating FIR page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.18.9 Filter Painting and Coating FIR If you want to filter any specific painting and blasting inspection request in the Painting and Coating FIR page, you can filter the request based on the Spool No filter box. 5.19 RFI Hydro Pressure Hydro Pressure Inspection is the technique in which pipes used in the structural project, are tested at required design pressure of the pipes to check the leak and strength. You can add a request for hydro pressure inspection by using the RFI Hydro Pressure tab in the Inspection menu. 5.19.1 Add an RFI Hydro Pressure Request If you want to add an RFI hydro pressure request, do the following steps, Click RFI Hydro Pressure in the Inspection menu. The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens.                                           Figure 5.19: RFI Hydro Pressure page In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Description box, enter the description for the hydro pressure inspection. In the Drawing No box, select a drawing number. In the System box, select a system. In the Test Type box, select a test type. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure value. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure value. In the Classification box, enter the classification detail. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time range. In the Test Medium box, enter the test medium detail. In the Job Code box, enter the job code. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Before saving the added NDT request, you must add the pressure gauge details. Click (ADD button) in the Pressure Gauge Details window. In the Type of Test box, select a type of test. In the Description box, enter the description detail. In the Serial No box, enter the serial number. In the Certificate No box, enter the certificate number. In the Calibration Date box, select the calibration date. In the Expiry Date box, select the expiry date. Click Save Request. The hydro pressure inspection request will be added and listed in the RFI Hydro Pressure page. 5.20 View RFI Hydro Pressure The View RFI Hydro Pressure tab helps you to view and edit the hydro pressure inspection request, which is added by using the RFI Hydro Pressure tab. This tab also allows you to add a new hydro pressure request. Click View RFI Hydro Pressure in the Inspection menu. The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens with a list of added hydro pressure requests.                                                Figure 5.20: RFI Hydro Pressure page 5.20.1 Add a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request If you want to add a hydro pressure inspection request, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Hydro Pressure page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new hydro pressure inspection request. To know how to add a hydro pressure inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request”. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new hydro pressure inspection request. To know how to add a hydro pressure inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request”. 5.20.2 Edit Any Existing Hydro Pressure Inspection Request If you want to edit any existing hydro pressure inspection request in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective hydro pressure inspection request. See Fig 5.20. The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens with the details of the selected hydro pressure inspection request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.20.3 Submit and Approve a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request Once you have added the hydro pressure inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the hydro pressure inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the hydro pressure inspection request, the Request Status column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the hydro pressure inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The hydro pressure inspection request will be moved for hydro pressure inspection. 5.20.4 View a Hydro Pressure Inspection Report If you want to view a hydro pressure inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the RFI Hydro Pressure page. See Fig 5.20. 5.20.5 Attach a File into a hydro pressure inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing hydro pressure inspection request listed in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.20.6 View Signature Details of Inspectors You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the hydro pressure inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page. 5.20.7 Export Hydro Pressure Inspection Request List You can export a list of hydro pressure requests added in the RFI Hydro Pressure page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 5.20.8 Filter Hydro Pressure Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific hydro pressure inspection request in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Hydro Pressure page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.21 RFI Mechanical Completion Request Mechanical completion takes place through all phases of the piping project, starting at equipment supplier and continuing through fabrication up to commissioning phase. Mechanical completion encompasses all disciplines. If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request, Click RFI Mechanical Completion Request in the Inspection menu. The RFI Mechanical Completion Request page opens.                                Figure 5.21: RFI Mechanical Completion Request page 5.21.1 Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the name of the location. Before saving the added RFI mechanical completion request, you must add a system. You can add multiple system for one request. Note: The page shows a list of added systems. If you want to view the specific system, use the filter options provided in the System, Sub System, Drawing Number, Equipment Number and Check Records columns. Select  (Add icon) of the respective system which you want to add. The added system will be moved into the right side of the page. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. Click Save. The RFI mechanical completion request will be added and listed in the View RFI Mechanical Completion page. 5.22 View RFI Mechanical Completion The View RFI Mechanical Completion tab helps you to view and edit the RFI mechanical completion request, which is added by using the RFI Mechanical Completion Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI mechanical completion request. Click View RFI Mechanical Completion in the Inspection menu. The View RFI Mechanical Completion List page opens with a list of added RFI mechanical completion requests.                                   Figure 5.22: View RFI Mechanical Completion List page 5.22.1 Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new RFI mechanical completion request. To know how to add an RFI mechanical completion request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request”. Once you have added the RFI mechanical completion request, you must submit the added request to perform mechanical completion inspection. 5.22.2 Edit Any RFI Mechanical Completion Request If you want to edit any existing mechanical completion request in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI mechanical completion request. See Fig 5.22. The RFI Mechanical Completion Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI mechanical completion request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.22.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Mechanical Completion Request Once you have added the RFI mechanical completion request, the Submission column in the RFI Mechanical Completion Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the mechanical completion request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the mechanical completion request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the mechanical completion request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The mechanical completion request will be moved for mechanical completion inspection. 5.22.4 Add Results of Mechanical Completion Inspection After completing the mechanical completion inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of test pack added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each test pack from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Approve All & Save. 5.22.5 View a Mechanical Completion Inspection Report If you want to view a mechanical completion inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. See Fig 5.22. 5.22.6 Attach a File into a Mechanical Completion inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing mechanical completion inspection request listed in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.22.7 Export Mechanical Completion Inspection Request List You can export a list of mechanical completion inspection requests added in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and     (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” 5.22.8 Filter Any Mechanical Completion Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific mechanical completion inspection request in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.23 RFI Static Commissioning Static Commissioning take place when Mechanical completion is completed for a system or part of a system. If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request, Click RFI Static Commissioning in the Inspection menu. The RFI Static Commissioning Request page opens.                                 Figure 5.23: RFI Static Commissioning Request page 8.23.1 Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request, do the following steps, In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the name of the location. Before saving the added RFI static commissioning request, you must add a system. You can add multiple systems for one request. Note: The page shows a list of added systems. If you want to view the specific system, use the filter options provided in the System, Sub System, Drawing Number, Equipment Number and Check Records columns. Select the checkbox of the respective system which you want to add. The added systems will be moved into the right side of the page. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail. Click Save. The RFI mechanical completion request will be added and listed in the View RFI Static Commissioning page. 5.24 View RFI Static Commissioning The View RFI Static Commissioning tab helps you to view and edit the RFI static commissioning request, which is added by using the RFI Static Commissioning tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI static commissioning request. Click View RFI Static Commissioning in the Inspection menu. The View RFI Static Commissioning List page opens with a list of added RFI static commissioning requests.                           Figure 5.24: View RFI Static Commissioning List page 5.24.1 Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page. The system redirects you to a new page to add a new RFI static commissioning request. To know how to add an RFI static commissioning request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request”. Once you have added the RFI static commissioning request, you must submit the added request to perform the static commissioning. 5.24.2 Edit Any RFI Static Commissioning Request If you want to edit any existing static commissioning request in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI static commissioning request. See Fig 5.24. The RFI Static Commissioning Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.24.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Static Commissioning Request Once you have added the RFI static commissioning request, the Submission column in the RFI Static Commissioning Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the static commissioning request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click   (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the static commissioning request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons). If you want to approve the static commissioning request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The static commissioning request will be moved for static commissioning inspection. 5.24.4 Add Results of Static Commissioning Inspection After completing the static commissioning inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request. The Result window opens a list of system added for the particular request. In the Result column, select the result of each system from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Approve All & Save. 5.24.5 View a Static Commissioning Inspection Report If you want to view a static commissioning inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Static Commissioning List page. See Fig 5.24. 5.24.6 Attach a File into a Static Commissioning Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any existing static commissioning inspection request listed in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.24.7 Export Static Commissioning Inspection Request List You can export a list of static commissioning inspection requests added in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 5.24.8 Filter Any Static Commissioning Inspection Request If you want to filter any specific static commissioning inspection request in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Static Commissioning List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.25 Weekly Welders Performance Record The Weekly Welders Performance Record tab in the Inspection menu helps you to view the welders performance record on a weekly basis. To view the report, Click Weekly Welders Performance Record in the Inspection menu. The Weekly Welders Performance Record page opens.                       Figure 5.25: Weekly Welders Performance Record page If you want to view the weekly welders performance record for all project, select the checkbox of the All Project option. In the NDT Type box, select an NDT type. In the Joint Category box, select a joint category. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates. Click Show Report. 5.25.1 Print Weekly Welders Performance Record If you want to print a weekly welders performance record, use and  (print icons) provided in the Weekly Welders Performance Record page. If you want to print the current page of the weekly welders performance record, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weekly welders performance record, click (print icon). 5.25.2 View Weekly Welders Performance Record You can view the weekly welders performance record in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weekly Welders Performance Record page. 5.26 RFI Fit up Request (Unique Numbers) The RFI Fit up Request tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add an RFI fit up request to check the fit-up quality of pipes and joints used in the structural project by a sub-contractor. 5.26.1 Add an RFI Fit up Request If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following Click the RFI Fit up Request tab in the Inspection menu. A new page opens to add an RFI fit up request.                              Figure 5.26: A page for adding an RFI fit up request Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new RFI fit up request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Sub Contractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Note: Before saving the added RFI fit up request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added fit up request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an RFI fit up request”. Click Save. 5.26.2 Add Joints for an RFI Fit up Request This page shows a list of joints for the corresponding weld map drawing. If you want to add joints for any added RFI Fit up request, do the following, In the Weld Map Drawing box, select a weld map drawing number from a drop-down list. A list of joints including the piece mark numbers opens for the selected weld map drawing. Click the check box of the respective joints. Click  (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. To update WPS number and unique number for the added joints, do one of the following steps, If you want to update the WPS number for any joint, click the WPS Number column for the respective joint and then select the WPS number from a drop-down list. Enter the unique number for the corresponding joint number in the respective Unique Number column. Note: If you want to update the same WPS number of first joint to other joints, click  (Update WPS No button). The WPS number for the first joint will be updated for other joints. If you want to update the WPS number, unique number, piece mark number details together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Added Joints box. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a pre-defined template. The template contains a list of added joints. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the WPS, piece mark and other details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the joint details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the joints in the worksheet will be updated. Click Save. The RFI Fit up request is successfully added and moved to the View RFI Fit up tab. 5.27 View RFI Fit up (Unique Numbers) The View RFI Fit up tab helps you to view and edit the RFI fit up request, which added by using the RFI Fit up Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI fit up request. Click the View RFI Fit up tab in the Inspection menu. The REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page opens with a list of added RFI fit up requests.                                           Figure 5.27: Request for Inspection page 5.27.1 Add an RFI Fit up Request If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. A new page opens to add an RFI fit up request. To know how to add an RFI fit up request, see the topic, “Add an RFI fit up request”. Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 5.27.2 Submit an RFI Fit up Request Once you have added the RFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.27. If you want to submit the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.27.3 Add a Representative for Any RFI Fit up Request If you want to add a representative for any added RFI fit up request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI fit up request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.27.4 Print an RFI Fit up Report If you want to print an RFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. See Fig 5.27. 5.27.5 Add Result Details of RFI Fit up Inspection If you want to add the inspection results details of an added RFI fit up inspection request, do the following, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. The Joint Details window opens. If you want to check and update the joint details automatically, click  (Check and update button). If you want to update the joint details manually, do the following steps, Click the respective number in the WPS Number column and change the WPS number from a drop-down list. Click the respective number in the Unique Number column and change the unique number from a drop-down list. Click Save changes. 5.27.6 Attach a File into an RFI Fit up Request If you want to attach any file with any RFI fit up request listed in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.27.7 Edit Any RFI Fit up Request If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request. See Fig 5.27. The page shows the added details of the RFI fit up request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.27.8 Export RFI Fit up Request List You can export a list of RFI fit up request added in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.27.9 Filter Any RFI Fit up Request If you want to filter any RFI fit up request from the list of RFI fit up requests in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, you can use  the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.28 View Application for Inspection (AFI) Fit up (Unique Numbers) The View AFI Fit up allows you to add a new AFI fit up request. This tab also helps you to view and edit the added AFI fit up request. Click the View AFI Fit up tab in the Inspection menu. The INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page opens.                               Figure 5.28: INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page 5.28.1 Add an AFI Fit up Request If you want to add an AFI fit up request, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page. The AFI Request page opens to add an AFI fit up request. Tip: A report number and RFI number for a new AFI fit up request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and RFI Number boxes. In the Representative (AI) box, enter representative name for the application inspection and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Representative (Client) box, enter representative name from the client and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Representative (Contractor) box, enter representative name from the contractor and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Activity Code As Per ITP box, select the activity code as per ITP from a drop-down list. In the Activity Code As Per Client box, select the activity code as per client from a drop-down list. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of items to be inspected. In the Subject Coverage box, enter the subject coverage detail. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. Note: Before saving the added AFI fit up request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added fit up request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an AFI fit up request”. Click Save. 5.28.2 Add Joints for an AFI Fit up Request If you want to add joints for any added AFI fit up request, do the following, Once you enter the details to add an AFI fit up request, a list of joints including the joint numbers, sheet numbers, and drawing numbers opens. Click the check box of the respective joints. Click (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. Click Save. The selected joints are successfully added for the AFI fit up request. Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 5.28.3 Submit an AFI Fit up Request Once you have added the AFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.28. If you want to submit the AFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.28.4 Change the Added Representative for Any AFI Fit up Request If you want to change the added representative for any AFI fit up request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective AFI fit up request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, edit the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.28.5  Print an AFI Fit up Report If you want to print an AFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page. See Fig 5.28. 5.28.6 Add Result Details of AFI Fit up Inspection If you want to update results for the AFI fit up inspection request, do the following, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page. A new window opens. In the Result column, select the results of AFI inspection from a drop-down list, for the respective drawing and joint numbers. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.28.7 Attach a File into an AFI Fit up Request If you want to attach any file with any AFI fit up request listed in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.28.8 Edit Any AFI Fit up Request If you want to edit any existing AFI fit up request in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective AFI fit up request. See Fig 5.28. The page shows the added details of the AFI fit up request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.28.9 Export AFI Fit up Request List You can export a list of AFI fit up request added in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.28.10 Filter Any AFI Fit up Request If you want to filter any AFI fit up request from the list of AFI fit up requests in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.29 RFI Weld VI Request (Unique Numbers) The RFI Weld VI Request tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add an RFI weld VI request to perform visual inspection of welded pipes and joints used in the structural project by a sub-contractor. 5.29.1 Add an RFI weld VI request If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following, Click the RFI Weld VI Request tab in the Inspection menu. The REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page opens to add an RFI weld VI request.                                Figure 5.29: REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new RFI weld VI request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. In the Sub Contractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Note: Before saving the added RFI weld VI request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added RFI weld VI request by using a box provided in the left side of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an RFI weld VI request”. Click Save. 5.29.2 Add Joints for an RFI Weld VI Request This page shows a list of joints for the corresponding weld map drawing. If you want to add joints for any added RFI weld VI request, do the following, In the Weld Map Drawing box, select a weld map drawing number from a drop-down list. A list of joints including the piece mark numbers opens for the selected weld map drawing. Click the check box of the respective joints. Click (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. To update WPS number and unique number for the added joints, do one of the following steps, If you want to update the WPS number for any joint, click the WPS Number column for the respective joint and then select the WPS number from a drop-down list. Enter the unique number for the corresponding joint number in the respective Unique Number column. Note: If you want to update the same WPS number of first joint to other joints, click (Update WPS No button). The WPS number for the first joint will be updated for other joints. If you want to update the WPS number, unique number, piece mark number details together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Added Joints box. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a pre-defined template. The template contains a list of added joints. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Once you have added the WPS, piece mark and other details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the joint details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the joints in the worksheet will be updated. Click Save. The RFI weld VI request is successfully added. 5.30 View RFI Weld VI (Unique Numbers) The View RFI Weld VI tab helps you to view and edit the RFI weld VI request, which added by using the RFI Weld VI Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI weld VI request. Click the View RFI Weld VI tab in the Inspection menu. The REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page opens with a list of added RFI weld VI requests.                               Figure 5.30: REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page 5.30.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. A new page opens to add an RFI weld VI request. To know how to add an RFI weld VI request, see the topic, “Add an RFI weld VI request”. Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, you must submit the added request for inspection. 5.30.2 Submit an RFI Weld VI Request Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.30. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.30.3 Add a Representative for Any RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add a representative for any added RFI weld VI request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI weld VI request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.30.4 Add Result for an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to add for the added RFI weld VI inspection request, do the following, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.30. A new window opens including the drawing number, joint number and WPS number for the respective RFI weld VI request. In the Result column, select the results from a drop-down list based on your inspection. 5.30.5 Print an RFI Weld VI Report If you want to print an RFI weld VI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. See Fig 5.30. 5.30.6 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Request If you want to attach any file with any RFI weld VI request listed in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.30.7 Edit Any RFI Weld VI Request If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI request in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.30. The page shows the added details of the RFI weld VI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.30.8 Export RFI Weld VI Request List You can export a list of RFI weld VI request added in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.30.9 Filter Any RFI Weld VI Request If you want to filter any RFI weld VI request from the list of RFI weld VI requests in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.31 View AFI Weld VI (Unique Numbers) The View AFI Weld VI allows you to add a new AFI weld VI request. This tab also helps you to view and edit the added AFI weld VI request. Click the View AFI Weld VI tab in the Inspection menu. The WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page opens.                               Figure 5.31: WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page 5.31.1 Add an AFI Weld VI Request If you want to add an AFI weld VI request, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page. The WELD VI - AFI Request page opens to add an AFI weld VI request. Tip: A report number and RFI number for a new AFI weld VI request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and RFI Number boxes. In the Representative (AI) box, enter representative name for the application inspection and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Representative (Client) box, enter representative name from the client and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Representative (Contractor) box, enter representative name from the contractor and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively. In the Activity Code As Per ITP box, select the activity code as per ITP from a drop-down list. In the Activity Code As Per Client box, select the activity code as per client from a drop-down list. In the Examination Area box, enter the detail of examination area. In the Viewing Condition box, enter the viewing condition detail. In the Project Specification box, enter the project specification detail. In the Instrument box, select an instrument from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, enter the surface condition detail. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Description/ Code Acceptance box, enter the description or the code acceptance detail for the inspection. In the Inspection Item/ Technique Used box, enter the details of items to be inspected or used technique detail. In the Subject Coverage/ Object box, enter the subject coverage or object detail. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. Note: Before saving the added AFI weld VI request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added weld VI request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an AFI fit up request”. Click Save. 5.31.2 Add Joints for an AFI Weld VI Request If you want to add joints for any added AFI weld VI request, do the following, Once you enter the details to add an AFI weld VI request, a list of joints including the joint numbers, sheet numbers, and drawing numbers opens. Click the check box of the respective joints. Click  (Add Selected Joints button). The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page. Click Save. The selected joints are successfully added for the AFI weld VI request. The AFI weld VI request is successfully added. Once you have added the AFI weld VI request, you must submit the added weld VI request for inspection. 5.31.3 Submit an AFI Weld VI Request Once you have added the AFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.31. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 5.31.4 Change a Representative for Any AFI Weld VI Request If you want to change a representative for any added AFI weld VI request, Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective AFI weld VI request. The Edit Form window opens. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative. Click Save. 5.31.5 Add Result for an AFI Weld VI Request If you want to add result for the added AFI weld VI inspection request, do the following, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page, for the respective AFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.31. A new window opens including the drawing number and joint number for the respective AFI weld VI request. In the Result column, select the results from a drop-down list based on your inspection. Click Save. 5.31.6 Print an AFI Weld VI Report If you want to print an AFI weld VI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page. See Fig 5.31. 5.31.7 Attach a File into an AFI Weld VI Request If you want to attach any file with any AFI weld VI request listed in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.31.8 Edit Any AFI Weld VI Request If you want to edit any existing AFI weld VI request in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective AFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.31. The page shows the added details of the AFI weld VI request. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.31.9 Export AFI weld VI Request List You can export a list of AFI weld VI request added in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.31.10 Filter Any AFI Weld VI Request If you want to filter any AFI weld VI request from the list of AFI weld VI requests in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.32 Dust Level Dust level test is performed to check the dust level. The Dust Level tab in the Inspection menu used to perform the dust level in the Structural project. Click Dust Level in the Inspection menu. The Dust Level page opens.                                                       Figure 5.32: Dust Level page 5.32.1 Add a Dust Level If you want to add a dust level, Click  (ADD button) in the Dust Level See Fig 5.32. The page shows a new window to add the details of the dust level. In the Painting System box, enter the painting system name. In the Item No box, enter the item number. In the Date of Testing box, select the dust level testing date. In the Abrasives Used box, enter the detail of abrasives used in the dust level testing. In the Equipment Used box, enter the detail of equipment used in the dust level testing. In the Acceptable Level box, enter the acceptable level detail. Click Save. The added dust level test will be listed in the Dust Level page. 5.32.2 Edit a Dust Level If you want to edit any existing dust level in the Dust Level page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective dust level. See Fig 5.32. The Dust Level page shows the details of the selected dust level. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 5.32.3 Delete a Dust Level If you want to delete any existing dust level in the Dust Level page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Dust Level page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”. 5.32.4 Attach a File into a Dust Level If you want to attach any file with any dust level listed in the Dust Level page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 5.32.5 Print a Dust Level Report If you want to print a dust level report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Dust Level page. See Fig 5.32. 5.32.6 Export Dust Level List You can export a list of dust levels added in the Dust Level page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 5.32.7 Filter Any Dust Level If you want to filter any specific dust level, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Dust Level page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.33 Blotter Test Blotter test is used to check the cleanliness of the compressed air, where the compressed air free from any form of contaminants is necessary before its usage. The Blotter Test tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add the results of blotter test. Click Blotter Test in the Inspection menu. The Blotter Test page opens.                                                Figure 5.33: Blotter Test page 5.33.1 Add a Blotter Test Report If you want to add a blotter test report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Blotter Test page. The page shows a new window to add the details of the blotter test report. In the Location box, enter the location name. In the Date of Testing box, select the date of blotter test. In the Test Method box, enter the test method detail. In the Acceptable Level box, enter the acceptable level detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The blotter test report will be added and listed in the Blotter Test page.  Once you have added the blotter test report, you must add the results of blotter test. 5.33.2 Add Results of Blotter Test After completing the blotter test, you can add the blotter test result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective report. The Result window opens with the test readings. In the Result column, select the result of each test reading from the given result options in the drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. 5.33.3 Edit Any Blotter Test Report If you want to edit any existing blotter test report in the Blotter Test page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective blotter test report. See Fig 5.33. The Blotter Test page opens with the details of the selected blotter test report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.33.4 View a Blotter Test Report If you want to view a blotter test report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Blotter Test page. See Fig 5.33. 5.33.5 Attach a File into a Blotter Test Report If you want to attach a file with any existing blotter test report listed in the Blotter Test page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.33.6 Export Blotter Test Report List You can export a list of blotter test report list added in the Blotter Test page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 5.33.7 Filter Any Blotter Test Report If you want to filter any specific blotter test report in the Blotter Test page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Blotter Test page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.34 Fairing Report The Fairing Report tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add the results of fairing test. Click Fairing Report in the Inspection menu. The Fairing Report page opens.                                         Figure 5.34: Fairing Report page 5.34.1 Add a Fairing Report If you want to add a fairing report, do the following steps, Click  (ADD button) in the Fairing Report page. The page shows a new window to add the details of the fairing report. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the fairing report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the fairing report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the fairing report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the fairing report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the fairing report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the fairing report. Click Save. The fairing report will be added and listed in the Fairing Report page.  Once you have added the fairing report, you must add the results of fairing test. 5.34.2 Add Results of Fairing Test After completing the fairing test, you can add the fairing test result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective report. The Fairing Request Details window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Fairing Request Details window. In the Description box, enter the description for the fairing test. In the Drawing No box, enter the drawing number. In the Temperature box, enter the temperature value. In the Deformation Status box, enter the deformation status detail. In the Structural Thickness box, enter the structural thickness value. In the Structural Thickness box, enter the structural thickness value. In the Type of Material box, enter the type of material. Click Save. 5.34.3 Edit Any Fairing Report If you want to edit any existing fairing report in the Fairing Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective fairing report. See Fig 5.34. The Fairing Report page opens with the details of the selected fairing report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.34.4 View a Fairing Report If you want to view a fairing report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Fairing Report page. See Fig 5.34. 5.34.5 Attach a File into a Fairing Report If you want to attach a file with any existing fairing report listed in the Fairing Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.34.6 Export Fairing Report List You can export a list of fairing report list added in the Fairing Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 5.34.7 Filter Any Fairing Report If you want to filter any specific fairing report in the Fairing Report page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Fairing Report page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.35 Chloride Test The Chloride Test tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add the results of chloride test. Click Chloride Test in the Inspection menu. The Chloride Test page opens.                                         Figure 5.35: Chloride Test page 5.35.1 Add a Chloride Test Report If you want to add a chloride test report, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Chloride Test page. The page shows a new window to add the details of the chloride test report. In the Surface Preparation box, enter the surface preparation detail. In the Location box, enter the location detail. In the Date of Testing box, select the date of chloride test. In the Test Method box, enter the test method detail. In the Acceptance Level box, enter the acceptance level detail. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The chloride test report will be added and listed in the Chloride Test page.  Once you have added the chloride test report, you must add the results of chloride test. 5.35.2 Add Results of Chloride Test After completing the chloride test, you can add the chloride test result details. To add results, do the following steps, Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective report. The Chloride Request Details window opens. Click ADD button) in the Chloride Request Details window. In the Test Reading box, enter the test reading detail. In the Position box, enter the position detail. In the Result box, select the result of the chloride test. Click Save. 5.35.3 Edit Any Chloride Test Report If you want to edit any existing chloride test report in the Chloride Test page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective chloride test report. See Fig 5.35. The Chloride Test page opens with the details of the selected chloride test report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 5.35.4 View a Chloride Test Report If you want to view a chloride test report, click  (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Chloride Test page. See Fig 5.34. 5.35.5 Attach a File into a Chloride Test Report If you want to attach a file with any existing chloride test report listed in the Chloride Test page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”. 5.35.6 Export Chloride Test Report List You can export a list of chloride test report list added in the Chloride Test page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”. 5.35.7 Filter Any Chloride Test Report If you want to filter any specific chloride test report in the Chloride Test page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Chloride Test page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 5.36 Inspection Requisition Summary Report The Inspection Requisition Summary tab in the Inspection menu used to view the inspection requisition summary report for a particular period. Click Inspection Requisition Summary in the Inspection menu. The Requisition Inspection Summary page opens.                                Figure 5.36: Requisition Inspection Summary page In the Start Date and End Date boxes, select the start and end dates. Click Get Report. The inspection requisition summary report for the selected period will be opened. 5.36.1 Print an Inspection Requisition Summary Report If you want to print an inspection requisition summary report, use  and (print icons) provided in the Requisition Inspection Summary page. If you want to print the current page of the inspection requisition summary report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the inspection requisition summary report, click (print icon). 5.36.2 Export an Inspection Requisition Summary Report You can export the inspection requisition summary report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Requisition Inspection Summary page. Structural 6.0 Structural The Structural menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add result after performing structural related inspections. This menu also helps you to view structural reports, graphical reports, and other reports. 6.1 Radiographic Testing (RT) The RT method is one of the NDT inspection methods used for inspecting the materials in the structural project by using either x-rays or gamma rays.  Once the RT inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the RT inspection result details by using this Radiographic Testing (RT) tab. If you want to navigate Radiographic Testing (RT), Click the Radiographic Testing (RT) tab in the Structural menu. The RT Report page opens.                                                      Figure 6.1: RT Report page 6.1.1 Add an RT Report If you want to add an RT report, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1. A new window opens to add an RT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new RT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the Request Number box, select an RT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the RT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the RT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the RT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the RT report. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the RT report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the RT report. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job. Click Save. The RT report is successfully added. Once you have added the RT report, you must add RT results for the respective added RT report. 6.1.2 Add RT Results If you want to add the RT results for the respective RT report, do the following, Click the respective added RT report in the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1. The RT Results window opens.                                                    Figure 6.1.1: RT Results page In the Image Quality Indicator (IQI) box, select IQI from a drop-down list. In the Source & Size (MM) box, select the RT source and their size from a drop-down list. In the Density box, enter the radiographic density range. In the Code box, select the code of the material from a drop-down list. In the Procedure Number box, select the procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Sensitivity (%) box, set the radiographic sensitivity by using up and down arrows. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the RT report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the RT report. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job. Click Save. The RT report is successfully added. Once you have added the RT report, you must add RT results for the respective added RT report. 6.1.2 Add RT Results If you want to add the RT results for the respective RT report, do the following, Click the respective added RT report in the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1. The RT Results window opens.                                                     Figure 6.1.1: RT Results page In the Image Quality Indicator (IQI) box, select IQI from a drop-down list. In the Source & Size (MM) box, select the RT source and their size from a drop-down list. In the Density box, enter the radiographic density range. In the Code box, select the code of the material from a drop-down list. In the Procedure Number box, select the procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Sensitivity (%) box, set the radiographic sensitivity by using up and down arrows. In the Developing Time (Mins) box, set the developing time by using up and down arrows. In the Film/ Type box, select the name of a film including type from a drop-down list. In the Placement of IQI box, select any one option from source side and film side. In the Source to Object Distance (SOD) box, enter the distance range between the source and the object. In the Screens Type box, enter the type of screens. In the Visible Wire/ Hole box, enter the relevant detail. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Source to Film Distance (SFD)box, enter the distance range between the source and the film. In the Focus Film Distance (FFD) box, enter the focus film distance range. In the Source box, select any one source option whether inside, outside, or other. In the Technique box, select the radiographic technique from a drop-down list. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, select the condition of the surface from the specified options. In the Source Strength box, enter the source strength range. In the Exposure Time (Mins) box, set the exposure time by using up and down arrows. In the Note box, enter any note if you want. Click Save RT Details. The RT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the RT results, you must import joints added for the RT inspection. 6.1.3 Import Joints If you want to import joints for the updated RT results, Click (Import Joints button) in the RT Results See Fig 6.1.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective RT results. Once you have imported the joints, you must add the marker results. 6.1.4 Add Marker Results If you want to add marker results for the respective RT results, Click  (Add icon) for the respective RT results. The Marker Results window opens. If you want to add any additional markers, Set the number in the No. of Additional Markers box by using up and down arrows. Click (ADD button). If you want edit any existing marker results,  Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective marker results. A new window opens to edit the marker results. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and edit the marker results. Click Save. If you want delete any existing marker results, click  (Delete icon) for the respective marker results. 6.1.5 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated RT results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the RT Results window. See Fig 6.1.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.1.6 Attach a File into an RT Report If you want to attach any file with any RT report listed in the RT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.1.7 Print an NDT – RT report If you want to print an NDT - RT report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1. 6.1.8 Edit Any RT Report If you want to edit any existing RT report in the RT Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RT report. See Fig 6.1. A new window opens to edit the RT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.1.9 Export RT Report List You can export a list of RT reports added in the RT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.1.10 Filter Any RT Report If you want to filter any RT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any RT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any RT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any RT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.2 Ultrasonic Testing (UT) The UT method is one of the NDT inspection methods used for inspecting the materials in the structural project by using high frequency sound waves.  Once the UT inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the UT inspection result details by using this Ultrasonic Testing (UT) tab. If you want to navigate Ultrasonic Testing (UT), Click the Ultrasonic Testing (UT) tab in the Structural menu. The UT Report page opens.                                                             Figure 6.2: UT Report page 6.2.1 Add an UT Report If you want to add an UT report, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2. A new window opens to add an UT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new UT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the Request Number box, select an UT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the UT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the UT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the UT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the UT report. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the UT report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the UT report. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job. Click Save. The UT report is successfully added. Once you have added the UT report, you must add UT results for the respective added UT report. 6.2.2 Add UT Results If you want to add the UT results for the respective UT report, do the following, Click the respective added UT report in the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2. The UT Results window opens.                                                Figure 6.2.1: UT Results page In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description about the UT inspection. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list. In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Couplant box, select the couplant material from a drop-down list. In the Test Procedure Number box, select the test procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Simulation Blocks box, enter the detail of simulation blocks. In the Ref. Hole Diameter box, enter the diameter value of the reference hole. In the Sensitivity Setting box, enter the information about the sensitivity setting. In the Sides Scanned box, enter the details of the sides that are scanned. In the Special Equipment box, enter the name of the special equipment if any. In the Computerized Program Name box, enter the computerized program name. In the Surface Scanned box, the details of the surfaces that are scanned. In the Flaw Detector box, select a flaw detector from a drop-down list. In the Scan Limitation box, enter the limitation range of scanning. In the Bevel Type box, enter the type of the bevel. In the Specification box, select the specification from a drop-down list. In the Calibration Block box, select the calibration block from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Technique box, select the technique from a drop-down list. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. In the Surface Condition box, select the surface condition from the specified options. Click Save UT Details. The UT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the UT results, you must add the probe and cable details for the UT inspection. 6.2.3 Add Probe and Cable details If you want to add probe and cable details for the updated UT results, Click  (Add Probe/ Cable button) in the Probe& Cable Details window. See Fig 6.2.1. A new window opens to add the probe and cable details. In the Probe box, select a probe from a drop-down list. In the Cable box, select a cable from a drop-down list. In the Ref. dB box, enter the reference decibel range. In the Surf Comp dB box, enter the decibel range of the surface component. In the Test Range (MM) box, enter the test range in millimeters. In the Reference Level box, enter the reference level detail. In the Scanning dB box, enter the scanning decibel range. In the TR Loss box, enter the transmission loss detail. Click Save. The probe and cable details are successfully added. Once you have added the probe and cable details, you must add the reference setting details. 6.2.4 Add Reference Setting details If you want to add the reference setting details for the updated UT results, Click   (Add Reference Setting button) in the Reference Setting Details See Fig 6.2.1. A new window opens to add the reference setting details. In the Reference Block box, select the reference block from a drop-down list. In the Probe Sr. No box, select the serial number of the probe from a drop-down list. In the Reference box, enter the reference detail. In the Eqpt Gain (dB) box, enter the equipment gain in decibels. In the Damping box, enter the damping ratio. In the Rejection box, enter the rejection detail. In the Amplitude Height box, enter the amplitude height range. In the Skip box, enter the skip detail. In the Beam Path box, enter the beam path detail. In the Range box, enter the range detail. Click Save. The reference setting details are successfully added. Once you have added the reference setting details, you must import joints for the updated UT results. 6.2.5 Import Joints for UT If you want to import joints for the updated UT results, Click  (Import Joints button) in the UT Results See Fig 6.2.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective UT results. Once you have imported the joints, you must add the UT detail results. 6.2.6 Add UT Results If you want to add UT detail results for the respective UT results, Click (Add icon) for the respective UT results. The UT Detail Results window opens. Click (ADD button) in the UT Detail Results window. A new window opens in the Probes column. Select the probe from a drop-down list. Enter other details in the respective columns. Click Save. 6.2.7 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated UT results, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the UT Results See Fig 6.2.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.2.8 Attach a File into an UT Report If you want to attach any file with any UT report listed in the UT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.2.9 Print an NDT – UT Report If you want to print an NDT - UT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2. 6.2.10 Edit Any UT report If you want to edit any existing UT report in the UT Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective UT report. See Fig 6.2. A new window opens to edit the UT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.2.11 Export UT Report List You can export a list of UT reports added in the UT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.2.12 Filter Any UT Report If you want to filter any UT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any UT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any UT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any UT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.3 Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT) The DPT method is one of the oldest and simplest NDT inspection methods used for inspecting the materials in the structural project by using ultraviolet or white light, depending on the type of dye used - fluorescent or non fluorescent (visible). PT also called liquid penetrate inspection (LPI) or penetrant testing (PT). Once the UT inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the UT inspection result details by using this Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT) tab. If you want to navigate Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT), Click the Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT) tab in the Structural menu. The PT Report page opens.                                                 Figure 6.3: PT Report page 6.3.1 Add a DPT Report If you want to add a DPT report, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the PT Report page. See Fig 6.3. A new window opens to add an PT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the Request Number box, select an PT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PT report. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the PT report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PT report. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job. Click Save. The PT report is successfully added. Once you have added the PT report, you must add PT results for the respective added PT report. 6.3.2 Add DPT Results If you want to add the DPT results for the respective PT report, do the following, Click the respective added PT report in the PT Report page. See Fig 6.3. The DPT Results window opens.                                            Figure 6.3.1: DPT Results page In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail. In the Description box, enter the description. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface. In the Dwell Time box, enter dwell time range. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value. In the Cleaner box, select the cleaner from a drop-down list. In the Penetrant box, select the penetrant from a drop-down list. In the Developer box, select the developer from a drop-down list. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value. In the Development Time box, enter the time for development. In the Welding Process box, enter the type of welding process. In the Code box, enter the code detail. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. In the Item Tested box, select the tested items from the specified options. In the Inspection Method box, select the inspection method from the specified options. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save DPT Details. The DPT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the DPT results, you must import joints added for the DPT inspection results. 6.3.3 Import Joints for DPT If you want to import joints for the updated DPT results, Click    (Import Joints button) in the DPT Results window. See Fig 6.3.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective DPT results. 6.3.4 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated DPT results, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the DPT Results window. See Fig 6.3.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.3.5 Attach a File into a DPT Report If you want to attach any file with any DPT report listed in the PT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.3.6 Print an NDT – DPT report If you want to print an NDT - PT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the PT Report page. See Fig 6.3. 6.3.7 Edit Any DPT report If you want to edit any existing DPT report in the RT Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective DPT report. See Fig 6.3. A new window opens to edit the DPT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.3.8 Export DPT Report List You can export a list of DPT reports added in the PT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.3.9 Filter Any DPT Report If you want to filter any DPT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any DPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any DPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any DPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.4 PT After Load Test The PT After Load Test tab in the Structural menu helps you to add PT results while performing the PT inspection after completing the load test. Once the PT after load test inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the PT result details by using this PT After Load Test tab. If you want to navigate PT After Load Test, Click the PT After Load Test tab in the Structural menu. The PT After Load Test Report page opens.                                      Figure 6.4: PT After Load Test Report page 6.4.1 Add a PT after load test report If you want to add a PT after load test report, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the PT After Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.4. A new window opens to add a PT after load test report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the Request Number box, select an PT request number after load test from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PT report after load test. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PT report after load test. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PT report after load test. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PT report after load test. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the PT report after load test. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PT report after load test. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job. Click Save. The PT report after load test is successfully added. Once you have added the PT report, you must add PT results for the respective PT report. 6.4.2 Add PT Results If you want to add the PT results for the respective PT report after load test, do the following, Click the respective added PT report in the PT After Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.4. The PT After Load Test Results page opens.                                    Figure 6.4.1: PT After Load Test Results page In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail. In the Description box, enter the description. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface. In the Dwell Time box, enter dwell time range. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value. In the Cleaner box, select the cleaner from a drop-down list. In the Penetrant box, select the penetrant from a drop-down list. In the Developer box, select the developer from a drop-down list. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value. In the Development Time box, enter the time for development. In the Welding Process box, enter the type of welding process. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save PTLT Details. The PT after load test results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the PT results, you must import joints added for the PT after load test inspection results. 6.4.3 Import Joints for PT After Load Test If you want to import joints for the updated PT after load test results, Click (Import Joints button) in the PT After Load Test Results window. See Fig 6.4.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click  (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective DPT results. 6.4.4 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated PT after load test results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the PT After Load Test Results See Fig 6.4.1. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.4.5 Attach a file into a PT After Load Test Report If you want to attach any file with any PT report listed in the PT After Load Test Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.4.6 Print an NDT – PT After Load Test Report If you want to print an NDT – PT after load test report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the PT After Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.4. 6.4.7 Edit Any PT After Load Test Report If you want to edit any existing PT report in the PT After Load Test Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PT report. See Fig 6.4. A new window opens to edit the PT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.4.8 Export PT after load test report list You can export a list of PT reports added in the PT After Load Test Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.4.9 Filter Any PT After Load Test Report If you want to filter any PT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any PT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT After Load Test Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the PT After Load Test Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the PT After Load Test Report page, and then Click Search. 6.5 Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT) MPT also referred to as Magnetic Particle Inspection is one of the NDT inspection methods used to detect defects or discontinuities such as cracks, at or near the surface in ferromagnetic metals such as iron, steel, nickel, cobalt and so on. Once the MPT inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the MPT inspection result details by using this Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT) tab. If you want to navigate Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT), Click the Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT) tab in the Structural menu. The MT Report page opens.                                                Figure 6.5: MT Report page 6.5.1 Add an MPT Report If you want to add an MPT report, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5. A new window opens to add an MPT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new MPT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the Request Number box, select an MPT request number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the MPT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the MPT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the MPT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the MPT report. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the MPT report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the MPT report. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job. Click Save. The MPT report is successfully added. Once you have added the MPT report, you must add MPT results for the respective MPT report. 6.5.2 Add MPT Results If you want to add the MPT results for the respective MPT report, do the following, Click the respective MPT report in the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5. The MPT Results window opens.                                              Figure 6.5.1: MPT Results page In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Black Magnetic Ink box, select the type of black magnetic ink from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface. In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail. In the White Contrast Paint box, select the type of white contrast paint. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value. In the Type of Current box, enter the type of current. In the Lifting Capacity box, select the lifting capacity value. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Yoke/ Prod Space box, enter the relevant information. In the Particles Type box, select the type of particles from a drop-down list. In the Particles Make & model box, enter the model of the particle including made of materials. In the Background Contrast & Type box, enter the type of background including contrast range. In the Demagnetization box, if you want demagnetization select Yes otherwise select No. In the Magnetizing Technique box, enter the magnetizing technique. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value. In the Calibration Sensitivity box, enter the calibration sensitivity range. In the Method of Inspection box, enter the inspection method. In the Code box, enter the code detail. In the Color box, select any color from the specified options. In the Suspension box, select any suspension liquid from the specified options. In the Lighting box, select any lighting from the specified options. In the Method box, select any method from the specified options. In the Item Tested box, select the tested items from the specified options. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options. Click Save MPT Details. The MPT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the MPT results, you must import joints added for the MPT inspection results. 6.5.3 Import Joints for MPT If you want to import joints for the updated MPT results, Click (Import Joints button) in the MPT Results See Fig 6.5.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective MPT results. 6.5.4 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated MPT results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the MPT Results window. See Fig 6.5.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.5.5 Attach a File into an MPT Report If you want to attach any file with any MPT report listed in the MT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.5.6 Print an NDT – MPT Report If you want to print an NDT - MPT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5. 6.5.7 Edit Any MPT Report If you want to edit any existing MPT report in the MT Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MPT report. See Fig 6.5. A new window opens to edit the MPT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.5.8 Export MPT Report List You can export a list of MPT reports added in the MT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.5.9 Filter Any MPT Report If you want to filter any MPT report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any MPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any MPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any MPT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.6 MPI After Load Test (MPI) The MPI After Load Test (MPI) tab in the Structural menu helps you to add MPI results while performing the MPI inspection after completing the load test. Once the MPI after load test inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the MPI result details by using this MPI After Load Test (MPI) tab. If you want to navigate MPI After Load Test (MPI), Click the MPI After Load Test (MPI) tab in the Structural menu. The MPI Report page opens.                                               Figure 6.6: MPI Report page 3.6.1 Add an MPI After Load Test Report If you want to add an MPI after load test report, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the MPI Report page. See Fig 6.6. A new window opens to add an MPI after load test report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new MPI report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the Request Number box, select an MPI request number after load test from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the MPI report after load test. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the MPI report after load test. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the MPI report after load test. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the MPI report after load test. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the MPI report after load test. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the MPI report after load test. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job. Click Save. The MPI report after load test is successfully added. Once you have added the MPI report, you must add MPI results for the respective MPI report. 6.6.2 Add MPI Results If you want to add the MPI results for the respective MPI report after load test, do the following, Click the respective MPI report in the MPI Report page. See Fig 6.6. The MPI Results page opens.                                                   Figure 6.6.1: MPI Results page In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list. In the Black Magnetic Ink box, select the type of black magnetic ink from a drop-down list. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface. In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail. In the White Contrast Paint box, select the type of white contrast paint. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value. In the Type of Current box, enter the type of current. In the Lifting Capacity box, select the lifting capacity value. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list. In the Yoke/ Prod Space box, enter the relevant information. In the Particles Type box, select the type of particles from a drop-down list. In the Particles Make & model box, enter the model of the particle including made of materials. In the Background Contrast & Type box, enter the type of background including contrast range. In the Demagnetization box, if you want demagnetization select Yes otherwise select No. In the Magnetizing Technique box, enter the magnetizing technique. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save MPI Details. The MPI results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the MPI results, you must import joints added for the MPI inspection results. 6.6.3 Import Joints for MPI If you want to import joints for the updated MPI results, Click (Import Joints button) in the MPI Results See Fig 6.6.1. The Joints window opens with a list of joints. Select the joints you want to import. Click (Import Selected Joints button). The selected joints are imported for the respective MPI results. 6.6.4 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated MPI results, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the MPI Results See Fig 6.6.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.6.5 Attach a File into an MPI Report If you want to attach any file with any MPI report listed in the MPI Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.6.6 Print an NDT – MPI Report If you want to print an NDT - MPI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the MPI Report page. See Fig 6.6. 6.6.7 Edit Any MPI Report If you want to edit any existing MPI report in the MPI Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MPI report. See Fig 6.6. A new window opens to edit the MPI report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.6.8 Export MPI Report List You can export a list of MPI reports added in the MPI Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.6.9 Filter any MPI report If you want to filter any MPI report, do one of the following, If you want to filter any MPI report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the MPI Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any MPI report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the MPI Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any MPI report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the MPI Report page, and then Click Search. 6.7 PWHT The PWHT tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a PWHT report after completing the PWHT inspection process. If you want to add a PWHT report, do the following, Once the RFI request for PWHT added using the RFI Request for PWHT tab, you can add the PWHT result details by using this PWHT tab. If you want to navigate PWHT, Click the PWHT tab in the Structural menu. The PWHT Report page opens.                                                     Figure 6.7: PWHT Report page 9.7.1 Add a PWHT Report If you want to add a PWHT report, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the PWHT Report page. See Fig 6.7. A new window opens to add a PWHT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PWHT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. In the Request Number box, select an RFI request for PWHT number from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PWHT report. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PWHT report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PWHT report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PWHT report. In the Accepted/ Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the PWHT report. In the Accepted/ Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PWHT report. Click Save. The PWHT report is successfully added. Once you have added the PWHT report, you must add PWHT result details for the respective PWHT report. 6.7.2 Add PWHT Results If you want to add the PWHT results for the respective PWHT report, do the following, Click the respective PWHT report in the PWHT Report page. See Fig 6.7. The PWHT Results page opens.                                                  Figure 6.7.1: PWHT Results page In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. In the Material Specification box, enter the specification for the material. In the Speed box, enter the speed range. In the HT Procedure No box, select the HT procedure number. In the Heating Rate box, enter the heating rate value. In the Holding (Temperature) box, enter the holding temperature. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time value. In the Cooling Rate box, enter the cooling rate value. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save PWHT Details. The PWHT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the PWHT results, you can edit the joints added for the PWHT inspection results in the Joint Results window. 6.7.3 Add Report Photos If you want to add any report photos for the updated PWHT results, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the PWHT Results See Fig 6.7.1. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.7.4 Attach a File into a PWHT Report If you want to attach any file with any PWHT report listed in the PWHT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.7.5 Print a PWHT Report If you want to print a PWHT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the PWHT Report page. See Fig 6.7. 6.7.6 Edit Any PWHT Report If you want to edit any existing PWHT report in the PWHT Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PWHT report. See Fig 6.7. A new window opens to edit the PWHT report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.7.7 Export PWHT Report List You can export a list of PWHT reports added in the PWHT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.7.8 Filter Any PWHT Report If you want to filter any PWHT report, use (FILTER button) in the PWHT Report page, See Fig 6.7 or do one of the following, If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search. If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search. 6.8 Hydrostatic Report Hydrostatic testing is a type of pressure test where the materials are tested for strength and leaks. The Hydrostatic Report tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a hydrostatic pressure test report after completing the hydrostatic testing in the structural project. If you want to add a hydrostatic pressure test report, do the following, Click the Hydrostatic Report Tab. The Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page opens.                                     Figure 6.8: Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page 6.8.1 Add a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report If you want to add a hydrostatic pressure test report, Click (ADD button) in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. See Fig 6.8. A new window opens to add a hydrostatic pressure test report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new hydrostatic pressure test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Drawing box, select the drawing from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the hydrostatic pressure test report. In the Prepared Date box, select the preparation date of the report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the hydrostatic pressure test report. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the report. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the hydrostatic pressure test report. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the report. Click Save. The hydrostatic pressure test report is successfully added. Once you have added the hydrostatic pressure test report, you must add the pressure test result details for the added report. 6.8.2 Add Pressure Test Results for an Added Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report If you want to add the details of pressure test results for the added hydrostatic pressure test report, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report  See Fig 6.8. Multiple windows open.                                          Figure 6.8.1: Pressure test results page If you want to add test parameters, do the following steps, Navigate to the Test Parameters window. See Fig 6.8.1. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure value. In the Test Temperature box, enter the test temperature value. In the Item/Part box, select any item/part from a drop-down list. In the Test Medium box, enter the test medium information. In the Holding Period box, enter the holding period value. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure value. In the Test Date box, select the test date. In the Position box, enter the position detail. In the Operating Pressure box, enter the operating pressure value. In the Hydrostatic Test (HT) Procedure No box, enter the hydrostatic test procedure number. In the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) box, enter the maximum allowable working pressure value. In the Design Temperature box, enter the design temperature value. In the Maximum Allowable Pressure (MAP)box, enter the maximum allowable pressure value. In the Results/ Remarks box, select the result from a drop-down list. In the Chloride box, enter the chloride value. In the Actual Test Pressure box, enter the actual test pressure value. In the Test Location box, enter the test location detail. In the Test Observation box, enter the test observation detail. In the Test Code box, select the test code from the specified options. Click Save. The test parameters are successfully added. If you want to add equipment details, do the following steps, Navigate to the Equipment Details window. See Fig 6.8.1. In the Conducted By box, select any one option whether internal or external from a drop-down list. In the Position box, select the position from a drop-down list. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment from a drop-down list. Click Save. The equipment details are successfully added. If you want to add test record, do the following, Navigate to the Test Records window. See Fig 6.8.1. In the Time box, enter the time duration of testing. In the PG- Bottom box, enter the pressure value in the bottom of the bars. In the PG- Top box, enter the pressure value in the top of the bars. In the Water box, enter the temperature of the water. In the Air box, enter the temperature of the air. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The test records are added successfully. If you want to add report photos, do the following, Navigate to the Report Photos window. See Fig 6.8.1. Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.8.3 Print a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report If you want to print a hydrostatic pressure test report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. See Fig 6.8. 6.8.4 Print a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report with Certificates If you want to print a hydrostatic pressure test report with certificates, click (print icon) provided in the Report with Certificates column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. See Fig 6.8. 6.8.5 Attach a File into a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report If you want to attach any file with any hydrostatic pressure test report listed in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.8.6 Edit Any Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report If you want to edit any existing hydrostatic pressure test report in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective hydrostatic pressure test report. See Fig 6.8. A new window opens to edit the hydrostatic pressure test report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.9 Vacuum Test Vacuum test performed to check for the existence of any leak in the materials utilized in the Structural project.  The Vacuum Test tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a vacuum test report once the vacuum test has completed. If you want to add a vacuum test report, do the following, Click the Vacuum Test Tab. The Vacuum Test page opens.                                                  Figure 6.9: Vacuum Test page 6.9.1 Add a Vacuum Test Report If you want to add a vacuum test report, Click (ADD button) in the Vacuum Test Report page. See Fig 6.9. A new window opens to add a vacuum test report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new vacuum test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the vacuum test. In the Sub-System box, select the sub-system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation detail. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal detail. In the Location box, enter the location where the vacuum test is performed. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The vacuum test report is successfully added. 6.9.2 Submit and Approve a Vacuum Test Report Once you have added the vacuum test report, the Submission column in the Vacuum Test page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the vacuum test report, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the vacuum test report, the Request Status column in the Vacuum Test page is appeared with (Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the vacuum test report, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 6.9.3 Print a Vacuum Test Report If you want to print a vacuum test report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Vacuum Test Report page. See Fig 6.9. 6.9.4 Attach a File into a Vacuum Test Report If you want to attach any file with any vacuum test report listed in the Vacuum Test page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.9.5 Edit Any Vacuum Test Report If you want to edit any existing vacuum test report in the Vacuum Test page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective vacuum test report. See Fig 6.9. A new window opens to edit the vacuum test report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.9.6 Export Vacuum Test Report List You can export a list of vacuum test reports added in the Vacuum Test page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.9.7 Filter Any Vacuum Test Report If you want to filter any vacuum test report from the list of in the Vacuum Test page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 6.10 Back-Gouging Back-gouging is a removing process performed to remove weld metal and base metal from the weld root side by grinding, gas cutting or by using gouging electrode. The Back-Gouging tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a back-gouging report once the back-gouging process has completed. If you want to add a back-gouging report, do the following, Click the Back-Gouging Tab. The Back-Gouging page opens.                                              Figure 6.10: Back-Gouging page 6.10.1 Add a Back-Gouging Report If you want to add a back-gouging report, Click (ADD button) in the Back-Gouging page. See Fig 6.10. A new window opens to add a back-gouging report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new back-gouging report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the back-gouging. In the Sub-System box, select the sub-system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation detail. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal detail. In the Location box, enter the location where the back-gouging is performed. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The back-gouging report is successfully added. 6.10.2  Add Back-Gouging Report Photos Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Back-Gouging page. See Fig 6.10. The Report Photos box opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Parameters box. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.10.3 Submit and Approve a Back-Gouging Report Once you have added the back-gouging report, the Submission column in the Back-Gouging page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the back-gouging report, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the back-gouging report, the Request Status column in the Back-Gouging page is appeared with  (Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the back-gouging report, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 6.10.4 Print a Back-Gouging Report If you want to print a back-gouging report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Back-Gouging page. See Fig 6.10. 6.10.5 View the Back-Gouging Signature Details If you want to view the signature details of the persons who has completed the back-gouging, click (Sign icon) provided in the Sign Details column of the Back-Gouging page. See Fig 6.10. 6.10.6 Attach a File into a Back-Gouging Report If you want to attach any file with any back-gouging report listed in the Back-Gouging page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.10.7 Edit Any Back-Gouging Report If you want to edit any existing back-gouging report in the Back-Gouging page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective back-gouging report. See Fig 6.10. A new window opens to edit the back-gouging report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.10.8 Export Back-Gouging Report List You can export a list of back-gouging reports added in the Back-Gouging page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.10.9 Filter Any Back-Gouging Report If you want to filter any back-gouging report from the list of in the Back-Gouging page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 6.11 Final Visual Visual testing is one of methods of NDT of optical type. Final visual testing is usually performed with the naked eye or with magnifying glasses (magnifiers) with magnification up to 7x. The Final Visual tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a final visual test report after completing the final visual test. If you want to add a final visual test report, do the following, Click the Final Visual Tab. The Final Visual Test page opens.                                                     Figure 6.11: Final Visual Test page 6.11.1 Add a Final Visual Test Report If you want to add a final visual test report, Click (ADD button) in the Final Visual Test page. See Fig 6.11. A new window opens to add a final visual test report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Report Number box, enter the report number for the final visual test. In the Description box, enter the description for the final visual test. In the System box, select the system from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation detail. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal detail. In the Location box, enter the location where the final visual test is performed. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Assessment Checklist box, enter the assessment checklist detail. In the Checklist No box, select the check list number from a drop-down list. In the Discipline box, enter the discipline detail. In the Site box, enter the site detail. In the Contractor box, enter the name of a contractor. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Module No box, enter the module number. In the Area/ Component box, enter the area/ component detail. In the Stage of Completion box, select the stage of completion of visual test from the given options. In the Document Type box, enter the type of document. In the Class box, enter the class detail. In the Status box, enter the status of the visual test. In the Rev. Date box, enter the revision date of the visual test. In the Contractor Document Number box, enter the document number of the contractor. In the Equipment box, enter the equipment name. In the Inspector/ Representative box, enter the name of inspector/ representative. In the Detail Description/Tagging box, enter the detail description. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The final visual test report is successfully added. 6.11.2 View Checklist Details If you want to view the check list details, do the following, Click (Add icon) in the Edit column for the respective final visual test report in the Final Visual Test See Fig 6.11. The Check List Details window opens. The Check List Details window shows a list of added check lists using the Check List tab. This window also shows the results of check list whether accepted or not. 6.11.3 Submit and Approve a Final Visual Test Report Once you have added the visual test report, the Request Status column in the Final Visual Test page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the visual test report, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the visual test report, the Completed Status column in the Final Visual Test page is appeared with (Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the visual test report, click (Submit icon) in the Completed Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 6.11.4 Print a Final Visual Checklist Report If you want to print a final visual checklist report, click(print icon) provided in the Checklist Report column of the Final Visual Test page. See Fig 6.11. 6.11.5 Print a General Visual Checklist Report If you want to print a general visual checklist report, click (print icon) provided in the General Report column of the Final Visual Test page. See Fig 6.11. 6.11.6 Print a Final Visual Test Report If you want to print a final visual test report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Final Visual Test page. See Fig 6.11. 6.11.7 Attach a File into a Final Visual Test Report If you want to attach any file with any final visual test report listed in the Final Visual Test page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.11.8 Edit Any Final Visual Test Report If you want to edit any existing final visual test report in the Final Visual Test page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective final visual test report. See Fig 6.11. A new window opens to edit the final visual test report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.11.9 Export Final Visual Test Report List You can export a list of final visual test reports added in the Final Visual Test page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.11.10 Filter Any Final Visual Test Report If you want to filter any visual test report from the list of in the Final Visual Test page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 6.12 Machining Report The Machining Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a machining report once the machining process has completed. If you want to add a machining report, do the following, Click the Machining Report Tab. The Machining page opens.                                                     Figure 6.12: Machining page 6.12.1 Add a Machining Report If you want to add a machining report, Click (ADD button) in the Machining page. See Fig 6.12. A new window opens to add a machining report. Tip: A report number for a new machining report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The machining report is successfully added. 6.12.2 Add Machining Report Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Machining page. See Fig 6.12. The Machining Report Details window opens. Click (ADD button) in the Machining Report Details window. A new window opens in the Drawing No column. In the Drawing No column, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Piece Mark No column, click and select the piece mark number from a drop-down list. In the Description column, click and enter the description. In the Material Grade column, click and enter the material grade. In the Hole Before Line Boring (mm)column, enter the size of a hole made before line boring. In the Hole After Line Boring (mm) column, enter the size of a hole made after line boring. In the Deviation column, enter the deviation between holes. In the Inspection Date column, select the inspection date. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The added machining report details will be updated. 6.12.3 Submit and Approve a Machining Report Once you have added the machining report details, the Submission column in the Machining page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the machining report, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the machining report, the Request Status column in the Machining page is appeared with (Accept and Reject icons). If you want to approve the machining report, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. If you have completed the machining report, click (Completed icon) in the Completed Status column. If incomplete, click  (Incomplete icon). 6.12.4 Print a Machining Report If you want to print a machining report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Machining page. See Fig 6.12. 6.12.5 Attach a File into a Machining Report If you want to attach any file with any machining report listed in the Machining page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.12.6 Edit Any Machining Report If you want to edit any existing machining report in the Machining page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective machining report. See Fig 6.12. A new window opens to edit the machining report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.12.7 Export Machining Report List You can export a list of machining reports added in the Machining page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.12.8 Filter any machining report If you want to filter any machining report from the list in the Machining page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 6.13 Load Test Report The Load Test Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a load test report once the load test has completed. If you want to add a load test report, do the following, Click the Load Test Report Tab. The Load Test Report page opens.                                       Figure 6.13: Load Test Report page 6.13.1 Add a Load Test Report If you want to add a load test report, Click (ADD button) in the Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.13. A new window opens to add a load test report. Tip: A report number for a new load test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the load test report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the load test report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the load test report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the load test report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the load test report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the load test report. Click Save. The load test report is successfully added. Once you have added the load test report, you must add the details for the added report. 6.13.2 Add Load Test Report Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Load Test Report See Fig 6.14. The Load Test Parameters, Equipment Details, and Report Photos windows open in the Load Test Report page. If you want to add the load test parameters in the Load Test Parameters window, do the following, In the Load Test Pressure Required box, enter the required range of load test pressure. In the Test Load box, enter the test load detail. In the Test Duration box, enter the load test time duration. In the Pressure Gauge Reading box, enter the pressure gauge reading value. In the Hydraulic Jack System S/N box, enter the hydraulic jack system detail. In the Pull up Jack Capacity box, enter the value of pull up jack capacity. In the Document Procedure No box, select the document procedure number from a drop-down list. In the Description of Items box, enter the item description. In the Reference Drawing box, enter the reference drawing detail. In the Client Reference Drawing No box, enter the client reference drawing number. In the Load Test Pressure Requirement box, enter the requirement for load test pressure. In the Actual Pressure Requirement box, enter the requirement for actual pressure. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time duration. In the Result box, select the result from a drop-down list. Click Save. If you want to add the equipment details in the Equipment Details window, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Equipment Details window. A new window opens to add the equipment details. In the Conducted By box, select Internal if the load test is conducted internally or select External if the load test is conducted externally. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment from a drop-down list. Click Save. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.13.3 Print a Load Test Report If you want to print a load test report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.13. Tip: If you want to lock any load test report, click the check box provided in the Lock Report? column of the Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.13. 6.13.4 Attach a File into a Load Test Report If you want to attach any file with any load test report listed in the Load Test Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.13.5 Edit Any Load Test Report If you want to edit any existing load test report in the Load Test Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective load test report. See Fig 6.13. A new window opens to edit the load test report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.13.6 Export Load Test Report List You can export a list of load test reports added in the Load Test Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.14 Survey Booking Survey Booking is an enhanced survey booking process, which helps the surveyors to manage their survey requirements more efficiently with respect to time and scope. The Survey Booking tab in the Structural menu helps in adding a survey booking once the survey booking process has completed. If you want to add a survey booking, do the following, Click the Survey Booking Tab. The Survey Booking page opens.                                               Figure 6.14: Survey Booking page 6.14.1 Add a Survey Booking If you want to add a survey booking, Click   (ADD button) in the Survey Booking page. See Fig 6.15. A new window opens to add a survey booking. In the Surveyor box, enter the name of a surveyor. In the Survey Date box, select the survey date from a drop-down list. In the Authority box, enter the name of authority person. In the Client Rep box, enter the name of the client representative. In the Location box, enter the location where the survey to be performed. Click Save. The survey booking is successfully added. 6.14.2 Add Survey Booking Details Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Survey Booking See Fig 6.14. The Survey Booking Details window opens. Click  (ADD button) in the Survey Booking Details window. A new window opens to add the survey booking details. In the Time box, select the survey time. In the Description box, enter the description for the survey booking. In the Trade box, enter the trade detail. In the Type box, enter the type of survey. In the QC Code box, enter the QC code. In the Location box, enter the location where the survey is to be performed. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. In the For CTR box, enter the CTR detail. In the For RG/ CA box, enter the RG/ CA detail. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested for the survey booking. In the For CPY box, enter the CPY detail. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor name from a drop-down list. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. The survey booking details will be updated. 6.14.3 Print a Survey Booking Report If you want to print a survey booking report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Survey Booking page. See Fig 6.14. 6.14.4 Attach a File into a Survey Booking If you want to attach any file with any survey booking listed in the Survey Booking page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.14.5 Edit Any Survey Booking If you want to edit any existing survey booking in the Survey Booking page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective survey booking. See Fig 6.14. A new window opens to edit the survey booking. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.14.6 Export Survey Booking List You can export a list of survey booking added in the Survey Booking page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.14.7 Filter Any Survey Booking If you want to filter any survey booking from the list in the Survey Booking page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 6.15 Dimensional Control Report Dimensional control used to determine part-to-part variation and clearance between two parts of material. By applying Dimensional Control, accurate three-dimensional information can be determined and mapped at various stages throughout the Structural project. The Dimensional Control Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a dimensional control report once the dimensional control has completed. If you want to add a dimensional control report, do the following, Click the Dimensional Control Report Tab. The Dimensional Control Report page opens.                                    Figure 6.15: Dimensional Control Report page 6.15.1 Add a dimensional control report If you want to add a dimensional control report, Click (ADD button) in the Dimensional Control Report See Fig 6.15. A new window opens to add a dimensional control report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new dimensional control report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Drawing box, select the drawing from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the dimensional control report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the dimensional control report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the dimensional control report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the dimensional control report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the dimensional control report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the dimensional control report. Click Save. The dimensional control report is successfully added. Once you have added the dimensional control report, you must add the details for the added dimensional control report. 6.15.2 Add Dimensional Control Report Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Dimensional Control Report See Fig 6.15. The Dimensional Control Parameters, Dimensional Control Details, and Report Photos windows open in the Dimensional Control Report page. Tip: If you want to add any notes for dimensional control report, you can add in the Notes window provided in the Dimensional Control Report page. If you want to add the dimensional control parameters in the Dimensional Control Parameters window, do the following, In the Date of Survey box, enter the survey date. In the Time box, enter the survey time. In the Weather box, enter the weather details. In the Temp C box, enter the temperature control value. In the Location box, enter the location where the dimensional control is to be performed In the Instrument box, select the instrument from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for dimensional control. In the Status box, enter the status for dimensional control. Click Save. If you want to add the dimensional control details in the Dimensional Control Details window, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Dimensional Control Details window. Boxes opens in the respective columns to add the dimensional control details. Tip: You can add multiple dimensional control result details by using the ADD button. If you want to order the added details, use the up and down symbols in the Order By column. In the Symbol/ Description column, enter the symbol or description for the dimensional control. In the Drawing column, enter the drawing detail. In the Tolerance column, enter the tolerance value. In the Actual column, enter the actual value. In the Result column, enter the result for the dimensional control. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. Click Save Changes. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.15.3 Print a Dimensional Control Report If you want to print a dimensional control report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Dimensional Control Report page. See Fig 6.15. 6.15.4 Attach a File into a Dimensional Control Report If you want to attach any file with any dimensional control report listed in the Dimensional Control Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.15.5 Edit Any Dimensional Control Report If you want to edit any existing dimensional control report in the Dimensional Control Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective dimensional control report. See Fig 6.15. A new window opens to edit the dimensional control report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.15.6 Export Dimensional Control Report List You can export a list of dimensional control reports added in the Dimensional Control Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.16 Trail Fit Report Trail Fit report prepared to send the trail fit-up photos once the trail fit-up has completed. The Trail Fit Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a trail fit report. If you want to add a trail fit report, do the following, Click Trail Fit Report in the Structural menu. The Trail Fit Report page opens.                                                 Figure 6.16: Trail Fit Report page 6.16.1 Add a Trail Fit Report If you want to add a trail fit report, Click  (ADD button) in the Trail Fit Report page. See Fig 6.16. A new window opens to add a trail fit report. Tip: A report number for a new trail fit report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the trail fit report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the trail fit report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the trail fit report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the trail fit report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the trail fit report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the trail fit report. Click Save. The trail fit report is successfully added. Once you have added the trail fit report, you must add the trail fit details for the added trail fit report. 6.16.2 Add Trail Fit Report Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Trail Fit Report See Fig 6.16. The Report Photos window opens in the Trail Fit Report page. Tip: If you want to add any remarks for trail fit report, you can add in the Remarks window provided in the Trail Fit Report page. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.16.3 Print a Trail Fit Report If you want to print a trail fit report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Trail Fit Report page. See Fig 6.16. Tip: If you want to lock any trail fit report, click the check box provided in the Lock Report? column of the Trail Fit Report page. See Fig 6.16. 6.16.4 Attach a File into a Trail Fit Report If you want to attach any file with any trail fit report listed in the Trail Fit Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.16.5 Edit Any Trail Fit Report If you want to edit any existing trail fit report in the Trial Fit Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective trail fit report. See Fig 3.16. A new window opens to edit the trail fit report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.16.6 Export Trail Fit Report List You can export a list of trail fit reports added in the Trail Fit Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.17 Heat Straightening Report Heat straightening is a repair procedure in which controlled heat is applied in specific patterns to the plastically deformed regions of damaged material in repetitive heating and cooling cycles to gradually straighten the material. The Heat Straightening Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a heat straightening report once the heat straightening process has completed. If you want to add a heat straightening report, do the following, Click the Heat Straightening Report Tab. The Heat Straightening Report page opens.                                   Figure 6.17: Heat Straightening Report page 6.17.1 Add a Heat Straightening Report If you want to add a heat straightening report, Click  (ADD button) in the Heat Straightening Report See Fig 6.17. A new window opens to add a heat straightening report. Tip: A report number for a new heat straightening report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Description box, enter the description for the heat straightening report. In the Description box, enter the description for the heat straightening report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the heat straightening report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the heat straightening report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the heat straightening report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the heat straightening report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the heat straightening Click Save. The heat straightening report is successfully added. Once you have added the heat straightening report, you must add the heat straightening details for the added report. 6.17.2 Add Heat Straightening Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Heat Straightening Report page. See Fig 6.17. The Report Parameters and Report Photos windows open in the Heat Straightening Report page. If you want to add the report parameters in the Report Parameters window, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Report Parameters window. In the Description box, enter the description for heat straightening. In the Size box, enter the thickness of the material. In the Start Time box, enter the start time of heat straightening. In the End Time box, enter the end time of heat straightening. In the Temperature box, enter the temperature range for heat straightening. In the Length box, enter the length of material to do heat straightening. In the Heating Speed box, enter the heating speed of heat straightening. In the Cycle box, enter the detail of heat straightening cycle. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. Click Save. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.17.3 Print a Heat Straightening Report If you want to print a heat straightening report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Heat Straightening Report page. See Fig 6.17. 6.17.4 Attach a File into a Heat Straightening Report If you want to attach any file with any heat straightening report listed in the Heat Straightening Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.17.5 Edit Any Heat Straightening Report If you want to edit any existing heat straightening report in the Heat Straightening Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective heat straightening report. See Fig 6.17. A new window opens to edit the heat straightening report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.17.6 Export Heat Straightening Report List You can export a list of heat straightening reports added in the Heat Straightening Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.18 Inspection Release Note Inspection Release Note is a written announcement which is issued by QC contractor to denote the successful completion of the inspection. The Inspection Release Note tab in the Structural menu used to add an inspection release note after completion of the inspection. If you want to add an inspection release note, do the following, Click the Inspection Release Note Tab. The Release Form page opens.                                           Figure 6.18: Release Form page 6.18.1 Add an Inspection Release Note If you want to add an inspection release note, Click  (ADD button) in the Release Form page. See Fig 6.18. A new window opens to add an inspection release note. Tip: A report number for a new inspection release note will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Activity box, select the activity from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the inspection release note. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the inspection release note. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the inspection release note. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the inspection release note. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the inspection release note. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the inspection release note. Click Save. The inspection release note is successfully added. Once you have added the inspection release note, you must add the details for the added note. 6.18.2 Add Inspection Release Note Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Release Form See Fig 6.18. The Release Form Parameters, Details, and Report Photos windows open in the Release Form page. If you want to add the release form parameters in the Release Form Parameters window, do the following, In the Test Package No box, enter the test package number. In the Tag ID box, enter the tag ID number. In the Activity box, enter the activity detail. In the Comments box, enter any comments relevant to the inspection release note. Click Save. If you want to add the release note details in the Details window, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Details window. A new window opens to add the release note details. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection release note. If the company’s QC contractor issues the inspection release note, select the check box provided with the QC Contractor/ Company and select the date in the respective Date box. If the company’s QC contractor issues the inspection release note, select the check box provided with the QC Contractor/ Company and select the date in the respective Date box. Click Save. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.18.3 Print an Inspection Release Form Report If you want to print an inspection release form report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Release Form page. See Fig 6.18. Tip: If you want to lock any inspection release note, click the check box provided in the Lock Report? column of the Release Form page. See Fig 6.18. 6.18.4 Attach a File into an Inspection Release Note If you want to attach any file with any inspection release note listed in the Release Form page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.18.5 Edit Any Inspection Release Note If you want to edit any existing inspection release note in the Release Form page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective inspection release note. See Fig 6.18. A new window opens to edit the inspection release note. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.18.6 Export Inspection Release Note List You can export a list of inspection release notes added in the Release Form page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.19 Shell Plate Rolling Report Shell Plate Rolling is a process of rolling different kinds of metal plates into a round or conical shape by using a plate rolling machine in the Structural project. The Shell Plate Rolling Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a shell plate rolling report once the shell plate rolling process has completed. If you want to add a shell plate rolling report, do the following, Click the Shell Plate Rolling Report Tab. The Shell Plate Rolling Report page opens.                                    Figure 6.19: Shell Plate Rolling Report page. 6.19.1 Add a Shell Plate Rolling Report If you want to add a shell plate rolling report, Click  (ADD button) in the Shell Plate Rolling Report See Fig 6.19. A new window opens to add a shell plate rolling report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new shell plate rolling report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Drawing box, select the drawing from a drop-down list. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the shell plate rolling report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the shell plate rolling report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the shell plate rolling report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the shell plate rolling report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the shell plate rolling report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the shell plate rolling report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the shell plate rolling report. Click Save. The shell plate rolling report is successfully added. Once you have added the shell plate rolling report, you must add the details for the added report. 6.19.2 Add Shell Plate Rolling Report Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Shell Plate Rolling Report page. See Fig 6.19. The Shell Plate Rolling Details and Report Photos windows open in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page. Tip: If you want to add any notes for the shell plate rolling report, you can add in the Notes window provided in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page. If you want to add the shell plate rolling details in the Shell Plate Rolling Details window, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Shell Plate Rolling Details window. Boxes opens in the respective columns to add the shell plate rolling details. In the PLATE HEAT NO column, enter the heat number of the plate. In the DATE column, select the date when the shell plate rolling process is performed. In the (S) EXTREME CURVATURE column, enter the extreme curvature value for the respective A SIDE and B SIDE of the rolling plate. In the (R) CURVATURE column, enter the radius curvature value of the rolling plate. In the LENGTH column, enter the length of C SIDE and D SIDE of the rolling plate. In the EDGE- PREPARATION column, enter the root and angle values for A, B, C, and D SIDES, respectively. Click Save Changes. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.19.3 Print a Shell Plate Rolling Report If you want to print a shell plate rolling report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Shell Plate Rolling Report page. See Fig 6.19. 6.19.4 Attach a File into a Shell Plate Rolling Report If you want to attach any file with any shell plate rolling report listed in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.19.5 Edit Any Shell Plate Rolling Report If you want to edit any existing shell plate rolling report in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective shell plate rolling report. See Fig 6.19. A new window opens to edit the shell plate rolling report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.19.6 Export Shell Plate Rolling Report List You can export a list of shell plate rolling reports added in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.20 Deviation Request Report Deviation Report used to find out any deviations in the materials utilized in the Structural project. The Deviation Request Report tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a deviation request report. If you want to add a deviation request report, do the following, Click the Deviation Request Report Tab. The Deviation Request Report page opens.                                  Figure 6.20: Deviation Request Report page 6.20.1 Add a Deviation Request Report If you want to add a deviation request report, Click (ADD button) in the Deviation Request Report  See Fig 6.20. A new window opens to add a deviation request report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new deviation request report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date of the deviation request report. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the deviation request report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the deviation request report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the deviation request report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the deviation request report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the deviation request report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the deviation request report. Click Save. The deviation request report is successfully added. Once you have added the deviation request report, you must add the details for the added deviation request. Tip: If you want to add a copy of added deviation request report, click Revision in the Revision column of the Deviation Request Report page. 6.20.2 Add Deviation Request Details Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Deviation Request Report  See Fig 6.20. The Material Clarification, Ref. Documents, Query Description, Attachments, Proposed Solutions, and Technip Response windows open in the Deviation Request Report page. To add the material clarification details, do the following, In the From and To boxes, enter details of deviation occurred up to which material. In the Impact box, if the deviation leads to the cost impact then select Cost Impact or if the deviation leads to the schedule impact then select Schedule Impact. In the Criticality box, if there is need to correct the deviation in the materials immediately then select Urgent otherwise select Routine based on the deviation criticality. In the Classification box, if the classification of deviation is mandatory then select Mandatory otherwise select Non- Mandatory. In the Requirements box, if you need clarification for the deviations occurred then select Clarification otherwise select Change to Project Requirement. Click Save. To add reference documents of the material deviations, Click  (ADD button) in the Documents window. A new window opens in the Technip Document No column to add the reference document number. Enter the revision detail for the reference document number in the Revision column. Enter the vendor document number in the Vendor Document No column. Enter the revision detail for the vendor document number in the Revision column. Click Save Changes. If you want to add query description, you can add in the Query Description window. To add any attachment for the deviation request report, Click (ADD button) in the Attachments window. A new window opens in the Document No column to add the number of a document to be attached. Enter the revision detail for the document number in the Revision column. Enter the title of the document in the Title column. Click Save Changes. If you want to add the proposed solution details for the material deviation, you can add in the Proposed Solutions window. If you want to add the proposed solution details for the material deviation, you can add in the Proposed Solutions window. 6.20.3 Print a Deviation Request Report If you want to print a deviation request report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Deviation Request Report page. See Fig 6.20. 6.20.4 Attach a File into a Deviation Request Report If you want to attach any file with any deviation request report listed in the Deviation Request Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.20.5 Edit Any Deviation Request Report If you want to edit any existing deviation request report in the Deviation Request Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective deviation request report. See Fig 6.20. A new window opens to edit the deviation request report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.20.6 Export Deviation Request Report List You can export a list of deviation request reports added in the Deviation Request Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.21 Technical Query Report Technical query usually raised to get clarification on technical fault, which is occurred in the execution of the Structural project. The Technical query can be raised between site operations of the contractor and engineering team of the contractor. The Technical Query Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a technical query report. If you want to add a technical query report, do the following, Click the Technical Query Report Tab. The Technical Query Report page opens.                                          Figure 6.21: Technical Query Report page 6.21.1 Add a Technical Query Report If you want to add a technical query report, Click (ADD button) in the Technical Query Report page. See Fig 6.21. A new window opens to add a technical query report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new technical query report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date of the technical query report. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the technical query report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the technical query report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the technical query report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the technical query report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the technical query report. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the deviation request report. Click Save. The technical query report is successfully added. Once you have added the technical query report, you must add the details for the added report. Tip: If you want to add a copy of added technical query report, click Revision in the Revision column of the Technical Query Report page. 6.21.2 Add Technical Query Report Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Technical Query Report  See Fig 6.21. The Material Clarification, Ref. Documents, Query Description, Attachments, Proposed Solutions, and Technip Response windows open in the Technical Query Report page. To add the material clarification details, do the following, In the From and To boxes, enter details of technical fault. In the Impact box, if the technical fault leads to the cost impact then select Cost Impact or if the technical fault leads to the schedule impact then select Schedule Impact. In the Impact box, if the technical fault leads to the cost impact then select Cost Impact or if the technical fault leads to the schedule impact then select Schedule Impact. In the Criticality box, if there is need to correct the technical fault immediately then select Urgent otherwise select Routine based on the technical fault criticality. In the Classification box, if the classification of technical fault is mandatory then select Mandatory otherwise select Non- Mandatory. In the Requirements box, if you need clarification for the technical fault occurred then select Clarification otherwise select Change to Project Requirement. Click Save. To add reference documents of the technical fault, Click (ADD button) in the Ref. Documents window. A new window opens in the Technip Document No column to add the reference document number. Enter the revision detail for the reference document number in the Revision column. Enter the vendor document number in the Vendor Document No column. Enter the revision detail for the vendor document number in the Revision column. Click Save Changes. If you want to add query description for technical fault, you can add in the Query Description window. To add any attachment for the technical query report, Click (ADD button) in the Attachments window. A new window opens in the Document No column to add the number of a document to be attached. Enter the revision detail for the document number in the Revision column. Enter the title of the document in the Title column. Click Save Changes. If you want to add the proposed solution details for the technical fault, you can add in the Proposed Solutions window. If you want to add the Technip response for the technical fault, you can add in the Technip Response window. 6.21.3 Print a Technical Query Report If you want to print a technical query report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Technical Query Report page. See Fig 6.22. 6.21.4 Attach a File into a Technical Query Report If you want to attach any file with any technical query report listed in the Technical Query Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.21.5 Edit Any Technical Query Report If you want to edit any existing technical query report in the Technical Query Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective technical query report. See Fig 6.21. A new window opens to edit the technical query report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.21.6 Export Technical Query Report List You can export a list of technical query reports added in the Technical Query Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.22 Electrical Continuity Report Electrical continuity test is a technique to check and verify the current flow in the metal paths. The Electrical Continuity Report tab in the Structural menu used to add an electrical continuity report after the completion of electrical continuity test. If you want to add an electrical continuity report, do the following, Click the Electrical Continuity Report Tab. The Electrical Continuity Report page opens.                                 Figure 6.22: Electrical Continuity Report page 6.22.1 Add an Electrical Continuity Report If you want to add an electrical continuity report, Click (ADD button) in the Electrical Continuity Report See Fig 6.22. A new window opens to add an electrical continuity report. Tip: A report number for a new electrical continuity report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the electrical continuity report. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the electrical continuity report. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the electrical continuity report. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the electrical continuity report. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the electrical continuity report. In the Approved Dat ebox, enter the approved date of the electrical continuity report. Click Save. The electrical continuity report is successfully added. Once you have added the electrical continuity report, you must add the details for the added report. 6.22.2 Add Electrical Continuity Report Details Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Electrical Continuity Report See Fig 6.22. The Electrical Continuity Parameters, Electrical Continuity, and Report Photos windows open in the Electrical Continuity Report page. Tip: If you want to add any notes for the electrical continuity report, you can add in the Notes window provided in the Electrical Continuity Report page. If you want to add the electrical continuity parameters in the Electrical Continuity Parameters window, do the following, In the Item Measured box, enter the number of items, which are measured for electrical continuity. In the Procedure No box, enter the electrical continuity procedure number. Click Save. If you want to add the electrical continuity details in the Electrical Continuity window, do the following, Click  (ADD button) in the Electrical Continuity window. Boxes opens in the respective columns to add the electrical continuity details. In the Location Test column, enter the location test detail. In the Reading column, enter the electrical continuity reading values for the respective Reading 1 and Reading 2. In the Average Reading 1 and 2columns, enter the average reading value. In the Specification Requirement column, enter the specification requirement detail. In the Result column, enter the result of the electrical continuity test. In the Remarks column, enter you remarks if any. Click Save Changes. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 6.22.3 Print an Electrical Continuity Report If you want to print an electrical continuity report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Electrical Continuity Report page. See Fig 6.22. 6.22.4 Attach a File into an Electrical Continuity Report If you want to attach any file with any electrical continuity report listed in the Electrical Continuity Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.22.5 Edit Any Electrical Continuity Report If you want to edit any existing electrical continuity report in the Electrical Continuity Report page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective electrical continuity report. See Fig 6.22. A new window opens to edit the electrical continuity report. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.22.6 Export Electrical Continuity Report List You can export a list of electrical continuity reports added in the Electrical Continuity Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.23 Joint Summary Report The Joint Summary report tab in the Structural menu used to view a joint summary report. If you want to see a joint summary report, Click the Joint Summary Report tab. A list of joint summary reports opens.                                      Figure 6.23: Joint Summary Report page Tip: If you want to view a joint summary report for all projects, click the check box provided with the All Projects option. 6.23.1 Export Joint Summary Report List You can export a list of joint summary reports in the Joint Summary Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.24 Joint Status Report (Skid) The Joint Status Report (Skid) tab in the Structural menu helps you to view a joint status report (Skid) based on an inspection status report. If you want to view a joint status report (Skid), Click the Joint Status Report (Skid) tab. A joint status report (Skid) opens.                                       Figure 6.24: Joint Status Report (Skid) page 6.24.1 Print a Joint Status Report (Skid) If you want to print a joint status report (Skid), use and (print icons) provided in the Joint Status Report (Skid) page. See Fig 6.24. If you want to print the current page of the joint status report (Skid), click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the joint status report (Skid), click (print icon). 6.24.2 Export Joint Status Report (Skid) List You can export a joint status report (Skid) in the Joint Status Report (Skid) page in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Joint Status Report (Skid) page. 6.25 Joint Status Report (Project) The Joint Status Report (Project) tab in the Structural menu helps you to view a joint status report (project) depends on the project type. If you want to view a joint status report (project), Click the Joint Status Report (Project) tab. A joint status report (project) opens.                                         Figure 9.25: Joint Status Report (Project) page In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a joint status report (project), from a drop-down list. A joint status report (project) opens for the selected project. 6.25.1 Print a Joint Status Report (Project) If you want to print a joint status report (project), use and   (print icons) provided in the Joint Status Report (Project) page. See Fig 6.25. If you want to print the current page of the joint status report (project), click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the joint status report (project), click (print icon). 6.25.2 Export Joint Status Report (Project) List You can export a joint status report (project) in the Joint Status Report (Project) page in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Joint Status Report (Project) page. 6.26 Joint Status Report (Weekly) The Joint Status Report (Weekly) tab in the Structural menu helps you to view a joint status report (Weekly) on a weekly basis. If you want to view a joint status report (Weekly), Click the Joint Status Report (Weekly) tab. A joint status report (Weekly) opens.                                          Figure 6.26: Joint Status Report (Weekly) page In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Go. A joint status report (Weekly) opens for the selected dates. 6.26.1 Print a Joint Status Report (Weekly) If you want to print a joint status report (Weekly), use  and  (print icons) provided in the Joint Status Report (Weekly) page. See Fig 6.26. If you want to print the current page of the joint status report (Weekly), click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the joint status report (Weekly), click (print icon). 6.26.2 Export Joint Status Report (Weekly) List You can export a joint status report (Weekly) in the Joint Status Report (Weekly) page in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Joint Status Report (Weekly) page. 6.27 Inspection Status Report Inspection Status Report shows the overall inspection reports such as from fit-up inspection status to NDT inspection status. If you want to view an inspection status report, do the following, Click the Inspection Status Report tab. The Inspection Status Report page opens.                                    Figure 6.27: Inspection Status Report page The Inspection Status Report page contains joint information, RFI fit-up, RFI weld VI, and NDT inspection status. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Search. The inspection status report opens for the selected dates. Tip: If you want to view the inspection status report including the weld and NDT inspection date, click the check box provided with the Weld Date/ NDT Date option. 6.27.1 Print an Inspection Status Report If you want to print an inspection status report, use (print icon) provided in the Inspection Status Report page. See Fig 6.27. 6.27.2 Export Inspection Status Report List You can export a list of inspection status report in the inspection Status Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.28 Weld Traceability Record The Weld Traceability Record tab in the Structural menu used to add and track a weld traceability record. If you want add a weld traceability record, do the following, Click the Weld Traceability Record tab. The Weld Traceability Record page opens.                                            Figure 6.28: Weld Traceability Record page 6.28.1 Add a Weld Traceability Record If you want to add a weld traceability record, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Weld Traceability Record page. See Fig 6.28. A new window opens to add a weld traceability record. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new weld traceability record will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Drawing Number box, select a drawing number from a drop-down list. In the Date box, enter the date of adding the weld traceability record. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the weld traceability record. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the weld traceability record. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the weld traceability record. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the weld traceability record. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the weld traceability record. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the weld traceability record. If you want to display Not Applicable (NA) in any field instead of leaving as an empty one, select the Is NA? check box. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. Click Save. The weld traceability record is successfully added. 6.28.2 Print a Weld Traceability Report If you want to print a weld traceability report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column in the Weld Traceability Record page. See Fig 6.28. 6.28.3 Attach a File into a Weld Traceability Record If you want to attach any file with the weld traceability record listed in the Weld Traceability Record page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 6.28.4 Edit Any Weld Traceability Record If you want to edit any existing weld traceability record in the Weld Traceability Record page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld traceability record. See Fig 6.28. A new window opens to edit the weld traceability record. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 6.28.5 Export Weld Traceability Record List You can export a list of weld traceability record added in the Weld Traceability Record page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 6.28.6 Filter Any Weld Traceability Record If you want to filter any weld traceability record from the list in the Weld Traceability Record page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 6.29 Weld Rejection Rate In Structural project, Weld Rejection Rate is the difference between the tested length and repair length of the welded material, which are calculated using RT and UT inspection. The Weld Rejection Rate is used to calculate the weld success rate. The Weld Rejection Rate tab in the Structural menu shows a weld rejection rate report including weekly and cumulative weld success rate summary details. If you want to view a weld rejection rate report, Click the Weld Rejection Rate tab. The weld rejection rate report page opens.                                           Figure 9.29: Weld Rejection Rate Report page In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a weld rejection rate report, from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Show Report. The weld rejection rate report opens for the selected project. 6.29.1 Print a Weld Rejection Rate Report If you want to print a weld rejection rate report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Weld Rejection Rate Report page. See Fig 6.29. If you want to print the current page of the weld rejection rate report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weld rejection rate report, click  (print icon). 6.29.2 Export Weld Rejection Rate Report You can export the weld rejection rate report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Rejection Rate Report page. 6.30 Weld Rejection Rate (MPI) In Structural project, Weld Rejection Rate (MPI) is the difference between the tested length of and repair length of the Complete Joint Penetration (CJP) and Fillet welding materials, which are calculated using MPI inspection. The Weld Rejection Rate is used to calculate the weld success rate. The Weld Rejection Rate (MPI) tab in the Structural menu shows a weld rejection rate report including weekly and cumulative weld success rate summary details. If you want to view a weld rejection rate report, Click the Weld Rejection Rate (MPI) tab. The Weld Rejection Rate Report page opens. In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a weld rejection rate report, from a drop-down list. In the Report Type box, select the report type from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Show Report. The weld rejection rate report opens for the selected project. 6.30.1 Print a Weld Rejection Rate Report If you want to print a weld rejection rate report, use and (print icons) provided in the Weld Rejection Rate Report page. See Fig 6.30. If you want to print the current page of the weld rejection rate report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the weld rejection rate report, click (print icon). 6.30.2 Export Weld Rejection Rate Report You can export the weld rejection rate report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Rejection Rate Report page. 6.31 Inspection Progress Status Report The Inspection Progress Status Report tab in the Structural menu helps you to view an inspection progress status report depends on the project type. If you want to view an inspection progress status report, Click the Inspection Progress Status Report tab. The inspection progress status report page opens.                                   Figure 6.31: Inspection Progress Status Report page In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view an inspection progress status report, from a drop-down list. Click Show Report. The inspection progress status report opens for the selected project. 6.31.1 Print an Inspection Progress Status Report If you want to print an inspection progress status report, use and (print icons) provided in the Inspection Progress Status Report page. See Fig 6.31. If you want to print the current page of the inspection progress status report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the inspection progress status report, click  (print icon). 6.31.2 Export Inspection Progress Status Report You can export the inspection progress status report in the Inspection Progress Status Report page in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Inspection Progress Status Report page. 6.32 Welder Performance Report Welder performance report used to view the welder performance details. If you want to view a welder performance report, do the following, Click the Welder Performance tab. The Welder Performance Report page opens.                                        Figure 6.32: Welder Performance Report page In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a welder performance report, from a drop-down list. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. In the Joint type box, select the joint type from a drop-down list. Click Load Report. The welder performance report opens for the selected project. 6.32.1 Print a Welder Performance Report If you want to print a welder performance report, use and (print icons) provided in the Welder Performance Report page. See Fig 6.32. If you want to print the current page of the welder performance report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the welder performance report, click (print icon). 6.32.2 Export Welder Performance Report You can export the welder performance report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Welder Performance Report page. 6.33 Welder Statistic Report Welder Statistics Report shows the statistical data of the welders. If you want to view a welder statistics report, do the following, Click the Welder Statistic Report tab in the Structural meu. The Welder Statistic Report page opens.                                            Figure 9.33: Welder Statistic Report page In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively. Click Load Report. The welder statistic report opens for the selected dates. 6.33.1 Print a Welder Statistic Report If you want to print a welder statistic report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Welder Statistic Report page. See Fig 6.33. If you want to print the current page of the welder statistic report, click  (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the welder statistic report, click (print icon). 6.33.2 Export Welder Statistic Report You can export the welder statistic report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Welder Statistic Report page. 6.34 Joint Summary Report (Detailed) Joint Summary Report (Detailed) used to track the detailed weld joints summary.  Do the following steps to view a joint summary report, Click the Joint Summary Report (Detailed) tab. The Welding Summary Report page opens.                                Figure 6.34: Welding Summary Report page 6.34.1 Edit Joint Details If you want to edit the joint details in the welding summary details, Click the respective joint number in the Joint No column of the Welding Summary Report page. The Joint Details window opens Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective joint numbers of the columns where you want to make changes in the thickness of the weld joint, piece mark number, and heat number. Edit the details in the respective columns. Click Save. 6.34.2 Print a Welding Summary Report If you want to print a welding summary report, use (print icon) provided in the Welding Summary Report page. See Fig 6.35. 6.34.3 Export Welding Summary Report List You can export a list of welding summary reports added in the Welding Summary Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. Punch Lists 7.0 Punch Lists A punch list is a list of items or tasks that need to be done before a project is completed. The Punch Lists menu in the home page of the cuteQM app helps to create and view the punch lists in Structural project. 7.1 Create a New Punch List If you want to create a punch list, do the following, Click the Create New Punch List in the Punch lists menu. The Create Punch page opens.                                                     Figure 7.1: Create Punch page In the Modules box, select any module from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub-Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. In the ITR No box, enter the ITR number. In the Drawing No box, enter the drawing number. In the Test Pack box, select a test pack from a drop-down list. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number. In the Reference Types box, select the reference type from the given options. In the Select Project box, select a project from a drop-down list. In the Category box, select any category from the given categories such as A, B, and C. A - Item to be cleared before hydrostatic test. B - Item to be cleared after hydrostatic test. C - Item which can be cleared after hydrostatic test but before final acceptance of the whole plant. In the Type box, select the type of punch such as whether internal or external. In the Item box, enter the item details. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. In the Description/ Punch box, enter the description for the punch list. In the Punch Raised From box, select the detail such as from where the punch has been raised. In the Date Raised box, select the date when the punch has been raised. In the Punch Raised By box, enter the name of a person who has raised the punch. In the Responsible Dept box, enter the department name, which is responsible for the punch. In the Responsible Person box, enter the name of a person who is responsible for the punch. In the Expected Clearance box, select the expected date of clearing the punch list. Click Save. The punch list is successfully added. 7.1.11 Add report photos If you want to add any report photos for the punch list, Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer. Click Upload. The selected photo will be updated. 7.2 View Punch Lists The View Punch Lists tab helps you to view and edit the punch list, which is added by using the Create New Punch List tab. Click the View Punch Lists tab in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List page opens with added punch lists.                                               Figure 7.2: Punch List page Note: If you want to verify the added punch list item, click the check box provided in the Verify column.                If you want to clear the added punch list item, click the check box provided in the Clear column. 7.2.1 Print a Punch List Report If you want to print a punch list report, click  (Print button) provided in the upper side of the Punch List page. See Fig 7.2. 7.2.2 Attach a File into a Punch List If you want to attach any file with any punch list listed in the Punch List page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 7.2.3 Edit Any Punch List If you want to edit any existing punch list in the Punch List page, click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective punch list. See Fig 7.2. Edit the details in the respective box you want. 7.2.4 Export Punch Lists You can export the punch lists added in the Punch List page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 7.2.5 Filter Any Punch List If you want to filter any punch list in the Punch List page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”. 7.3 Punch List Detail Report The Punch List Detail Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a detailed report of the punch lists. To view the punch list detail report, Click Punch List Detail Report in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List Detail Report page opens.                                            Figure 7.3: Punch List Detail Report page In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. In the ITR No box, enter the ITR number. In the Drawing box, enter the drawing number. In the Category box, select a category from a list. In the Status box, select a status from a drop-down list. In the Punch Raised From box, select a person who has raised the punch list. In the Responsible Party box, select a responsible party from a drop-down list. In the Test Pack box, select a test pack from a drop-down list. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number. In the Raised Date box, select a raised date of the punch list. The punch list report opens based on the selected data. 7.3.1 Print Punch List Detail Report If you want to print the punch list detail report, use and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Detail Report page. If you want to print the current page of the punch list detail report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the punch list detail report, click (print icon). 7.3.2 View Punch List Detail Report You can view the punch list detail report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list detail report page. 7.4 Punch List System Report The Punch List System Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list system report. To view the punch list system report, Click Punch List System Report in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List System Report page opens.                                              Figure 7.4: Punch List System Report page In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. The punch list system report opens based on the selected data. 7.4.1 Print Punch List System Report If you want to print the punch list system report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Punch List system Report page. If you want to print the current page of the punch list system report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the punch list system report, click (print icon). 7.4.2 View Punch List System Report You can view the punch list system report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list system report page. 7.5 Punch List Sub System Report The Punch List Sub System Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list sub system report. To view the punch list sub system report, Click Punch List Sub System Report in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List Sub System Report page opens.                                       Figure 7.5: Punch List Sub System Report page In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. The punch list sub system report opens based on the selected data. 7.5.1 Print Punch List Sub System Report If you want to print the punch list sub system report, use and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Sub System Report page. If you want to print the current page of the punch list sub system report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the punch list sub system report, click (print icon). 7.5.2 View Punch List Sub System Report You can view the punch list sub system report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list sub system report page. 7.6 Punch List Category Report The Punch List Category Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list category report. To view the punch list category report, Click Punch List Category Report in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List Category Report page opens.                                         Figure 7.6: Punch List Category Report page In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. The punch list category report opens based on the selected data. 7.6.1 Print Punch List Category Report If you want to print the punch list category report, use and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Category Report page. If you want to print the current page of the punch list category report, click (print icon including the page number). If you want to print all the pages of the punch list category report, click  (print icon). 7.6.2 View Punch List Category Report You can view the punch list category report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the punch list category report page. Non-Conformance Report (NCR) 8.0 Non-Conformance Report (NCR) NCR used to document the details of a non-conformance identified in a quality audit or other process review. The NCR menu helps to add an NCR in the Structural project. Once you click the NCR menu, the following tabs open, 8.1 Add NCR The Add NCR tab in the NCR menu used to add an NCR. Do the following steps to add an NCR, Click the Add NCR tab. The NCR page opens.                                                                Figure 8.1: NCR page Tip: A report number for a new NCR will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. In the Type box, select the type of non-conformance from a drop-down list. In the Classification box, select whether minor classification or major classification from a drop-down list. In the Source/ Item box, select the source of NCR from a drop-down list. To add controlling/ reference documents, Click   (ADD button) in the Controlling/ Reference documents box. A new window opens in the Doc No column. Enter the document number in the new window of the Doc No column. Enter the description for the document in a box of the Description of document column. Enter the section reference number in a box of the Section ref No column. Click Save. In the NCR box, enter the description for the identified deficiency of the selected non-conformance type. In the Reference Document box, enter the reference document detail. In the Owner Reference Document box, enter the owner reference document detail. In the Supplier Reference Document box, enter the supplier reference document detail. In the NCR originator box, enter the originator of NCR. In the Origin Date box, select the origin date of NCR. In the NCR Accepted By box, enter the name of a person who has accepted the NCR. In the NCR Accepted Date box, select the NCR accepted date. In the Agreed Closure Date box, select the agreed closure date. In the Issued By box, select the company who has issued the NCR. In the Issued To box, select the company for which the NCR has issued. In the Root Cause box, enter the root cause detail. If you want to add the corrective action detail, do the following, In the Action box, select any corrective action from the given options. In the Corrective Action box, enter the corrective action detail. In the Proposed by box, enter the name of a person who has proposed the corrective action. In the Target Close-out Date box, select the target close out date. In the Preventive Action box, enter the preventive actions. In the Probability box, select the probability percentage of non-conformance. In the consequences box, select the consequences level you have faced. If you want to add any remarks, click Remarks option and enter your remarks, otherwise click No Remarks option. In the Verification box, enter the verification detail on completion of corrective action/ preventive action. In the Inspected by QC Inspector, and Date boxes, enter the name of the QC inspector who has inspected the NCR, and date, respectively. In the Verified and NCR closed by, and Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has verified and closed the NCR, and date, respectively. In the Supplier NCR Close out by, and Close Out Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has closed the supplier NCR, and close out date, respectively. In the Owner NCR Close out by, and Close Out Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has closed the owner NCR, and close out date, respectively. In the Approval Req box, if you need approval, click Yes, otherwise click NO. If you have selected Yes, you must enter the reference detail in the If Yes, Then Reference In the Description box, enter the description of proposal. In the Proposal Accepted by, and Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted the proposal, and date, respectively. In the NCR Close Notes box, enter the NCR close notes. In the Disposition Completed by, and Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has completed the disposition, and date, respectively. Click Save. The NCR is successfully added. 8.2 View NCR The View NCR tab helps you to add, view, and edit the NCR, which is added by using the Add NCR tab. Click the View NCR tab in the NCR menu. The View NCR page opens with added NCR.                                            Figure 8.2: View NCR page 8.2.1 Add an NCR If you want to add an NCR, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the View NCR page. The View NCR page redirects you into the NCR page. Follow the same procedure in the topic, “Add NCR” to add an NCR. 8.2.2 Print an NCR If you want to print an NCR, click (Print button) provided in the upper side of the View NCR page. See Fig 8.2. 8.2.3 Attach a File into an NCR If you want to attach any file with any NCR listed in the View NCR page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 8.2.4 Update Any NCR If you want to update any existing NCR in the View NCR page, click (Update icon) in the Update column for the respective NCR. See Fig 8.2. Edit the details in the respective box you want. 8.2.5 Export NCR You can export the NCR added in the View NCR page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option. 8.2.6 Delete NCR If you want to delete any NCR in the View NCR page, click (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the View NCR page, See Fig 8.2. Documentation 9.0 Documentation The Documentation menu used to combine the number of files, which are attached to every menu of this cuteQM app. The combined files will be shown as a pdf file. This menu also used to attach a new file to a module that is not provided with an attachment option to attach any file. 9.1 Document Upload The Document Upload tab in the Documentation menu used to upload documents for various process. Click Document Upload in the Documentation menu. The Upload Documents page opens.                                            Figure 9.1: Upload Documents page Select a file which you want to upload by click Select a file for upload. The selected file will be added in the File Upload window. 9.2 Manufacture Data Report (MDR) Settings The MDR Settings tab in the Documentation menu helps you to do page setup for the pdf file which will be shown after combining the attached files. Click the MDR Settings tab. The MDR Settings page opens.                                                         Figure 9.2: MDR Settings page In the Page Numbering box, select the page numbering option that is whether Section wise or Continuous. In the Page Number (Digits) box, select the page number displaying format from a drop-down list. If you want to append the section number with the page number, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Append Section number with Page number box. In the Page Number Template box, select the page number template from a drop-down list. If you want to add the starting page numbers from TOC, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Page Number Starting From TOC ? If you want to add alphabet page numbers, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Alphabet Page number? box. In the Logo box, attach your logo by using (Browse button). Click Save. 9.3 Document Category The Document Category tab in the Documentation menu used to attach a file to any module that is not provided with an attachment option to attach any file. Before attaching a file for any module, you must add the relevant category name of the module. 9.3.1 Add a Document Category Click the Document Category tab. The Document Category page opens.                                            Figure 9.3: Document Category page Click  (ADD button) in the Document Category page. A new window opens to add a document category. In the Category Name box, enter the relevant category name for the module for which you want to attach a file. In the Description box, enter the description for the added category. Click Save. (OR) If you want to import any document category from another vessel, Click Import from Another Vessel. The Import from Another Vessel window opens. In the Equipment box, select an equipment from a drop-down list. Click Save. The added category name will be listed in the Document Category page. Once you have added the document category, you can attach any file to the added category. 9.3.2 Attach a File into an Added Document Category If you want to attach any file with the added category listed in the Document Category page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 9.3.3 Edit Any Document Category If you want to edit any existing category in the Document Category page, click (Edit icon) for the respective category, and then edit the details in the respective box. 9.3.4 Delete Any Document Category If you want to delete any specific added category from the list, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Document Category page, See Fig 9.3. 9.4 One Click Documentation The One Click Documentation tab used to combine the attached file of the various module. Click the One Click Documentation tab. The One Click Documentation page opens.                                             Figure 9.4: One Click Documentation page The One Click Documentation page shows a list of reports name of each module including the attachment file counts. This page also shows the list of document categories including their attachments, which are added using the Document Category tab. Note: If you want to edit any existing category in the Document Category page, click (Edit icon) for the respective category, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click the check box of the respective reports which you want to combine. Click Generate MDR. The system combines the selected files and shows as the pdf file in the left side of the One Click Documentation page, See Fig 9.4. Tip: You can view the pdf file by clicking the respective pdf file. The file will be opened including the data in the combined files. Pressure Vessel & Heat Exchangers Introduction Welcome to cuteQM Pressure Vessel Module, a comprehensive digital solution designed to simplify and standardize the management of pressure vessels fabrication across their entire lifecycle. This module is a part of the cuteQM platform, tailored to meet the stringent requirements of safety, compliance, and operational efficiency in industries that rely on pressure equipment. Pressure vessels are critical assets, and ensuring their integrity requires consistent inspection, documentation, and regulatory compliance. The cuteQM Pressure Vessel Module provides organizations with an intuitive, centralized system to track, monitor, and manage all pressure vessel–related activities. From material receiving and inspection scheduling to compliance reports and release notes, the module ensures that all information is accurate, accessible, and audit-ready. This manual will guide you through the features, workflows, and best practices of the module, enabling you to: Streamline inspection and documentation processes Ensure compliance with international standards and safety regulations Enhance transparency and accountability with digital records Improve decision-making with real-time dashboards and reports Whether you are a plant manager, quality manager, quality engineer or production supervisor, the cuteQM Pressure Vessel Module is built to support your role with reliable tools that reduce manual effort and improve confidence in equipment safety. Who Should Use This Manual This manual is intended for all professionals involved in the lifecycle management of pressure vessels. Typical users include: QA/QC Engineers – to oversee quality checks, inspection records, and release documentation Engineers – to update updates design drawings and update the BOM etc Production Team – to ensure make efficient request for inspection enter very little data as possible Plant Operators and Supervisors – to monitor vessel progress and operate safety in real time Management Teams – to review performance dashboards and support informed decision-making By following the guidance in this manual, users can maximize the benefits of the cuteQM Pressure Vessel Module and maintain the highest standards of safety and reliability for their operations. The below is the overall flow of the system User Login To login into the cuteQM application, Open your web browser. Type the cuteQM URL provided by your administrator / received in the user account creation email, in the address bar of your web browser. The login page appears. In the login page, enter your user name and password in the respective boxes. Note: If you forgot your password, click “I can’t access my account”. You will be redirected into a new web page. Enter your username to receive your password. In the Module section, select Pressure Vessel. Click Login. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM application, the home page of the cuteQM app opens. Figure 1.1 Home page of cuteQM application Note: The user name you have entered, the project you have been assigned, and the module you have selected are displayed in the upper right corner of the home page. Change Password If you want to change your current password, Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. Click the Change Password The Change Password page opens. Note: Before changing your password read the conditions specified in the Change Password page. In the Password box, enter your current password. In the New Password box, enter your new password. In the Confirm New Password box, enter your new password again. Click Change Password. Your password will be successfully changed. Log Out If you want to log out from the application, Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. Click Log out. Your current session ends now. The home page appears.Home & Project The home menu in the cuteQM used to provide access to view the dashboard and switch board of a project. This menu also helps you to change project to work on. Also some of the approval dashboards and daily operational job issuance menu items are shown here for easy access. All users assigned with any roles can view Switch Board and access Switch Project in the Home menu. Switch Board The Switch Board tab in the Home menu show the consolidated view of various tabs listed in multiple menus in the menu bar. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM, you can view the Home Page. In the Home Page, the menu bar appears with multiple menus, otherwise you can select the Switch Board tab to view all the menus. To select the Switch Board tab, Navigate to Home. Click Switch Board. The Switch Board tab includes multiple options such as Welder & WPQ, Calibration, Engineering, Inspection, Stage Inspection, NDE & Other NDE Reports, and Reports. The menu will be shown are accessible. For users with limited access, they will see limited items in the switch board and menu too. Switch Project The Switch Project tab in the Home menu helps you to add a new project/equipment and switch between various projects and equipment added in the app. Switch between Various Projects and Equipment's Navigate to the Home Click Switch Project. The switch project window opens with a list of projects and equipment's that are already added in the web. Figure 2.1: Switch project window 3. If you want to switch between various projects and equipments,  a. Select a project you want from multiple projects listed in the left side of the window.  Once you have selected the project, a list of equipments related to the project is displayed.  b. Select an equipment you want from multiple equipments listed in the right side of the window. 4. Click Select. To know how to add a new project, see the topic, “Projects”.  To know how to add a new equipment, see the topic, “Equipments”. Projects and Equipments Master Data Master data is typically shared by multiple users and groups across a project. Master data includes data about Clients, End users, Third party, Projects, Sub-contractors, and Locations. Users assigned with cuteQM_Power User role only can access the Master Data menu and their functionalities. 1.0 Clients In the Pressure Vessel module, clients are created so that when creating project they can be selected as Client. The Clients tab in the Master Data menu helps you to add the details of clients. If you want to add any new client, Click Clients in the Master Data menu. The Clients page opens. Figure 1.1: Clients page Add a Client If you want to add a client, do the following steps, 1. Click   (ADD button) in the Clients page. See Fig 1.1. The page shows a new box to add the details of a client. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before                 saving. 2. In the Name box, enter the name of a client. 3. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added client. 4. If you want to add a logo, click   (Browse button) provided with the Logo box, and then add the logo of the client. 5. Click Save. The client is successfully added. Edit a Client If you want to edit any existing client in the Clients page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective client. See Fig 3.1.   The page shows the details of added client. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a Client If you want to delete any specific client from the list of clients, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Clients page, See Fig 3.1. Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding client. You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete this row?”. Click OK. The selected client will be deleted. Export Clients List You can export a list of clients in the pdf and excel formats. 1. If you want to export the clients list in the pdf format, click   (PDF button). See Fig 3.1.  The clients list will be downloaded in the pdf format. 2. If you want to export the clients list in the excel format, click  (Excel button).  The clients list will be downloaded in the excel format. 2.0 End Users End User is an entity who will be using the Pressure Vessel being fabricated. Sometimes, the end user can be same as client for you. The End Users tab in the Master Data menu helps you to add the details of end users. If you want to add any end user, do the following steps, Click End Users in the Master Data menu.      The End Users page opens. Figure 2.1: End Users page Add an End User If you want to add an end user, 1. Click   (ADD button) in the End Users page. See Fig 2.1. The page shows a new box opens to add the details of an end user. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Name box, enter the name of an end user. 3. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added end user. 4. If you want to add a logo, click   (Browse button) provided with the Logo box, and add the logo of the end user. 5. Click Save.   The end user is successfully added. Edit an End User If you want to edit any existing end user in the End Users page, do the following, 1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective end user. See Fig 6.2.   The page shows the details of the selected end user. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete an End User If you want to delete any specific end user from the list of end users, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the End Users page. Export End Users List You can export a list of end users added in the End Users page in the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and (Excel button). 3.0 Third Party A Third Party Inspector is an independent inspector, usually from a certification body or inspection agency, who verifies that fabrication, testing, and documentation meet the client’s requirements, international codes, and sometimes statutory regulations. The Third Parties tab in the Master Data menu helps you to add the details of third parties. If you want to add a third party, 1. Click Third Parties in the Master Data menu.   The Third Parties page opens. Figure 3.1: Third Parties page Add a Third Party If you want to add a third party, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Third Parties page. See Fig 3.1. The page shows a new box to add the details of a third party. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Name box, enter the name of a third party. 3. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added third party. 4. If you want to add a logo, click (Browse button) provided with the Logo box, and then add the logo of the third party. 5. Click Save. The third party is successfully added. Edit a Third Party If you want to edit any existing third party in the Third Parties page, do the following, 1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective third party.   The Third Parties page shows the details of added third party. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a Third Party If you want to delete any specific third party from the list of third parties, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Third Parties page. Export Third Parties List You can export a list of third parties added in the Third Parties page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and   (Excel button). 4.0 Authorised Inspectors (AI) An Authorised Inspector is specifically an inspector certified and authorised under a regulatory code, most notably ASME Section VIII (for pressure vessels). They represent the jurisdiction or regulatory authority to ensure compliance with code rules.. The Authorized Inspectors tab in the Master Data menu helps you to add the details of authorized inspectors. If you want to add an authorized inspector, 1. Click Authorized Inspectors in the Master Data The Authorized Inspectors page opens. Figure 4.1: Authorized Inspectors page Add an Authorized Inspector If you want to add an authorized inspector, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Authorized Inspectors See Fig 4.1. The page shows a new box to add the details of an authorized inspector. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Name box, enter the name of an authorized inspector. 3. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added authorized inspector. 4. If you want to add a logo, click (Browse button) provided with the Logo box, and then add the logo of the authorized inspector. 5. Click Save. The authorized inspector is successfully added. Edit an Authorized Inspector If you want to edit any existing authorized inspector in the Authorized Inspectors page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective authorized inspector.  The page shows the details of added authorized inspector. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete an Authorized Inspector If you want to delete any specific authorized inspector from the list of authorized inspectors, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Authorized Inspectors page. Export Authorized Inspectors List You can export a list of authorized inspectors added in the Authorized Inspectors page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). 5.0 Subcontractors Subcontractor is an entity which has taken a portion of contract from a principal contractor such as your firm or from another subcontractor for Pressure Vessel module. 1. Click Subcontractors in the Companies and Projects The Subcontractors page opens. Figure 5.1: Subcontractors page Add a Subcontractor If you want to add a subcontractor, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Subcontractors See Fig 3.5.  The page shows a new box to add the details of a subcontractor. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Name box, enter the name of a subcontractor. 3. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added subcontractor. 4. If you want to add a logo, click (Browse button) provided with the Logo box, and then add the logo of the subcontractor. 5. Click Save. The subcontractor is successfully added. Edit a Subcontractor If you want to edit any existing subcontractor in the Subcontractors page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective subcontractor.  The Subcontractors page shows the details of added subcontractor. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a Subcontractor If you want to delete any specific subcontractor from the list of subcontractors, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Subcontractors page. Export Subcontractors List You can export a list of subcontractors added in the Subcontractors page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). 6.0 NDT Inspectors NDT (Non-Destructive Testing) Inspectors provide NDT inspection services to the clients who involved in fabrication, construction and maintenance of the Pressure Vessel. The NDT Inspectors tab in the Master Data menu used to add an NDT inspector. If you want to add an NDT inspector, do the following steps, 1. Click NDT Inspectors in the Master Data   The NDT Inspectors page opens. Figure 6.1: NDT Inspectors page Add an NDT Inspector If you want to add an NDT inspector, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the NDT Inspectors See Fig 6.1.   The page shows a new box to add the details of an NDT inspector. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Name box, enter the name of the NDT inspector. 3. In the No box, enter the employee number of the NDT inspector. 4. If you want to add a photo of the NDT inspector, click (Browse button) provided with the Photo box, and then add the photo of      the NDT inspector. 5. If the NDT inspector is working currently, select the checkbox of the Is Active 6. Click Save. The NDT inspector is successfully added. Add NDT Certificates of NDT Inspector If you want to add NDT certificate details of any NDT inspector, 1. Click (Add icon) of the respective NDT inspector.  The Certificates window opens. 2. Click Add Certificate. The window shows a new box to add the details of certificate. 3. In the Body box, enter the body of the NDT qualification. 4. In the Level box, select the level of NDT qualification. 5. In the Method box, select the method of NDT qualification. 6. In the Certificate Number box, enter the certificate number. 7. In the Certificate Start Date box, select the staring date of certificate. 8. In the Certificate Expiry Date box, select the expiry date of certificate. 9. In the Technical Start Date box, select the technical staring date. 10. In the Technical Expire Date box, select the technical expiry date. 11. Click Update. The certificates details will be updated. Edit an NDT Inspector If you want to edit any existing NDT inspector in the NDT Inspectors page, do the following, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT inspector.   The NDT Inspectors page shows the details of added NDT inspector. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Attach a File into an NDT Inspector If you want to attach a file with any NDT inspector listed in the NDT Inspectors page, 1. Click (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective NDT inspector in the NDT Inspectors The File Upload (NDT Inspector) page opens. Note: Before uploading any file, read the instructions given in the File Upload (NDT Inspector) page. 2. Click (Browse button) to select a file to be uploaded. 3. Select any file which you want to upload, from your computer. 4. Click (Upload button) to attach the file. The uploaded file will be displayed in the File Upload table. Delete an NDT Inspector If you want to delete any specific NDT inspector from the list of added NDT inspectors, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the NDT Inspectors page. Export NDT Inspectors List You can export a list of NDT inspectors added in the NDT Inspectors page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). 7.0 Projects When a new project is awarded to the company, it needs to be created in the system so that all parties can use it to manage the data and documents. The Projects tab in the Master Data menu used to add a new project. You can add a new project if you have been assigned with Power User roles only. To navigate into the Projects page, 1. Click Projects in the Master Data   The Projects page opens. Figure 7.1: Projects page Add a New Project If you want to add a new project, do the following 1. Click (ADD button) in the Projects page. See Fig 3.6.  The page shows a new box to add the details of a new project. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Project Number box, enter the project number. 3. In the Project Name box, enter a project name. 4. In the End User box, select an end user from a drop-down list. 5. In the Client box, select a client from a drop-down list. 6. In the AI/ Third Party box, select an AI or a third party from a drop-down list. Note: If you want to add multiple third parties, add third parties by clicking (Add TP button) in the Third party column of the Projects page. This can be done after creating the project. 7. In the Purchase Order (PO) Number box, enter the purchase order number. 8. In the Manufacturer Job Code box, enter the manufacturer job code number. 9. In the Client Project box, enter the client project code. 10 In the Client Job Code box, enter the client job code. 11. In the Owner Project box, enter the owner project code. 12. In the Owner Job Code box, enter the owner job code. 13. In the Delivery Date box, choose the delivery date. 14. In the Location/Position box, enter the location/position detail. 15. In the Cladding Material box, enter the cladding material detail. 16. In the Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) Weld Length Limit/RT Requirement box, enter the length limit of NDE welding          or the RT requirements. 17. If you need an external qualified welder, click the check box provided with the External Qualified Welder 18. In the Bill of Quantities (BOQ) box, enter the BOQ detail. 19. In the Spool Count box, enter the spool count. 20. Click Save. A new project is added successfully. Edit a Project If you want to edit any existing project details from the list of projects in the Projects page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective project. See Fig 3.6.   The page shows the added details of the selected project. 2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box in the Projects 3. Click Save. Delete a Project If you want to delete any specific project from the list of projects, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Projects page. Export Projects List You can export a list of projects added in the Projects page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). 8.0 Equipments Each project will have one or more equipments. Each equipment will be used to track and manage the details and documentation. The Equipments tab in the Master Data menu used to add a new equipment under a project. You can add a new equipment if you have been assigned with Admin and Power User roles only. To navigate into the Equipments page, 1. Click Equipments in the Master Data   The Equipments page opens. Figure 8.1: Equipments page Add a New Equipment If you want to add a new equipment, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the upper side of the Equipments   The Equipments page shows a new box to add the details of a new equipment. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Master Project Name box, enter the master project name from a drop-down list. 3. In the Equipment box, enter the equipment name. 4. In the Equipment Serial Number box, enter the equipment serial number. 5. In the Report Prefix box, the report prefix will be entered automatically. If you want change, you can edit the report prefix. 6. In the Tag Number box, enter the tag number. 7. In the Delivery Date box, choose the delivery date. 8. In the Drawing Number box, enter the drawing number. 9. In the Applicable Code box, enter the applicable code. 10. In the Equipment Type box, select the equipment type. 11. In the Material box, enter the material name. 12. In the Weight (Kg)box, enter the weight of the equipment. 13. In the QC box, select the QC type. 14. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list. 15. In the Specification box, enter the specification detail. 16. In the Coded Vessel box, select the coded vessel from a drop-down list. 17. In the Location/Position box, enter the location/position name. 18. In the of Equipment box, enter the number of equipment. 19. In the DIMENSION field, enter the inner diameter and length value. 20. In the THICKNESS field, enter the thickness of the shell and head. 21. In the SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT field, enter the PWHT, MDMT, HIC, and RT requirement detail. 22. Click Save. A new equipment is added successfully. Edit an Equipment If you want to edit any existing equipment details from the list of equipments in the Equipments page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective equipment. See Fig 3.7.  The page shows the added details of the equipment. 2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box in the Equipments 3. Click Save. Delete an Equipment If you want to delete any specific equipment from the list of equipments, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Equipments page. Export Equipments List You can export a list of equipments added in the Equipments page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). Print Equipments List If you want to print equipments list, click (Print icon) of the respective equipment in the Equipments page. The equipment list report will be opened. 9.0 Location Each company may have multiple locations or bays to fabricate equipments. Carbon steel and Stainless steel material are strictly managed in different locations. The Location tab in the Master Data menu helps you to add the details of location. If you want to add any location, 1. Click Location in the Master Data   The Locations page opens. Figure 9.1: Locations page Add a Location If you want to add a location, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Locations See Fig 9.1.  The page shows a new box to add the details of a location. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Location box, enter the location name. 3. In the Priority box, set the priority of the location. 4. Click Save. The location is successfully added. Edit a Location If you want to edit any existing location in the Locations page, do the following, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective location. See Fig 6.8.  The page shows the details of added location. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a Location If you want to delete any specific location from the list of added locations, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Locations page. Export Locations List You can export a list of locations added in the Locations page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). Manage Users User Management helps you to add new users for Pressure Vessel module, and manage multiple number of users and their roles. You can assign the projects for the added users. Users assigned with Admin role only can access the Manage User menu and their functionalities. 1.0 Users List The Assign User Roles tab in the Manage User menu used to add and manage the user account details and assign roles for the users. If you want to add a user account, do the following steps, 1. Click Manage User menu and the Users page opens. Figure 1.1: Users page Add a User Account If you want to add a new user account, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Users   The page shows a new box to add the account details of the user. 2. In the Login Details window, a. In the Login ID box, enter the login id for the user account. b. In the Email box, enter the email of the user. 3. In the User Name box, enter the user name for the user account. 4. In the Designation box, enter the designation of the user. 5. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. 6. In the Mobile Number box, enter the mobile number of the user. 7. In the Office Contact Number box, enter the office contact number of the user. 8. In the Expiry Date box, select the expiry date of the user account. 9. In the Roles box, select the checkbox of the roles which you want to assign for the user.   To know about the roles with their access details, see the topic, “User Access Overview in Pressure Vessel Module”. Note: Once you have assigned the roles for the user, the user can get access to the respective functionalities based on the assigned roles. 10 Click Save. The user account is successfully added and listed in the Users page. An email containing the user name and password to login        the cuteQM app will be sent to the given email id of the user. Note: The password received through the email can be used only once. So, the user must change their password while login into the app for the first time. Reset Password for any User Account Once you have added a user account including the login id for any user, you can set password for the respective login id. To set password, 1. Click (Password icon) in the Reset Password column for the respective user. See Fig 4.1. The Reset Password window opens with the login id name. 2. Click Reset Password. The password will be reset and sent to the respective email id of the user. Lock a User Account The user account can get locked by the user management team or it can also get locked automatically when there are too many incorrect password attempts. (default is 10 times incorrect attempts). If you want to lock any existing user account, 1. Enable the checkbox in the Locked column for the respective user account. See Fig 4.1.   The selected user account will be locked. Note: You can also unlock the respective user account by disabling the checkbox of the user account. Similarly, the same check box can be used to unlock an account. Deactivate a User Account If you want to deactivate any user account, 1. Disable the checkbox in the Active column for the respective user account. See Fig 1.1.   The selected user account will be deactivated. Note: You can also activate the respective user account by enabling the checkbox of the user account. Edit a User Account If you want to edit any existing user account in the Users page, do the following, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective user account.   The Users page shows the details of added user account. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a User Account If you want to delete any specific user account from the list of added user accounts, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Users page. Export User Accounts List You can export a list of user accounts added in the Users page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). Filter a User Account If you want to filter any specific user account in the Users page, do the following, 1. Click (FILTER button) located on the Users  See Fig 4.1. Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens in each column of the Users page. 2. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter any user account. 2.0 Roles Management If you want to add a new role, 1. Click (ROLES Button) in the Users   The Roles window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Roles 3. In the Role Name box, enter the role name. 4. Click Save. The role is added and listed in the Roles window. Roles and Access definition This is common roles defined in the cuteQM. But it can be customized by clients needs. Admin The Admin role has full access to the system. Do not assign this to any one who really does not require. Full Access  to the system. cuteQM_Document The Document Controller role manages access to inspection-related documentation across various modules. It includes viewing and managing key records for traceability and audit purposes Access to Below Inspection Menus:1.WPS and Weld Details2. Project Data ( like Joint, Drawing etc.)3.Materials management4.Fit-up & NDT records5.Stage-wise inspection6. Documentation cuteQM_PowerUser This role is designed for power users responsible for setting up new projects and managing critical administrative tasks across the cuteQM. Access to Below Inspection Menus:1. Project and Company creation2. Manage User cuteQM_WeldProduction This role user only able to fitup/weld production activity This role user only able to fitup/weld production activity cuteQM_WeldInspection This role user only able to fitup/weld Inspection activity This role user only able to fitup/weld Inspection activity 3.0 Assign Projects The Assign Projects tab in the Manage User menu used to assign the projects for users. Once you have assigned the projects for any user, the user can get access to the assigned project. To navigate to the project assigning page, 1. Click Assign Projects in the Manage User The Assign Projects/Users page opens with the Assign by User and Assign for Project options. Figure 3.1: Assign Projects/Users page Assign Projects for Users If you want to assign projects for any user, do the following steps, 1. Click Assign by User in the Assign Projects/Users The page shows a list of users in the left side and a list of projects in the right side. 2. Select a user for whom you want to assign the projects. 3. Select the checkbox of the respective projects you want to assign. 4. Click Save.   The selected projects will be assigned for the user. Assign Multiple Users for Any Project If you want to assign multiple users for any specific project, do the following steps, 1. Click Assign for Project in the Assign Projects/Users   The page shows a list of projects in the left side and a list of users in the right side. 2. Select a project for which you want to assign the users. 3. Select the checkbox of the respective users you want to assign. 4. Click Save. The selected users will be assigned for the project. 4.0 Assign Email Alerts Assign Email Alerts is the process of assigning an email for a specific project to send any alert related with the project. The Assign Email Alerts tab in the Manage User menu used to add an email for a specific project to send any alert related with the project. To navigate to the email adding page, 1. Click Assign Email Alerts in the Manage User The Manage Alert Configuration page opens. 2. In the Select Alert Module box, select a module from a drop-down list. 3. In the Email Address box, enter the email address. 4. In the Project box, select a project from a drop-down list. 5. Click Save. The email id is added and assigned for the selected module and project. 5.0 Assign Widgets The Assign Widgets tab in the Manage User menu used to assign the widgets to users. Once you have assigned the widgets to any user, the user can access the assigned widget. To navigate to the widget assigning page, 1. Click Assign Widgets in the Manage User The Assign Widgets to User page opens. 2. In the Module Name box, select the respective module name.   The page shows a list of users in the left side and a list of widgets in the right side corresponding to the selected module. 3. Select a user for whom you want to assign the widgets. 4. Select the checkbox of the respective widgets you want to assign. 5. Click Save. The selected widgets will be assigned to the user. Calibration Calibration is the act of ensuring that a testing instrument used in measurement will produce accurate results. Calibration is comparison between a standard measurement and the measurement using the test instrument. Testing Instruments Each testing instrument used in the Pressure Vessel module have calibration, which needs to be registered with following data as Calibration Report Number, Last Calibration Date, Calibration By, and Calibration Due Date. To add a testing instrument, do the following steps, 1. Click Testing Instruments in the Calibration   The Testing Instruments page opens. Figure 1.1: Testing Instruments page Add a Testing Instrument If you want to add a testing instrument, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Testing Instruments See Fig 1.1.   The page shows a new box to add the details of a testing instrument. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Category box, select the category name from a drop-down list. 3. In the Test Equipment box, enter the test equipment name. 4. In the Manufacturer box, enter the manufacturer name of the test equipment. 5. In the Asset Tag Number box, enter the asset tag number of the test equipment. 6. In the Serial Number box, enter the serial number of the test equipment. 7. In the Recommended Range box, enter the recommended range of the test equipment. 8. In the Purpose/Model box, enter the model of the test equipment. 9. In the Calibration Frequency (In Months)box, enter the calibration frequency of the test equipment. 10. In the Alert Frequency (In Days)box, enter the alert frequency of the test equipment. 11. In the Acceptance Criteria box, enter the acceptance criteria detail. 12. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 13. In the Status/Condition box, select the status/condition of the test equipment. 14. Click Save. The testing equipment is successfully added. Add Calibration Data for a Testing Instrument Once you have added the testing instrument, you can add the calibration data for the added testing instrument. 1. Click (Add icon) for the respective testing instrument. See Fig 1.1.   The Calibration window opens. 2. Click  (ADD button) in the Calibration window.   The window shows a new box to add the calibration data. 3. In the Calibration Report Number box, enter the calibration report number. 4. In the Calibration Date box, select the calibration date. 5. In the Calibration By box, enter the name of a person who has done the calibration. 6. In the Calibration Issued To box, enter the name of a person to whom the calibration details to be issued. 7. In the Calibration Due Date box, select the calibration due date. 8. In the Calibration Issued Date box, select the calibration issued date. 9. In the Location box, enter the name of the location where the calibration has done. 10. In the Contact Number box, enter the contact number of the person who has done the calibration. 11. Click Save. The calibration data is added successfully. Edit a Testing Instrument If you want to edit any existing testing instrument in the Testing Instruments page, 1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective testing instrument. See Fig 1.1.   The Testing Instruments page shows the details of the selected test instrument. 2. Edit the details where you want. 3. Click Save. Delete a Testing Instrument If you want to delete any specific testing instrument from the list of added testing instrument, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Testing Instruments page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Client”. Export Testing Instruments List You can export a list of testing instruments added in the Testing Instruments page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Clients List”. View an Equipment Master List If you want to view an equipment master list, click (Print icon) provided in the upper side of the Testing Instruments page. Filter a Testing Instrument If you want to filter any specific testing instrument in the Testing Instruments page, you can use the category wise filter box  provided in the upper side of the Testing Instruments  To filter the testing equipment, select the category from the drop-down list You can also use  (FILTER button) located on the Testing Instruments  To know how to filter using the Filter button, see the topic, “Filter Any User Account”. Import Multiple Testing Instruments If you want to import multiple testing instruments together, do the following, 1. Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 1.1. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of test instruments. 2. Enter the required test instrument details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. 3. Once you have added the testing instrument details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 4. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.1. A new box opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. 5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click (Upload button) to export the testing instrument details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the testing instruments in the worksheet will be displayed in the Testing Instruments page. View a Calibration History Card To view a calibration history card, click  (Print icon) of the respective testing instrument, which is provided in the Report column of the Testing Instruments page.Welding Welding is a part of the Pressure Vessel manufacturing process. Welding on pressure vessels must be extremely high quality to withstand working conditions. Properly preparing for welding can reduce or even eliminate reworking. 1 Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) A Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) is required when it is necessary to demonstrate that your company can produce welds with the required mechanical and metallurgical properties. A welding procedure must be qualified in accordance with the requirements of the applicable welding procedure standard (such as ASME Section IX, ISO 15614, etc.). Each welder is separately qualified for a particular welding process, position, and range of parameters through a Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ). Therefore, weld testing for procedure qualification is typically performed by a competent welder, while individual welder qualification tests are carried out to ensure each welder meets the acceptance criteria for the process. The PQR tab in the WPS & Weld Details menu used to add the details of PQR. To navigate to PQR, 1. Click PQR   The PQR page opens. Figure 1.1: PQR Page Add a PQR If you want to add a PQR, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the PQR See Fig 1.1.   The page shows a new box to add the details of a PQR. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the PQR Name box, enter the name of a PQR. If not entered, the system will create a new number in a systematic manner. 3. In the Processes field, select the welding process that you want to do. Once you have selected the weld process, the page shows the Process and Type box for the selected welding process. a. In the Process and Type box, select the type of weld process from a drop-down list. 4. In the Overlay box, if you want to conduct the weld overlay process select Yes else select No. 5. Select the tests you want to conduct from the list of Required Properties Tests and Weld Quality Tests. 6. In the Temperature box, enter the heat temperature value. 7. In the Timebox, enter the heating time. 8. Enter the minimum impact value details in the Impact Value field. 9. Enter the maximum harness details in the Hardness field. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. The PQR is successfully added and will be listed in the PQR page. Once you have added the PQR, you can add the PQR parameters. Add PQR Parameters To add parameters for the added PQR, 1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit PQR column. See Fig 1.1.   The page redirects you to another PQR page to add the PQR parameters. 2. If you want add any image, click Browse and add the image. 3. In the Notes box, enter the notes. 4. Click Save. 5. In the Joint Details window, enter the relevant details the respective boxes. 6. Click Save. 7 .In the Base Material window, enter the details of material 1 and material 2. 8. In the Diameter of Test Coupon box, enter the diameter value of test coupon. 9. In the Maximum Pass Thickness box, enter the maximum value of pass thickness. 10. In the Notes box, enter your notes. 11. Click Save. 12. In the Filler Material window, enter the details of filler material. 13. Click Save. 14. In the Position window, enter the position detail. 15. In the Notes box, enter your notes if any. 16. Click Save. 17. In the PREHEAT window, enter the preheat details and click Save. 18. In the POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT window, enter the post weld heat treatment details. 19. Click Save. 20. In the ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS window, enter the electrical characteristics. 21. Click Save. 22. In the TECHNIQUE box, enter the technique details. 23. Click Save. 24. In the WELDING PROCEDURE PARAMETERS window, click (ADD button). The window opens a new box to add the WPQ parameters. 25. Enter the weld parameters details and click Update. 26. Click Save. 27. In the TENSILE TEST window, click (ADD button).   The window opens a new box to add the tensile test details. 28. Enter the tensile test details and click Update. 29. Click Save. 30. In the GUIDED BEND TEST window, click (ADD button).    The window opens a new box to add the guided bend test details. 31. Enter the guided bend test details and click Update. 32. Click Save. 33. In the TOUGHNESS TESTS window, click (ADD button).    The window opens a new box to add the toughness test details. 34. Enter the toughness test details and click Update. 35. Click Save. 36. In the Fillet Weld Test window, enter the details of fillet weld test. 37. Click Save. 39. In Other Tests window, enter the details of any other test you performed. 40. In the Report Details window, enter the report details. 41. Click Save All. The PQR parameters are successfully added. Edit a PQR If you want to edit any existing PQR in the PQR page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PQR. See Fig 6.1.   The page shows the details of added PQR. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a PQR If you want to delete any specific PQR from the list of added PQRs, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the PQR page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Client”. Print a PQR Report If you want to print a PQR report, click  (Print icon) provided in the Print PQR column. Attach a File into a PQR If you want to attach any file with any PQR listed in the PQR page, 1. Click (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective PQR in the PQR The File Upload (PQR) page opens. Note: Before uploading any file, read the instructions given in the File Upload (PQR) page. 2. Click (Browse button) to select a file to be uploaded. 3. Select any file which you want to upload, from your computer. 4. Click  (Upload button) to attach the file.   The uploaded file will be displayed in the File Upload table. Export PQRs List You can export a list of PQRs added in the PQR page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Clients List”. Filter a PQR If you want to filter any specific PQR in the PQR page, you can use (FILTER button) provided in the PQR page. Import Multiple PQRs If you want to import multiple PQRs together, do the following, 1. Click (TEMPLATE button) on the PQR See Fig 6.1.   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of PQR. 2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. 3. Once you have added the PQR details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 4. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 6.1. A new box opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. 5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click (Upload button) to export the PQR details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the PQR in the worksheet will be displayed in the PQR page. 2 Welder Procedure Specification (WPS) A Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) provides direction to welders and welding operators for producing sound and quality welds in accordance with code requirements. Each welder is certified through a qualification test, documented in a Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ or WQTR), which demonstrates that the welder has the required skill and ability to deposit weld metal following the specified WPS. A WPS must be supported by a Procedure Qualification Record (PQR), which proves that the procedure can produce welds with the necessary mechanical properties. The WPQ/WQTR, on the other hand, validates the welder’s ability to follow the WPS. The WPS in the Weld & Weld Details menu used to add the details of WPS. To navigate to WPS, 1. Click WPS in the Welding menu.   The WPS page opens. Figure 1.2: WPS page Add a WPS If you want to add a WPS, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the WPS See Fig 1.2.   The page shows a new box to add the details of a WPS. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the WPS Name box, enter the name of a WPS. 3. In the WPS Level box, select the level of WPS whether Global or Project. 4. In the PQR box, select the PQR number from a drop-down list. 5. In the Processes field, select the welding process that you want to do. Once you have selected the weld process, the page shows the Process and Type box and Root Weld Process box for the selected welding process. a. In the Root Weld Process box, select the root weld process type. b. In the Process and Type box, select the type of weld process from a drop-down list. 6. In the Material 1and Material 2 boxes, select the material 1 and 2 from a drop-down list. 7. In the Overlay box, if you want to conduct the weld overlay process select Yes else select No. 8. In the Date box, select the date of adding WPS. 9. In the WPS For box, select the module for which you are adding WPS. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. In the Code box, select the code from a drop-down list. 12. Click Save. The WPS is successfully added and will be listed in the WPS page. Once you have added the WPS, you can add the WPS parameters. Add WPS Parameters To add parameters for the added WPS, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit WPS See Fig 1.2.   The page redirects you to another WPS page to add the WPS parameters. 2. If you want add any image, click Browse and add the image. 3. In the Joint Details window, enter the relevant joint details the respective boxes. 4. Click Save. 5. In the Base Material window, enter the details of material 1 and material 2. 6. In the Thickness Range box, enter the thickness range details. 7. In the Notes box, enter your notes. 8. Click Save. 9. In the Filler Material window, enter the details of filler material. 10. Click Save. 11. In the Position window, enter the position detail. 12. In the Notes box, enter your notes if any. 13. Click Save. 14. In the PREHEAT window, enter the preheat details and click Save. 15 .In the POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT window, enter the post weld heat treatment details. 16. Click Save. 17. In the GAS (GMAW)window, enter the details of GMAW process. 18. In the GAS (GTAW)window, enter the details of GTAW process. 19. In the GAS (FCAW)window, enter the details of FCAW process. 20. In the ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS window, enter the electrical characteristics. 21. Click Save. 22. In the TECHNIQUE box, enter the technique details. 23. Click Save. 24. In the WELDING PROCEDURE PARAMETERS window, click (ADD button). The window opens a new box to add the WPQ parameters. 25. Enter the weld parameters details and click Update. 26. In the Notes box, enter your notes if any. 27. Click Save All. The WPS parameters are successfully added. Edit a WPS If you want to edit any existing WPS in the WPS page, do the following, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective WPS. See Fig 6.2.   The page shows the details of added WPS. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a WPS If you want to delete any specific WPS from the list of added WPSs, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the WPS page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Client”. View a WPS Report If you want to view a WPS report, click (Print icon) provided in the Print WPS column. Attach a File into a WPS If you want to attach any file with any WPS listed in the WPS page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective WPS in the WPS page. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. Export WPS List You can export a list of WPSs added in the WPS page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Clients List”. Filter a WPS If you want to filter any specific WPS in the WPS page, you can use   (FILTER button) provided in the WPS page. See Fig 6.2. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter Any User Account”. Import Multiple WPSs If you want to import multiple WPSs together, do the following, 1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the WPS See Fig 6.2.   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of WPS. 2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. 3. Once you have added the WPS details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 4. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 6.2.  A new box opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. 5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click (Upload button) to export the WPS details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the WPS in the worksheet will be displayed in the WPS page. 3 Welders Welder is a person whose job is to weld materials together. This functionality has provided to add new welders who has going to work in the Pressure Vessel, and to maintain existing users. The Welders tab in the Welding menu helps you to add the welders. To navigate to Welders, 1. Click Welders in the Welding The Welders page opens. Figure 1.3: Welders page Add a Welder If you want to add a new welder, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Welders See Fig 1.3. The page shows a new box to add the details of a welder. Note: The fields notified with the symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Name box, enter the name of a welder. 3. In the Employee ID/Pass ID box, enter the employee id. 4. In the NRIC/Passport box, enter the NRIC/Passport number. 5. In the Nationality box, select the nationality of the welder. 6. In the Welder No/ID box, enter the welder ID number. 7. In the Welder Group box, select the welder group from a drop-down list. 8. In the Qualification Company Name box, enter the qualification company name. 9. In the Photo box, browse and attach the photo of the welder. 10. Click Save. The welder is successfully added and will be listed in the Welders page. Once you have added the welder, you can add the certificates of the welder. Add Certificates of Welder To add certificates of welder, 1. Click (Expand icon) of the respective welder. See Fig 1.3. The Certificates window opens to add the certificates. 2. Click (ADD button). The window shows a box to add the certificate. 3. In the About Certificate box, enter the name of the certificate. 4. In the Certificate box, browse and attach the certificate of the welder. 5. Click Update. The welder’s certificate is successfully added. Note: If you want to inactivate any welder, select the checkbox provided in the InActive column for the respective welder. Edit a Welder If you want to edit any existing welder in the Welders page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective welder. See Fig 6.3.  The page shows the details of added welder. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a Welder If you want to delete any specific welder from the list of added welders, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Welders page. View a Welder Log If you want to view a Welder log, click (Print icon) provided in the Welder Log column. Export Welders List You can export a list of welders added in the Welders page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). Filter a Welder If you want to filter any specific welder in the Welders page, you can use  (FILTER button) provided in the Welders page. See Fig 1.3. Import Multiple Welders If you want to import multiple welders together, do the following, 1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Welders See Fig 1.3. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of welders. 2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. Red color highlighted Name and Welder Number are mandatory. 3. Once you have added the welder details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 4. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 6.3. A new box opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. 5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click  (Upload button) to export the welder details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the welder in the worksheet will be displayed in the Welders page. 4 Welder Qualification Test (WQT) A Welder Qualification Test (WQT) is the process of verifying and certifying a welder’s ability to produce welds that meet prescribed quality and code requirements. The WQT tab in the Welding menu used to add the WQT details of the welder. To navigate to the WQT, 1. Click WQT in the Welding menu.  The Welder Qualification page opens. Figure 1.4: Welder Qualification page The welder qualification data in Yellow color shows that the welder qualification data are about to expire within 15 days. So, you must requalify the welder. The welder qualification data in Red color shows that the welder qualification data has expired. So, you must requalify the welder. To know how to requalify the welder, see the topic, “Requalify the Added WPQ of Welder”. Add a WQT If you want to add working qualifications test details of for any added welder, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Welders See Fig 1.4. The page shows a new box to add the qualification details of a welder. 2. In the Welder Name box, select the welder name from a drop-down list. 3. In the WPS Weld Process box, select the WPS weld process from a drop-down list. 4. In the Qualified Positions box, enter the detail of qualified positions. 5. In the Weld Type box, select a weld type from the given weld types. 6. In the Weld Position box, select a weld position from the given weld positions. 7. In the Code Standard box, select the code standard from a drop-down list. 8. In the Qualify Date box, select the qualified date. 9. In the Last Weld Date box, select the last weld date. 10. In the Certificate No/Report Number box, enter the certificate/ report number. 11. If the welder is external qualified, select the checkbox of the External Qualified 12. If the welder is disqualified, select the checkbox of the Disqualified 13. Click Update. The qualification of the welder is successfully updated. Once you have added welder qualification, you can add the WPQ search parameters and WPQ details of the welder. Add WPQ Parameters To add the WPQ search parameters, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Search See Fig 1.4. The WPQ Search Parameters window opens. 2. In the Backing column, enter the backing detail whether true or false. 3. In the No column, enter the pipe number. 4. In the No column, enter the fillet number. 5. In the Weld Metal Thk column, enter the groove and fillet thickness. 6. In the Position column, enter the position detail of pipe and fillet. 7. Click Save. The WPQ search parameters are successfully added. Add WPQ Details To add WPQ details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit WPQ column of the respective welder. See Fig 1.4.   The WPQ page opens. 2. In the Testing Variables and Qualification Limits window, enter the testing variables and qualification limits values in the         respective boxes. Note: The Testing Variables and Qualification Limits window has Actual Values and Range Qualified columns. The Actual Values column shows the values, which you have entered. The Range Qualified column shows the values, which are calculated based on the pre-defined criteria. 3. In the Testing Results field, enter the testing results details. 4. Click Save All. The WPQ details are successfully added. Requalify the Added WPQ of Welder If the added welder qualification details have expired, you can re-qualify the welder by using this Re-Qualify option. 1. Click (Add icon) of the respective welder. The window shows the welding history of the respective welder if there are any welds done by welder. 2. To requalify the welder’s certificate using latest weld done by this welder, a. Navigate to the Latest Weld done by this Welder window. b. Select the welds you want to requalify. c. Click Update. The system requalifies the welder and updates the date and changes the requalified welder’s row from Red color to White color. 3. To requalify the welderusing production test coupen. a. Select the Production Test Coupon if there is any click Requalify. 4. To requalify the welder’s certificate manually enter the weld date and click Add. a. In the Weld Date box, select the weld date. b. Click (Add button). Now, the welder will be requalified, and the system automatically changes the requalified welder`s row from Red color to White color. Auto requalification We shall configure the auto requalification using welds performed and this will be sent in an email prior to automatically requalifying the welder. Edit a WPQ If you want to edit any existing welder qualification in the Welder Qualification page, do the following, 1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective welder qualification. See Fig 6.4.   The page shows the details of added welder qualification. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Delete a WPQ If you want to delete any specific WPQ from the list of added WPQs, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Welder Qualification page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Client”. View a Welder Pass If you want to view a welder pass, click  (Print icon) provided in the Welder Pass column. View a WPQ Report If you want to view a WPQ report, click (Print icon) provided in the Print column. Attach a File into a WPQ If you want to attach any file with any WPQ listed in the Welder Qualification page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective WPQ in the Welder Qualification page. 6.4.10 Export WPQ List You can export a list of WPQs added in the Welder Qualification page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and   (Excel button). T 6.4.11 Filter a WPQ If you want to filter any specific WPQ in the Welder Qualification page, you can use  (FILTER button) provided in the Welder Qualification page. See Fig 1.4. 6.4.12 Import Multiple WPQs If you want to import multiple welder qualifications together, do the following, 1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Welders See Fig 1.4. A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of welders qualifications. 2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. 3. Once you have added the WPQ details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 4.Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.4. A new box opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. 5. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click (Upload button) to export the welder details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the welder qualification in the worksheet will be displayed in the Welder Qualification page. View a Welder Registration and Tracking Record If you want to view a welder registration and tracking record, click   (Print icon) provided in the upper side of the Welder Qualification page. 6.5 WPS in Projects The WPS in Project tab in the Welding menu helps you to add a WPS report and assign the WPS to a project. 1. Click WPS in Project tab in the Welding menu.   The WPS by projects page opens with two fields such as WPS Summary and Assign WPS to Project. Figure 6.5: WPS in projects page 6.5.1 Add a WPS Report If you want to add a new WPS report, do the following, 1. Click (ADD button) in the WPS Summary See Fig 6.5. A new box opens to add a WPS report. Tip: A report number for a new WPS report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want to change the report number, you can change. 2. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the WPS report. 3. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the WPS report. 4. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the WPS report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the WPS report. 6 .In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the WPS report. 7. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the WPS report. 8. Click Save. The WPS report is successfully added. 6.5.2 View a WPS Summary Report If you want to view a WPS summary report, click  (Print icon) provided in the WPS Summary Report column. 6.5.3 View a WPS Summary Report with PQR If you want to view a WPS summary report with PQR, click (Print icon) provided in the WPS Summary with PQR column. 6.5.4 Attach a File into a WPS Summary Report If you want to attach any file with any WPS summary report listed in the WPS Summary window, you can use   (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective WPS summary report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 6.5.5 Export WPS Summary Reports List You can export a list of WPS summary reports added in the WPS Summary window in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Clients List”. 6.5.6 Assign WPS to Any Project The Assign WPS to Project field in the WPS in projects page allows you to assign the WPS to the project. If you want to assign any WPS to the project, do the following, In the Assign WPS to Project field, the All WPS box displays a list of available WPS. The WPS in Project box displays a list of WPS that has been already assigned for the project. 1. If you want to assign any WPS for the project, select the respective WPS in the ALL WPS box, and then click (Assign welder button). 2. Click Save. 3. If you want to reject any WPS that has been assigned for the project, select the respective WPS in the WPS in Project box, and then click   (Reject welder button). 6.6 Welders in Projects The Welders in Projects tab in the Welding menu helps you to assign welders for a project. You can add a welder report by using this tab. This tab also helps you to view a welder list. 1. Click Welders in Projects tab in Welding   The welders in projects page opens with four fields such as Welder Report, Assign Welder to Project, and Welder List. Figure 6.6: Welders in project page 6.6.1 Add a Welder Report If you want to add a welder report, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Welder Report See Fig 6.6.  A new box opens to add a welder report. Tip: A report number for a new welder report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. 2. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of welder who has prepared the welder report. 3. In the Received By box, enter the name of welder who has received the welder report. 4. In the Approved By box, enter the name of welder who has approved the welder report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the welder report. 6. In the Received Date box, choose the received date of the welder report. 7. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the welder report. 8. Click Save. The welder report is successfully added. 6.6.2 View a Welder Report If you want to view a welder report, click  (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 6.6.3 Attach a File into a Welder Report If you want to attach any file with any welder report listed in the Welder Report window, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective welder report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 6.6.4 Export Welder Reports List You can export a list of welder reports added in the Welder Report window in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Clients List”. 6.6.5 Assign Welder to Project The Assign Welder to Project field in the welders in projects page allows you to assign any welder to the particular project. If you want to assign any welder to the project, do the following, 1. In the All Welders box, if you want to view all the welders, click ALL otherwise select the respective company’s welder group from a drop-down list to view their welders list. Once you have selected the company’s welder group, the left-side box shows a list of welders. The right-side box shows a list of welders who has been already assigned for the project. 2. If you want to assign any welder for the project, select the respective welder in the left-side box, and then click (Assign welder button). The selected welder will be assigned to the project. 3. If you want to reject any welder who has been assigned for the project, select the respective welder in the right-side box, and then click  (Reject welder button). 6.6.6 Welder List The Welder List field in the welders in projects page shows the welder details such as welder name, welder number, NRIC, date of birth, and nationality. This field also helps you to assign the WPQs of welders to the project, and remove any WPQs from the project. If you click(Expand icon) of the respective welder, the All WPQ box shows the details of all WPQs of the welder, and the Assigned to Project box shows any WPQ that has been assigned to a project. 1. If you want to assign any WPQ for the project, select the respective WPQ in the All WPQ box, and then click   (Assign WPQ button). The selected welder will be assigned to the project. 2. If you want to reject any WPQ that has been assigned for the project, select the respective WPQ in the Assigned to Project box, and then click   (Reject WPQ button). 6.7 Weld Map Weld mapping is the process of assigning information to a weld joint to enable easy identification of its design (WPS), production (welders, their qualifications, date welded), quality (visual inspection, NDT) and traceability (heat numbers of materials joined & welding consumables). The Weld Map tab in the Welding menu used to add a weld map. 1. Click Weld Map in the Welding   The Weld Map page opens. Figure 6.7: Weld Map page 6.7.1 Add a Weld Map If you want to add a weld map, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Weld Map See Fig 6.7. The page shows a new box to add the details of the weld map. Tip: A report number for a new weld map will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. 2. In the Revision No box, enter the revision number of the weld map. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of welder who has prepared the weld map. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of welder who has received the weld map. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of welder who has approved the weld map. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the weld map. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the received date of the weld map. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the weld map. 9. Click Save. The weld map is successfully added. 6.7.2 Edit a Weld Map If you want to edit any existing weld map in the Weld Map page, do the following, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld map. See Fig 6.7.   The page shows the details of added weld map. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 6.7.3 Attach a File into a Weld Map If you want to attach a file with any weld map listed in the Weld Map page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective weld map. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 6.7.4 Export Weld Maps List You can export a list of weld maps added in the Weld Map page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Clients List”. 6.7.5 Filter Any Weld Map If you want to filter any weld map in the Weld Map page, you can use   (FILTER button) provided in the Weld Map page. See Fig 9.7. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter Any User Account”. 6.8 Weld Test Plan Weld Test Plan is a document detailing a systematic approach to forming a weld joint by welding two or more workpieces (metal or plastic) according to a particular geometry. A welding joint is a point or edge where two or more pieces of metal or plastic are joined together. The Weld Test Plan tab in the Welding menu used to the weld joints details. 1. Click Weld Test Plan in the Welding   The Weld Joints page opens. Figure 6.8: Weld Joints page 6.8.1 Add a Weld Joint To know how to add a weld joint, see the topic, “Joints”. ITP and Test Procedures The Inspection Test Procedure Document menu in the app has the functionality to add and manage the Inspection Test Plan (ITP), NDT requirements, and NDT procedures. 1 Inspection Test Plan An Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) or test plan is a document detailing a systematic approach to testing a system or product to perform visual inspection, dimension inspection, welding inspection, function test, and factory acceptance test. The Inspection Test Plan tab in the Inspection Document menu helps you to prepare the inspection test plan. If you want to add the inspection test plan, do the following steps, 1. Click the Inspection Test Plan tab in the Project Data The Inspection Test Plan (ITP) page opens. If there are no ITP already created, system will automatically expands and show the below Figure 1.1: Inspection Test Plan (ITP) page Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Template box, select a template from a drop-down list appears on the Select from Templates box or the Select from Equipments box. If templates are predefined earlier, use it. If you want to copy the ITP from another equipment choose the equipment. Tip: A report number for the ITP report will be updated automatically in the ITP Report Number box. 3. In the ITP Status box, select the ITP status from a drop-down list. 4. In the Date box, choose the date of status update. 5. In the Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) box, enter the NDE details. 6. In the Remarks box, enter your remark if any. 7. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the ITP. 8. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the ITP. 9. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the ITP. 10. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the ITP. 11. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the ITP. 12. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the ITP report. 13. Click Save. The ITP is successfully added. Edit ITP Click on the edit ITP icon and the section below opens up. Click to Add section as required. Each section can be added with activities. Each activity can be edited and responsibilities of each party can be defined. Enter the party Name here for making it available in each activity. Once all sections, activities are ready, Click the Print icon to print the ITP. If workflow is enabled, it can sent for approval. Export ITP list You can export a list of ITPs added in the Inspection Test Plan (ITP) page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). 2 Inspection and Test Procedures The Inspection and Test procedures tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add an NDT and other test procedures and prepare the cover page. If you want to add a procedure, do the following steps, 1. Click Inspection and Test Procedures in the Project Data menu. The Procedures page opens. Figure 1.2: Test Procedure page Add a Test Procedure If you want to add a Test procedure, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Test Procedure  See Fig 1.2. A new box opens to add an NDT procedure. 2. In the NDT Procedure box, select the NDT procedure from a drop-down list. 3. In the NDT Procedure Title box, enter the NDT procedure title. 4. Click Save. The NDT procedure is successfully added. Add Test Procedure Revision Once you have added the NDT procedure, you must add the NDT procedure revision. You can manage multiple revisions for one NDT procedure based on client feedback. 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Revision column of the Test Procedure See Fig 1.2. The Test Procedure Revision window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Test Procedure Revision A new box opens to add the NDT revision procedure. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for the revision will be updated automatically in the Report Number/ Revision box. 3. In the Description box, enter the description for the NDT procedure revision. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the revision. 5. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the revision. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the revision. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the revision. 8. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the revision. 9. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the revision. 10. Click Save. Print an Test procedure Cover Page report If you want to print an NDT procedure report, click  (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Test Procedure page. See Fig 9.3 Attach a File into an Test Procedure If you want to attach a file with any Test procedure in the Test Procedure page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective Test procedure. The signed copy of the cover page and the actual procure to be uploaded here. Later they will be used while compiling the final dozier. 3 Inspection Code Requirements Select Inspection Code Requirements menu select the codes so that later this will be automatically selected in NDT requests etc. 4 Inspection Requirements The Inspection Requirements menu used to add the NDT inspection type to be performed against various groups of joints.  NDT can be performed Before Fit up, Back Chipping, Before PWHT, After PWHT, and After Hydrostatic test etc. Once you have added the required NDT inspection type, the added NDT inspection will be displayed in the NDT Requirement section while adding the welding joints. To know in detail about adding joints, see the topic, “Joints”. To add the Inspection requirements, 1. Click Inspection  Requirements in the Inspection Document The Inspection Inspection Requirement page opens. 2. Click Add 2. Select the checkbox of the group given in the page based on your requirement. Once you have selected , the NDT inspection type will be added. See the section below to add new group if you don't see anything in the list initially. 3. Click edit and Select the checkbox of the respective NDT type which you want to add additionally if there is a change. 4. Click Save. Master NDT requirements The master list of NDT requirements are defined by company QA Manager and it is derived here for each project and gets modified. To manage the master list of NDT requirements, navigate to "NDT Inspection Requirements" page in Inspection/NDT Masters The below window opens up and click Add to create a new requirements group. Enter New Group Name and Select the Joint Type for which it is applicable. Select the general NDT requirements and Clock Save. This will be available later in the equipment to use and change as required. Engineering The Engineering team can add the pressure vessel drawings, bill of material, and joints to the system. 1 Drawings The Drawings tab in the Data menu used to add the drawings related with the pressure vessel. 1. Click Drawings   The Drawings page opens. Figure 1.1: Drawings page Add a Drawing If you want to add a drawing, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Drawings See Fig 1.1.  The page shows a new box to add the details of the drawing. 2. In the Drawing Number box, enter the drawing number. 3. In the Description box, enter the description for the added drawing. 4. In the Revision box, enter the revision number of the drawing. 5. In the Approved box, if the drawing has approved, select Yes otherwise select No. If there is no need for approval means select NA. 6. In the Sheets box, enter the sheet number. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. The drawing is successfully added. Edit a Drawing If you want to edit any existing drawing in the Drawings page, do the following, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective drawing. See Fig 7.1.  The page shows the details of added drawing. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Production users will be notified if there are any changes to the drawing. Delete a Drawing If you want to delete any specific drawing from the list of drawings, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Drawings page. Attach a File into a Drawing If you want to attach a file with any drawing listed in the Drawings page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective drawing. Attach a File into a Pressure Vessel Built Drawing If you want to attach a file with any pressure vessel built drawing listed in the Drawings page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the As Built Drawing column for the respective drawing. Export Drawings List You can export a list of drawings added in the Drawings page in the excel formats by using (Excel button). 2 Bill of Material Bill of Material is a comprehensive inventory of the raw materials, assembles, sub assembles, parts and components, as well as the quantity of each, needed to the pressure vessel module. The Bill of Material menu used to add the bill of material details. 1. Click Bill of Material The Bill of Materials page opens. Figure 1.2: Bill of Materials page Add a Bill of Material If you want to add a bill of material, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Bill of Materials See Fig 7.2.  The page shows a new box to add the details of the bill of material. 2. In the Drawing Number box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. 3. In the Part No box, enter the part number. 4. In the Material Description box, enter the description for the bill of material. 5. In the Material Specification box, select the material specification. 6. In the Material Dimension box, enter the material dimension. 7. In the Qty box, enter the quantity of the material. 8. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 9. If the material is cut from a plate, select the checkbox of the Cutting from Plate? option. 10. In the Group box, select the group from a drop-down list. 11. In the Point of Sale (POS)box, select the POS from a drop-down list. 12. Click Save. The bill of material is successfully added. Edit a Bill of Material If you want to edit any existing bill of material in the Bill of Materials page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective bill of material. See Fig 7.2.  The page shows the details of added bill of material. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Clone a Bill of Material The Clone option in the Clone column of the Bill of Materials page used to add a bill of material as a copy of the previously added bill of material, See Fig 7.2. 1. Click(Clone icon) in the Clone column of the Bill of Materials  A new box opens to add the bill of material. 2. Enter the details of the bill of material.   The new bill of material will be added. Delete a Bill of Material If you want to delete any specific bill of material from the list of bill of materials, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Bill of Materials page. Export Bill of Materials List You can export a list of bill of materials added in the Bill of Materials page in the excel formats by using  (Excel button). Import Multiple Bill of Materials If you want to import multiple bill of materials together, do the following, 1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Bill of Materials See Fig 1.2.   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of bill of materials. 2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet. 3. Once you have added the bill of materials details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 4. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.2. A new box opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. 5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click  (Upload button) to export the bill of materials details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the bill of materials in the worksheet will be displayed in the Bill of Materials page. 3 Joints In Pressure Vessel, joints are formed by welding two or more workpieces (metal or plastic) according to a particular geometry. If you want to add a joint, The Joints tab in the Engineering menu used to the weld joints. 1. Click Joints in the Engineering  The Weld Joints page opens. Figure 1.3: Weld Joints page Add a Weld Joint If you want to add a weld joint, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Weld Joints   The page shows a new box to add the details of the weld joint. 2. In the Joint Group box, select the joint group name. 3. In the Joint Number box, enter the joint number. 4. In the Joint Type box, select the joint type. 5. In the WPS Number box, select the WPS number from a drop-down list and click either Primary or Alternate or Repair as type. The selected WPS number will be added. 6. In the NDT Group box, select the NDT Group name. 7. In the Location box, enter the location name. 8. In the Nozzle Details box, enter the nozzle details. 9. In the Joint Length (mm) box, enter the joint length. 10. In the Material 1 box, select the first material and enter their group number, thickness and part number in the respective boxes. 11. In the Material 2 box, select the second material and enter their group number, thickness and part number in the respective boxes. 12. In the Position box, select the position of the weld joint. 13. If the joint to be done is T joint, select the checkbox of the Is T Joint 14. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 15. Click Save. 17. Select the NDE Plan Tab and if required change the NDT to be performed in the Before Fit up, Back Chipping, Before PWHT, PWHT, and Other NDT fields. Note: The NDT type displayed in all above fields can be modified based on your requirement. For example, you can add and remove the NDT type by navigating into the NDT Requirements tab. To know in detail, see the topic, “NDT Requirements”. Before Fit up – If you select any NDT type listed in the Before Fit up option for a joint, the selected NDT type should be completed before adding the Fit up inspection request for the joint. For example, if you select both RT and MT, you must do both RT and MT. Back Chipping - If you select any NDT type listed in the Back Chipping option for a joint, the selected NDT type should be completed before adding the weld visual inspection request for the joint. NDT - If you select any NDT type listed in the NDT option for a joint, the selected NDT type should be completed after performing the weld visual inspection for the joint. PWHT - If you select any NDT type listed in the PWHT option for a joint, the selected NDT type should be completed after performing the above NDT. Other NDT - If you select any NDT type listed in the Other NDT option for a joint, the selected NDT type should be completed after performing the above PWHT. The weld joint is successfully added. Edit a Weld Joint If you want to edit any existing weld joint in the Weld Joints page, do the following, 1. Click on the joint number for the respective weld joint to edit. See Fig 1.3.  The page shows the details of added weld joint. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. Duplicate a Weld Joint If you want to duplicate any existing weld joint, 1. Click (Add icon) of the respective weld joint.  The selected weld joint will be added as duplicated one including the revised joint number. Delete a Weld Joint If you want to delete any specific weld joint from the list of added weld joints, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete field of the Weld Joints page. View Welding Work Instruction Detail If you want to view the welding work instruction detail, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. Export Weld Joints List You can export a list of weld joints added in the Weld Joints page in the excel formats by using (Excel button). Import Weld Joints from Another Vessel You can import the weld joints of another vessel into the current vessel by using the specific functionality given in the Weld Joints page. 1. Click Import from Another Vessel option in the Weld Joints   The Import from Another Vessel window opens. 2. If you want to import the pressure vessel joints from current project, select Current Projects or if you want to import the pressure vessel joints from any other project, select All Projects. 3. In the Equipment box, select an equipment from which you want to import the joints. 4. Click OK. The joints of the selected equipment will be added in the Weld Joints page. Production - Fitup Request & QA Inspection Production shall make the fitup request using the system in a very simple manner. The production users has limited access to the system. They have read only access to drawing, joints, ITP, weld Map etc. When the fitup is completed, they need to call for inspection to QA/QC. It can be done in a very simpler manner in cuteQM. Navigate to Fitup in menu and in the list of joints choose the joint which you want to call for inspection, click Edit. Click the button Fit-Up Completed. The Fit-Up date will appear automatically todays date. Optionally choose Tack Welder Click Save. This will send a notification to the project QA/QC inspector for inspection. Production – RFI 8.0 Production – RFI The Production – RFI menu in the app used to add the requests for adding various request related with the production of Pressure Vessel. Users assigned with Production role only can view and access the Production - RFI menu and their functionalities. 8.1 Fit up – Request Fit up is joining of various joints. This has two stages of process: fitting the joints and inspecting the fitted joints. Once Fit up has completed, before welding the Fit up Inspection is carried out in accordance with the Inspection Test Plan (ITP) by a person who has assigned with Inspection role. To record the fit up inspection details, 1. Navigate to Fit up – Request tab in the Production – RFI  The Fit up Inspection page opens and shows all the joints which are added in the Joint Master. Figure 8.1: Fit up Inspection page The joints in Yellow color shows that the Before Fit up/PT/MT/EP are not completed for the respective joints. Note that the (Edit icon) will not be enabled before you complete the Before Fit up. The joints in Red color shows that the Fit up is rejected for the respective joints. 8.1.1 Add an NDT Inspection request Before Fit up for the Added Joint For the added joint, if you have selected any NDT type to be performed before fit up, you must add the NDT request for the added joint to perform the NDT inspection before Fit up. Do the following steps to add the NDT request, 1. Navigate to NDT Request – RFI tab in the Production – RFI The NDT Request page opens. Figure 8.1.1: NDT Request page To know how to add NDT request, see the topic, “NDT Request – RFI”. 8.1.2 Update NDT Inspection Results for the Added Request To update the the NDT inspection result for the selected joint, do the following steps, For example, if you have added the MT request, navigate to the MT inspection result adding page. 1. Navigate to MT Report in the NDT   The MT Report page opens. Figure 8.1.2: MT Report page To know how to add MT inspection result, see the topic, “MT Report” Note: If you want to update the inspection result for any other added NDT type, you must navigate to the corresponding report page in the NDT menu and follow the same procedure given in the respective pages. Once you have updated the NDT results, the (Edit icon) for the respective joint in the Fit up Inspection page will be enabled to add the fit up details. See the Fig 8.1. 8.1.3 Add Fit up Completion Details To add the fit up completion details, do the following steps, 1. Navigate to the Fit up Inspection page and find the joint for which you have completed the NDT. 2. Click(Edit icon) for the respective joint.   The page shows the Fit up window to add the fit up details. Users assigned with Production role only can view the Fit up window. 3. If the fit up is completed, select the checkbox of the Fit-Up Completed option. 4. In the Fit up Date box, select the fit up inspection completed date. 5. In the Material 1 Heat No box, select the heat number of the first material. 6. In the Material 2 Heat No box, select the heat number of the second material. 7. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. 8. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list. 9. Click Save.   The fit up completion details are saved successfully. Once the fit up is completed, the fit up will be moved for inspection. 8.1.4 Add Fit up Inspection Details Fit up inspection will be carried out by the person who has assigned with the inspection role after completing the Fit up process. To add the fit up inspection details, Users assigned with cuteQM_QAQC role only can view and access the Inspection – Quality menu and their functionalities. 1. Navigate to Fit up Report in the Inspection – Quality   The Fit up Inspection page opens to add the Mechanical and Pre-welding inspection details. Figure 8.1.4: Fit up Inspection page To know how to add the fit up inspection details, see the topic, “Fit up Report”. 8.2 Weld Visual - Request The fitted joints will be moved for weld visual inspection after completing the Fit up inspection. The Weld Visual – Request in the Production – RFI menu used add the weld visual inspection request to perform the weld visual inspection. 1. Navigate to Weld Visual – Request in the Production – RFI  The Weld Visual Inspection page opens. Figure 8.2: Weld Visual Inspection page The page shows all the fit up inspection completed joints. The joints in Red color shows that the respective joints are rejected in NDT (RT/UT/PT/MT). For example, if J1 joint is rejected in RT then the joint will be created as J1R1 in the Weld visual page. If the same joint is rejected again in RT then the joint will be created as J1R2. Even after two times if the joint is rejected again in RT then the cut-out joint RW1 created as a new joint in the Fit up page. Note that the created J1R1 and J1R2 joints will be shown in Orange color. 8.2.1 Add an NDT Inspection request for the Joint in Weld Visual For the added joint, if you have selected any NDT type to be performed in Back Chipping, you must add the NDT request for the added joint to perform the NDT inspection before adding the weld visual inspection request. Do the following steps to add the NDT request, 1. Navigate to NDT Request – RFI tab in the Production – RFI   The NDT Request page opens. Figure 8.2.1: NDT Request page To know how to add NDT request, see the topic, “NDT Request – RFI”. 8.2.2 Update NDT Inspection Results for the Added Request To update the the NDT inspection result for the selected joint, do the following steps, For example, if you have added the MT request, navigate to the MT inspection result adding page. 1. Navigate to MT Report in the NDT   The MT Report page opens. Figure 8.2.2: MT Report page To know how to add MT inspection result, see the topic, “MT Report”. Note: If you want to update the inspection result for any other added NDT type, you must navigate to the corresponding report page in the NDT menu and follow the same procedure given in the respective pages. Once you have updated the NDT results, the  (Edit icon) for the respective joint in the Weld Visual Inspection page will be enabled to add the weld visual production details. See the Fig 8.2. 8.2.3 Add Weld Visual Production Details To add the weld visual production details, do the following steps, 1. Navigate to the Weld Visual Request page in the Production menu and find the joint for which you have completed the NDT. 2. Click (Edit icon) for the respective joint.   The page shows the Production window to add the welding details. Users assigned with Production role only can view the Production window. 3. In the Select WPS box, select the WPS from a drop-down list. 4. In the Add Welder box, click  (Add icon) and add welder details. 5. If the welding is completed, select the checkbox of the Completed option. 6. In the Completed Date box, select the completed date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save.  The weld visual production details are saved successfully. Once the welding is completed, the welded joint will be moved for       weld  visual inspection. 8.2.4 Add Weld Visual Inspection Details Weld Visual inspection will be carried out by the person who has assigned with the inspection role after completing the welding process. To add the weld visual inspection details, Users assigned with cuteQM_QAQC role only can view and access the Inspection – Quality menu and their functionalities. 1. Navigate to Weld Visual Report in the Inspection – Quality   The Weld Visual Inspection page opens to add the inspection details. Figure 8.2.4: Fit up Inspection page To know how to add the weld visual inspection details, see the topic, “Weld Visual Report”. 8.3 NDT Request – RFI The NDT Request – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add NDT request based on the NDT requirement and type. To add NDT request, 1. Click NDT Request – RFI tab in the Production – RFI   The NDT Request page opens. Figure 8.3: NDT Request page 8.3.1 Add an NDT Request If you want to add an NDT request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the NDT Request   The page redirects you into a new page to add the details of NDT type selected for the respective joint. 2. In the Requested By and Date boxes, the details are updated automatically. 3. In the To box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. 4. In the Site Location box, select a site location from a drop-down list. 5. In the PO Number box, select a PO number from a drop-down list. 6. In the Material Type box, select the material type from a drop-down list. 7. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 8. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. 9. In the Attention box, select a person to whom you want to create attention. 10. In the NDT Req field, select any NDT requirement.  The Type of NDT field shows the NDT type which you have selected in the NDT Inspection Requirement page, see the topic, “NDT Requirements”.  For example, if you have selected Before Fit up, The Type of NDT field shows the NDT type selected for the Before Fit up. 11.Select the NDT type in Type of NDT   For example, if you have selected MT, the page shows a list of joints related with the MT in the Selected Joints window. 12. In the Code field, select a code. 13. In the Additional Notes box, enter your additional notes if any. 14. In the Acceptance Criteria box, enter the acceptance criteria detail. 15. In the Selected Joints window, select the checkbox of the joint for which you want to perform the MT inspection. Note: you can select the multiple joints together to perform the MT inspection. 16. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any. 17. In the Description column, enter the description for the selected joint. 18. In the Joint Description column, select the joint description from a drop-down list. 19. Click Save NDT Request. The MT request for the respective joint is added and listed in the NDT Request page. Now navigate to the MT Report page and update the MT inspection result for the respective joint. Note: If you want to add NDT request for any other NDT requirement, follow the above steps. 8.3.2 Edit Any NDT Request Note that If the inspection results for any added NDT request has been updated, you cannot edit the respective NDT request. If you want to edit any existing NDT request in the NDT Request - RFI page, do the following, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT request. See Fig 8.3.   The page shows the details of added NDT request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save NDT Request. 8.3.3 Reject an NDT Request If the inspection results for any added NDT request has been updated, you cannot reject the respective NDT request. If you want to reject any added NDT request, click (Reject icon) of the respective NDT request. 8.3.4 Filter an NDT Request If you want to filter any NDT request in the NDT Request - RFI page, you can use (FILTER button) provided in the NDT Request - RFI page. See Fig 8.3. To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter Any User Account”. 8.4 Final Dimensional – RFI The Final Dimensional – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the final dimensional inspection request. To add the final dimensional inspection request, 1. Click Final Dimensional – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Final Dimensional Report page opens. Figure 8.4: Final Dimensional Report page 8.4.1 Add a Final Dimensional Request If you want to add a final dimensional request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Final Dimensional Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the final dimensional request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new final dimensional report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the final dimensional request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the final dimensional request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the final dimensional request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the final dimensional request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the final dimensional request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the final dimensional request. 9. In the Is PWHT box, select Before PWHT or After PWHT based on the requirement. 10. Click Save. The final dimensional request is added and listed in the Final Dimensional Report page. 8.4.2 Submit a Final Dimensional Request Once you have added the final dimensional inspection request, the Submission column in the Final Dimensional Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.4. 1. If you want to submit the final dimensional inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the final dimensional inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the final dimensional inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.4.3 Edit a Final Dimensional Request Note that if the final dimensional request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing final dimensional request in the Final Dimensional Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective final dimensional request. See Fig 8.4.   The page shows the details of added final dimensional request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.4.4 Add RFI Data for a Final Dimensional Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added final dimensional request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Final Dimensional Report See Fig 8.4.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.4.5 View RFI Report for a Final Dimensional Request If you want to view the RFI report for the final dimensional request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.4.6 Attach a File into a Final Dimensional Request If you want to attach a file with any final dimensional request listed in the Final Dimensional Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective final dimensional request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.5 Nozzle Marking – RFI In Pressure Vessels, nozzles are attached for various purposes. These nozzles are attached with to the Pressure Vessel by marking a nozzle cut out on the Pressure Vessel. Geometrical parameters of nozzle are considered while marking a cut out on shell. The nozzle marking inspection is to be performed to check the nozzle marking cut out. This Nozzle Marking – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the nozzle marking inspection request. 1. Click Nozzle Marking – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Nozzle Marking Inspection page opens. Figure 8.5: Nozzle Marking Inspection page 8.5.1 Add a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request If you want to add a nozzle marking inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Nozzle Marking Inspection   The page shows a new window to add the details of the nozzle marking inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new nozzle marking inspection request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the nozzle marking inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the nozzle marking inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the nozzle marking inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the nozzle marking inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the nozzle marking inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the nozzle marking inspection request. 9. Click Save. The nozzle marking inspection request is added and listed in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page. 8.5.2 Submit a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request Once you have added the nozzle marking inspection request, the Submission column in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.5. 1. If you want to submit the nozzle marking inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the nozzle marking inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the nozzle marking inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.5.3 Edit a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request Note that if the nozzle marking inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing nozzle marking inspection request in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective nozzle marking inspection See Fig 8.5.   The page shows the details of added nozzle marking inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.5.4 Add RFI Data for a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added nozzle marking inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Nozzle Marking Inspection See Fig 8.5.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.5.5 View RFI Report for a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the nozzle marking inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.5.6 Attach a File into a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any nozzle marking inspection request listed in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective nozzle marking inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.6 Alignment Reading – RFI The Alignment Reading – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the alignment reading inspection request. To add the alignment reading inspection request, 1. Click Alignment Reading – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Alignment Reading Report page opens. Figure 8.6: Alignment Reading Report page 8.6.1 Add an Alignment Reading Inspection Request If you want to add an alignment reading inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Alignment Reading Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the alignment reading request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new alignment reading report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the alignment reading request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the alignment reading request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the alignment reading request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the alignment reading request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the alignment reading request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the alignment reading request. 9. In the Is PWHT box, select Before PWHT or After PWHT based on the requirement. 10. Click Save. The alignment reading request is added and listed in the Alignment Reading Report page. 8.6.2 Submit an Alignment Reading Inspection Request Once you have added the alignment reading inspection request, the Submission column in the Alignment Reading Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.6. 1. If you want to submit the alignment reading inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the alignment reading inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the alignment reading inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.6.3 Edit a Alignment Reading Inspection Request Note that if the alignment reading request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing alignment reading request in the Alignment Reading Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective alignment reading request. See Fig 8.6.   The page shows the details of added alignment reading request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.6.4 Add RFI Data for an Alignment Reading Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added alignment reading request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Alignment Reading Report See Fig 8.6.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.6.5 View RFI Report for an Alignment Reading Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the alignment reading request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.6.6 Attach a File into an Alignment Reading Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any alignment reading request listed in the Alignment Reading Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective alignment reading request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.7 Ovality Reading The Ovality Reading – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the ovality reading inspection request. To add the ovality reading inspection request, 1. Click Ovality Reading – RFI in the Production – RFI  The Ovality Reading Report page opens. Figure 8.7: Ovality Reading Report page 8.7.1 Add an Ovality Reading Inspection Request If you want to add an ovality reading inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Ovality Reading Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the ovality reading request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new ovality reading report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the ovality reading request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the ovality reading request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the ovality reading request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the ovality reading request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the ovality reading request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the ovality reading request. 9. In the Is PWHT box, select Before PWHT or After PWHT based on the requirement. 10. Click Save. The ovality reading request is added and listed in the Ovality Reading Report page. 8.7.2 Submit an Ovality Reading Inspection Request Once you have added the ovality reading inspection request, the Submission column in the Ovality Reading Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.7. 1. If you want to submit the ovality reading inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the ovality reading inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the ovality reading inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.7.3 Edit an Ovality Reading Inspection Request Note that if the ovality reading request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing ovality reading request in the Ovality Reading Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective ovality reading request. See Fig 8.7.   The page shows the details of added ovality reading request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.7.4 Add RFI Data for an Ovality Reading Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added ovality reading request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Ovality Reading Report See Fig 8.7.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.7.5 View RFI Report for an Ovality Reading Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the ovality reading request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.7.6 Attach a File into an Ovality Reading Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any ovality reading request listed in the Ovality Reading Report page, you can use(Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective ovality reading request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.8 Thickness – RFI The Thickness – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the thickness reading inspection request. To add the thickness inspection request, 1. Click Thickness – RFI in the Production – RFI The Thickness Report page opens. Figure 8.8: Thickness Report page 8.8.1 Add a Thickness Inspection Request If you want to add a thickness inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Thickness Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the thickness request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new thickness report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the thickness request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the thickness request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the thickness request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the thickness request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the thickness request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the thickness request. 9. In the Is PWHT box, select Before PWHT or After PWHT based on the requirement. 10. Click Save. The thickness request is added and listed in the Thickness Report page. 8.8.2 Submit a Thickness Inspection Request Once you have added the thickness inspection request, the Submission column in the Thickness Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.8. 1. If you want to submit the thickness inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the thickness inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the thickness inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.8.3 Edit a Thickness Inspection Request Note that if the thickness request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing thickness request in the Thickness Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective thickness request. See Fig 8.8. The page shows the details of added thickness request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.8.4 Add RFI Data for a Thickness Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added thickness request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Thickness Report See Fig 8.8. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.8.5 View RFI Report for a Thickness Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the thickness request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.8.6 Attach a File into a Thickness Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any thickness request listed in the Thickness Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective thickness request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.9 Vapour Phase Corrosion Inhibitor (VPCI) – RFI VPCI also known as Volatile Corrosion Inhibitors (VCI) used for protecting the Pressure Vessel from rust and corrosion to ensure the integrity of a metal surface of the Pressure Vessel. The VPCI – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the VPCI inspection request. To add the VPCI inspection request, 1. Click VPCI – RFI in the Production – RFI   The VPCI Report page opens. Figure 8.9: VPCI Report page 8.9.1 Add a VPCI Inspection Request If you want to add a VPCI inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the VPCI Report  The page shows a new window to add the details of the VPCI request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new VPCI report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the VPCI request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the VPCI request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the VPCI request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the VPCI request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the VPCI request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the VPCI request. 9. Click Save. The VPCI request is added and listed in the VPCI Report page. 8.9.2 Submit a VPCI Inspection Request Once you have added the VPCI inspection request, the Submission column in the VPCI Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.9. If you want to submit the VPCI inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the VPCI inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the VPCI inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.9.3 Edit a VPCI Inspection Request Note that if the VPCI request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing VPCI request in the VPCI Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective VPCI request. See Fig 8.9.   The page shows the details of added VPCI request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.9.4 Add RFI Data for a VPCI Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added VPCI request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the VPCI Report See Fig 8.9.    The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.9.5 View RFI Report for a VPCI Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the VPCI request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.9.6 Attach a File into a VPCI Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any VPCI request listed in the VPCI Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective VPCI request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.10 Leak Test – RFI In Pressure Vessel, Leak Test is performed to identify any leakage. The Leak Test – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the leak test request. To add the leak test request, 1. Click Leak Test – RFI in the Production – RFI The Leak Test Report page opens. Figure 8.10: Leak Test Report page 8.10.1 Add a Leak Test Request If you want to add a leak test request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Leak Test Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the leak test request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new leak test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the leak test request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the leak test request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the leak test request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the leak test request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the leak test request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the leak test request. 9. Click Save. The leak test request is added and listed in the Leak Test Report page. 8.10.2 Submit a Leak Test Request Once you have added the leak test request, the Submission column in the Leak Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.10. 1. If you want to submit the leak test inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to     reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the leak test. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the leak test results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.10.3 Edit a Leak Test Request Note that if the leak test request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing leak test request in the Leak Test Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective leak test request. See Fig 8.10.   The page shows the details of added leak test request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.10.4 Add RFI Data for a Leak Test Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added leak test request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Leak Test Report See Fig 8.10.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.10.5 View RFI Report for Leak Test Request If you want to view the RFI report for the leak test request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.10.6 Attach a File into a Leak Test Request If you want to attach a file with any leak test request listed in the Leak Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective leak test request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.11 Hydrostatic Test – RFI Hydrostatic Test is a way in which pressure vessels can be tested for strength and leaks. The test involves filling the vessel with a liquid, usually water, which may be dyed to aid in visual leak detection, and pressurization of the vessel to the specified test pressure. The Hydrostatic Test – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the hydrostatic pressure test request. To add the hydrostatic pressure test request, 1. Click Hydrostatic Test – RFI in the Production – RFI  The Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page opens. Figure 8.11: Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page 8.11.1 Add a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to add a hydrostatic pressure test request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the hydrostatic pressure test request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new hydrostatic pressure test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the hydrostatic pressure test request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the hydrostatic pressure test request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the hydrostatic pressure test request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the hydrostatic pressure test request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the hydrostatic pressure test request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the hydrostatic pressure test request. 9. Click Save. The hydrostatic pressure test request is added and listed in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. 8.11.2 Submit a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request Once you have added the hydrostatic pressure test request, the Submission column in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.11. 1. If you want to submit the hydrostatic pressure test inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click    (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the hydrostatic pressure test. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the hydrostatic pressure test results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.11.3 Edit a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request Note that if the hydrostatic pressure test request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing hydrostatic pressure test request in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective hydrostatic pressure test request. See Fig 8.11.   The page shows the details of added hydrostatic pressure test request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.11.4 Add RFI Data for a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added hydrostatic pressure test request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report See Fig 8.11.  The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.11.5 View RFI Report for Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to view the RFI report for the hydrostatic pressure test request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.11.6 Attach a File into a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to attach a file with any hydrostatic pressure test request listed in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective hydrostatic pressure test request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.12 Shell Side Hydrostatic – RFI After manufacturing completion of the Pressure Vessel, the heat exchange shell side will be subjected to the hydrostatic testing. The Shell Side Hydrostatic– RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. To add the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, 1. Click Shell Side Hydrostatic Test – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page opens. Figure 8.12: Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page 8.12.1 Add a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to add a shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new shell side hydrostatic pressure test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 9. Click Save. The shell side hydrostatic pressure test request is added and listed in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. 8.12.2 Submit a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request Once you have added the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, the Submission column in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.12. 1. If you want to submit the shell side hydrostatic pressure test inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the shell side hydrostatic pressure test. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the shell side hydrostatic pressure test results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.12.3 Edit a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request Note that if the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing shell side hydrostatic pressure test request in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. See Fig 8.12.   The page shows the details of added shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.12.4 Add RFI Data for a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report See Fig 8.12.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.12.5 View RFI Report for a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to view the RFI report for the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.12.6 Attach a File into a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to attach a file with any shell side hydrostatic pressure test request listed in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.13 Pneumatic Pressure – RFI In Pressure Vessel, Pneumatic test is a type of pressure test for checking system integrity under the pressurized condition.  A pneumatic test uses air, nitrogen, or any non-flammable and non-toxic gas. The Pneumatic Pressure – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the pneumatic pressure test request. To add the pneumatic pressure test request, 1. Click Pneumatic Pressure – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page opens. Figure 8.13: Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page 8.13.1 Add a Pneumatic Pressure Test Request If you want to add a pneumatic pressure test request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Pneumatic Pressure Test Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the pneumatic pressure test request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new pneumatic pressure test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the pneumatic pressure test request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the pneumatic pressure test request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the pneumatic pressure test request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the pneumatic pressure test request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the pneumatic pressure test request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the pneumatic pressure test request. 9. In the Is PWHT box, select Before PWHT or After PWHT based on the requirement. 10. Click Save. The pneumatic pressure test request is added and listed in the Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page. 8.13.2 Submit a Pneumatic Pressure Test Request Once you have added the pneumatic pressure test request, the Submission column in the Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.13. 1. If you want to submit the pneumatic pressure test request, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the pneumatic pressure test. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the pneumatic pressure test results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.13.3 Edit a Pneumatic Pressure Test Request Note that if the pneumatic pressure test request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing pneumatic pressure test request in the Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective pneumatic pressure test See Fig 11.13. The page shows the details of added pneumatic pressure test request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.13.4 Add RFI Data for a Pneumatic Pressure Test Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added pneumatic pressure test request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Pneumatic Pressure Test Report See Fig 8.13. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.13.5 View RFI Report for a Pneumatic Pressure Test Request If you want to view the RFI report for the pneumatic pressure test request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.13.6 Attach a File into a Pneumatic Pressure Test Request If you want to attach a file with any pneumatic pressure test request listed in the Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective pneumatic pressure test request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.14 Flange Face Inspection – RFI The Flange Face Inspection – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the flange face inspection request. To add the flange face inspection request, 1. Click Flange Face Inspection – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Flange Face Inspection Report page opens. Figure 8.14: Flange Face Inspection Report page 8.14.1 Add a Flange Face Inspection Request If you want to add a flange face inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Flange Face Inspection Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the flange face inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new flange face inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the flange face inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the flange face inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the flange face inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the flange face inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the flange face inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the flange face inspection request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title for the request. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. The flange face inspection request is added and listed in the Flange Face Inspection Report page. 8.14.2 Submit a Flange Face Inspection Request Once you have added the flange face inspection request, the Submission column in the Flange Face Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.14. 1. If you want to submit the flange face inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click           (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the flange face inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the flange face inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.14.3 Edit a Flange Face Inspection Request Note that if the flange face inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing flange face inspection request in the Flange Face Inspection Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective flange face inspection See Fig 11.14.   The page shows the details of added flange face inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.14.4 Add RFI Data for a Flange Face Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added flange face inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Flange Face Inspection Report See Fig 11.14.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.14.5 View RFI Report for a Flange Face Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the flange face inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.14.6 Attach a File into a Flange Face Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any flange face inspection request listed in the Flange Face Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective flange face inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.15 Drining and Dring – RFI The Drining and Dring – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the drining and dring inspection request. To add the drining and dring inspection request, 1. Click Drining and Dring – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Drining and Dring Report page opens. Figure 8.15: Drining and Dring Report page 8.15.1 Add a Drining and Dring Inspection Request If you want to add a drining and dring inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Drining and Dring Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the drining and dring inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new drining and dring inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the drining and dring inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the drining and dring inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the drining and dring inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the drining and dring inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the drining and dring inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the drining and dring inspection request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title for the request. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. The drining and dring inspection request is added and listed in the Drining and Dring Report page. 8.15.2 Submit a Drining and Dring Inspection Request Once you have added the drining and dring inspection request, the Submission column in the Drining and Dring Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.15. 1. If you want to submit the drining and dring inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the drining and dring inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the drining and dring inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.15.3 Edit a Drining and Dring Inspection Request Note that if the drining and dring inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing drining and dring inspection request in the Drining and Dring Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective drining and dring inspection See Fig 8.15.  The page shows the details of added drining and dring inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.15.4 Add RFI Data for a Drining and Dring Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added drining and dring inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Drining and Dring Report See Fig 8.15. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.15.5 View RFI Report for a Drining and Dring Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the drining and dring inspection request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.15.6 Attach a File into a Drining and Dring Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any drining and dring inspection request listed in the Drining and Dring Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective drining and dring inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.16 Shipment Report – RFI The Shipment Report – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the shipment inspection request. To add the shipment inspection request, 1. Click Shipment Report – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Shipment Report page opens. Figure 8.16: Shipment Report page 8.16.1 Add a Shipment Inspection Request If you want to add a shipment inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Shipment Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the shipment inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new shipment inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the shipment inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the shipment inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the shipment inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the shipment inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the shipment inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the shipment inspection request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title detail. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. The shipment inspection request is added and listed in the Shipment Inspection Report page. 8.16.2 Submit a Shipment Inspection Request Once you have added the shipment inspection request, the Submission column in the Shipment Inspection Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.16. 1. If you want to submit the shipment inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the shipment inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the shipment inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.16.3 Edit a Shipment Inspection Request Note that if the shipment inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing shipment inspection request in the Shipment Inspection Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective shipment inspection See Fig 8.16.   The page shows the details of added shipment inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.16.4 Add RFI Data for a Shipment Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added shipment inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Shipment Inspection Report See Fig 8.16.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.16.5 View RFI Report for a Shipment Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the shipment inspection request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.16.6 Attach a File into a Shipment Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any shipment inspection request listed in the Shipment Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective shipment inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.17 Name Plate – RFI The Name Plate Report – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the name plate inspection request. To add the name plate inspection request, 1. Click Name plate Report – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Name plate Report page opens. Figure 8.17: Name Plate Report page 8.17.1 Add a Name Plate Inspection Request If you want to add a name plate inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Name plate Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the name plate inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new name plate inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the name plate inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the name plate inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the name plate inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the name plate inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the name plate inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the name plate inspection request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title detail. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. The name plate inspection request is added and listed in the Name Plate Report page. 8.17.2 Submit a Name Plate Inspection Request Once you have added the name plate inspection request, the Submission column in the Name Plate Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.17. 1. If you want to submit the name plate inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the name plate inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the name plate inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.17.3 Edit a Name Plate Inspection Request Note that if the name plate inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing name plate inspection request in the Name plate Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective name plate inspection See Fig 8.17.   The page shows the details of added name plate inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.17.4 Add RFI Data for a Name Plate Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added name plate inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Name Plate Report See Fig 8.17.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.17.5 View RFI Report for a Name Plate Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the name plate inspection request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.17.6 Attach a File into a Name Plate Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any name plate inspection request listed in the Name Plate Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective name plate inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.18 Stamp Verification/Others – RFI The Stamp Verification/Others– RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the stamp verification inspection request. To add the stamp verification inspection request, 1. Click Stamp Verification/Others – RFI in the Production – RFI   The Stamp Verification Report page opens. Figure 8.18: Stamp Verification Report page 8.18.1 Add a Stamp Verification Inspection Request If you want to add a stamp verification inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Stamp Verification Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the stamp verification inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new stamp verification inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the stamp verification inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the stamp verification inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the stamp verification inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the stamp verification inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the stamp verification inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the stamp verification inspection request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title detail. 10.In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. The stamp verification inspection request is added and listed in the Stamp Verification Report page. 8.18.2 Submit a Stamp Verification Inspection Request Once you have added the stamp verification inspection request, the Submission column in the Stamp Verification Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.18. 1. If you want to submit the stamp verification inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the stamp verification inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the stamp verification inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.18.3 Edit a Stamp Verification Inspection Request Note that if the stamp verification inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing stamp verification inspection request in the Stamp Verification Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective stamp verification inspection See Fig 8.18.   The page shows the details of added stamp verification inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.18.4 Add RFI Data for a Stamp verification Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added stamp verification inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Stamp verification Report See Fig 8.18.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.18.5 View RFI Report for a Stamp Verification Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the stamp verification inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.18.6 Attach a File into a Stamp Verification Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any stamp verification inspection request listed in the Stamp Verification Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective stamp verification inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.19 Dishend Dimension – RFI The Dishend Dimension – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the dishend dimension inspection request. To add the dishend dimension inspection request, 1. Click Dishend Dimension – RFI in the Production – RFI  The Dishend Dimension Report page opens. Figure 8.19: Dishend Dimension Report page 8.19.1 Add a Dishend Dimension Inspection Request If you want to add a dishend dimension inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Dishend dimension Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the dishend dimension inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new dishend dimension inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the dishend dimension inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the dishend dimension inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the dishend dimension inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the dishend dimension inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the dishend dimension inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the dishend dimension inspection request. 9. Click Save. The dishend dimension inspection request is added and listed in the Dishend Dimension Report page. 8.19.2 Submit a Dishend Dimension Inspection Request Once you have added the dishend dimension inspection request, the Submission column in the Dishend dimension Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.19. 1. If you want to submit the dishend dimension inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the dishend dimension inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the dishend dimension inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.19.3 Edit a Dishend Dimension Inspection Request Note that if the dishend dimension inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing dishend dimension inspection request in the Dishend Dimension Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective dishend dimension inspection See Fig 8.19.   The page shows the details of added dishend dimension inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.19.4 Add RFI Data for a Dishend Dimension Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added dishend dimension inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Dishend dimension Report See Fig 8.19.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.19.5 View RFI Report for a Dishend Dimension Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the dishend dimension inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.19.6 Attach a File into a Dishend Dimension Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any dishend dimension inspection request listed in the Dishend Dimension Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective dishend dimension inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.20 Dishend Thickness – RFI The Dishend Thickness – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the dishend thickness inspection request. To add the dishend thickness inspection request, 1. Click Dishend Thickness – RFI in the Production – RFI  The Dishend Thickness Report page opens. Figure 8.20: Dishend Thickness Report page 8.20.1 Add a Dishend Thickness Inspection Request If you want to add a dishend thickness inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Dishend Thickness Report   The page shows a new window to add the details of the dishend thickness inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new dishend thickness inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the dishend thickness inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the dishend thickness inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the dishend thickness inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the dishend thickness inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the dishend thickness inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the dishend thickness inspection request. 9. Click Save. The dishend thickness inspection request is added and listed in the Dishend Thickness Report page. 8.20.2 Submit a Dishend Thickness Inspection Request Once you have added the dishend thickness inspection request, the Submission column in the Dishend thickness Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.20. 1. If you want to submit the dishend thickness inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the dishend thickness inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the dishend thickness inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.20.3 Edit a Dishend Thickness Inspection Request Note that if the dishend thickness inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing dishend thickness inspection request in the Dishend Thickness Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective dishend thickness inspection See Fig 8.20.   The page shows the details of added dishend thickness inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.20.4 Add RFI Data for a Dishend Thickness Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added dishend thickness inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Dishend Thickness Report See Fig 8.20.   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.20.5 View RFI Report for a Dishend Thickness Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the dishend thickness inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.20.6 Attach a File into a Dishend Thickness Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any dishend thickness inspection request listed in the Dishend Thickness Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective dishend thickness inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.21 Blasting and Painting – RFI The Blasting and Painting – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the blasting and painting inspection request. To add the blasting and painting inspection request, 1. Click Blasting and Painting – RFIin the Production – RFI The Blasting and Painting Report page opens. Figure 8.21: Blasting and Painting Report page 8.21.1 Add a Blasting and Painting Inspection Request If you want to add a blasting and painting inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Blasting and Painting Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the blasting and painting inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new blasting and painting inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 3. In the Time box, select the inspection time. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the blasting and painting inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the blasting and painting inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the blasting and painting inspection request. 7. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the blasting and painting inspection request. 8. Click Save. The blasting and painting inspection request is added and listed in the Blasting and Painting Report page. 8.21.2 Edit MRR for a Blasting and Painting Inspection Request If you want to edit the MRR details of any existing blasting and painting inspection request in the Blasting and Painting Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click(Edit icon)in the Edit column for the respective blasting and painting inspection See Fig 8.21. The page shows a new window to add the MRR details of added blasting and painting inspection request. 2. In the SURFACE PREPARATION field, enter the surface preparation details. 3. In the ABRASIVE BLASTING field, enter the abrasive preparation details. 4. In the Painting First Coat field, enter the details of first coat painting. 5. In the Intermediate Coat field, enter the details of intermediate coat. 6. In the Top Coat field, enter the details of top coat. 8.21.3 Submit a Blasting and Painting Inspection Request Once you have added the blasting and painting inspection request, the Submission column in the Blasting and Painting Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.21. 1. If you want to submit the blasting and painting inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the blasting and painting inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the blasting and painting inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.21.4 Add RFI Data for a Blasting and Painting Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added blasting and painting inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Blasting and Painting Report See Fig 8.21. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.21.5 View RFI Report for a Blasting and Painting Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the blasting and painting inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.21.6 View a Blasting and Painting Report for a Blasting and Painting Inspection Request If you want to view the blasting and painting report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 8.21.7 Attach a File into a Blasting and Painting Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any blasting and painting inspection request listed in the Blasting and Painting Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective blasting and painting inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.22 Miscellaneous – RFI The Miscellaneous – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the vessel NDT inspection request. To add the vessel NDT inspection request, 1. Click Miscellaneous – RFI in the Production – RFI The Vessel NDT Report page opens. Figure 8.22: Vessel NDT Report page 8.22.1 Add a Vessel NDT Inspection Request If you want to add a vessel NDT inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Vessel NDT Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the vessel NDT inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new vessel NDT inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Type box, select the NDT type. 4. In the Part No box, enter the part number. 5. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the vessel NDT inspection request. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the vessel NDT inspection request. 7. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the vessel NDT inspection request. 8. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the vessel NDT inspection request. 9. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the vessel NDT inspection request. 10. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the vessel NDT inspection request. 11. Click Save. The vessel NDT inspection request is added and listed in the Vessel NDT Report page. 8.22.2 Submit a Vessel NDT Inspection Request Once you have added the vessel NDT inspection request, the Submission column in the Vessel NDT Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.22. 1. If you want to submit the vessel NDT inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the vessel NDT inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the vessel NDT inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.22.3 Edit a Vessel NDT Inspection Request Note that if the vessel NDT inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing vessel NDT inspection request in the Vessel NDT Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective vessel NDT inspection See Fig 8.22. The page shows the details of added vessel NDT inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.22.4 Add RFI Data for a Vessel NDT Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added vessel NDT inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Vessel NDT Report See Fig 8.22. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.22.5 View RFI Report for a Vessel NDT Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the vessel NDT inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.22.6 Attach a File into a Vessel NDT Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any vessel NDT inspection request listed in the Vessel NDT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective vessel NDT inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.23 Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) – RFI The PWHT Report – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the PWHT inspection request. To add the PWHT inspection request, 1. Click PWHT Report – RFI in the Production – RFI The PWHT Report page opens. Figure 8.23: PWHT Report page 8.23.1 Add a PWHT Inspection Request If you want to add a PWHT inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the PWHT Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the PWHT inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new PWHT inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PWHT inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PWHT inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the PWHT inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the PWHT inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the PWHT inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the PWHT inspection request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title detail. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. The PWHT inspection request is added and listed in the PWHT Inspection Report page. 8.23.2 Submit a PWHT Inspection Request Once you have added the PWHT inspection request, the Submission column in the PWHT Inspection Report page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.23. 1. If you want to submit the PWHT inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the PWHT inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the PWHT inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.23.3 Edit a PWHT Inspection Request Note that if the PWHT inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing PWHT inspection request in the PWHT Inspection Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PWHT inspection See Fig 8.23. The page shows the details of added PWHT inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.23.4 Add RFI Data for a PWHT Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added PWHT inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the PWHT Inspection Report See Fig 8.23. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.23.5 View RFI Report for a PWHT Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the PWHT inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.23.6 Attach a File into a PWHT Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any PWHT inspection request listed in the PWHT Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective PWHT inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 8.24 Pre-welding Inspection - RFI The Pre-welding – RFI tab in the Production – RFI menu used to add the pre-welding inspection request. To add the pre-welding inspection request, 1. Click Pre-welding – RFI in the Production – RFI The Pre-welding Inspection Report page opens. Figure 8.24: Pre-welding Inspection Report page 8.24.1 Add a Pre-welding Inspection Request If you want to add a pre-welding inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Pre-welding Inspection Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the pre-welding inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new pre-welding inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Type box, select the NDT type. 4. In the Part No box, enter the part number. 5. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the pre-welding inspection request. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the pre-welding inspection request. 7. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the pre-welding inspection request. 8. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the pre-welding inspection request. 9. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the pre-welding inspection request. 10. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the pre-welding inspection request. 11. Click Save. The pre-welding inspection request is added and listed in the Pre-welding Inspection Report page. 8.24.2 Submit a Pre-welding Inspection Request Once you have added the pre-welding inspection request, the Submission column in the Pre-welding Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 8.24. 1. If you want to submit the pre-welding inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the pre-welding inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the pre-welding inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 8.24.3 Edit a Pre-welding Inspection Request Note that if the pre-welding inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing pre-welding inspection request in the Pre-welding Inspection Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective pre-welding inspection See Fig 8.24. The page shows the details of added pre-welding inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 8.24.4 Add RFI Data for a Pre-welding Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added pre-welding inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Pre-welding Inspection Report See Fig 8.24. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 8.24.5 View RFI Report for a Pre-welding Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the pre-welding inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 8.24.6 Attach a File into a Pre-welding Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any pre-welding inspection request listed in the Pre-welding Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective pre-welding inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. Inspection – Quality 10.0 Inspection – Quality The Inspection - Quality menu in the app used to add the NDT inspection details for the added NDT requests. Users assigned with cuteQM_QAQC role only can view and access the Inspection - Quality menu and their functionalities. 10.1 Fit up Report Once you have added the Fit up inspection request, the added request will be moved here to update the fit up inspection details. Fit up inspection will be carried out by the person who has assigned with the inspection role. To add the fit up inspection details, do the following steps, 1. Click Fit up Report in the Inspection – Quality The Fit up Inspection page opens. Figure 10.1: Fit up Inspection page 10.1.1 Add Mechanical Inspection Details Users assigned with cuteQM_MechInspection role only can view the Mechanical Inspection window and add the mechanical inspection details. 1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective joint for which you want to add the mechanical inspection details. The Mechanical Inspection window opens with the added Fit up details. Note: You cannot edit the data in the Fit up window. 2. If the mechanical inspection is completed, select the checkbox of the Inspected option in the Mechanical Inspection window. 3. In the Inspection Date box, select the mechanical inspection date. 4. In the Result box, select the result of the mechanical inspection. 5. In the Material 1 Heat No box, select the heat number of the first material. 6. In the Material 2 Heat No box, select the heat number of the second material. 7. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. 8. In the Insp. Party field, if the AI, Client or Owner hold or Clear the inspection, select the respective checkbox. 9. Click Save. The mechanical inspection details will be added successfully. Once the mechanical inspection is completed, the Pre-welding inspection details needs to be added. 10.1.2 Add Pre-welding Inspection Details Users assigned with cuteQM_WeldInspection role only can view the Pre-Welding Inspection window to add the pre-welding inspection details. 1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective joint for which you want to add the pre-welding inspection details. The Pre-welding Inspection window opens with the added Fit up and mechanical inspection details. Note: You cannot edit the data in the Fit up and Mechanical Inspection windows. 2. If the pre-welding inspection is completed, select the checkbox of the Inspected option in the Pre-welding Inspection window. 3. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 4. In the Result box, select the result of the pre-welding inspection. 5. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any. 6. Click Save. The pre-welding inspection details are updated successfully. Once the pre-welding inspection has completed for the joint, the respective joint will be moved for the weld visual inspection. 10.1.3 Add Mechanical RFI Data for Any Fit up Inspection Report If you want to add mechanical RFI data for any fit up inspection report, 1. Click (Add icon) in the Mech RFI Data column of the Fit up Inspection The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result whether Accepted or Rejected. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.1.4 Add RFI Data for Any Fit up Inspection Report If you want to add RFI data for any fit up inspection report, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Fit up Inspection The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result whether Accepted or Rejected. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.1.5 Add Dimensional Inspection Result Details If you want to add the dimensional inspection result details for any joint, 1. Click (Add icon) in the Report Details column of the Fit up Inspection The Dimensional Details window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Dimensional Details 3. In the Description box, enter the description for the dimensional inspection. 4. In the Actual Dimension box, enter the actual dimension value. 5. In the Required Dimension box, enter the required dimension value. 6. In the Result box, select the result of dimensional inspection. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 10.1.6 View a Mechanical RFI Report If you want to view the mechanical RFI report, click  (Print icon) provided in the Mech RFI Report column. 10.1.7 View an RFI Report for Any Fit up Inspection Report If you want to view the RFI report for any request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.1.8 View a Mechanical Inspection Report If you want to view the mechanical inspection report for any request, click (Print icon) provided in the Mech Report column. 10.1.9 View a Fit up Inspection Report If you want to view the fit up inspection report for any request, click  (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.1.10 Attach a File into a Fit up Inspection report If you want to attach a file with any fit up inspection report in the Fit up Inspection page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective joint. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.1.11 Export Fit up Inspection List You can export a list of fit up inspection in the Fit up Inspection page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Clients List”. 10.2 Weld Visual Report Once you have added the weld visual inspection request, the added request will be moved here to update the weld visual inspection details. Weld visual inspection will be carried out by the person who has assigned with the inspection role. To add the weld visual inspection details, do the following steps, 1. Click Weld Visual Report in the Inspection – Quality The Weld Visual Inspection page opens. Figure 10.2: Weld Visual Inspection page 10.2.1 Add Weld Visual Inspection Details Users assigned with cuteQM_QAQC role only can view the Inspection window and add the weld visual inspection details. 1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective joint for which you want to add the weld visual inspection details. The Inspection window opens with the added production details. Note: You cannot edit the data in the Production window. 2. If the weld visual inspection is completed, select the checkbox of the Inspected option in the Inspection window. 3. In the Inspection Date box, select the weld visual inspection date. 4. In the Result box, select the result of the weld visual inspection. 5. In the Reinforce Height field, enter the Cap and Root detail. 6. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 7. Click Save. The weld visual inspection details will be added successfully. 10.2.2 Add RFI Data for Any Weld Visual Inspection Report If you want to add RFI data for any weld visual inspection report, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Weld Visual Inspection The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result whether Accepted or Rejected. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.2.3 View an RFI Report for Any Weld Visual Inspection Report If you want to view the RFI report for any weld visual inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.2.4 View a Weld Visual Inspection Report If you want to view the weld visual inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.2.5 Attach a File into a Weld Visual Inspection report If you want to attach a file with any weld visual inspection report in the Weld Visual Inspection page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective joint. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.2.6 Export Weld Visual Inspection List You can export a list of weld visual inspection in the Weld Visual Inspection page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button)  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Clients List”. 10.3 Final Dimensional Report The Final Dimensional Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the final dimensional inspection result for added request. 1. Click Final Dimensional Report in the Inspection – Quality The Final Dimensional Report page opens. Figure 10.3: Final Dimensional Report page The page shows a list of added final dimensional requests. 10.3.1 Add Final Dimension Report Details If you want to add the final dimension report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Final Dimension Report window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Final Dimension Report 3. In the Item box, select an item from a drop-down list. 4. In the Joint No/Nozzle box, enter the joint number or nozzle number. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. 6. In the Projection Reqd box, enter the required projection value. 7. In the Projection Actual box, enter the actual projection value. 8. In the Projection Result box, select the projection result. 9. In the Elevation Reqd box, enter the required elevation value. 10. In the Elevation Actual box, enter the actual elevation value. 11. In the Elevation Result box, select the elevation result. 12. In the Orientation Reqd box, enter the required orientation value. 13. In the Orientation Actual box, enter the actual orientation value. 14. In the Orientation Result box, select the orientation result. 15. In the Item box, select an item from a drop-down list. 16. In the Required box, enter the required dimension. 17. In the Actual box, enter the actual dimension. 18. In the Result box, select the result of final dimension inspection. 19. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 20. Click Save. 10.3.2 Add Final Dimension Inspection Result Details If you want to add the final dimension inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.3.3 Submit Final Dimension Inspection Result Once you have added the final dimension inspection result, the Request Status column in the Final Dimensional Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.3. 1. If you want to submit the final dimension inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the final dimension inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.3.4 View an RFI Report for Final Dimension Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any final dimension inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.3.5 View a Final Dimension Inspection Report If you want to view the final dimension inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.3.6 Attach a file into a Final Dimension Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any final dimension inspection report in the Final Dimension Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.4 Nozzle Marking Report The Nozzle Marking Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the nozzle marking inspection result for added request. 1. Click Nozzle Marking Report in the Inspection – Quality The Nozzle Marking Inspection page opens. Figure 10.4: Nozzle Marking Inspection page The page shows a list of added nozzle marking inspection requests. 10.4.1 Add Nozzle Marking Report Details 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Nozzle Marking Result and Report Photos windows open. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Nozzle Marking Result 3. In the Nozzle box, select a nozzle from a drop-down list. 4. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. 5. Enter the projection, orientation, and elevation value. 6. In the Result box, select the result. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 9. In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and attach a photo. 10.4.2 Add Nozzle Marking Inspection Result Details If you want to add the nozzle marking inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.4.3 Submit Nozzle Marking Inspection Result Once you have added the nozzle marking inspection result, the Request Status column in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.4. 1. If you want to submit the nozzle marking inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the nozzle marking inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.4.4 View an RFI Report for Nozzle Marking Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any nozzle marking inspection, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.4.5 View a Nozzle Marking Inspection Report If you want to view the nozzle marking inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.4.6 Attach a file into a Nozzle Marking Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any nozzle marking inspection report in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.5 Alignment Reading Report The Alignment Reading Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the alignment reading inspection result for added request. 1. Click Alignment Reading Report in the Inspection – Quality The Alignment Reading Inspection page opens. Figure 10.5: Alignment Reading Inspection page The page shows a list of added alignment reading inspection requests. 10.5.1 Add Alignment Reading Report Details If you want to add the alignment reading report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Alignment Reading Report window opens. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Alignment Reading Report 2. In the Shell Number box, enter the shell number. 3. Enter the orientation level in 0, 90,180 and 270 degrees. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.5.2 Add Alignment Reading Inspection Result Details If you want to add the alignment reading inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.5.3 Submit Alignment Reading Inspection Result Once you have added the alignment reading inspection result, the Request Status column in the Alignment Reading Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.5. 1. If you want to submit the alignment reading inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the alignment reading inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.5.4 View an RFI Report for Alignment Reading Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any alignment reading inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.5.5 View an Alignment Reading Inspection Report If you want to view the alignment reading inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.5.6 Attach a file into an Alignment Reading Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any alignment reading inspection report in the Alignment Reading Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.6 Ovality Reading Report The Ovality Reading Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the ovality reading inspection result for added request. 1. Click Ovality Reading Report in the Inspection – Quality The Ovality Reading Report page opens. Figure 10.6: Ovality Reading Report page The page shows a list of added ovality reading inspection requests. 10.6.1 Add Ovality Reading Report Details If you want to add the ovality reading report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Ovality Reading Details window and the Ovality Reading Report window opens. 2. In the Applicable Code box, select the applicable code. 3. In the Shell ID box, enter the shell id. 4. Click Save. 5. Click (ADD button) in the Ovality Reading Report 6. In the Shell1 to Shell7 boxes, enter the shell numbers. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 10.6.2 Add Ovality Reading Inspection Result Details If you want to add the ovality reading inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.6.3 Submit Ovality Reading Inspection Result Once you have added the ovality reading inspection result, the Request Status column in the Ovality Reading Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.6. 1. If you want to submit the ovality reading inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the ovality reading inspection is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.6.4 View an RFI Report for Ovality Reading Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any ovality reading inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.6.5 View an Ovality Reading Inspection Report If you want to view the ovality reading inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.6.6 Attach a file into an Ovality Reading Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any ovality reading inspection report in the Ovality Reading Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.7 Thickness Report The Thickness Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the thickness inspection result for added request. 1. Click Thickness Report in the Inspection – Quality The Thickness Report page opens. Figure 10.7: Thickness Report page The page shows a list of added thickness inspection requests. 10.7.1 Add Thickness Inspection Report Details If you want to add the thickness inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Probe Details window and the Thickness Report Details window opens. 2. In the Probe No box, enter the probe number. 3. In the Serial No box, enter the serial number. 4. Click Save. 5. Click (ADD button) in the Thickness Report Details 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the thickness report. 6. In the REQ-THK box, enter the required thickness value. 7. In the Spot-1 toSpot-8 boxes, enter the spot details. 8. Click Save. 10.7.2 Add Thickness Inspection Result Details If you want to add the thickness inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.7.3 Submit Thickness Inspection Result Once you have added the thickness inspection result, the Request Status column in the Thickness Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.7. 1. If you want to submit the thickness inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the thickness inspection is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.7.4 View an RFI Report for Thickness Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any thickness inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.7.5 View a Thickness Inspection Report If you want to view the thickness inspection report, click  (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.7.6 Attach a file into a Thickness Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any thickness inspection report in the Thickness Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.8 VPCI Report The VPCI Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the VPCI inspection result for added request. 1. Click VPCI Report in the Inspection – Quality The VPCI Report page opens. Figure 10.8: VPCI Report page The page shows a list of added VPCI inspection requests. 10.8.1 Add VPCI Inspection Report Details If you want to add the VPCI inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The VPCI Report Details window and the VPCI Report window opens. 2. Check and edit the VPCI report details in the VPCI Report Details 3. Click Save. 4. Click (ADD button) in the VPCI Report 5. In the Observation box, enter the observation detail for VPCI. 6. Click Save. 10.8.2 Add VPCI Inspection Result Details If you want to add the VPCI inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.8.3 Submit VPCI Inspection Result Once you have added the VPCI inspection result, the Request Status column in the VPCI Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.8. 1. If you want to submit the VPCI inspection result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the VPCI inspection is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.8.4 View an RFI Report for VPCI Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any VPCI inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.8.5 View a VPCI Inspection Report If you want to view the VPCI inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.8.6 Attach a file into a VPCI Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any VPCI inspection report in the VPCI Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.9 Leak Test Report The Leak Test Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the leak test result for added request. 1. Click Leak Test Report in the Inspection – Quality The Leak Test Report page opens. Figure 10.9: Leak Test Report page The page shows a list of added leak test requests. 10.9.1 Add Leak Test Report Details If you want to add the leak test report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Test Parameters window and the Equipment Details window opens. 2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 3. Check and edit the leak test report details in the Test Parameters 4. Click Save. 5. Click (ADD button) in the Equipment Details 6. In the Conducted By box, select whether the leak test is conducted Internally or Externally. 7. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment detail from a drop-own list. 8. In the Position box, select a position from a drop-down list. 9. Click Save. 10.9.2 Add Leak Test Result Details If you want to add the leak test result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.9.3 Submit Leak Test Result Once you have added the leak test result, the Request Status column in the Leak Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.9. 1. If you want to submit the leak test result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the leak test result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.9.4 View an RFI Report for Leak Test If you want to view the RFI report for any leak test, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.9.5 View a Leak Test Report If you want to view the leak test report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.9.6 Attach a file into a Leak Test Report If you want to attach a file with any leak test report in the Leak Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.10 Hydrostatic Test Report The Hydrostatic Test Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the hydrostatic test result for added request. 1. Click Hydrostatic Test Report in the Inspection – Quality The Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page opens. Figure 10.10: Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page The page shows a list of added hydrostatic test requests. 10.10.1 Add Hydrostatic Test Report Details If you want to add the hydrostatic test report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Test Parameters window, Metal Details window, and the Equipment Details window open. 2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 3. In the Test Parameters window, enter the test parameter data. 4. In the Metal Details window, enter the metal details. 5. Click Save. 6. Click (ADD button) in the Equipment Details 7. In the Conducted By box, select whether the hydrostatic test is conducted Internally or Externally. 8. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment detail from a drop-own list. 9. In the Position box, select a position from a drop-down list. 10. Click Save. 10.10.2 Add Hydrostatic Test Result Details If you want to add the hydrostatic test result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.10.3 Submit Hydrostatic Test Result Once you have added the hydrostatic test result, the Request Status column in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.10. 1. If you want to submit the hydrostatic test result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the hydrostatic test result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.10.4 View an RFI Report for Hydrostatic Test If you want to view the RFI report for any hydrostatic test, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.10.5 View a Hydrostatic Test Report If you want to view the hydrostatic test report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.10.6 Attach a file into a Hydrostatic Test Report If you want to attach a file with any hydrostatic test report in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.11 Shell Side Hydrostatic Report The Shell Side Hydrostatic Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the shell side hydrostatic test result for added request. 1. Click Shell Side Hydrostatic Report in the Inspection – Quality The Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page opens. Figure 10.11: Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page The page shows a list of added shell side hydrostatic test requests. 10.11.1 Add Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Report Details If you want to add the shell side hydrostatic test report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Test Parameters window, Metal Details window, and the Equipment Details window open. 2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 3. In the Test Parameters window, enter the test parameter data. 4. In the Metal Details window, enter the metal details. 5. Click Save. 6. Click(ADD button) in the Equipment Details 7. In the Conducted By box, select whether the hydrostatic test is conducted Internally or Externally. 8. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment detail from a drop-own list. 9. In the Position box, select a position from a drop-down list. 10. Click Save. 10.11.2 Add Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Result Details If you want to add the shell side hydrostatic test result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.11.3 Submit Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Result Once you have added the shell side hydrostatic test result, the Request Status column in the Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.11. 1. If you want to submit the shell side hydrostatic test result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the shell side hydrostatic test result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.11.4 View an RFI Report for Shell Side Hydrostatic Test If you want to view the RFI report for any shell side hydrostatic test, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.11.5 View a Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Report If you want to view the shell side hydrostatic test report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.11.6 Attach a file into a Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Report If you want to attach a file with any shell side hydrostatic test report in the Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.12 Pneumatic Pressure Report The Pneumatic Test Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the pneumatic pressure test result for added request. 1. Click Pneumatic Test Report in the Inspection – Quality The Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page opens. Figure 10.12: Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page The page shows a list of added pneumatic pressure test requests. 10.12.1 Add Pneumatic Test Report Details If you want to add the pneumatic pressure test report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Test Parameters window and the Equipment Details window open. 2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 3. Check and edit the pneumatic pressure test report details in the Test Parameters 4. Click Save. 5. Click  (ADD button) in the Equipment Details window. 2. In the Conducted By box, select whether the pneumatic pressure test is conducted Internally or Externally. 3. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment detail from a drop-own list. 4. In the Position box, select a position from a drop-down list. 5. Click Save. 10.12.2 Add Pneumatic Pressure Test Result Details If you want to add the pneumatic pressure test result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.12.3 Submit Pneumatic Pressure Test Result Once you have added the pneumatic pressure test result, the Request Status column in the Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.12. 1. If you want to submit the pneumatic pressure test result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the pneumatic pressure test result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.12.4 View an RFI Report for Pneumatic Pressure Test If you want to view the RFI report for any pneumatic pressure test, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.12.5 View a Pneumatic Pressure Test Report If you want to view the pneumatic pressure test report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.12.6 Attach a file into a Pneumatic Pressure Test Report If you want to attach a file with any pneumatic pressure test report in the Pneumatic Pressure Test Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.13 Flange Face Inspection Report The Flange Face Inspection Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the flange face inspection test result for added request. 1. Click Flange Face Inspection Report in the Inspection – Quality The Flange Face Inspection Report page opens. Figure 10.13: Flange Face Inspection Report page The page shows a list of added flange face inspection requests. 10.13.1 Add Flange Face Inspection Report Details If you want to add the flange face inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Report Photos window opens. 2. Add report photos. 10.13.2 Add Flange Face Inspection Result Details If you want to add the flange face inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.13.3 Submit Flange Face Inspection Test Result Once you have added the flange face inspection test result, the Request Status column in the Flange Face Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.13. 1. If you want to submit the flange face inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the flange face inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.13.4 View an RFI Report for Flange Face Inspection Test If you want to view the RFI report for any flange face inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.13.5 View a Flange Face Inspection Report If you want to view the flange face inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.13.6 Attach a file into a Flange Face Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any flange face inspection report in the Flange Face Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.14 Drining and Dring Report The Drining and Dring Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the drining and dring inspection test result for added request. 1. Click Drining and Dring Reportin the Inspection – Quality The Drining and Dring Report page opens. Figure 10.14: Drining and Dring Report page The page shows a list of added drining and dring inspection requests. 10.14.1 Add Drining and Dring Inspection Report Details If you want to add the drining and dring inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Report Photos window opens. 2. Add report photos. 10.14.2 Add Drining and Dring Inspection Result Details If you want to add the drining and dring inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.14.3 Submit Drining and Dring Inspection Test Result Once you have added the drining and dring inspection test result, the Request Status column in the Drining and Dring Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.14. 1. If you want to submit the drining and dring inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the drining and dring inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.14.4 View an RFI Report for Drining and Dring Inspection Test If you want to view the RFI report for any drining and dring inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.14.5 View a Drining and Dring Inspection Report If you want to view the drining and dring inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.14.6 Attach a file into a Drining and Dring Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any drining and dring inspection report in the Drining and Dring Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.15 Shipment Report The Shipment Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the shipment inspection test result for added request. 1. Click Shipment Report in the Inspection – Quality The Shipment Report page opens. Figure 10.15: Shipment Report page The page shows a list of added Shipment inspection requests. 10.15.1 Add Shipment Inspection Report Details If you want to add the Shipment inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Report Photos window opens. 2. Add report photos. 10.15.2 Add Shipment Inspection Result Details If you want to add the shipment inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.15.3 Submit Shipment Inspection Result Once you have added the shipment inspection result, the Request Status column in the Shipment Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.15. 1. If you want to submit the shipment inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the shipment inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.15.4 View an RFI Report for Shipment Inspection Test If you want to view the RFI report for any shipment inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.15.5 View a Shipment Inspection Report If you want to view the shipment inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.15.6 Attach a file into a Shipment Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any shipment inspection report in the Shipment Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.16 Name Plate Report The Name Plate Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the name plate test result for added request. 1. Click Name Plate Report in the Inspection – Quality The Name Plate Report page opens. Figure 10.16: Name Plate Report page The page shows a list of added name plate inspection requests. 10.16.1 Add Name Plate Inspection Report Details If you want to add the name plate inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Report Photos window opens. 2. Add report photos. 10.16.2 Add Name Plate Inspection Result Details If you want to add the name plate inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.16.3 Submit Name Plate Inspection Result Once you have added the name plate inspection result, the Request Status column in the Name Plate Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.16. 1. If you want to submit the name plate inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the name plate inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.16.4 View an RFI Report for Name Plate Inspection Test If you want to view the RFI report for any name plate inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.16.5 View a Name Plate Inspection Report If you want to view the name plate inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.16.6 Attach a file into a Name Plate Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any name plate inspection report in the Name Plate Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR” 10.17 Stamp Verification/Others Report The Stamp Verification Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the stamp verification result for added request. 1. Click Stamp Verification Report in the Inspection – Quality The Stamp Verification Report page opens. Figure 10.17: Stamp Verification Report page The page shows a list of added stamp verification requests. 10.17.1 Add Stamp Verification Report Details If you want to add the stamp verification report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Stamp Verification Result window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Stamp Verification Result 3. In the Component box, select a component from a drop-down list. 4. In the Plate No box, enter the plate number. 5. In the Heat No box, enter the heat number. 6. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 7. Click Save. 10.17.2 Add Stamp Verification Result Details If you want to add the stamp verification result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.17.3 Submit Stamp Verification Result Once you have added the stamp verification result, the Request Status column in the Stamp Verification Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.17. 1. If you want to submit the stamp verification result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the stamp verification result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.17.4 View an RFI Report for Stamp Verification If you want to view the RFI report for any stamp verification inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.17.5 View a Stamp Verification Report If you want to view the stamp verification report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.17.6 Attach a file into a Stamp Verification Report If you want to attach a file with any stamp verification report in the Stamp Verification Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.18 Dishend Dimension Report The Dishend Dimension Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the dishend dimension inspection test result for added request. 1. Click Dishend Dimension Report in the Inspection – Quality The Dishend Dimension Report page opens. Figure 10.18: Dishend Dimension Report page The page shows a list of added dishend dimension inspection requests. 10.18.1 Add Dishend Dimension Inspection Report Details If you want to add the dishend dimension inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Dishend Dimension Details, Required Dimension, Checked Dimension, and Report Photos window opens. 2. Check and edit the details in the Dishend Dimension Details 3. Click (ADD button) in the Required Dimension 4. In the Inside Diameter (ID) box, enter the inside diameter value. 5. In the Circumference Inside box, enter the inside circumference value. 6. In the Height Inside box, enter the inside height value. 7. In the Minimum Thickness box, enter the minimum thickness value. 8. In the Average Thickness box, enter the average thickness value. 9. In the Crown Radius box, enter the crown radius value. 10. In the Knuckle Radius box, enter the knuckle radius value. 11. In the Ovality box, enter the ovality value. 12. Click Save.     The required dimension details are saved. 13. Click (ADD button) in the Checked Dimension 14. Enter the checked dimension details in the Checked Dimension 15. Add report photos. 10.18.2 Add Dishend Dimension Inspection Result Details If you want to add the dishend dimension inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.18.3 Submit Dishend Dimension Inspection Test Result Once you have added the dishend dimension inspection test result, the Request Status column in the Dishend Dimension Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.18. 1. If you want to submit the dishend dimension inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the dishend dimension inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.18.4 View an RFI Report for Dishend Dimension Inspection Test If you want to view the RFI report for any dishend dimension inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.18.5 View a Dishend Dimension Inspection Report If you want to view the dishend dimension inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.18.6 Attach a file into a Dishend Dimension Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any dishend dimension inspection report in the Dishend Dimension Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.19 Dishend Thickness Report The Dishend Thickness Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the dishend thickness inspection test result for added request. 1. Click Dishend Thickness Report in the Inspection – Quality The Dishend Thickness Report page opens. Figure 10.19: Dishend Thickness Report page The page shows a list of added dishend thickness inspection requests. 10.19.1 Add Dishend Thickness Inspection Report Details If you want to add the dishend thickness inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Reportcolumn for the respective request. The Dishend Thickness Details and Required Thickness windows open. 2. Check and edit the details in the Dishend Thickness Details 3. Click (ADD button) in the Required Thickness 4. In the Numbers box, enter the number value. 5. In the Readings box, enter the readings value. 6. Click Save. The required thickness details are saved. 10.19.2 Add Dishend Thickness Inspection Result Details If you want to add the dishend thickness inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.19.3 Submit Dishend Thickness Inspection Test Result Once you have added the dishend thickness inspection test result, the Request Status column in the Dishend Thickness Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.19. 1. If you want to submit the dishend thickness inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the dishend thickness inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.19.4 View an RFI Report for Dishend Thickness Inspection Test If you want to view the RFI report for any dishend thickness inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.19.5 View a Dishend Thickness Inspection Report If you want to view the dishend thickness inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.19.6 Attach a file into a Dishend Thickness Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any dishend thickness inspection report in the Dishend Thickness Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.20 Blasting and Painting Report The Blasting and Painting Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the blasting and painting inspection test result for added request. 1. Click Blasting and Painting Report in the Inspection – Quality The Blasting and Painting Report page opens. Figure 10.20: Blasting and Painting Report page The page shows a list of added blasting and painting inspection requests. 10.20.1 Add Blasting and Painting Inspection Report Details If you want to add the blasting and painting inspection report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The page shows a new window to add the result details. 2. In the SURFACE PREPARATION field, enter the inspection details for surface preparation. 3. In the ABRASIVE BLASTING field, enter the inspection details for abrasive preparation. 4. In the Painting First Coat field, enter the inspection details for first coat painting. 5. In the Intermediate Coat field, enter the inspection details for intermediate coat. 6. In the Top Coat field, enter the inspection details for top coat. 10.20.2 Add Blasting and Painting Inspection Result Details If you want to add the blasting and painting inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.20.3 Submit Blasting and Painting Inspection Result Once you have added the blasting and painting inspection result, the Request Status column in the Blasting and Painting Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.20. 1. If you want to submit the blasting and painting inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the blasting and painting inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.20.4 View an RFI Report for Blasting and Painting Inspection Test If you want to view the RFI report for any blasting and painting inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.20.5 View a Blasting and Painting Inspection Report If you want to view the blasting and painting inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.20.6 Attach a file into a Blasting and Painting Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any blasting and painting inspection report in the Blasting and Painting Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.21 Miscellaneous Report The Miscellaneous Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the vessel NDT inspection test result for added request. 1. Click Miscellaneous Report in the Inspection – Quality The Vessel NDT Report page opens. Figure 10.21: Vessel NDT Report page The page shows a list of added vessel NDT inspection requests. 10.21.1 Add Vessel NDT Inspection Result Details If you want to add the vessel NDT inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.21.2 Submit Vessel NDT Inspection Result Once you have added the vessel NDT inspection result, the Request Status column in the Vessel NDT Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.21. 1. If you want to submit the vessel NDT inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the vessel NDT inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.21.3 View an RFI Report for Vessel NDT Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any vessel NDT inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.21.4 Attach a file into a Vessel NDT Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any vessel NDT inspection report in the Vessel NDT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.22 PWHT Report The PWHT Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the PWHT inspection result for added request. 1. Click PWHT Report in the Inspection – Quality The PWHT Report page opens. Figure 10.22: PWHT Report page The page shows a list of added PWHT inspection requests. 10.22.1 Add PWHT Inspection Report Details If you want to add the PWHT inspection report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The page shows the Test Parameters and PWHT Test Result windows. 2. In the Test Parameters window, check and edit the test parameters data. 3. Click (ADD button) in the PWHT Test Result window. 4. In the Heating Rate box, enter the heating rate. 5. In the Temp box, enter the temperature value. 6. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time range. 7. In the Cooling Rate box, enter the cooling rate value. 8. In the Parameter box, enter the parameter value. 9. Click Save. 10.22.2 Add PWHT Inspection Result Details If you want to add the PWHT inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.22.3 Submit PWHT Inspection Result Once you have added the PWHT inspection result, the Request Status column in the PWHT Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.22. 1. If you want to submit the PWHT inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the PWHT inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.22.4 View an RFI Report for PWHT Inspection Test If you want to view the RFI report for any PWHT inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.22.5 View a PWHT Inspection Report If you want to view the PWHT inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 10.22.6 Attach a file into a PWHT Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any PWHT inspection report in the PWHT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 10.23 Pre-welding Inspection Report The Pre-welding Inspection Report tab in the Inspection – Quality menu used to add the pre-welding inspection result for added request. 1. Click Pre-welding Inspection Report in the Inspection – Quality The Pre-welding Inspection Report page opens. Figure 10.23: Pre-welding Inspection Report page The page shows a list of added pre-welding inspection requests. 10.23.1 Add Pre-welding Inspection Result Details If you want to add the pre-welding inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 10.23.2 Submit Pre-welding Inspection Result Once you have added the pre-welding inspection result, the Request Status column in the Pre-welding Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 10.23. 1. If you want to submit the pre-welding inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the pre-welding inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 10.23.3 View an RFI Report for Pre-welding Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any pre-welding inspection, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 10.23.4 Attach a file into a Pre-welding Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any pre-welding inspection report in the Pre-welding Inspection Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. NDT 11.0 NDT The NDT menu in the app used to add the inspection results after performing the various NDT inspections based on the added request. This menu also helps you to view the inspection reports. Users assigned with cuteQM_NDT role only can view and access the NDT menu and their functionalities. 11.1 RT Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as RT while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the RT inspection request will be added here. The RT Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the RT inspection result for the added request. 1. Click RT Report in the NDT The RT Report page opens. Figure 11.1: RT Report page 11.1.1 Add an RT Report If you want to add an RT report, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the RT Report The page shows a new window to add the details of RT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new RT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the             report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the RT report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the RT report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the RT report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the RT report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the RT report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the RT report. 10. Click Save The RT report is successfully added. Once you have added the RT report, you must add RT inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any RT report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.1.2 Add RT Inspection Result If you want to add the RT inspection result details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Joint Results, RT Results, and Report Photos windows open. The Joint Results window shows a list of added joints for the RT request. 2. If you want to edit the joint length, click(Edit icon) of the respective joint and change the joint length. 3. To add the RT inspection result, click(Add icon) of the respective joint.   The Marker Results window opens. 4. Click  (ADD button) in the Marker Results 5. In the Marker box, enter the marker number. 6. In the Sensitivity box, enter the sensitivity value. 7. In the Result box, select the result of RT inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. Reshoot – If you select Reshoot, the respective joint will be moved into the NDT Request – RFI page. 8. In the Defect box, select the defect detail. 9. In the Defect Length box, enter the defect length. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. 12. In the RT Results window, enter the RT result details. 13. Click Save RT Details. 14. In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.1.3 View a RT Inspection Report If you want to view the RT inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.1.4 Attach a File into a RT inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any RT inspection report in the RT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.2 UT Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as UT while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the UT inspection request will be added here. The UT Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the UT inspection result for the added request. 1. Click UT Report in the NDT The UT Report page opens. Figure 11.2: UT Report page 11.2.1 Add an UT Report If you want to add an UT report, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the UT Report The page shows a new window to add the details of UT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new UT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the             report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the UT report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the UT report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the UT report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the UT report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the UT report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the UT report. 10. Click Save. The UT report is successfully added. Once you have added the UT report, you must add UT inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any UT report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.2.2 Add UT Inspection Result If you want to add the UT inspection result details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Probe & Cable Details, Reference Setting Details, UT Results, and Report Photos windows open. The UT Results window shows a list of added joints for the UT request. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Probe & Cable Details window. 3. Enter the probe and cable details and click Save. 4. Click (ADD button) in the Reference Setting Details window. 5. Enter the reference setting details and click Save. 6. Click (ADD button) in the UT Results 7. Enter the UT result details. 8. In the Result box, select the result for UT inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 9. Click Save. 10. In the UT Results window, enter the UT result details. 11. Click Save UT Details. 12. In the Report Photos window, click  (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.2.3 View an UT Inspection Report If you want to view the UT inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.2.4 Attach a File into an UT inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any UT inspection report in the UT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.3 MT Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as MT while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the MT inspection request will be added here. The MT Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the MT inspection result for the added request. 1. Click MT Report in the NDT The MT Report page opens. Figure 11.3: MT Report page 11.3.1 Add a MT Report If you want to add a MT report, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the MT Report The page shows a new window to add the details of MT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new MT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the             report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the MT report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the MT report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the MT report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the MT report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the MT report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the MT report. 10. Click Save. The MT report is successfully added. Once you have added the MT report, you must add MT inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any MT report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.3.2 Add MT Inspection Result If you want to add the MT inspection result details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request.   The MPT Results and Report Photos windows open. The MPT Results window shows a list of added joints for the MT request. 2. Click (Edit icon) in the MPT Results 3. Enter the MPT result details 4. In the Result box, select the result for MT inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 5. In the MPT Results window, enter the MPT result details. 6. Click Save MPT Details. 7 In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.3.3 View a MT Inspection Report If you want to view the MT inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.3.4 Attach a File into a MT inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any MT inspection report in the MT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.4 PT Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as PT while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the PT inspection request will be added here. The PT Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the PT inspection result for the added request. 1. Click PT Report in the NDT The PT Report page opens. Figure 11.4: PT Report page 11.4.1 Add a PT Report If you want to add a PT report, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the PT Report page. The page shows a new window to add the details of PT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the             report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PT report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PT report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PT report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PT report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the PT report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the PT report. 10. Click Save. The PT report is successfully added. Once you have added the PT report, you must add PT inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any PT report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.4.2 Add PT Inspection Result If you want to add the PT inspection result details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The DPT Results and Report Photos windows open. The DPT Results window shows a list of added joints for the PT request. 2. Click  (Edit icon) in the DPT Results window 3. Enter the DPT result details. 4. In the Result box, select the result for PT inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 5. In the DPT Results window, enter the DPT result details. 6. Click Save DPT Details. 7. In the Report Photos window, click  (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.4.3 View a PT Inspection Report If you want to view the PT inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.4.4 Attach a File into a PT inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any PT inspection report in the PT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.5 PMI Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as PMI while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the PMI inspection request will be added here. The PMI Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the PMI inspection result for the added request. 1. Click PMI Report in the NDT The PMI Report page opens. Figure 11.5: PMI Report page 11.5.1 Add a PMI Report If you want to add a PMI report, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the PMI Report The page shows a new window to add the details of PMI report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PMI report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the          report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PMI report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PMI report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PMI report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PMI report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the PMI report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the PMI report. 10. Click Save. The PMI report is successfully added. Once you have added the PMI report, you must add PMI inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any PMI report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.5.2 Add PMI Inspection Result If you want to add the PMI inspection result details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The PMI Elements, PMI Joint Details, PMI Results, and Report Photos windows open. The PMI Joint Details window shows a list of added joints for the PMI request. 2. In the PMI Elements window, click (ADD button) and add the PMI elements. 3. Click (Edit icon) in the PMI Joint Details window. 4. Enter the joint number. 5. In the Result box, select the result for PMI inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 6. In the PMI Results window, enter the PMI result details. 7. Click Save PMI Details. 8. In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.5.3 View a PMI Inspection Report If you want to view the PMI inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.5.4 Attach a File into a PMI inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any PMI inspection report in the PMI Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.6 PAUT Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as PAUT while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the PAUT inspection request will be added here. The PAUT Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the PAUT inspection result for the added request. 1. Click PAUT Report in the NDT The PAUT Report page opens. Figure 11.6: PAUT Report page 11.6.1 Add a PAUT Report If you want to add a PAUT report, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the PAUT Report The page shows a new window to add the details of PAUT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PAUT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PAUT report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PAUT report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PAUT report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PAUT report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the PAUT report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the PAUT report. 10. Click Save. The PAUT report is successfully added. Once you have added the PAUT report, you must add PAUT inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any PAUT report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.6.2 Add PAUT Inspection Result If you want to add the PAUT inspection result details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Joint Results, PAUT Results, and Report Photos windows open. The Joint Results window shows a list of added joints for the PAUT request. 2. If you want to edit the joint length, click (Edit icon) of the respective joint and change the joint length. 3. To add the PAUT inspection result, click (Add icon) of the respective joint.   The Marker Results window opens. 4. Click (ADD button) in the Marker Results window. 5. In the Marker box, enter the marker number. 6. In the Sensitivity box, enter the sensitivity value. 7. In the Result box, select the result of PAUT inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 8. In the Defect box, select the defect detail. 9. In the Defect Length box, enter the defect length. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. 12. In the PAUT Results window, enter the PAUT result details. 13. Click Save PAUT Details. 14. In the Report Photos window, click  (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.6.3 View a PAUT Inspection Report If you want to view the PAUT inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.6.4 Attach a File into a PAUT inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any PAUT inspection report in the PAUT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.7 PWHT Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as PWHT while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the PWHT inspection request will be added here. The PWHT Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the PWHT inspection result for the added request. 1. Click PWHT Report in the NDT  The PWHT Report page opens. Figure 11.7: PWHT Report page 11.7.1 Add a PWHT Report If you want to add a PWHT report, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the PWHT Report page.   The page shows a new window to add the details of PWHT report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new PWHT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change             the report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PWHT report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PWHT report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PWHT report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PWHT report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the PWHT report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the PWHT report. 10. Click Save. The PWHT report is successfully added. Once you have added the PWHT report, you must add PWHT inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any PWHT report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.7.2 Add PWHT Inspection Result If you want to add the PWHT inspection result details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Joint Results, PWHT Results, and Report Photos windows open. The Joint Results window shows a list of added joints for the PWHT request. 2. Click (Edit icon) in the Joint Results window. 3. Enter the PWHT result details. 4. In the Result box, select the result for PWHT inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 5. In the PWHT Results window, enter the PWHT result details. 6. Click Save PWHT Details. 7. In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.7.3 View a PWHT Inspection Report If you want to view the PWHT inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.7.4 Attach a File into a PWHT inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any PWHT inspection report in the PWHT Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.8 TOFD Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as TOFD while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the TOFD inspection request will be added here. The TOFD Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the TOFD inspection result for the added request. 1. Click TOFD Report in the NDT The TOFD Report page opens. Figure 11.8: TOFD Report page 11.8.1 Add a TOFD Report If you want to add a TOFD report, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the TOFD Report The page shows a new window to add the details of TOFD report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new TOFD report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change              the  report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the TOFD report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the TOFD report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the TOFD report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the TOFD report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the TOFD report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the TOFD report. 10. Click Save. The TOFD report is successfully added. Once you have added the TOFD report, you must add TOFD inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any TOFD report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.8.2 Add TOFD Inspection Result If you want to add the TOFD inspection result details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Joint Results, TOFD Results, and Report Photos windows open. The Joint Results window shows a list of added joints for the TOFD request. 2. If you want to edit the joint length, click (Edit icon) of the respective joint and change the joint length. 3. To add the TOFD inspection result, click (Add icon) of the respective joint. The Segment Details window opens. 4. Click (ADD button) in the Segment Details window. 5. In the Segment box, enter the segment number. 6. In the Sensitivity box, enter the sensitivity value. 7. In the Result box, select the result of TOFD inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 8. In the Defect box, select the defect detail. 9. In the Defect Length box, enter the defect length. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. 12. In the TOFD Results window, enter the TOFD result details. 13. Click Save TOFD Details. 14. In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.8.3 View a TOFD Inspection Report If you want to view the TOFD inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.8.4 Attach a File into a TOFD inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any TOFD inspection report in the TOFD Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.9 Ferrite Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as ferrite while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the ferrite inspection request will be added here. The Ferrite Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the ferrite inspection result for the added request. 1. Click Ferrite Report in the NDT The Ferrite Report page opens. Figure 11.9: Ferrite Report page 11.9.1 Add a Ferrite Report If you want to add a ferrite report, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Ferrite Report page. The page shows a new window to add the details of ferrite report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new ferrite report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the ferrite report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the ferrite report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the ferrite report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the ferrite report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the ferrite report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the ferrite report. 10. Click Save. The ferrite report is successfully added. Once you have added the ferrite report, you must add ferrite inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any ferrite report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.9.2 Add Ferrite Inspection Result If you want to add the ferrite inspection result details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Ferrite Inspection Details, Joint Results, Ferrite Results, and Report Photos windows open. The Joint Results window shows a list of added joints for the ferrite request. 2. In the Ferrite Inspection Details window, click (ADD button) and add the ferrite inspection details. 3. In the Joint Results window, click (Edit icon) of the respective joint. 4. In the Result box, select the result of ferrite inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 5. Click Save. 6. In the Ferrite Results window, enter the ferrite result details. 7. Click Save Ferrite Details. 8. In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.9.3 View a Ferrite Inspection Report If you want to view the ferrite inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.9.4 Attach a File into a Ferrite inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any ferrite inspection report in the Ferrite Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.10 Hardness Report If you have chosen the NDT request type as Hardness while adding NDT request in the NDT Request – RFI tab, the hardness inspection request will be added here. The Hardness Report tab in the NDT menu used to add the hardness inspection result for the added request. 1. Click Hardness Report in the NDT The Hardness Report page opens. Figure 11.10: Hardness Report page 11.10.1 Add a hardness Report If you want to add a hardness report, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Hardness Report The page shows a new window to add the details of hardness report. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Tip: A report number for a new hardness report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. If you want change the report number, you can change. 2. In the NDT By box, select who has requested the NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list. 3. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. 4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the hardness report. 5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the hardness report. 6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the hardness report. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the hardness report. 8. In the Accepted/Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted/approved the hardness report. 9. In the Accepted/Approved Date box, select the accepted/approved date of the hardness report. 10. Click Save. The hardness report is successfully added. Once you have added the hardness report, you must add hardness inspection results. Note: If you want to lock any hardness report, click the respective checkbox provided in the Lock Report? column. 11.10.2 Add Hardness Inspection Result If you want to add the hardness inspection result details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Joint Results, Hardness Results, and Report Photos windows open. The Joint Results window shows a list of added joints for the hardness request. 2. Click (Edit icon) in the Joint Results window and add the joint details. 3. In the Hardness Results window, enter the hardness result details. 4. In the Result box, enter the result for hardness inspection. Accepted – If you select Accepted, the respective joint will be moved for further process. Rejected – If you select Rejected, the respective  joint will be rejected in the NDT Request – RFI page and moved to Weld visual page with the sub name of suffix 'R1', for example if the joint J1 means it will be added as J1 R1. 5. Click Save Hardness Details. 6. In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and add the report photos. 11.10.3 View a Hardness Inspection Report If you want to view the hardness inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 11.10.4 Attach a File into a Hardness inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any hardness inspection report in the Hardness Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 11.11 RT Summary Report If you want to view the RT summary report, navigate to the RT Summary Report tab in the NDT menu. 1. Click RT Summary Report in the NDT The NDT – RT Summary Report page opens. Figure 11.11: RT Summary Report page 11.11.1 Print RT Summary Report If you want to print the RT summary report, use and   (print icons) provided in the RT Summary Report page. 1. If you want to print the current page of the summary report, click (print icon including the page number). 2. If you want to print all the pages of the summary report, click (print icon). 11.11.2 Export RT Summary Report You can export the RT summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the RT Summary Report page. 11.12 PT Summary Report If you want to view the PT summary report, navigate to the PT Summary Report tab in the NDT menu. 1. Click PT Summary Report in the NDT The NDT – PT Summary Report page opens. Figure 11.12: PT Summary Report page 11.12.1 Print PT Summary Report If you want to print the PT summary report, use and  (print icons) provided in the PT Summary Report page. 1. If you want to print the current page of the summary report, click (print icon including the page number). 2. If you want to print all the pages of the summary report, click (print icon). 11.12.2 Export PT Summary Report You can export the PT summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the PT Summary Report page. 11.13 NDT Summary Report If you want to view the NDT summary report, navigate to the NDT Summary Report tab in the NDT menu. 1. Click NDT Summary Report in the NDT The NDT Summary Report page opens. Figure 11.13: NDT Summary Report page 11.13.1 Print NDT Summary Report If you want to print the NDT summary report, use and   (print icons) provided in the NDT Summary Report page. 1. If you want to print the current page of the summary report, click (print icon including the page number). 2. If you want to print all the pages of the summary report, click (print icon). 11.13.2 Export NDT Summary Report You can export the NDT summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the NDT Summary Report page. Heat Exchanger 12.0 Heat Exchanger A Heat Exchanger is a device used with the Pressure Vessel to transfer heat between two or more fluids. Heat exchangers are used in both cooling and heating processes. The fluids may be separated by a solid wall to prevent mixing or they may be in direct contact. The Heat Exchanger menu in the app used to add the various inspection requests to be done in the Heat exchanger, and also add the inspection result after completing the inspection based on the request. Users assigned with Production role only can view and access the following RFI functionalities in the Heat Exchanger menu, and can add the following inspection requests. 12.1 Final Dimensional Report – RFI The Final Dimensional Report – RFI tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the final dimensional inspection request. To add the final dimensional inspection request, 1. Click Final Dimensional Report – RFI in the Heat Exchanger The Final Dimensional Report page opens. Figure 12.1: Final Dimensional Report page 12.1.1 Add a Final Dimensional Request If you want to add a final dimensional request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Final Dimensional Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the final dimensional request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new final dimensional report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the final dimensional request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the final dimensional request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the final dimensional request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the final dimensional request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the final dimensional request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the final dimensional request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title name. 10. Click Save. The final dimensional request is added and listed in the Final Dimensional Report page. 12.1.2 Submit a Final Dimensional Request Once you have added the final dimensional inspection request, the Submission column in the Final Dimensional Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.1. 1. If you want to submit the final dimensional inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the final dimensional inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the final dimensional inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.1.3 Edit a Final Dimensional Request Note that if the final dimensional request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing final dimensional request in the Final Dimensional Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective final dimensional request. See Fig 12.1. The page shows the details of added final dimensional request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.1.4 Add RFI Data for a Final Dimensional Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added final dimensional request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Final Dimensional Report See Fig 12.1. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.1.5 View RFI Report for a Final Dimensional Request If you want to view the RFI report for the final dimensional request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.1.6 Attach a File into a Final Dimensional Request If you want to attach a file with any final dimensional request listed in the Final Dimensional Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective final dimensional request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.2 Nozzle Marking Report – RFI This Nozzle Marking Report – RFI tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the nozzle marking inspection request. 1. Click Nozzle Marking Report – RFI in the Heat Exchanger The Nozzle Marking Inspection page opens. Figure 12.2: Nozzle Marking Inspection page 12.2.1 Add a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request If you want to add a nozzle marking inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page The page shows a new window to add the details of the nozzle marking inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new nozzle marking inspection request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the nozzle marking inspection 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the nozzle marking inspection 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the nozzle marking inspection 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the nozzle marking inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the nozzle marking inspection 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the nozzle marking inspection 9. Click Save. The nozzle marking inspection request is added and listed in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page. 12.2.2 Submit a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request Once you have added the nozzle marking inspection request, the Submission column in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.2. 1. If you want to submit the nozzle marking inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the nozzle marking inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the nozzle marking inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.2.3 Edit a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request Note that if the nozzle marking inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing nozzle marking inspection request in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective nozzle marking inspection See Fig 12.2. The page shows the details of added nozzle marking inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.2.4 Add RFI Data for a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added nozzle marking inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click  (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Nozzle Marking Inspection page. See Fig 12.2. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.2.5 View RFI Report for a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the nozzle marking inspection request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.2.6 Attach a File into a Nozzle Marking Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any nozzle marking inspection request listed in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective nozzle marking inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.3 Shell Side Hydrostatic – RFI The Shell Side Hydrostatic– RFI tab in the Heat Exchange menu used to add the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. To add the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, 1. Click Shell Side Hydrostatic Test – RFI in the Heat Exchange The Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page opens. Figure 12.3: Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page 12.3.1 Add a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to add a shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new shell side hydrostatic pressure test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 9. Click Save. The shell side hydrostatic pressure test request is added and listed in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. 12.3.2 Submit a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request Once you have added the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, the Submission column in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.3. 1. If you want to submit the shell side hydrostatic pressure test inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the shell side hydrostatic pressure test. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the shell side hydrostatic pressure test results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.3.3 Edit a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request Note that if the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing shell side hydrostatic pressure test request in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. See Fig 12.3. The page shows the details of added shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.3.4 Add RFI Data for a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report See Fig 12.3. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.3.5 View RFI Report for a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to view the RFI report for the shell side hydrostatic pressure test request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.3.6 Attach a File into a Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Request If you want to attach a file with any shell side hydrostatic pressure test request listed in the Shell Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective shell side hydrostatic pressure test request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.4 Leak Test – RFI In Heat Exchanger, Leak Test is performed to identify any leakage. The Leak Test – RFI tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the leak test request. To add the leak test request, 1. Click Leak Test – RFI in the Heat Exchanger The Leak Test Report page opens. Figure 12.4: Leak Test Report page 12.4.1 Add a Leak Test Request If you want to add a leak test request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Leak Test Report page. The page shows a new window to add the details of the leak test request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new leak test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the leak test request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the leak test request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the leak test request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the leak test request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the leak test request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the leak test request. 9. Click Save. The leak test request is added and listed in the Leak Test Report page. 12.4.2 Submit a Leak Test Request Once you have added the leak test request, the Submission column in the Leak Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.4. 1. If you want to submit the leak test inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the leak test. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the leak test results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.4.3 Edit a Leak Test Request Note that if the leak test request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing leak test request in the Leak Test Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective leak test request. See Fig 12.4. The page shows the details of added leak test request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.4.4 Add RFI Data for a Leak Test Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added leak test request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Leak Test Report See Fig 12.4. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.4.5 View RFI Report for Leak Test Request If you want to view the RFI report for the leak test request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.4.6 Attach a File into a Leak Test Request If you want to attach a file with any leak test request listed in the Leak Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective leak test request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.5 Tube Expansion – RFI The Tube Expansion – RFI tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the tube expansion inspection request. To add the tube expansion inspection request, 1. Click Tube Expansion – RFI in the Heat Exchanger The Tube Expansion Report page opens. Figure 12.5: Tube Expansion Report page 12.5.1 Add a Tube Expansion Inspection Request If you want to add a tube expansion inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Tube Expansion Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the tube expansion inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new tube expansion inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the tube expansion inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the tube expansion inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the tube expansion inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the tube expansion inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the tube expansion inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the tube expansion inspection request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title of the request. 10. Click Save. The tube expansion inspection request is added and listed in the Tube Expansion Report page. 12.5.2 Submit a Tube Expansion Inspection Request Once you have added the tube expansion inspection request, the Submission column in the Tube Expansion Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.5. 1. If you want to submit the tube expansion inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the tube expansion inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the tube expansion inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.5.3 Edit a Tube Expansion Inspection Request Note that if the tube expansion inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing tube expansion inspection request in the Tube Expansion Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective tube expansion inspection request. See Fig 12.5. The page shows the details of added tube expansion inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.5.4 Add RFI Data for a Tube Expansion Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added tube expansion inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Tube Expansion Report See Fig 12.5. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.5.5 View RFI Report for Tube Expansion Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the tube expansion inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.5.6 Attach a File into a Tube Expansion Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any tube expansion inspection request listed in the Tube Expansion Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective tube expansion inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.6 Tube Mock Up – RFI The Tube Mock Up – RFI tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the tube mock up inspection request. To add the tube mock up inspection request, 1. Click Tube Mock Up – RFI in the Heat Exchanger The Tube Mock Up Report page opens. Figure 12.6: Tube Mock Up Report page 12.6.1 Add a Tube Mock Up Inspection Request If you want to add a tube mock up inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Tube Mock Up Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the tube mock up inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new tube mock up inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the tube mock up inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the tube mock up inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the tube mock up inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the tube mock up inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the tube mock up inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the tube mock up inspection request. 9. In the Title box, enter the title of the request. 10. Click Save. The tube mock up inspection request is added and listed in the Tube Mock UP Report page. 12.6.2 Submit a Tube Mock Up Inspection Request Once you have added the tube mock up inspection request, the Submission column in the Tube Mock Up Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.6. 1. If you want to submit the tube mock up inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the tube mock up inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the tube mock up inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.6.3 Edit a Tube Mock Up Inspection Request Note that if the tube mock up inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing tube mock up inspection request in the Tube Mock Up Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective tube mock up inspection request. See Fig 12.6. The page shows the details of added tube mock up inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.6.4 Add RFI Data for a Tube Mock Up Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added tube mock up inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Tube Expansion Report See Fig 12.6. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 9. Click Save. 12.6.5 View RFI Report for Tube Mock Up Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the tube mock up inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.6.6 Attach a File into a Tube Mock Up Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any tube mock up inspection request listed in the Tube Mock Up Report page, you can use  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective tube mock up inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.7 Pickling and Passivation – RFI The Pickling and Passivation – RFI tab in the Heat Exchange menu used to add the pickling and passivation inspection request. To add the pickling and passivation inspection request, 1. Click Pickling and Passivation – RFI in the Heat Exchange The Pickling and Passivation Report page opens. Figure 12.7: Pickling and Passivation Report page 12.7.1 Add a Picking and Passivation Inspection Request If you want to add a pickling and passivation inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Pickling and Passivation Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the pickling and passivation inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new pickling and passivation inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the pickling and passivation inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the pickling and passivation inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the pickling and passivation inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the pickling and passivation inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the pickling and passivation inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the pickling and passivation inspection request. 9. Click Save. The pickling and passivation inspection request is added and listed in the Picking and Passivation Report page. 12.7.2 Submit a Picking and Passivation Inspection Request Once you have added the pickling and passivation inspection request, the Submission column in the Picking and Passivation Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.7. If you want to submit the pickling and passivation inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the pickling and passivation inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the pickling and passivation inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.7.3 Edit a Picking and Passivation Inspection Request Note that if the pickling and passivation inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing pickling and passivation inspection request in the Picking and Passivation Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective pickling and passivation inspection request. See Fig 12.7. The page shows the details of added pickling and passivation inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.7.4 Add RFI Data for a Picking and Passivation Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added picking and passivation inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Picking and Passivation Report See Fig 12.7. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.7.5 View RFI Report for a Picking and Passivation Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the pickling and passivation inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.7.6 Attach a File into a Picking and Passivation Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any pickling and passivation inspection request listed in the Picking and Passivation Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective pickling and passivation inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.8 Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report – RFI The Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report – RFI tab in the Heat Exchange menu used to add the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. To add the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request, 1. Click Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report – RFI in the Heat Exchange The Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page opens. Figure 12.8: Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page 12.8.1 Add a Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Request If you want to add a baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. 9. Click Save. The baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request is added and listed in the Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page. 12.8.5 Submit a Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Request Once you have added the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request, the Submission column in the Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.8. 1. If you want to submit the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.8.6 Edit a Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Request Note that if the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request in the Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. See Fig 12.8. The page shows the details of added baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.8.4 Add RFI Data for a Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report See Fig 12.8. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.8.5 View RFI Report for a Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request, click  (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.8.6 Attach a File into a Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request listed in the Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.9 Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report – RFI The Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report – RFI tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the tube bundle skeleton inspection request. To add the tube bundle skeleton inspection request, 1. Click Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report – RFI in the Heat Exchanger The Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page opens. Figure 12.9: Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page 12.9.1 Add a Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Request If you want to add a tube bundle skeleton inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the tube bundle skeleton inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new tube bundle skeleton inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the tube bundle skeleton inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the tube bundle skeleton inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the tube bundle skeleton inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the tube bundle skeleton inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the tube bundle skeleton inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the tube bundle skeleton inspection request. 9. Click Save. The tube bundle skeleton inspection request is added and listed in the Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page. 12.9.2 Submit a Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Request Once you have added the tube bundle skeleton inspection request, the Submission column in the Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.9. 1. If you want to submit the tube bundle skeleton inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the tube bundle skeleton inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the tube bundle skeleton inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.9.3 Edit a Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Request Note that if the tube bundle skeleton inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing tube bundle skeleton inspection request in the Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective tube bundle skeleton inspection request. See Fig 12.9. The page shows the details of added leak test request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.9.4 Add RFI Data for a Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added tube bundle skeleton inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report See Fig 12.9. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.9.5 View RFI Report for a Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the tube bundle skeleton inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.9.6 Attach a File into a Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any tube bundle skeleton inspection request listed in the Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective tube bundle skeleton inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.10 Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report – RFI The Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report – RFI tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the tube bundle final dimension inspection request. To add the tube bundle final dimension inspection request, 1. Click Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report – RFI in the Heat Exchanger The Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report page opens. Figure 12.10: Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report page 12.10.1 Add a Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Request If you want to add a tube bundle final dimension inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report The page shows a new window to add the details of the tube bundle final dimension inspection request. Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new tube bundle final dimension inspection report will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Drawing box, select a drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the tube bundle final dimension inspection request. 4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the tube bundle final dimension inspection request. 5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the tube bundle final dimension inspection request. 6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the tube bundle final dimension inspection request. 7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the tube bundle final dimension inspection request. 8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the tube bundle final dimension inspection request. 9. Click Save. The tube bundle final dimension inspection request is added and listed in the Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report page. 12.10.2 Submit a Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Request Once you have added the tube bundle final dimension inspection request, the Submission column in the Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.10. 1. If you want to submit the tube bundle final dimension inspection request, click(Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for the tube bundle final dimension inspection. The request submitted status will be updated in the Submitted column. Once the tube bundle final dimension inspection results are updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.10.3 Edit a Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Request Note that if the tube bundle final dimension inspection request has been submitted, you cannot edit the respective request. If you want to edit any existing tube bundle final dimension inspection request in the Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report page, do the following steps, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective tube bundle final dimension inspection request. See Fig 12.10. The page shows the details of added leak test request. 2. Click on any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 12.10.4 Add RFI Data for a Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Request If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added tube bundle final dimension inspection request, do the following steps, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column of the Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report See Fig 12.10. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end. 3. In the Inspection Details option, select what type of inspection to be performed based on your requirement. 4. In the NDT Inspection box, enter the NDT inspection detail. 5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection request. 6. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 12.10.5 View RFI Report for a Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Request If you want to view the RFI report for the tube bundle final dimension inspection request, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.10.6 Attach a File into a Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Request If you want to attach a file with any tube bundle final dimension inspection request listed in the Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective tube bundle final dimension inspection request. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. Users assigned with cuteQM_QAQC role only can view and access the following Report functionalities in the Heat Exchanger menu. 12.11 Final Dimensional Report The Final Dimensional Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the final dimensional inspection result for added request. 1. Click Final Dimensional Report in the Heat Exchanger The Final Dimensional Report page opens. Figure 12.11: Final Dimensional Report page The page shows a list of added final dimensional requests. 12.11.1 Add Final Dimension Report Details If you want to add the final dimension report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Final Dimension Variables and Final Dimension Result windows open. 2. In the Note box, enter your notes. 3. Click (ADD button) in the Final Dimension Result 4. In the Item box, select an item from a drop-down list. 5. In the Joint No/Nozzle box, enter the joint number or nozzle number. 6. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. 7. In the Projection Reqd box, enter the required projection value. 8. In the Projection Actual box, enter the actual projection value. 9. In the Projection Result box, select the projection result. 10. In the Elevation Reqd box, enter the required elevation value. 11. In the Elevation Actual box, enter the actual elevation value. 12. In the Elevation Result box, select the elevation result. 13. In the Orientation Reqd box, enter the required orientation value. 14. In the Orientation Actual box, enter the actual orientation value. 15. In the Orientation Result box, select the orientation result. 16. In the Item box, select an item from a drop-down list. 17. In the Required box, enter the required dimension. 18. In the Actual box, enter the actual dimension. 19. In the Result box, select the result of final dimension inspection. 20. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 21. Click Save. 12.11.2 Add Final Dimension Inspection Result Details If you want to add the final dimension inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.11.3 Submit Final Dimension Inspection Result Once you have added the final dimension inspection result, the Request Status column in the Final Dimensional Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.11. 1. If you want to submit the final dimension inspection result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the final dimension inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.11.4 View an RFI Report for Final Dimension Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any final dimension inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.11.5 View a Final Dimension Inspection Report If you want to view the final dimension inspection report, click  (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.11.6 Attach a file into a Final Dimension Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any final dimension inspection report in the Final Dimension Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.12 Nozzle Marking Report The Nozzle Marking Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the nozzle marking inspection result for added request. 1. Click Nozzle Marking Report in the Heat Exchanger menu. The Nozzle Marking Inspection page opens. Figure 12.12: Nozzle Marking Inspection page The page shows a list of added nozzle marking inspection requests. 12.12.1 Add Nozzle Marking Report Details If you want to add the nozzle marking report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Nozzle Marking Result and Report Photos windows open. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Nozzle Marking Result 3. In the Nozzle box, select a nozzle from a drop-down list. 4. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. 5. Enter the projection, orientation, and elevation value. 6. In the Result box, select the result. 7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 8. Click Save. 9. In the Report Photos window, click (ADD button) and attach a photo. 12.12.2 Add Nozzle Marking Inspection Result Details If you want to add the nozzle marking inspection result details, 1. Click (Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.12.3 Submit Nozzle Marking Inspection Result Once you have added the nozzle marking inspection result, the Request Status column in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.12. 1. If you want to submit the nozzle marking inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the nozzle marking inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.12.4 View an RFI Report for Nozzle Marking Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any nozzle marking inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.12.5 View a Nozzle Marking Inspection Report If you want to view the nozzle marking inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.12.6 Attach a file into a Nozzle Marking Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any nozzle marking inspection report in the Nozzle Marking Inspection page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.13 Shell Side Hydrostatic Report The Shell Side Hydrostatic Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the shell side hydrostatic test result for added request. 1. Click Shell Side Hydrostatic Report in the Heat Exchanger The Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page opens. Figure 12.13: Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page The page shows a list of added shell side hydrostatic test requests. 12.13.1 Add Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Report Details If you want to add the shell side hydrostatic test report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Test Parameters window, Metal Details window, and the Equipment Details window open. 2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 3. In the Test Parameters window, enter the test parameter data. 4. In the Metal Details window, enter the metal details. 5. Click Save. 6. Click  (ADD button) in the Equipment Details 7. In the Conducted By box, select whether the hydrostatic test is conducted Internally or Externally. 8. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment detail from a drop-own list. 9. In the Position box, select a position from a drop-down list. 10. Click Save. 12.13.2 Add Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Result Details If you want to add the shell side hydrostatic test result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.13.3 Submit Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Result Once you have added the shell side hydrostatic test result, the Request Status column in the Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.13. 1. If you want to submit the shell side hydrostatic test result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the shell side hydrostatic test result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.13.4 View an RFI Report for Shell Side Hydrostatic Test If you want to view the RFI report for any shell side hydrostatic test, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.13.5 View a Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Report If you want to view the shell side hydrostatic test report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.13.6 Attach a file into a Shell Side Hydrostatic Test Report If you want to attach a file with any shell side hydrostatic test report in the Shell Side Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.14 Leak Test Report The Leak Test Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the leak test result for added request. 1. Click Leak Test Report in the Heat Exchanger menu. The Leak Test Report page opens. Figure 12.14: Leak Test Report page The page shows a list of added leak test requests. 12.14.1 Add Leak Test Report Details If you want to add the leak test report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Test Parameters window and the Equipment Details window opens. 2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date. 3. Check and edit the leak test report details in the Test Parameters 4. Click Save. 5. Click (ADD button) in the Equipment Details 6. In the Conducted By box, select whether the leak test is conducted Internally or Externally. 7. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment detail from a drop-own list. 8. In the Position box, select a position from a drop-down list. 9. Click Save. 12.14.2 Add Leak Test Result Details If you want to add the leak test result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.14.3 Submit Leak Test Result Once you have added the leak test result, the Request Status column in the Leak Test Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.14. 1. If you want to submit the leak test result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the leak test result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column 12.14.4 View an RFI Report for Leak Test If you want to view the RFI report for any leak test, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.14.5 View a Leak Test Report If you want to view the leak test report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.14.6 Attach a file into a Leak Test Report If you want to attach a file with any leak test report in the Leak Test Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.15 Tube Expansion Report The Tube Expansion Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the tube expansion inspection result for added request. 1. Click Tube Expansion Report in the Heat Exchanger The Tube Expansion Report page opens. Figure 12.15: Tube Expansion Report page The page shows a list of added tube expansion inspection requests. 12.15.1 Add Tube Expansion Inspection Report Details If you want to add the tube expansion inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Tube Expansion Variables window and the Tube Expansion Report Details window opens. 2. In the Tube Expansion Variables window, enter the tube expansion variables detail. 3. Click Save. 4. Click (ADD button) in the Tube Expansion Report Details window and add the tube expansion report details. 12.15.2 Add Tube Expansion Inspection Result Details If you want to add the tube expansion inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.15.3 Submit Tube Expansion Inspection Result Once you have added the tube expansion inspection result, the Request Status column in the Tube Expansion Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.15. 1. If you want to submit the tube expansion inspection result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the tube expansion inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.15.4 View an RFI Report for Tube Expansion Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any tube expansion inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.15.5 View a Tube Expansion Inspection Report If you want to view the tube expansion inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.15.6 Attach a file into a Tube Expansion Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any tube expansion inspection report in the Tube Expansion Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.16 Tube Mock Up Report The Tube Mock Up Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the tube mock up inspection result for added request. 1. Click Tube Mock Up Report in the Heat Exchanger The Tube Mock Up Report page opens. Figure 12.16: Tube Mock Up Report page The page shows a list of added tube mock up inspection requests. 12.16.1 Add Tube Mock Up Inspection Report Details If you want to add the tube mock up inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Tube Expansion Variables window and the Tube Expansion Report Details window opens. 2. In the Tube Expansion Variables window, enter the tube expansion variables detail. 3. Click Save. 4. Click   (ADD button) in the Tube Expansion Report Details window and add the tube expansion report details. 12.16.2 Add Tube Mock Up Inspection Result Details If you want to add the tube mock up inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.16.3 Submit Tube Mock Up Inspection Result Once you have added the tube mock up inspection result, the Request Status column in the Tube Mock Up Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.16. 1. If you want to submit the tube mock up inspection result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the tube mock up inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.16.4 View an RFI Report for Tube Mock Up Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any tube mock up inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.16.5 View a Tube Mock Up Inspection Report If you want to view the tube mock up inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.16.6 Attach a file into a Tube Mock Up Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any tube mock up inspection report in the Tube Mock Up Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.17 Pickling and Passivation Report The Pickling and Passivation Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the pickling and passivation inspection result for added request. 1. Click Pickling and Passivation Report in the Heat Exchanger The Pickling and Passivation Report page opens. Figure 12.17: Pickling and Passivation Report page The page shows a list of added pickling and passivation inspection requests. 12.17.1 Add Pickling and Passivation Inspection Report Details If you want to add the pickling and passivation inspection report details, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Pickling and Passivation Details window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Pickling and Passivation Details 3. In the Pickling Timebox, enter the pickling time range. 4. In the Date of Test box, select the date of test. 5. In the Temperature box, enter the temperature range. 6. In the PH value of Water box, enter the PH value of water. 7. Click Save. 12.17.2 Add Pickling and Passivation Inspection Result Details If you want to add the pickling and passivation inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.17.3 Submit Pickling and Passivation Inspection Result Once you have added the pickling and passivation inspection result, the Request Status column in the Pickling and Passivation Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.17. 1. If you want to submit the pickling and passivation inspection result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the pickling and passivation inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.17.4 View an RFI Report for Pickling and Passivation Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any pickling and passivation inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.17.5 View a Pickling and Passivation Inspection Report If you want to view the pickling and passivation inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.17.6 Attach a file into a Pickling and Passivation Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any pickling and passivation inspection report in the Pickling and Passivation Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.18 Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report The Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection result for added request. 1. Click Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report in the Heat Exchanger The Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page opens. Figure 12.18: Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page The page shows a list of added baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection requests. 12.18.1 Add Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report Details If you want to add the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Details window opens. 2. Click(ADD button) and edit the inspection details. 12.18.2 Add Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Result Details If you want to add the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.18.3 Submit Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Result Once you have added the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection result, the Request Status column in the Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.18. 1. If you want to submit the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection result, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.18.4 View an RFI Report for Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.18.5 View a Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report If you want to view the baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.18.6 Attach a file into a Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any baffle/support plate/tube sheet inspection report in the Baffle/Support Plate/Tube Sheet Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.19 Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report The Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the tube bundle skeleton inspection result for added request. 1. Click Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report in the Heat Exchanger The Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page opens. Figure 12.19: Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page The page shows a list of added tube bundle skeleton inspection requests. 12.19.1 Add Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report Details If you want to add the tube bundle skeleton inspection report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Details window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) and edit the inspection details. 12.19.2 Add Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Result Details If you want to add the tube bundle skeleton inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.19.3 Submit Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Result Once you have added the tube bundle skeleton inspection result, the Request Status column in the Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.19. 1. If you want to submit the tube bundle skeleton inspection result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the tube bundle skeleton inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.19.4 View an RFI Report for Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any tube bundle skeleton inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.19.5 View a Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report If you want to view the tube bundle skeleton inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.19.6 Attach a file into a Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any tube bundle skeleton inspection report in the Tube Bundle Skeleton Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. 12.20 Tube Bundle Final Dimension Report The Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report tab in the Heat Exchanger menu used to add the tube bundle final dimension inspection result for added request. 1. Click Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report in the Heat Exchanger The Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report page opens. Figure 12.20: Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report page The page shows a list of added tube bundle final dimension inspection requests. 12.20.1 Add Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report Details If you want to add the tube bundle final dimension inspection report details, 1. Click(Edit icon) in the Edit Report column for the respective request. The Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Details window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) and edit the inspection details. 12.20.2 Add Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Result Details If you want to add the tube bundle final dimension inspection result details, 1. Click(Add icon) in the RFI Data column for the respective request. The RFI Inspection Request List window opens. 2. In the ITP Ref box, enter the ITP reference detail. 3. In the Inspection Result field, select the inspection result. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. 12.20.3 Submit Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Result Once you have added the tube bundle final dimension inspection result, the Request Status column in the Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 12.20. 1. If you want to submit the tube bundle final dimension inspection result, click(Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once the tube bundle final dimension inspection result is updated, the completed status will be updated in the Completed column. 12.20.4 View an RFI Report for Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection If you want to view the RFI report for any tube bundle final dimension inspection, click (Print icon) provided in the RFI Report column. 12.20.5 View a Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report If you want to view the tube bundle final dimension inspection report, click (Print icon) provided in the Report column. 12.20.6 Attach a file into a Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any tube bundle final dimension inspection report in the Tube Bundle Final Dimension Inspection Report page, you can use (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective report. To know how to attach, see the topic, “Attach a file into a PQR”. Ship structural Manage all the inspections related to Ship Structural Module Ship Structural  Hull 1.Click Ship Structural module at the top. The Hull menu in the cuteQM app helps you to add the master data. Once you click the Hull menu, the following tabs open, Master, Inspection, and Reports.                                                                             Fig 1 Ship Structural Hull 1.0 Master The Hull menu in the cute QM app helps you to add the master data. Once you click the Hull menu, the following tabs open, Master, Inspection, and Reports. 1.Click Hull in the  menu,The Master page opens. 1.1.0 Block You can add the details of Block to be used in the Ship Structural project by using the Block tab in the Hull menu. If youwant to navigate to Block Master,1.Click Block in the Hull menu,The Block Master page opens.                                                                  Fig 1.1.0 Block in Ship Structural 1.1.1 Add a Block Master If you want to add a block, do the following steps,1. Click  (ADD button) in the Block Master page. See Fig 1.1.1 A new window opens to add a new Block Master.                                                                                  Fig 1.1.1 Add a block Master. Enter Block number. Enter revision details of the block number In the Subcontractor box, select from the drop-down list.The subcontractor data must match with actual subcontractor who will creating the QIF to avoid disappear. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Click Save. The Block Master is successfully added and listed in the Block page. 1.1.2 Edit a Block Master If you want to edit any existing Block master in the Block master page,                                                                            Fig 1.1.2 Edit a Block Master Click (Edit icon) of the respective Block. Fig See 1.1.2 The Block page shows the details of the selected Block. Edit the details of Block no,Revision no and Subcontrator  as required Click Save. Block updated successfully. 1.1.3 Delete a Block Master If you want to delete any existing block in the Block page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Block page. By click confirm delete Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK.                                                                                                                                                                 The Block is deleted successfully. 1.1.4 Export a Block Master You can export a list of Block added in the Block Master page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See 1.1.4 page.                                                                                      Fig 1.1.4 Export in Block 1.1.5 Filter a Block Master If you want to filter any specific Block in the Block Master page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the block page.                                                                       Fig 1.1.5 Filter a Block page. 1.2 Frames & Panels The Frames & Panels tab in the Hull menu helps you to add the details of Frames & Pannels to be in used in the Ship structural. If you want to navigate to Frames & Pannels,                                                                              Fig 1.2 Frames & Pannels Page 1.2.1 Add a Frames and Pannels If you want to add a Frames & Pannels, do the following steps,1. Click  (ADD button) in the Frames & Pannels page. See Fig 1.2.1 A new window opens to add a Frames & Pannels.                                                                                   Fig 1.2.1 Add a Frames & Pannels Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Block box, select from the drop-down list. In the Frame and Pannel Number, entre the Frame and Pannel number. In the subcontractor box,select the subcontractor from dropdown list.The subcontractor data must match with actual subcontractor who will creating the QIF to avoid disappear. Click Save. The Frame is successfully added and listed in the Frames page. 1.2.2 Edit a Frame & Panel If you want to edit any existing Frame & Panel master in the Frame & Panels page,                                                                             Fig 1.2.2 Edit a Frames and panel Master Click (Edit icon) of the respective Frame. Fig See 1.2.2 The Frame & Pannels page shows the details of the selected Frame. Edit the details of Block no,Frames and panel no and Subcontractor as required. Click Save. Frames updated successfully. 1.2.3 Delete a Frames & Panels If you want to delete any existing frames  in the Frames & Panels page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Frames & Pannels page. By click confirm delete Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK.                                                                                                                                                                 The Frames & Panel deleted successfully. 1.2.4 Export in Frames & Panels You can export a list of Frames & Panels added in the Frames page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See 1.2.4 page                                                                             Fig 1.2.4 PDF & Excel in Frames & Pannels 1.2.5 Filter a Frames & Panels If you want to filter any specific Frames in the Frames and Panels page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Frames page.                                                                  Fig 1.2.5 Filter a Frames & Pannels Page. 1.3 Hull Parts The Hull Parts tab in the Hull menu helps you to add the details of Hull Parts to be in used in the Ship structural. If you want to navigate to Hull Parts,                                                                            Fig 1.3 Hull Parts Page 1.3.1 Add a Hull Parts If you want to add a Hull Parts, do the following steps,1. Click  (ADD button) in the Hull Pages page. See Fig 1.3.1A new window opens to add a Hull Parts.   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Block box, select from the drop-down list. In the Frame and Pannel Number, entre the Frame and Pannel number. In the Part Code box, enter the Part code number. In the Party Type box, enter the part type number. In the Area box, enter the area number. In the Length box, enter the Length number. Click Save. The Hull Parts is successfully added and listed in the Hull page. 1.3.2 Edit a Hull Parts If you want to edit any existing Hull Parts in the Hull,                                                                            Fig 1.3.2 Edit a Hull Parts Click (Edit icon) of the respective Frame. Fig See 1.3.2 The Hull Parts shows the details of the selected Hull Parts. Edit the details where you want. Click Save. Hull Parts updated successfully. 1.3.3 Delete a Hull Part If you want to delete any existing hull part in the Hull Parts page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Hull Parts page. By click confirm delete Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK.                                                                                                                                                                 The Hull Parts deleted successfully. 1.3.4 Export in Hull Parts You can export a list of Hull added in the Hull Part page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See 1.3.4 page                                                                             Fig 1.3.4 Export a Hull Parts 1.3.5 Filter a Hull Part If you want to filter any specific Hull in the Hull Parts of page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Hull page.                                                                   Fig 1.5.5 Filter a Hull Parts Page. 1.3.6 Import  Hull Parts If you want to Import multiple Hull parts together, do the following steps, Click (IMPORT button) in the Basic drawing screen. Refer above fig It will redirected to import page Click (TEMPLATE button) . An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of  Basic Drawing details. Once you have added the  details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. After  saved the excel, browse  and upload the excel, Automap  -This function is used to map system columns and excel columns automatically. Map - This function is used to map each system and excel columns manually Unmap - This is used to remove the mapped column Unmap all -This is used to remove the all mapped columns Click populate values ,process and Import buttons. Refer below fig Hull parts imported successfully. 1.3.7 View Log  Hull Parts You can also use (View Log button) located on the Equipment list. Click (View Log button). See Fig1.3.7 A new window opens for Log Details.Herewe can see the imported Hull part details 2. Inspection The Hull menu in the cuteQM app helps you to add the Inspection data. Once you click the Hull menu, the following tabs open, RFI Hull Fabrication, RFI Hull Assembly, RFI Hull Erection, Other Inspection and View Other Inspection.                                                                      Fig 2. Inspection in Hull 2.1.0 RFI Hull Fabrication List The RFI Hull Fabrication tab in the Hull menu helps you to add the details of RFI Hull Fabrication List to be in used in the Ship structural. If you want to navigate to RFI Hull Fabrication List,                                                                              Fig 2.1.0 RFI Hull Fabrication List Page. 2.1.1 Add RFI Hull Fabrication List CuteQM_Production role user can add/edit RFI Hull Fabrication If you want to add a Hull RFI Hull Fabrication List , do the following steps,1. Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Hull Pages. See Fig 2.1.1A new window opens to add a RFI Hull Fabrications List.                                                                  Fig 2.1.1 Add a Hull Fabrication List Page Click (Add Selected Hull Parts) of the respective block you want to add.                                                               Fig 2.1.1 RFI Hull Fabrication request Page In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. Select Inspection type In the Description box, type the description. Click (Add Selected System) of the respective system you want to add. The added Hull parts will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added block, click (Remove icon) of the respective block. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Hull Fabrication Request. Click Save. The RFI Hull Fabrication list request is successfully added. 2.1.2 Edit a RFI Hull Fabrication List If you want to edit any existing RFI Hull Fabrication up request in the RFI Hull Fabrication page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI Hull Fabrication Request. See Fig 2.1.2 The RFI Hull Fabrication Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI Hull Fabrication list.                                                              Fig 2.1.2 Edit a RFI Hull Fabrication Request Page Add/remove any hull parts Click Save. 2.1.3 Submit a RFI Hull Fabrication List Once you have added the RFI Hull fabrication request, the Submission column in the RFI Hull fabrication List page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.1.3                                                    Fig 2.1.3 Submit & Approve a RFI Hull Fabrication List Page If you want to submit the RFI Hull Fabrication list, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Hull Fabrication list request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Hull Fabrication List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 2.1.4 Approve RFI Hull Fabrication Request cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Hull Fabrication request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI Hull Fabrication list  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.1.4 Approve RFI Hull Fabrication Result Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If RFI Accepts with comments given as result then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against Hull part, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.1.5 Print RFI Hull fabrication list If you want to print an RFI Hull Fabrication list, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Hull Fabrication List In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC. Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 2.1.5 View a RFI Hull Fabrication List Page 2.1.6 Attach a File into a RFI Hull Fabrication List If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI hull fabrication list listed in the RFI Hill Fabrication List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. A new window opens for file upload.In the category box, select the category from drop-down list.Select Browse and upload the documents. 2.1.7 Export a RFI Hull Fabrication list You can export a list of RFI Hull Fabrication list requests added in the RFI Hull Fabrication List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                Fig 2.1.7 Export a RFI Hull Fabrication list 2.1.8 Filter a RFI Hull Fabrication List If you want to filter any specific RFI fit hull fabrication list in the RFI Hull fabrication list page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Hull Fabrication list.  2.2.0 RFI Hull Assembly Click HULL in the inspection menu.The RFI Hull Assembly List page opens.                                                                          Fig 2.2.0 RFI Hull Assembly List Page 2.2.1 Add a RFI Hull Assembly List cuteQM_Production role users can create RFI request.If you want to add an RFI Hull Assembly list request, do the following,                                          Fig 2.2.1 Add an RFI Hull Assembly List Page Click (ADD button) in the RFI Hull Assembly List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Hull Assembly request. In the Subcontractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. Select inspection type (Fitup/Weld visual) In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Click the check box of the respective frames Click (Add Selected Hull button). Click Remove if you want to remove it. 2.2.2 Edit a RFI Hull Assembly list. If you want to edit any existing RFI Hull Assembly  request in the RFI Hull Assembly page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI Hull Assembly Request. See Fig 2.2.2 The RFI Hull Assembly request page opens with the details of the selected RFI Hull Assembly request list.                                                               Fig 2.2.2 Edit a RFI Hull Assembly Request Page Edit the details in the respective box.And add/remove any hull part Click Save. RFI Hull assembly request updated successfully. 2.2.3 Submit a RFI Hull Assembly List Once you have added the RFI Hull Assembly List,  RFI Hull Assembly List page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.2.3                                                         Fig 2.2.3 Submit a RFI Hull Assembly List If you want to submit the RFI Hull Assembly request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.2.4 Approve RFI Hull Assembly Request cuteQM_LisenceeQA role user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Hull assembly request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                   Fig 2.2.4 Approve RFI Hull Assembly List Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments  given then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.2.5 Print RFI Hull Assembly List If you want to Print a RFI Hull Assembly list request, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Hull Assembly List page. See Fig 2.2.4 View a RFI Hull Assembly list. In the print,user can see the signature of both production user and QC.                                                                                      Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature 2.2.6 Attach a File into a RFI Hull Assembly List If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI hull assembly list listed in the RFI Hull Assembly List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. A new window opens for file upload.In the category box, select the category from drop-down list.Select Browse and upload the documents.                                                              Fig 2.2.6 Attach a RFI Hull Assembly List 2.2.7 Export a RFI Hull Assembly List You can export a list of RFI  Hull Assembly list visual list requests added in the RFI Hull Assembly list page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                           Fig 2.2.7 Export a RFI Hull Assembly List. 2.2.8 Filter a RFI Hull Assembly list If you want to filter any RFI Hull Assembly List request from the list of RFI requests in the RFI Hull Assembly List page, you can use (FILTER button).                                             Fig 2.2.8 Filter a RFI Hull Assembly List 2.3.0 RFI Hull Erection Click HULL in the inspection menu.The RFI Hull Erection List page opens.                                                                      Fig 2.3.0 RFI Hull Erection List Page 2.3.1 Add a RFI Hull Erection List .CuteQM_Production role user only can add/edit RFI requests. If you want to add an RFI Hull Erection list request, do the following,                                                              Fig 2.3.1 Add an RFI Hull Erection List Page Click (ADD button) in the RFI Hull Erection List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Hull Erection request. In the Subcontractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. In the Inspection Type box, choose an inspection type from given list. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Click the check box of the respective compartments. Click (Add Selected blocks button). Click Remove if you want to remove it. Click save buttion. RFI Hull erection request created successfully. 2.3.2 Edit a RFI Hull Erection List If you want to edit any existing RFI Hull Erection list up request in the RFI Hull erection page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI Hull erection list. See Fig 2.3.2 The RFI Hull Erection request page opens with the details of the selected RFI Hull erection request list.                                                              Fig 2.3.2 Edit a RFI Hull Erection List Page Edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 2.3.3 Submit a RFI Hull Erection List Once you have added the RFI Hull Erection List, the result column in the RFI Hull Erection List page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.3.3                                                   Fig 2.3.3 Submit a RFI Hull Erection List If you want to submit the RFI Hull Erection List request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.3.4 Approve RFI Hull Erection Request cuteQM_Lisencee QA role user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Hull Erection request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                   Fig 2.3.4 Approve RFI Hull Erection List Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accept with comments given as result,then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.3.5 Print a RFI Hull Erection List If you want to Print an RFI Hull Erection List, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Hull erection list page. In the print,user can see the signature of both production user and QC.                                                                            Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                           See Fig 2.3.5 Print a RFI Hull Erection List. 2.3.6 Attach a File into RFI Hull Erection List If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI hull Erection list listed in the RFI Hull Erection List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. A new window opens for file upload.In the category box, select the category from drop-down list.Select Browse and upload the documents.                                                               Fig 2.3.6 Attach a RFI Hull Erection List. 2.3.7 Export a RFI Hull Erection List You can export a list of RFI Hull Erection List requests added in the RFI Hull erection list page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                           Fig 2.3.7 Export a RFI Hull Erection list Page. 2.3.8 Filter a RFI Hull Erection List If you want to filter any RFI Hull erection List request from the list of RFI requests in the RFI Hull Erection List page, you can use (FILTER button).                                                                                Fig 2.3.8 Filter a RFI Hull Erection List Page 2.4.0 Other Inspection Click Hull in the inspection menu.The Other Inspection page opens.                                                                       Fig 3.0 Other Inspection Page1. To add Inspection type select any Inspection type from the drop-down list2. Select the Block Number.3. Click  RFQ Inspection4. A new window opens for Inspection to enter the data and time.5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection.6. Click Save. 2.4.1 View  Other Inspection. If you want to view a View Other Inspection. click view other inspection menu.                                                   Fig 2.4.1 View an Other Inspection page. 2.4.2 Submit an Other Inspection cuteQM_Production role user only can submit RFI request.                                                                        Fig 2.4.2 Submit a View Other Inspection Once you have added the View Other Inspection request list, the Submit column in the View other Inspection page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the View Other Inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (cancel icon) to cancel the request. The submitted request will be moved to for View Other Inspection. 2.4.3 Approve a  Other Inspection cuteQM_Lisencee QA role user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the view other inspection request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                   Fig 2.4.3 Approve View Other Inspection Page Click Save Result is updated successfully. If Accept with comments given as result, then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.4.4 Print an other inspection. If you want to print other Inspection, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the view other inspection list page.   In the print,user can see the signature of both production user and QC.                                                                                           Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                           See Fig 2.4.4 Print an Other Inspection Page 2.4.5 Attach a File for other Inspection. If you want to attach a file with any existing view other inspection list  in the other inspection page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. A new window opens for file upload.In the category box, select the category from drop-down list.Select Browse and upload the documents.  2.4.6 Export an  Other Inspection request You can export a list of View other Inspection requests added in the View Other Inspection List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                               Fig 2.4.6 Export a View other Inspection 2.4.7 Filter a View Other Inspection request If you want to filter any specific filter a view other inspection in view other inspection List page, you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the Filter a View other Inspection To filter the any View Other Inspection request, select the Report Number, Inspection Date and Date in the boxes and click. you can use (FILTER button) located on the View Other Inspection. 2.5 Hull Parts Summary We can see the summary of all the RFI requests for all the Hull parts here. You can export a list of hull parts summary added in the Hull Parts Summary page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). 2.5.1 Filter a Hull Parts Summary If you want to filter any specific Hull Parts Summary in the Hull Parts Summary page, 3.0 Outfitting Area Click Outfitting in the Master menu.The Outfitting page opens.                                                                                   Fig 3.0 Out Fitting Page 3.1 Add an Outfitting Area If you want to add an Outfitting Area, do the following steps,Click (ADD button) in the Outfitting area List. A new page opens to add an Outfitting area request.  In the Area box, enter an area number. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Click Save. The Area is successfully added in Outfitting area page. 3.1.2 Edit an Outfitting Area. 1.Click (Edit icon) of the respective Fig See 3.1.2 The page shows the details of the selected Area.1. Edit Are and description as required.2. Click Save. 3.1.3 Delete an Outfitting Area If you want to delete any existing system in the Outfitting Area page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Outfitting page. By click confirm delete Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK.                                                                                                                                                                                  The Outfitting Area deleted successfully. 3.1.4 Export a Outfitting Area You can export a list of outfitting area added in the outfitting page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See35.1.4 page                                                              Fig 3.1.4 Export a painting work page 3.1.5 Filter an outfitting area If you want to filter any specific outfitting area in the outfitting area page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the outfitting area page.                                                                Fig 3.1.5 Filter an outfitting area page 3.2 Outfitting Work Click Outfitting in the Master menu.The Outfitting page opens.        3.2 Out Fitting Work Page 3.2.1 Add an Outfitting Work If you want to add an Outfitting Work, do the following steps,Click (ADD button) in the Outfitting work List. A new page opens to add an Outfitting work request.  In the Frames and Panel box, enter an area number. In the Drawing Number box, enter the drawing number. In the Area Box select for the drop-down list. In the Description Item box, enter the description item. Click Save. The Outfitting work is successfully added in Outfitting work page. 3.2.2 Edit an Outfitting work. 1.Click (Edit icon) of the respective Fig See 3.2.2 The page shows the details of the selected work.1. In work box, enter an area number.2. Click Save.Outfitting work updated successfully. 3.2.3 Delete an Outfitting work. If you want to delete any existing system in the Outfitting work page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Outfitting page. By click confirm delete Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding work. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK.                                                                                                                                                                                  The Outfitting work is deleted successfully. 3.2.4 Export an Outfitting Work You can export a list of outfitting work added in the outfitting page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See3.2.4 page                                                              Fig 3.2.4 Export an Outfitting Work page 3.2.5 Filter an outfitting Work If you want to filter any specific outfitting work in the outfitting work page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the outfitting work page. 3.2.6 Import an Outfitting Work If you want to Import multiple work parts together, do the following steps, Click (IMPORT button) in the outfitting work. Refer above fig3.2.6 It will redirected to import page Click (TEMPLATE button) . An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of. Once you have added the outfitting details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. After saved the excel, browse and upload the excel. Automap  -This function is used to map system columns and excel columns automatically. Map - This function is used to map each system and excel columns manually Unmap - This is used to remove the mapped column Unmap all -This is used to remove the all the mapped columns Click populate values ,process and Import buttons. Refer below fig Outfitting details imported successfully. 3.3 RFI Fabrication Click Outfitting in the Master menu.The RFI Fabrication page opens.                                      Fig 3.2 RFI Fabrication Page 3.3.1 Add a RFI Fabrication cuteQM_Production role user only can add RFI request.If you want to add an RFI Fabrication, do the following steps,Click (ADD button) in the Outfitting work List. A new page opens to add a RFI fabrication request.  In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select the subcontractor from the drop-down list. In the Inspection Type box, choose by selecting anyone. In the Description Item box, enter the description. Click (Add Selected Outfitting) of the respective outfitting you want to add. The added outfitting will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added outfitting, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI fabrication request. Click Save. The RFI Fabrication request is successfully added. 3.3.2 Edit a RFI Fabrication list 1.Click (Edit icon) of the respective Fig See 3.3.2 The page shows the details of the selected Outfitting.1. In the Subcontractor box, select the subcontractor from the drop-down list. 2. Click Save. 1. If you want to edit an Inspection date, then you can click  edit button to edit inspection date.2. Click Save. 3.3.3 Submit a RFI Fabrication List Once you have added the RFI fabrication request, the Submission column in the RFI Fabrication Lists page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 3.3.3                                                        Fig 3.3.3 Submit & Approve a RFI Fabrication Page If you want to submit the RFI fabrication request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI fabrication list request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Fabrication List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 3.3.4 Approve RFI Fabrication List. cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Fabrication list request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 3.3.4 Approve RFI Fabrication Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments given as result, then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 3.3.5 Print RFI Fabrication list report. If you want to print an RFI fabrication report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fabrication page.      In the print,user can see the signature of both production user and QC.                                                                                           Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC .  Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 3.3.5 View a RFI Fabrication page.                                                                Fig 3.3.5 RFI Fabrication print Page 3.3.6 Attach a File into a RFI Fabrication If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI fabrication list listed in the RFI Fabrication page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column.                                                          Fig 3.3.6 Attach a RFI Fabrication Page 3.3.3 Export a RFI Fabrication list You can export a list of RFI Fabrication added in the outfitting page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See3.3.3 page                                                              Fig 3.3.3 Export an RFI Fabrication List Page 3.3.4 Filter a RFI Fabrication If you want to filter any specific outfitting work in the outfitting work page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the outfitting work page.                                                                  Fig 3.3.4 Filter a RFI fabrication Page. 3.4 RFI Installation Click Outfitting in the Master menu.The RFI Installation page opens.                                      Fig 3.2 RFI Installation Page 3.4.1 Add a RFI Installation list cuteQM_Production role user can add RFI request.If you want to add an RFI Installation, do the following steps,Click (ADD button) in the RFI installation List. A new page opens to add a RFI Installation request.  In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select the subcontractor from the drop down list. In the Inspection Type box, choose by selecting anyone. In the Description Item box, enter the description. Click (Add Selected Outfitting) of the respective outfitting you want to add. The added outfitting will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added outfitting, click (Remove icon) of the respective outfitting work. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI installation request. Click Save. The RFI Installation request is successfully added. 3.4.2 Edit a RFI Installation List 1.Click (Edit icon) of the respective Fig See 3.4.2 The page shows the details of the selected Outfitting.1. In the Subcontractor box, select the subcontractor from the drop-down list. 2. Click Save. 1. If you want to edit an Inspection date, then you can click  (edit button) to edit inspection date.2. Click Save. 3.4.3 Submit a RFI Installation List Once you have added the RFI installation request, the Submission column in the RFI Installation Lists page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 3.4.3                                                       Fig 3.3.3 Submit & Approve a RFI Installation Page If you want to submit the RFI Installation request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Installation list request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Installation List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 3.4.4 Approve RFI Installation List. cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. f you want to approve the RFI Installation list request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI Installation request approved  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 3.4.4 Approve RFI In Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with coments given as result, then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 3.4.5 Print a RFI Installation If you want to print an RFI fabrication report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fabrication page. In the print,user can see the signature of both  production user and QC.                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC .          Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 3.4.5 View a RFI Installation page.                                                              Fig 3.4.5 RFI Installation print Page 3.4.6 Attach a File into a RFI Installation List. If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI Installation list listed in the RFI Installation page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column.                                                          Fig 3.4.6 Attach a RFI Installation Page 3.4.7 Export a RFI Installation list You can export a list of RFI Installation added in the outfitting page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See3.4.7 page                                                              Fig 3.4.7 Export an RFI Installation List Page 3.4.8 Filter a RFI Installation list If you want to filter any specific RFI Installation in the Inspection page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the outfitting page.                                                                  Fig 3.4.8 Filter a RFI Installation Page. 4.0 Outfitting Summary Click Outfitting in the Outfitting menu.The Outfitting Summary page opens. Here we can see the summary of all the outfitting works.                                                           Fig 4.0 Outfitting Summary page 4.1 Export an Outfitting Summary list You can export a list of Outfitting Summary added in the outfitting page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See4.1 page                                                              Fig 4.1 Export an Outfitting Summary Page 4.2 Filter an Outfitting Summary List If you want to filter any specific in the Outfitting Summary page,                                                            Fig 4.2 Filter an Outfitting Summary List Page. 5.0 Painting The Ship Structural menu in the cute QM app helps you to add the master data. Once you click the Painting menu, the following tabs opens Master (Painting Work) Inspection (RFI Coat) Reports (Painting Summary) 1.Click Painting in the menu,The Master page opens. 5.1.1 Add a Painting Work Click (ADD button) in the Painting Work page. A new page opens to add Painting work List request.                                                                Fig 5.1.1 Add a Painting Work Page In the Painting Item box, enter the painting item number. In the Area box, enter the painting area In the Number of Coat box, select a number of coats from a drop-down list. In the surface preperation box,enter the surface preperation In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from drop down list. Click Save.The Painting is added successfully. 5.1.2 Edit a Painting Work If you want to edit any existing painting in the painting page,                                                                                Fig 5.1.2 Edit a Painting Page 1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective paintings. Fig See 5.1.2 The Painting page shows the details of the selected Painting.  Edit the details of Painting item,area,Number of coat,surface preperation and subcontractor as required. Click Save. Painting updated successfully. 5.1.3 Delete a Painting master. If you want to delete any existing in the Painting works page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the painting work's page. By click confirm delete Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK.  Painting work deleted successfully.    5.1.4 Export a Painting Works You can export a list of Paintings added in the Painting Works page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See 5.1.4 page                                                              Fig 5.1.4 Export a painting work page 5.1.5 Filter a Painting Works If you want to filter any specific Painting in the Painting page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the painting page.                                                                      Fig 5.1.5 Filter a Painting Works Page. 5.1.6 Import Multiple Painting Works If you want to import multiple Painting works together, do the following. Once you have added the painting details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 5.1.6 A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the systems that are included in the excel worksheet. Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 5.1.6 An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of painting. Enter the required painting details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. After saved the excel, browse and upload the excel. Automap  -This function is used to map system columns and excel columns automatically. Map - This function is used to map each system and excel columns manually Unmap - This is used to remove the mapped column Unmap all -This is used to remove the all mapped columns Click populate values ,process and Import buttons. Refer below fig Painting details imported successfully. 5.1.7 View Log a Painting Works If you want to view a painting report, click (view log detail icon) provided in the Excel Import page. Once you click View Log detailNew window open with Log Details In the Log details click View details to get Painting Item list. 5.2 RFI Coat Inspection                                                                                          Fig 5.2 RFI Coat Inspection Page. 5.2.1 Add a RFI Coat Inspection cuteQM_Production role user only can add RFI request.If you want to add a RFI Coat Inspection list, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the RFI paint Coat Request See Fig 5.2.1A new window opens to add a RFI Paint Coat request. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. in the Inspection Type box, choose the inspection type. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Painting Coat is request. You can add multiple Coats for one request.  Click (Add Selected Coats) of the respective RFI Coat inspection you want to add. The added Coats will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added Coats, click (Remove icon) of the respective Painting. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Coat Request. Click Save. The RFI Paint Coat list request is successfully added. 5.2.2 Edit a RFI Coat Inspection If you want to edit any existing a coat in the RFI Paint Coat inspection request page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective RFI Coat Inspection Request page opens. See Fig 5.2.2 2. Edit the details where you want.3. Click Save. The RFI Paint Inspection list is successfully updated. 5.2.3 Submit RFI Coat Inspection Once you have added the RFI Coat inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Coat inspection page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.2.3                                                        Fig 5.2.3 Submit RFI Coat Inspection If you want to submit the RFI Coat Inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Coat Inspection request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI coat inspection request List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 5.2.4 Approve RFI Coat Inspection cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. f you want to approve the RFI Coat Inspection request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI coat inspection request approved  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 5.2.4 Approve RFI Inspection Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Remarks given then painting list will be created, and this will be shown in view painting list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 5.2.5 View result of RFI Coat Inspection If you want to view an RFI Coat inspection report, click (add) provided in the Report column of the RFI Coat Inspection page. Click icon  result popup will open. Click icon  file upload popup will open.                                                           Fig 5.2.5 File upload for RFI Coat inspection page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments  given as result,then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 5.2.6 Print a RFI Coat Inspection If you want to view an RFI Coat Inspection, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Coat Inspection List Signature of production user and QC also shown in the print.                                                                                          Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                              Fig 5.2.6 View a RFI Coat Inspection Page 5.2.7 Attach a File into a RFI Coat Inspection If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI Coat inspection list listed in the RFI Coat inspection List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. A new window opens for file upload.In the category box, select the category from drop-down list.Select(Browse button) and upload the documents.                                                           Fig 5.2.7 Attach a file RFI Coat Inspection 5.2.8 Export a RFI Coat Inspection You can export a list of RFI Coat Inspection requests added in the RFI Fit coat Inspection page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                    Fig 5.2.8 Export a RFI Coat Inspection Page. 5.2.9 Filter a RFI Coat Inspection If you want to filter any specific RFI Coat Inspection list in the RFI Coat Inspection page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Coat Inspection.                                              Fig 5.2.9 Filter a RFI Coat inspection. 5.3.0 Painting Works Summary We can see the summary of all the painting RFI details here. You can export a Painting Works Summary requests added in the painting work summary page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                           Fig 5.3.0 Painting Work Summary Page 5.3.1 Export an Painting Summary list You can export a list of Painting Summary added in the painting page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). 5.3.2 Filter a Painting Works Summary If you want to filter any specific painting work summary in the paintings page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Hull page.                                                         Fig 5.3.1 Filter a Painting Works Summary Page                                                                                                                                                                                           Electrical and Instrumentation Electrical and Instrumentation Electrical 1. Project Data The Project Data menu in the cuteQM app helps you to add the master data. Once you click the Project Data menu, the following tabs open, 1.0 Systems You can add the details of systems to be used in the Electrical project by using the Systems tab in the Project Data menu. If youwant to navigate to Systems, 1.Click Systems in the Project Data menu,The System page opens.                                                                         Fig 1.0 Systems Page 1.1.1 Add a System If you want to add a new system, do the following steps,1. Click (ADD button) in the System page. See Fig 1.1.1 A new window opens to add a new system.                                                                                Fig 1.1.1 Add a System Page Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the System box, enter the system name. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the system name. In the System Number box, enter the system number. Click Save. The system is successfully added and listed in the System page. Note: If you want to map cover page for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Cover Page column and add the cover pages. If you want to map certificates for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Certificates column and add the cover pages. If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS) for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column and add the cover pages. 1.1.2 Edit a System If you want to edit any existing system in the System page,                                                              Fig 1.1.2 Edit a System Page Click (Edit icon) of the respective System. Fig See 1.1.2 The System page shows the details of the selected system. Edit the details of system,Abbreviation and System number as required. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                         System updated successfully. 1.1.3 Delete a System If you want to delete any existing system in the System page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the System page. By click confirm delete                                                                                     Fig 1.1.3 Delete a System Page                                  Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a Alert message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK.                                                                                                                                                                                   System deleted successfully. 1.1.4 Export in System List You can export a list of systems added in the System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). Fig See 1.1.4 page                                                                                    Fig 1.1.4 Export System List Page 1.1.5 Filter a System If you want to filter any specific system in the System page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the System page.                                                                       Fig 1.1.5 Filter a System Page 1.1.6 Import Multiple Systems If you want to import multiple systems together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 1.1.6 An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of systems. Enter the required system details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the systems that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the systems in the worksheet will be displayed in the System page. 1.1.7 Attach a File into a System If you want to attach any file with any system listed in the System page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column.                                                          1.2 Sub Systems The Sub Systems tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of sub systems to be in used in the Electrical Project. If you want to navigate to Sub Systems,                                                                                   Fig 1.2 Sub System Page. 1.2.1 Add a Sub System If you want to add a new sub system, do the following steps,Click  (ADD button) in the Sub System page. See Fig 1.2.1A new window opens to add a new sub system.                                                                              Fig 1.2.1 Add a Sub SystemNote: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub System box, select a sub system from a drop-down list. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the sub system. In the Sub System Number box, enter the sub system number. If the added subsystem needs to be flushed, select Yes in the Flushing option otherwise select No. If there is need to perform the leakage test for the added subsystem, select Yes in the Leak Test option otherwise select No. In the Description box, enter the description for the added sub system. Click Save.The sub system is successfully added and listed in the Sub System page. 1.2.2 Edit a Sub System If you want to edit any existing sub system in the Sub System page,                                                                        Fig 1.2.2 Edit a Sub System Click (Edit icon) of the respective sub system. See Fig 1.2.2 The Sub System page shows the details of the selected sub system. Edit the details of system,subsystem,abbreviation and sub system number as required. Click Save. 1.2.3 Delete a Sub System If you want to delete any existing sub system in the Sub System page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Sub System page. Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”. Click OK.                                                                                                                                                          Sub System deleted successfully 1.2.4 Import a Multiple Sub Systems If you want to import multiple sub systems together, do the following, Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 1.2.4 An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of sub systems. Enter the required sub system details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the sub system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click   (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.2.4 A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the sub systems that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the sub systems in the worksheet will be displayed in the Sub System page. 1.2.5 Attach a File into a Sub System If you want to attach any file with any sub system listed in the Sub System page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. 1.3 Cabel Master The Cabel Master tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of cable master to be in used in the Electrical Project. If you want to navigate to Cabel Master,                                                  Fig 1.3 Cable Master Page 1.3.0 Cabel List The Cabel List tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of Cabel List to be in used in the Electrical Project. If you want to navigate to Cabel list.                                                                                     Fig 1.3.0 Cable List Page 1.3.1 Add a Cabel List If you want to add a new cable list, do the following steps,Click  (ADD button) in cable list page. See Fig 1.3.1A new window opens to add a new cable list.                                                                                                    Fig 1.31 Add Cable List Page Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the System Name box, select a system name from a drop-down list. In the Revision No box, select a system no from the drop-down list. In the Cable No box, enter the cable number. In the Cable Length box, select a system name from a drop-down list. In the Cabel Size box, enter the cable size number. in the From Equipment box, select a system name from a drop-down list. In the To Equipment box, select a system name from a drop-down list. Click Save. The Cable List is successfully added. 1.3.2 Edit a Cable List If you want to edit any existing Cable List in Edit Cable List page, do the following,                                                                   Fig 1.3.2 Edit a Cable List Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective cable list. See Fig 3.3. A new window opens to edit the cable list. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                                           The Cable List is successfully updated. 1.3.3 Delete a Cable List If you want to delete any specific Cable List from the list of cable list, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Cable List page, Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding master drawing. You receive a notification message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK.                                                                                                                                                                                             The Cable List is successfully deleted. 1.3.4 Clone a Cable list The Clone option provided in the Cable master page used to add a new clone from previously added clone. If a clone to be addedis having the same specifications of any clone already listed in the clone page, you can add the new clone by using  (Clone icon).1. Click(Clone icon) of the respective Clone. 2. If you want to change any details, you can change in the respective boxes.3. Click SaveThe new clone is successfully added and listed in the Clone page. 1.3.5 Add a Map CR/CS If you want to map CR/CS, do the following steps,Note: If you want to map cover page for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Cover Page column and add the cover pages.                                                                            Fig 1.3.5 Add a Map CR/ CS Page If you want to map certificates for any added cable master, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Certificates column and add the cover pages. If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS) for any added cable master, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column and add the cover pages. 1.3.6 Export a Cable List You can export a list of cable added in the cable page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). 1.3.7 Filter a Cable List If you want to filter any specific Cable list in the Cable master page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Cable list page. 1.3.7 Import Multiple Cable list If you want to import multiple cable list together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of cable no. Enter the required cable no details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the cable list details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the cable list that are added in the excel worksheet. The details of the cable list in the worksheet will be displayed in the cable list page. 1.4 Type The Type tab in the Project Data (Electrical) menu helps you add the type details.If you want to navigate to Type List, 1. Click Type List in the Project Data (Electrical) menu.The Type List page opens.                                                                           Fig 1.4 Type Page 1.4.1 Add a Type If you want to add a new type, do the following steps,1. Click  (ADD button) in the type of page. See Fig 1.4.1A new window opens to add a new Type                                                                                      Fig 1.4.1 Add A Type Page Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Type box, enter the type . In the Description box, enter the description for the type. Click Save. The type is successfully added. 1.4.2 Edit a Type If you want to edit any existing type in the type of page,                                                                                                 Fig 1.4.2 Edit Page Click (Edit icon) of the respective valve. The Type List page shows the details of the selected type. Edit the details of Type and description as required. Click Save. The type is successfully updated. 1.4.3 Delete a Type If you want to delete any specific Type from the list of Type you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Type page, Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding type. You receive a notification message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK. The type is successfully deleted. 1.4.4 Export a Type You can export a list of Type added in the Type List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). 1.4.5Filter a Type If you want to filter any type in the Type List page, you can use (FILTER button) provided on the Type List page. 1.5 Equipements List The Equipements tab in the Project Data menu used to add the details of equipment to be used in the Electrical project. To add equipment, 1. Click Equipements List in the Project Data menu.The Equipements page opens                                                                                         Fig 1.5 Equipements List 1.5.1 Add an Equipment If you want to add an equipment list, do the following steps,1. Click  (ADD button) in the Equipements List See Fig 1.5.1A new window opens to add an equipment List.                                                                                Fig 1.5.1 Add an Equipment List Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Name box, enter the name of the equipment list. In the Location box, enter the location of the equipment list. In the Tag Number box, enter the number of the equipment list. In the Type box, select the type of the equipment list. Click Save. The equipment list is successfully saved. 1.5.2 Edit an Equipment List If you want to edit any existing an equipment in the Equipment List page,                         Fig 1.5.2 Edit an Equipment List 1. Click  (Edit icon) of the respective test equipment. See Fig 1.5.22. Edit the details of equipment name,location,tag number and type as required where you want.3. Click Save. The equipment list is successfully updated. 1.5.3 Delete an Equipment List If you want to delete any existing an equipment list in the Equipment list page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Equipment List page. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Equipment. You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Equipment List deleted successfully. 1.5.4 Clone an Equipment List 1. Click(Clone icon) of the respective Clone.                        Fig 1.5.4 Clone an Equipment List 2. If you want to change any details, you can change in the respective boxes. 3. Click SaveThe new clone is successfully added and listed in the Clone Equipment list page. 1.5.5 Add a Map CR/CS If you want to add a new Map, do the following steps, Note: If you want to map cover page for any added equipment click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Cover Page column and add the cover pages. If you want to map certificates for any added equipment master, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Certificates column and add the cover pages. If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS) for any added equipment master, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column and add the cover pages. 1.5.6 Export an Equipment List You can export a list of test equipment list added in the Equipment List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). 1.5.7 Filter an Equipment List You can also use (FILTER button) located on the Equipment list. 1.5.8 Import Multiple Equipment List If you want to import multiple equipment list together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig1.5.8 An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of equipment list. Enter the required equipment details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the equipment details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.5.8 A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the equipment list details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the equipment list in the worksheet will be displayed in the Equipment List page. 1.6 Drawings Drawing can be added through ADD or import of Drawing Master command.1. Click Drawing Master in the Project Data menu.The Drawing Master page opens                                                                      Fig 1.6 Drawing Page 1.6.1 Add a Drawing Master If you want to Add Drawing Master, do the following steps. Click (ADD button) in the Drawing type page. See Fig 1.6.1                                                                                         A new window opens to add a new Drawing Master.                                                                   Figure 1.6.1 Drawing Master page.Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Drawing Number box, you must enter the drawing number. In the Drawing Name box, enter the drawing name. In the Revision Number box, enter the revision number. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                                  The Drawing Master is successfully added. 1.6.2 Edit a Drawing Type If you want to edit any existing Drawing master in the Drawing master page, do the following, steps Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective drawing master. See Fig 1.6.2                                                                       A new window opens to edit the saved one.                                                                     Fig 1.6.2 Edit a Drawing Type                                                                       Edit the details of Drawing number,Drawing name,Revision number,No of sheet and remarks as required. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Drawing Master updated successfully. 1.6.3 Delete a Drawing Master If you want to delete any specific drawing from the drawing master, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Drawing master page. Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding Drawing master. You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Drawing master deleted successfully. 1.6.4 Clone 1. Click(Clone icon) of the respective Clone. 2. If you want to change any details, you can change in the respective boxes.3. Click SaveThe new clone is successfully added and listed in the Clone drawing master page. 1.6.5 Attachments User can upload multiple documents through attachment screen. 2. It will be redirected to new attachment screen. 3. Here user can select category of the document and browse & upload the document.4. Document successfully downloaded 1.6.6 Export a Drawing master list You can export a list of drawing master list added in the Drawing master List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). 1.6.7 Filter a Drawing Master 1. Click (FILTER button) located on the Drawing Master page.Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Drawing Number, Drawing Name, Revision number columns. If you want to filter any Drawing master from the list of Drawing master , do the following steps, 1.6.8 Import Multiple Drawing Master If you want to import multiple Drawing master together, do the following steps, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 1.6.8 An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of Drawing master. Enter the required Drawing master and category details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the  details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.6.8 A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Click (Upload button) to export the drawing master that are included in the excel worksheet.      Imported successfully. The details of the Drawing master in the worksheet will be displayed in the Drawing master page. 1.7 Tags 1. Click Tags in the Project Data menu.The Tags page opens.                                                                                   Fig 1.7 Tags Page 1.7.1 Add a Tags If you want to add a material certificate, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Tags See Fig 1.7.1A new window opens to add a Tags.                                                                                 Fig 1.7.1 Add Tags Page Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Fit up Subcontractor box, select the component from a drop-down list. In the Visual Subcontractor box, select the number from the drop-down list. In the Drawing Number box, select the number from the drop- down list. In the Tag number box, enter the Tag number. In the Type box, select the type from the drop-down list. In the Size box enter the size. In the Material box, select the number from the drop-down list In the Weight box, enter the weight number. In the Length box, enter the Length number. In the Remarks, enter the remarks iif any. Click Save.The Tags is successfully saved. 1.7.2 Edit a Tags                                                                         Fig 1.7.2 Edit a Tags If you want to edit any existing Tags in the Tags page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective test equipment. See Fig The Tags page shows the details of the selected Tags. Edit the details of Fitup subcontractor,visual subcontractor,Drawing number,Tag number,type,size,material,weight,length and remarks  as required. Click Save. Tags is successfully updated. 1.7.3 Delete a Tags If you want to delete any existing tags in the Tags page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Tags page. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Tags. You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Tags is deleted successfully. 1.7.4 Export a Tag You can export a list of Tags added in the Tags page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). 1.7.5 Import Multiple Tags If you want to import multiple Tags together, do the following, Click (IMPORT button). The Excel Import page opens. 1. Click  (TEMPLATE button). An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of Tags. Enter the required Tags details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the Tags details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the Tags details that are included in the excel worksheet. Automap  -This function is used to map system columns and excel columns automatically. Map - This function is used to map each system and excel columns manually Unmap - This is used to remove the mapped column Unmap all -This is used to remove the all mapped columns Click populate values ,process and Import buttons. Tags imported successfully. 1.8 Compartment 1. Click Compartment in the Project Data menu.The Compartment page opens.                                                                                       Fig 1.8 Compartment Page 1.8.1 Add a Compartment If you want to add a material certificate, do the following, Click (ADD button) in the Compartment See Fig 1.8.1 A new window opens to add a compartment.                                                       Fig 1.8.1 Add a Compartment Page Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Compartment Item box, enter the compartment item. In the Subcontractor box, select the subcontractor from the drop-down list. Click Save.The Compartment is successfully added. Note:  You can edit and delete the added Compartment by using the respective (Edit icon) and (Delete icon). 1.8.2 Export a Compartment You can export a list of drawing master list added in the compartment page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). See Fig 1.8.2 1.8.3 Filter a Compartment 1. Click (FILTER button) located on the compartment page.Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Compartment Item, Subcontractor columns. If you want to filter any compartment from the list of Compartment, do the following steps,2. Click Save. 1.8.4 Import Multiple Compartments If you want to import multiple Compartments together, do the following, Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.8.4 The Excel Import page opens. 1. Click  (TEMPLATE button). An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of Compartment Item. Enter the required compartment item details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the compartment item details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the Tags details that are included in the excel worksheet. Automap  -This function is used to map system columns and excel columns automatically. Map - This function is used to map each system and excel columns manually Unmap - This is used to remove the mapped column Unmap all -This is used to remove the all mapped columns Click populate values ,process and Import buttons. Compartment imported successfully. 1.9 Test Equipment The Test Equipment's tab in the Materials menu used to add the details of a test equipment to be used in the Electrical project. To add a test equipment, 1. Click Test Equipment's in the Materials menu.   The Testing Equipment's page opens.                                                                                Fig 1.9 Test Equipment Page 1.9.1 Add a Test Equipment If you want to add a test equipment, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Testing Equipment's See Fig 1.9.1A new window opens to add a test equipment.                                                                           Fig 1.9.1 Add a Test Equipment Page Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Category box, enter the category of the test equipment. In the Test Equipment box, enter the name of the test equipment. In the Manufacturer box, enter the name of the manufacturer. In the Asset Tag Number box, enter the asset tag number of the test equipment. In the Recommended Range box, enter the recommended range of test equipment. In the Range box, enter the actual range of test equipment. In the Least Count box, enter the least count of the test equipment. In the Purpose box, enter the purpose of the test equipment. In the Alert Frequency (in Days) box, the alert frequency duration will be updated automatically. If you want to change the duration you can change. In the Acceptance Criteria box, enter the acceptance criteria. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. In the Status box, select the status of the test equipment. In the Location of Equipment box, enter the equipment location detail. In the Description box, enter the description for the test equipment. In the Equipment Batch no box, enter the equipment batch no location detail. In the Model No box, enter the model no. Click Save. The test equipment is successfully saved. 1.9.2 Edit a Test Equipment If you want to edit any existing test equipment in the Testing Equipment page, Click (Edit icon) of the respective test equipment. The Testing Equipment page shows the details of the selected test equipment.                                                             Fig 1.9.2 Edit a Test Equipment Page Edit the details where you want. Click Save. 1.9.3 Delete a Test Equipment If you want to delete any existing test equipment in the Testing Equipment page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Testing Equipment page. See Fig 1.9.3 Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Test EquipmentSelected deleted Test Equipment successfully. 1.9.4 Export Test Equipment list You can export a list of test equipment's added in the Test Equipment page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). See Fig 1.9.4 1.9.5 Filter a Test Equipment If you want to filter any specific test equipment in the Testing Equipment page, See Fig 1.9.5 you can use the category wise filter box provided in the upper side of the Testing Equipment To filter the testing equipment, select the category from the drop-down list. you can also use (FILTER button) located on the Testing Equipment. 1.9.6 Import Multiple Test Equipements If you want to import multiple test equipment together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 1.9.6 An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of test equipments. Enter the required test equipment details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the test equipment details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.9.6 A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the test equipment details that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the test equipment's in the worksheet will be displayed in the Testing Equipment page. 1.9.7 Attach a File into a Test Equipment If you want to attach any file with any existing test equipment listed in the Testing Equipment page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. 2.0 RFI The RFI menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used add a Request for RFI Glanding & Termination List, RFI fit up visual, Cable dressing and banding request, Torque request, Compound Filling and MCT Packing, RFI Equipment Megger Test. 2.1 RFI Glanding and termination List The RFI Glanding and termination List up Request tab allows you add an RFI Glanding and termination request to check the fit-up quality of pipes and joints used in the piping project by a sub-contractor. To navigate to the RFI Glanding and Termination List up request adding page. 1. Click RFI Glanding and Termination List in the RFI menu.The RFI Glanding and Termination page opens.                                                                         Fig 2.0 RFI Glanding and Termination List 2.1.1 Add a RFI Glanding and Termination request. If you want to add an RFI Glanding and Termination request, do the following steps,                                                        Fig 2.1.1 Add a RFI Glanding & Termination List cuteQM_Production role user only can add a RFI request Click add button.Refer fig.2.1.1 above In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Calibration details box, select a calibration detail from a drop-down list. Before saving the added RFI Glanding & Termination request, you must add joints for the for the RFI Glanding and termination list request. Note: You can add multiple cables for one request. Click (Add Selected Cables) of the respective joints you want to add. The added cables will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. The added cable will be moved and listed in the right side of the page Tip: If you want to remove any added joint, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Glanding & Termination request. Click Save. RFI Glanding & Termination Request created successfully. 2.1.2 Edit a RFI Glanding & Termination List If you want to edit any existing RFI Glanding & Termination request in the RFI glanding & Termination list page, do the following,                                                                 Fig 2.1.2 Edit a RFI Glanding & Termination Page Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI Glanding & Termination List. See Fig 2.1.2 The RFI Glanding & Termination list page opens with the details of the selected RFI Glanding & Termination list. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.Click Save. RFI Glanding & Termination Request updated successfully. 2.1.3 Submit a RFI Glanding & Termination List                                                         Fig 2.1.3 Submit a RFI Glanding and Termination List Once you have added the RFI Glanding & Termination list request list, the Submit column in the RFI Glanding & Termination Requests List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the RFI Glanding & Termination list request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (cancel icon) to cancel the request. The submitted request will be moved to for RFI Glanding & Termination list inspection. 2.1.4 Approve a RFI Glanding & Termination List cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Glanding & Termination list request, click (confirm icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open. Refer below fig 4. User can update the result (Accept/Reject) and Description,L1,L2,L3,Remarks                                                      Fig 2.1.4 Approve a RFI Glanding & Termination List Click Save. RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments selected then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against equipment's, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.1.5 View a RFI Glanding & Termination List Report If you want to view an RFI  Glanding & Termination report, click  (print icon) provided in the Result column of the RFI Glanding & Termination List page. In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                            Fig 2.1.5 View a RFI Glanding and Termination List 2.1.6 Attach a File into an RFI Glanding & Termination list. If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI glanding & termination listed in the RFI Glanding & Termination List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. 2.1.7 Export a RFI Glanding & Termination Request You can export a list of RFI glanding & Termination requests added in the RFI Glanding & Termination Requests List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                 Fig 2.1.7 Export a RFI Glanding & Termination List 2.1.8 Filter a RFI Glanding & Termination Request If you want to filter any specific RFI glanding and termination in the RFI glanding and termination List page, you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Glanding & Termination List To filter the any specific RFI Glanding and Termination request, select the Report Number, Inspection Date and Date in the boxes and click. you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Glanding & Termination List. 2.2 RFI Fit up/ Visual List The RFI Fit up/ Visual List tab allows you add an RFI fit up/ Visual List to check the fit-up quality of pipes and joints used in the piping project by a sub-contractor. To navigate to the RFI fit up / Visual List adding page, Click RFI Fit up Request in the RFI menu.The RFI Fit up / Visual list page opens.                                                                 Fig 2.2 RFI Fit up / Visual Page 2.2.1 Add a RFI Fit up/ Visual List If you want to add an RFI fit up / Visual list, do the following steps, cuteQM_Production role user only can Add a RFI request                                                            Fig 2.2.1 Add a RFI Fit up / Visual List Click (ADD button) in the RFI fit up / Visual List page. A new page opens to add an RFI fit up / Visual request.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Type box, choose an inspection type from given list. Before saving the added fit up request, you must add joints for the fit-up / visual list request. Note: You can add multiple System for one request. Click (Add Selected System) of the respective system you want to add. The added compartment will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added system, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI fit up request. Click Save. The RFI fit up / visual list request is successfully added. 2.2.2 Edit a RFI Fit up / Visual Request If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request in the RFI Fit up / Visual list page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request. See Fig 2.2.2 The RFI Fit up Visual list page opens with the details of the selected RFI fit up visual page list.                                                                       Fig 2.2.2 Edit a RFI Fit up / Visual Page Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. Click Save. 2.2.3 Submit  an RFI Fit up Request. Once you have added the RFI fit up request, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up visual Lists page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.2.3                                                         Fig 2.2.3 Submit & Approve a RFI Fit up / Visual Page If you want to submit the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI fit up visual list request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Fit up visual List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 2.2.4 Approve RFI Fit up visual List cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the  RFI Fit up visual list request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.2.4 Approve RFI Fit up / Visual List page. Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments given as result, then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.2.5 Print a RFI Fit Up / Visual list report. If you want to view an RFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fit up / Visual page. In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 2.2.5 Print a RFI Fit up / Visual Page 2.2.6 Attach a File into a RFI Fit up Visual List If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI fit up visual list listed in the RFI Fit up visual List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. 2.2.7 Export a RFI Fit up Visual List You can export a list of RFI  fit up visual list requests added in the RFI Fit up visual List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                 Fig 2.2.7 Export a RFI Glanding & Termination List 2.2.8 Filter a RFI Fit up Visual List If you want to filter any specific RFI fit up request in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Fit up visual List. 2.3 RFI Cable Dressing & Banding Request Click RFI Cable Dressing & Banding Request in the RFI menu.The RFI Fit up Requests List page opens.                                                     Fig 2.3 RFI Cable Dressing & Banding Request Page 2.3.1 Add a RFI Cable Dressing & Banding Request If you want to add an RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request, do the following, cuteQM_Production role user only can  Add a RFI request.                                           Fig 2.3.1 Add an RFI Cable Dressing & banding request Page Click (ADD button) in the RFI Cable dressing & Banding request List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request.               Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request will be updated automatically In the Subcontractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Click the check box of the respective compartments. Click   (Add Selected Systems button). Click Save. 2.3.2 Submit a Cable Dressing & Banding Request Once you have added the RFI Cable Dressings, the result column in the RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.3.2                                          Fig 2.3.2 RFI Cable Dressing & Banding Request Page If you want to submit the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.3.3 Approve RFI Cable Dressing & banding request List cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                   Fig 2.3.3 Approve RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request List Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments given as result, then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.3.4 View a RFI Cable Dressing & Banding Report If you want to view an RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Cable dressing & Banding request page. See Fig 2.3.4 View a RFI Cable Dressing & Banding Report In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature 2.3.5 Export a RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request List You can export a list of RFI  Cable Dressing & banding list visual list requests added in the RFI Cable Dressing & banding request page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                            Fig 2.3.5 Export a CabIe Dressing & Banding request Page. 2.3.6 Filter a RFI Cable dressing & Banding request List If you want to filter any RFI Cable dressing & Banding request from the list of RFI requests in the RFI Cable dressing & Banding request List page, you can use (FILTER button).                                              Fig 2.3.6 Filter a RFI Cable Dressing & Banding request Page 2.4 RFI Torque Request Click RFI Torque Request in the RFI menu.The RFI Torque Request page opens.                                                                Fig 2.4 Torque Tightening Page 2.4.1 Add a RFI Torque Request If you want to add an RFI Torque request, do the following steps, cuteQM_Production role user only can ADD a RFI request.                                                                           Fig 2.4.1 Add a RFI Torque Request page. Click (ADD button) in the RFI Torque request page A new page opens to add an RFI fit Torque request.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Calibration Details box, select a calibration detail from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection.Before saving the added RFI Torque request, you must equipment list request. Note: You can add multiple equipment for one request. 1. Click (Add Selected Equipment) of the respective equipment you want to add. The added equipment will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added equipment, click (Remove icon) of the respective equipment. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Torque request. Click Save. 2.4.2 Edit a RFI Torque Request If you want to edit any existing RFI torque request in the RFI torque request page, do the following,                                                                      Fig 2.4.2 Edit a RFI Torque Request Page Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI torque request. The RFI Torque request page opens with the details of the selected RFI torque request page list. Click Save. 2.4.3 Submit a RFI Torque Request Once you have added the RFI Cable Dressings, the result column in the RFI torque request page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.4.3                                                                 Fig 2.4.3 Submit RFI torque Request Page If you want to submit the RFI torque request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI torque request visual list request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Cable Dressing & banding request List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.4.4 Approve a RFI Torque Request cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI torque request List page request, click (confirm icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.4.4 Approve a RFI torque request List page. Click Save. RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments givenas result then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against equipment's, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.4.5 Print a RFI Torque request Report If you want to view an RFI torque request List page, click  (print icon) provided in the Result column of the RFI torque request List page. In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                                Fig 2.4.5 View a RFI RFI torque request. 2.4.6 Attach a File into an RFI Torque request Result. If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI Torgue request listed in the RFI torque request List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. 2.4.7 Export RFI Torque Request You can export a list of RFI torque requests added in the RFI Torque Requests List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                   Fig 2.4.7 Export RFI Torque Request Page 2.4.8 Filter an RFI Torque Request If you want to filter any RFI Torque request from the list of RFI fit up requests in the RFI Torque Requests List page, you can use (FILTER button). 2.5 RFI Compound filling / MCT Packing Click RFI Compound filling / MCT Packing in the RFI menu.The RFI compound filling / MCT packing page opens.                                                    Fig 2.5 RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing page 2.5.1 Add a RFI Compound filling / MCT Packing If you want to add an RFI Compounding filling / MCT Packing, do the following steps, cuteQM_Production role users only can ADD a RFI request                                                       Fig 2.5.1 Add A RFI Compound Filling / MCT packing Page. Click (ADD button) in the RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing page. A new page opens to add an RFI compound filling / MCT packing request.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection.Before saving the added RFI compound filling / MCT Packing, you must add Compartments list request. Note: You can add multiple compartments for one request. 1. Click (Add Selected Compartments) of the respective joints you want to add. The added compartments will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any addedcompartment, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI fit up request. Click Save. 2.5.2 Edit a RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing If you want to edit any existing RFI Compound filling / MCT packing request in the RFI Compound filling / MCT packing request page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI torque request.                                             Fig 2.5.2 Edit a RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing Page The RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing page opens with the details of the selected RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing page list.Click Save. 2.5.3 Submit a RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing                                     Fig 2.5.3 Submit a RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing list. Once you have added the RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing request list, the Submit column in the RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (cancel icon) to cancel the request. The submitted request will be moved to for RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing inspection. 2.5.4 Approve a RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Glanding & Termination list request, click (confirm icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open. 4. User can update the result and Description, Remarks                                                   Fig 2.5.4 Approve a RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing Click Save. 2.5.5Print a RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing Report If you want to view an RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing report, click  (print icon) provided in the Result column of the RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing List page. In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                          See Fig 2.5.5 Print RFI Compound Filling/ MCT Packing Report                                                     2.5.6 Attach a File into RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI compound filling / MCT Packing requests in the RFI compound filling / MCT Packing requests  List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column.                                                 Fig 2.5.6 Attach RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing Page 2.5.7 Export RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing You can export a list of RFI compound filling / MCT Packing requests added in the RFI compound Filling / MCT Packing List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                     See Fig 2.5.7 Export RFI Compound Filling/ MCT Packing Report 2.5.8 Filter a RFI Compound Filling / MCT Packing If you want to filter any RFI compound filling / MCT Packing request from the list of RFI compound filling / MCT Packing in the RFI compound filling / MCT Packing List page, you can use (FILTER button). 2.6 RFI Equipment Megger List Click RFI Equipment Megger List in the RFI menu.The RFI Equipment Megger List page opens.                                                         Fig 2.6 RFI Equpment Megger List Page. 2.6.1 Add a RFI Equipment Megger List If you want to add an RFI Equipment Megger List, do the following steps, cuteQM_Production user only can ADD a RFI request.                                                           Fig 2.6.1 Add RFI Equipment Megger List Page Click (ADD button) in the RFI Equipment Megger List. A new page opens to add an RFI Equipment Megger request.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Before saving the added RFI Equipment Megger request, you must add Equipment list request. Note: You can add multiple Equipment for one request. 1. Click (Add Selected Equipements) of the respective equipment you want to add. The added equipment will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added equipments, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI equipment megger request. Click Save. 2.6.2 Edit a RFI Equipment Megger List If you want to edit any existing RFI Equipment Megger List request in the RFI Equipment Megger request page, do the following,                                                      Fig 2.6.2 Edit RFI Equipment Megger List page. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI Equipment Megger. See Fig 2.6.2 The RFI Equipment Megger page opens with the details of the selected RFI Equipment Megger page list.Click  Save. 2.6.3 Submit a RFI Equipment Megger List                                                     Fig 2.6.3 Submit a RFI Equipment Megger List Once you have added the RFI Equipment Megger request list, the Submit column in the RFI Equipment Megger List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). If you want to submit the RFI Equipment Megger request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (cancel icon) to cancel the request. The submitted request will be moved to for RFI Equipment Megger inspection. 2.6.4 Approve a RFI Equipment Megger List cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the Equipment Megger request, click (confirm icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open. 4. User can update the result (Accept/Reject) and Description,L1,L2,L3,Remarks                                                     Fig 2.6.4 Approve a RFI Equipment Megger List page Click Save. RFI result is updated successfully. If Acceped with comments given as result then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against equipment's, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.6.5 View a RFI Equipment Megger List Report If you want to view an RFI Equipment Megger, click (print icon) provided in the Result column of the RFI Equipment Megger List page. In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature 2.6.6 Attach a File into an RFI Equipment Megger List If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI Equipment listed in the RFI Equipment Megger List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column.                                                    Fig 2.6.6 Attach file RFI Equipment Megger List 2.6.7 Export a RFI Equipment Megger List You can export a list of RRFI Equipment Megger requests added in the RFI Equipment Megger List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                             Fig 2.6.7 Export RFI Equipment Megger List 2.6.8 Filter a RFI Equipment Megger List If you want to filter any RFI Equipment Megge request from the list of RFI Equipment Megge in the RFI Equipment Megger page, you can use (FILTER button).                                                         Fig 2.6.8 Filter RFI Equipment Megger List.                                                                                 Mechanical This section covers the inspections and data management related to mechanical module. Mechanical This section covers the inspections and data management related to mechanical module. 1. Project Data Select Mechanicalmodule at the top The Project Data menu in the cuteQM app helps you to add the master data. Once you click the Project Data menu, Equipment list master screen to be shown as below 1.1 Equipment List You can add the details of equipment to be used in the Mechanical project by using the Equipment List tab in the Project Data menu. If youwant to navigate to Systems,                                            Fig 1.3 Equipment List 1.1.1 Equipment List The Equipements tab in the Project Data menu used to add the details of equipment to be used in the Mechanical project. To add equipment, 1.Click Equipment List in the Project Data menu,The Equipment List page opens.                                       Fig1.3.1 Equipment List Page 1.1.2 Add an Equipment If you want to add an equipment list, do the following steps,1. Click  (ADD button) in the Equipements List See Fig 1.3.2A new window opens to add an equipment List.                                               Fig 1.3.2 Add an Equipment List Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Equipment Name box, enter the name of the equipment list. In the Tag Number box, enter the Tag Number of the equipment list. In the Location box, enter the location of the equipment Click Save. The equipment list is successfully saved. 1.1.3 Edit an Equipment List If you want to edit any existing an equipment in the Equipment List page,                        Fig 1.1.3 Edit an Equipment List 1. Click  (Edit icon) of the respective test equipment. See Fig 1.1.3 2. Edit the details where you want.3. Click Save. The equipment list is successfully updated. 1.1.4 Delete an Equipment List If you want to delete any existing an equipment list in the Equipment list page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Equipment List page. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Equipment. You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                 Equipment List deleted successfully. 1.1.5 Clone an Equipment List 1. Click(Clone icon) of the respective Clone.                        Fig 1.3.5 Clone an Equipment List 2. If you want to change any details, you can change in the respective boxes.  3. Click SaveThe new clone is successfully added and listed in the  Equipment list page. 1.1.6 Add a Map CR/CS If you want to add a new Map, do the following steps, Note: If you want to map cover page for any added equipment click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Cover Page column and add the cover pages. If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS Name) Type or CR/CS Count for any added equipment List, (click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column and add the cover pages.                                                       Fig 1.3.6 Add Map CR/CS page. 1.1.7 Export an Equipment List You can export a list of test equipment list added in the Equipment List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                Fig 1.3.7 Export an Equipment List 1.1.8 Filter an Equipment List You can also use (FILTER button) located on the Equipment list.                                                          Fig 1.3.8 Filter an Equipment List 1.1.9 Import Multiple Equipment List If you want to import multiple equipment list together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig1.3.9 An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of equipment list. Enter the required equipment details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the equipment details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.3.9 A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to export the equipment list details that are included in the excel worksheet.Equipment lists imported successfully. The details of the equipment list in the worksheet will be displayed in the Equipment List page. 1.1.10 View Log You can also use (View Log button) located on the Equipment list.Here last imported details to be shown. Click (View Log button). See Fig1.3.10 2.0 RFI The RFI menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used add a RFI pre- alignment, Alignment Machining, Torque Tightening and Visual. 2.1 Pre- Alignment Click Pre-Alignment List in the RFI menu.The Pre-Alignment page opens.                                                  Fig 2.1 Pre- Alignment 2.1.1 Add a Pre-Alignment RFI 1.cuteQM_Production role user only can add RFI request. 2.If you want to add an RFI Pre- Alignment, do the following steps, Click Add icon in RFI Pre Alignment Request. In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. Note: You can add multiple cables for one request. Click (Add Selected Cables) of the respective equipment you want to add. The added cables will be moved and listed in the right side of the page.  The added equipment will be moved and listed in the right side of the page Tip: If you want to remove any added joint, click (Remove icon) of the respective equipment. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Pre- Alignment request. Click Save. RFI Pre-Alignment Request created successfully. 2.1.2.Edit a Pre-Alignment RFI If you want to edit any existing Pre-Alignment RFI request in the list page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respectivePre-Alignment Request. See Fig 2.1.2 The Pre-Alignment  Request page opens with the details of the selected equipment list.                                                              Fig 2.1.2 Edit a Pre-Alignment Request Page Add/remove any equipments Click Save.Pre-Alignmnet RFI request updated successfully. 2.1.3 Submit RFI Pre- alignment Request. Once you have added the RFI fit up request, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up visual Lists page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.1.3                                                        Fig 2.1.3 Submit RFI Pre-Alignment Request If you want to submit the RFI pre-alignment request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Pre-Alignment request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI pre- alignment request List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 2.1.4 Approve RFI pre- alignment request cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the  RFI pre- alignment request , click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI pre- alignment request approved  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.1.4 Approve RFI Pre-alignment request. Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accept with comments given then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against equipment, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload document. 2.1.5 Attach a images into a RFI pre- alignment request If you want to attach a image with any existing RFI pre-alignment listed in the RFI pre-alignment request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attach images column. New popup window will open. once you click Add icon   You can Attach images  2.1.6 Print RFI Pre alignment request If you want to Print an RFI pre alignment report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI pre alignment page. Signature of the production user and QC user will be shown in the report.                                                                        Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 2.1.7 View a RFI pre alignment request. 2.1.7 Attach a File into a RFI pre alignment request If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI fit up visual list listed in the RFI pre alignment request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column.New window will open . you can upload document's 2.1.8 Export a RFI Pre-Alignment You can export a list of RFI pre-alignment list requests added in the RFI Pre-Alignment List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                Fig 2.1.2 Export a RFI Pre-Alignment List Page 2.1.9 Filter a RFI Pre-Alignment If you want to filter any specific RFI Pre-Alignment in the RFI Pre- Alignment List page, you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Pre- Alignment To filter the any specific RFI Pre-Alignment and request, select the Report Number, Inspection Date, Subcontractor and Date in the boxes and click. you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Pre-Alignment List. 2.2 RFI Alignment 1. Click RFI Alignment in the RFI menu.   The RFI Alignment page opens.                                                                                            Fig 2.2 RFI Alignment Page 2.2.1 RFI Alignment List Click (ADD button) in the RFI Alignment List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Alignment List request.                                                                          Fig 2.2.1 Alignment List Page 2.2.2 Add RFI Alignment 1.Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Alignment List page.cuteQM_Production role user only can add RFI request. A new page opens to add an RFI Alignment List request.  Click (ADD button) in the RFI Alignment List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Alignment request.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Alignment request. Before saving the added RFI Alignment list, you must add equipment for the RFI Aligment list request. Note: You can add multiple Equipment for one request. Click (Add Selected System) of the respective system you want to add. The added system will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added system, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Alignment request. Click Save. The RFI Alignment list request is successfully added. 2.2.3.Edit a Alignment RFI If you want to edit any existing Alignment RFI request in the list page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respectiveAlignment Request. See Fig 2.2.3 The Alignment  Request page opens with the details of the selected equipment list.                                                              Fig 2.2.3 Edit a Alignment RFI Request Page Add/remove any equipments Click Save.Alignment RFI request updated successfully. 2.2.4 Submit RFI Alignment request Once you have added the RFI pre-alignment request, the Submission column in the RFI alignment re page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.2.5                                                        Fig 2.1.4 Submit RFI Alignment Request If you want to submit the RFI alignment request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Alignment request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Alignment request List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.2.6 Approve RFI Alignment request cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the  RFI pre- alignment request , click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI pre- alignment request approved  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.2.6 Approve RFI Pre-alignment request. Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments given as result,then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against equipment, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload document. 2.2.7 Attach a images into a RFI alignment request If you want to attach an  image with any existing RFI alignment listed in the RFI alignment request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attach images column. New popup window will open. once you click Add icon   You can Attach images  2.2.8 Print RFI Alignment request If you want to Print an RFI alignment report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI alignment page. Signature of the production user and QC user will be shown in the report.                                                                        Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 2.1.7 View a RFI Alignment request. 2.2.9 Attach a File into a RFI Alignment request If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI fit up visual list listed in the RFI pre alignment request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. New window will open . you can upload document's 2.2.10 Export a RFI Alignment You can export a list of RFI Alignment added in the RFI Alignment List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                             Fig 2.2.3 Export a RFI Pre-Alignment List Page 2.2.11 Filter a RFI Alignment List If you want to filter any specific RFI Alignment in the RFI Alignment List page,                                                                     Fig 2.2.11 Filter a RFI Alignment List Page you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Alignment To filter the any specific RFI Alignment and request, select the Report Number, Inspection Date, Subcontractor and Date in the boxes and click. you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Alignment List. 2.3 Machining 1. Click RFI Machining in the RFI menu.   The RFI Machining page opens.                                                                 Fig 2.3 RFI Machining List Page 2.3.1 RFI Machining List Click (ADD button) in the RFI Machining List page.(cuteQM_Production role user only can add RFI request) A new page opens to add an RFI Machining List request.                                                                         Fig 2.3.1 RFI Machining List Page 2.3.2 Add a RFI Machining 1.Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Machining List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Machining List request.  Click (ADD button) in the RFI Machining List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Machining List request.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Alignment request. Before saving the added RFI machining list, you must add equipment for the RFI machining request list request. Note: You can add multiple Equipment for one request. Click (Add Selected System) of the respective system you want to add. The added system will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added system, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Machining request. Click Save. The RFI Machining list request is successfully added. 2.3.3.Edit a Machining RFI If you want to edit any existing Machining RFI request in the list page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective Machining RFI Request. See Fig 2.3.3 The Machining RFI Request page opens with the details of the selected equipment list.                                                              Fig 2.3.3 Edit a Machining RFI Request Page Add/remove any equipments Click Save.Machining RFI request updated successfully. 2.3.4 Submit RFI Machining request. Once you have added the RFI machining request, the Submission column in the RFI Machining request page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.3.5                                                        Fig 2.3.4 Submit RFI Machining Request If you want to submit the RFI alignment request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Alignment request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Alignment request List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.3.5 Approve RFI Machining request cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the  RFI Machining request , click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI Machining request approved  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.3.5 Approve RFI Machining request. Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments given as result,then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against equipment, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload document. 2.3.6 Attach a images into a RFI machining request. If you want to attach an  image with any existing RFI machining listed in the RFI machining request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attach images column. New popup window will open. once you click Add icon   You can Attach images  2.3.7 Print RFI Machining request If you want to view an RFI machining report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Machining page. Signature of the production user and QC user will be shown in the report.                                                                        Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 2.3.7 View a RFI machining request. 2.3.8 Attach a File into a RFI Machining request If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI listed in the RFI machining request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. New window will open. you can upload document's. 2.3.9 Export a RFI Machining List You can export a list of RFI Machining added in the RFI Machining List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                              Fig 2.3.9 Export a RFI Machining List Page 2.3.10 Filter a RFI Machining List If you want to filter any specific RFI Machining in the RFI Machining List page,                                                                     Fig 2.3.10 Filter a RFI Machining List Page you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Machining List to filter the any specific RFI Alignment and request, select the Report Number, Inspection Date, Subcontractor and Date in the boxes and click. you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Machining List. 2.4 RFI Torque Tightening 1. Click RFI Torque Tightening in the RFI menu.   The RFI Torque Tightening page opens.                                                                Fig 2.4 RFI Torque Tightening request Page 2.4.1 RFI Torque Tightening Request Click (ADD button) in the RFI Torque Tightening request page. A new page opens to add an RFI Torque Tightening request.                                                                         Fig 2.4.1 RFI Torque tightening request Page 2.4.2 Add a Torque Tightening Request 1.Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Torque Tightening request page. A new page opens to add an RFI Torque Tightening request.  Click (ADD button) in the RFI Torque Tightening request page. A new page opens to add an RFI Torque Tightening request.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Alignment request. Before saving the added RFI Torque Tightening request , you must add equipment for the Torque Tightening request list request. Note: You can add multiple Equipment for one request. Click (Add Selected System) of the respective system you want to add. The added system will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added system, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Torque Tightening request. Click Save. The RFI Torque Tightening request is successfully added. 2.4.3.Edit a Torque Tightening RFI If you want to edit any existing Torque Tightening RFI request in the list page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective Torque Tightening RFI Request. See Fig 2.4.3 The Torque Tightening RFI Request page opens with the details of the selected equipment list.                                                              Fig 2.4.3 Edit a Torque Tightening RFI Request Page Add/remove any equipments Click Save.Torque Tightening RFI request updated successfully. 2.4.4 Submit RFI Torque Tightening request. Once you have added the RFI machining request, the Submit column in the RFI Torque tightening request page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons).                                                        Fig 2.4.4 Submit RFI torque tightening Request If you want to submit the RFI torque tightening request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Alignment request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Torque Tightening request List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The approved request will be moved to for inspection. 2.4.5 Approve RFI Torque Tightening request cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the  RFI Torque Tightening request , click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI Torque Tightening request approved  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.3.5 Approve RFI Torque Tightening request. Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments given as result,then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against equipment, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload document. 2.4.6 Attach a images into a RFI Torque tightening request. If you want to attach an  image with any existing RFI Torque tightening listed in the RFI torque tightening request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attach images column. New popup window will open. once you click Add icon   You can Attach images  2.4.7 Print RFI Torque tightening request If you want to view an RFI torque tightening report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Torque tightening page. Signature of the production user and QC user will be shown in the report.                                                                        Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 2.4.7 View a RFI Torque tightening request. 2.4.8 Attach a File into a RFI  torque tightening request. If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI listed in the RFI torque tightening request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. New window will open. you can upload document's. 2.4.9 Export a RFI Torque Tightening Request You can export a list of RFI Machining added in the RFI Torque Tightening request page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                             Fig 2.4.3 Export a RFI Torque tightening request Page 2.4.10 Filter a RFI Torque tightening List If you want to filter any specific RFI Machining in the RFI Machining List page,                                                                     Fig 2.4.10 Filter RFI Torque tightening request Page you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Torque Tightening Request to filter the any specific RFI Alignment and request, select the Report Number, Inspection Date, Subcontractor and Date in the boxes and click. you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Torque tightening request. 2.5 Visual Click RFI Visual  in the RFI menu.   The RFI Visual page opens.                                                                Fig 2.5 RFI Visual request Page 2.5.1 RFI Visual Click (ADD button) in the RFI Visual request page. A new page opens to add an RFI visual request.                                                                         Fig 2.5.1 RFI Visual Page 2.5.2 Add a Visual 1.Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Visual page. A new page opens to add an RFI Visual request.  Click (ADD button) in the RFI Visual page. A new page opens to add an RFI Visual.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI visual request. Before saving the added RFI visual request , you must add equipment for the RFI Visual list request. Note: You can add multiple Equipment for one request. Click (Add Selected System) of the respective system you want to add. The added equipment will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added system, click (Remove icon) of the respective joint. In the Description box, enter the description for the add RFI Visual. Click Save. The RFI Visual is successfully added. 2.5.3.Edit a Visual RFI If you want to edit any existing Visual RFI request in the list page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective Visual RFI Request. See Fig 2.4.3 The Visual RFI Request page opens with the details of the selected equipment list.                                                              Fig 2.4.3 Edit a Visual RFI Request Page Add/remove any equipments Click Save.Visual RFI request updated successfully. 2.5.3 Submit RFI Visual request. Once you have added the RFI Visual request, the Submit column in the RFI Visual request page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons).                                                        Fig 2.5.3 Submit RFI Visual Request If you want to submit the RFI Visual request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Visual request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Visual request List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The submitted request will be moved to  inspection. 2.5.4 Approve RFI Visual request cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the  RFI Torque Tightening request , click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI Visual request approved  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.5.4 Approve RFI Visual request. Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If Accepted with comments given as result,then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against equipment, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload document. 2.5.5 Attach a images into a RFI Visual request. If you want to attach an  image with any existing RFI Visual listed in the RFI Visual request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attach images column. New popup window will open. once you click Add icon   You can Attach images  2.5.6 Print a RFI Visual request If you want to view an RFI Visual report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Visual page. Signature of the production user and QC user will be shown in the report.                                                                        Requestor signature mapped with Production user and Inspector signature mapped with QC . Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                     Fig 2.5.7 Print a RFI Visual request. 2.5.7 Attach a File into a RFI Visual request. If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI listed in the RFI Visual request page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. New window will open. you can upload document's. 2.5.8 Export a RFI Visual You can export a list of RFI visual added in the RFI Visual page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                             Fig 2.5.8 Export a RFI Visual Page 2.5.9 Filter a RFI Visual If you want to filter any specific RFI Machining in the RFI Visual List page,                                                                     Fig 2.5.9 Filter RFI Visual Page you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Visual to filter the any specific RFI visual and request, select the Report Number, Inspection Date, Subcontractor and Date in the boxes and click. you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Visual HVAC This section covers the inspections and data management related to HVAC module. HVAC PROJECT DATA 1. Item Master The HVAC Switchboard menu in the cuteQM app helps you to add the Item master. Once you click the project data menu, the following tabs open Item Master 1.Click Project Data in the menu,The Item Master page opens.                                                                  Fig 1. Item Master in HVAC Switch Board Page 1.0 Item Master The Project Data menu in the cute QM app helps you to add the Insert Items data. Once you click the HVAC menu, the following tabs open Item Master. 1.Click Project Data in the HVAC menu,The Item Master opens.                                                                               Fig 1.0 Item Master Page 1.1.1 Add an Item Master You can add the details of Item master to be used in the HVAC project by using the Items Master tab in the Project data menu. If you want to navigate to Item master,1.Click Item Master in the Project data menu,The Item Master page opens.                                                                                Fig 1.1.1 Add an Item Master page. If you want to add an Item, do the following steps,1. Click   (ADD button) in the Item Master page. See Fig 1.1.1 A new window opens to add a new Item Master. Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Item box, enter item number. Click Save. The Item Master is successfully added and listed in the HVAC page. 1.1.2 Edit an Item If you want to edit any existing Item master in the Item master page,                                                                            Fig 1.1.2 Edit an Item Master Click (Edit icon) of the respective Item. Fig See 1.1.2 The Item page shows the details of the selected Item. 1. Edit the details where you want.Click Save. Item updated successfully. 1.1.3 Delete an Item Master If you want to delete any existing block in the Item page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Item page. By click confirm delete Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding area. You receive a notification message “Confirm Delete?”.Click OK.                                                                                                                                                        The Item is deleted successfully. 1.1.4 Export an Item Master You can export a list of Item added in the Item Master page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). Fig See 1.1.4 page.                                                               Fig 1.1.4 Export in Items 1.1.5 Filter an Item Master If you want to filter any specific Item in the Item Master page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Item page. 1.1.6 Import Multiple Systems If you want to import multiple Items together, do the following, Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 1.1.6 An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of Items. Enter the required Item details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 1.1.6 A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. Click  (Upload button) to export the systems that are included in the excel worksheet. The details of the Item in the worksheet will be displayed in the Item page. 2.0 RFI The RFI menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used add a RFI, once you click RFI, the following Tabs will open RFI Fit up inspection, Visual Inspection, view other inspection opens.                                                                          Fig 2.0 RFI page 2.1.0 RFI Fit up Inspection. Click (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Inspection page.(cuteQM_Production role user only can add RFI request) A new page opens to add an RFI Fit up List request.                                                  Fig 2.1.0 RFI Fit up Inspection Page 2.1.1 Add a RFI Fit up Inspection. 1.Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Inspection List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Fit up Inspection List request.  Click (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Inspection List page. A new page opens to add an RFI Fit up Inspection List request.  In the Inspection Date and Time box, select the inspection date and time. In the Subcontractor box, select a subcontractor from a drop-down list. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Fit up request. Before saving the added RFI Fit up list, you must add items for the RFI Fit up request list request. Note: You can add multiple items for one request. Click (Add Selected item) of the respective Item you want to add. The added item will be moved and listed in the right side of the page. Tip: If you want to remove any added item, click (Remove icon) of the respective item. In the Description box, enter the description for the added RFI Fit up request. Click Save. The RFI Fit up list request is successfully added. 2.1.2 Edit a RFI Fit up If you want to edit any existing RFI Fit up request in the RFI Fit up page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI Fit up. See Fig 2.1.2 The RFI Fit up page opens with the details of the selected RFI Fit up list.                                                              Fig 2.1.2 Edit a RFI Fit up Page Add/edit any item.Click Save.Fitup inspection updated successfully. 2.1.3 Submit a RFI Fit up. Once you have added the RFI Fit up request, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.1.5                                                     Fig 2.1.3 Submit & Approve a RFI Fit up Page If you want to submit the RFI Fit up list, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Fit up list request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFI Fit up List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.1.4 Approve RFI Fit up cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Fit up request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI Fit up list  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.1.4 Approve RFI Fit up Result Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If RFI Accepts with comments given as result then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against item part, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.1.5 Print RFI Fit up If you want to print an RFI Fit up, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fit up List. In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                             Fig 2.1.5 Print a RFI fit up Inspection Page. 2.1.6 Attach a File into a RFI Fit up If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI Fit up listed in the RFI Fit up page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. A new window opens for file upload.In the category box, select the category from drop-down list.Select Browse and upload the documents.  2.1.7 Export a RFI Fit up You can export a list of RFI added in the RFI Fit up page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                             Fig 2.1.7 Export a RFI Fit up Page. 2.1.8 Filter a RFI Fit up If you want to filter any specific RFI in the RFI Fit up page ,                                                                   Fig 2.1.8 Filter a RFI Fit up Page you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Fit up to filter the any specific RFI Fit up and request, select the Report Number, Inspection Date, Subcontractor and Date in the boxes and click. you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Fit up. 2.2.0 RFI Visual Inspection Click RFI Visual Inspection in the RFI menu.The RFI Visual Inspection page opens.                                                                              Fig 2.2.0 RFI Visual Inspection Page 2.2.1 Add a RFI Visual Inspection If you want to add an RFI Visual Inspection request, do the following,                                                                                Fig 2.2.1 Add a RFI Visual Inspection Page Click (ADD button) in the RFI Visual page. A new page opens to add an RFI Visual request. In the Subcontractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection. Click the check box of the respective frames.  Click (Add Selected Equipment button). In the WPS Number box, select from the drop- down list. Click Welder details to add Welder details. A new page opens to add Welder-Weld Layer Weld Process In the Welder Layers box select the welder layers.In the Weld Consumable box, select the weld consumable from the given drop-down list. In the WPS Number box, select the WPS Number from the given drop-down list. Click Save. 2.2.2 Edit a RFI Visual If you want to edit any existing RFI Fit up request in the RFI visual page, do the following, Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI visual. See Fig 2.2.2 The RFI visual page opens with the details of the selected RFI visual list.                                                              Fig 2.2.2 Edit a RFI Fit up Page Add/edit any item.Click Save.visual inspection updated successfully. 2.2.3 Submit a RFI Visual. Once you have added the RFI visual request, the Submission column in the RFI Visual page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.2.3                                                   Fig 2.2.3 Submit & Approve a RFI visual Page If you want to submit the RFI Visual list, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. Once you have submitted the RFI Visual list request, in the Confirm Status column in the RFIVisual List page is appeared with(Confirm and Reject icons). The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.2.4 Approve RFI Visual cuteQM_Licensee_QA user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the RFI Visual request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI Visual list  icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                     Fig 2.2.4 Approve RFI Visual Result Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If  Accepts with comments given as result then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against item part, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.2.5 Print RFI Visual If you want to print an RFI Visual, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Visual List. In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                             Fig 2.2.5 Print a RFI Visual Inspection Page. 2.2.6 Attach a File into a RFI Visual If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI Visual listed in the RFI Fit up page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. A new window opens for file upload.In the category box, select the category from drop-down list.Select Browse and upload the documents.                                                                  Fig 2.2.6 Add a RFI Visual Page 2.2.7 Export a RFI Visual You can export a list of RFI Visual list visual list requests added in the RFI Fit Visual page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                          Fig 2.2.7 Export a RFI Visual Page. 2.2.8 Filter a RFI Visual If you want to filter any RFI Visual request from the list of RFI requests in the RFI Visual page, you can use (FILTER button).                                                                   Fig 2.2.8 Filter a RFI Visual Page 2.3.0 View Other Inspection Click View Other Inspection in the RFI menu.The View Other Inspection page opens.                                                                   Fig 2.3.0 View Other Inspection Page 2.3.1 Add a Other Inspection If you want to add  other inspection, do the following steps,1. Click   (ADD button) in the view other inspection page. See Fig 2.3.0 A new window opens to add a new Other Inspection.                                                                   Fig 2.3.1 Add a Other Inspection Page. 2.Select the items to be added for RFI request. 3.Click RFQ inspection button as shown below Once you click RFQ Inspection a new window opens.Click Save. 2.3.2 Submit a View Other Inspection Once you have added the view other inspection, the result column in the view other inspection page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.2.3                                                      Fig 2.3.3 Submit a  Other Inspection request If you want to submit the view other inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submit column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The submitted request will be moved to for inspection. 2.3.3 Approve View other Inspection. cuteQM_Lisencee QA role user only can approve the RFI request. If you want to approve the view other inspection request, click (confirm icon) in the Confirm Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.2. Once RFI request approved icon will be enabled to put result. 3.  Click icon  result popup will open.                                                   Fig 2.3.3 Approve View Other Inspection Page Click Save RFI result is updated successfully. If accept with comments given then punch list will be created, and this will be shown in view punch list screen. If need to upload documents against system No, then click attachment icon at the result popup and upload documents. 2.3.4 Print a View other Inspection. If you want to Print and view other inspection, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the View Other inspection page. In the print, user can see the signature of both the production user and QC .                                                                                Requestor signature mapped with Production and Inspector signature mapped with QC Click here to find the steps to upload Digital signature                                                                          See Fig 2.3.5 Print a View Other Inspection page. 2.3.5 Attach a File into View other Inspection If you want to attach a file with any existing View other inspection in the view other inspection page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. A new window opens for file upload.In the category box, select the category from drop-down list.Select Browse and upload the documents.                                                                          Fig 2.3.5 Attach a View other Inspection Page 2.3.6 Export an Other Inspection You can export a list of view other inspection requests added in the View Other Inspection page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                           Fig 2.3.6 Export a View Other Inspection Page 2.3.7 Filter a Other Inspection If you want to filter any view other inspection request from the list of RFI requests in the View other inspection page, you can use  (FILTER button).                                                                           Fig 2.3.7 Filter a View other Inspection Page. 2.4.0 Reports Click HVAC in the report's menu.The report opens.                                                           Fig 2.4.0 Reports in HVAC 2.4.1 Item Master Summary Click Reports in the report's menu.Here we can see the summary of all the items.The Item master Summary opens.                                                                    Fig 2.4.1 Item Master Summary Page 2.4.2 To View Item History Click(add button) an Item History to view Fit up Summary/ Visual summary/Other Inspection summary. Click icon result popup will open . 2.4.3 Export an Item Summary Report You can export a list of item summary report added in the Item Summary report in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button).                                                                Fig 2.4.3 Export an Item Summary Report 2.4.5 Filter an Item Summary Report If you want to filter any specific Item Summary report in the Item Summary report page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Item Summary Item                                                               Fig 2.4.5 Filter an Item Summary Report Page.                                           Document Progress Document Progress Document Progress 1.0 Document Progress The document progress menu in the cuteQM app helps you to add collection of drawings or the documents which can be approved in multiple levels. Once you click the Document Progress menu, the following tabs open, 1.1 Drawing Type Drawing type can be added through ADD or import of Drawing Type command. 1. Click Drawing Type in the Document Progress menu.   The Drawing Type page opens.                                                                               Figure 1.1: Drawing Type page 1.1.1 Add a Drawing Type If you want to Add Drawing type, do the following steps Click (ADD button) in the Drawing type page. See Fig 1.1.1                                                                                            A new window opens to add a new Drawing type.                                                                         Figure 1.1.1 Drawing Type pageNote: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Category box, you must select the drawing category. In the Drawing Type box, enter the drawing type. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                                  The Drawing type is successfully added. 1.1.2 Edit a Drawing Type If you want to edit any existing Drawing type in the Drawing Type page, do the following, steps Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective drawing type. See Fig 1.1.2                                                                        A new window opens to edit the saved one.                                                                         Figure 1.1:2 Edit Page Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then update the details in the respective box. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Drawing type updated successfully. 1.1.3 Delete a Drawing Type If you want to delete any specific drawing from the list of drawing, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the  Drawing Type page. See Fig below Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Drawing type. You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Drawing type deleted successfully. 1.1.4 Export Drawing Type You can export a list of Drawing type  added in the Drawing type page in both the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the Drawing type list in the pdf format, click (PDF button). The Drawing type list will be downloaded as a pdf file. If you want to export the Drawing type list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The Drawing type will be downloaded as an excel file. 1.1.5 Filter a Drawing Type If you want to filter any category and drawing Type from the list of Drawing Type in the page, do the following, 1. Click (FILTER button) located on the Drawing Type. See Fig below  Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Category, and Drawing Type columns. 2. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter any Category or Drawing type. 1.1.6 Import Multiple Drawing Types If you want to import multiple Drawing Types together, do the following steps, Click  (TEMPLATE button). An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of Drawing types. Enter the required Drawing type and category details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the  details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. Click (IMPORT button). A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. Click  (Upload button) to export the drawing type that are included in the excel worksheet.      Imported successfully. The details of the Drawing Type in the worksheet will be displayed in the Drawing Type page. 1.2 Basic Drawings DPM_Basic role users can add Basic drawings and can create revisions. 1.2.1 Add a Basic Drawing If you want to add a Basic Drawing, do the following steps, Click (ADD button) in the Add Basic Drawings. See Fig 1.2.1                                                                     Figure 1.2. 1 Add Basic drawing page Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. DPM_Basic role user only can add Basic drawings In the Basic Drawings box, enter the Drawing Type number. In the Revision box, enter the revision number. In the Drawing Number box, enter the drawing number of the basic drawing. In the Planned AFC/Delivery Date box, select the delivery date from drop-down list. In the Description box, enter your description if any. Click Save. 1.2.2.Edit a Basic Drawing If you want to edit any existing Basic drawing in the Basic drawing list page, do the following steps Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective drawing. See Fig 1.2.2                                                                                 A new window opens to edit the saved one.                                                                         Figure 1.2:2 Edit Page Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then update the details in the respective box. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Basic drawing updated successfully. 1.2.3.Delete a Basic Drawing If you want to delete any specific Basic drawing from the list of drawings, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the  Basic Drawing page. See Fig below Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Basic Drawing . You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Basic Drawing  deleted successfully. 1.2.4.Export Basic Drawing You can export a list of Basic Drawings  added in the Basic drawing page in both the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the Basic Drawings list in the pdf format, click (PDF button). The Basic Drawings list will be downloaded as a pdf file. If you want to export the Basic Drawings list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The Basic Drawings will be downloaded as an excel file. 1.2.5 Filter a Basic Drawing If you want to filter any Basic Drawings from the list of Basic Drawing , do the following steps,Click (FILTER button) located on the Basic Drawing page. See Fig belowOnce you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Drawing Type, Drawing Number,Description and Revision columns. 1.2.6 Import multiple Basic Drawings If you want to Import multiple Basic drawings together, do the following steps, Click (IMPORT button) in the Basic drawing screen. Refer above fig It will redirected to import page Click  (TEMPLATE button) . An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of  Basic Drawing details. Enter the required Drawing type and category details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the  details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. After  saved the excel, browse  and upload the excel, Click populate values ,process and Import buttons. Refer below fig Imported successfully, imported data will be shown in Basic drawings list screen 1.3.Basic Drawings Workflow Approval Multiple workflow levels are there to approve Basic drawings. DPM_Basic role users only  can initiate the workflow by creating basic drawings. See Fig 1.2.6                                                                           Fig 1.2.6 Workflow approvals of Basic drawings 1.3.1.Basic Approval DPM_Basic role users can do Basic approval Login as DPM_Basic role user and click Manage button placed against the basic drawing. It will redirected to details screen of the basic drawing. Refer below fig Upload the Basic drawing which is going to approve. Refer below Fig. User can add comments and additional documents in this details screen. Refer below fig. User can submit the added basic drawing by click the submit button placed at the top right.After Refer below fig. After submission, status of the basic drawing will be changed to Waiting for Owner Approval/Classification Approval.Then we can do Parallel approval for Owner/client approval or Classification approval . Email notification will be sent to Owner and classification users 1.3.2.Owner/Client Approval DPM_Owner role users can do Owner/Client approval. Login as DPM_Owner  user and click  manage button to view the drawing details  Now user can see Owner/client approve and Return buttons at the top. Refer below fig If Return clicked it will redirected to popup window to enter return comments, priority and attachments.Refer below fig. After entering mandatory fields click save button. Refer above fig. Then New revision will be created for that drawing. Status will be changed to New and email notification will be sent to Creator user to submit the drawing. If Owner/Client approve clicked, then status will be changed to Waiting for Classification Approval.            Email notification will be sent to DPM_Classification role users to approve the drawing 1.3.3.Classification Approval DPM_Classification role users can do classification approval. Login as DPM_Classification role user and click  manage button to view the drawing details . Now user can see Classification approve and Return buttons at the top.Refer below fig. If Return clicked it will redirected to popup window to enter return comments, priority and attachments. Refer below fig. After entering mandatory fields click save button. Refer above fig. Then New revision will be created for that drawing. Status will be changed to New and email notification will be sent to Creator user to submit the drawing. If Classification approve clicked , then status will be changed to Waiting for Production Approval. Email notification will be sent to DPM_Production role users to approve the drawing. 1.3.4.Production Approval DPM_Production role user can do Production approval. Login as DPM_Production  role user and click  manage button to view the drawing details.  Now user can see Production approve and Return buttons at the top. Refer below fig. If Return clicked it will redirected to popup window to enter return comments, priority and attachments. Refer below fig. After entering mandatory fields click save button. Refer above fig. Then New revision will be created for that drawing. Status will be changed to New and email notification will be sent to Creator user to submit the drawing. If Production Approveclicked , then status will be changed to Waiting for AFC .    Email notification will be sent to DPM_AFC role users to approve the drawing. 1.3.5.AFC Approval DPM_AFC user can approve drawing at any stage of the workflow . Login as DPM_AFC  role user and click  manage button to view the drawing details. Now user can see AFC  and Return buttons at the top. Refer below fig If Return clicked it will redirected to popup window to enter return comments, priority and attachments. Refer below fig. After entering mandatory fields click save button. Refer above fig. Then New revision will be created for that drawing. Status will be changed to New and email notification will be sent to Creator user to submit the drawing. If AFC clicked , then status will be changed to Approved .    Email notification will be sent to creator user. 1.3.6.Revision DPM_Basic role user only can Revise the Basic drawing. Once Basic drawing approved, Revision button button will be enabled for DPM_Basic role users. Login as DPM_Basic  role user and click  manage button to view the drawing details. Click Revision  button at the top. Refer below fig.                                                  A confirmation msg will be prompted.Click Ok .Refer below fig New Revision of the drawing will be created. Status changed to New.    Repeat the steps 1.3 to approve the revised drawing. 1.4 Production Drawings DPM_Receiver role users can add Basic drawings and can create revisions. 1.4.1 Add a Production Drawing If you want to add a Production Drawing, do the following steps. Click (ADD button) in the Add Production Drawings. See Fig 1.4.1                                                                    Figure 1.4. 1 Add Production drawing page Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. DPM_Receiver role user only can add Basic drawings In the Production Drawings box, enter the Drawing Type number. In the Revision box, enter the revision number. In the Drawing Number box, enter the drawing number of the basic drawing. In the Planned AFC/Delivery Date box, select the delivery date from drop-down list. In the Description box, enter your description if any. Click Save. 1.4.2.Edit a Production Drawing If you want to edit any existing Basic drawing in the Production drawing list page, do the following steps Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective drawing. See Fig 1.4.2                                                                                 A new window opens to edit the saved one.                                                                         Figure 1.4:2 Edit Page Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then update the details in the respective box. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Production drawing updated successfully. 1.4.3.Delete a Production Drawing If you want to delete any specific Production drawing from the list of drawings, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the  Production Drawing page. See Fig below Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Basic Drawing . You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Production Drawing  deleted successfully. 1.4.4.Export Production Drawing You can export a list of Production Drawings  added in the Production drawing page in both the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the Production Drawings list in the pdf format, click (PDF button). The Production Drawings list will be downloaded as a pdf file. If you want to export the Production Drawings list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The Production Drawings will be downloaded as an excel file. 1.4.5 Filter a Production Drawing If you want to filter any Basic Drawings from the list of Production Drawing , do the following steps,Click (FILTER button) located on the Production Drawing page. See Fig belowOnce you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Drawing Type, Drawing Number,Description and Revision columns. 1.4.6 Import multiple Production Drawings If you want to Import multiple Production drawings together, do the following steps, Click (IMPORT button) in the Production drawing screen. Refer above fig. It will redirected to import page. Click  (TEMPLATE button) . An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of  Production Drawing details. Enter the required Drawing type and category details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the  details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. After  saved the excel, click browse  and upload the excel. Click populate values ,process and Import buttons. Refer below fig. Imported successfully, imported data will be shown in Production drawings list screen.                                                             1.5.Production Drawings Workflow Approval Multiple workflow levels are there to approve Production drawings. DPM_Receiver role users only  can initiate the workflow by creating Production drawings. See Fig 1.5.                                                    Fig 1.5.Workflow approvals of Basic drawings 1.5.1.Actual/Receiving Approval DPM_Receiver role users can do Basic approval Login as DPM_Receiver role user and click Manage button placed against the Production drawing. It will redirected to details screen of the Production drawing. Refer below fig Upload the Production drawing which is going to approve. Refer below Fig. User can add comments and additional documents in this details screen. Refer below fig. User can submit the added Production drawing by click the submit button placed at the top right.After Refer below fig. After submission, status of the Production drawing will be changed to Waiting for Owner Approval/Classification Approval.Then we can do Parallel approval for Owner/client approval or Classification approval . Email notification will be sent to Owner and classification users 1.5.2.Owner/Client Approval DPM_Owner role users can do Owner/Client approval. Login as DPM_Owner  user and click  manage button to view the drawing details  Now user can see Owner/client approve and Return buttons at the top. Refer below fig If Return clicked it will redirected to popup window to enter return comments, priority and attachments.Refer below fig. After entering mandatory fields click save button. Refer above fig. Then New revision will be created for that drawing. Status will be changed to New and email notification will be sent to Creator  users to submit the drawing. If Owner/Client approve clicked, then status will be changed to Waiting for Classification Approval.            Email notification will be sent to DPM_Classification role users to approve the drawing 1.5.3.Classification Approval DPM_Classification role users can do classification approval. Login as DPM_Classification role user and click  manage button to view the drawing details . Now user can see Classification approve and Return buttons at the top.Refer below fig. If Return clicked it will redirected to popup window to enter return comments, priority and attachments. Refer below fig. After entering mandatory fields click save button. Refer above fig. Then New revision will be created for that drawing. Status will be changed to New and email notification will be sent to creator users to submit the drawing. If Classification approve clicked , then status will be changed to Waiting for AFC. Email notification will be sent to DPM_AFC role users to approve the drawing. 1.5.4.AFC Approval DPM_AFC user can approve drawing at any stage of the workflow . Login as DPM_AFC  role user and click  manage button to view the drawing details. Now user can see AFC  and Return buttons at the top. Refer below fig If Return clicked it will redirected to popup window to enter return comments, priority and attachments. Refer below fig. After entering mandatory fields click save button. Refer above fig. Then New revision will be created for that drawing. Status will be changed to New and email notification will be sent to creator user to submit the drawing. If AFC clicked , then status will be changed to Approved .    Email notification will be sent to creator user. 1.5.5.Revision DPM_Receiver role user only can Revise the Productionc drawing. Once Production drawing approved, Revision button button will be enabled for DPM_Receiver role users. Login as DPM_Basic  role user and click  manage button to view the drawing details. Click Revision  button at the top. Refer below fig.                                                  A confirmation msg will be prompted.Click Ok .Refer below fig New Revision of the drawing will be created. Status changed to New.    Repeat the steps 1.5 to approve the revised drawing. 1.6 Drawing Status Report Drawing status report shown the comments to be closed for both Basic and Production drawings. Refer below fig 1.6.1.Export PDF & Excel If you want to export the Drawing status report list in the pdf format, click   (PDF button).Drawing status report list will be downloaded as pdf format. If you want to export the Drawing status report in the excel format, click  (Excel button). Drawing status report list will be downloaded in excel format. 1.6.2 Filter If you want to filter any  Drawings status from the list of Drawings , do the following,Click (FILTER button) located on the Drawing status report page. See below figOnce you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Drawing Type, Drawing Number, and Revision ,Description ,priority & comments columns. 1.6.3 Close Comments    1.If you want to close the comments for any of the drawings, click close button .Refer below fig    2.Once Close button clicked, confirmation msg will be prompted and click ok. Refer below fig    3.Comment closed successfully. It will updated against drawing in Basic drawing and Production drawing screens 1.7 Equipment List         Equipment list screen shown the added equipments. 1.7.1 Add a Equipment If you want to add a Equipment, do the following,Click (ADD button) in the Equipment list  page. See Fig below      The new window open to Add Equipment                                                                     Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Equipment list box, you must enter equipment  name In the ABBR box, enter the ABBR of the equipment In the Remarks text box, enter remarks Click Save. The Equipment list successfully added. 1.7.2.Edit a Equipment If you want to edit any existing Equipments in the Equipment list page, do the following steps Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective Equipment. See Fig 1.7.2                                                                                A new window opens to edit the saved one.                                                                         Figure 1.7.2 Edit Page Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then update the details in the respective box. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Equipment updated successfully. 1.7.3.Delete a Equipment If you want to delete any specific Equipment from the list of equipments , you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the  Equipment list page. See Fig below Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Equipment. . You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Equipment  deleted successfully. 1.7.4 Export Equipment list If you want to export the Equipment list in the pdf format, click   (PDF button).Equipment list will be downloaded as pdf format. If you want to export the Equipment list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). Equipment list will be downloaded in excel format. 1.7.5 Filter a Equipment If you want to filter any Equipment from the list of equipments , do the following,Click (FILTER button) located on the Equipment list  page. See below figOnce you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Equipment, ABBR & Remarks columns. 1.7.6 Set Reorder Columns To Rearrange the order of the columns this button is used Drag and change the order of the column name.Then click Set Reorder Columns  button.Then the new column order will be saved. 1.6 Procurement Status Here we can create procurements and can create punchlists against the procurement status 1.6.1 Add a Procurement If you want to add a Procurement status, do the following,Click (ADD button) in the Procurement status  page. See Fig belowThe new window open to Add Procurement status                                                                     Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. Fill all the fields Click Save. The Procurement status successfully added. 1.6.2.Edit a Procurement If you want to edit any existing Procurement in the Procurement status list page, do the following steps Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective Procurement. See Fig 1.6.2                                                                                 A new window opens to edit the saved one.                                                                         Figure 1.6:2 Edit Page Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then update the details in the respective box. Click Save.                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Procurement updated successfully. 1.6.3.Delete a Procurement If you want to delete any specific Procurement  from the list of drawings, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the  Procurement status page. See Fig below. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding Procurement . You receive a confirmation message “Confirm delete?”. Click OK .                                                                                                                                                                     Selected Procurement  deleted successfully. 1.6.4 Export Procurement If you want to export the Procurement status in the pdf format, click   (PDF button).Procurement status list will be downloaded as pdf format. If you want to export the Procurement status in the excel format, click  (Excel button). Procurement status list will be downloaded in excel format. 1.6.5 Filter a Procurement If you want to filter any Procurement status from the list of Procurement status , do the following,Click (FILTER button) located on the Procurement status list  page. See below figOnce you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for all the columns. 1.6.6 Import multiple Procurements If you want to Import multiple Procurement status together, do the following steps, Click (IMPORT button) in the Basic drawing screen. Refer above fig. It will redirected to import page. Click  (TEMPLATE button) . An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of  Procurement details. Enter the required  details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. Once you have added the  details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. After  saved the excel, browse  and upload the excel. Click populate values, process and Import buttons. Refer below fig After Imported successfully, imported data will be shown in Procurement status list screen 1.6.7 Create Punch Punchlist can be created by clicking create punch button in Procurement status list screen. Refer below fig. Click Create punch   button .Popup will be shown .Refer below fig. Enter Description and click save. Status of the punch list changed to open. Go to View punch list screen and close the punch list (Refer 2.2) Create punch list  button again enabled in  Procurement list screen once punch closed in view punch list screen . 1.6.8 Punch Details  1.Click punch details button in the Procurement status list screen. Refer below fig.  2.Punch status history details will be shown 1.6.9 Attachments User can upload multiple documents through attachment screen Click Attachment button in the Procurement status list screen. Refer below fig. It will redirected to new attachment screen. Refer below fig. Here user can select category of the document and browse & upload  the document. Document uploaded successfully. Once document uploaded date & document name will be updated for corresponding category in the Procurement status list screen 1.7 Clone Project Data This page is used to copy the project data from one skid project to another skid project with attachments and workflow details Select From project and To project from dropdown list Select the master screens which are going to clone Select attachments and workflow check boxes if this also need to copy Click clone . Project data cloned successfully. 2.0 Punch Lists A punch list is a list of items or tasks that need to be done before a Document progress project is completed. The Punch Lists menu in the home page of the cuteQM app helps to create and view the punch lists in Document progress project. 2.1 Create a New Punch List If you want to create a punch list, do the following steps, Click Create punch list  from punch list menu. It will redirected to punch list create page. Fill all the fields in the create page. In the Modules box, select a module from the given modules. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list. In the Sub-Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list. In the ITR No box, enter the ITR number. In the Drawing No box, enter the drawing number. In the Test Pack box, select a test pack from a drop-down list. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number. In the Reference Types box, select the reference type from the given options. In the Select Project box, select a project from a drop-down list. In the Category box, select any category from the given categories such as A, B, C & D. In the Type box, select the type of punch such as whether internal or external. In the Item details box, enter the item details. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list. In the Item name/ Issuer code box, enter the description for the punch list. In the Punch Raised From box, select the detail such as from where the punch has been raised. In the Date Raised box, select the date when the punch has been raised. In the Punch Raised By box, enter the name of a person who has raised the punch. In the Responsible party box, select the responsible party for the punch. In the Responsible Dept box, enter the department name, which is responsible for the punch. In the Responsible Person box, enter the name of a person who is responsible for the punch. In the Expected Clearance box, select the expected date of clearing the punch list. Click Save.The punch list is successfully added. 2.2 View Punch Lists The View Punch Lists tab helps you to view  the punch list, which is added by using the Create New Punch List tab. Click View Punch Lists in the Punch Lists menu. The Punch List page opens with added punch lists.                                                       Note: If you want to verify the added punch list item, click the checkbox provided in the Verify column.                If you want to clear the added punch list item, click the checkbox provided in the Clear column. 2.2.1 Export Punch lists You can export  added punch lists in the Punch lists page in both the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the punch lists in the pdf format, click (PDF button). The punch lists will be downloaded as a pdf file. If you want to export the punch lists in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The punch lists will be downloaded as an excel file. 2.2.2 Filter a Punch list If you want to filter any Punch list from the punch lists  page, do the following, 1. Click  (FILTER button) located on the punch lists screen. See Fig below  Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for all the columns. 2. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter any punch lists. 2.2.3 View a Punch List Report If you want to view a punch list report, click(Print button) provided in the Punch List page. See fig below.                    It will redirected to new report page. And here report for the punch list shown. See fig below 2.2.4 Attach a File into a Punch List If you want to attach any file with any punch list listed in the Punch List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. It will redirected to new attachment page to attach files.Note: Before uploading any file, read the instructions given in the File Upload (Punchlist) page. Click category dropdown and enter category Click (Browse button). Select a file which you want to upload from your computer. Click (Upload button) to attach the file. The uploaded file will be displayed in the File Upload table.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   2.2.5.View Punch list summary If you want to view a punch list summary, click (Punch List Summary button) provided in the upper side of the Punch List page. See below fig It will redirected to new report page and displayed the punch list report 2.3 Edit a Punch List If you want to edit a existing  punch list, click Edit punch list in punch lists menu Click (edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective punch list.. Edit the details in the respective box you want. Update the details you want to change. Then click save Punch list updated successfully. 2.3.1 Close a punch list If you want to close the added punch list item, click the checkbox provided in the Close column. Click the close punch button at the top right. Punch list closed successfully. 2.3.2 Filter a Punch list If you want to filter any Punch list from the punch lists  page, do the following, 1. Click  (FILTER button) located on the punch lists screen. See Fig below  Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for all the columns. 2. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter any punch lists. 2.3.3 Export Punch lists You can export  added punch lists in the Punch lists page in both the pdf and excel formats. If you want to export the punch lists in the pdf format, click (PDF button). The punch lists will be downloaded as a pdf file. If you want to export the punch lists in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The punch lists will be downloaded as an excel file. Material Feasibility - Piping Login 1.1 Login To login into the cuteQM application, 1. Open your web browser. 2.Type the URL provided by your administrator, in the address bar of your web browser. The login page appears.         3. In the login page, enter your user name and password in the respective boxes.   Note: If you forgot your password, click “I can’t access my account”. You will be redirected into a new web page. Enter your username to receive your password. 4. In the Module section, select Piping. 5. Click Login. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM application, the home page of the cuteQM application opens.                                                      Figure 4.1 Home page of cuteQM application Note: The user name you have entered, the project you have been assigned, and the module you have selected are displayed in the upper right corner of the home page. 1.2 Change Password If you want to change your current password, 1. Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 4.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options.       2. Click the Change Password The Change Password page opens.      Note: Before changing your password read the conditions specified in the Change Password page. 3. In the Passwordbox, enter your current password. 4. In the NewPassword box, enter your new password. 5. In the ConfirmNew Password box, enter your new password again. 6. Click Change Password. Your password will be successfully changed. 1.3 Log Out If you want to log out from the app, 1. Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 4.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. 2. Click Log out. Your current session ends now. The home page appears.Materials 2.0 Materials The Materials menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add the material details such as material certificates, material inspection details, material import details, and material summary and traceability record. Once you click the Materials menu, the following tabs open,       2.1 Material Receiving and Inspection (Heat Numbers) Material Receiving Inspection validates quality of purchased raw materials based on set acceptance criteria before the materials are used for the piping project. The Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an incoming material inspection report (MIR). Incoming MIR includes material name, material size, material specification, heat numbers, and material type. If you want to add an incoming MIR, do the following, 1. Click the Material Receiving and Inspectiontab in the Materials The Incoming Material Inspection Report page opens.                                     Figure 2.1: Incoming Material Inspection Report page 2.1.1 Add an Incoming MIR If you want to add an incoming MIR, 1. Click   (ADD button) in the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 2.1. A new window opens to add an incoming MIR.       Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.  Tip: A report number and a Request for Inspection (RFI) number for a new MIR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively. 2. In the Delivery Order Number box, enter the material’s delivery order number. 3. If materials are purchased from outside, select the KPW Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. KPW incoming materials will be added to StoreInventory after MIR submission.      a. In the O. Nobox, enter the purchase order number.    b. In the Datedbox, choose the date of the purchase order.    c. In the Received Onbox, select the received date of materials. 4. If the materials are received from a client, select the FREE Issued Materialsoption, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes. Free issued Materials will be added to Store Inventory after MIR submission         a. In the Packing List Nobox, enter the packing list number.       b. In the Datedbox, choose the date of packing.       c. In the Received Onbox, choose the received date of materials. 5. In the Inspection Datebox, choose the date of inspection. 6. In the Vendor Name box, enter the vendor name. 7. In the Request Descriptionbox, enter the request description. 8. In the ITP Numberbox, select an ITP number. 9. In the Delivery Note box, enter the delivery note. 10. In the Location box, enter the location name. 11. In the Sub Contractorbox, select the subcontractor name from a drop-down list. 12 . Click Save. The incoming MIR is successfully added. Once you have added the MIR, you must add the material details for the added MIR. 2.1.2 Add Materials for an MIR If you want to add the details of materials for the added incoming MIR, do the following steps, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit MIR column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 2.1. The Add/Edit - Materials window opens.                                         Figure 2.1.2: Add/Edit – Materials window 2. Click (ADD button) in the Add/Edit - Materials A new window opens to add the material details.   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 3. In the Material Descriptionbox, enter the material description. 4. In the MaterialSize box, select the size of the material. 5. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. 6. In the Material Typebox, enter the type of the material. 7. In the Quantity Requiredbox, enter the required quantity of the material. 8. In the Item Nobox, enter the item number. This will be added as Item code in the store inventory 9. In the Weightbox, enter the weight of the material. 10. In the Componentbox, select a component. 11. Click Update. Once you have added the material details, you must add the heat numbers for the added materials. 2.1.3 Add Heat Numbers 1. Click (Add icon) of the respective material in the Add/Edit - Materials See Fig 2.1.2. The Heat Numbers window opens.     2. Click (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers A new window opens to add a heat number.     3. In the Heat Number/Certificatesbox, select the heat number from a drop-down list. This heat number can be used in Fit up after Material Issuance. 4. In the Plate Number/Coil Number/ Tag Numberbox, enter the plate number or coil number or tag number of the material. 5. In the Delivery Quantity (Total)box, enter the total delivery quantity of the material including UOM. This quantity can be added in store inventory after MIR submission and it cannot change after added in store inventory. 6. In the Delivery Quantity (Partial)box, enter the partial delivery quantity of the material including UOM. 7. In the Dimensions option, select Acceptedor Rejected based on the inspection detail. 8. In the Visual option, select Acceptedor Rejected based on the inspection detail. 9. In the Mill Test Certificates (MTC) option, select Acceptedor Rejected based on the inspection detail. 10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 11. If the heat treatment is required for the material, select YESin the Heat Treatment Otherwise select NO. 12. In the NDE is required for the material, select YESin the NDE Otherwise select NO. 13. Click Update.       Note: If you want to manage the review material TC, click   (Add icon). The Review Material TC window opens to       add the material checklist detail. 1.1.4 Add MIR Details If you want to add the optional details of MIR, 1. Click (Add icon) in the Add See Fig 2.1. The MIR Details window opens.     2. In the ManufacturerName box, enter the manufacturer name. 3. In the Supplierbox, enter the supplier name. 4. In the Unloadedbox, enter the unloaded detail. 5. In the Datebox, select the date of MIR. 6. In the Truck/Trailer Nobox, enter the truck/trailer number. 7. In the Defect Report Nobox, enter the defect report number. 8. In the Storage Areabox, enter the storage area name. 9. In the Defectbox, enter the defect detail. 10. In the Remarksbox, enter your remarks if any. 11. Click Save. 2.2 Store Inventory The Store Inventory tab in the Materials menu used to add an item code including quantity in the store inventory. To add item code in the store inventory, 1. Click Store Inventoryin the Materials The Store Inventory page opens.                                                                Figure 2.2: Store Inventory page 2.2.1 Add a Store Inventory If you want to add a Store Inventory, 1. Select Inventory type KPW/FIM/Offcut. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Store Inventory See Fig 2.2. The page opens a new window to add the details of Store Inventory.    Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. In the Item Code box, enter an item code. In the Descriptionbox, enter the description of an item code. Click Save. An item code including the quantity is successfully added and listed in the Store Inventory page. 2.2.2 Edit a Store Inventory If you want to edit any existing item code quantity in the Store Inventory page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective Store Inventory. See Fig 2.4. The page shows the details of the selected item code. 2. Click stock quantity box, and then edit the quantity. 3. Click Save. 2.2.3 Export Store Inventory List You can export a list of Item codes added in the Store Inventory page in both the pdf and excel formats. 1. If you want to export the store inventory list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button). The Store Inventory list will be downloaded as a pdf file. 2. If you want to export the store inventory list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The Store Inventory list will be downloaded as an excel file. 2.2.4 Filter a Store Inventory If you want to filter any Store Inventory from the list of Item codes in the Store Inventory page, do the following, 1. Click  (FILTER button) located on the Store Inventory See Fig 2.2. Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens in each column of the Store Inventory page. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter a Store Inventory you want. 2.2.5 Import Store Inventory If you want to import multiple Item codes in store inventory together, do the following, 1. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 2.2. The Excel Import page opens. 2. Click (TEMPLATE button). An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of store inventory. 3. Enter the required store inventory details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. 4. Once you have added the store inventory details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 5. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click  (Upload button) to export the BOM details that are included in the excel worksheet. The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field.     Note:  Make sure that the Excel Column field must have all the columns as in the System Column field. 8. To map the columns in the System Columnand Excel Column fields, do one of the following,    a. If you want to map the columns automatically, click  (AutoMap button).       The columns will be mapped automatically and displayed in the Mapped Columns field.   b. If you want to map each column manually, select the respective columns in both the System Columnand Excel Column                  fields   and then click  (Map button).The selected columns will be mapped and displayed in the Mapped Columns field. 9. To un-map the columns in the Mapped Columnsfield, select the respective column and then click  (UnMap button).     Note: In the Total Rows field, the range for uploading the data from the excel worksheet will be updated automatically. 10. Select Inventory type KPW/FIM 11. Click (Populate Values button). The data are populated. 12. Click  (Process button). The system processes all the uploaded data and shows if any error with the uploaded data. You can download the error details in the excel worksheet by clicking (Export to Excel button). 13. Once you have rectified the identified error in the excel worksheet, follow the above procedures to upload the worksheet. Click  (Import button) to import the uploaded data. The data will be successfully imported.Planning 3.0 Planning The Planning menu in the home page of the cuteQM app is mainly used to search for the piping feasibility of the projects and to assign priority. This menu also helps to add the bill of materials and material request. Here, you can manage the material reservation, material substitution, offcut inventory, material requisition, and material issuance. Once you click the Planning menu, the following tabs open, 3.1 Bill of Material (BOM) The BOM tab in the Planning menu used to add a BOM including quantity of items needed for the piping fabrication from the overall quantity in the inventory. To add BOM, 1. Click BOM in the Planning The Bill of Material page opens.                                                         Figure 3.1: Bill of Material page 3.1.1 Add a BOM If you want to add a BOM, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Bill of Material See Fig 3.1. The page opens a new window to add the details of BOM.            Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the ISO Drawing box, select an ISO drawing from a drop-down list. 3. In the Sum of Qty box, enter the BOM quantity you want to take from the inventory. 4. In the NS1and NS2 boxes, enter the NS1 and NS2 information. 5. In the Ident Code box, enter the code of item you want take from the inventory. 6. In the Item Type box, enter the item type. 7. In the Tag Number box, enter the tag number. 8. In the Item Code box, enter the client item code. 9. In the UOM box, enter the unit of measurement. 10. In the Description box, enter the description. 11. In the Long Description box, enter the long description. 12. In the Category box, enter the item category whether Fab or Erection. 13. In the PT No box, enter the PT number. 14. In the Client Rev No box, enter the client revision number. 15. In the Rev No box, enter the revision number. 16. In the Transmittal Ref No box, enter the transmittal reference number. 17. In the Date Received box, choose the received date. 18. In the Week No box, enter the week number. 19. Click Save. The BOM including the item quantity is successfully added and listed in the Bill of Material page. 3.1.2 Edit a BOM 1. If you want to edit any existing BOM in the Bill of Material page, do the following, Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective BOM. See Fig 3.1. The page shows the details of the selected BOM. 2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 3.1.3 Delete a BOM If you want to delete any existing BOM in the Bill of Material page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Bill of Material page. 3.1.4 Export BOM List You can export a list of BOMs added in the Bill of Material page in both the pdf and excel formats.       1. If you want to export the BOM list in the pdf format, click (PDF button).           a. The BOM list will be downloaded as a pdf file.      2. If you want to export the BOM list in the excel format, click (Excel button).           b. The BOM list will be downloaded as an excel file. 3.1.5 Filter a BOM If you want to filter any BOM from the list of BOMs in the Bill of Material page, do the following, 1. Click (FILTER button) located on the Bill of Material See Fig 3.1. Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens in each column of the Bill of Material page.       2. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter a BOM you want. 3.1.6 Import Multiple BOMs If you want to import multiple BOM together, do the following, 1. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.1. The Excel Import page opens. 2. Click (TEMPLATE button). 3. An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of BOM. 4. Enter the required BOM details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. 5. Once you have added the BOM details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 6. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 7. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 8. Click (Upload button) to export the BOM details that are included in the excel worksheet. 9. The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column Note:  Make sure that the Excel Column field must have all the columns as in the System Column field. To map the columns in the System Column and Excel Column fields, do one of the following, If you want to map the columns automatically, click (AutoMap button).                                                                                          a. The columns will be mapped automatically and displayed in the Mapped Columns If you want to map each column manually, select the respective columns in both the System Column and Excel Column fields and then click   (Map button).                                                                                                                                  a. The selected columns will be mapped and displayed in the Mapped Columns Field.                                                        b.  To un-map the columns in the Mapped Columns field, select the respective column and then click  (UnMap button).      Note: In the Total Rows field, the range for uploading the data from the excel worksheet will be updated automatically. Click  (Populate Values button). The data are populated. Click  (Process button). The system processes all the uploaded data and shows if any error with the uploaded data. You can download the error details in the excel worksheet by clicking  (Export to Excel button).  Note:  Different color code explains the different type of errors. Once you have rectified the identified error in the excel worksheet, follow the above procedures to upload the worksheet. Click (Import button) to import the uploaded data. The data will be successfully imported. 3.2 Assign Priority The Assign Priority tab in the Planning menu helps to assign the priority for KPW, Offcut, and FIM warehouses. Likewise, you can assign priority for Module, Test Pack, System, Line, and ISO. For example, once you have assigned the high priority for any warehouse, the materials from the high priority warehouse will be taken initially for performing piping feasibility. To assign priority, 1. Click Assign Priority in the Planning The Assign Priority page opens.                                                    Figure 3.2: Assign Priority page Note: You can assign the priority by giving the numbers from 1 to 99. 2. If you want to assign priority for warehouses,      a. Select the Warehouse The added warehouses will be listed.    b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective warehouse.    c. Click Save Changes. 3. If you want to assign priority for project modules,      a. Select the Module     The added project modules will be listed.      b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective module.    c. Click Save Changes. 4. If you want to assign priority for test packs,   a. Select the Test Pack The added test packs will be listed. b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective test pack. c. Click Save Changes.     Once you have set the priority for a particular test pack, the piping feasibility will be loaded based on a list of spools included          in the test pack. 5. If you want to assign priority for systems,    a. Select the System        The added systems will be listed.   b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective system.   c. Click Save Changes. 6. If you want to assign priority for lines,   a. Select the Line       The added lines will be listed.    a. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective line.    c. Click Save Changes. 7. If you want to assign priority for ISO,   a. Select the ISO      The added ISO will be listed. b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective ISO. c. Click Save Changes. 3.2.1 Export Assigned Priority List You can export the assigned priority list in the Assign Priority page in the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.3 Reserve Material The Reserve Material tab in the Planning menu helps to reserve the material from the inventory quantity. To reserve the material, 1. Click Reserve Material in the Planning   The Reserve Material page opens.                                               Figure 2.3: Reserve Material page 2.3.1 Reserve a Material If you want to reserve a material, 1. In the ISO Number box, select an ISO number from a drop-down list. See Fig 5.3.  The page shows a list of BOM item codes including the BOM quantity and inventory stock quantity for this corresponding ISO         number. Note: The quantity you want to reserve should be less than the BOM quantity. 2. In the Reserved Qty column, enter the number of quantity of items you want to reserve. 3. Once you have entered the reserve quantity, select the respective checkbox in the Reserve? 4. Click Save changes. The entered material quantity will be reserved. While feasibility reserved quantity used against the reserved ISO.   Note: If you want to unreserve all the reserved material quantity, click  (Unreserve All button). 3.4 Revision Comparison In BOM, when you subsequently revise the quantity of items added against the ISO number, the revision number will be changed. The revision history will be maintained in the back end. The Revision Comparison tab in the Planning menu helps you to view the revision history of items added in the BOM. 1. Click Revision Comparison in the Planning   The Revision Comparison page opens.                                                     Figure 3.4: Revision Comparison page    Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details. 2. In the Module box, select a module from a drop-down list. 3. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list. 4. In the ISO / Drawing Number box, select an ISO number from a drop-down list. 5. In the Week No From and Week No To boxes, select the week numbers.   a. In the Comparison Type box, select one of the following,   b. If you want to view the revision history for all items, select   c. If you want to view the revision history for added items, select   d. If you want to view the revision history for removed items, select 6. If you want to view the difference in comparison, select Difference Only. 7. In the Revision From and Revision To boxes, select the revision numbers. 8. Click Get Difference.   The revision history opens based on the given criteria. The revision history shows the total quantity and difference quantity after      completing the revision. 3.4.1 Export Revision Comparison Detail You can export the revision detail generated in the Revision Comparison page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 3.5 Material Substitution The Material Substitution tab in the Planning menu helps to do substitute one item for another item. To perform the material substitution, 1. Click Material Substitution in the Planning The Material Substitution page opens.                                          Figure 3.5: Material Substitution 3.5.1 Add Material Substitution If you want to do material substitution, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Material Substitution See Fig 3.5. The page opens a new window to add the details of material substitution.           Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Item Code box, select an item code from a drop-down list.     Note: In the Item Code box, a list of item codes added in the BOM will be listed. 3. In the Substitute Item Code box, select a substitute item code from a drop-down list.   Note: In the Substitute Item Code box, a list of item codes added in the inventory will be listed. 4. In the Quantity box, select the quantity of items you want to substitute. 5. Click Save. The entered quantity of items will be substituted successfully. After completing the material substitution, you can do the feasibility search to check the feasibility percentage of the substituted materials. 3.5.2 Export Material Substitution List You can export a list of material substitutions added in the Material Substitution page in the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 3.5.3 Filter a Material Substitution If you want to filter any material substitution from the list of material substitutions in the Material Substitution page, you can use   (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 3.6 Component Requirement The Component Requirement tab in the Planning menu help to add the components required for the feasibility search. To add the component requirement, 1. Click Component Requirement in the Planning The Component Requirement page opens with a list of components.                                                Figure 3.6: Component Requirement page 2. Select the module whether Piping 3. Select the checkbox of the component you require. 4. Click Save changes. 3.7 Offcut Inventory When a material issuance has been created with the Offcut material, we need to add the offcut material details in the Offcut inventory. To add the offcut material details, 1. Click Offcut Inventory in the Planning The Offcut Inventory page opens.                                        Figure 3.7: Offcut Inventory page 3.7.1 Add Offcut Material Detail To add the offcut material detail, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Offcut Inventory See Fig 3.7. A new window opens to add the details of offcut material.     2. In the Material Request box, select a material request from a drop-down list. The cut length for the selected material request opens.   3. In the Cut Length column, change the cut length of the offcut item if you want.   Note: The cut length should not be exceeded the material issuance quantity. 4. In the Received Date box, choose the date when the offcut material received in the Offcut inventory. 5. Click Save changes. The offcut material is added. 3.7.2 Adjust Cut Length Quantity To adjust the cut length quantity, 1. Click (Add icon) in the Adjustment The Adjustment window opens. 2. Click (ADD button) in the Adjustment 3. In the Adjustment Qty box, enter the adjustment cut length quantity. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. The adjusted cut length quantity will be updated. 3.7.3 Export Offcut Inventory List You can export a list of offcut materials added in the Offcut Inventory page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see 1the topic, “Export BOM List”. 3.7.4 Filter an Offcut Material If you want to filter any offcut material from the list of offcut materials in the Offcut Inventory page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 3.8 Feasibility The Feasibility tab in the Planning menu helps to search the feasibility percentage of items available in the warehouses. Based on the feasibility search percentage, the inspectors will move furtherly for material requisition and material issuance. To navigate into the Feasibility page, 1. Click Feasibility in the Planning                                                                        Figure 3.8: Feasibility page   Note: The feasibility result displayed in different color explains that status of ISO feasibility. The feasibility result displayed in Red color shows that the ISO has reserved items. The feasibility result displayed in Green color shows that the ISO has 100 percentage feasibility. The feasibility result displayed in Blue color shows that the ISO has less than 100 percentage feasibility. 3.8.1 To do Feasibility Search To search the feasibility percentage, do the following steps in the Feasibility page, 1. In the Module box, select the modules you want.  Note: According to the selection of modules, the system list will be updated in the System box. 2. In the System box, select the systems you want. Note: According to the selection of systems, the line list will be updated in the Line box. 3. In the Line Number box, select the line numbers you want. 4. In the Feasibility box, enter the feasibility percentage. Tip: If you enter 100, the items which have the feasibility percentage of 100 will be listed. If you enter 10, the items which have the feasibility percentage above 10 will be listed. 5. Select the checkbox of Reserve Material option if you want to filter the reserve material items.   The page shows the feasibility of the reserved materials. Select the checkbox of Material Substitution option if you want to filter the material substitution items. 6. If you want to see the feasibility percentage for any particular warehouse, select the warehouse listed in the Warehouse     a. If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the KPW warehouse, select the checkbox of KPW.     b. If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the Offcut warehouse, select the checkbox of Offcut.    c. If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the FIM warehouse, select the checkbox of FIM. 7. In the Category field, select the category whether Shop or Field.  Note: If you want clear the given input data, click (CLEAR button). 8. Click FEASIBILTY SEARCH. The feasibility result opens based on the given feasibility percentage.       9. Click (Expand icon) of the respective module to view the items included in the module or click  (Expand All button) to view the items included in each module .A new window opens and shows a list of items included in the module. BOM Qty – shows the item’s quantity added in the BOM. Required Qty – shows the required quantity of item. Stock Qty – shows the overall quantity of stock available in all the inventory. Available Qty – shows the available quantity of item. The available quantity will be changed based on the reserve quantity. Once you reserve any quantity, the same will be reduced from the available quantity. Reserve/Release Qty – shows the reserve/release quantity of item. You can reserve the item here while doing feasibility itself by entering the reserve quantity in the respective field. Make sure that the reserve quantity should not be exceeded the BOM quantity. To reserve the items, Select the checkbox of item for which you want to reserve the quantity. Enter the reserve quantity in the Reserve/Release Qty Click (RESERVE MATERIAL button). The added quantity will be reserved and updated in the Reserve Material page. MR Qty– shows the quantity of item for which the material requests has added. MI Qty– shows the quantity of item for which the material issuance has done. The feasibility percentage is calculated based on the available quantity. For example, in the below figure, the given BOM quantity is higher than the available quantity, so the feasibility percentage will be less than 100.       10. If you want to give purchase order details, enter in the PODetails 11. Click Save changes. 3.8.2 Clear Feasibility Search Data If you want to clear the data of feasibility search done by any of the user, you can use this clear feasibility search data functionality. Users assign with Admin role only have access to view the Clear Feasibility Search Data tab in the Planning menu. To clear the feasibility search data, 1. Click Clear Feasibility Search Data in the Planning The Feasibility Search Clear page opens.                                             Figure 3.8.2: Feasibility Search Clear page The page shows the feasibility search data of all the users. 2. Click  (Clear icon) of the respective user to clear the feasibility search data. The feasibility search data of the selected user will be cleared. 6.9 Material Request The Material Request tab in the Planning menu helps to manage the material requests added in the Feasibility page. 6.9.1 Add a Material Request If you want to create a material request, do the following steps, 1. Navigate to the generated feasibility results in the Feasibility.                                                                                               2. Select the checkbox of the project for which you want to add the material requests. 3. Click (ADD MATERIAL REQUEST button). The Subcon Details window opens.   4. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor. 5. In the Request Date & Timebox, choose the request date and time. 6. In the Location box, select a location. 7. Click SAVE. The material request will be added in the Material Request page.    Note: For each item code included in the project, one material request will be created individually. For example, The BOM quantity is 18 and you set the high priority for KPW and the least priority for Offcut. A material request will be created with the KPW inventory if the KPW has the same quantity of 18. If the KPW is available with quantity of 10, then two material requests will be created separately for quantity of 10 in KPW and quantity of 8 in Offcut. 8. Click Material Request in the Planning The Material Request page opens and shows the list of created material requests.                                      Figure 3.9.1: Material Request page  Note: The material request displayed in different color explains the status of the request. The material request displayed in Black color indicates a new material request. The Status column shows Waiting for MR confirmation. If the Status column shows Fully Issued, which means that the item’s quantity is issued fully. If the Status column shows Partially Issued, which means that the item’s quantity is issued partially. The material request displayed in Green color indicates the completed material request. 9. If you want to view the material details, click (Expand icon) of the respective request. The Material Details window opens and shows the material details including their issuance status.       3.9.2 Approve a Material Request Once you have added the material request, the Request Status column in the Material Request page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). 1. If you want to approve the material request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved material request will be moved for Material issuance. The Status column shows MR confirm. 3.9.3 Cancel a Material Issuance If you want to cancel the material issuance, Note: If the material’s quantity is fully issued, the (Cancel icon) will not be displayed in the Issuance Status column for the  respective report number. Partially Click (Cancel icon) provided in the Issuance Status Once you have cancelled the issuance, the Status column shows Cancel. 3.9.4 View a Material Request Report If you want to view a material request report, click  (Report icon) provided in the Report column of the Material Request page. 3.9.5 Export Material Request List You can export a list of material requests added in the Material Request page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 3.9.6 Export Material Request List If you want to filter any material request from the list of material requests in the Material Request page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 3.10  Material Issuance When a material request has been created, we need to issue materials from the inventory for the created request. The Material Issuance tab in the Planning menu helps to issue the materials from the inventory based on the added material request. 1. Click Material Issuance in the Planning The Material Issuance page opens.                                                                Figure 3.10: Material Issuance 3.10.1 Add a Material Issuance Report If you want to add a material issuance report, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Material Issuance See Fig 3.10. The Add MR details window opens.                    Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Material Request Number box, select a material request number from a drop-down list. 3. In the Heat Number box, enter the heat number. 4. In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date. 5. Click (Add button). The material issuance request will be added. The Add MR Details window shows the total and balance quantity of the item. 6. In the Issued Qty column, enter the issued quantity detail.     Note: The issued quantity can be higher than the total quantity. The material issuance report is added. 3.10.2 Approve a Material Issuance Once you have added the material issuance, the Issue Status column in the Material Issuance page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons). 1.  If you want to approve the material issuance, click (Approve icon) in the Issue Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. After Material Issuance, Heat number can be used in Fit up. 3.10.3 View a Material Issuance Report If you want to view a material issuance report, click (Report icon) provided in the Report column of the Material Issuance page. 3.10.4 Export Material Issuance List You can export a list of material issuances added in the Material Issuance page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 3.10.5 Filter a Material Issuance If you want to filter any material issuance from the list of material issuances in the Material Issuance page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 3.11  BOM Status by ISO The BOM Status by ISO tab in the Planning menu helps to view the BOM status added against the ISO number. To view the BOM status, 1. Click BOM Status by ISO in the Planning The BOM Status by ISO page opens and shows a list of modules with their ISO numbers.                                                             Figure 3.11: BOM Status by ISO page 2. Click (Expand icon) in the Details The page shows the items included in the respective module including the BOM quantity, material request quantity, material issued quantity, and offcut material quantity.      3.11.1 Export BOM Status You can export the BOM generated in the BOM Status by ISO page in an excel format by using  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 3.12 BOM Details The BOM Details tab in the Planning menu helps to view the added BOM details. To view the BOM details, 1. Click BOM Details in the Planning The BOM Details page opens.                                                    Figure 3.12: BOM Details page 2. If you want to view any particular BOM details, you can use the filter options (Explained below) given in the page, If you want to view the BOM details of any sub-contractor, select a sub-contractor in the Sub Contractor Name If you want to view the BOM details of any module, select a module in the Module If you want to view the BOM details against an ISO number, select an ISO number in the ISO Number If you want to view the BOM details for any item code, select an item code in the Item Code If you want to view the BOM details against a MR number, select a MR number in the MR Number The Option 1, Option 2, Option 3, and Option 4boxes are provided to filter the BOM details by giving the BOM description. 3. Click Search. The BOM will be displayed based on the given data in the filter boxes. 3.12.1 Export BOM Details You can export the BOM details generated in the BOM Details page in an excel format by using (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. Material Feasibility - Structural Login 1.1 Login To login into the cuteQM application, 1. Open your web browser. 2. Type the URL provided by your administrator, in the address bar of your web browser. The login page appears.   3. In the login page, enter your user name and password in the respective boxes. Note: If you forgot your password, click “I can’t access my account”. You will be redirected into a new web page. Enter your username to receive your password. 4. In the Module section, select Structural. 5. Click Login. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM application, the home page of the cuteQM application opens.                                                         Figure 1.1 Home page of cuteQM application 6. Navigate to the Planning menu in the Home page. Note: The user name you have entered, the project you have been assigned, and the module you have selected are displayed in the upper right corner of the home page. 1.2 Change Password If you want to change your current password, 1. Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 4.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options.   2. Click the Change Password The Change Password page opens.       Note: Before changing your password read the conditions specified in the Change Password page. 3. In the Password box, enter your current password. 4. In the New Password box, enter your new password. 5. In the Confirm New Password box, enter your new password again. 6. Click Change Password. Your password will be successfully changed. 1.3 Log Out If you want to log out from the application, 1. Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 4.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. 2. Click Log out. Your current session ends now. The home page appears. Planning 2.0 Planning The Planning menu in the home page of the cuteQM app is mainly used to search for the piping feasibility of the structural projects and to assign priority. This menu also helps to add the bill of materials and material request. Here, you can manage the material reservation, material substitution, offcut inventory, material requisition, and material issuance. For production purpose, you can add and manage fit up, weld visual, and painting inspection requests. Once you click the Planning menu, the following tabs open,       2.1 Bill of Material (BOM) The BOM tab in the Planning menu used to add a BOM including quantity of items needed for the pre- fabrication from the overall quantity in the inventory. To add BOM, 1. Click BOM in the Planning The Bill of Material page opens.                                                        Figure 2.1: Bill of Material page 2.1.1 Add a BOM If you want to add a BOM, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Bill of Material See Fig 5.1. The page opens a new window to add the details of BOM.       Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. 2. In the Drawing No box, select a drawing number from a drop-down list. 3. In the Drawing Rev box, enter the drawing revision number. 4. In the Member Code box, enter the member code. 5. In the Str Type box, enter the structural type. 6. In the Material Category box, enter the material category. 7. In the Member Type box, enter the member type. 8. In the Section box, enter the section name. 9. In the Width MM box, enter the width of the material in mm. 10. In the Length MM box, enter the width of the material in mm. 11. In the Item Quantity box, enter the item quantity. 12. In the Plate Net Area box, enter the plate net area name. 13. In the Rolled box, enter the rolled detail. 14. In the Surface Area box, enter the surface area name. 15. In the Weight FLG Thickness box, enter the weight FLG thickness detail. 16. In the Dimension box, enter the dimension detail. 17. In the Weight LG to Reduce box, enter the weight that needs to be reduced. 18. In the Snip Thickness box, enter the snip thickness value. 19. In the Snip Area box, enter the snip area value. 20. In the Weight Reduced box, enter the reduced weight. 21. In the Mean Length No box, enter the mean length. 22. In the Item box, enter the item name. 23. In the Quantity box, enter the item quantity. 24. In the Material Description box, enter the material description. 25. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification. 26. In the Item Code box, select an item code. 27. In the Total Quantity box, enter the item’s total quantity. 28. In the UOM box, enter the UOM detail. 29. Click Save. The BOM including the item quantity is successfully added and listed in the Bill of Material page. 2.1.2 Edit a BOM If you want to edit any existing BOM in the Bill of Material page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective BOM. See Fig 5.1. The page shows the details of the selected BOM. 2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 2.1.3 Delete a BOM If you want to delete any existing BOM in the Bill of Material page, you can use   (Delete icon) provided in the Bill of Material page. 2.1.4 Export BOM List You can export a list of BOMs added in the Bill of Material page in both the pdf and excel formats. 1. If you want to export the BOM list in the pdf format, click (PDF button). The BOM list will be downloaded as a pdf file. 2. If you want to export the BOM list in the excel format, click  (Excel button). The BOM list will be downloaded as an excel file. 2.1.5 Filter a BOM If you want to filter any BOM from the list of BOMs in the Bill of Material page, do the following, 1. Click (FILTER button) located on the Bill of Material See Fig 5.1. Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens in each column of the Bill of Material page.       2. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter a BOM you want. 2.1.6 Import Multiple BOMs If you want to import multiple BOM together, do the following, 1. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 5.1. The Excel Import page opens.     2. Click (TEMPLATE button). An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of BOM. 3. Enter the required BOM details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. 4. Once you have added the BOM details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click (Upload button) to export the BOM details that are included in the excel worksheet. The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field.     Note:  Make sure that the Excel Column field must have all the columns as in the System Column field. 8. To map the columns in the System Column and Excel Column fields, do one of the following,     a. If you want to map the columns automatically, click (AutoMap button). The columns will be mapped automatically and displayed in the Mapped Columns field.     b. If you want to map each column manually, select the respective columns in both the System Column and Excel Column fields and then click   (Map button). The selected columns will be mapped and displayed in the Mapped Columns field.   9. To un-map the columns in the Mapped Columns field, select the respective column and then click  (UnMap button). Note: In the Total Rows field, the range for uploading the data from the excel worksheet will be updated automatically. 10. Click (Populate Values button). The data are populated. 11. Click  (Process button). The system processes all the uploaded data and shows if any error with the uploaded data. You can download the error details in the excel worksheet by clicking   (Export to Excel button).       Note:  Different color code explains the different types of errors. 12. Once you have rectified the identified error in the excel worksheet, follow the above procedures to upload the worksheet. 13. Click (Import button) to import the uploaded data. The data will be successfully imported. 2.2 Import Profile MTO 2.3 Assign Priority The Assign Priority tab in the Planning menu helps to assign the priority for JDE, Offcut, and FIM warehouses. Likewise, you can assign priority for Module, Level, Type Code, and Cutting Plan Drawing. For example, if you assign the high priority for any warehouse, the materials from the high priority warehouse will be taken initially for performing piping feasibility. To assign priority, 1. Click Assign Priority in the Planning The Assign Priority page opens.                                                    Figure 2.3: Assign Priority page Note: You can assign the priority by giving the numbers from 1 to 99. 2. If you want to assign priority for warehouses,        a. Select the Warehouse        The added warehouses will be listed.            b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective warehouse.      c. Click Save Changes. 3. If you want to assign priority for project modules,     a. Select the Module    The added project modules will be listed.    b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective module.    c. Click Save Changes. 4. If you want to assign priority for levels,   a. Select the Level   The added levels will be listed.    Add image    b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective test pack.    c. Click Save Changes. 5. If you want to assign priority for type code,    a. Select the Type Code     The added type code will be listed.     Add image    b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective system.     c. Click Save Changes. 6. If you want to assign priority for cutting plan drawings,      a. Select the Cutting Plan Drawing     The added cutting plan drawings will be listed.       b. In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective line.     c. Click Save Changes. 2.3.1 Export Assigned Priority List You can export the assigned priority list in the Assign Priority page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.4 Reserve Material The Reserve Material tab in the Planning menu helps to reserve the material from the inventory quantity. To reserve the material, 1. Click Reserve Material in the Planning The Reserve Material page opens.                                                  Figure 2.4: Reserve Material page 2.4.1 Reserve a Material If you want to reserve a material, 1. In the Cutting Plan Drawing box, select a cutting plan drawing number from a drop-down list. See Fig 5.4. The page shows a list of BOM item codes including the BOM quantity and inventory stock quantity for this corresponding cutting plan drawing number.     Note: The quantity you want to reserve should be less than the BOM quantity. 2. In the Reserved Qty column, enter the number of items you want to reserve. 3. Once you have entered the reserve quantity, select the respective checkbox in the Reserve? 4. Click Save changes. The entered material quantity will be reserved. Note: If you want to unreserve all the reserved material quantity, click   (Unreserve All button). 2.5 Revision Comparison In BOM, when you subsequently revise the quantity of items added against the ISO number, the revision number will be changed. The revision history will be maintained in the back end. The Revision Comparison tab in the Planning menu helps you to view the revision history of items added in the BOM. 1. Click Revision Comparison in the Planning The Revision Comparison page opens.                                                   Figure 2.5: Revision Comparison page 2. In the Module box, select a module from a drop-down list. 3. In the Cutting Plan Drawing Number box, select a cutting plan drawing number from a drop-down list. 4. In the Revision From and Revision To boxes, select the revision numbers. 5. In the Comparison Type box, select one of the following, If you want to view the revision history for all items, select If you want to view the revision history for added items, select If you want to view the revision history for removed items, select If you want to view the difference in comparison, select Difference Only. 6. Click Get Difference. The revision history opens based on the given criteria. The revision history shows the total quantity and difference quantity after completing the revision.     2.5.1 Export Revision Comparison Detail You can export the revision detail generated in the Revision Comparison page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.6 Feasibility The Feasibility tab in the Planning menu helps to search the feasibility percentage of items available in the warehouses. Based on the feasibility search percentage, the inspectors will move furtherly for material requisition and material issuance. To navigate into the Feasibility page, 1. Click Feasibility in the Planning                                                                                               Figure 2.6: Feasibility page Note: The feasibility result displayed in different colors explains that status of ISO feasibility. The feasibility result displayed in Red color shows that the ISO has reserved items. The feasibility result displayed in Green color shows that the ISO has 100 percentage feasibility. The feasibility result displayed in Blue color shows that the ISO has less than 100 percentage feasibility. 2.6.1 To do Feasibility Search To search the feasibility percentage, do the following steps in the Feasibility page, 1. In the Module box, select the modules you want. Note: According to the selection of modules, the system list will be updated in the System box. 2. In the System box, select the systems you want. Note: According to the selection of systems, the line list will be updated in the Line box. 3. In the Line Number box, select the line numbers you want. 4. In the Feasibility box, enter the feasibility percentage.  Tip: If you enter 100, the items which have the feasibility percentage of 100 will be listed. If you enter 10, the items which have the feasibility percentage above 10 will be listed. 5. Select the checkbox of Reserve Material option if you want to filter the reserve material items. The page shows the feasibility of the reserved materials.   6. Select the checkbox of Material Substitution option if you want to filter the material substitution items. 7. If you want to see the feasibility percentage for any particular warehouse, select the warehouse listed in the Warehouse If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the JDE warehouse, select the checkbox of JDE. If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the Offcut warehouse, select the checkbox of Offcut. If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the FIM warehouse, select the checkbox of FIM. 8. In the Category field, select the category whether Fab or Erection. Note: If you want clear the given input data, click   (CLEAR button). 9. Click FEASIBILITYSEARCH. The feasibility result opens based on the given feasibility percentage. 10. Click (Expand icon) of the respective module. A new window opens and shows a list of items included in the module. BOM Qty – shows the item’s quantity added in the BOM. Required Qty – shows the required quantity of item. Stock Qty – shows the overall quantity of stock available in all the inventories. Available Qty – shows the available quantity of item. Reserve/Release Qty – shows the reserve/release quantity of an item. You can reserve the item here while doing feasibility itself by entering the reserve quantity in the respective field. Make sure that the reserve quantity should not be exceeded the stock quantity. To reserve the items, Select the checkbox of the item for which you want to reserve the quantity. Enter the reserve quantity in the Reserve/Release Qty Click (RESERVE MATERIAL button). The added quantity will be reserved and updated in the Reserve Material page. MR Qty– shows the quantity of item for which the material requests has added MI Qty– shows the quantity of item for which the material issuance has done The feasibility percentage is calculated based on the available quantity. For example, in the below figure, the given BOM quantity is higher than the available quantity, so the feasibility percentage will be less than 100.     If you want to give purchase order details, enter in the PO Details Click Save changes. 2.7 Clear Feasibility Search Data If you want to clear the data of feasibility search done by any of the users, you can use this clear feasibility search data functionality. Users assigned with Admin role only have access to view the Clear Feasibility Search Data tab in the Planning menu. To clear the feasibility search data, 1. Click Clear Feasibility Search Data in the Planning The Feasibility Search Clear page opens.                                         Figure 2.7.1: Feasibility Search Clear page The page shows the feasibility search data of all the users. 2. Click (Clear icon) of the respective user to clear the feasibility search data. The feasibility search data of the selected user will be cleared. 2.8 Material Substitution The Material Substitution tab in the Planning menu helps to substitute one item for another item. To perform the material substitution, 1. Click Material Substitution in the Planning The Material Substitution page opens.                                                       Figure 2.8: Material Substitution 2.8.1 Add Material Substitution If you want to do material substitution, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Material Substitution See Fig 5.8. The page opens a new window to add the details of material substitution.     Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. 2. In the Item Code box, select an item code from a drop-down list. Note: In the Item Code box, a list of item codes added in the BOM will be listed. 3. In the Substitute Item Code box, select a substitute item code from a drop-down list. Note: In the Substitute Item Code box, a list of item codes added in the inventory will be listed. 4. In the Quantity box, select the quantity of items you want to substitute. 5. Click Save. The entered quantity of items will be substituted successfully. After completing the material substitution, you can do the feasibility search to check the feasibility percentage of the substituted materials. 2.8.2 Export Material Substitution List You can export a list of material substitutions added in the Material Substitution page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.8.3 Filter a Material Substitution If you want to filter any material substitution from the list of material substitutions in the Material Substitution page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.9 Component Requirement The Component Requirement tab in the Planning menu helps to add the components required for the items. To add the component requirement, 1. Click Component Requirement in the Planning The Component Requirement page opens with a list of components.                                                            Figure 2.9: Component Requirement page 2. Select the module whether Piping or Structural. 3. Select the checkbox of the component you require. 4. Click Save changes. 2.10 Offcut Inventory When a material issuance has been created with the Offcut material, we need to add the offcut material details in the Offcut inventory. To add the offcut material details, 1. Click Offcut Inventory in the Planning The Offcut Inventory page opens.                                                             Figure 2.10: Offcut Inventory page 2.10.1 Add Offcut Material Detail To add the offcut material detail, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Offcut Inventory See Fig 5.10. A new window opens to add the details of offcut material.   2. In the Material Request box, select a material request from a drop-down list. The cut length for the selected material request opens.   3. In the Cut Length column, change the cut length of the offcut item if you want. Note: The cut length should not be exceeded the material issuance quantity. 4. In the Received Date box, choose the date when the offcut material received in the Offcut inventory. 5. Click Save changes. The offcut material is added. 2.10.2 Adjust Cut Length Quantity To adjust the cut length quantity, 1. Click  (Add icon) in the Adjustment The Adjustment window opens.   2. Click (ADD button) in the Adjustment   3. In the Adjustment Qty box, enter the adjustment cut length quantity. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. The adjusted cut length quantity will be updated.     2.10.3 Export Offcut Inventory List You can export a list of offcut materials added in the Offcut Inventory page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.10.4 Filter an Offcut Material If you want to filter any offcut material from the list of offcut materials in the Offcut Inventory page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.11 Material Request The Material Request tab in the Planning menu helps to manage the material requests added in the Feasibility page. 2.11.1 Add a Material Request If you want to create a material request, do the following steps, 1. Navigate to the generated feasibility results in the Feasibility   2. Select the checkbox of the project for which you want to add the material requests. 3. Click (ADD MATERIAL REQUEST button). The Sub con Details window opens.   4. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor. 5. In the Request Date & Time box, choose the request date and time. 6. In the Location box, select a location. 7. Click SAVE. The material request will be added in the Material Request page. Note: For each item code included in the project, one material request will be created individually. For example, The BOM quantity is 18 and you set the high priority for JDE and the least priority for Offcut. A material request will be created with the JDE inventory if the JDE has the same quantity of 18. If the JDE is available with quantity of 10, then two material requests will be created separately for quantity of 10 in JDE and quantity of 8 in Offcut. 8. Click Material Request in the Planning The Material Request page opens and shows the list of created material requests.                                                         Figure 2.11: Material Request page Note: The material request displayed in different colors explains the status of the request. The material request displayed in Blue color indicates a new material request. The material request displayed in Green color indicates the completed material request. 9. If you want to view the material details, click (Expand icon) of the respective request. The Material Details window opens and shows the material details.     2.11.2 Approve a Material Request Once you have added the material request, the Request Status column in the Material Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). 1. If you want to approve the material request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click   (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved material request will be moved for Material Acceptance. 2.11.3 View a Material Request Report If you want to view a material request report, click (Report icon) provided in the Report column of the Material Request page. 2.11.4 Export Material Request List You can export a list of material requests added in the Material Request page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.11.5 Filter a Material Request If you want to filter any material request from the list of material requests in the Material Request page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.12 Material Issuance When a material request has been created with the Offcut inventory, we need to issue materials from the Offcut inventory for the created request. Note: You can do the material issuance process for materials only in the Offcut inventory. The Material Issuance tab in the Planning menu helps to issue the materials from the Offcut inventory based on the added material request. 1. Click Material Issuance in the Planning The Material Issuance page opens.                                                                    Figure 2.12: Material Issuance 2.12.1 Add a Material Issuance Report If you want to add a material issuance report, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Material Issuance See Fig 2.12. The page opens a new window to add the details of material issuance.       Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. 2. In the Material Request Number box, select a material request number from a drop-down list. 3. In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date. 4. Click Save. The material issuance request will be added. 2.12.2 Add Issued Quantity Once you have added the material issuance request, you must add the issued quantity details. To add, 1. Click (Add icon) in the Result The Material Details window opens.   2. Check the available quantity in the Total Quantity 3. In the Issued Qty column, enter the issued quantity.   Note: The issued quantity can be higher than the available total quantity for all type of components. 4. Click Save changes. 2.12.3 Approve a Material Issuance Once you have added the material issuance, the Issue Status column in the Material Issuance page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). 1. If you want to approve the material issuance, click (Approve icon) in the Issue Status Otherwise click   (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved material issuance will be moved to Offcut Inventory. 2.12.4 View a Material Issuance Report If you want to view a material issuance report, click  (Report icon) provided in the Report column of the Material Issuance page. 2.12.5 Export Material Issuance List You can export a list of material issuances added in the Material Issuance page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.12.6 Filter a Material Issuance If you want to filter any material issuance from the list of material issuances in the Material Issuance page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.13 CNC Process 2.14 BOM Summary The BOM Summary tab in the Planning menu helps to view the BOM status added against the module. To view the BOM status, 1. Click BOM Summary in the Planning The BOM Status by ISO page opens and shows a list of modules with their cutting plan drawings.                                                     Figure 2.14: BOM Status by ISO page 2. Click (Expand icon) in the Details The page shows the items included in the respective module including the BOM quantity, material request quantity, and material issued quantity.       2.14.1 Export BOM Status You can export the BOM generated in the BOM Status by ISO page in an excel format by using  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.15 BOM Details The BOM Details tab in the Planning menu helps to view the added BOM details. To view the BOM details, 1. Click BOM Details in the Planning The BOM Details page opens.                                                         Figure 2.15: BOM Details page 2. If you want to view any particular BOM details, you can use the filter options (Explained below) given in the page, If you want to view the BOM details of any sub-contractor, select a sub-contractor in the Sub Contractor Name If you want to view the BOM details of any module, select a module in the Module If you want to view the BOM details against a drawing number, select a drawing number in the Drawing No If you want to view the BOM details for any item code, select an item code in the Item Code If you want to view the BOM details against a MR number, select a MR number in the MR Number The Option 1, Option 2, Option 3, and Option 4boxes are provided to filter the BOM details by giving the BOM description. 3. Click Search. The BOM will be displayed based on the given data in the filter boxes. 2.15.1 Export BOM Details You can export the BOM details generated in the BOM Details page in an excel format by using  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.16 Fit up Production Joints The Fit up Production Joints tab in the Planning menu helps you to add an RFI Fit up request. 1. Click Fit up Production Joints in the Planning The Production – Joints (Structural Fit up) page opens and shows a list of added joints.                                         Figure 2.16: Production – Joints (Structural Fit up) page 2.16.1 Add New Joints Before creating an RFI fit up request, you can add the joints. If you want to add a new joint, do the following steps. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Production – Joints (Structural Fit up) The Add Joints window opens.     Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. 2. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. After the selection of joint, the Unique Number 1 and Piece Mark 1 boxes appear.   3. In the WPS box, select a WPS from a drop-down list. 4. In the Unique Number 1box, enter the unique number. 5. Click Save & Close. The added joint will be listed in the Production – Joints (Structural Fit up) page. 2.16.2 Create an RFI Fit up Request To create an RFI fit up request, 1. Select the checkbox of the joints for which you want to create an RFI fit up request. 2. Click (Create RFI button). The Create RFI window opens.       Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. 3. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. 4. In the Inspection Date & Timebox, choose the inspection date and time. 5. In the Location box, select a location from a list of locations. 6. In the Report Number box, edit/change the report number if you want. 7. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. 8. Click Create. The added fit up request will be created successfully. The added fit up request will be moved to the View RFI Fit up tab in the Inspection menu. See Fig 4.1.   9. To view the added request,    a. Navigate to the View RFI Fit up tab in the Inspection The REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page opens and shows the added request.     10. To submit the request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Once you have submitted the request, the result icon will be enabled in the Result column.   11. Click (Result icon) and add your fit up inspection results.   2.16.3 Export Joints List You can export a list of joints added in the Production – Joints (Structural Fit up) page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.16.4 Filter a joint If you want to filter any joint from the list of joints in the Production – Joints (Structural Fit up) page, you can use  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.17 Weld VI Production Joints The Weld VI Production Joints tab in the Planning menu helps you to add a weld VI request. 1. Click Weld VI Production Joints in the Planning The Production – Joints (Structural Weld VI) page opens and shows a list of added joints.                             Figure 2.17: Production – Joints (Piping Weld VI) page 2.17.1 Add New Joints Before creating a weld request, you should add the joints. If you want to add a new joint, do the following steps. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Production – Joints (Piping Weld VI) The Add Joints window opens. Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. 2. In the Joints box, select a joint from a drop-down list. According to the selection of joints, the drawing number, line number, spool number, and sheet number will be updated. 3. In the WPS box, select a WPS from a drop-down list. 4. In the Weld Date box, choose the weld date. 5. In the Add Welder window, click   (ADD button). A new field opens to add the welder details. In the Weld Process box, select a weld process. In the Weld Position box, select a weld position. In the Weld Layers box, select the checkbox of the weld layers. In the Welder Number / Name box, select a welder name and number. Click Save. 6. Click Save & Close. The added joint will be listed in the Production – Joints (Piping Weld VI) page. 2.17.2 Create a Weld VI Request To create a weld VI request, 1. Select the checkbox of the joints for which you want to create a weld VI request. 2. Click  (Create RFI button). The Create RFI window opens.   Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving. 3. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list. 4. In the Inspection Date & Timebox, choose the inspection date and time. 5. In the Location box, select a location from a list of locations. 6. In the Report Number box, edit/change the report number if you want. 7. In the Description box, enter the description for the request. 8. Click Create. The added weld VI request will be created successfully. The added weld VI request will be moved to the View RFI Weld VI tab in the Inspection menu. See Fig 4.1.   9. To view the added request, navigate to the View RFI Weld VI tab in the Inspection The RFI Weld Visual Request List page opens and shows the added weld VI request.   10. To submit the request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Once you have submitted the request, the result icon will be enabled in the Result column.   11. Click (Result icon) and add your weld visual inspection results.   2.17.3 Export Joints List You can export a list of joints added in the Production – Joints (Piping Weld VI) page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.17.4 Filter a joint If you want to filter any joint from the list of joints in the Production – Joints (Piping Weld VI) page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.18 View Release Notes 2.19 View Painting InspectionMaterial Feasibility - Pre Planning - Structural Login 1.1 Login To login into the cuteQM application, 1. Open your web browser. 2, Type the URL provided by your administrator, in the address bar of your web browser. The login page appears. 3. In the login page, enter your user name and password in the respective boxes. Note: If you forgot your password, click “I can’t access my account”. You will be redirected into a new web page. Enter your username to receive your password. 4. In the Module section, select Structural. 5. Click Login. Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM application, the home page of the cuteQM application opens.                                                   Figure 1.1 Home page of cuteQM application 6. Navigate to the Pre Planning menu in the Home page. Note: The user name you have entered, the project you have been assigned, and the module you have selected are displayed in the upper right corner of the home page. 1.2 Change Password If you want to change your current password, 1. Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 4.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. 2. Click the Change Password The Change Password page opens. Note: Before changing your password read the conditions specified in the Change Password page. 3. In the Password box, enter your current password. 4. In the New Password box, enter your new password. 5. In the Confirm New Password box, enter your new password again. 6. Click Change Password. Your password will be successfully changed. 1.3 Log Out If you want to log out from the app, 1. Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 4.1. A drop-down list opens with multiple options. 2. Click Log out. Your current session ends now. The home page appears.Pre Planning 2.0 Pre Planning The Pre Planning menu in the home page of the cuteQM app is mainly used to perform pre-fabrication in the structural projects. You can search the feasibility of the material and to assign the priority. This menu also helps to add the material request. Here, you can manage the offcut inventory and material issuance. You can also view the reports related with the BOM. Once you click the Pre Planning menu, the following tabs open, 2.1 Bill of Material (BOM) The BOM tab in the Pre Planning menu helps to add the size of BOM needed for the pre-fabrication in the structural project. To add a BOM, 1. Click BOM in the Pre Planning The Bill of Material page opens.                                                                    Figure 2.1: Bill of Material page 2.1.1 Add a BOM If you want to add a BOM, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Bill of Material See Fig 2.1. The page opens a new window to add the details of BOM.          Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Nesting No box, enter the nesting number. 3. In the CNC sheet No box, enter the CNC sheet number. 4. In the Drawing No box, enter the drawing number. 5. In the Cut No box, enter the cut number. 6. In the Piece Mark No box, select a piece mark number from a drop-down list. 7. In the Material Grade box, enter the material grade. 8. In the Plate thick (mm)box, enter the plate thickness value. 9. In the Size (length x Width)box, enter the length and width of the plate. 10. In the JDE Item code box, enter the JDE item code. 11. In the Size M2box, enter the size value. 12. In the Type box, select the type of material. 13. In the Nesting box, select Yes or No according to your requirement. 14. In the Weight (kg) box, enter the weight value. 15. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 16. Click Save. The BOM is successfully added and listed in the Bill of Material page. 2.1.2 Edit a BOM If you want to edit any existing BOM in the Bill of Material page, do the following, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective BOM. See Fig 2.1. The page shows the details of the selected BOM.   2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box. 3. Click Save. 2.1.3 Delete a BOM If you want to delete any existing BOM in the Bill of Material page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Bill of Material page. 2.1.4 Export BOM List You can export a list of BOMs added in the Bill of Material page in both the pdf and excel formats. 1. If you want to export the BOM list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button). The BOM list will be downloaded as a pdf file. 2. If you want to export the BOM list in the excel format, click (Excel button). The BOM list will be downloaded as an excel file. 2.1.5 Filter a BOM If you want to filter any BOM from the list of BOMs in the Bill of Material page, do the following, 1. Click (FILTER button) located on the Bill of Material See Fig 2.1. Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens in each column of the Bill of Material page.   2. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter a BOM you want. 2.1.6 Import Multiple BOMs If you want to import multiple BOM together, do the following, 1. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 2.1. The Excel Import page opens.     2. Click (TEMPLATE button). An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of BOM. 3. Enter the required BOM details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet. 4. Once you have added the BOM details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer. 5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded. 6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer. 7. Click (Upload button) to export the BOM details that are included in the excel worksheet. The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field.   Note:  Make sure that the Excel Column field must have all the columns as in the System Column field. 8. To map the columns in the System Column and Excel Column fields, do one of the following,       a. If you want to map the columns automatically, click (AutoMap button).       The columns will be mapped automatically and displayed in the Mapped Columns field.        b. If you want to map each column manually, select the respective columns in both the System Column and Excel Column fields and then click  (Map button). The selected columns will be mapped and displayed in the Mapped Columns field.     9. To un-map the columns in the Mapped Columns field, select the respective column and then click  (UnMap button).     Note: In the Total Rows field, the range for uploading the data from the excel worksheet will be updated automatically. 10. Click (Populate Values button).     The data are populated. 11. Click (Process button). The system processes all the uploaded data and shows if any error with the uploaded data. You can download the error details in the excel worksheet by clicking (Export to Excel button).               Note:  Different color code explains the different type of errors. 12. Once you have rectified the identified error in the excel worksheet, follow the above procedures to upload the worksheet. 13. Click (Import button) to import the uploaded data. The data will be successfully imported. 2.2 Assign Priority The Assign Priority tab in the Pre Planning menu helps to assign the priority for JDE, Offcut, and FIM warehouses. Likewise, you can assign priority for Material Type and Material Size. For example, if you assign the high priority for any warehouse, the materials from the high priority warehouse will be taken initially for performing feasibility. To assign priority, 1. Click Assign Priority in the Pre Planning The Assign Priority page opens.                                                            Figure 2.2: Assign Priority page     Note: You can assign the priority by giving the numbers from 1 to 99. 2. If you want to assign priority for warehouses, Select the Warehouse      The added warehouses will be listed.     In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective warehouse. Click Save Changes. 3. If you want to assign priority for material type, Select the Type option        The material types will be listed.       In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective type. Click Save Changes. 4. If you want to assign priority for material size, Select the Size        The added sizes will be listed.       In the Priority column, enter the priority numbers for the respective size. Click Save Changes. 2.2.1 Export Assigned Priority List You can export the assigned priority list in the Assign Priority page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.3 Feasibility The Feasibility tab in the Pre Planning menu helps to search the feasibility percentage of material type and size available in the warehouses. Based on the feasibility search percentage, the inspectors will move furtherly for material requisition and material issuance. To navigate into the Feasibility page, 1. Click Feasibility in the Pre Planning                                                                      Figure 2.3: Feasibility page   Note: The feasibility result displayed in different color explains that status of material feasibility. The feasibility result displayed in Green color shows that the material has 100 percentage feasibility. The feasibility result displayed in Blue color shows that the material has less than 100 percentage feasibility. 2.3.1 To do Feasibility Search To search the feasibility percentage, do the following steps in the Feasibility page, 1. In the Type box, select the material type. If you select PG(I Beam), the feasibility percentage will be calculated based on three types such as BF, WP, and TF. See below figure.     If you select PT (T Beam), the feasibility percentage will be calculated based on two types such as BF and WP. See below figure.     If you select Node means it is only one. See below figure.     2. In the Size box, select the material size. 3. In the Feasibility box, enter the feasibility percentage.     Tip: If you enter 100, the items which have the feasibility percentage of 100 will be listed. If you enter 10, the items which         have the feasibility percentage above 10 will be listed. 4. If you want to see the feasibility percentage for any particular warehouse, select the warehouse listed in the Warehouse field If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the JDE warehouse, select the checkbox of JDE. If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the Offcut warehouse, select the checkbox of Offcut. If you want to view the feasibility percentage for the items in the FIM warehouse, select the checkbox of FIM. 5. Click FEASIBILTY SEARCH. The feasibility result opens based on the given input and feasibility percentage.       According to the material type i.e., PG, PT, or Node, the feasibility percentage is calculated in the back end by using the pre-defined formula, respectively. Note: If you want clear the given input data, click   (CLEAR button). 6. Click (Expand icon) of the respective type or click   (Expand All button) to expand all the type together. A new window opens and shows a list of items included in the type.     CNC sheet no – shows the respective CNC sheet number of the item. Warehouse – shows the warehouse type. BOM Qty – shows the material size added in the BOM. Required Qty – shows the required quantity of item. Stock Qty – shows the overall quantity of stock available in all the inventories. Available Qty – shows the available quantity of item. Reserve / Release Qty– shows the reserved / released quantity of item. MR Qty– shows the quantity of item for which the material requests has added. MI Qty– shows the quantity of item for which the material issuance has done. 7. If you want to give purchase order details, enter in the PO Details column. 8. Click Save changes. 2.4 Clear Feasibility Search Data If you want to clear the data of feasibility search done by any of the user, you can use this clear feasibility search data functionality. Users assign with Admin role only have access to view the Clear Feasibility Search Data tab in the Pre Planning menu. To clear the feasibility search data, 1. Click Clear Feasibility Search Data in the Pre Planning The Feasibility Search Clear page opens.                                                         Figure 2.4: Feasibility Search Clear page The page shows the feasibility search data of all the users. 2. Click (Clear icon) of the respective user to clear the feasibility search data. The feasibility search data of the selected user will be cleared. 2.5 Offcut Inventory When a material issuance has been created with the Offcut material, we need to add the offcut material details in the Offcut inventory. To add the offcut material details, 1. Click Offcut Inventory in the Pre Planning The Offcut Inventory page opens.                                                   Figure 2.5: Offcut Inventory page 2.5.1 Add Offcut Material Detail To add the offcut material detail, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Offcut Inventory See Fig 2.5. A new window opens to add the details of offcut material.     1. In the Material Request box, select a material request from a drop-down list. The cut length for the selected material request opens.       2. In the Cut Length column, change the cut length of the offcut item if you want. Note: The cut length should not be exceeded the material issuance quantity. 3. In the Received Date box, choose the date when the offcut material received in the Offcut inventory. 4. Click Save changes. The offcut material is added. 2.5.2 Change the Received Cut Length Quantity If you want to change the quantity of the received cut length, 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective material request. See Fig 5.5. The page shows the added details.   2. In the Cut Length box, enter the received cut length quantity. 3. In the Unique Number box, enter the unique number. 4. Click Save. The added cut length quantity will be updated in the Received Cut Length column. 2.5.3 Adjust Cut Length Quantity To adjust the cut length quantity, 1. Click  (Add icon) in the Adjustment   The Adjustment window opens.     2. Click  (ADD button) in the Adjustment     3. In the Adjustment Qty box, enter the adjustment cut length quantity. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. Click Save. The adjusted cut length quantity will be updated.     2.5.4 Export Offcut Inventory List You can export a list of offcut materials added in the Offcut Inventory page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.5.5 Filter an Offcut Material If you want to filter any offcut material from the list of offcut materials in the Offcut Inventory page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.6 Material Request The Material Request tab in the Pre Planning menu helps to manage the material requests added in the Feasibility page. 2.6.1 Add a Material Request If you want to add a material request, do the following steps, 1. Navigate to the generated feasibility results in the Feasibility   2. Select the checkbox of the type for which you want to add the material requests. 3. Click (ADD MATERIAL REQUEST button). The Subcon Details window opens.     4. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor. 5. In the Request Date & Timebox, choose the request date and time. 6. In the Location box, select a location. 7. Click SAVE. The material request will be added in the Material Request page. Note: For each item code included in the project, one material request will be created individually. For example, The BOM quantity is 18 and you set the high priority for JDE and the least priority for Offcut. A material request will be created with the JDE inventory if the JDE has the same quantity of 18. If the JDE is available with quantity of 10, then two material requests will be created separately for quantity of 10 in JDE and quantity of 8 in Offcut. 8. Click Material Request in the Pre Planning The Material Request page opens and shows the list of created material requests.                                                              Figure 2.6: Material Request page Note: The material request displayed in different color explains the status of the request. The material request displayed in Blue color indicates a new material request. The material request displayed in Green color indicates the completed material request. 9. If you want to view the material details, click (Expand icon) of the respective request. The Material Details window opens and shows the material details.   2.6.2 Approve a Material Request Once you have added the material request, the Request Status column in the Material Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). 1. If you want to approve the material request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved material request will be moved for Material Acceptance. 2.6.3 View a Material Request Report If you want to view a material request report, click  (Report icon) provided in the Report column of the Material Request page. 2.6.4 Export Material Request List You can export a list of material requests added in the Material Request page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.6.5 Filter a Material Request If you want to filter any material request from the list of material requests in the Material Request page, you can use  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.7 Material Issuance When a material request has been created with the Offcut inventory, we need to issue materials from the Offcut inventory for the created request. Note: You can do the material issuance process for materials only in the Offcut inventory. The Material Issuance tab in the Pre Planning menu helps to issue the materials from the Offcut inventory based on the added material request. 1. Click Material Issuance in the Pre Planning The Material Issuance page opens.                                                           Figure 2.7: Material Issuance 2.7.1 Add a Material Issuance Report If you want to add a material issuance report, 1. Click (ADD button) in the Material Issuance See Fig 2.7. The page opens a new window to add the details of material issuance.         Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Material Request Number box, select a material request number from a drop-down list. 3. In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date. 4. Click Save. The material issuance request will be added. 2.7.2 Add Issued Quantity Once you have added the material issuance request, you must add the issued quantity details. To add, 1. Click   (Add icon) in the Result The Material Details window opens.   2. Check the available quantity in the Total Quantity 3. In the Issued Qty column, enter the issued quantity.   Note: The issued quantity can be higher than the available total quantity for all type of components. 4. Click Save changes. 2.7.3 Approve a Material Issuance Once you have added the material issuance, the Issue Status column in the Material Issuance page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). 1. If you want to approve the material issuance, click  (Approve icon) in the Issue Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. The approved material issuance will be moved to Offcut Inventory. 2.7.4 View a Material Issuance Report If you want to view a material issuance report, click (Report icon) provided in the Report column of the Material Issuance page. 2.7.5 Export Material Issuance List You can export a list of material issuances added in the Material Issuance page in the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.7.6 Filter a Material Issuance If you want to filter any material issuance from the list of material issuances in the Material Issuance page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, “Filter a BOM”. 2.8 CNC Process The CNC Process tab in the Pre Planning menu helps to update the unique number of the added material request. 1. Click CNC Process in the Pre Planning The CNC Process Update page opens and shows a list of added material requests.                                                             Figure 2.8: CNC Process page 2. In the Unique Number column, enter the unique number of the material request. The unique number will be updated successfully. 2.9 BOM Status by Size The BOM Status by ISO tab in the Planning menu helps to view the BOM status added against the ISO number. To view the BOM status, 1. Click BOM Status by ISO in the Planning The BOM Status by ISO page opens and shows a list of modules with their ISO numbers.                                                                  Figure 2.9: BOM Status by ISO page 2. Click (Expand icon) in the Details The page shows the items included in the respective module including the BOM quantity, material request quantity, material issued quantity, and offcut material quantity.       2.9.1 Export BOM Status You can export the BOM generated in the BOM Status by ISO page in an excel format by using  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.10 BOM Details The BOM Details tab in the Planning menu helps to view the added BOM details. To view the BOM details, 1. Click BOM Details in the Planning The BOM Details page opens.                                                                Figure 2.10: BOM Details page 2. If you want to view any particular BOM details, you can use the filter options (Explained below) given in the page, If you want to view the BOM details of any sub-contractor, select a sub-contractor in the Sub Contractor Name  box. If you want to view the BOM details of any module, select a module in the Module box. If you want to view the BOM details against an ISO number, select an ISO number in the ISO Number box. If you want to view the BOM details for any item code, select an item code in the Item Code box. If you want to view the BOM details against a MR number, select a MR number in the MR Number box. The Option 1, Option 2, Option 3, and Option 4boxes are provided to filter the BOM details by giving the BOM description. 3. Click Search. The BOM will be displayed based on the given data in the filter boxes. 2.10.1 Export BOM Details You can export the BOM details generated in the BOM Details page in an excel format by using   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”. 2.11 View Release Note The View Release Note tab in the Pre Planning menu helps you to add a new spool release note and the spool inspection result for the added release note. 1. Click View Release Note in the Pre Planning The View Release Note page opens.                                                             Figure 2.11: View Release Note 2.11.1 Add a Spool Release Note If you want to add a new spool release note, do the following steps, 1. Click  (ADD button) in the View Release Note The Release Note page opens.           Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving. 2. In the Release Note Date box, choose the release note date. 3. In the Location box, select a location. Before saving the request, you must add spools. Note: You can add multiple spools for one request. The page shows a list of added spools. 3. Click (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add. The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page. 4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any. 5. In the Inspection Item box, enter the inspection item detail. 6. In the Subject Coverage box, enter the subject coverage detail. 7. Click Save. The release note for spool will be added and listed in the View Release Note page. 2.11.2 Add Results of Spool Inspection After completing the spool inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add the results, do the following steps, 1. Click (Result icon) in the Result column of the respective request. The window opens and shows with a list of spools including their inspection result.     2.11.3 Submit a Spool Release Note Once you have completed the spool inspection, you should submit the inspection for the further process. the Request Status column in the Release Note for Spool Inspection page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 2.11. 1. If you want to submit the spool inspection, click  (Submit icon) in the Completed Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 2.11.4 View a Spool Inspection Report If you want to view a spool inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the View Release Note page. See Fig 2.11. 2.11.5 Attach a File into a Spool Inspection Report If you want to attach a file with any existing spool inspection report in the View Release Note page, 1. Click  (Attach icon) provided against the respective request in the View Release Note The File Upload (P&ID - Drawings) page opens.           Note: Before uploading any file, read the instructions given in the File Upload (PN) page. 2. Click (Browse button). 3. Select a file which you want to upload from your computer. 4. Click (Upload button) to attach the file. The uploaded file will be displayed in the File Upload table. 2.11.6 Export Spool Inspection Report List You can export a list of spool inspection reports in the View Release Note page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export BOM List”.User Management Users and Roles Management Master Data Company wide master data such as PQR, WPS, Welders, Projects etc Welder Management WQT Request ( Welder Qualification Test Report Request) WQT is a critical process in the welding industry designed to assess the skills and proficiency of welders to ensure that they meet specific standards for various welding applications. View WQT Request: The created WQT request will be displayed in the list. Create WQT Request: The system will automatically generate Report number and the user is able to change the report number. Select Master Project name Select Module Name WQT Type (Official / Outsource / Internal) Official () Outsource () Internal () WQT Tested Date WQT Issue Date Application Code: (ASME or AWS) Witnessed By: ( Supervisor Name) Add Welder in WQT Request If the user wants to add a welder to the WQT request, click Result (plus icon) in the WQT view request View WQT Details: The created welders in the WQT request will be displayed in the list. Add Welder for qualification if its new welder coming for qualification, select "New Welder" option and keyin all mandatory columns, and if you click the Save button, data will be saved in the WQT request, and this Welder will be added in Welder Master and WPQ list ONLY when the Visual & RT result value should be accepted; otherwise, this welder won;t be added in WPQ list. If its existing welder and wants to add a new qualification, select "Existing Welder" option and select welder from the list and keyin all mandatory columns, and if you click the Save button, data will be saved in the WQT request, and this Welder will be added in WPQ list ONLY when the Visual & RT result value should be accepted; otherwise, this welder won;t be added in WPQ list. Update welder certificate If you click "Welder Certificate" icon in each qualification, the certificate pop-up window will be opened. 1. If the WQT request is piping, the system will automatically select "Pipe" option, and the user can't change and if the WQT request is structural, the system will automatically select "Plate" option. 2. Certificate variables will be loaded based on the discipline (Pipe / Plate) and the variable master value in WQT Parameters screen. 3. If the user keyin exact "Actual Values" for that variable, the system will automatically combine Min & Max values and update in 4. "Range Qualified" column. An ADMIN user can generate a welder certificate report using Report icon An ADMIN user can set the workflow approval process in the workflow master, and the workflow category is WQT. The approver's signature will be displayed in the Welder Certificate report footer. Welder Pass If you click "Pass" icon in each qualification, the system will combine all this welder's qualifications & displayed in welder pass. If you scan the QR code in the welder pass on your mobile, the system will show the scanned welder's current valid qualifications. Because the welder pass might be printed & issued to the welder some months before. Suppose if the client representative wants to check the welder's current valid qualification in the welding yard, just scan and check, and there is no need to call the welder's pass-issued person or coordinator to check. Piping qualifications are shown in green color (if it's) Structural qualifications are shown in yellow color (if it's).  For Example, pls refer to the screenshots below. Welder Pass Inspection If you want to print the selected welder's pass in the report, add those welders in weder pass inspection request and generate welder pass report after submission. Here user can set the Workflow Approval process also. WQT Reports WQT Report. WQT Contractor-wise Report. The ADMI user can take contractor wise welder qualification register report. It will show No. of welder pass or fail details & No. of coupons issued for the qualification test in a WQT request-wise. WQT Overall Status (Contractor & Material-wise status Report) WQT Contractor Wise Pass & Coupon status Report Mobile Apps - Piping User Management 1.1 Downloading cuteQM app To use the cuteQM app you must first download it from the Play Store. Open the Play Store and search for “cuteQM”. Download and install the cuteQMapp on your mobile phone. After installation, open the cuteQM You are ready to go! 1.2 Log in After installation, when you open the cuteQM app you may be asked to Login. Follow the steps to successfully log into your account.        1. Before enter your user id and password, tap  (Settings icon) and enter the app URL that is provided by your administrator. 2. Tap Save. 3. Enter your user id and password in the allocated fields. 4. Tap Log in to complete the process. The home screen of the cuteQM app is appeared. 1.3 Home screen of cuteQM app                                                               Figure 2.2 Home screen of cuteQM app - (show/hide icon) helps to show/hide the user id information that is displayed in the left pane of the home screen. if you touch this icon the information appears on, if you touch this icon again the information goes off. - provided with a down arrow.  If you click the down arrow, a list opens with three options such as Clear Storage, Sync Data, and Log out. Clear Storage - clears all data in this app. Tap the Clear Storageoption to delete all the data. Sync Data- synchronizes your inspection results with the respective reports in the web application. If your inspection results are not automatically synchronized with the web application, tap the Sync Data option for manual synchronization. Log out - See "Log out" section for details about log out of the app.  Project – helps to select the project. To select the project, Tap the Project box, and select the project from a drop-down list.  Module – helps to select the module. To select the module, Select Piping under the Module Tap GO. A dashboard of the app is appeared. Note: The dashboard does not display MILL CERTIFICATES and TEST EQUIPMENT tabs unless your administrator adds your role in the cuteQM_Certificate Access option in the web application.                                          Figure 2.3 Dashboard of cuteQM app You can navigate through the app using the dashboard. The dashboard shows different tabs according to the type of project and module that you have selected. 1.4 Log out Log out of your user's account from this Log out option. This command ends your current session of the app work. Tap the Log out option for logging out of the app. This will lead you back to the Log in Screen. See Fig 2.2. SET DEFAULT PROJECT 2.0 SET DEFAULT PROJECT The SET DEFAULT PROJECT tab helps you to select or change the project and module.         To select or change the project and module, Note: if you are signing in to the app after the first-time login process, the app automatically redirects you into the dashboard page. Tap SET DEFAULT PROJECT. See Fig 2.3. The SET DEFAULT PROJECT page opens.       Tap the Project box, and select the project from a drop-down list. Select the module you want, under the Module Tap GO. TAKE OFFLINE DATA 3.0 TAKE OFFLINE DATA The TAKE OFFLINE DATA tab helps you viewing the reports for the specific inspection dates you want.     When you select the respective dashboard tab you can view a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports other than today and previous day, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA tab. Do the following steps to view the reports using the TAKE OFFLINE DATA tab, Tap TAKE OFFLINE DATA. See Fig 2.3. A new window opens for selecting category and date you want.     In the Categorybox, tap and select the option you want to view the reports from a drop-down list. In the Date box, choosethe period of inspection by selecting respective dates. Tip: If you want to choose the period of inspection for more than one day, you must select from and to dates, accordingly. Tap Submit. A new page opens for the selected option in the Category box.MILL CERTIFICATES 4.0 MILL CERTIFICATES The MILL CERTIFICATES tab allows you to view the material certificates added in the web application. This feature works only in online mode.       To view the material certificates, Tap MILL CERTIFICATES. See Fig 2.3. The Mill Certificates page opens.         Tap the Component box and select the component name from a drop-down list. Note: If you want to view the certificate for a specific component, enter the size, thickness, material name, class, heat number, rating, do number, expiry date or remarks of the component in the respective boxes. Tap Get Certificates. A list of material certificates for the selected component is appeared.        Tip: If you want to view any attachment added with the material certificate, tap  (Attach icon). Note: If the number of certificates exceeds 500, you will receive the following notification: “The result records are more than 500, so system can’t load, pls add another filter and search”.TEST EQUIPMENT 5.0 TEST EQUIPMENT The TEST EQUIPMENT tab helps you to get the details of the testing equipment that are added in the web application. This feature works only in online mode.     To get the test equipment details, 1. Tap TEST EQUIPMENT. See Fig 2.3. The Testing Equipment page opens.       2. Enter the component name in the Component Note: If you want to get details for the specific test equipment, enter the description, test date, expiry date, or remarks of the equipment in the respective boxes. 3. Tap Get Test Equipment. A list of test equipment reports for the selected component is appeared. Tip: If you want to view an attachment added with the test equipment, tap   (Attach icon). Note: If the number of test equipment reports exceeds 500, you will receive the following notification: “The result records are more than 500, so system can’t load, pls add another filter and search”.MIR 6.0 MIR The MIR tab helps you to check and update a material verification report for the MIR requests, which are uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This MIR feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the material verification report in the web application.     Note: when you click the MIR tab in the dashboard, the MIR page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA " for more details). 1. Tap MIR. See Fig 2.3. The MIR page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                                     Figure 6.1 MIR page Tip: I. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or location details in the respective boxes given in the MIR page. The MIR page contains the following fields: Report Number– shows the request’s report number. Inspection Date– shows the date of inspection. Location– shows the location where the inspection to be performed. Result– you can add your inspection results. Signature– you can add your signature after completing the inspection. Attach – you can view any supporting document that is attached in the web application by tapping (Attach icon). Tip: You can filter the supporting document by using the File Name and File Size in KB options provided in the Attach page.  See Fig given below.       Print– you can download a copy of the report by tapping   (Print icon).  Tip: After adding your inspection details and signature into the MIR report, you can download a latest copy of the report by using the Print option to check whether your inspection details and signature are successfully updated with the report. Sync – notifieswhether your inspection details are automatically synchronized with the web application or not. This Sync section initially shows the Sync icon like   . Once you add your inspection details the Sync icon appears in . After synchronization of your inspection details, the Sync section changes the Sync icon into . Tip: If your inspection details are not automatically synchronized, navigate to the manual synchronization option. (See “Sync Data “for more details.) To add your MIR inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 7.1. The Result page opens with a list of reports with the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as description, specification, size, and type.     In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. In Cert column, tap (Edit icon) for the report you want to add your result. A new page for the selected report opens. Check and re-enter Quantity of the materials if you want. In Heat No box, enter the heat number. Checkthe certificate number in the Cert In Dimen, Visual, and Mill Testoptions, choose Accepted or Rejected based on your inspection details. In Plate Nobox, enter the plate number. In Uniq Nobox, enter the unique number. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, you must add your signature in the Signature field. Note: Make sure that you can add your signature if your role has assigned as QA, Subcontractor, Client or Owner, by the administrator. Tap   (Signature icon), See Fig 7.1. The signature page opens. Note: If you are a login user, you can directly do sign for the respective role in the signature box, otherwise you must login with your user id and password before signing.     Tap  (Sign icon) provided in the right-side pane for the corresponding Type based on your role. A new signature box opens.   In the Name box, enter your name. Note: If your role has assigned as QA, your name will be displayed automatically in the Name box. Other than QA, you must add your name before signing. In the Signature box, write your signature, and tap Save. RFI FITUP INSPECTION 7.0 RFI FITUP INSPECTION The RFI FITUP INSPECTION tab helps you to check and approve the RFI fitup request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This RFI fitup inspection feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the RFI Fitup report that is uploaded in the web application.      Note: when you click the RFI FITUP INSPECTION tab in the dashboard, the RFI Fitup Inspection page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap RFI FITUP INSPECTION.See Fig 2.3. The RFI Fitup Inspection page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                              Figure 8.1 RFI Fitup Inspection page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or location details in the respective boxes given in the RFI Fitup Inspectionpage. The RFI Fitup Inspection page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about each field in the RFI Fitup Inspection page.) To add your RFI fitup inspection result 1. Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 8.1. The Result page opens with a list of reports with the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as system details, line numbers, heat numbers, spool number, components name, MIR details, etc.   2. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. 3. Check and reenter the heat numbers of the respective report where you want to add your inspection details. 4. In the Resultbox, tab and choose Pending, Accepted, Rejected or Cancelled from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. 5. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. 6. If you want to add any photo with the report, do the following steps,         a. Tab (photo capturing icon).         Your mobile camera starts to capture the image.         b. Capture the material part, which you want to add.         The captured images are automatically saved in the image’s gallery.         c. Tab(Images icon) to view the captured images. Note: The captured images are automatically updated with the web application. Tab Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap  (Signature icon), See Fig 8.1. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“.RFI WELD INSPECTION 8.0 RFI WELD INSPECTION The RFI WELD INSPECTION tab allows you to check and approve the RFI weld visual request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This RFI weld inspection feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the RFI weld report that is uploaded in the web application.      Note: when you click the RFI WELD INSPECTION tab in the dashboard, the RFI Weld Inspection page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap RFI WELD INSPECTION.See Fig 2.3. The RFI Weld Inspection page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                           Figure 9.1 RFI Weld Inspection page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or location details in the respective boxes given in the RFI Weld Inspectionpage. The RFI Weld Inspection page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about each field in the RFI Weld Inspection page.) To add your RFI weld inspection result 1. Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 9.1.       The Result page opens with a list of reports with the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as system name, line name, heat numbers, spool number, components name, joint number, etc. 2. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. See Fig given below step 5. 3. In the Result box, tap and choose Pending, Accepted, Rejected or Cancelled from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. 4. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. 5. In the Consumable box, enter the weld consumable name. 6. To add the welding details, tap (welding details add icon). A new window opens.   In the Datebox, choose date. In the Namebox, tap and select your name from a drop-down list. In the Layers box,tap and select layers from a drop-down list. In the Process box, tap and select the weld process from a drop-down list. Tap Save. 7. If you want to delete any welder ID details from a list, tap  (delete icon).     You will receive the following notification: “Confirm delete?”. If you want to delete tap Yes, otherwise tap No. Tab Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 9.1. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“.SPOOL RELEASE 9.0 SPOOL RELEASE The SPOOL RELEASE tab helps you to check and update the spools added in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the spool report that is uploaded in the web application.     Note: when you click the SPOOL RELEASE tab in the dashboard, the Spool Release page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap SPOOL RELEASE.See Fig 2.3. The Spool Release page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                               Figure 10.1 Spool Release page  Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or location details in the respective boxes given in the Spool Releasepage. The Spool Release page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about each field in the Spool Release page.) To add your spool inspection result 1. Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 10.1.     The Result page opens with a list of reports with the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as spool number, line number, and drawing number. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. In the Resultbox, tap and choose Pending, Accepted, Rejected or Cancelled from a drop-down list based on your inspection details In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 10.1. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“.SHOW ALL PENDING REPORTS 10.0 SHOW ALL PENDING REPORTS The SHOW ALL PENDING REPORTS tab helps you to view all pending reports for the inspections those are not completed yet. By using this feature, you can check whether the QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner have submitted their inspection report.         This feature automatically updates the detail of all pending reports from the web application. You can view the pending reports in an offline mode also. Do the following steps to view the pending reports, 1. Tap SHOW ALL PENDING REPORTS.  The Pending Reports page opens.                                                     Figure 11.1 Pending Reports page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number or category details in the respective boxes given in the Pending Reportspage. The Pending Reports page contains the following fields: Report Number - shows the report number of the pending reports. Category - shows the category of the pending reports. QA, Subcon, Client, and Owner- each field appears with a check box to show whether the inspection has completed by the QA, Subcontractor, Client, and Owner, respectively. Note: If the check box of any field is enabled with the tick mark, it means that the respective person has completed the inspection. Not required - appears with a check box that helps you to decide about further inspection process. You can enable the check box if you have decided that no need of any further inspection process to be done by the QA, Subcontractor, Client or Owner. Tap the Category box, and select the category from a drop-down list. The Pending Reports page shows a list of pending reports corresponding to the selected category. You can check the status of the report. If want to end up the inspection process, enable the check box in the Not required Tap Save. HYDRO PRESSURE 11.0 HYDRO PRESSURE The HYDRO PRESSURE tab helps you to update the status and result of the RFI hydro pressure request raised in the web application. You can add your hydro pressure inspection details by using this feature. This feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the hydro pressure report of the request, which is uploaded in the web application.         Note: when you click the HYDRO PRESSURE tab in the dashboard, the Hydro Pressure page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap HYDRO PRESSURE. See Fig 2.3. The Hydro Pressure page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                            Figure 12.1 Hydro Pressure page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.               2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or location details in the respective boxes given in the Hydro Pressurepage. The Hydro Pressure page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about each field in the Hydro Pressure page.) To add your hydro pressure inspection result 1. Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap  (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 12.1.       The Result page opens with a list of reports with the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as spool number, line number, drawing number, size, test pressure and medium, and pressure gauge number. 2. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. 3. In the Resultbox, tap and choose Pending, Accepted, Rejected or Cancelled from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. 4. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. 5. Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 10.1. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“.NDT REPORTS 12.0 NDT REPORTS The NDT REPORTS tab allows you to check and update the NDT request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the NDT report that is uploaded in the web application.       There are four main types of NDT Reports: RT, UT, DPT, and MPT. Note: when you click the NDT REPORTS tab in the dashboard, the NDT Reports page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap NDT REPORTS.See Fig 2.3. The NDT Reports page opens with a list of reports for the corresponding types such as RT, UT, DPT, and MPT. You must select the respective type to view the relevant reports.                                                           Figure 13.1 NDT Reports page  Tip: I. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, NDT request number or inspection date details in the respective boxes given in the NDT Reportspage. The NDT Reports page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, NDT Request number, Inspection Date, Result, Signature, Attach, and Sync. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about each field in the NDT Reports page.) Tip: In the NDT Reports option, the Print field is not available. To add your inspection result for NDT RT report Tap RT. Once you find out the NDT RT report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 13.1. The Result page opens with a list of reports with the material details.     Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, spool number, joint number, and joint length. 3. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. 4. If you want to add the new NDT RT report, tap (Add icon). A new window opens.       In the Marker box, enter the marker number. In the Resultbox, tap and choose NA, Accepted, Rejected or Reshoot from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. 5. If you want to edit the existing NDT RT report, tap (Edit icon). A new window opens.   In the Marker box, check and edit the marker number if you want. In the Resultbox, tap and choose NA, Accepted, Rejected or Reshoot from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. 6. If you want to delete any existing NDT RT report from a list, tap  (Delete icon).   You will receive the following notification: “Confirm delete?”. If you want to delete tab Yes, otherwise tab No. Tap Save. To add your signature for NDT RT Report Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap  (Signature icon), See Fig 10.1. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. To add your inspection result for NDT UT, DPT, and MPT reports Note: Follow the same procedure to add result for the NDT UT, DPT or MPT reports. Tap UT,DPT or MPT, See Fig 13.1. Once you find out the NDT UT, DPT or MPT report, where you need to add your inspection details, tap  (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 13.1. The Result page opens with a list of reports with the material details.     Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, spool number, joint number, and joint length. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. In the Resultbox, tab and choose Accepted, Rejected or Cancelled from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. To add your signature for NDT UT, DPT, and MPT reports Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 10.1. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“.Mobile App - Structural User Management 1.1 Downloading cuteQM app To use the cuteQM app you must first download it from the Play Store. Open the Play Store and search for “cuteQM”. Download and install the cuteQMapp on your mobile phone. After installation, open the cuteQM You are ready to go! 1.2 Log in After installation, when you open the cuteQM app you may be asked to Login.     Follow the steps to successfully log into your account. Before enter your user id and password, tap (Settings icon) and enter the app URL that is provided by your administrator. Tap Save. Enter your user id and password in the allocated fields. Tap Log in to complete the process. The home screen of the cuteQM app is appeared. 1.3 Home screen of cuteQM app                                                   Figure 1.3 Home screen of cuteQM app  - (show/hide icon) helps to show/hide the user id information that is displayed in the left pane of the home screen. if you touch this icon the information appears on, if you touch this icon again the information goes off.  -  provided with a down arrow.  If you click the down arrow, a list opens with three options such as Clear Storage, Sync Data, and Log out. Clear Storage - clears all data in this app. Tap the Clear Storageoption to delete all the data. Sync Data- synchronizes your inspection results with the respective reports in the web application. If your inspection results are not automatically synchronized with the web application, tap the Sync Data option for manual synchronization. Log out - See "Log out" section for details about log out of the app.  Project – helps to select the project. To select the project, Tap the Project box, and select the project such as vessel or repair vessel, from a drop-down list.  Module – helps to select the module. To select the module, Select Structural under the Module Tap GO. A dashboard of the app is appeared. You can navigate through the app using the dashboard. The dashboard shows different tabs according to the type of project and module that you have selected. 1. If you have selected the vessel project in the Project box, the dashboard shows the following tabs, (See the topic,  “VESSEL PROJECT” for more details about the vessel project.)                                          Figure 2.3 Dashboard for vessel project in cuteQM app 2. If you have selected the repair vessel project in the Project box, the dashboard shows the following tabs, (See the topic,    “REPAIR VESSEL PROJECT” for more details about the repair vessel project.)                                 Figure 2.4 Dashboard for repair vessel project in cuteQM app Note: The dashboard does not display MILL CERTIFICATES and TEST EQUIPMENT tabs unless your administrator adds your role in the cuteQM_Certificate Access option in the web application. 1.4 Log out Log out of your user's account from this Log out option. This command ends your current session of the app work. Tap the Log out option for logging out of the app. This will lead you back to the Log in Screen. See Fig 2.2. VESSEL PROJECT 2.0 Vessel Project The dashboard of the vessel project contains various tabs See Fig 2.3. The following sections explain you about the functionalities of each tab associated with the vessel project, 2.1 SET DEFAULT PROJECT The SET DEFAULT PROJECT tab helps you to select or change the project and module.         To switchover between the vessel and repair vessel projects and modules, Note: If you are signing in to the app after the first-time login process, the app automatically redirects you into the dashboard page. 1. Tap SET DEFAULT PROJECT. See Fig 2.3. The SET DEFAULT PROJECT page opens.       2. Tap the Project box, and select the vessel type project from a drop-down list. 3. Select the module you want, under the Module 4. Tap GO. 2.2 TAKE OFFLINE DATA The TAKE OFFLINE DATA tab helps you viewing the reports for the specific inspection dates you want.       When you select the respective dashboard tab you can view a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports other than today and previous day, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA tab. Do the following steps to view the reports using the TAKE OFFLINE DATA tab, 1. Tap TAKE OFFLINE DATA. See Fig 2.3. A new window opens for selecting category and date you want.       2. In the Category box, tap and select the option you want to view the reports from a drop-down list. 3. In the Date box, choose the period of inspection by selecting respective dates.   Tip: If you want to choose the period of inspection for more than one day, you must select from and to dates, accordingly. 4. Tap Submit. A new page opens for the selected option in the Category box. 2.3 MILL CERTIFICATES The MILL CERTIFICATES tab allows you to view the material certificates added in the web application. This feature works only in online mode.       To view the material certificates, 1. Tap MILL CERTIFICATES. See Fig 2.3. The Mill Certificates page opens.       2. Tap the Component box and select the component name from a drop-down list. Note: If you want to view the certificate for a specific component, enter the size, thickness, material name, class, heat number, rating, do number, expiry date or remarks of the component in the respective boxes. 3. Tap Get Certificates. A list of material certificates for the selected component is appeared. Tip: If you want to view any attachment added with the material certificate, tap  (Attach icon).     Note: If the number of certificates exceeds 500, you will receive the following notification: “The result records are more than 500, so system can’t load, pls add another filter and search”. 2.4 TEST EQUIPMENT The TEST EQUIPMENT tab helps you to get the details of the testing equipment that are added in the web application. This feature works only in online mode. To get the test equipment details, 1. Tap TEST EQUIPMENT. See Fig 2.3.    The Testing Equipment page opens.       2. Enter the component name in the Component Note: If you want to get details for the specific test equipment, enter the description, test date, expiry date, or remarks of the equipment in the respective boxes. 3. Tap Get Test Equipment. A list of test equipment reports for the selected component is appeared. Tip: If you want to view an attachment added with the test equipment, tap  (Attach icon). Note: If the number of test equipment reports exceeds 500, you will receive the following notification: “The result records are more than 500, so system can’t load, pls add another filter and search”. 2.5 MIR The MIR tab helps you to check and update a material verification report for the MIR requests, which are uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This MIR feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the material verification report in the web application.       Note: When you click the MIR tab in the dashboard, the MIR page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA " for more details). 1. Tap MIR. See Fig 2.5. The MIR page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                                          Figure 2.5 MIR page Tip: I. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly. 1. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or location details in the respective boxes given in the MIR page. The MIR page contains the following fields: Report Number– shows the request’s report number. Inspection Date– shows the date of inspection. Location– shows the location where the inspection to be performed. Result– you can add your inspection results. Signature– you can add your signature after completing the inspection. Attach – you can view any supporting document that is attached in the web application by tapping  (Attach icon). Tip: You can filter the supporting document by using the File Name and File Size in KB options provided in the Attach page.  See Fig given below.   Print– you can download a copy of the report by tapping  (Print icon). Tip: After adding your inspection details and signature into the MIR report, you can download a latest copy of the report by using the Print option to check whether your inspection details and signature are successfully updated with the report. Sync – notifies whether your inspection details are automatically synchronized with the web application or not. This Sync section initially shows the Sync icon like . Once you add your inspection details the Sync icon appears in . After synchronization of your inspection details, the Sync section changes the Sync icon into . Tip: If your inspection details are not automatically synchronized, navigate to the manual synchronization option. (See “Sync Data “for more details.) To add your MIR inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.1.     The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as description, specification, size, and type. 2. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. 3. In Cert column, tap (Edit icon) for the report you want to add your result. A new page for the selected report opens.   4. Check and re-enter Quantity of the materials if you want. 5. In Heat No box, enter the heat number. 6. Check the certificate number in the Cert 7. In Dimen, Visual, and Mill Test options, choose Accepted or Rejected based on your inspection details. 8. In Plate No box, enter the plate number. 9. In Unique No box, enter the unique number. 10. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. 11. Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, you must add your signature in the Signature field. Note: Make sure that you can add your signature if your role has assigned as QA, Subcontractor, Client or Owner, by the administrator. Tap   (Signature icon), See Fig 3.1. The signature page opens. Note: If you are a login user, you can directly do sign for the respective role in the signature box, otherwise you must login with your user id and password before signing.     2. Tap (Sign icon) provided in the right-side pane for the corresponding Type based on your role. A new signature box opens.   3. In the Name box, enter your name. Note: If your role has assigned as QA, your name will be automatically displayed in the Name box. Other than QA, you must add your name before signing. 4. In the Signature box, write your signature, and tap Save. 2.6 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION The MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION tab helps you to check and update the material substitution request, which is uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This material substitution feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the material substitution report in the web application. Note: When you click the MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION tab in the dashboard, the RFI Material Substitution page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA " for more details). 1. Tap MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION. See Fig 2.6. The RFI Material Substitution page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                     Figure 2.6 RFI Material Substitution page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.          2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the RFI Material Substitution page. The RFI Material Substitution page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result      None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.      Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.      Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the RFI Material Substitution page.) To add your RFI material substitution result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.2. The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as DWG. Ref detail, material name, original size, original grade, and quantity. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. See Fig 3. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 3.2. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 2.7 RFI FITUP INSPECTION The RFI FITUP INSPECTION tab helps you to check and approve the RFI fitup request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This RFI fitup inspection feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the RFI Fitup report that is uploaded in the web application.     Note: When you click the RFI FITUP INSPECTION tab in the dashboard, the RFI Fitup Request page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap RFI FITUP INSPECTION.See Fig 2.7. The RFI Fitup Request page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                           Figure 2.7 RFI Fitup Request page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.               2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the RFI Fitup Request page. The RFI Fitup Request page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result       None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.       Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.       Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the RFI Fitup Request page.) To add your RFI fitup inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.3. The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material specifications such as system and sub system numbers, drawing number, joint number, piece mark number, size, and width details, WPS, and plate number. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. See Fig 3. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment In the Heat No box, check and edit the heat number. In the Result box, tap and choose Accepted, Rejected or Cancelled from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 3.3. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 2.8 RFI WELD INSPECTION The RFI WELD INSPECTION tab allows you to check and approve the RFI weld visual request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This RFI Weld Inspection feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the RFI Weld report that is uploaded in the web application.     Note: When you click the RFI WELD INSPECTION tab in the dashboard, the RFI Weld Inspection page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap RFI WELD INSPECTION. See Fig 2.3. The RFI Weld Inspection page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                   Figure 3.4 RFI Weld Inspection page Tip: I. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly. 1. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or location details in the respective boxes given in the RFI Weld Inspection page. The RFI Weld Inspection page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about each field in the RFI Weld Inspection page.) To add your RFI weld inspection result 1. Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.4.   The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as system and sub system names, drawing number, joint number, and WPS. 2. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. 3. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. 4. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment 5. If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment 6. In the Result box, tap and choose Pending, Accepted, Rejected or Cancelled from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. 7. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. 8. To add the welding details, tap (welding details add icon). A new window opens.   In the Date box, choose date. In the Name box, tap and select your name from a drop-down list. In the Layers box,tap and select layers from a drop-down list. In the Process box, tap and select the weld process from a drop-down list. In the Position box, tap and select the weld position from a drop-down list. Tap Save. 9. If you want to delete any welder ID details from a list, tap (delete icon). You will receive the following notification: “Confirm delete?”. If you want to delete tap Yes, otherwise tap No. 10. Tab Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 3.4. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 2.9 RFI HYDRO PRESSURE The RFI HYDRO PRESSURE tab helps you to check and update the RFI hydro pressure request, which is uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This RFI hydro pressure feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the material substitution report in the web application.   Note: When you click the RFI HYDRO PRESSURE tab in the dashboard, the RFI Hydro Pressure page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See “ TAKE OFFLINE DATA” for more details.) 1. Tap RFIHYDRO PRESSURE. See Fig 2.3. The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                 Figure 3.5 RFI Hydro Pressure page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.               2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or status details in the respective boxes given in the RFI Hydro Pressure page. The RFI Hydro Pressure page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result       None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.       Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.       Close – notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the RFI Hydro Pressure page.) To add your RFI hydro pressure inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.5. The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as description certificate number and test type serial number. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 3.5. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 2.10 RFI MECHANICAL COMPLETION The RFI MECHANICAL COMPLETION tab helps you to check and update the RFI mechanical completion request, which is uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This RFI mechanical completion feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the material substitution report in the web application.     Note: When you click the RFI MECHANICAL COMPLETION tab in the dashboard, the RFI Mechanical Completion page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See “ TAKE OFFLINE DATA” for more details.) 1. Tap RFIMECHANICAL COMPLETION. See Fig 2.3. The RFI Mechanical Completion page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                Figure 2.10 RFI Mechanical Completion page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date or status details in the respective boxes given in the RFI Mechanical Completion page. The RFI Mechanical Completion page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result       None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.       Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.       Close – notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the RFI Mechanical Completion page.) To add your RFI Mechanical Completion inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.6. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 3.6. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 2.11 LOAD TEST The LOAD TEST tab helps you to check and update the load test request, which is uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This load test feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the load test report in the web application.       Note: When you click the LOAD TEST tab in the dashboard, the Load Test page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 2. Tap LOAD TEST.See Fig 2.11. The Load Test page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                                  Figure 2.11 Load Test page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the Load Test page. The Load Test page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result       None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.       Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.       Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the Load Test page.) To add your load test inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.7. The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, sub-contractor name, location, longitudinal and elevation details, frame number, work scope, and test performed. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 3.7. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 2.12 DIMENSION The DIMENSION tab helps you to check and update the dimension request, which is uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This dimension feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the load test report in the web application.       Note: When you click the DIMENSION tab in the dashboard, the Dimension page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap DIMENSION. See Fig 2.3. The Dimension page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                                Figure 3.8 Dimension page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the Dimension page. The Dimension page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result       None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.       Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.       Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the Dimension page.) To add your load test inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.8.       The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, sub-contractor name, location, longitudinal and elevation details, frame number, work scope, and test performed. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap  (Signature icon), See Fig 3.8. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 2.13 NDT REPORTS The NDT REPORTS tab allows you to check and update the NDT request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the NDT report that is uploaded in the web application.         There are four main types of NDT Reports: RT, UT, PT, and MT. Note: When you click the NDT REPORTS tab in the dashboard, the NDT Reports page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap NDT REPORTS. See Fig 2.13. The NDT Reports page opens with a list of reports for the corresponding types such as RT, UT, PT, and MT. You must select the respective type to view the relevant reports.                                                         Figure 2.13 NDT Reports page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.               2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, NDT request number or inspection date details in the respective boxes given in the NDT Reports page. The NDT Reports page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, NDT Request number, Inspection Date, Result, Signature, Attach, and Sync. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about each field in the Hydro Pressure page.) Tip: In the NDT Reports option, the Print field is not available. To add your inspection result for NDT RT report Tap RT. Once you find out the NDT RT report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.9. The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details.     Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, spool number, joint number, and joint length. 3. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. 4. If you want to add the new NDT RT report, tap    (Add icon). A new window opens.     In the Marker box, enter the marker number. In the Result box, tap and choose NA, Accepted, Rejected or Reshoot from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. 5. If you want to edit the existing NDT RT report, tap  (Edit icon). A new window opens.   In the Marker box, check and edit the marker number if you want. In the Result box, tap and choose NA, Accepted, Rejected or Reshoot from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. 6. If you want to delete any existing NDT RT report from a list, tap  (Delete icon).       You will receive the following notification: “Confirm delete?”. If you want to delete tab Yes, otherwise tab No. Tap Save. To add your signature for NDT RT Report Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap  (Signature icon), See Fig 3.9. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. To add your inspection result for NDT UT, PT, and MT reports Note: Follow the same procedure to add result for the NDT UT, PT or MT reports. Tap UT,PT or MT, See Fig 3.9. Once you find out the NDT UT, PT or MT report, where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 3.9. The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details.     Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, spool number, joint number, and joint length. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. In the Result box, tab and choose Accepted, Rejected or Cancelled from a drop-down list based on your inspection details. In the Remarks box, type your remarks if any. Tap Save. To add your signature for NDT UT, PT, and MT reports Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 3.9. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“.REPAIR VESSEL PROJECT 3.0 REPAIR VESSEL PROJECT The dashboard of the repair vessel project contains various tabs See Fig 2.4. The following sections explain you about the functionalities of each tab associated with the vessel project, Note: The following tabs in the dashboard of the repair vessel project have same functionalities of vessel project, so these tabs had already explained in the vessel project chapter. If you want to know more about each tab, click the respective tab. SET DEFAULT PROJECT TAKE OFFLINE DATA MILL CERTIFICATES TEST EQUIPMENT MIR MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION LOAD TEST DIMENSION RFI HYDRO PRESSURE 3.1 RFI FITUP GENERIC The RFI FITUP GENERIC tab helps you to check and approve the RFI fitup generic request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This RFI Fitup Generic feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the RFI fitup generic report that is uploaded in the web application.     Note: When you click the RFI FITUP GENERIC tab in the dashboard, the RFI Fitup Generic page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap RFI FITUP GENERIC.See Fig 2.4. The RFI Fitup Generic page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                                Figure 4.1 RFI Fitup Generic page  Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the RFI Fitup Genericpage. The RFI Fitup Generic page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result             None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.             Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.             Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the RFI Fitup Generic page.) Note: Each report has a corresponding check box, which is located on the left pane of the RFI Fitup Generic page. If you want to do sign together for more than one report, you must enable the respective check boxes. You must enable the respective check box of the reports. If you have enabled more than one check box,  (Signature icon) will appear in the top of the page. 2. Tap   (Signature icon). The signature page opens. 3. Tap your assigned role, enter your name, and do sign. To add your RFI fitup generic inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 4.1.     The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, sub-contractor name, location, longitudinal and elevation details, and frame number. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap  (Signature icon), See Fig 4.1. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 3.2 RFI WELDVI GENERIC The RFI WELDVI GENERIC tab allows you to check and approve the RFI weldVI generic request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This RFI WeldVI Generic feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the RFI WeldVI generic report that is uploaded in the web application.       Note: When you click the RFI WELDVI GENERIC tab in the dashboard, the RFI WeldVI Generic page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap RFI WELDVI GENERIC.See Fig 2.4. The RFI WeldVI Generic page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                         Figure 4.2 RFI WeldVI Generic page Tip: I. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the RFI WeldVI Genericpage. The RFI WeldVI Generic page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result       None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.       Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.       Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the RFI WeldVI Generic page.) Note: Each report has a corresponding check box, which is located on the left pane of the RFI WeldVI Generic page. If you want to do sign together for more than one report, you must enable the respective check boxes. You must enable the respective check box of the reports. If you have enabled more than one check box, (Signature icon) will appear in the top of the page.     Tap (Signature icon). The signature page opens. Tap your assigned role, enter your name, and do sign. To add your RFI WeldVI generic inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 4.2.     The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, sub-contractor name, location, longitudinal and elevation details, and frame number. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap  (Signature icon), See Fig 4.2. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 3.3 BACK GOUGING The BACK GOUGING tab helps you to check and update the back-gouging request, which is uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This back-gouging feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the back-gouging report in the web application.     Note: When you click the BACK GOUGING tab in the dashboard, the Back Gouging page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap BACK GOUGING.See Fig 2.4. The Back Gouging page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                                       Figure 4.3 Back Gouging page Tip: I. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the Back Gougingpage. The Back Gouging page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result        None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.        Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.        Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the Back Gouging page). Note: Each report has a corresponding check box, which is located on the left pane of the Back Gouging page. If you want to do sign together for more than one report, you must enable the respective check boxes. You must enable the respective check box of the reports. If you have enabled more than one check box,   (Signature icon) will appear in the top of the page.   2. Tap (Signature icon). The signature page opens. 3. Tap your assigned role, enter your name, and do sign. To add your back gouging inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 4.3. The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, sub-contractor name, location, longitudinal and elevation details, and frame number. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap  (Signature icon), See Fig 4.3. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 3.4 VACUUM TEST The VACUUM TEST tab helps you to check and update the vacuum test request, which is uploaded in the web application, by adding your inspection details. This vacuum test feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the vacuum test report in the web application.     Note: When you click the VACUUM TEST tab in the dashboard, the Vacuum Test page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) Tap VACUUM TEST.See Fig 2.4. The Vacuum Test page opens with a list of reports for the selected date.                                                                 Figure 4.4 Vacuum Test page Tip:1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.             2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the Vacuum Testpage. The Vacuum Test page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result      None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.      Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.      Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the Vacuum Test page). Note: Each report has a corresponding check box, which is located on the left pane of the Vacuum Test page. If you want to do sign together for more than one report, you must enable the respective check boxes. 1. You must enable the respective check box of the reports. If you have enabled more than one check box,  (Signature icon) will appear in the top of the page.     2. Tap (Signature icon). The signature page opens. 3. Tap your assigned role, enter your name, and do sign. To add your vacuum test inspection result Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 4.3. The Result page opens with a list of reports including the material details. Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, sub-contractor name, location, longitudinal and elevation details, and frame number. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 4.4. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 3.5 NDT INSPECTION GENERIC The NDT INSPECTION GENERIC tab allows you to check and update the NDT inspection generic request raised in the web application, by adding and updating your inspection details. This feature automatically updates and synchronizes your inspection details with the NDT inspection generic report uploaded in the web application.       There are four main types of NDT Inspection Generic: RT, UT, PT, and MT. Note: When you click the NDT INSPECTION GENERIC tab in the dashboard, the NDT Inspection Generic page displays a list of reports corresponding to today and previous day. However, if you want to view the reports for other dates, you must navigate to the TAKE OFFLINE DATA option. (See " TAKE OFFLINE DATA" for more details.) 1. Tap NDT INSPECTION GENERIC.See Fig 2.4. The NDT Inspection Generic page opens with a list of reports for the corresponding types such as RT, UT, PT, and MT. You must select the respective type to view the relevant reports.                                                               Figure 4.5 NDT Inspection Generic page Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.                2. If you want to filter one report among the list of reports, you must enter the report number, inspection date, location or status details in the respective boxes given in the NDT Inspection Genericpage. The NDT Inspection Generic page contains multiple fields such as Report Number, Inspection Date, Location, Status, Result, Signature, Attach, Print, and Sync. Status – shows the status of comment added in the Result       None- notifies that there are no comments in the Result page.       Open- notifies that there is a comment added in the Open comment box.       Close - notifies that there is a comment added in the Close comment box. (See the topic “The MIR page contains the following fields“ for more details about other fields in the NDT Inspection Generic page). Note: Each report has a corresponding check box, which is located on the left pane of the NDT Inspection Generic page. If you want to do sign together for more than one report, you must enable the respective check boxes. You must enable the respective check box of the reports. If you have enabled more than one check box, (Signature icon) will appear in the top of the page.   2. Tap (Signature icon). The signature page opens. 3. Tap your assigned role, enter your name, and do sign. To add your NDT RT, UT, PT, and MT inspection results 1. Tap RT, UT, PT orMT.  A list of reports is appeared for the selected type. 2. Once you find out the report where you need to add your inspection details, tap  (Result icon) to add your inspection results, See Fig 4.5. The Result page opens with a list of material details.     Each report shows material specifications such as drawing number, sub-contractor name, designation, welding position, weld type, cost centre, requisition name, thickness, location, longitudinal and elevation details, WPS, process, and welder names. 3. In the Remarksbox, type your remarks if any. 4. If you do not want to give any comments, enable None. 5. If you want to give an open comment, enable the Open option and enter your comment in the Open Comment 6. If you want to give a close comment, enable the Close option and enter your comment in the Close Comment 7. Tap Save. To add your signature Once you have saved your inspection results, the Result page automatically redirects you into the Signature page. Otherwise, tap (Signature icon), See Fig 4.5. To know how to add your signature, see the topic “To add your signature“. 3.6 SHOW ALL PENDING REPORTS The SHOW ALL PENDING REPORTS tab helps you to view all pending reports for the inspections those are not completed yet. By using this feature, you can check whether the QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner have submitted their inspection report.       This feature automatically updates the detail of all pending reports from the web application. You can view the pending reports in an offline mode also. Do the following steps to view the pending reports, 1. Tap SHOW ALL PENDING REPORTS.  See Fig 2.4. The Pending Reports page opens.                                                                 Figure 4.6 Pending Reports page  Tip: 1. You can configure displaying of the number of reports per page by selecting 10, 25, 50 or 100, accordingly.               2. If you want to filter one report among all reports, you must enter the report number or category details in the respective boxes given in the Pending Reportspage. The Pending Reports page contains the following fields: Report Number - shows the report number of the pending reports. Category - shows the category of the pending reports. QA, Subcon, Client, and Owner- each field appears with a check box to show whether the inspection has completed by the QA, Subcontractor, Client, and Owner, respectively. Note: If the check box of any field is enabled with the tick mark, it means that the respective person has completed the inspection. Not required - appears with a check box that helps you to decide about further inspection process. You can enable the check box if you have decided that no need of any further inspection process to be done by the QA, Subcontractor, Client or Owner. Tap the Category box, and select the category from a drop-down list. The Pending Reports page shows a list of pending reports corresponding to the selected category. You can check the status of the report. If want to end up the inspection process, enable the check box in the Not required Tap Save. Mobile App - Ship Structural 1.User Management 1.1 Downloading cuteQM app To use the cuteQM app you must first download it from the Play Store. Open the Play Store and search for “cuteQM”. Download and install the cuteQM app on your mobile phone. After installation, open the cuteQM You are ready to go! 1.2 Log in After installation, when you open the cuteQM app you may be asked to Login. Follow the steps to successfully log into your account.             1. Before enter your user id and password, tap  (Settings icon) and enter the app URL http://www.cuteqm.com/cuteQMPTUSPAPI. 2. Tap Save. 3. Enter your user id and password in the allocated fields. 4. Tap Log in to complete the process. The home screen of the cuteQM app is appeared. 1.3 Home screen of cuteQM app             Module – helps to select the module. Select ship structural module Project – Helps to select the project. select the project.                                                                                        Click Save button to go to the menu screen. (show/hide icon) helps to show/hide the user id information that is displayed in the right panel of the home screen. if you touch this icon the information appears on, if you touch this icon again the information goes off. Clear Storage - clears all data in this app. Tap the Clear Storage option to delete all the data. Sync Data- synchronizes your inspection results with the respective reports in the web application. If your inspection results are not automatically synchronized with the web application, tap the Sync Data option for manual synchronization. Log out - To log out from the cuteQM app. 2.Hull RFI 2.1.RFI Hull Fabrication 2.1.1.RFI Fabrication Add Click RFI Fabrication Add menu  .This menu helps to add the hull parts for the RFI fabrication request.                            Select partcode in the dropdown list. Select the appropriate hull part Enter description. Click Save icon. Hull Fabrication request added successfully. 2.1.2.RFI Fabrication Create       Click RFI fabrication create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added hull parts. Select the part no from dropdown list Select the fitup toggle(Defaultly selected) Select the hull part Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.  Click Create button. RFI Fabrication request created successfully. 2.1.3.RFI Fabrication Approve         Click RFI Fabrication approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Hull Fabrication request approved successfully. 2.1.4.RFI Fabrication Inspection Click RFI Fabrication menu in Inspection. Click button .It will redirected to new page Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                          RFI Fabrication inspection approved successfully. 2.2.RFI Hull Assembly 2.2.1.RFI Assembly Add Click RFI Assembly Add menu  .This menu helps to add the hull parts and frames for the RFI Assembly request.              Select partcode in the dropdown list. Select the appropriate hull part Enter description. Click Save icon.    Hull Assembly request added successfully. 2.2.2.RFI Assembly Create Click RFI Assembly create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added hull parts and frames.            Select the part no from dropdown list Select the fitup toggle(Defaultly selected) Select the hull part Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.                                                                        7.Click Create button RFI Assembly request created successfully. 2.2.3.RFI Assembly Approve     Click RFI Assembly approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button          Hull Assembly request approved successfully. 2.2.4.RFI Assembly Inspection Click RFI Assembly menu in Inspection.          Click button .It will redirected to new page             Result will be defaultly loaded as accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                       RFI Assembly inspection approved successfully. 2.3.RFI Hull Erection 2.3.1.RFI Hull Erection Add Click RFI Hull Erection Add menu  .This menu helps to add the hull parts and frames for the RFI Erection request.          Select partcode in the dropdown list. Select the appropriate hull part Enter description. Click Save icon.    Hull Erection request added successfully. 2.3.2.RFI Erection Create Click RFI Assembly create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added hull parts and frames.            Select the part no from dropdown list Select the fitup toggle(Defaultly selected) Select the hull part Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.                                                      7.Click Create button RFI Erection request created successfully. 2.3.3.RFI Erection Approve Click RFI Erection approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button    Hull Erection request approved successfully. 2.3.4.RFI Erection Inspection Click RFI Assembly menu in Inspection.        Click button .It will redirected to new page             Result will be defaultly loaded as accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                       RFI Erection inspection approved successfully. 2.4.RFI Other Inspection 2.4.1.RFI Other inspection Add Click RFI other inspection Add menu  .This menu helps to add the request for Tank test,Hose test and Vaccum test. Select the test type as required (Tank test,Hose test and Vaccum test) Select partcode in the dropdown list. Select the appropriate hull part Enter description. Click Save icon.    Hull other inspection request added successfully. 2.4.2.RFI Other inspection Create   Click RFI Other inspection create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added hull parts .    Select the type of the test toggle button as required. Select the required hull part toggle Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.                                                    7.Click Create button RFI Other inspection request created successfully. 2.4.3.RFI Other inspection Approve Click RFI Other inspection approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button    Hull Other inspection request approved successfully. 2.4.4.RFI Other Inspection Click RFI Other inspection menu in Inspection.        Click button .It will redirected to new page         Result will be defaultly loaded as accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                       RFI Other inspection approved successfully. 3.Outfitting RFI 3.1.RFI Fabrication 3.1.1.RFI Fabrication Add Click RFI Fabrication Add menu  .This menu helps to add the outfitting work for the RFI fabrication request.                  Select Drawing no in the dropdown list. Select the appropriate outfitting drawing Enter description. Click Save icon. Outfitting Fabrication request added successfully. 3.1.2.RFI Fabrication Create   Click RFI fabrication create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added outfitting parts. Select the drawing no from dropdown list Select the fitup toggle(Defaultly selected) Select the outfitting part Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.  Click Create button. RFI Fabrication request created successfully. 3.1.3.RFI Fabrication Approve       Click RFI Fabrication approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Outfitting Fabrication request approved successfully. 3.1.4.RFI Fabrication Inspection Click RFI Fabrication menu in Inspection. Click button .It will redirected to new page     Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Fabrication inspection approved successfully. 3.2.RFI Installation 3.2.1.RFI Installation Add         Click RFI Installation Add menu .This menu helps to add the outfitting work for the RFI installation request.                    Select Drawing no in the dropdown list. Select the appropriate outfitting drawing toggle Enter description. Click Save icon. Outfitting Installation request added successfully. 3.2.2.RFI Installation Create     Click RFI Installation create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added outfitting parts. Select the drawing no from dropdown list Select the fitup toggle(Defaultly selected) Select the outfitting part toggle button Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.  Click Create button. RFI Installation request created successfully. 3.2.3.RFI Installation Approve   Click RFI Installation approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Outfitting Installation request approved successfully. 3.2.4.RFI Installation Inspection Click RFI Installation menu in Inspection. Click button .It will redirected to new page         Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Installation inspection approved successfully. 4.Painting RFI 4.1. RFI Coat 4.1.1.RFI Coat Add     Click RFI  Coat Add menu  .This menu helps to add the painting coat work for the RFI coat request.                    Select Painting name in the dropdown list. Select the appropriate painting type toggle button (Blasting,coat1,coat2....) Enter description. Enter painting area Click Save icon. Painting coat RFI request added successfully. 3.1.2.RFI Coat Create     Click RFI Coat create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added painting names. Select the painting name from dropdown list Select the painting tyep toggle(Defaultly blasting  selected) Select the painting name Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description. 7.Click Create button. RFI Coat request created successfully. 3.1.3.RFI Coat Approve     Click RFI Coat approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Select the paint type toggle(Defaultly blasting selected) Click Approve button. RFI Coat request approved successfully. 3.1.4.RFI Coat Inspection Click RFI Coat menu in Inspection. Click button .It will redirected to new page vvvv Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Coat inspection approved successfully. Mobile App - Electrical and Instrumentation 1.User Management 1.1 Downloading cuteQM app To use the cuteQM app you must first download it from the Play Store. Open the Play Store and search for “cuteQM”. Download and install the cuteQM app on your mobile phone. After installation, open the cuteQM You are ready to go! 1.2 Log in After installation, when you open the cuteQM app you may be asked to Login. Follow the steps to successfully log into your account.           1. Before enter your user id and password, tap (Settings icon) and enter the app URL            http://www.cuteqm.com/cuteQMPTUSPAPI. 2. Tap Save. 3. Enter your user id and password in the allocated fields. 4. Tap Log in to complete the process. The home screen of the cuteQM app is appeared. 1.3 Home screen of cuteQM app         Module – helps to select the module. Select Electrical module Project – Helps to select the project. select the project.                                                                                        Click Save button to go to the menu screen. (show/hide icon) helps to show/hide the user id information that is displayed in the right panel of the home screen. if you touch this icon the information appears on, if you touch this icon again the information goes off. Clear Storage - clears all data in this app. Tap the Clear Storage option to delete all the data. Sync Data- synchronizes your inspection results with the respective reports in the web application. If your inspection results are not automatically synchronized with the web application, tap the Sync Data option for manual synchronization. Log out - To log out from the cuteQM app. 2. RFI 2.1. Glanding & Termination RFI 2.1.1.RFI Glanding Add       Click RFI Glanding Add menu  .This menu helps to add the cables for the RFI Glanding request.                Select cable no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate cable Enter L1,L2,L3..Values Enter description. Enter Continuity Click Save icon. Glanding request added successfully. 2.1.2.RFI Glanding Create       Click RFI Glanding  create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added cables. Select the cable no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required cable Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor ,description & calibration details. 6. Click Create button. RFI Glanding request created successfully. 2.1.3.RFI Glanding Approve         Click RFI Glanding approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Glanding request approved successfully. 2.1.4.RFI Glanding Inspection 1.Click RFI Glanding menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page       Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Glanding inspection approved successfully. 2.2. Fitup/Visual RFI 2.2.1.RFI Fitup/Visual Add   Click RFI Fitup/visual Add menu  .This menu helps to add the compartments for the RFI  Fitup/visual request.                Select compartment no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON Fitup or weld as required Toggle ON the appropriate compartment Enter description. Enter location. Click Save icon. Fitup/visual request added successfully. 2.2.2.RFI  Fitup/Visual Create     Click RFI  Fitup/visual  create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added compartments. Select the compartment no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required comprtment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.             6. Click Create button. RFI  Fitup/visual request created successfully. 2.2.3.RFI  Fitup/Visual Approve   Click RFI  Fitup/visual approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Fitup/visual request approved successfully. 2.2.4.RFI  Fitup/Visual Inspection 1.Click RFI  Fitup/visual menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page         Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI  Fitup/visual inspection approved successfully. 2.3. Cable dressing & Banding RFI 2.3.1.Cable dressing Add     Click RFI Cable dressing Add menu  .This menu helps to add the compartments for the RFI cable dressing request.        Select compartment no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate compartment Enter description. Click Save icon. Cable dressing & Banding request added successfully. 2.3.2.RFI  Cable dressing Create     Click RFI  Cable dressing  create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added compartments. Select the compartment no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required comprtment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.             6. Click Create button. RFI  Cable dressing & Banding request created successfully. 2.3.3.RFI  Cable dressing Approve     Click RFI  Cable dressing approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Cable dressing & Banding request approved successfully. 2.3.4.RFI  Cable dressing & Banding Inspection 1.Click RFI  Cable dressing menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page               Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI  Cable dressing & Banding inspection approved successfully. 2.4. Torque Tightening RFI 2.4.1.RFI Torque Add       Click RFI Torque Add menu  .This menu helps to add the equipments for the RFI Torque request.                Select equipment location in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate equipment Enter description. Click Save icon. Torque RFI request added successfully. 2.4.2.RFI Torque Create     Click RFI Torque  create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added equipments. Select the equipment location  from dropdown list Toggle ON the required equipment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor ,description & calibration details. 6. Click Create button. RFI Torque  request created successfully. 2.4.3.RFI Torque  Approve     Click RFI Torque approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Torque RFI request approved successfully. 2.4.4.RFI Torque Inspection 1.Click RFI Torque  menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page       Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Torque  inspection approved successfully. 2.5. Compound filling/MCT Packing RFI 2.5.1.Compound filling Add           Click RFI Compound filling Add menu  .This menu helps to add the compartments for the RFI Compound filling request.  Select compartment no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate compartment Enter description. Click Save icon. Compound filling request added successfully. 2.5.2.RFI Compound filling Create       Click RFI  Compound filling create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added compartments. Select the compartment no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required comprtment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.     6. Click Create button. RFI  Compound filling request created successfully. 2.5.3.RFI  Compound filling Approve         Click RFI  Compound filling approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Compound Filling /MCT Packing RFI request approved successfully. 2.5.4.RFI Compound Filling /MCT Packing Inspection 1.Click RFI  Cable dressing menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page     Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI  Compound Filling /MCT Packing inspection approved successfully. 2.6. Equipment Megger Test RFI 2.6.1.RFI Megger Add     Click RFI Torque Add menu  .This menu helps to add the equipments for the RFI megger request.                Select equipment location in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate equipment Enter description. Enter L1,L2,L3 Values Enter room temperature Enter Equipment temperature Click Save icon. RFI Megger request added successfully. 2.6.2.RFI Megger Create       Click RFI Megger  create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added equipments. Select the equipment location  from dropdown list Toggle ON the required equipment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor ,description & calibration details. 6. Click Create button. RFI Megger request created successfully. 2.6.3.RFI Megger  Approve       Click RFI  Megger approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Equipment megger RFI request approved successfully. 2.6.4.RFI Megger Inspection 1.Click RFI Megger menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page     Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter L1,L2,L3,Room temperature & Equipment temperature values Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Equipment megger test inspection approved successfully. Mobile App - Mechanical 1.User Management 1.1 Downloading cuteQM app To use the cuteQM app you must first download it from the Play Store. Open the Play Store and search for “cuteQM”. Download and install the cuteQM app on your mobile phone. After installation, open the cuteQM You are ready to go! 1.2 Log in After installation, when you open the cuteQM app you may be asked to Login. Follow the steps to successfully log into your account.           1. Before enter your user id and password, tap (Settings icon) and enter the app URL http://www.cuteqm.com/cuteQMPTUSPAPI. 2. Tap Save. 3. Enter your user id and password in the allocated fields. 4. Tap Log in to complete the process. The home screen of the cuteQM app is appeared. 1.3 Home screen of cuteQM app         Module – helps to select the module. Select Mechanical module Project – Helps to select the project. select the project.                                                                                        Click Save button to go to the menu screen. (show/hide icon) helps to show/hide the user id information that is displayed in the right panel of the home screen. if you touch this icon the information appears on, if you touch this icon again the information goes off. Clear Storage - clears all data in this app. Tap the Clear Storage option to delete all the data. Sync Data- synchronizes your inspection results with the respective reports in the web application. If your inspection results are not automatically synchronized with the web application, tap the Sync Data option for manual synchronization. Log out - To log out from the cuteQM app. 2. RFI 2.1. Pre-Alignment RFI 2.1.1.RFI Pre-Alignment Add     Click RFI Pre alignment Add menu  .This menu helps to add theequipments for the RFI pre alignment request.              Select Equipment no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate Equipment Enter description. Click Save icon. Pre alignment request added successfully. 2.1.2.RFI Pre alignment Create       Click RFI Pre alignment  create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added equipments. Select the equipment no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required equipment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description. 6. Click Create button. RFI Pre alignment request created successfully. 2.1.3.RFI Pre alignment Approve     Click RFI Pre alignment approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Pre alignment request approved successfully. 2.1.4.RFI Pre Alignment Inspection 1.Click RFI Pre alignment menu in Inspection.     2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page     Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Pre alignment inspection approved successfully. 2.2. Alignment RFI 2.2.1.RFI Alignment Add   Click RFI Alignment Add menu  .This menu helps to add theequipments for the RFI  alignment request.                Select Equipment no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate Equipment Enter description. Click Save icon. Alignment request added successfully. 2.2.2.RFI Alignment Create           Click RFI Alignment  create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added equipments. Select the equipment no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required equipment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.           6. Click Create button. RFI  Alignment request created successfully. 2.2.3.RFI Alignment Approve     Click RFI Alignment approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Alignment request approved successfully. 2.2.4.RFI Alignment Inspection 1.Click RFI Alignment menu in Inspection.       2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page       Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Alignment inspection approved successfully. 2.3. Machining RFI 2.3.1.RFI Machining Add       Click RFI Machining Add menu  .This menu helps to add the equipments for the RFI  Machining request.                Select Equipment no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate Equipment Enter description. Click Save icon. Machining RFI request added successfully. 2.3.2.RFI Machining Create           Click RFI Machining create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added equipments. Select the equipment no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required equipment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description. 6. Click Create button. RFI  Maching request created successfully. 2.3.3.RFI Machining Approve       Click RFI Machining approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Machining RFI request approved successfully. 2.3.4.RFI Machining Inspection 1.Click RFI Machining menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page       Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Machining inspection approved successfully. 2.4. Torque Tightening RFI 2.4.1.RFI Torque Tightening Add       Click RFI Torque Add menu  .This menu helps to add the equipments for the RFI  Torque request.                Select Equipment no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate Equipment Enter description. Click Save icon. Torque RFI request added successfully. 2.4.2.RFI Torque Create     Click RFI Torque create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added equipments. Select the equipment no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required equipment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.               6. Click Create button. RFI  Torque request created successfully. 2.4.3.RFI Torque Approve       Click RFI Torque approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Torque RFI request approved successfully. 2.4.4.RFI Torque Inspection 1.Click RFI Torque menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page         Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Torque inspection approved successfully. 2.5. Visual RFI 2.5.1.RFI Visual  Add     Click RFI Visual Add menu  .This menu helps to add the equipments for the RFI visual request.                Select Equipment no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate Equipment Enter description. Click Save icon. Visual RFI request added successfully. 2.5.2.RFI Visual Create   Click RFI Visual create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added equipments. Select the equipment no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required equipment Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description.         6. Click Create button. RFI  Visual request created successfully. 2.5.3.RFI Visual Approve     Click RFI Torque approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Visual RFI request approved successfully. 2.5.4.RFI Visual Inspection 1.Click RFI Visual menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page       Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI Visual inspection approved successfully. Mobile App - HVAC 1.User Management 1.1 Downloading cuteQM app To use the cuteQM app you must first download it from the Play Store. Open the Play Store and search for “cuteQM”. Download and install the cuteQM app on your mobile phone. After installation, open the cuteQM You are ready to go! 1.2 Log in After installation, when you open the cuteQM app you may be asked to Login. Follow the steps to successfully log into your account.           1. Before enter your user id and password, tap (Settings icon) and enter the app URL http://www.cuteqm.com/cuteQMPTUSPAPI. 2. Tap Save. 3. Enter your user id and password in the allocated fields. 4. Tap Log in to complete the process. The home screen of the cuteQM app is appeared. 1.3 Home screen of cuteQM app         Module – helps to select the module. Select HVAC module Project – Helps to select the project. select the project.                                                                                        Click Save button to go to the menu screen. (show/hide icon) helps to show/hide the user id information that is displayed in the right panel of the home screen. if you touch this icon the information appears on, if you touch this icon again the information goes off. Clear Storage - clears all data in this app. Tap the Clear Storage option to delete all the data. Sync Data- synchronizes your inspection results with the respective reports in the web application. If your inspection results are not automatically synchronized with the web application, tap the Sync Data option for manual synchronization. Log out - To log out from the cuteQM app. 2. RFI 2.1.RFI Fitup Inspection 2.1.1.RFI Fitup Add   Click RFI Fitup Add menu  .This menu helps to add the items for the RFI Fitup request.  Select item no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate item Enter description. Click Save icon. Fitup request added successfully. 2.1.2.RFI Fitup Create     Click RFI  Fitup create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added items. Select the item no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required item Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description. 6. Click Create button. RFI  Fitup request created successfully. 2.1.3.RFI  Fitup Approve       Click RFI  Fitup approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Fitup RFI request approved successfully. 2.1.4.RFI Fitup Inspection 1.Click RFI  Fitup menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page     Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Description Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI  Fitup inspection approved successfully. 2.1.RFI Visual Inspection 2.1.1.RFI Visual Add     Click RFI Visual Add menu  .This menu helps to add the items for the RFI Visual request.  Select item no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate item Enter description. Click Save icon. Visual request added successfully. 2.1.2.RFI Visual Create   Click RFI  Fitup create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added items. Select the item no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required item Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description. 6. Click Create button. RFI  Visual request created successfully. 2.1.3.RFI Visual Approve     Click RFI  Fitup approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Visual RFI request approved successfully. 2.2.4.RFI Visual Inspection 1.Click RFI  Visual menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page     Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI  Visual inspection approved successfully. 2.3.Other RFI Inspection 2.3.1.RFI OtherAdd     Click RFI Other Add menu  .This menu helps to add the items for the RFI Other request.  Select item no in the dropdown list. Toggle ON the appropriate item Enter description. Click Save icon. Other RFI request added successfully. 2.3.2.RFI Other Create     Click RFI  other create menu.This menu helps to create RFI requests from added items. Select the item no from dropdown list Toggle ON the required item Click Create button at the top After create button clicked,a popup will open to key in inspection date,subcontractor and description. 6. Click Create button. Other RFI request created successfully. 2.3.3.RFI  Other Approve   Click RFI  Orher approve menu Select the RFI request no from dropdown list Click Approve button. Other RFI request approved successfully. 2.3.4.RFI Other Inspection 1.Click RFI  Fitup menu in Inspection. 2.Click  button .It will redirected to new page   Result will be defaultly accepted,If need to reject,you can change the dropdown as Reject Enter Remarks Click Save button.                                                                                                                                                                        RFI  Other inspection approved successfully. Bill Of Material Extraction Bill Of Material Extraction AutoXtract Bill of Material The BOM can be extracted from drawing PDF files and it can be converted to Excel sheets. Login to the portal Upon login, click on Upload menu Choose the Project on the Top, Locate the PDF copy of the drawings. It contains the BOM as below Drag and drop your files into the folder. At a time 10 files is currently enforced. It will start to process and once processed they will disappear from list. The extracted data will be available in BOM List menu page. You can navigate to any page while the process is going on as it happens in the background. The extracted data is available and searchable and ready to export to Excel. Click Export. The file contains all the data. We can click on View All button in extract page to see the status of all uploaded drawings. If there are any errors we can review and reconfigure extraction. Note: The BOM format depends on the project and hence to add a new project, contact us by sending two sample PDF files. License This tool is licensed separately. Onboarding $1000.00 Per Drawing $5.00